COPIER BASICS SERIES

General(Copier Color)
BASICS SERIES

Apr 21 2005
 Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.

Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When
changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need
arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition
of this manual.

The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.

Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.

Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.

COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan

Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
 Introduction

Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:

Symbol Description

Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.

Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

 Introduction

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and
mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the
arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery
unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to
indicate "Low".(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*"
indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the
operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to
the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.

The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and
major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service
Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
 Contents

Contents

Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Recording Methods ....................................................................................................................................1- 1
1.1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.1.1.1 Recording Methods.................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 1
1.1.2 Silver Chloride Method ............................................................................................................................................ 1- 1
1.1.2.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.1.2.2 Recording Processes............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.1.2.3 Features................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.1.2.4 Application to OA Equipment ................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.1.3 Non_Silver Chloride Method.................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.1.3.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.1.3.2 Recording Processes............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.1.3.3 Bubble Jet Method ................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 3
1.2 Image Formation ........................................................................................................................................1- 4
1.2.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 4
1.2.1.1 Image Formation Processes (black-and-white copier)............................................................................................................. 1- 4
1.2.1.2 Image Formation in a Color Copier.......................................................................................................................................... 1- 4
1.2.2 Static Image Formation ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 6
1.2.2.1 Static Image Formation Block .................................................................................................................................................. 1- 6
1.2.3 Pre-Exposure........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.2.3.1 Pre-Exposure ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.2.4 Primary Charging..................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.2.4.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.2.4.2 Roller Charging Method ........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.2.4.3 Corona Charging Method......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.2.5 Exposure ................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 8
1.2.5.1 Exposure.................................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 8
1.2.6 Development ........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.2.6.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.2.6.2 Construction of the Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.2.6.3 Developing Bias ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 9
1.2.6.4 Developing Method ................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 10
1.2.7 Attraction ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.2.7.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.2.7.2 Corona Attraction ................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.2.7.3 Brush Attraction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.2.7.4 Attraction to the Transfer Belt ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 11
1.2.8 Pre-Transfer Charging........................................................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.2.8.1 Pre-Transfer Charging ........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.2.9 Transfer ................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 12
1.2.9.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 12
1.2.9.2 Transfer by a Roller ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 12
1.2.9.3 Transfer by a Corona ............................................................................................................................................................. 1- 12
1.2.9.4 Transfer by a Brush ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 13
1.2.9.5 Transfer by a Transfer Belt and a Transfer Blade.................................................................................................................. 1- 14
1.2.9.6 Transfer by an Intermediate Transfer Drum........................................................................................................................... 1- 14
1.2.10 Separation ........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 16
1.2.10.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 16
1.2.10.2 Curvature Separation ........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 16
1.2.10.3 Static Separation.................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 17
1.2.10.4 Separation Claw and Separation Push-Up Roll ................................................................................................................... 1- 17
1.2.11 Fixing ................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 17
1.2.11.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 17
1.2.11.2 SURF Method ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 18
 Contents

1.2.11.3 Roller Method....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 18

1.2.12 Drum Cleaning .....................................................................................................................................................1- 19
1.2.12.1 Drum Cleaning ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 19
1.3 Other Process Mechanisms ..................................................................................................................... 1- 21
1.3.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................1- 21
1.3.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 21
1.3.2 Blank Exposure......................................................................................................................................................1- 21
1.3.2.1 Blank Exposure...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 21
1.3.3 Drum Separation Claws .........................................................................................................................................1- 21
1.3.3.1 Drum Separation Claws ......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 21
1.3.4 Eliminating Static Electricity in Delivery .................................................................................................................1- 21
1.3.4.1 Eliminating Static Electricity in Delivery ................................................................................................................................. 1- 21
1.3.5 Roller Electrode .....................................................................................................................................................1- 22
1.3.5.1 Roller Electrode ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.3.6 Ozone Filter ...........................................................................................................................................................1- 22
1.3.6.1 Ozone Filter ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.3.7 Cleaning of the Primary .........................................................................................................................................1- 22
1.3.7.1 Cleaning of the Primary Charging Roller ............................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.3.8 Static Eliminating Assembly...................................................................................................................................1- 23
1.3.8.1 Static Eliminating Assembly................................................................................................................................................... 1- 23
1.3.9 Pre-Cleaning Charging ..........................................................................................................................................1- 23
1.3.9.1 Pre-Cleaning Charging Assembly.......................................................................................................................................... 1- 23
1.3.10 Post-Cleaning Charging .......................................................................................................................................1- 24
1.3.10.1 Post-Cleaning Charging Assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 1- 24
1.3.11 Transfer Drum Cleaning.......................................................................................................................................1- 24
1.3.11.1 Transfer Drum Cleaning....................................................................................................................................................... 1- 24
1.3.12 Cleaning the IntermediateTransfer Drum (ITD)....................................................................................................1- 25
1.3.12.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 25
1.3.12.2 Charging by an ITD Cleaning Roller .................................................................................................................................... 1- 25
1.3.12.3 Cleaning the Intermediate Transfer Drum (ITD)................................................................................................................... 1- 25
1.3.13 Pre-Primary Charging ..........................................................................................................................................1- 26
1.3.13.1 Pre-Primary Charging .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 26
1.3.14 Pre-Fixing Charging .............................................................................................................................................1- 26
1.3.14.1 Pre-Fixing Charging ............................................................................................................................................................. 1- 26
1.3.15 Cleaning the Transfer Belt ...................................................................................................................................1- 27
1.3.15.1 Cleaning the Transfer Belt ................................................................................................................................................... 1- 27
1.3.16 Grounding Roller ..................................................................................................................................................1- 27
1.3.16.1 Grounding Roller .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 27
1.4 Limitations in Processes in Color Copies ................................................................................................. 1- 28
1.4.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................1- 28
1.4.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 28
1.4.2 Physical Limitations ...............................................................................................................................................1- 28
1.4.2.1 Physical Limitations ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 28
1.4.2.2 Spectral Reflectance of Toner ............................................................................................................................................... 1- 28
1.4.2.3 Gradation in Dry-Type Electrophotography ........................................................................................................................... 1- 28
1.5 Basic Sequence of Operations ................................................................................................................. 1- 29
1.5.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................1- 29
1.5.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 29
1.6 Controlling the Main Motor ....................................................................................................................... 1- 31
1.6.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................1- 31
1.7 Types of Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 1- 32
1.7.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................1- 32
1.7.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 32
1.7.2 Functions of Accessories .......................................................................................................................................1- 32
1.7.2.1 Functions of Accessories ....................................................................................................................................................... 1- 32
1.7.3 Power Supply for Accessories ...............................................................................................................................1- 33
1.7.3.1 Power Supply for Accessories ............................................................................................................................................... 1- 33
1.7.4 Communication with the Host Copier.....................................................................................................................1- 34
 Contents

1.7.4.1 Communication with the Host Copier..................................................................................................................................... 1- 34

1.8 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................1- 36
1.8.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 36
1.9 Mechanisms of a Controller ......................................................................................................................1- 37
1.9.1 Printer Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 1- 37
1.9.1.1 Printer Functions.................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 37
1.9.2 Scanner Functions................................................................................................................................................. 1- 37
1.9.2.1 Scanner Functions ................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 37
1.9.3 Fax Functions ........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 37
1.9.3.1 Fax Functions ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 37
1.10 Line-Up of Products ................................................................................................................................1- 39
1.10.1 Line-Up of Black-and-White Copier Controllers................................................................................................... 1- 39
1.10.1.1 Line-Up of Black-and-White Copier Controllers .................................................................................................................. 1- 39
1.10.2 Line-Up of Controllers for Color Copiers.............................................................................................................. 1- 39
1.10.2.1 Line-Up of Controllers for Color Copiers .............................................................................................................................. 1- 39

Chapter 2 FUNDAMENTALS
2.1 Outline of Electrostatographic Technology .................................................................................................2- 1
2.1.1 Principles of Image Formation................................................................................................................................. 2- 1
2.1.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.1.2 Component Parts..................................................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.1.2.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.1.2.2 Photosensitive Drum................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 1
2.1.2.3 Electrostatographic Process .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.1.3 Exposure ................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 3
2.1.3.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 3
2.1.3.2 Principles ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 4
2.1.4 Development ........................................................................................................................................................... 2- 4
2.1.4.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 4
2.1.4.2 Non-Contact Development....................................................................................................................................................... 2- 5
2.1.4.3 P/B Development ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 5
2.1.5 Developer ................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 5
2.1.5.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 5
2.1.5.2 Component Development ........................................................................................................................................................ 2- 6
2.1.5.3 1-Component Developer.......................................................................................................................................................... 2- 6
2.1.6 Transfer ................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 7
2.1.6.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 7
2.1.6.2 Mechanisms............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 7
2.1.7 Fixing ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.1.7.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.1.7.2 Mechanisms............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 9
2.1.8 Drum Cleaning......................................................................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.1.8.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.1.8.2 Mechanism............................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.1.9 Drum Cartridge ...................................................................................................................................................... 2- 10
2.1.9.1 Background of R&D and Product Planning............................................................................................................................ 2- 10
2.1.9.2 Outline of the Drum Cartridge ................................................................................................................................................ 2- 10
2.2 Outline of Digital Technology....................................................................................................................2- 11
2.2.1 Differences from Analog Technology .................................................................................................................... 2- 11
2.2.1.1 Definitions .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 11
2.2.1.2 Sample Applications .............................................................................................................................................................. 2- 11
2.2.1.3 Digital and Analog Samples as Found in a Copier ................................................................................................................ 2- 11
2.2.1.4 Differences in Construction in the Electrostatographic Method ............................................................................................. 2- 11
2.2.1.5 Analog and Digital Images in Copiers.................................................................................................................................... 2- 13
2.2.1.6 Basic Construction of a Digital Image .................................................................................................................................... 2- 13
2.2.2 Outline of Image Processing Technology.............................................................................................................. 2- 13
2.2.2.1 Definition ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 13
2.2.2.2 Image Processing in a Copier................................................................................................................................................ 2- 13
 Contents

2.2.3 Outline of Color Technology ..................................................................................................................................2- 16

2.2.3.1 Digital Concepts in Color Technology.................................................................................................................................... 2- 16
2.2.3.2 Principles of the Digital Color Copier ..................................................................................................................................... 2- 17
2.2.3.3 Forming an Image in the Digital Color Copie ......................................................................................................................... 2- 19
2.3 Outline of Bubble Jet Technology ............................................................................................................ 2- 27
2.3.1 Principles of Image Formation ...............................................................................................................................2- 27
2.3.1.1 BJ Head ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 27
2.3.1.2 Characteristics of the BJ Method ........................................................................................................................................... 2- 28
2.3.2 Outline of BJ Color Technology .............................................................................................................................2- 28
2.3.2.1 Recording Technology ........................................................................................................................................................... 2- 28
2.3.2.2 Characteristics of BJ Recording............................................................................................................................................. 2- 28
2.3.3 Regulations and Laws............................................................................................................................................2- 28
2.3.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 28
2.3.3.2 Items Prohibited for Copying by Law ..................................................................................................................................... 2- 28
2.3.3.3 Items Restricted for Copying.................................................................................................................................................. 2- 29
2.4 Options ..................................................................................................................................................... 2- 30
2.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................2- 30
2.4.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 30
2.4.2 Original Handling Devices......................................................................................................................................2- 30
2.4.2.1 Original Handling Devices...................................................................................................................................................... 2- 30
2.4.3 Pick-Up Handling Devices .....................................................................................................................................2- 30
2.4.3.1 Pick-Up Handling Devices ..................................................................................................................................................... 2- 30
2.4.4 Delivery Handling Devices .....................................................................................................................................2- 30
2.4.4.1 Delivery Handling Devices ..................................................................................................................................................... 2- 30
2.5 Image Input Options ................................................................................................................................. 2- 31
2.5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................2- 31
2.5.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 31
2.5.2 Analog Input Devices .............................................................................................................................................2- 31
2.5.2.1 Film Projector......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 31
2.5.3 Digital Input Devices ..............................................................................................................................................2- 31
2.5.3.1 Film Scanner.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 31
2.6 Controller Devices .................................................................................................................................... 2- 32
2.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................2- 32
2.6.1.1 ntroduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 32
2.6.2 Black-and-White Digital Controller .........................................................................................................................2- 32
2.6.2.1 Black-and-White Digital Controller ......................................................................................................................................... 2- 32
2.6.3 Color Digital Controller...........................................................................................................................................2- 32
2.6.3.1 Color Digital Controller........................................................................................................................................................... 2- 32
2.7 Basics of Electricity .................................................................................................................................. 2- 34
2.7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................2- 34
2.7.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 34
2.7.2 Basics of Electricity ................................................................................................................................................2- 34
2.7.2.1 Voltage and Current............................................................................................................................................................... 2- 34
2.7.2.2 Direct Current and Alternating Current .................................................................................................................................. 2- 35
2.7.3 Typical Sensors .....................................................................................................................................................2- 39
2.7.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 39
2.7.3.2 Detecting Overcurrent............................................................................................................................................................ 2- 39
2.7.3.3 Detecting the Intensity of Light............................................................................................................................................... 2- 40
2.7.3.4 Detecting Positions ................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 41
2.7.3.5 Detecting Temperature .......................................................................................................................................................... 2- 45
2.7.3.6 Detecting Humidity................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 46
2.7.4 Commonly Used Electrical Parts ...........................................................................................................................2- 47
2.7.4.1 Solenoids ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 47
2.7.4.2 Electromagnetic Clutches ...................................................................................................................................................... 2- 47
2.7.4.3 Counter .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 48
2.7.4.4 Stepping Motor (pulse motor) ................................................................................................................................................ 2- 48
2.7.4.5 Ultrasonic Motor..................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 49
2.7.4.6 Halogen Lamp........................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 50
2.7.4.7 Fluorescent Lamps ................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 51
 Contents

2.7.4.8 Relays .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 52

2.7.4.9 SSR (Solid State Relay)......................................................................................................................................................... 2- 53
2.7.4.10 Varistors ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 55
2.7.4.11 CPU (Central Processing Unit) ............................................................................................................................................ 2- 56
2.7.4.12 Memory ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 56
2.7.4.13 Table of Symbols ................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 59

Chapter 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3.1 Outline of the Exposure System .................................................................................................................3- 1
3.1.1 Functional Construction........................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.1.1 Digital Copier ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.1.2 Analog Copier .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio ........................................................................................................................... 3- 2
3.1.2.1 Digital Copier ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 2
3.1.2.2 Analog Copier .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 2
3.2 Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp ..........................................................................................3- 4
3.2.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 4
3.2.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 4
3.2.2 Using a Halogen Lamp ............................................................................................................................................ 3- 4
3.2.2.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 4
3.2.2.2 Turning On/Off the Halogen Lamp........................................................................................................................................... 3- 4
3.2.2.3 Controlling the Intensity ........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 4
3.2.2.4 Detecting the Activation ........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 4
3.2.2.5 Halogen Lamp Intensity Automatic Correction (ALVC)............................................................................................................ 3- 4
3.2.3 Using a Fluorescent Lamp....................................................................................................................................... 3- 4
3.2.3.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 4
3.2.3.2 Turning On/Off the Fluorescent Lamp ..................................................................................................................................... 3- 4
3.2.3.3 Pre-Heating the Fluorescent Lamp .......................................................................................................................................... 3- 4
3.2.4 Controlling the Intensity of the Fluorescent Lamp ................................................................................................... 3- 5
3.2.4.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 5
3.2.4.2 Low Intensity of the Fluorescent Lamp .................................................................................................................................... 3- 5
3.2.4.3 High Intensity of the Fuorescent Lamp .................................................................................................................................... 3- 5
3.2.5 Automatic Adjustment of the Intensity of a Fluorescent Lamp (ALVC control) ........................................................ 3- 5
3.2.5.1 Automatic Adjustment of the Intensity of a Fluorescent Lamp (ALVC control) ........................................................................ 3- 5
3.2.6 Handling the Scanning Lamp .................................................................................................................................. 3- 5
3.2.6.1 Handling the Scanning Lamp................................................................................................................................................... 3- 5
3.3 Scanner Drive/Copyboard Drive System ....................................................................................................3- 6
3.3.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 6
3.3.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 6
3.3.2 Movement of the Copyboard ................................................................................................................................... 3- 6
3.3.2.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 6
3.3.2.2 Controlling the Drive Mechanism of the Copyboard ................................................................................................................ 3- 7
3.3.2.3 Switching the Direction of the Copyboard Movement .............................................................................................................. 3- 8
3.3.3 Moving the Scanner............................................................................................................................................... 3- 10
3.3.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 10
3.3.3.2 Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 10
3.3.4 Stream Reading..................................................................................................................................................... 3- 10
3.3.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 10
3.3.4.2 Stream Reading with a DF..................................................................................................................................................... 3- 10
3.3.4.3 Stream Reading by a CFF ..................................................................................................................................................... 3- 13
3.4 Lens Drive System ...................................................................................................................................3- 14
3.4.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 14
3.4.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 14
3.4.2 Moving the Lens .................................................................................................................................................... 3- 15
3.4.2.1 Lens Drive Mechanism .......................................................................................................................................................... 3- 15
3.4.2.2 Controlling the Position of Originals....................................................................................................................................... 3- 15
3.5 Other Functions ........................................................................................................................................3- 18
3.5.1 Identifying the Size of an Original.......................................................................................................................... 3- 18
 Contents

3.5.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 18
3.5.1.2 Identifying the Size of an Original in Book Mode ................................................................................................................... 3- 18
3.5.1.3 Mechanism of Detection ........................................................................................................................................................ 3- 18
3.5.1.4 Identifying the Size of an Original (with feeder in use)........................................................................................................... 3- 18
3.5.2 Pre-Scanning .........................................................................................................................................................3- 20
3.5.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 20
3.5.2.2 Purpose of Pre-Scanning....................................................................................................................................................... 3- 20
3.5.3 ARE Control ...........................................................................................................................................................3- 20
3.5.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 20
3.5.3.2 Principles ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 21
3.5.3.3 Photosensor Type (controlling bias) ...................................................................................................................................... 3- 21
3.5.3.4 Photosensor Type (intensity control/development bias control) ............................................................................................ 3- 21
3.5.3.5 Potential Sensor Type............................................................................................................................................................ 3- 22

Chapter 4 ORIGINAL HANDLING SYSTEM

4.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................. 4- 1
4.1.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................4- 1
4.1.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.2 ADF and RDF ............................................................................................................................................. 4- 2
4.2.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................4- 2
4.2.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.2.2 Pickup ......................................................................................................................................................................4- 2
4.2.2.1 Pickup ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.2.3 Separation................................................................................................................................................................4- 3
4.2.3.1 Separation................................................................................................................................................................................ 4- 3
4.2.4 Feeding ....................................................................................................................................................................4- 4
4.2.4.1 Feeding .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 4
4.2.5 Reversal...................................................................................................................................................................4- 4
4.2.5.1 Reversal................................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 4
4.2.6 Delivery ....................................................................................................................................................................4- 5
4.2.6.1 Delivery .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 5
4.2.7 Special Functions.....................................................................................................................................................4- 5
4.2.7.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 5
4.2.7.2 Detecting Originals................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 6
4.2.7.3 Edging and Advancing ............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 6
4.2.7.4 Counting the Originals ............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 7
4.2.7.5 Detecting the Density of an Original (AE) ................................................................................................................................ 4- 7
4.2.7.6 Reduced Page Composition .................................................................................................................................................... 4- 8
4.2.7.7 Stream Reading ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 9
4.2.7.8 Continuous Feeding............................................................................................................................................................... 4- 11
4.2.7.9 High-Speed Copying Mode.................................................................................................................................................... 4- 11
4.2.7.10 Recycle Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 13
4.2.7.11 Manual Feed (original) ......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 14
4.2.7.12 Leap Guide........................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 15
4.2.7.13 Stamp................................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 16
4.2.7.14 Pre-Reversal ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4- 16
4.2.8 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................4- 18
4.2.8.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 18
4.2.8.2 Types of Originals .................................................................................................................................................................. 4- 18
4.2.8.3 EC-Coated Glass ................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 19
4.2.8.4 Sub Feeder ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4- 19
4.3 CFF .......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 21
4.3.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................4- 21
4.3.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 21
4.3.2 Basic Sequence of Operations ..............................................................................................................................4- 21
4.3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 21
4.3.3 Auto Exposure (AE) Control...................................................................................................................................4- 25
4.3.3.1 Auto Exposure (AE) Control................................................................................................................................................... 4- 25
4.3.4 Auto Paper Selection .............................................................................................................................................4- 26
 Contents

4.3.4.1 Auto Paper Selection ............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 26

4.3.5 Auto Ratio Selection .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 26
4.3.5.1 Auto Ratio Selection .............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 26
4.4 DF .............................................................................................................................................................4- 27
4.4.1 DF.......................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 27
4.4.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 27
4.4.2 Basic Sequence of Operations .............................................................................................................................. 4- 27
4.4.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 27

Chapter 5 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

5.1 Analog Image Processing...........................................................................................................................5- 1
5.1.1 CCD......................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.1.2 1-Line CCD .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 1
5.1.1.3 3-Line CCD .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 1
5.1.1.4 CCD Driver............................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.2 Odd-Numbered/Even-Numbered Bit Integration ..................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.2.1 Odd-Numbered/Even-Numbered Bit Integration...................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.3 Gain/Offset Processing............................................................................................................................................ 5- 3
5.1.3.1 Gain/Offset Processing ............................................................................................................................................................ 5- 3
5.1.4 A/D Conversion ....................................................................................................................................................... 5- 3
5.1.4.1 A/D Conversion........................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 3
5.2 Digital Image Processing ............................................................................................................................5- 4
5.2.1 Shading Correction.................................................................................................................................................. 5- 4
5.2.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.1.2 Determining a Shading Correction Target Level...................................................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.1.3 Determining the Shading Correction Level .............................................................................................................................. 5- 5
5.2.2 RGB Phase Correction (3-line CCD position matching) .......................................................................................... 5- 5
5.2.2.1 RGB Phase Correction (3-line CCD position matching) .......................................................................................................... 5- 5
5.2.3 Input Masking (sensor chromatic correction)........................................................................................................... 5- 6
5.2.3.1 Input Masking (sensor chromatic correction) ........................................................................................................................... 5- 6
5.2.4 Density Processing.................................................................................................................................................. 5- 6
5.2.4.1 Logarithmic Correction............................................................................................................................................................. 5- 6
5.2.4.2 YMC Conversion...................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 7
5.2.4.3 Manual Adjustment of Density ................................................................................................................................................. 5- 8
5.2.4.4 Density Correctio ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 8
5.2.5 AE Processing ......................................................................................................................................................... 5- 9
5.2.5.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 9
5.2.5.2 AE with Priority on Speed ........................................................................................................................................................ 5- 9
5.2.5.3 AE with Priority on Image Quality .......................................................................................................................................... 5- 10
5.2.5.4 Background Level Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................... 5- 11
5.2.6 Image Processing.................................................................................................................................................. 5- 11
5.2.6.1 Ratio Processing.................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 11
5.2.6.2 Shift Processing ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 12
5.2.6.3 Reduced Page Composition .................................................................................................................................................. 5- 14
5.2.6.4 Enlarged Page Composition .................................................................................................................................................. 5- 16
5.2.6.5 Mirror Image........................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 18
5.2.6.6 Repeat Image ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 18
5.2.6.7 Slant Image............................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 19
5.2.6.8 Negative/Positive Reversal .................................................................................................................................................... 5- 19
5.2.6.9 Framing/Blanking ................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 20
5.2.6.10 Image Integration ................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 20
5.2.6.11 Identifying a Marked Area .................................................................................................................................................... 5- 21
5.2.6.12 Outline Processing ............................................................................................................................................................... 5- 22
5.2.6.13 Shade Processing ................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 22
5.2.6.14 Shadow Processing ............................................................................................................................................................. 5- 23
5.2.6.15 Pattern Processing............................................................................................................................................................... 5- 24
5.2.6.16 Color Removal ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 25
5.2.6.17 Color Conversion ................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 25
 Contents

5.2.6.18 Color/Image Editing.............................................................................................................................................................. 5- 25

5.2.7 UCR (Under Color Removal) .................................................................................................................................5- 26
5.2.7.1 UCR (under color removal) .................................................................................................................................................... 5- 26
5.2.8 Space Filter............................................................................................................................................................5- 27
5.2.8.1 Sharpness/Filter Processing .................................................................................................................................................. 5- 27
5.2.8.2 Outline Processing................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 28
5.2.9 Area Identification ..................................................................................................................................................5- 28
5.2.9.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 28
5.2.9.2 Black Detection/Chromatic Detection .................................................................................................................................... 5- 29
5.2.9.3 Edge Detection/Line Width Detection .................................................................................................................................... 5- 29
5.2.10 Direct Mapping .....................................................................................................................................................5- 29
5.2.10.1 Direct Mapping ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 29
5.2.11 Chromatic Space Compression ...........................................................................................................................5- 30
5.2.11.1 Chromatic Space Compression ........................................................................................................................................... 5- 30
5.2.12 Output Masking (toner color correction)...............................................................................................................5- 31
5.2.12.1 Output Masking (toner color correction)............................................................................................................................... 5- 31
5.2.13 Binary Processing ................................................................................................................................................5- 31
5.2.13.1 Error Diffusion (ED) Method................................................................................................................................................. 5- 31
5.2.13.2 Mean Density (MD) Retention Method................................................................................................................................. 5- 32
5.2.13.3 Probability Density (PD) Retention Method.......................................................................................................................... 5- 32
5.2.13.4 Random Error Diffusion (R-ED) Method .............................................................................................................................. 5- 32
5.2.13.5 Dither Screen Method .......................................................................................................................................................... 5- 33
5.2.14 Detecting the Orientation of an Original ...............................................................................................................5- 34
5.2.14.1 Detecting the Orientation of an Original ............................................................................................................................... 5- 34
5.2.15 Identifying the Position of an Original...................................................................................................................5- 35
5.2.15.1 Identifying the Position of an Original................................................................................................................................... 5- 35

Chapter 6 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

6.1 Laser Exposure System ............................................................................................................................. 6- 1
6.1.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................6- 1
6.1.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.2 2-Beam Method .......................................................................................................................................................6- 1
6.1.2.1 2-Beam Method ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.3 4-Beam Type ...........................................................................................................................................................6- 2
6.1.3.1 4-Beam Type ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 2
6.2 Generating the Beam Detection (BD) Signal.............................................................................................. 6- 4
6.2.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................6- 4
6.2.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 4
6.2.2 Controlling the Point of Exposure ............................................................................................................................6- 4
6.2.2.1 Controlling the Point of Exposure ............................................................................................................................................ 6- 4
6.3 Laser Driver Circuitry.................................................................................................................................. 6- 6
6.3.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................6- 6
6.3.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 6
6.3.2 Stabilizing the Laser Intensity ..................................................................................................................................6- 6
6.3.2.1 Stabilizing the Laser Intensity .................................................................................................................................................. 6- 6
6.3.3 Switching the Laser Activation Mode .......................................................................................................................6- 6
6.3.3.1 Switching the Laser Activation Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 6- 6
6.3.4 Switching the Laser Output......................................................................................................................................6- 6
6.3.4.1 Switching the Laser Output...................................................................................................................................................... 6- 6
6.3.5 Adjusting the Laser Power .......................................................................................................................................6- 6
6.3.5.1 Adjusting the Laser Power ....................................................................................................................................................... 6- 6
6.4 Laser Scanner Motor .................................................................................................................................. 6- 8
6.4.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................6- 8
6.4.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 8
6.4.2 Silent Mode ..............................................................................................................................................................6- 8
6.4.2.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 8
6.4.2.2 Setting 'shift to silent mode' to '1' through '9' ........................................................................................................................... 6- 8
6.4.2.3 Setting 'shift to silent mode' to '0' ............................................................................................................................................. 6- 8
 Contents

6.5 Controlling the Temperature of the Laser Unit............................................................................................6- 9

6.5.1 Controlling the Temperature of the Laser Unit ........................................................................................................ 6- 9

Chapter 7 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

7.1 Outline of the Image Formation System .....................................................................................................7- 1
7.1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.2 Potential Detection Circuit ....................................................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.2.1 Potential Detection Circuit........................................................................................................................................................ 7- 1
7.2 Drum Surface Potential Control ..................................................................................................................7- 2
7.2.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.2.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.2.2 Scanning Lamp Method........................................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.2.2.1 Primary Current Control ........................................................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.2.2.2 Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp ....................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.2.2.3 Controlling the Developing Bias............................................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.2.2.4 Controlling the Potential........................................................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.2.3 Laser Control Method .............................................................................................................................................. 7- 3
7.2.3.1 Controlling the Grid Bias .......................................................................................................................................................... 7- 3
7.2.3.2 Correcting the Grid Bias........................................................................................................................................................... 7- 3
7.2.3.3 Controlling the Laser Output .................................................................................................................................................... 7- 4
7.2.3.4 Correcting the Laser Output..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 4
7.2.3.5 Controlling the Developing Bias............................................................................................................................................... 7- 4
7.2.3.6 Controlling the Potential........................................................................................................................................................... 7- 4
7.2.3.7 Controlling the Potential in Transparency Mode ...................................................................................................................... 7- 4
7.2.3.8 Controlling the Potential for Environment Mode ...................................................................................................................... 7- 4
7.2.4 Correcting the Surface Potential of the Drum.......................................................................................................... 7- 5
7.2.4.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 5
7.2.4.2 Temperature Correction........................................................................................................................................................... 7- 5
7.2.4.3 Resistance Correction (of the photosensitive drum) ................................................................................................................ 7- 5
7.3 Ensuring the Production of Stable Images .................................................................................................7- 6
7.3.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.3.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.3.2 Contrast Potential Control ....................................................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.3.2.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.3.2.2 Initial Contrast Potential Control .............................................................................................................................................. 7- 6
7.3.2.3 Run-to-Run Contrast Potential Correction Control................................................................................................................... 7- 7
7.3.3 Potential Control for Non-Initial RotationCorrection................................................................................................. 7- 7
7.3.3.1 Potential Control for Non-Initial RotationCorrection ................................................................................................................. 7- 7
7.3.4 Dark-Area Potential Attenuation Measurement Control .......................................................................................... 7- 8
7.3.4.1 Dark-Area Potential Attenuation Measurement Control........................................................................................................... 7- 8
7.3.5 Stabilizing the Development Characteristics (SALT) ............................................................................................... 7- 8
7.3.5.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 8
7.3.5.2 Correcting the Contrast Potential............................................................................................................................................. 7- 8
7.3.5.3 Correcting the Gradation.......................................................................................................................................................... 7- 9
7.3.5.4 Correcting the Maximum Density............................................................................................................................................. 7- 9
7.3.5.5 Correcting the Toner Density ................................................................................................................................................... 7- 9
7.3.6 Stabilizing the Gradation (PASCAL)...................................................................................................................... 7- 10
7.3.6.1 Stabilizing the Gradation (PASCAL) ...................................................................................................................................... 7- 10
7.3.7 Stabilizing Image .................................................................................................................................................. 7- 11
7.3.7.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 11
7.3.7.2 Correcting the Changes in the Environment .......................................................................................................................... 7- 11
7.3.7.3 Correcting the Image density (maximum density control)...................................................................................................... 7- 11
7.3.7.4 Correcting the Image Gradations........................................................................................................................................... 7- 11
7.4 Primary Charging......................................................................................................................................7- 12
7.4.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 12
7.4.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 12
7.4.2 Controlling the Primary Corona Charging.............................................................................................................. 7- 12
 Contents

7.4.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 12
7.4.2.2 Turning the Primary Corona Current On/Off .......................................................................................................................... 7- 12
7.4.2.3 Controlling the Primary Corona Current to a Specific Current Level ..................................................................................... 7- 12
7.4.2.4 Controlling the Primary Current Level.................................................................................................................................... 7- 12
7.4.3 Controlling the Grid Bias ........................................................................................................................................7- 12
7.4.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 12
7.4.3.2 Controlling the Grid Bias Level .............................................................................................................................................. 7- 12
7.4.3.3 Controlling the Grid Bias to a Specific Voltage Level............................................................................................................. 7- 12
7.4.3.4 Detecting a Fault in the Grid Bias .......................................................................................................................................... 7- 13
7.4.4 Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias ........................................................................................................7- 13
7.4.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 13
7.4.4.2 Turning On/Off the Primary Charging Roller Bias.................................................................................................................. 7- 13
7.4.4.3 Controlling the Primary Charging Roller DC Bias to a Specific Voltage Level....................................................................... 7- 13
7.4.4.4 Controlling the Primary Charging Roller AC Bias to a Specific Current Level ....................................................................... 7- 13
7.4.4.5 Switching the Voltage Level of the Primary Roller Bias (cleaning mode control) .................................................................. 7- 13
7.4.4.6 Switching the Voltage Level of the Primary Charging Roller (APVC control) ........................................................................ 7- 13
7.4.4.7 Controlling the AC Bias and DC Bias of the Primary Charging Roller ................................................................................... 7- 13
7.4.4.8 Temperature Correction for the DC Bias ............................................................................................................................... 7- 13
7.4.4.9 Humidity Correction for the AC Bias ...................................................................................................................................... 7- 14
7.5 Blank Exposure ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 15
7.5.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................7- 15
7.5.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 15
7.5.2 Using the Blank Exposure Lamp............................................................................................................................7- 15
7.5.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 15
7.5.2.2 Controlling the Activation in Reduce Mode ............................................................................................................................ 7- 15
7.5.2.3 Controlling the Activation in Direct Mode ............................................................................................................................... 7- 15
7.5.2.4 Controlling the Activation in Sheet/Original Frame Erase Mode............................................................................................ 7- 15
7.5.2.5 Controlling the Activation in Book Frame Erase Mode .......................................................................................................... 7- 15
7.5.2.6 Controlling the Activation in Hole Image Erase Mode............................................................................................................ 7- 15
7.5.2.7 Controlling the Activation in AE (potential measurement type).............................................................................................. 7- 16
7.5.3 Using the Pre-Exposure Lamp ..............................................................................................................................7- 16
7.5.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 16
7.5.3.2 Leading Edge/Trailing Edge/Margin/Sheet-to-Sheet ............................................................................................................. 7- 16
7.5.3.3 Preventing Adhesion of Toner in Non-Image Areas in Reduce Mode ................................................................................... 7- 16
7.6 Development ............................................................................................................................................ 7- 18
7.6.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................7- 18
7.6.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 18
7.6.2 Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................................................7- 18
7.6.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 18
7.6.2.2 Type 1 (all-in-one type) .......................................................................................................................................................... 7- 18
7.6.2.3 Type 2 (double-unit separation type) ..................................................................................................................................... 7- 19
7.6.2.4 Type 3 (3-unit separation type) .............................................................................................................................................. 7- 19
7.6.2.5 Type 4 (4-unit separation type) .............................................................................................................................................. 7- 20
7.6.2.6 Type 5 (5-unit Sseparation type)............................................................................................................................................ 7- 20
7.6.3 Arrangement of the Developing Assembly Inside a Color Copier..........................................................................7- 20
7.6.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 20
7.6.3.2 Type 1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 20
7.6.3.3 Type 2 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 21
7.6.3.4 Type 3 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 21
7.6.3.5 Type 4 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 21
7.6.4 Mechanisms Around the Developing Assemblies and methods of Engagement...................................................7- 22
7.6.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 22
7.6.4.2 Type 1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 22
7.6.4.3 Type 2 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 24
7.6.4.4 Type 3 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 26
7.6.4.5 Type 4 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 26
7.6.5 Developing Bias .....................................................................................................................................................7- 27
7.6.5.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 27
7.6.5.2 AC Bias .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7- 27
7.6.5.3 DC Bias.................................................................................................................................................................................. 7- 27
 Contents

7.6.5.4 Double Blank Pulse................................................................................................................................................................ 7- 27

7.6.5.5 Developing Bias Control Circuit ............................................................................................................................................. 7- 27
7.6.5.6 Controlling the DC Bias (preventing stray toner) ................................................................................................................... 7- 28
7.6.6 Detecting the Level of Toner ................................................................................................................................. 7- 28
7.6.6.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 28
7.6.6.2 Antenna Sensor ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 28
7.6.6.3 Piezoelectric Sensor .............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 29
7.6.6.4 Photo Sensor ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 29
7.6.7 Detecting the Concentration of Toner.................................................................................................................... 7- 30
7.6.7.1 Detecting the Concentration of Toner in a Color Copier ........................................................................................................ 7- 30
7.6.7.2 Detecting the Concentration of Color Toner .......................................................................................................................... 7- 30
7.6.7.3 Detecting the Concentration of Bk Toner............................................................................................................................... 7- 31
7.6.7.4 Detecting the Concentration of Mono Color Toner ................................................................................................................ 7- 32
7.7 Transfer Unit .............................................................................................................................................7- 33
7.7.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 33
7.7.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 33
7.7.2 Transfer Guide Type.............................................................................................................................................. 7- 33
7.7.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 33
7.7.2.2 Controlling the Transfer Guide Bias....................................................................................................................................... 7- 33
7.7.3 Transfer Drum Type .............................................................................................................................................. 7- 33
7.7.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 33
7.7.3.2 Point of Paper Attraction ........................................................................................................................................................ 7- 34
7.7.3.3 Controlling the Locking Cam Inside the Transfer Drum ......................................................................................................... 7- 36
7.7.3.4 Cleaning the Transfer Drum Sheet ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 38
7.7.4 Transfer Belt Type ................................................................................................................................................. 7- 39
7.7.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 39
7.7.4.2 Moving the Transfer Blade to and Away from the Point of Attraction .................................................................................... 7- 40
7.7.4.3 Detecting the Transfer Belt at Home Position........................................................................................................................ 7- 41
7.7.4.4 Point of Attraction................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 41
7.7.4.5 Correcting Displacement of the Transfer Belt ........................................................................................................................ 7- 43
7.7.4.6 Movement of the Transfer Belt Lifter...................................................................................................................................... 7- 44
7.7.4.7 Cleaning the Transfer Belt ..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 44
7.7.5 Intermediate Transfer DrumType .......................................................................................................................... 7- 47
7.7.5.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 47
7.7.5.2 Controlling the Secondary Transfer Belt Locking Mechanism ............................................................................................... 7- 48
7.7.5.3 Controlling the ITD Cleaning Roller ....................................................................................................................................... 7- 48
7.7.6 Charging for Static Attraction................................................................................................................................. 7- 49
7.7.6.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 49
7.7.6.2 Turning On and Off the Attraction Current ............................................................................................................................. 7- 49
7.7.6.3 Switching the Levels of Attraction Current ............................................................................................................................. 7- 49
7.7.6.4 Controlling the Attraction Current to a Specific Level ............................................................................................................ 7- 49
7.7.7 Pre-Transfer Charging........................................................................................................................................... 7- 49
7.7.7.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 49
7.7.7.2 Turning On and Off the Pre-Transfer Corona Current ........................................................................................................... 7- 49
7.7.7.3 Controlling the Level of the Pre-Transfer Corona Current ..................................................................................................... 7- 49
7.7.7.4 Controlling the Pre-Transfer Corona Current to a Specific Level (DC component) ............................................................... 7- 49
7.7.7.5 Preventing DC Component Overcurrent for the Pre-Transfer Corona Current...................................................................... 7- 50
7.7.8 Transfer Charging.................................................................................................................................................. 7- 50
7.7.8.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 50
7.7.8.2 Controlling the Transfer Corona Charging ............................................................................................................................. 7- 50
7.7.8.3 Controlling the Transfer Roller Charging ............................................................................................................................... 7- 50
7.7.8.4 Controlling the Transfer Blade Charging................................................................................................................................ 7- 52
7.7.9 Controlling the Static Eliminating Mechanism ....................................................................................................... 7- 52
7.7.9.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 52
7.7.9.2 Controlling the Static Eliminating Current .............................................................................................................................. 7- 52
7.8 Separation ................................................................................................................................................7- 54
7.8.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 54
7.8.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 54
7.8.2 Static Separation Method ...................................................................................................................................... 7- 54
7.8.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 54
 Contents

7.8.3 Static Eliminator Separation Method (curvature separation) .................................................................................7- 55

7.8.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 55
7.8.3.2 Turning On and Off the Static Eliminator Bias and Switching Its Levels................................................................................ 7- 55
7.8.3.3 Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias to a Specific Level of Current...................................................................................... 7- 55
7.8.3.4 Switching the Level of Current for the Static Eliminator Bias................................................................................................. 7- 55
7.8.3.5 Preventing Faulty Separation of Thin Paper .......................................................................................................................... 7- 55
7.8.4 Separation Claw/Static Separation Method ...........................................................................................................7- 55
7.8.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 55
7.8.4.2 Separation Claw/Push-Up Roll Separation Method ............................................................................................................... 7- 55
7.8.5 Curvature Separation/Static Separation Method ...................................................................................................7- 56
7.8.5.1 Curvature Separation/Static Separation Method ................................................................................................................... 7- 56
7.9 Drum Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................... 7- 57
7.9.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................7- 57
7.9.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 57
7.9.2 Monitoring the Level of Waste Toner .....................................................................................................................7- 57
7.9.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 57
7.9.2.2 Type 1 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 57
7.9.2.3 Type 2 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 57
7.9.2.4 Type 3 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 58
7.9.3 Moving Waste Toner..............................................................................................................................................7- 59
7.9.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 59
7.9.3.2 Type 1 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 59
7.9.3.3 Type 2 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 60
7.9.3.4 Type 3 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 60
7.10 Others ..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 62
7.10.1 Cleaning the Charging Wire/Charging Roller .......................................................................................................7- 62
7.10.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 7- 62
7.10.1.2 Cleaning the Charging Wire ................................................................................................................................................. 7- 62
7.10.1.3 Controlling the Charging Wire Cleaning Motor..................................................................................................................... 7- 62
7.10.1.4 Detecting an Error in Cleaning the Charging Wire ............................................................................................................... 7- 62
7.10.1.5 Cleaning the Primary Charging Roller.................................................................................................................................. 7- 62
7.10.2 Post-Cleaning Charging .......................................................................................................................................7- 63
7.10.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 7- 63
7.10.2.2 Turning On and Off the Post-Cleaning Corona Current ....................................................................................................... 7- 63
7.10.2.3 Controlling the Post-Cleaning Corona Current to a Specific Level ...................................................................................... 7- 63
7.10.3 Drum Heater.........................................................................................................................................................7- 63
7.10.3.1 Drum Heater......................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 63
7.10.4 Drum Cartridge Memory.......................................................................................................................................7- 64
7.10.4.1 Drum Cartridge Memory....................................................................................................................................................... 7- 64

Chapter 8 PICKUP/FEED SYSTEM

8.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 8- 1
8.1.1 Outline of the Pickup/Feed System..........................................................................................................................8- 1
8.1.1.1 Pickup/Feed Point of Reference .............................................................................................................................................. 8- 1
8.1.1.2 Separation Mechanism ............................................................................................................................................................ 8- 1
8.2 Pickup System............................................................................................................................................ 8- 3
8.2.1 Cassette Pickup .......................................................................................................................................................8- 3
8.2.1.1 Method of Pickup ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 3
8.2.1.2 Dentifying the Size of Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 8- 4
8.2.1.3 Movement of the Lifter ........................................................................................................................................................... 8- 12
8.2.1.4 Detecting the Stack Level ...................................................................................................................................................... 8- 15
8.2.1.5 Detecting the Absence of Paper ............................................................................................................................................ 8- 17
8.2.1.6 Detecting the Last Sheet in the Cassette............................................................................................................................... 8- 18
8.2.1.7 Movement of the Tray ............................................................................................................................................................ 8- 19
8.2.2 Manual Pickup Assembly.......................................................................................................................................8- 19
8.2.2.1 Pickup .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 19
8.2.2.2 Identifying the Size of Paper .................................................................................................................................................. 8- 22
8.2.2.3 Movement of the Lifter ........................................................................................................................................................... 8- 23
8.2.2.4 Identifying the Thickness of Paper......................................................................................................................................... 8- 24
 Contents

8.2.2.5 Detecting a Transparency...................................................................................................................................................... 8- 24

8.2.3 Paper Deck Pickup Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 8- 25
8.2.3.1 Pickup .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 25
8.2.3.2 Identifying the Size of Paper .................................................................................................................................................. 8- 25
8.2.3.3 Movement of the Lifter ........................................................................................................................................................... 8- 25
8.2.3.4 Detecting the Level of Paper.................................................................................................................................................. 8- 27
8.3 Feeding System........................................................................................................................................8- 29
8.3.1 Controlling the Registration Roller......................................................................................................................... 8- 29
8.3.1.1 Controlling Registration.......................................................................................................................................................... 8- 29
8.3.1.2 Adjusting Horizontal Registration........................................................................................................................................... 8- 31
8.3.2 Attraction Roller ..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 32
8.3.2.1 Attraction Roller ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 32
8.4 Postcard Feed Unit ...................................................................................................................................8- 34
8.4.1 Duplexing/Overlay Mechanism.............................................................................................................................. 8- 34
8.4.1.1 Postcard Feed Unit ................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 34
8.4.1.2 Duplexing/Overlay Mechanism Outline................................................................................................................................. 8- 34
8.4.1.3 Path for Double-Sided/Overlay Copying (up to holding tray assembly)................................................................................. 8- 35
8.4.1.4 Paper Path for the Double-Sided/Overlay Paths (up to the stacking assembly).................................................................... 8- 37
8.4.1.5 Paper Path for Double-Sided Copying (up to stacking assembly) ......................................................................................... 8- 38
8.4.1.6 Jogging Mechanism ............................................................................................................................................................... 8- 39
8.5 Duplexing Unit ..........................................................................................................................................8- 41
8.5.1 Stacking Sheets..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 41
8.5.1.1 Stacking Sheets ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 41
8.5.2 Switching the Feed Path........................................................................................................................................ 8- 41
8.5.2.1 Switching the Feed Path ........................................................................................................................................................ 8- 41
8.5.3 Non-Stacking Operation ........................................................................................................................................ 8- 42
8.5.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 42
8.5.3.2 Outline of Operations ............................................................................................................................................................. 8- 42
8.5.4 Set-Back Operation ............................................................................................................................................... 8- 46
8.5.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 46
8.5.4.2 Set-Back Operations.............................................................................................................................................................. 8- 46
8.5.5 Preventing Stacking Faults.................................................................................................................................... 8- 47
8.5.5.1 Operation of the De-Curling Sheet......................................................................................................................................... 8- 47
8.5.5.2 Operation of the De-Curling Roller......................................................................................................................................... 8- 48
8.5.6 Re-Pickup Path for Duplexing/Overlay Copying.................................................................................................... 8- 48
8.5.6.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 48
8.5.6.2 Type 1 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 48
8.5.6.3 Type 2 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 48
8.5.6.4 Type 3 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 50
8.5.6.5 Type 4 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 51
8.5.7 Re-Pickup from the Duplexing Unit ....................................................................................................................... 8- 51
8.5.7.1 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 51
8.5.8 Skip Operation....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 52
8.5.8.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 52
8.5.8.2 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 52
8.5.8.3 Skip Operation for an Even Number of Originals................................................................................................................... 8- 53
8.5.8.4 Skip Operation for an Odd Number of Originals .................................................................................................................... 8- 55
8.5.9 Reversal Delivery .................................................................................................................................................. 8- 56
8.5.9.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 56
8.5.9.2 Operations ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8- 57
8.5.10 Face-Down Delivery ............................................................................................................................................ 8- 58
8.5.10.1 Face-Up Delivery ................................................................................................................................................................. 8- 58
8.5.10.2 Face-Down Delivery............................................................................................................................................................. 8- 58
8.5.10.3 Operations............................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 58
8.5.11 Pre-Fixing Feeding Assembly.............................................................................................................................. 8- 60
8.5.11.1 Pre-Fixing Feeding Assembly .............................................................................................................................................. 8- 60
8.6 Controlling the Cassette Heater ...............................................................................................................8- 62
8.6.1 Controlling the Cassette Heater ............................................................................................................................ 8- 62
 Contents

Chapter 9 FIXING/DELIVERY SYSTEM

9.1 Outline of the Fixing System ...................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.1.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................9- 1
9.1.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.1.2 Methods of Fixing.....................................................................................................................................................9- 1
9.1.2.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.1.2.2 Roller Method........................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.1.2.3 SURF Method .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 2
9.2 Cleaning ..................................................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.2.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................9- 3
9.2.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.2.2 Using a Cleaning Roller ...........................................................................................................................................9- 3
9.2.2.1 Using a Cleaning Roller ........................................................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.2.3 Belt Method..............................................................................................................................................................9- 3
9.2.3.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.2.3.2 Using One Side of the Belt....................................................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.2.3.3 Using Both Sides of the Belt .................................................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.2.3.4 Monitoring the Length of the Cleaning Belt.............................................................................................................................. 9- 4
9.2.4 Auxiliary Cleaning ....................................................................................................................................................9- 4
9.2.4.1 Fixing Bias ............................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 4
9.2.4.2 Applying Oil.............................................................................................................................................................................. 9- 5
9.3 Control ........................................................................................................................................................ 9- 7
9.3.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................9- 7
9.3.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.3.2 SURF Temperature Control .....................................................................................................................................9- 7
9.3.2.1 SURF Temperature Control ..................................................................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.3.3 New Item..................................................................................................................................................................9- 7
9.3.3.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.3.3.2 Target Temperature and the Print Count ................................................................................................................................. 9- 7
9.3.3.3 Target Temperature and a Low-Temperature Environment .................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.3.3.4 Target Temperature and Paper Types..................................................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.3.3.5 Target Temperature, the Ambient Temperature, and Standby Period..................................................................................... 9- 8
9.3.3.6 Printing Speed Reduction Sequence ....................................................................................................................................... 9- 9
9.3.3.7 Power Save.............................................................................................................................................................................. 9- 9
9.4 Protection Mechanisms ............................................................................................................................ 9- 11
9.4.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................9- 11
9.4.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 11
9.4.2 Detecting Abnormal Temperatures ........................................................................................................................9- 11
9.4.2.1 Detecting Abnormal Temperatures ........................................................................................................................................ 9- 11
9.4.3 Cutting the Power Supply ......................................................................................................................................9- 11
9.4.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 11
9.4.3.2 Thermal fuse .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 11
9.4.3.3 Thermal Switch ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 11
9.4.4 Detecting Faulty Activation ofthe Fixing Heater .....................................................................................................9- 11
9.4.4.1 Detecting Faulty Activation of the Fixing Heater .................................................................................................................... 9- 11
9.4.5 New Item................................................................................................................................................................9- 11
9.4.5.1 Detecting a Fault in the Fixing Assembly............................................................................................................................... 9- 11
9.4.6 Preventing a Rush Current to the Heater...............................................................................................................9- 11
9.4.6.1 Preventing a Rush Current to the Heater............................................................................................................................... 9- 11
9.5 Other Functions ........................................................................................................................................ 9- 12
9.5.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................9- 12
9.5.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 12
9.5.2 Fixing Film Displacement Correction Control.........................................................................................................9- 12
9.5.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 12
9.5.2.2 Film Position Correcting Lever............................................................................................................................................... 9- 12
9.5.2.3 Fixing Film Motor ................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 13
9.5.3 Thermistor Reciprocating Mechanism ...................................................................................................................9- 14
9.5.3.1 Thermistor Reciprocating Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 9- 14
 Contents

9.5.4 Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism ............................................................................................... 9- 14

9.5.4.1 Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism ............................................................................................................... 9- 14
9.5.5 Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide Height Switching Mechanism ................................................................................... 9- 15
9.5.5.1 Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide Height Switching Mechanism ................................................................................................... 9- 15
9.5.6 Cleaning Belt Guide Plate ..................................................................................................................................... 9- 15
9.5.6.1 Cleaning Belt Guide Plate...................................................................................................................................................... 9- 15
9.5.7 Controlling the Fixing Speed ................................................................................................................................. 9- 16
9.5.7.1 Changing the Gear Drive Speed............................................................................................................................................ 9- 16
9.5.8 Changing the Motor Speed.................................................................................................................................... 9- 16
9.5.8.1 Changing the Motor Speed .................................................................................................................................................... 9- 16
9.5.9 De-Curling Roller ................................................................................................................................................... 9- 16
9.5.9.1 De-Curling Roller ................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 16
9.5.10 Movement of the Separation Claw (escape)........................................................................................................ 9- 17
9.5.10.1 Movement of the Separation Claw (escape) ........................................................................................................................ 9- 17

Chapter 10 DELIVERY SYSTEM

10.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................10- 1
10.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 1
10.1.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 1
10.1.2 Functions ............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 1
10.1.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 1
10.1.2.2 Sort....................................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 2
10.1.2.3 Staple Sort ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 2
10.1.2.4 Offset.................................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 3
10.1.2.5 Punch ................................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 3
10.1.2.6 Saddle Stitch ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 3
10.2 Sorter and Stapler Sorter ........................................................................................................................10- 4
10.2.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 4
10.2.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 4
10.2.2 Outline of Operations........................................................................................................................................... 10- 4
10.2.2.1 Outline of Operations ........................................................................................................................................................... 10- 4
10.2.3 Sort Bin and Non-Sort Bin ................................................................................................................................... 10- 5
10.2.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 5
10.2.3.2 Moving Up and Down the Sort Bins ..................................................................................................................................... 10- 5
10.2.3.3 Detecting Paper Inside Sort Bins ......................................................................................................................................... 10- 6
10.2.3.4 Guide Bar ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 7
10.2.3.5 Paper Retaining Arm............................................................................................................................................................ 10- 7
10.2.3.6 Reference Wall..................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 8
10.2.4 New Item.............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 8
10.2.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 8
10.2.4.2 Process Speed..................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 8
10.2.4.3 Lead-In Speed...................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 9
10.2.4.4 Delivery Speed..................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 9
10.2.5 Stapling.............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 10
10.2.5.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 10
10.2.5.2 Stapling Position ................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 10
10.2.5.3 Detecting Staples ............................................................................................................................................................... 10- 11
10.2.5.4 Detecting the Edge of a Staple Belt ................................................................................................................................... 10- 11
10.2.6 Special Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 11
10.2.6.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 11
10.2.6.2 Limitless Sort...................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 11
10.2.6.3 Cascade Sort ..................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 12
10.2.6.4 Tandem Feeding ................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 12
10.2.6.5 Front Access ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 13
10.2.6.6 Multiple Stacking ................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 14
10.2.6.7 Bin Close Sequence........................................................................................................................................................... 10- 15
10.2.7 Others ................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 16
10.2.7.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 16
10.2.7.2 Height of a Stack................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 16
 Contents

10.2.7.3 Number of Sheets for Stapling ........................................................................................................................................... 10- 16

10.3 Multioutput Tray and Shift Tray ............................................................................................................ 10- 17
10.3.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................10- 17
10.3.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 17
10.3.2 Shifting the Shift Tray.........................................................................................................................................10- 18
10.3.2.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 18
10.3.2.2 Operations.......................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 18
10.3.3 Others ................................................................................................................................................................10- 19
10.3.3.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 19
10.3.3.2 Detecting Paper on a Special Tray .................................................................................................................................... 10- 19
10.3.3.3 Releasing the Inlet Roller Roll............................................................................................................................................ 10- 20
10.4 Finisher ................................................................................................................................................. 10- 22
10.4.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................10- 22
10.4.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 22
10.4.2 Job Offset...........................................................................................................................................................10- 22
10.4.2.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 22
10.4.2.2 Job Offset (sheet offset)..................................................................................................................................................... 10- 23
10.4.2.3 Job Offset (stack offset) ..................................................................................................................................................... 10- 24
10.4.3 Stapling ..............................................................................................................................................................10- 27
10.4.3.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 27
10.4.3.2 Stapling Mechanism........................................................................................................................................................... 10- 28
10.4.3.3 Stapling .............................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 29
10.4.3.4 Stapler Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 31
10.4.3.5 Safety Switch ..................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 31
10.4.4 Processing Tray Lead-In Mechanism and Delivery Mechanism ........................................................................10- 32
10.4.4.1 Outlline ............................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 32
10.4.4.2 Paddle Type ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 32
10.4.4.3 Return Roller Type ............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 34
10.4.4.4 Return Roller Type ............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 35
10.4.4.5 Swing Guide Drive Mechanism (paddle type) .................................................................................................................... 10- 36
10.4.4.6 Paddle Drive Mechanism (paddle type) ............................................................................................................................. 10- 37
10.4.4.7 Feed Belt Releasing Mechanism (paddle type) ................................................................................................................. 10- 38
10.4.5 Buffer Roller Operation ......................................................................................................................................10- 40
10.4.5.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 40
10.4.6 Shutter Mechanisms ..........................................................................................................................................10- 43
10.4.6.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 43
10.4.6.2 Shutter Operation............................................................................................................................................................... 10- 44
10.4.7 Tray Drive...........................................................................................................................................................10- 46
10.4.7.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 46
10.4.7.2 Operating the Tray ............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 46
10.4.8 Detecting the Height of the Tray ........................................................................................................................10- 48
10.4.8.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 48
10.4.8.2 Penetration Type Sensor ................................................................................................................................................... 10- 48
10.4.8.3 Reflection Sensor Type...................................................................................................................................................... 10- 48
10.4.8.4 Photointerrupter Type ........................................................................................................................................................ 10- 49
10.5 Punch Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 10- 50
10.5.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................10- 50
10.5.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 50
10.5.2 Punching Operation ...........................................................................................................................................10- 51
10.5.2.1 Punching Operation ........................................................................................................................................................... 10- 51
10.5.3 Outline of Punching Operations .........................................................................................................................10- 52
10.5.3.1 Outline of Punching Operations ......................................................................................................................................... 10- 52
10.5.4 Horizontal Registration (type 1)..........................................................................................................................10- 55
10.5.4.1 Horizontal Registration (type 1).......................................................................................................................................... 10- 55
10.5.5 Waste Feed Operation .......................................................................................................................................10- 57
10.5.5.1 Waste Feed Operation ....................................................................................................................................................... 10- 57
10.5.6 Waste Case Full Detection.................................................................................................................................10- 57
10.5.6.1 Waste Case Full Detection................................................................................................................................................. 10- 57
10.5.7 Evening Out the Waste ......................................................................................................................................10- 58
 Contents

10.5.7.1 Evening Out the Waste ...................................................................................................................................................... 10- 58

10.6 Saddle Stitcher .....................................................................................................................................10- 59
10.6.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................... 10- 59
10.6.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 59
10.6.2 Accepting Sheets............................................................................................................................................... 10- 60
10.6.2.1 Accepting Sheets ............................................................................................................................................................... 10- 60
10.6.3 Arranging the Sheets ......................................................................................................................................... 10- 61
10.6.3.1 Arranging the Sheets ......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 61
10.6.4 Stitching ............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 62
10.6.4.1 Stitching ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 62
10.6.5 Moving the Stack ............................................................................................................................................... 10- 63
10.6.5.1 Moving the Stack................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 63
10.6.6 Folding the Stack ............................................................................................................................................... 10- 63
10.6.6.1 Folding the Stack ............................................................................................................................................................... 10- 63
10.6.7 Controlling the DeliveryTray .............................................................................................................................. 10- 64
10.6.7.1 Controlling the Delivery Tray.............................................................................................................................................. 10- 64
10.7 Paper Folding Unit ................................................................................................................................10- 66
10.7.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................... 10- 66
10.7.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 66
10.7.2 Outline of Operations......................................................................................................................................... 10- 66
10.7.2.1 Outline of Operations ......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 66
10.7.3 Removing the Skew........................................................................................................................................... 10- 67
10.7.3.1 Removing the Skew ........................................................................................................................................................... 10- 67
10.7.4 Folding Operation .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 69
10.7.4.1 Folding Operation............................................................................................................................................................... 10- 69
10.7.5 Operation of the Sub Tray ................................................................................................................................. 10- 71
10.7.5.1 Operation of the Sub Tray.................................................................................................................................................. 10- 71
10.7.6 Summary of Folding Operations ........................................................................................................................ 10- 72
10.7.6.1 Z-Fold (face-up delivery) .................................................................................................................................................... 10- 72
10.7.6.2 Z-Fold (face-down delivery) ............................................................................................................................................... 10- 72
10.8 Inserter..................................................................................................................................................10- 73
10.8.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................... 10- 73
10.8.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 73
10.8.2 Pickup by an Inserter ......................................................................................................................................... 10- 73
10.8.2.1 Pickup by an Inserter ......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 73
10.8.3 Feeding Operation ............................................................................................................................................. 10- 74
10.8.3.1 Feeding Operation ............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 74

Chapter 11 INPUT SYSTEM

11.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................11- 1
11.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................. 11- 1
11.1.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 11- 1
11.1.2 Film ...................................................................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.1.2.1 Type of Film ......................................................................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.1.2.2 Silver Halide Film ................................................................................................................................................................. 11- 2
11.1.2.3 Standards on Commercially Available Mounts (for positive films) ....................................................................................... 11- 2
11.1.3 Film Fixing Tool ................................................................................................................................................... 11- 3
11.1.3.1 Film Fixing Tool.................................................................................................................................................................... 11- 3
11.2 Film Projector..........................................................................................................................................11- 5
11.2.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................. 11- 5
11.2.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 11- 5
11.2.2 Basic Operations ................................................................................................................................................. 11- 5
11.2.2.1 Outline of Basic Operations ................................................................................................................................................. 11- 5
11.2.2.2 Diffusing Plate ...................................................................................................................................................................... 11- 6
11.2.2.3 Cyan Filter............................................................................................................................................................................ 11- 6
11.2.2.4 ND (neural density) Filter ..................................................................................................................................................... 11- 6
11.2.2.5 Fresnel Lens ....................................................................................................................................................................... 11- 6
 Contents

11.2.3 Shading Correction ..............................................................................................................................................11- 7

11.2.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 11- 7
11.2.3.2 Basic Operation.................................................................................................................................................................... 11- 7
11.2.4 Auto Focusing Mechanism...................................................................................................................................11- 8
11.2.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 11- 8
11.2.4.2 Outline of Operations ........................................................................................................................................................... 11- 8
11.2.4.3 Types of Films That Make Auto Focusing Difficult ............................................................................................................... 11- 8
11.2.5 Auto Chromatic Correction...................................................................................................................................11- 9
11.2.5.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 11- 9
11.2.5.2 Auto Chromatic Correction and a Negative Film.................................................................................................................. 11- 9
11.2.5.3 Auto Chromatic Correction and a Positive Film ................................................................................................................... 11- 9
11.3 Film Scanner ........................................................................................................................................ 11- 10
11.3.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................11- 10
11.3.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 11- 10
11.3.2 Basic Operations................................................................................................................................................11- 10
11.3.2.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 11- 10
11.3.2.2 Filter ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11- 10
11.3.3 Image Processing ..............................................................................................................................................11- 11
11.3.3.1 Image Processing .............................................................................................................................................................. 11- 11
11.3.4 Auto Focusing (AF) Mechanism.........................................................................................................................11- 11
11.3.4.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 11- 11
11.3.4.2 AF Operation...................................................................................................................................................................... 11- 12
11.3.5 Auto Density Adjustment (AE)............................................................................................................................11- 13
11.3.5.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 11- 13
11.3.5.2 Basic Sequence of AE Operations..................................................................................................................................... 11- 13
11.4 Auto Carrier .......................................................................................................................................... 11- 16
11.4.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................11- 16
11.4.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 11- 16
11.4.2 Basic Sequence of Operations...........................................................................................................................11- 16
11.4.2.1 Outline of Operations ......................................................................................................................................................... 11- 16
11.4.2.2 Moving the Slide Tray ........................................................................................................................................................ 11- 17
11.4.2.3 Release Lever .................................................................................................................................................................... 11- 17

Chapter 12 EDITOR
12.1 Editor ...................................................................................................................................................... 12- 1
12.1.1 Outline..................................................................................................................................................................12- 1
12.1.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 12- 1
12.1.2 Identifying Points..................................................................................................................................................12- 1
12.1.2.1 Identifying Points.................................................................................................................................................................. 12- 1
12.1.2.2 Pressure Method (type 1)..................................................................................................................................................... 12- 1
12.1.2.3 Static Method (type 2) .......................................................................................................................................................... 12- 4
12.1.3 Zero-Point Adjustment for Pen Input Coordinates ...............................................................................................12- 5
12.1.3.1 Zero-Point Adjustment for Pen Input Coordinates ............................................................................................................... 12- 5

Chapter 13 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

13.1 Digital Black-and-White Copier Controller .............................................................................................. 13- 1
13.1.1 GP160 Series.......................................................................................................................................................13- 1
13.1.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 13- 1
13.1.1.2 Connecting to an External Device........................................................................................................................................ 13- 1
13.1.2 GP215/225 Series................................................................................................................................................13- 2
13.1.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 13- 2
13.1.2.2 Connecting to an External Device........................................................................................................................................ 13- 3
13.1.3 GP300/400 Series................................................................................................................................................13- 5
13.1.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 13- 5
13.1.3.2 Connecting to an External Device........................................................................................................................................ 13- 6
13.1.4 GP555/605 Series................................................................................................................................................13- 7
13.1.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 13- 7
 Contents

13.1.4.2 Connecting to an External Device........................................................................................................................................ 13- 7

13.2 Color Copier Controller ...........................................................................................................................13- 9
13.2.1 Network Color PS/PCL Board-A1 ........................................................................................................................ 13- 9
13.2.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 13- 9
13.2.1.2 Connecting to an External Device........................................................................................................................................ 13- 9
13.2.2 ColorPASS/PS-XJ Series .................................................................................................................................... 13- 9
13.2.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 13- 9
13.2.2.2 Connecting to an External Device...................................................................................................................................... 13- 10
13.2.3 PS Board Unit-A1 .............................................................................................................................................. 13- 11
13.2.3.1 PS Board Unit-A1............................................................................................................................................................... 13- 11
13.2.4 ColorPASS-M/PS-MX Series............................................................................................................................. 13- 12
13.2.4.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 13- 12
13.2.4.2 Connecting to an External Device...................................................................................................................................... 13- 12
13.2.5 ColorPASS-M20e/PS-MX20e ............................................................................................................................ 13- 13
13.2.5.1 ColorPASS-M20e/PS-MX20e ............................................................................................................................................ 13- 13
13.2.6 ColorPASS-V/PS-ZX Series .............................................................................................................................. 13- 13
13.2.6.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 13- 13
13.2.6.2 Connecting to an External Device...................................................................................................................................... 13- 14

Chapter 14 HARDWARE CONSTRUCTION

14.1 Built-In Printer Controller.........................................................................................................................14- 1
14.1.1 PS Network Printer Board.................................................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.1.1 Network Printer Board.......................................................................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.2 External Printer Controller.......................................................................................................................14- 2
14.2.1 ColorPASS-M/PS-MX Series............................................................................................................................... 14- 2
14.2.1.1 ColorPASS-M/PS-MX Series ............................................................................................................................................... 14- 2
14.2.2 ColorPASS-M20e/PS-MX20e .............................................................................................................................. 14- 3
14.2.2.1 ColorPASS-M20e/PS-MX20e .............................................................................................................................................. 14- 3
14.2.3 ColorPASS-V/PS-ZX Series ................................................................................................................................ 14- 4
14.2.3.1 ColorPASS-V/PS-ZX Series................................................................................................................................................. 14- 4
14.3 Scanner Controller ..................................................................................................................................14- 7
14.3.1 Scanner Controller............................................................................................................................................... 14- 7
14.4 Fax Controller .........................................................................................................................................14- 8
14.4.1 G3 FAX Board-C1................................................................................................................................................ 14- 8
14.4.1.1 G3 FAX Board-C1 ................................................................................................................................................................ 14- 8
14.4.2 Super G3 FAX Board-F1/Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board-A1 ............................................................................. 14- 8
14.4.2.1 Super G3 FAX Board-F1/Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board-A1.............................................................................................. 14- 8

Chapter 15 OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS

15.1 Fax Controller .........................................................................................................................................15- 1
15.1.1 Type 1 (copier without an image memory) .......................................................................................................... 15- 1
15.1.1.1 Transmission........................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 1
15.1.1.2 Reception ............................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 2
15.1.2 Type 2 (copier with an image memory) ............................................................................................................... 15- 4
15.1.2.1 Transmission........................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 4
15.1.2.2 Reception ............................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 6
15.2 Printer Controller.....................................................................................................................................15- 9
15.2.1 Printer .................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 9
15.2.1.1 Processing by the Computer................................................................................................................................................ 15- 9
15.2.1.2 Processing by the Controller ................................................................................................................................................ 15- 9
15.2.2 Fax Transmission (print image fax/raster fax) ................................................................................................... 15- 19
15.2.2.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 19
15.2.2.2 Processing on the Computer.............................................................................................................................................. 15- 19
15.2.2.3 Processing by the Copier ................................................................................................................................................... 15- 20
15.3 Scanner Controller ................................................................................................................................15- 22
15.3.1 Processing by the Computer ............................................................................................................................. 15- 22
 Contents

15.3.1.1 Processing by the Computer.............................................................................................................................................. 15- 22

15.3.2 Reading Images .................................................................................................................................................15- 22
15.3.2.1 Reading Images ................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 22
15.3.3 Transmitting Image Data....................................................................................................................................15- 24
15.3.3.1 Transmitting Image Data.................................................................................................................................................... 15- 24

Chapter 16 USER SOFTWARE

16.1 Printer Driver .......................................................................................................................................... 16- 1
16.1.1 Outline..................................................................................................................................................................16- 1
16.1.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 16- 1
16.1.2 PostScript (PS) Printer Driver ..............................................................................................................................16- 2
16.1.2.1 PostScript (PS) Printer Driver .............................................................................................................................................. 16- 2
16.1.3 PCL Printer Driver ................................................................................................................................................16- 6
16.1.3.1 PCL Printer Driver ................................................................................................................................................................ 16- 6
16.2 Fax Driver ............................................................................................................................................... 16- 9
16.2.1 Fax Driver.............................................................................................................................................................16- 9
16.3 Scanner Driver...................................................................................................................................... 16- 13
16.3.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................16- 13
16.3.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 16- 13
16.3.2 TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interest Name) Driver ...................................................................................16- 13
16.3.2.1 TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interest Name) Driver ................................................................................................... 16- 13
16.3.3 Photoshop Plug-In Module.................................................................................................................................16- 14
16.3.3.1 Photoshop Plug-In Module................................................................................................................................................. 16- 14
16.4 Utilities .................................................................................................................................................. 16- 15
16.4.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................16- 15
16.4.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 16- 15
16.4.2 Fiery Downloader ...............................................................................................................................................16- 15
16.4.2.1 Fiery Downloader ............................................................................................................................................................... 16- 15
16.4.3 Fiery Spooler......................................................................................................................................................16- 17
16.4.3.1 Fiery Spooler...................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 17
16.4.4 Fiery Print Calibrator ..........................................................................................................................................16- 17
16.4.4.1 Fiery Print Calibrator .......................................................................................................................................................... 16- 17
16.4.5 Fiery WebTools ..................................................................................................................................................16- 17
16.4.5.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 16- 17
16.4.5.2 Status ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16- 18
16.4.5.3 WebSpooler ....................................................................................................................................................................... 16- 19
16.4.5.4 WebLink ............................................................................................................................................................................. 16- 20
16.4.5.5 WebDownloader................................................................................................................................................................. 16- 21
16.4.6 Net Spot .............................................................................................................................................................16- 21
16.4.6.1 NetSpot .............................................................................................................................................................................. 16- 21

Chapter 17 EXTERNAL INTERFACE

17.1 Parallel Interface and Serial Interface .................................................................................................... 17- 1
17.1.1 Parallel Interface and Serial Interface ..................................................................................................................17- 1
17.2 Parallel Interface..................................................................................................................................... 17- 2
17.2.1 Centronics ............................................................................................................................................................17- 2
17.2.1.1 Centronics ............................................................................................................................................................................ 17- 2
17.2.2 IEEE1284 (bi-Centronics) ....................................................................................................................................17- 3
17.2.2.1 IEEE1284 (bi-Centronics) .................................................................................................................................................... 17- 3
17.2.3 SCSI (Small Computer System Interface)............................................................................................................17- 5
17.2.3.1 SCSI (Small Computer System Interface)............................................................................................................................ 17- 5
17.3 Serial Interface ....................................................................................................................................... 17- 8
17.3.1 RS-232C ..............................................................................................................................................................17- 8
17.3.1.1 RS-232C .............................................................................................................................................................................. 17- 8
17.3.2 USB (Universal Serial Bus) ..................................................................................................................................17- 8
17.3.2.1 USB (Universal Serial Bus) .................................................................................................................................................. 17- 8
 Contents

17.3.3 IEEE 1394.......................................................................................................................................................... 17- 10

17.3.3.1 IEEE1394 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 10

Chapter 18 NETWORKS
18.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................18- 1
18.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................. 18- 1
18.2 Ethernet ..................................................................................................................................................18- 6
18.2.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................. 18- 6
18.2.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 18- 6
18.2.2 Method of Access ................................................................................................................................................ 18- 6
18.2.2.1 Method of Access................................................................................................................................................................. 18- 6
18.2.3 10Base-T/100Base-TX ........................................................................................................................................ 18- 6
18.2.3.1 10Base-T/100Base-TX......................................................................................................................................................... 18- 6
18.2.4 MAC (Media Access Control) Address ................................................................................................................ 18- 7
18.2.4.1 MAC (Media Access Control) Address................................................................................................................................. 18- 7
18.3 Construction of a LAN.............................................................................................................................18- 8
18.3.1 Network Interface................................................................................................................................................. 18- 8
18.3.1.1 Network Interface ................................................................................................................................................................. 18- 8
18.3.2 Hub ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18- 9
18.3.2.1 Hub....................................................................................................................................................................................... 18- 9
18.3.3 Router ................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 10
18.3.3.1 Router ................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 10
18.3.4 Cable ................................................................................................................................................................. 18- 11
18.3.4.1 Cable.................................................................................................................................................................................. 18- 11
18.4 TCP/IP ..................................................................................................................................................18- 13
18.4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................... 18- 13
18.4.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 13
18.4.2 IP Address ......................................................................................................................................................... 18- 13
18.4.2.1 IP Address.......................................................................................................................................................................... 18- 13
18.4.3 Data Transmission............................................................................................................................................. 18- 15
18.4.3.1 Data Transmission ............................................................................................................................................................. 18- 15
18.4.4 Data Transmission Between ............................................................................................................................. 18- 16
18.4.4.1 Data Transmission Between Networks .............................................................................................................................. 18- 16
18.4.5 Setting an IP Address ........................................................................................................................................ 18- 17
18.4.5.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 17
18.4.5.2 RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol) .................................................................................................................. 18- 18
18.4.5.3 BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol).............................................................................................................................................. 18- 18
18.4.5.4 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)................................................................................................................... 18- 18
18.4.6 Name Resolution ............................................................................................................................................... 18- 18
18.4.6.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 18
18.4.6.2 DNS (Domain Name System or Domain Name Service) ................................................................................................... 18- 18
18.4.6.3 WINS (Widows Internet Name Service) ............................................................................................................................. 18- 19
18.4.7 Print Service ...................................................................................................................................................... 18- 20
18.4.7.1 LPD .................................................................................................................................................................................... 18- 20
18.4.7.2 SMB over TCP/IP............................................................................................................................................................... 18- 21
18.4.8 Control Service .................................................................................................................................................. 18- 22
18.4.8.1 ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) ....................................................................................................................... 18- 22
18.4.8.2 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) ................................................................................................................ 18- 23
18.4.9 Mail Service ....................................................................................................................................................... 18- 23
18.4.9.1 SMTP/POP3 (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol/Post Office Protocol 3) ................................................................................ 18- 23
18.4.10 File Transfer Service........................................................................................................................................ 18- 24
18.4.10.1 FTP (File Transfer Protocol)............................................................................................................................................. 18- 24
18.4.10.2 TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) ................................................................................................................................ 18- 24
18.4.11 Web Service..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 24
18.4.11.1 HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol) .............................................................................................................................. 18- 24
18.5 AppleTalk ..............................................................................................................................................18- 26
18.5.1 AppleTalk........................................................................................................................................................... 18- 26
 Contents

18.6 IPX/SPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange/Internetwork Packet Exchange).......................................... 18- 27

18.6.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................18- 27
18.6.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 27
18.6.2 Processing a Print Job .......................................................................................................................................18- 27
18.6.2.1 Processing a Print Job ....................................................................................................................................................... 18- 27
18.7 Reference ............................................................................................................................................. 18- 28
18.7.1 OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) Reference Model ....................................................................................18- 28
18.7.1.1 OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) Reference Model .................................................................................................... 18- 28

Chapter 19 GLOSSARY
19.1 Row A ..................................................................................................................................................... 19- 1
19.1.1 A...........................................................................................................................................................................19- 1
19.2 Row B ..................................................................................................................................................... 19- 2
19.2.1 B...........................................................................................................................................................................19- 2
19.3 Row C ..................................................................................................................................................... 19- 3
19.3.1 C...........................................................................................................................................................................19- 3
19.4 Row D ..................................................................................................................................................... 19- 5
19.4.1 D...........................................................................................................................................................................19- 5
19.5 Row E ..................................................................................................................................................... 19- 6
19.5.1 E...........................................................................................................................................................................19- 6
19.6 Row F ..................................................................................................................................................... 19- 7
19.6.1 F ...........................................................................................................................................................................19- 7
19.7 Row G..................................................................................................................................................... 19- 8
19.7.1 G ..........................................................................................................................................................................19- 8
19.8 Row H ..................................................................................................................................................... 19- 9
19.8.1 H...........................................................................................................................................................................19- 9
19.9 Row I .................................................................................................................................................... 19- 10
19.9.1 I ..........................................................................................................................................................................19- 10
19.10 Row J .................................................................................................................................................. 19- 11
19.10.1 J........................................................................................................................................................................19- 11
19.11 Row L.................................................................................................................................................. 19- 12
19.11.1 L .......................................................................................................................................................................19- 12
19.12 Row M................................................................................................................................................. 19- 13
19.12.1 M ......................................................................................................................................................................19- 13
19.13 Row N ................................................................................................................................................. 19- 14
19.13.1 N.......................................................................................................................................................................19- 14
19.14 Row O ................................................................................................................................................. 19- 15
19.14.1 O.......................................................................................................................................................................19- 15
19.15 Row P ................................................................................................................................................. 19- 16
19.15.1 P .......................................................................................................................................................................19- 16
19.16 Row R ................................................................................................................................................. 19- 17
19.16.1 R.......................................................................................................................................................................19- 17
19.17 Row S ................................................................................................................................................. 19- 18
19.17.1 S .......................................................................................................................................................................19- 18
19.18 Row T ................................................................................................................................................. 19- 19
19.18.1 T .......................................................................................................................................................................19- 19
19.19 Row U ................................................................................................................................................. 19- 20
19.19.1 U.......................................................................................................................................................................19- 20
19.20 Row V ................................................................................................................................................. 19- 21
19.20.1 V .......................................................................................................................................................................19- 21
19.21 Row W ................................................................................................................................................ 19- 22
19.21.1 W ......................................................................................................................................................................19- 22
19.22 Row X ................................................................................................................................................. 19- 23
 Contents

19.22.1 X....................................................................................................................................................................... 19- 23

19.23 Row Y .................................................................................................................................................19- 24
19.23.1 Y....................................................................................................................................................................... 19- 24
19.24 Row Z..................................................................................................................................................19- 25
19.24.1 Z....................................................................................................................................................................... 19- 25
Contents
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION
 Contents

Contents

1.1 Recording Methods ........................................................................................................................................................1-1

1.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1.1 Recording Methods .........................................................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.2 Silver Chloride Method................................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.2.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.2.2 Recording Processes........................................................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.2.3 Features ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.2.4 Application to OA Equipment ........................................................................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.3 Non_Silver Chloride Method....................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.3.2 Recording Processes........................................................................................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.3.3 Bubble Jet Method ..........................................................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.2 Image Formation ............................................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.1.1 Image Formation Processes (black-and-white copier) ....................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.1.2 Image Formation in a Color Copier ................................................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.2 Static Image Formation................................................................................................................................................................ 1-6
1.2.2.1 Static Image Formation Block ........................................................................................................................................................................1-6
1.2.3 Pre-Exposure................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-7
1.2.3.1 Pre-Exposure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................1-7
1.2.4 Primary Charging......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.4.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................1-7
1.2.4.2 Roller Charging Method .................................................................................................................................................................................1-7
1.2.4.3 Corona Charging Method................................................................................................................................................................................1-7
1.2.5 Exposure ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.5.1 Exposure..........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-8
1.2.6 Development ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-8
1.2.6.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................1-8
1.2.6.2 Construction of the Developing Assembly .....................................................................................................................................................1-8
1.2.6.3 Developing Bias ..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-9
1.2.6.4 Developing Method.......................................................................................................................................................................................1-10
1.2.7 Attraction ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.7.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-11
1.2.7.2 Corona Attraction..........................................................................................................................................................................................1-11
1.2.7.3 Brush Attraction ............................................................................................................................................................................................1-11
1.2.7.4 Attraction to the Transfer Belt ......................................................................................................................................................................1-11
1.2.8 Pre-Transfer Charging ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.8.1 Pre-Transfer Charging...................................................................................................................................................................................1-11
1.2.9 Transfer ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.9.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-12
1.2.9.2 Transfer by a Roller ......................................................................................................................................................................................1-12
1.2.9.3 Transfer by a Corona.....................................................................................................................................................................................1-12
1.2.9.4 Transfer by a Brush .......................................................................................................................................................................................1-13
1.2.9.5 Transfer by a Transfer Belt and a Transfer Blade.........................................................................................................................................1-14
1.2.9.6 Transfer by an Intermediate Transfer Drum .................................................................................................................................................1-14
1.2.10 Separation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-16
1.2.10.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-16
1.2.10.2 Curvature Separation...................................................................................................................................................................................1-16
1.2.10.3 Static Separation..........................................................................................................................................................................................1-17
1.2.10.4 Separation Claw and Separation Push-Up Roll ..........................................................................................................................................1-17
1.2.11 Fixing ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.11.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-17
1.2.11.2 SURF Method .............................................................................................................................................................................................1-18
1.2.11.3 Roller Method .............................................................................................................................................................................................1-18
 Contents

1.2.12 Drum Cleaning......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-19

1.2.12.1 Drum Cleaning............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-19
1.3 Other Process Mechanisms ......................................................................................................................................... 1-21
1.3.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-21
1.3.1.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-21
1.3.2 Blank Exposure.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-21
1.3.2.1 Blank Exposure............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.3.3 Drum Separation Claws ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.3.3.1 Drum Separation Claws ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-21
1.3.4 Eliminating Static Electricity in Delivery.................................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.3.4.1 Eliminating Static Electricity in Delivery..................................................................................................................................................... 1-21
1.3.5 Roller Electrode ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.3.5.1 Roller Electrode ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-22
1.3.6 Ozone Filter ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.3.6.1 Ozone Filter .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-22
1.3.7 Cleaning of the Primary ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-22
1.3.7.1 Cleaning of the Primary Charging Roller ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.3.8 Static Eliminating Assembly...................................................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.3.8.1 Static Eliminating Assembly ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-23
1.3.9 Pre-Cleaning Charging............................................................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.3.9.1 Pre-Cleaning Charging Assembly ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-23
1.3.10 Post-Cleaning Charging ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-24
1.3.10.1 Post-Cleaning Charging Assembly ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-24
1.3.11 Transfer Drum Cleaning .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-24
1.3.11.1 Transfer Drum Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-24
1.3.12 Cleaning the IntermediateTransfer Drum (ITD)...................................................................................................................... 1-25
1.3.12.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-25
1.3.12.2 Charging by an ITD Cleaning Roller.......................................................................................................................................................... 1-25
1.3.12.3 Cleaning the Intermediate Transfer Drum (ITD)........................................................................................................................................ 1-25
1.3.13 Pre-Primary Charging .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-26
1.3.13.1 Pre-Primary Charging ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-26
1.3.14 Pre-Fixing Charging................................................................................................................................................................. 1-26
1.3.14.1 Pre-Fixing Charging ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-26
1.3.15 Cleaning the Transfer Belt ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-27
1.3.15.1 Cleaning the Transfer Belt .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-27
1.3.16 Grounding Roller ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-27
1.3.16.1 Grounding Roller ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-27
1.4 Limitations in Processes in Color Copies.................................................................................................................... 1-28
1.4.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-28
1.4.1.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-28
1.4.2 Physical Limitations................................................................................................................................................................... 1-28
1.4.2.1 Physical Limitations ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-28
1.4.2.2 Spectral Reflectance of Toner....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-28
1.4.2.3 Gradation in Dry-Type Electrophotography................................................................................................................................................. 1-28
1.5 Basic Sequence of Operations ..................................................................................................................................... 1-29
1.5.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-29
1.5.1.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-29
1.6 Controlling the Main Motor ........................................................................................................................................ 1-31
1.6.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-31
1.7 Types of Accessories................................................................................................................................................... 1-32
1.7.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-32
1.7.1.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-32
1.7.2 Functions of Accessories ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-32
1.7.2.1 Functions of Accessories .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-32
1.7.3 Power Supply for Accessories ................................................................................................................................................... 1-33
1.7.3.1 Power Supply for Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-33
1.7.4 Communication with the Host Copier ....................................................................................................................................... 1-34
1.7.4.1 Communication with the Host Copier .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-34
 Contents

1.8 Outline..........................................................................................................................................................................1-36
1.8.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-36
1.9 Mechanisms of a Controller .........................................................................................................................................1-37
1.9.1 Printer Functions ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-37
1.9.1.1 Printer Functions ...........................................................................................................................................................................................1-37
1.9.2 Scanner Functions ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-37
1.9.2.1 Scanner Functions .........................................................................................................................................................................................1-37
1.9.3 Fax Functions............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-37
1.9.3.1 Fax Functions ................................................................................................................................................................................................1-37
1.10 Line-Up of Products...................................................................................................................................................1-39
1.10.1 Line-Up of Black-and-White Copier Controllers .................................................................................................................... 1-39
1.10.1.1 Line-Up of Black-and-White Copier Controllers ......................................................................................................................................1-39
1.10.2 Line-Up of Controllers for Color Copiers ............................................................................................................................... 1-39
1.10.2.1 Line-Up of Controllers for Color Copiers...................................................................................................................................................1-39
 Chapter 1

1.1 Recording Methods

1.1.1 Outline
1.1.1.1 Recording Methods
0008-2389
Study the following figure to obtain an idea of how the various recording methods are classified and their respective uses.
Recording Methods
Recording methods

Generic name for all recording methods that draw upon chemical
Silver chloride method
reaction of silver halide.

Wet silver chloride method Used for common or specialized (for example, medical)
purposes.

Dry silver chloride method Used for instant cameras and high-contrast printers.

Non-silver chloride method Generic name for all non-silver chloride recording methods.

Printing method Used widely for newspapers, books, and calendars.

Electrostatographic method Used for printers and fax machines as well as copiers.

Thermographic method Used for high-contrast printers.

Thermal method Used for printers and fax machines.

Diazo method Used to reproduce transparent originals

(especially drawings).

Ink jet method Used for copires, printers, and fax machines.

Bubble jet method Canon's own recording method; used for printers
and fax machines as well as copiers.
F-1-1

1.1.2 Silver Chloride Method

1.1.2.1 Outline
0008-2390
The term sliver chloride method is generically used to refer to any recording method that uses chemical reactions of a silver halide.
The method has a long history, and its uses in photographic recording range widely from general to medical applications (X-ray photos, for example).
1.1.2.2 Recording Processes
0008-2391
We can explain the silver chloride method using how pictures are produced.
Producing Pictures
Shoot a Expose Develop/ Develop a Print the
subject the film fix the image negative negative

F-1-2

[1] Step 1
Obtain a medium (a roll of film from a photo shop) treated with chemicals which are sensitive to light (photosensitive).
Fit the medium in a device (camera) equipped with a shutter mechanism.
Expose the medium to a subject through an optical mechanism (lens).
This way, a latent (invisible) image is formed on the medium.
[2] Sub Step 1
Take the medium to a shop (photo shop).
[3] Step 2
The shop processes the film so that the latent image is developed (turned into a visible image), Stops, fixes, and washes it (with water), Dries it to obtain
a negative, Prints the negative on sensitized paper using an enlarging device, and Produces a silky/glossy prints.
[4] Sub Step 2
Visit the shop to collect the prints in exchange for a payment.

1-1
 Chapter 1

The foregoing steps [1] and [2] show us "how a recording is made", and more or less the same steps and the words are used in the electrostatographic
method.
1.1.2.3 Features
0008-2392
The recordings made by the silver chloride method usually provide good contrast and gradation, and tend to retain their initial properties for a long time.
1.1.2.4 Application to OA Equipment
0008-2394
The silver chloride method is mainly used in full-color printers designed for high-contrast recordings.
A decade ago, the method was also used in full-color copiers.

MEMO:
We often come across "DEF" signs while on the street. The letters stand for
D: Developing
P: Printing
E: Enlarging
Non-Silver Chloride Method
The term is rarely heard, but is nevertheless used to refer to all recording methods that do not belong to the silver chloride method.
Here, we will study the electrostatographic method and the bubble jet method, which are the primary recording methods used by Canon. (A large number
of associated patents are owned by Canon.)

1.1.3 Non_Silver Chloride Method

1.1.3.1 Outline
0008-2396
The electrostatographic method is a recording method based upon the principles of electronics, thereby avoiding the use of silver.
The method draws upon a wide range of fields from mechanical to electrical engineering as well as physics, chemistry, and optics.
The term "electrophotographic" does not refer to taking photos using a digital camera.
1.1.3.2 Recording Processes
0008-2398
We will use a commonly found black-and-white analog copier to explain how recordings are made in the electrostatographic method.
Electrostatographic Method

1 2

Primary charging Image exposure

Photosensitive
6 3
drum
Drum cleaning Development

Fixing Transfer
4
F-1-3

[1] Step 1 Charging the Photosensitive Drum

Charge a recording medium (photosensitive drum) to a uniform electrical potential by corona charging or other means.
This step enhances the photoconductive properties of the photosensitive drum-in other words, makes the drum sensitive to light.
In the silver chloride method, this step would be where the silver chloride film is prepared for exposure.
[2] Step 2 Exposing the Original
Expose the original placed on the copyboard by light, and expose the photosensitive drum to the reflected light through an optical system consisting of
lenses and mirrors so that a latent image is formed on the drum.
[3] Step 3 Developing the Latent Image
Develop the latent image on the photosensitive drum using a developing agent called toner so that a toner image of the original is produced on the drum.
[4] Step 4 Transferring the Toner Image from the Photosensitive Drum
Transfer the toner image to a transfer medium (for example, paper).
[5] Step 5 Fixing the Toner Image to the Transfer Medium
Fix (fuse) the toner image on the transfer medium by means of heat/pressure so that the toner is fused into the fibers of the medium to produce the final
image.
[6] Step 6 Cleaning the Photosensitive Drum
Clean the photosensitive drum so that what remains of the toner image is removed by a cleaning blade, thereby readying the drum for the next step.
c. Features

1-2
 Chapter 1

With the electrostatographic method, recordings can be made easily and quickly, and we have a wide choice of transfer media.
d. Applications to OA Equipment
Not to mention copiers, the electrostatographic method is widely used for printers and fax machines.

MEMO:
The electrostatographic method necessarily calls for an intermediary (for example, photosensitive drum) and, therefore, is commonly known as an indirect
recording method.
While silver chloride film inherently possesses properties that are sensitive to light, the photosensitive drum is manufactured by coating a cylinder with a
material that becomes conductive in response to light (photo-conducting).
A photosensitive drum is the heart of a copier, generating copies while taking advantage of the difference occurring in electrical resistance in relation to
the presence or absence of light.

1.1.3.3 Bubble Jet Method

0008-2402
a. Outline
The bubble jet method is a type of ink jet method, and is Canon's own recording method.
Recording ink is directly ejected through minuscule nozzles against a recording medium (paper) according to signals representing the image of an original.
Unlike the electrostatographic method, the method does not require a recording intermediary and, therefore, is commonly known as a direct recording
method.
By nature, the bubble jet method cannot be used for an analog system, which treats an original as an optical image; on the other hand, it often proves to be
an excellent choice for a digital system, in which an original is treated as if consisting of electrical signals.
b. Recording Processes
We will use a typical printer to explain how recordings are made by the bubble jet method.
Bubble Jet Recording Method
Point of contact Point of impact
Nozzle Droplet of ink

Cross section
Image signal of paper

Formation of original dot Absorption of ink Drying/fixing

F-1-4

Feed a recording medium to a predetermined position.

Send signals representing the original to the BJ head, composed of minuscule nozzles for ejecting recording ink.
Eject ink in amounts as determined by the signals.

c. Features
With the bubble jet method, recordings can be made easily, quickly, and quietly, and it off-ers a wide choice of transfer media.
Since its system usually has a simple construction, products may be made available cheaply.
A full-color recording system can be made rather easily, and the method holds a great deal of promise for high-speed recording.

d. Application to OA Equipment
Like the electrostatographic method, the application of the bubble jet method is not lim-ited to copiers. It is widely used for printers and fax machines.

MEMO:
The bubble jet method is most often referred to as "BJ," for short.

1-3
 Chapter 1

1.2 Image Formation

1.2.1 Outline
1.2.1.1 Image Formation Processes (black-and-white copier)
0008-4052
The following figure shows the typical flow of processes used by a black and white copier (analog, digital) to generate images. The use of a particular step
or the methods and characteristics (e.g., of charging) differ from model to model.
In an analog copier, the light of a scanning lamp is directed to an original placed on the copyboard glass, and the light reflected by the original is projected
to a photosensitive drum to form a static image. It develops the static image into a toner image, transfers the result to paper, and applies heat and pressure
to the paper to turn out a copy of the original.
A digital copier differs from an analog copier in how images are exposed.
In the case of a digital copier, the light reflected by the original is converted into an electric signal, and laser light of a strength corresponding to the level
of the signal is directed to the photosensitive drum to form a static image.
Image Formation Processes in a Black-and-White Copier (analog/digi-tal)
Static Image Formation Block

Primary charging Image exposure

Pre-exposure

Development

Drum cleaning

Transfer Multifeeder
Registration
Delivery Fixing Separation

Flow of paper Cassette

Rotation of drum
F-1-5

1.2.1.2 Image Formation in a Color Copier

0008-4053
A color copier is most likely a digital copier, and uses the following processes to form images:
A color copier illuminates a color original, and separates the reflected light into the three primary colors of light (red, green, and blue) by means of filters
for detection by a CCD.
The data generated by the CCD is used to direct a laser beam onto the photosensitive drum, thereby developing each specific color (toner whose color is
complementary to a spe-cific filter) for transfer. This process is repeated a maximum of four times (M, C, Y, Bk), and the resulting image is fixed to a
transfer medium to turn out a color copy.
A color copier may be either of the following three types, depending on the transfer pro-cesses used:
Transfer drum type: The transfer medium is wrapped around the transfer drum, which is rotated to collect the four toners from the photosensitive drum.
Such process units as the primary charging assembly, photosensitive drum, transfer charging assembly, and cleaner assembly are configured as a single
entity (with the exception of the developing assembly).
Transfer belt type: The transfer medium is forced to the transfer belt, and is moved to collect the toner deposited on each color sta-tion, each of which is
equipped with a set of process units (photosensitive drum, developing assembly, cleaner assembly; a total of four sets).
Intermediate transfer drum type: In addition to the photosensitive drum, a mechanism called an intermediate transfer drum (ITD) is used; the four toners
are transferred to the ITD (primary transfer) before transfer to a transfer medium (secondary transfer).
The following diagrams show how color copiers form images; the use and/or the type of each step differs from model to model:

1-4
 Chapter 1

- Transfer Drum Method

Static Image Formation Block

Pre-exposure
Primary charging

Post-cleaning charging Laser exposure

Development
Photosensitive drum cleaning

Delivery Fixing Separation

Transfer

Internal/external static elimination

Multifeeder
Attraction

Flow of paper
Rotation of drum Cassette
F-1-6

- Transfer Belt Method

Static Image Formation Block
2. 2. 2. 2. Primary charging

Bk C M Y

1. 1. 1. 1. Pre-exposure 3. Laser exposure

5. 5. 5. 5. Drum cleaning 4. Development

Delivery

Fixing Manual feed

Separation Transfer Attraction/transfer Registration

Paper deck

Duplexing tray

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

F-1-7

1-5
 Chapter 1

- Intermediate Transfer Drum Method

Static Image Formation Block

Primary charging
Pre-exposure
Laser beam exposure

Development block Development Drum cleaning

Photosensitive drum
cleaning block
ITD cleaning
Primary transfer

ITD cleaning roller charging

Secondary pre-transfer charging
ITD cleaning black Transfer block

Fixing block
Separation
Delivery Fixing Secondary transfer Registration Multifeeder

Cassette

Flow of paper

Rotation of photosensitive drum

Rotation of ITD

F-1-8

1.2.2 Static Image Formation

1.2.2.1 Static Image Formation Block
0008-4072
In most cases, the photosensitive drum is constructed of a photoconducting layer on the outside and an aluminum substrate on the inside; the former being
a photoconducting material (OPC or amorphous silicon), and the latter being a conductor.
The use of amorphous silicon is characterized by high durability, high sensitivity, and high resolution. For details of photosensitive drums, see 2.
"Electrophotograpy" of Chapter 2 in Part 1.
The static image formation block consists of three steps: pre-exposure, primary charging, and image exposure.
In this block, light representing the image of an original is projected on the photosensitive drum charged to a uniform potential, thereby forming a static
image not visible to the human eye.
In general, an OPC photosensitive drum is charged to a negative potential during primary charging, while an amorphous silicon photosensitive drum is
charged to a positive potential.
The surface potential of the photosensitive drum during copying operation changes as shown in the following figure.

OPC Amorphous Silicon

Time(t)
0
A B C
Surface potential (V)

500
Light area

Dark area
Surface potential (V)

Dark area

Light area
-1000
A B C 0
Time(t)

A:step 1, pre-exposure
B:step 2, primary charging
C:step 3, image exposure (laser exposure)
F-1-9

1-6
 Chapter 1

1.2.3 Pre-Exposure
1.2.3.1 Pre-Exposure
0008-4073
In preparation for primary charging, the pre-exposure lamp or the pre-exposure LED is turned on to expose the photosensitive drum by light; as a result,
the charges remaining on the surface of the photosensitive drum are removed, preventing uneven copy density.

Using a Pre-Exposure Lamp

Pre-exposure lamp

Pre-exposure LED

Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum

F-1-10

1.2.4 Primary Charging

1.2.4.1 Outline
0008-4074
Primary charging may be any of two types: the roller charging method, in which a charging roller is used to directly charge the photosensitive drum; and
the corona charging method, in which a corona is used to uniformly charge the surface of the photosensitive drum.
1.2.4.2 Roller Charging Method
0008-4075
The primary charging roller is made of conducting rubber. Compared with the corona charging method, it requires a lower level of application voltage and
generates less ozone.
Some primary charging rollers apply only a DC bias, while some use the result of adding an AC bias to a DC bias. An AC bias functions to help make the
surface potential of the photosensitive drum uniform; as such, primary charging rollers using an AC bias are free of the need to expose the photosensitive
drum prior to primary charging.

Primary charging roller

Primary charging roller

Photosensitive drum
AC bias
Photosensitive drum
DC bias

F-1-11

1.2.4.3 Corona Charging Method

0008-4076
The corona of the primary charging wire charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to a uniform potential (primary potential). In general, an OPC
drum is charged to a negative po-tential, and an amorphous silicon drum is charged to a positive potential.
The surface potential of the photosensitive drum is determined by the potential of the grid, and a bias is applied to the grid. Some copiers, however, do not
apply a bias to the grid; instead, they are designed to maintain a specific level of potential by grounding through a varistor.

1-7
 Chapter 1

Primary charging
assembly

Photosensitive drum

Photosensitive drum

F-1-12

1.2.5 Exposure
1.2.5.1 Exposure
0008-4077
The optical light obtained by exposing an original is directed to the uniformly charged sur-face of the photosensitive drum. In the case of a digital machine,
laser light is guided to the drum sur-face (laser exposure); in the case of an analog machine, on the other hand, the light of a scanning lamp is directed to
an original, and the reflected light is guided to the drum surface.
The area of the photosensitive drum exposed to light is commonly referred to as the "light area" and the area not exposed to light, the "dark area."

Optical image Optical image

Dark area Light area Dark area Light area

F-1-13

1.2.6 Development
1.2.6.1 Outline
0008-4079
In development, the static image formed on the photosensitive drum is turned into a vis-ible image.
The developing cylinder is coated with a uniform layer of toner, which is moved to the light or dark area on the photosensitive drum, forming a visible
image.
1.2.6.2 Construction of the Developing Assembly
0008-4080
a. Outline
A gap exists between the blade and the cylinder, and the cylinder is rotated to enable the formation of a thin, uniform layer of toner.
The developer used may be either of the following two types:
- 1-component toner: consisting of magnetite and resin
- 2-component toner: consisting of toner (resin and dye) and carrier (iron powder)
For details of the developer, see. "Electrophotograpy".
b. Toner Coating
b.1 Magnetic Blade Method
A developing assembly which uses a magnetic blade consists of a developing cylinder composed of a magnet fixed in position and a cylinder rotating
around it and a magnetic blade. The toner used has insulating characteristics, and takes on electric charges under fric-tion against the rotating cylinder. An
AC bias and a DC bias are simultaneously applied to the developing cylinder and the blade (called "developing assembly".)
A concentrated magnetic field exists at all times from the magnet to the magnetic blade, at-tracting toner. The bonding inside the magnetic field is so strong
that the toner remains virtu-ally immobile and ensures a stable, uniform deposit on the cylinder.

1-8
 Chapter 1

Toner
Blade

Blade

Concentrated Toner
magnetic field

Magnet Magnet
Cylinder Developing
Magnet cylinder

F-1-14

b.2 Non-Magnetic Blade Method

A developing assembly which uses a non-magnetic blade consists of a developing cylinder composed of a magnet fixed in place and a cylinder that rotates
around it and a non-magnetic blade, which is either non-magnetic metal or rubber. A developing bias (AC + DC) is applied to the developing cylinder and
a blade (if not rubber).
A rubber blade, if used, is forced against the cylinder; the resulting friction causes the toner to become charged, and the flexibility of the rubber is used to
ensure a think, uniform coating of toner on the cylinder.
In the case of a 2-component developer, the magnetic field around the fixed magnet mounted inside the cylinder is used to deposit toner (with iron powder)
on the surface of the cylinder; the toner is then evened out by a blade into a thin, uniform layer. The toner and the carrier are charged to opposite polarities
as the result of friction between them.
Using Rubber Blade
Rubber blade

Cylinder Developing
Magnet cylinder

F-1-15

Using 2-Component Developer

Blade

--
--
--
-

Cylinder

Photosensitive Magnet
drum

Toner
F-1-16

1.2.6.3 Developing Bias

0008-4081
The level of the developing bias significantly affects the formation of images.
The AC bias (particularly its frequency) mostly affects the gradation of images. Unless the frequency is appropriate, the copies are likely to show fogging
or similar faults.
The DC bias, on the other hand, affects the density of copies (in some cases causing fog-ging), and the density may be varied by adjusting the level of the
DC bias.
The AC component and the DC component of a developing bias may be said to have the following relationship:
- If the DC component of the developing bias is positive, the positive component is greater than the negative component.
- If the DC component of the developing bias is negative, the negative component is larger than the positive component.
In a color copier, a double blank bias and a DC bias are simultaneously applied (develop-ing bias) to enhance the reproduction of highlight areas.

1-9
 Chapter 1

Waveform Indicating the Larger Component

Positive component

Negative component

DC bias
F-1-17

Waveform Showing Double Blank Pulses

0V 0V

DC bias DC bias
Normal waveform Double-blank pulse waveform

F-1-18

1.2.6.4 Developing Method

0008-4082
The toner layer deposited on the developing cylinder is moved to the static image formed on the photosensitive drum, turning it into a visible image.
The development method may be a toner projection method (using 1-component toner) or a magnetic brush method (using 2-component toner). For details,
see. "Electro-photograpy".
In development, toner is attracted to the photosensitive drum or repelled to the cylinder depending on the polarity of the charged toner, polarity of the light/
dark area on the surface of the photosensitive drum, and developing bias applied.
The charging polarity and the bias differ between analog copiers and digital copiers and between amorphous silicon drums and OPC drums and according
to machine construction/configuration.
The following figure shows how toner is attracted to the photosensitive drum and repelled to the devel-oping cylinder by the work of the AC component
and the DC component of the developing bias.

Positive component (attracted to photosensitive drum) Positive component (repelled to developing cylinder)

0V

DC bias(-) AC bias DC bias(+) AC bias

0V

Negative component (repelled to developing cylinder) Negative component (attracted to photosensitive drum)

F-1-19

1-Component Method
Toner
Blade

Cylinder Developing
Magnet cylinder
F-1-20

2-Component Method
Toner Carrier

Photosensitive
drum
Static Developing
image cylinder
area

F-1-21

1-10
 Chapter 1

1.2.7 Attraction
1.2.7.1 Outline
0008-4084
It is a mechanism in which paper is attracted to and retained on a transfer member (e.g., transfer drum), and is mainly used in color copiers.
The attraction mechanism may be any of the following three types:
1.2.7.2 Corona Attraction
0008-4085
An attraction charging assembly and an attraction roller are located where paper comes into contact with the transfer drum. Application of an attraction
bias causes the attraction charging assembly to start corona discharge, charging the inner side of the transfer drum sheet; in response, the attraction roller
grounded to the outside of the transfer drum emits charges whose polarity is opposite that of the attraction bias.
The work of these charges attracts the paper to the transfer drum sheet.
If the attraction bias is a positive bias,

Transfer drum sheet

Push-on sheet
Attraction charging assembly

Paper

Attraction roller

F-1-22

1.2.7.3 Brush Attraction

0008-4086
An attraction brush and an attraction push-on roller are located where paper comes into contact with the transfer drum.
The attraction brush remains in contact with the inner side of the transfer drum sheet, and is supplied with a bias, serving to attract paper to the transfer sheet.
The smoothing brush and the smoothing roller are used to even out the charges on the at-tracted paper.
If the bias applied to the attraction brush is positive,

Transfer drum sheet

Smoothing brush
Attraction smoothing roller

Attraction
brush
Attraction
push-on
roller

Paper
F-1-23

1.2.7.4 Attraction to the Transfer Belt

0008-4087
In the case of a copier equipped with a transfer belt for its transfer process, attraction oc-curs as part of the transfer process.
For details, see "Transfer by a Transfer Belt and a Transfer Blade".
1.2.8 Pre-Transfer Charging
1.2.8.1 Pre-Transfer Charging
0008-4101
AC corona discharge including a DC bias of the same polarity as that of the toner on the surface of the photosensitive drum exposes the surface of the drum
to optimize the charges of the toner and to remove excess charges from the surface, thereby increasing the efficiency of transfer and facilitating separation
of paper.

1-11
 Chapter 1

Pre-transfer
charging
assembly

F-1-24

1.2.9 Transfer
1.2.9.1 Outline
0008-4102
Transfer may be any of the following:
- by roller
- by corona
- by brush
- by transfer belt and transfer blade
- by intermediate transfer drum
1.2.9.2 Transfer by a Roller
0008-4103
A charging roller directly charges the back of paper using the polarity opposite that of the toner, thereby transferring the toner image on the photosensitive
drum to the paper.
The transfer charging roller is made of conductive rubber. Compared with the corona trans-fer method, it requires a lower level of application voltage and
generates little ozone. Only a DC bias is applied to the transfer roller.

Transfer
Transfer guide plates
roller

F-1-25

In the roller transfer method, the toner image on the photosensitive drum can adhere to the transfer roller instead of moving to paper, as is the case when
a jam occurs. To prevent soil-ing the back of paper by the toner-coated transfer roller, a bias of the same polarity as that of the toner is applied during initial
rotation to return the toner from the transfer roller to the photosensitive drum.

Transfer roller

F-1-26

1.2.9.3 Transfer by a Corona

0008-4105
A corona discharge is used to transfer images; the back of paper may be directly charged or indirectly charged through the transfer drum.

a. Directly Charging the Paper

1-12
 Chapter 1

A corona charge of the polarity opposite that of the toner is applied to the back of paper, thereby inducing charges on the back of paper to attract the toner
image from the photosen-sitive drum.
The mechanism found in the roller transfer method is enabled by the transfer guide in this method.

Photosensitive
drum

Paper

Transfer/separation
charging assembly

F-1-27

MEMO:
- Transfer Guide
In general, the transfer guide is grounded through a varistor to prevent transfer faults or soiling the back of paper. If the transfer guide was grounded
directly, the charges that must be deposited to the back of paper would escape, causing transfer faults. If it was not grounded (floated), on the other hand,
the transfer guide would be charged, attracting toner and, consequently, soiling the back of paper.

b.Transfer Drum (corona)

This method is used mostly in color copiers.
The back of paper (from the inner side of the transfer drum) is charged where it comes into contact with the photosensitive drum by means of corona
discharge, thereby charging the inner side of the transfer drum sheet to a positive potential and, consequently attracting toner from the photosensitive drum.
In the case of a full 4-color copy, this operation is repeated four times to generate a single copy image.

Transfer drum sheet

Push-on sheet

Photosensitive drum

Paper

F-1-28

1.2.9.4 Transfer by a Brush

0008-4109
This method is used mostly in color copiers.
The transfer brush is brought into contact with the inner side of the transfer drum where paper comes into contact with the photosensitive drum, and a bias
is applied directly by the brush to transfer the toner image from the photosensitive drum to paper.
In the cause of a full 4-color copy, this operation is repeated four times to generate a single copy image.

Paper

Photosensitive drum

Transfer brush

Transfer drum

F-1-29

1-13
 Chapter 1

1.2.9.5 Transfer by a Transfer Belt and a Transfer Blade

0008-4111
This method is used mostly in color copiers.
A high-voltage constant current is applied through a blade to the back of paper (from the inner side of the transfer belt) where paper comes into contact
with the photosensitive drum for each color station, thereby transferring the toner image on the photosensitive drum to pa-per. In the case of a full-color
copy, this operation is repeated four times (for four colors) to generate a single copy image.
The charging used for transfer is also made use of when attracting paper to the transfer belt; in other words, transfer is executed at the same time as paper
is attracted to the transfer belt.

--
Photosensitive --
drum
- Paper
--
--

Transfer belt

Transfer blade

F-1-30

1.2.9.6 Transfer by an Intermediate Transfer Drum

0008-4112
This method is used mostly in color copiers, and the descriptions that follow are true of color copiers.

a. Primary Transfer
If the primary transfer bias applied to the intermediate transfer drum is positive, the fol-lowing will take place:
A positive charge is applied to the inner side of the intermediate transfer drum to transfer the toner image on the photosensitive drum to the intermediate
transfer drum. This operation is repeated for each color in sequence (Y, M, C, Bk).
To make a full-color copy, four colors (toners) are deposited on the intermediate transfer drum for primary transfer, requiring stronger attraction to counter
the increased negatively charged toner on the intermediate transfer drum for the second and subsequent colors. To this end, most copiers increase the level
of the DC bias (positive) after the first color when making full-color copies.

1-14
 Chapter 1

Toner

Photosensitive
drum
Conducting layer
Aluminum layer

ITD

DC bias

F-1-31

b. Secondary Pre-Transfer Charging

A bias which is the result of combining AC and DC biases is applied to the secondary pre-transfer charging assembly, subjecting the toner on the
intermediate transfer drum to an appropriate bias and, ultimately, increasing the efficiency of secondary transfer.

Secondary
pre-transfer
charging assembly

ITD

AC bias

DC bias

F-1-32

c. Secondary Transfer
The toner on the intermediate transfer drum is transferred to paper. The paper is forced against the intermediate transfer drum as the secondary transfer
belt moves up. At this time, a DC bias (with the polarity opposite that of the toner) is applied to the secondary transfer belt, thereby transferring the toner
on the intermediate transfer drum to the paper. Some copiers vary the level of the DC bias applied to the secondary transfer belt according to the type of
paper and the site environment.
The application of a DC bias to the secondary transfer belt continuously could induce charges whose polarity is opposite that of the bias applied, affecting
separation. To remove charges and thereby preventing such a problem, a bias whose polarity is opposite that of the bias applied to the transfer belt is
generated at the end of secondary transfer.

1-15
 Chapter 1

In addition, to prevent soiling the back of paper during initial multiple rotation, a DC bias is applied to return the toner on the surface of the secondary
transfer belt to the intermediate transfer medium.
To prevent overcharging the secondary transfer belt (as occurring when a DC bias is ap-plied to the belt continuously), a DC bias whose polarity is opposite
that of the bias applied to the transfer belt is applied to the separation charging assembly immediately after the end of secondary transfer.

ITD

Paper

Secondary transfer belt assembly

DC bias

F-1-33

1.2.10 Separation
1.2.10.1 Outline
0008-4127
The separation method may be based on any of the following:
- Curvature separation, which makes use of the rigidity of paper for separation from the photosensitive drum.
- Static separation, in which an AC corona discharge combined with a DC bias is applied to the back of paper for separation from the photosensitive drum.
- Separation claw/push-up roll, in which claws are used to lift the leading edge of paper for separation from the photosensitive drum. The claws are often
combined with rolls and a separation charging assembly to assist separation.
1.2.10.2 Curvature Separation
0008-4128
In the curvature separation method, the rigidity of paper is made use of to separate paper from the photosensitive drum or the transfer belt. The paper,
however, has low rigidity, tending to cause separation faults. To ensure good separation, a separation static eliminator is usually used to apply a voltage
whose polarity is opposite that of the transfer bias, thus weakening the static bonding and, ultimately, facilitating separation.
In the case of a copier equipped with an auto duplexing or overlay function, application of the same level of voltage for separation of the second and first
sides could lead to double transfer because of the increased resistance of paper. To prevent such a problem, the level of voltage is lowered for separation
of the second side.
Separation from the Photosensitive Drum

Transfer roller

Static eliminator

F-1-34

1-16
 Chapter 1

Separation from the Transfer Belt

Separation charging assembly

Paper

Transfer belt

F-1-35

1.2.10.3 Static Separation

0008-4131
Paper is retained by static bonding to the surface of the photosensitive drum by the work of a bias. An AC corona charge to which a DC bias whose polarity
is the opposite of that used for transfer is applied to the back of the paper to break the static bonding, thereby separating the paper from the photosensitive
drum.
In machines equipped with an auto duplexing/overlaying function, using the same level of voltage for the DC bias applied to separate both first and second
sides of a sheet would lead to re-transfer, as noted with a static eliminator used in a curvature method. To prevent such a problem, the level of voltage used
for the DC bias when separating the second side is reduced from that used when separating the first side.

Photosensitive
drum
Paper

Transfer/separation
charging assembly

F-1-36

1.2.10.4 Separation Claw and Separation Push-Up Roll

0008-4134
A combination of separation claws and rolls is used in machines with a transfer drum (for the transfer drum).
Paper is separated from the transfer drum by claws and rolls; since it is retained on the transfer drum by the work of static bonding, an AC corona charge
and a DC bias are applied by the separation charging assembly to facilitate separation of paper from the transfer drum.

Separation
charging
assembly

Separation claw
Separation push-up roll

Transfer drum sheet

F-1-37

1.2.11 Fixing
1.2.11.1 Outline
0008-4135
In terms of methods, fixing may be classified into two types: SURF method, which uses a flat heater, film, and pressure rollers; and a roller method, which
uses a halogen heater and two fixing rollers. Details of each are as follows:

1-17
 Chapter 1

1.2.11.2 SURF Method

0008-4137
After transfer and separation, paper is moved between a fixing film and a pressure roller, during which the toner image is fused. The fixing film is made
of a special material, and has a seamless construction. It is designed so that it will not draw melting toner, not requiring a cleaning mechanism.
The fixing heater is flat in shape, and is designed so that only areas that come into contact with the fixing film and paper may be heated. This way, it does
not require pre-heating, thus eliminating the need for warm-up time.
The temperature of the fixing heater is monitored by a thermistor mounted to the fixing heater assembly, and is controlled so that it will remain at a specific
level at all times.
To remove toner from the pressure roller and to discharge heat, a fixing cleaning roller is used in some machines.

Main thermistor
Sub thermistor
Fixing film

Fixing heater

Toner

Paper
Pressure roller
Fixing cleaning roller
F-1-38

1.2.11.3 Roller Method

0008-4138
In this method, paper is sandwiched between heat rollers so that heat and pressure serve to fuse the toner to the paper.
In general, a low-speed machine uses a roller with a thin coating to reduce the pre-heat time and warm-up time.
The rollers are heated by a halogen heater or the like.
To prevent jams occurring as a result of paper wrapping around the roller or to prevent offset, some machines keep a web impregnated with silicone oil in
contact with the upper fixing roller, while some machines use felt or a roller to apply silicone oil to the surface of the fixing roller. (There are machines
which make use of both sides of the web.)
To prevent offset of toner, some machines apply a DC bias to the upper fixing roller, thereby returning toner (tending to adhere to the upper fixing roller)
to paper.

One Fixing Heater,

Using Fixing Bias

Web

Web

Upper roller Oil application

Cleaning
Halogen heaters
Halogen heater
Fixing bias
Toner Upper roller

Paper Paper
Lower roller
Lower roller
F-1-39

1-18
 Chapter 1

Cleaning web Oil applying roller

Oil applying felt

Upper fixing web

Upper
fixing
roller Lower fixing web Upper fixing
(CLC1000 only) roller

Silicone oil

Lower fixing
roller
Oil removing blade
Lower fixing Oil removing
roller blade
F-1-40

1.2.12 Drum Cleaning

1.2.12.1 Drum Cleaning
0008-4139
The photosensitive drum is cleaned by a cleaning blade. Some machines use an integrated unit that houses the photosensitive drum and the cleaning
mechanism, while some have an independent mechanism that collects waste toner inside the photosensitive drum or a special waste toner box.
The cleaning blade scrapes toner remaining on the surface of the photosensitive drum; the toner is then collected by a scoop-up sheet or a cleaning roller,
and is moved toward the rear of the cleaning unit.
To ensure contact between the photosensitive drum and the cleaning blade, and also to prevent cleaning faults, some machines deposit a thin, uniform
coating on the surface of the photosensitive drum using a magnetic brush or a magnetic roller.
EX 1 Integrated with the Photosensitive Drum
Cleaning blade

Blade Scoop-up
sheet
F-1-41

EX 2 Independent
Cleaning blade

Photosensitive
drum

Waste toner
feed screw
Scoop-up sheet
F-1-42

1-19
 Chapter 1

EX Equipped with a Magnetic Roller

Cleaning blade

Photosensitive
drum

Waste toner Magnetic roller

feed screw
F-1-43

1-20
 Chapter 1

1.3 Other Process Mechanisms

1.3.1 Outline
1.3.1.1 Outline
0008-4141
Various auxiliary processes may be used in image formation. The type and the presence/absence of a specific process differ from model to model.
1.3.2 Blank Exposure
1.3.2.1 Blank Exposure
0008-4143
Blank exposure eliminates the surface potential of the photosensitive drum occurring in non-image areas caused by different paper sizes or in reduction
mode so that the area will be free of adhesion of toner.
In general, surface potential may be removed as follows:
- Use the light of the pre-exposure lamp.
- Provide a special LED array unit, and turn on as many LEDs as needed.
- Use a laser beam (turning it on or off).
The following figure shows a mechanism in which the pre-exposure lamp is used as the source of light and a shutter is used to change the area.

Blank exposure
Reflecting
optical path
Pre-exposure plates
lamp Mirror

Reflecting plate
Reflecting
plate Shutter Sheet-to-sheet
blank exposure
optical path
Pre-exposure
optical path

Photosensitive
drum

F-1-44

1.3.3 Drum Separation Claws

1.3.3.1 Drum Separation Claws
0008-4151
If paper fails to separate from the photosensitive drum because of a fault in separation charging or the like, it can advance into the cleaner assembly. To
prevent such a problem, separation claws are mounted to the bottom of the cleaner assembly to force off any paper failing to separate.

Photosensitive
drum

Separation
claw

F-1-45

1.3.4 Eliminating Static Electricity in Delivery

1.3.4.1 Eliminating Static Electricity in Delivery
0008-4154
Immediately before delivery, paper holds residual charges from transfer. A grounded static eliminating brush may be mounted to the delivery slot to remove
the charges, thereby ensur-ing good stacking upon delivery.

1-21
 Chapter 1

Static eliminating brush

Delivery rollers

Delivery tray

F-1-46

1.3.5 Roller Electrode

1.3.5.1 Roller Electrode
0008-4155
A DC bias whose polarity is opposite that of toner is applied to a roller electrode to at-tract excess toner from the surface of the photosensitive drum, thereby
preventing soiling of the pre-transfer charging assembly and the transfer charging assembly.

Developing
assembly

Roller electrode
F-1-47

1.3.6 Ozone Filter

1.3.6.1 Ozone Filter
0008-4156
To prevent discharge of ozone generated by the various charging assemblies, the exhaust fan assembly and the feed fan assembly may be equipped with a
catalytic filter for ozone.
1.3.7 Cleaning of the Primary
1.3.7.1 Cleaning of the Primary Charging Roller
0008-4157
The primary charging roller may be cleaned to make it free of toner.

1-22
 Chapter 1

Primary charging roller Fulcrum Cleaner pad

cleaning solenoid Fulcrum

Primary
charging roller

Drum unit
Drum
F-1-48

1.3.8 Static Eliminating Assembly

1.3.8.1 Static Eliminating Assembly
0008-4158
The static eliminating assembly is used to remove the charges applied to the transfer sheet and the transfer belt during transfer.
- Removing Charges from the Transfer Drum

External static
Internal static
eliminating assembly
eliminating assembly

Transfer drum sheet

F-1-49

- Removing Charging from the Transfer Belt

Internal static eliminating

charging roller
Transfer belt
Cleaning web

F-1-50

1.3.9 Pre-Cleaning Charging

1.3.9.1 Pre-Cleaning Charging Assembly
0008-4160
An AC or DC bias is applied during copying operation to prevent traces of paper and re-move charges from the surface of the photosensitive drum.

1-23
 Chapter 1

- Typical Model: CLC300

Pre-cleaning charging assembly

Photosensitive
drum

F-1-51

1.3.10 Post-Cleaning Charging

1.3.10.1 Post-Cleaning Charging Assembly
0008-4163
Transfer charging can cause memory on the photosensitive drum, resulting in unexpected images on copies. To prevent such a problem, the surface
potential of the photosensitive drum is evened out by applying a bias whose polarity is the same as that used in primary charging.

Post-cleaning charging assembly

Photosensitive drum

F-1-52

1.3.11 Transfer Drum Cleaning

1.3.11.1 Transfer Drum Cleaning
0008-4164
The transfer cleaner is used to remove dirt from the transfer drum sheet.
The transfer drum cleaner may be either a brush type or a roller type, selected to suit the type of machine.
Brush Type
Transfer drum sheet

Scraping sheet

Internal brush
External brush

F-1-53

1-24
 Chapter 1

Roller Type

Transfer drum sheet

Transfer cleaner 1

Transfer cleaner 2
(oil removing roller)

Transfer cleaner 3
(polishing roller)
F-1-54

1.3.12 Cleaning the IntermediateTransfer Drum (ITD)

1.3.12.1 Outline
0008-4166
Machines equipped with an intermediate transfer drum (ITD) for the transfer process come with a special cleaning mechanism to remove toner from the
ITD occurring when toner transferred from the photosensitive drum to the ITD is transferred once again to paper.
The descriptions that follow are on a mechanism in which the toner on the ITD is returned to the photosensitive drum.
1.3.12.2 Charging by an ITD Cleaning Roller
0008-4167
A bias is applied to the ITD cleaning roller as needed to charge the toner remaining on the ITD.
The ITD cleaning roller normally remains away from the ITD, and it comes into contact with the ITD when charging takes place. A bias whose polarity is
the opposite that of the residual toner is applied to the ITD cleaning roller to charge the toner on the ITD to a uni-form potential.
At the end of charging, the bias is turned off and, at the same time, the cleaning roller is moved away from the ITD.
- Typical Model: CP660

Charged residual toner

ITD cleaning roller

ITD cleaning ITD

drive cam

AC bias

DC bias

Residual
toner
F-1-55

1.3.12.3 Cleaning the Intermediate Transfer Drum (ITD)

0008-4172
A bias is applied to the photosensitive drum and the ITD in different ways so that the toner charged to an even potential by the ITD cleaning roller is
returned from the ITD to the photosensitive drum.
The application of different biases creates a difference in potential between the photosen-sitive drum and the ITD, causing the toner to be attracted to the
photosensitive drum from the ITD.
The toner is then removed by the photosensitive drum cleaning mechanism.

1-25
 Chapter 1

Typical Model: CP660

Primary charging roller
Waste toner case
Photosensitive drum
Photosensitive
drum cartridge

Primary
charging bias

Charged residual toner

ITD cleaning roller

ITD cleaning drive cam ITD

DC bias

Potential on ITD > Potential on Photosensitive Drum

F-1-56

MEMO:
In addition to applying a bias by the ITD cleaning roller, some models apply a bias to clean the ITD using the primary charging, primary transfer, or
secondary transfer mechanism to return the residual toner to the photosen-sitive drum.

1.3.13 Pre-Primary Charging

1.3.13.1 Pre-Primary Charging
0008-4189
Pre-primary charging is used to prevent memory on the drum surface otherwise caused by a transfer bias. While pre-exposure takes place, a bias whose
polarity is opposite that used in transfer is applied to induce a corona charge, removing localized positive charges remaining on the surface of the
photosensitive drum.

Pre-exposure
lamp

Pre-primary
charging -
---
---
assembly ---
-
+
-
- +
+ + Photosensitive
- drum
F-1-57

1.3.14 Pre-Fixing Charging

1.3.14.1 Pre-Fixing Charging
0008-4195
The toner on paper after separation charging is more or less neutral, and is apt to move when paper moves along its path.
A corona charge is applied by the pre-fixing charging assembly immediately after separa-tion to increase the bonding of toner to the paper, thus preventing
stray toner and toner off-set otherwise likely when toner is fused to the paper.

1-26
 Chapter 1

Pre-fixing charging assembly

Paper

Transfer belt
F-1-58

1.3.15 Cleaning the Transfer Belt

1.3.15.1 Cleaning the Transfer Belt
0008-4197
The following figure shows means used to clean the transfer belt, while the following table describes the function of each.

Transfer belt

Polishing roller Oil removing

roller

Transfer belt cleaning blade Transfer belt cleaning web

F-1-59

T-1-1

Transfer belt cleaning blade
Transfer belt cleaning web
Oil removing roller
Polishing roller
Removes toner deposited on the transfer belt during
registration control; removes oil adhering to the transfer
belt.
Removes oil adhering to the transfer belt after making a
double-sided copy.
Makes the surface of the transfer belt rough to prevent
transfer of oil from the transfer belt to the photosensitive
drum; in addition, removes paper lint from the belt.

1.3.16 Grounding Roller

1.3.16.1 Grounding Roller
0008-4202
The potential of the transfer belt differs between areas in contact with paper and areas not in contact with paper. To eliminate the difference and to increase
the efficiency of cleaning in the next process, it is grounded by means of a grounding roller.

F-1-60

1-27
 Chapter 1

1.4 Limitations in Processes in Color Copies

1.4.1 Outline
1.4.1.1 Outline
0008-4206
A color copier makes use of various ideas in processes to improve gradation and color re-production.
It is, however, very difficult to fully solve the physical limitations described later, not al-lowing the output to reach the level expected of professionally
printed matter.
It is important, therefore, that the user fully realize that a color copier cannot always re-produce all color originals as they are, as is generally believed.
1.4.2 Physical Limitations
1.4.2.1 Physical Limitations
0008-4207
The sensitivity of a photosensitive medium changes in response to changes in the environ-ment and over time.
1.4.2.2 Spectral Reflectance of Toner
0008-4209
Each toner (Y, M, C) representing one of the three primary colors must fully absorb light of its complementary color and reflect the rest. In reality, however,
no such toner exists.
1.4.2.3 Gradation in Dry-Type Electrophotography
0008-4217
As shown in the following figure, reproduction of a density exactly as it appears on the original is not possible because of the physical properties of
photosensitive material and toner.
The use of power toner, in addition, prevents reproduction of an image to a level of detail finer than each particle of the toner.

1.5
Silver halide photo
Copy density (Dp)

1.0

Ideal

0.5

PPC

0 0.5 1.0 1.5

Original density (Do)
F-1-61

Thanks to the various mechanisms introduced to control image processing in the scanner unit and the surface potential of the photosensitive drum, these
issues have been solved to the extent that they are virtually not recognizable in copy images.

1-28
 Chapter 1

1.5 Basic Sequence of Operations

1.5.1 Outline
1.5.1.1 Outline
0008-4219
A copier's sequence of operations is controlled by a program stored in the CPU mounted to its control PCB.
A copier, for instance, moves from WMUP (warm-up) in response to a signal from the temperature sensor of its fixing assembly (input signal from a
thermistor), to WMUPR (warm-up rotation), and then to STBY (standby).
When the Copy Start key is pressed, on the other hand, it moves from STBY (standby) to INTR (initial rotation). The following figure show the sequence
in phases of a typical copier.
Example of Sequence 1
Main power Control panel power Control panel power
switch ON switch ON Copy Start key ON switch OFF

SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY INTR SCFW SCFW LSTR STBY SLEEP
AER

SCRV

SCRV
F-1-62

Example of Sequence 2
DSRDY CNTR COPY LSTR STBY

F-1-63

T-1-2

Period Purpose Remarks

SLEEP When the main power switch To save power by If the machine is
(sleep) is on while the control panel limiting the supply to equipped with a fax
power switch is off. loads currently in need function, it will
of power. (The state of automatically turn on in
supply differs from response to reception of
model to model.) a fax message and print
it.
WMUP From when the power switch To wait until the fixing Some models provide an
(warm-up) is turned on to when the roller heats up. auto start function.
surface temperature of the
upper fixing roller reaches a
specific level.
WMUPR From when the surface To even out the surface The period of rotation
(warm-up temperature of the fixing temperature of the fixing varies depending on how
rotation) roller reaches a specific level roller. fast the surface
to when it rotates for a temperature of the upper
specific period of time and fixing roller increases.
stops.
AINT From when the surface To even out the surface The surface potential of
(multiple ini-tial temperature of the fixing potential of the drum. the drum is measured
rotation) roller reaches a specific level and controlled.
to when it rotates for a
specific period of time and
stops.
STBY From when AINTR, To wait for a key
(standby) WMUPR, or LSTR ends to operation.
when the Coy Start key is
pressed or the power switch is
turned off.
DSRDY From when the Copy Start To execute original
(original scan- key is pressed to when the detecting scanning or
ner ready) transfer drum starts to rotate. shading correction.

1-29
 Chapter 1

Period Purpose Remarks

INTR From when the Copy Start - To stabilize the
(initial rota-tion) key is pressed to when the sensitivity of the drum to
scanner starts to move prepare for copying.
forward or pre-scanning (PR- - To execute shading
SCAN) starts. correction.
CNTR From when DSRDY ends to To pick up paper for
(control rota- when attraction of paper measuring and
tion) starts. controlling of the
surface potential of the
drum.
SCFW While the scanner is moving To expose the original The distance and the
(scanner for- forward. by the scanning lamp. speed at which the
ward) scanner travels forward
differ according to the
selected paper size and
reproduction ratio.
SCRV While the scanner is moving To return the scanner to
(scanner re- in re-verse. home position in
verse) preparing for the next
copy.
COPY When attraction of paper to To develop and transfer
(copy) the trans-fer drum starts to a specific color by
when all toner is transferred turning on and off the
to the paper (for machines laser beam using video
equipped with a transfer signals.
drum mecha-nism).
LSTR From when SVCRV or - To discharge paper.
(last rotation) COPY ends to when paper is - To clean the
delivered. photosensitive drum.
- To remove charges
from (clean) the transfer
drum.

1-30
 Chapter 1

1.6 Controlling the Main Motor

1.6.1 Outline
0008-4245
The most common type of motor found in copiers is a DC motor.
A copier drives its functional parts using the rotation of its main motor transmitted through clutches and gears as needed, and this operation is controlled
by the copier's control PCB.
Some copiers use multiple motors, each for a specific function.
A copier's main motor is usually controlled for the following:
- Turning On/Off
Rotates or stops the motor at specific timing.
- Controlling to a Specific Speed
Controls the motor to a specific speed of rotation.
- Switching the Speed
Switches the speed of the motor at specific timing.
- Detecting an Error
Checks the rotation of the motor for a fault (e.g., not rotating at specific timing).

1-31
 Chapter 1

1.7 Types of Accessories

1.7.1 Outline
1.7.1.1 Outline
0008-4054
Figure 1-1 shows typical accessories designed for a copier.

ADF/DADF

NP editor
RDF (w/ editor)
Film projector

DF(for large-copy model) RDF-B1

Stapler sorter
(10-bin type) C.F.F. RDF-A1 Sub feeder

Film projector

Sorter Stapler sorter

(20-bin type) (20-bin type)

Film scanner

Multioutput tray
(3-bin type)
Multioutput tray
(12-bin type) Finisher
F-1-64

1.7.2 Functions of Accessories

1.7.2.1 Functions of Accessories
0008-4083
The following table shows accessories grouped by functions, and provides a description of each function.

1-32
 Chapter 1

T-1-3

System Accessory Description

Original RDF It is a document feeding machine capable of automatically
handling moving multiple originals placed on the original tray to the
copyboard glass; at the end of copying operation, it moves the
original back to the original tray. It is also capable of reversing
originals, thereby placing them face-up on the copyboard
glass.
Sub feeder It is an auxiliary document feeder (for an RDF) which enables
as many as 100 sheets of paper to be set (used in combination
with an RDF).
ADF/DADF It is a document feeding machine capable of automatically
moving multiple originals placed on the original tray to the
copyboard glass; at the end of copying operation, it moves the
original back to the original tray.
C.F.F It is a document feeding machine capable of automatically
feeding a computer (continuous) sheet for copying.
DF It is a document feeding machine capable of automatically
moving a single original to the copyboard glass; it discharges
the original at the end of copying operation.
Delivery Sorter, A sorter automatically sorts or groups sheets of paper upon
Stapler sorter delivery.
A stapler sorer is capable of automatically stapling sorted or
grouped sheets of paper.
Finisher
Shift tray, A shift tray shifts the tray back and forth to automatically sort
Multioutput or group sheets of paper.
tray A multioutput tray allows selection of a tray to suit a specific
mode (copier, fax, or printer). In addition, by shifting the tray
back and forth, it is capable of automatically sorting or
grouping sheets of paper.
Saddle It is a machine used to bind sheets of paper upon delivery.
stitcher
Folder It is a machine used to fold sheets of paper while moving them
after delivery from the copier.
Inserter It is a machine used to feed a cover for attachment to a bound
or stapled stack of sheets.
Editing Editor It comes with an editor pen with which to select an area for
various image processing (framing, blanking) and character
input.
Original Film projector It is used to project images of negative or positive film on the
input copyboard glass by means of a projector lamp for copying.
Film scanner It is used to read images of negative or positive film by means
of a CCD; after digital image processing, it sends the result as
image data to the copier or a controller for copying or further
processing.

1.7.3 Power Supply for Accessories

1.7.3.1 Power Supply for Accessories
0008-4098
An accessory requires a power supply to operate, often referred to as an "ccessories power supply."
An accessories power supply may be either of the following two:
- From the host copier.
- From its own power supply PCB.
When an accessory obtains power from its host copier, the host copier must be equipped with an accessory power supply PCB; at times, a composite power
supply is used to generate power for accessories. An accessory power supply PCB serves to convert AC input into DC output.
If an accessory is equipped with a power supply PCB of its own, it draws AC input from the power outlet or its host copier, and converts it into DC output
for its own use.

1-33
 Chapter 1

Power Supplied by the Host Copier to the Accessory

Accessories
power supply or Copier
Composite power supply Accessory
(sorter)

Power outlet
DC power from copier
F-1-65

Power Supplied From an External Source to the Accessory

Copier
Accessory
(sorter)

Power outlet Power supply PCB

F-1-66

1.7.4 Communication with the Host Copier

1.7.4.1 Communication with the Host Copier
0008-4106
An accessory communicates with its host copier to coordinate timing of operation and to exchange data on various states (normal, error, etc.) of each other.
In the event an error occurs while an accessory is in operation, the host copier will indicate an error code or a message (Jam, etc.).
Communication may be either of two types: serial or IPC, the latter of which is the primary method of communication at present. Serial communication
relies on the CPU of the machine, while IPC communication uses a dedicated IC, freeing the CPU from an extra load.
Some new models use IPC communication 2, which is an advanced version of IPC communication. It enables faster exchanges of data than IPC
communication so that large volumes of data may be sent at once, ultimately allowing copiers to provide more functions and higher speed.
Serial Communication
Accessory Copier (w/o IPC)

CPU

CPU DACK
DREQ

F-1-67

1-34
 Chapter 1

IPC Communication 2
Accessory Copier (w/ IPC)

DSIN
IPC DSOUT IPC

CPU CPU

F-1-68

1-35
 Chapter 1

1.8 Outline
1.8.1 Outline
0008-4644
A controller connects a digital copier and an external device to provide the copier with printer functions, scanner functions, and fax functions.
A digital copier is equipped with an interface connecting to a controller, while a controller is equipped with an external device interface for connection to
a copier, computer, and network.
A controller operates between a copier interface and an external device interface to process image data and convert control information, thus enabling
exchanges of image data between copier and external device (e.g., computer).

External device Image Copier

processing
interface block interface

Control block

Computer Controller Digital copier

F-1-69

A controller may be a built-in type, designed for integration with a copier, or an external type, designed for installation to a copier as an independent entity.
A built-in type made in the form of a PCB is sometimes called a "functions board."

Built-in type External type

F-1-70

In general, a controller for a black-and-white digital copier is designed as a built-in type, while one for a color copier is designed as an external type.

1-36
 Chapter 1

1.9 Mechanisms of a Controller

1.9.1 Printer Functions
1.9.1.1 Printer Functions
0008-4645
A controller for printer functions is also called a "printer board," "color server," or the like.
A printer controller is equipped with an IEEE1284 parallel port for an external device interface and a network interface (as for connection to a computer).
A computer converts print data into commands expressed in a page description language (PDL), and sends the result to the printer controller as a print job.
The printer controller receives each print job through an external device interface, and processes it to generate image data that may be printed on a copier.
This operation is sometimes called "raster image processing" (RIP), and the generated image data arrives at the copier for printing through the copier
interface.

External Print data Copier

Print job device processing block interface
(PDL data) interface

PDL Image
data data
Network
interface Image processing (RIP)

Computer Print controller Digital copier

F-1-71

The network interface is either built onto the printer board or mounted to another PCB.
1.9.2 Scanner Functions
1.9.2.1 Scanner Functions
0008-4646
A controller for scanner functions may be a SCSI board designed for a black-and-white copier. Some printer controllers intended for color copiers are
equipped with scanner functions.
The scanner controller receives control information (e.g., on a scan area) through an external interface, and converts it into appropriate commands for the
copier. In response, the copier scans the original, and sends the resulting image data to the scanner controller. The scanner controller processes the image
data according to the instructions it has received in advance (resolution conversion, gradation conversion), and sends the result to the computer through
the external device interface in the form of image data.

Original

Resolution/ External
Image Copier gradation/ Image
data interface conversion memory
device
processing interface
Reader unit

Digital copier Scanner controller Computer

F-1-72

1.9.3 Fax Functions

1.9.3.1 Fax Functions
0008-4647
A controller designed for fax functions may be a fax board intended for a black-and-white digital copier. (There is no fax functions controller for color
copiers.)
For fax transmission, an image is read at a resolution selected for the purpose. The resulting image data (multiple-value) is turned into binary data, and
coded (compressed) using a specific method by the coding/decoding circuit. The coded image data is converted into analog signals using a modem for
transmission over a telephone line through an NCU.

1-37
 Chapter 1

Original

Public
telephone line
Image data Binary Coding/decoding Modem
(multiple- processing circuit (coding) (modu- NCU
value) lation)

Reader unit

Digital copier Fax controller

F-1-73

For fax reception, on the other hand, the analog signals received through an NCU are converted into digital signals using a modem and then restored to
image data by the coding/decoding circuit; the image data is then processed to obtain a specific resolution and printed on the copier.

Public Coding/
telephone line Modem Resolution/
(demodu- decoding conversion Printer unit
NCU circuit B
lation) processing
(decoding)

Printing

Fax controller Digital copier

F-1-74

The coding/decoding circuit for image data may be built to the copier's image processor PCB or to the fax board.

1-38
 Chapter 1

1.10 Line-Up of Products

1.10.1 Line-Up of Black-and-White Copier Controllers
1.10.1.1 Line-Up of Black-and-White Copier Controllers
0008-4648
The following table shows the various controllers designed for black-and-white digital copiers:

T-1-4

Model Printer function Scanner function Fax function

GP160 Series Network Printer Super G3 FAX
Board-J1 Board-G1
Super G4/G3 FAX
Board-B1
GP215/225 Series Network Multi-PDL SCSI Interface G3 FAX Board-C1
Printer Board-D1 Board-C1 Super G3 FAX
Network Printer Board-D1
Board-E1
GP300/400 Series Network Printer SCSI Interface Super G3 FAX
Board-K1 Board-D1 Board-F1
Network Multi-PDL Super G3 Multi-
Printer Board-H1 Line FAX Board-
A1
GP555/605 Series Network Printer
Board-F1

1.10.2 Line-Up of Controllers for Color Copiers

1.10.2.1 Line-Up of Controllers for Color Copiers
0008-4656
The following table shows the various controllers designed for color copiers.

T-1-5

Model Printer function Scanner function

CP660 Network Color PS/PCL Board-A1 No
CLC320 PS-XJ/ColorPASS Yes
CLC700/800 Series PS-XJ/ColorPASS Yes
PS-MX20/ColorPASS-M20 Yes
PS-ZX50/30/ColorPASS V50/30 Yes
CLC900 Series PS-XJ/ColorPASS Yes
PS Board Unit-A1 Yes
PS-MX20/ColorPASS-M20 Yes
PS-MX20e/ColorPASS M20e Yes
PS-ZX50/30/ColorPASS V50/30 Yes
CLC1100 Series PS-MX25/ColorPASS M25 Yes
PS-ZX55/35/ColorPASS V55/35 Yes
CLC1000/2400 PS-XJ8000/ColorPASS8000 Yes
PS-ZX80/ColorPASS V80 Yes

1-39
Chapter 2 FUNDAMENTALS
 Contents

Contents

2.1 Outline of Electrostatographic Technology ...................................................................................................................2-1

2.1.1 Principles of Image Formation..................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 Component Parts .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.2.2 Photosensitive Drum .......................................................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.2.3 Electrostatographic Process ............................................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.3 Exposure ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.3.2 Principles.........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-4
2.1.4 Development ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.1.4.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................2-4
2.1.4.2 Non-Contact Development..............................................................................................................................................................................2-5
2.1.4.3 P/B Development ............................................................................................................................................................................................2-5
2.1.5 Developer ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.1.5.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................2-5
2.1.5.2 Component Development................................................................................................................................................................................2-6
2.1.5.3 1-Component Developer .................................................................................................................................................................................2-6
2.1.6 Transfer ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.1.6.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................2-7
2.1.6.2 Mechanisms.....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-7
2.1.7 Fixing ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.1.7.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.1.7.2 Mechanisms.....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.1.8 Drum Cleaning............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.1.8.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.1.8.2 Mechanism ......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.1.9 Drum Cartridge .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.1.9.1 Background of R&D and Product Planning..................................................................................................................................................2-10
2.1.9.2 Outline of the Drum Cartridge ......................................................................................................................................................................2-10
2.2 Outline of Digital Technology .....................................................................................................................................2-11
2.2.1 Differences from Analog Technology ....................................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.1.1 Definitions.....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-11
2.2.1.2 Sample Applications .....................................................................................................................................................................................2-11
2.2.1.3 Digital and Analog Samples as Found in a Copier .......................................................................................................................................2-11
2.2.1.4 Differences in Construction in the Electrostatographic Method...................................................................................................................2-11
2.2.1.5 Analog and Digital Images in Copiers ..........................................................................................................................................................2-13
2.2.1.6 Basic Construction of a Digital Image ..........................................................................................................................................................2-13
2.2.2 Outline of Image Processing Technology.................................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.2.2.1 Definition ......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-13
2.2.2.2 Image Processing in a Copier........................................................................................................................................................................2-13
2.2.3 Outline of Color Technology ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.2.3.1 Digital Concepts in Color Technology .........................................................................................................................................................2-16
2.2.3.2 Principles of the Digital Color Copier ..........................................................................................................................................................2-17
2.2.3.3 Forming an Image in the Digital Color Copie ..............................................................................................................................................2-19
2.3 Outline of Bubble Jet Technology ...............................................................................................................................2-27
2.3.1 Principles of Image Formation................................................................................................................................................... 2-27
2.3.1.1 BJ Head .........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-27
2.3.1.2 Characteristics of the BJ Method ..................................................................................................................................................................2-28
2.3.2 Outline of BJ Color Technology................................................................................................................................................ 2-28
2.3.2.1 Recording Technology ..................................................................................................................................................................................2-28
2.3.2.2 Characteristics of BJ Recording....................................................................................................................................................................2-28
2.3.3 Regulations and Laws ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-28
 Contents

2.3.3.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-28

2.3.3.2 Items Prohibited for Copying by Law .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2.3.3.3 Items Restricted for Copying ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-29
2.4 Options ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-30
2.4.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-30
2.4.1.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.4.2 Original Handling Devices ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-30
2.4.2.1 Original Handling Devices ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.4.3 Pick-Up Handling Devices ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-30
2.4.3.1 Pick-Up Handling Devices ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.4.4 Delivery Handling Devices........................................................................................................................................................ 2-30
2.4.4.1 Delivery Handling Devices........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.5 Image Input Options.................................................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.5.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-31
2.5.1.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.5.2 Analog Input Devices ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-31
2.5.2.1 Film Projector ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.5.3 Digital Input Devices ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-31
2.5.3.1 Film Scanner ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-31
2.6 Controller Devices....................................................................................................................................................... 2-32
2.6.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-32
2.6.1.1 ntroduction .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-32
2.6.2 Black-and-White Digital Controller .......................................................................................................................................... 2-32
2.6.2.1 Black-and-White Digital Controller ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-32
2.6.3 Color Digital Controller............................................................................................................................................................. 2-32
2.6.3.1 Color Digital Controller................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-32
2.7 Basics of Electricity..................................................................................................................................................... 2-34
2.7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-34
2.7.1.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-34
2.7.2 Basics of Electricity ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-34
2.7.2.1 Voltage and Current...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-34
2.7.2.2 Direct Current and Alternating Current ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-35
2.7.3 Typical Sensors.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.7.3.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.7.3.2 Detecting Overcurrent................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.7.3.3 Detecting the Intensity of Light .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-40
2.7.3.4 Detecting Positions ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-41
2.7.3.5 Detecting Temperature ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-45
2.7.3.6 Detecting Humidity....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-46
2.7.4 Commonly Used Electrical Parts ............................................................................................................................................... 2-47
2.7.4.1 Solenoids....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-47
2.7.4.2 Electromagnetic Clutches ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-47
2.7.4.3 Counter.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-48
2.7.4.4 Stepping Motor (pulse motor)....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-48
2.7.4.5 Ultrasonic Motor........................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-49
2.7.4.6 Halogen Lamp............................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-50
2.7.4.7 Fluorescent Lamps ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-51
2.7.4.8 Relays............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-52
2.7.4.9 SSR (Solid State Relay) ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-53
2.7.4.10 Varistors...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-55
2.7.4.11 CPU (Central Processing Unit)................................................................................................................................................................... 2-56
2.7.4.12 Memory....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-56
2.7.4.13 Table of Symbols ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-59
 Chapter 2

2.1 Outline of Electrostatographic Technology

2.1.1 Principles of Image Formation
2.1.1.1 Outline
0008-2404
The following diagram is a conceptual diagram showing the basic construction of an analog copier.
In general, an image is formed by what is called the "electrostatographic process," which consists of the following six steps:
Step 1 Primary charging
Step 2 Image exposure
Step 3 Development
Step 4 Transfer
Step 5 Fixing
Step 6 Drum cleaning
Conceptual Diagram of the Electrostatographic Process
Original

Image exposure
Primary charging

Drum cleaning

Fixing Development
Copy paper

Transfer

F-2-1

All except step 5 involve the photosensitive drum.

Copies are generated by repeating these steps.
In the following pages, we will study each of the component parts used for the individual steps in terms of how it relates to the overall process of generating
copies. We will also touch upon materials of which the parts are made.
2.1.2 Component Parts
2.1.2.1 Outline
0008-2405
Go through the following while referring to the conceptual diagram of the electrostatographic process (the foregoing diagram).
2.1.2.2 Photosensitive Drum
0008-2406
a. Outline
The photosensitive drum is the heart of any electrostatographic system serving to reproduce images.
The drum is a metal cylinder whose surface is coated with a photoconductive material.
b. Function
The primary function of the photosensitive drum is to produce and retain a latent static image representing the optical image of an original using the
difference in electrical resistance occurring on its photoconductive coating in relation to the presence and the absence of light.
c. Material
Canon's photosensitive drum is made either of the following photoconductive materials:
- OPC (organic photoconductor)
- A-Si (amorphous silicon)
- CdS (cadmium sulfide)
A generation ago, some copiers used CdS. Since all current copiers use photosensitive drums made of OPC or A-Si, we will omit CdS from our discussions.
c-1 OPC
A photosensitive drum that uses OPC is constructed as shown in Figure 2-2.
Substrate: Aluminum
Photoconducting layer: CTL + CGL
Construction of an OPC Coating

CTL
Photoconducting layer
CGL

Substrate
F-2-2

2-1
 Chapter 2

A photoconducting layer is of a two-layer construction consisting of a carrier transport layer (CTL) and a carrier generation layer (CGL)- arrier being the
carrier of electric charges.

c-2 A-Si
A photosensitive drum that uses A-Si is constructed as shown in the following diagram.
Substrate: Aluminum
Photoconducting layer: A-Si + surface layer
Construction of an A-Si Coating

Surface layer
Photoconducting layer
Amorphous silicon

Substrate
F-2-3

The term amorphous means non-crystalline-in other words, amorphous silicon is the same as non-crystalline silicon.
As shown in the following diagrams, the atomic organization of amorphous silicon is characterized by the absence of form, enabling shaping with less
effort into thin membranes than crystalline silicon.

Crystalline silicon Amorphous silicon

F-2-4

T-2-1

Comparison Between Types of Photosensitive Drums

Characteristics OPC A-Si

Type
Charging polarity - +
Durability 3,000 copies (A4) or more 500,000 copies (A4) or more
Cost Excellent Good
Image quality Excellent Excellent
Sensitivity Excellent Excellent
Charge retention High Average
Surface hardness Low High

2.1.2.3 Electrostatographic Process

0008-2407
a. Primary Charging
a-1 Outline
Primary charging is the first of all steps used to generate copies.
To provide the photosensitive drum with a specific sensitivity to light, the drum is charged to a uniform electrical potential.

a-2 Method
Primary charging may be either by a corona charging unit or a charging roller.
Using a corona charging unit, the photosensitive drum may be charged without contact. (The corona charging unit is usually called "charging unit" or
"harging assembly.")
The same physical phenomena may be used but may be known by different names according to the steps in question.
For example, "corona discharging unit," "transfer charging unit," "cleaning charging unit," and "primary charging unit" all operate on the same principles.
A charging roller, on the other hand, charges the photosensitive drum while it is in contact with the drum.
The roller may be called a "primary charging roller" or a "transfer roller," depending on where it is used.

a-3 Construction and Principles

Corona Charging Unit

2-2
 Chapter 2

Construction of the Corona Charging Unit

Negative charging Positive (varistor type) charging

Primary charging unit

Photosensitive drum

F-2-5

High voltage is applied to a thin metal wire to cause a dielectric breakdown in air, thereby charging the photosensitive drum to an electrical potential whose
polarity is the same as that of the application voltage (positive or negative).
We may understand this principle better by its analogy with lightening.

MEMO:
While a corona charging unit is capable of charging the photosensitive drum without coming into contact with the drum, it generates ozone.
Some of you may say, "Ozone may be beneficial to health." Although an appropriate amount of it can help us maintain good health, any excess could
adversely affect our respiratory and possible other organs.
Ozone is an active element so that it tends to combine with various elements in the air, turning into harmful nitrogenous compounds and sulfurous acid
gases.
The copiers therefore come equipped with absorption filters to limit emission of ozone in compliance with the standards of various countries.

Charging Roller
A charging roller is made of conducting rubber, and is used to charge the photosensitive drum while remaining in contact with the drum.
Construction of the Charging Roller
DC only DC + AC

Primary charging roller Primary charging roller

AC bias

DC bias

F-2-6

MEMO:
Since the charging roller charges the photosensitive drum while remaining in contact with the drum, it requires less voltage than the corona charging unit
while generating as little as 1/1000 of ozone.
It may be described as the ultimate example of Canon's efforts to offer en-vironmentally friendly products.

2.1.3 Exposure
2.1.3.1 Outline
0008-2412
Broadly speaking, the electrostatographic method may be either analog or digital.
Image exposure is where we can clearly distinguish the two.
- Analog
An original placed on the copyboard is illuminated, and the resulting optical image (analog) is directed to the uniformly charged photosensitive drum
through an optical system.
This system requires that the copyboard and the image formation unit be constructed as one entity.
The charges of the "light" area exposed to light will vanish, causing the electrical potential to become more or less 0 volts.
Since the charges of the "dark" area not exposed to light remain as they are, the drum surface will be either "light" or "dark," according to their electrical
potential.
- Digital

2-3
 Chapter 2

An original (analog image) placed on the copyboard is illuminated, and the resulting optical image is turned into electric (image) signals by means of a
CCD*. These signals are processed into digital electric (image) signals using an A/D converter.
*Known as an electronic eye.
As necessary, these signals are subjected to various image processing, and are sent to the laser scanning system.
The laser beam is turned on and off according to the digital image signals, thereby exposing the uniformly charged photosensitive drum.
As in the case of an analog system, the charges of the "light" area exposed to light will vanish, causing the electrical potential to become more or less 0 volts.
Since the charges of the "dark" area not exposed to light remain as they are, the drum surface will be either "light" or "dark," according to their electrical
potential.
The digital method may be used in a "black-and-white digital system," explained just now, or in a "color digital system," which requires such additional
steps as color separation.

MEMO:
The difference in potential between "light" and "dark" areas occurring on the photosensitive drum forms a pattern (image) invisible to the eye, called a
"latent static image."

2.1.3.2 Principles
0008-2414
- Analog
Conceptual Diagram of an Analog Image Exposure System

F-2-7

- Digital
Conceptual Diagram of a Digital Image Exposure System

CCD

Lens

Image processing
unit

Laser scanner

F-2-8

2.1.4 Development
2.1.4.1 Outline
0008-2416
In this step, an invisible, latent static image is turned into a visible image on the photosensitive drum.

2-4
 Chapter 2

Inside a cylindrical non-magnetic sleeve, a magnet is fixed in position and is kept away from the sleeve; this whole construction is called a "developing
cylinder." The integrated unit made up of a developing cylinder and the case used to hold developer is called a "developing assembly."
Developer is moved near the photosensitive drum by the rotation of the developing cylinder, and develops the latent static image; the developer may be
brought in full contact with the drum or kept away from it, in which case it is moved by the work of static attraction.
2.1.4.2 Non-Contact Development
0008-2419
This is mainly used in a 1-component development method, and refers to the fact that the photosensitive drum and the developer layer remain not in contact
with each other. It is also known as a "toner projection" method.
A developing bias (DC/AC current) is applied to the developing cylinder to develop the latent static image on the photosensitive drum.
The following description cites the negative toner blade type, which is commonly found.

Toner
Blade
Latent static
image

Developing
Photosensitive cylinder
drum
Latent static
image
Cylinder Developing
Magnet cylinder

F-2-9

A developing assembly consists of a developing cylinder (made up of a fixed magnet and a cylinder that rotates around it) and a magnet blade.
1. The toner inside the developing assembly is moved and deposited in a uniform layer on the rotating cylinder by the magnetic blade. At this time, the
toner builds charges as a result of friction against the cylinder.
2. An AC bias (AC voltage) and a DC bias (DC voltage) are applied to the developing cylinder as a developing bias, and the AC bias causes the toner on
the cylinder to "project" to the photosensitive drum.
3. The projecting toner is drawn to the potential forming a pattern (image) on the surface of the photosensitive drum; it deposits itself in amounts
corresponding to the degree of charges or potential of the pattern (development). Excess toner is drawn back to the developing cylinder by the work of
the AC bias.
A minute difference in potential is recognized by a minute difference in the amount of toner so that a halftone image can also be reproduced faithfully.
4. The relationship between the size of the DC bias applied to the developing cylinder and the potential of the latent static image determines the amount
of toner used for development (image density).
2.1.4.3 P/B Development
0008-2425
The letter P stands for "projection," while the letter B stands for magnetic "brush." It is mostly used in a 2-component development method of a color
copier, in which the photosensitive drum and the developer layer remain in contact.
A developing bias (DC/AC current) is applied to the developing cylinder when turning the latent static image on the photosensitive drum into a visible
image.

Toner

Photosensitive Developing cylinder

drum

Carrier

F-2-10

The basic construction of the developing assembly and the basic principles are more or less the same as those used for a 1-component developing assembly.
However, a stirring mechanism for mixing carrier and non-magnetic toner and a mechanism used to control the ratio of mixing are additionally found.
2.1.5 Developer
2.1.5.1 Outline
0008-3560
Powder (toner) consisting of resinous particles approximately 10 um (1 m being 1/1000 of 1 mm) in size takes on charges and is moved closer to the
photosensitive drum; there is a means of charging the toner and a means of moving the toner.
When the charged toner deposits itself in amounts corresponding to the latent static image on the photosensitive drum, the image turns into a visible image.
Toner may be charged in either of the following two ways:

2-5
 Chapter 2

2.1.5.2 Component Development

0008-3562
In addition to toner, carrier (usually, iron powder) exists consisting of particles of several 100 um in size; and the friction between the two causes the toner
to take on charges.
This type of developer is called a "2-component developer," and a method of development using a 2-component developer is called a "2-component
development method." This method is commonly used in a color copier and when developing a color (monochrome) in a black-and-white copier. The toner
does not contain magnetite and, therefore, is called "non-magnetic toner."
Advantage: The toner need not be mixed with magnetite, enabling pure reproduction of colors.
Disadvantage: The construction tends to be rather large.
(The toner is charged by friction, requiring some kind of stirring mechanism and a means of control, e.g., ATR (Auto Toner Replenishment), that keeps
the toner-to-carrier ratio con-stant.
D1 developer is used at time of installing the copier or when replacing the developer; it is also called a "starter," and it is composed of toner and carrier
mixed to a specific ratio in advance.
D2 developer, on the other hand, refers to toner, including 1-component developer; it is also called a supplement developer."

Component color toner Carrier

Magnetite
Resin + dye

10 m (approx.) 200 m (approx.)

F-2-11

2.1.5.3 1-Component Developer

0008-3563
Developer on its own collects charges by friction against the developing cylinder.
This type of toner is called a "1-component toner," and a method of development that uses it is called a "1-component development method."
[1-Component Black Toner]
For adhesion to the developing cylinder, magnetite is mixed in the toner.
It is used in black development by a black-and-white copier.
The toner contains magnetite and, therefore, is also known as "magnetic toner." Advantage: The construction may be small.
Disadvantage: The presence of magnetite makes it a poor choice for vivid reproduction of colors.

Component toner

Magnetite

Resin

10 m (approx.)
F-2-12

[1-Component Color Toner]

A 1-component color toner is a non-magnetic toner, and does not require carrier. It is used in a disposable cartridge or disposable color developing
assembly. It has the following characteristics:
- It becomes charged between rubber blade and developing cylinder.
- Its resin ingredient melts by heat during fixing so that the toner adheres to the surface of the transfer medium.
- The color of the dye is the color of the toner.
- Unlike a 2-component toner, no specific mix ratio (with carrier) need be maintained.
- In the absence of magnetite, it may be any of a variety of colors (dyes).
- Its developing cylinder need not house a magnet, enabling low-cost production.

MEMO:
The copying process may be classified into the following four types depending on the polarity of primary charging, type of image exposure, type of
development, and polarity of toner:

T-2-2

Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4

Polarity of primary
+ + - -
charging
Type of image Background Image expo-sure Background Image exposure
exposure exposure exposure

2-6
 Chapter 2

Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4

Type of development Normal de- Reverse de- Normal de- Reverse de-
velopment velopment velopment velopment
Polarity of toner - + + -

[Polarity of Primary Charging]

It is positive or negative, selected to suit the characteristics of the photosensitive drum.

[Image Exposure Type]

Background exposure: It is a normal way of exposure. The original is exposed with reference to the background (white area not containing text or graphics),
and the image is expressed in terms of the difference in density.
Image exposure: The original is exposed with reference to images (non-white area, containing text or graphics). It is used in a digital copier, and the use
of conversion of electric signals enables exposure by a laser beam to express the image (i.e., the beam will be strongest where the original is solid black).

[Types of Development]
Normal development: In the case of background exposure, the area exposed to light is not developed while the area not exposed to light is developed. The
toner has the polarity opposite that of primary charging.
Reversal development: In the case of image exposure, the area exposed to light is developed while the area not exposed to light is not developed. The toner
has the polarity which is the same as that of primary charging. The area not exposed to light retains the potential occurring in primary charging, repelling
the toner. On the other hand, the area with a lower potential because of light still attracts toner owing to the difference in potential (even though the toner
has the same polarity).

[Polarity of Toner]
It is positive or negative, selected so that much toner is attracted to the black area of the original while little toner is attracted to the white area.

2.1.6 Transfer
2.1.6.1 Outline
0008-2434
In this step, the toner image on the photosensitive drum is transferred to a transfer me-dium (paper, for example).
2.1.6.2 Mechanisms
0008-2436
Toner is transferred either by a transfer charging unit, transfer roller, or transfer brush.
- Transfer Charging Unit
Conceptual Diagram of the Transfer Charging Unit

Copy paper

Transfer charging

Bias

F-2-13

- Transfer Roller

2-7
 Chapter 2

Conceptual Diagram of the Transfer Roller

Toner

Copy paper
Transfer roller

Bias

F-2-14

- Transfer Brush
Conceptual Diagram of the Transfer Brush (CLC700/800)

Copy paper

Photosensitive drum

Transfer brush

Transfer drum

F-2-15

- Transfer Blade

--
--
Photosensitive
drum - Paper
--
--

Transfer belt

Transfer blade

F-2-16

- Intermediate Transfer Drum

2-8
 Chapter 2

Toner
Conducting layer
Aluminum layer

Photosensitive
drum

Intermediate transfer
drum

DC bias

F-2-17

2.1.7 Fixing
2.1.7.1 Outline
0008-2449
In this step, the toner image deposited on the transfer medium is permanently fixed onto the transfer medium-in the case of paper, the toner is melted and
fused with the fibers of the paper.
2.1.7.2 Mechanisms
0008-2450
Comparison Between Fixing Roller and SURF Method
Main thermistor (TH1)
Sub thermistor (TH2)
Upper fixing roller Fixing film
Heater
Fixing heater
Toner
Toner

Lower fixing roller Copy paper

Copy paper
Fixing cleaning Pressure roller
roller

F-2-18

MEMO:
By its very nature, fixing by a fixing roller requires a great deal of energy. The SURF method is based on technology developed to eliminate the dis-
advantages of using a fixing roller. Since heat is used only at points of fix-ing, it requires only about 10% of the energy used by fixing with a roller.
Moreover, since the heater reaches a high temperature range instanta-neously, a 0-second wait time is possible.
Since the 0-second wait time eliminates the need for the machine to remain powdered at all times, the method is being adopted not only by various copiers
but also by printers and fax machines.

2.1.8 Drum Cleaning

2.1.8.1 Outline
0008-2452
Some toner tends to remain on the photosensitive drum after transfer. This step is used to remove such toner, thereby completing the image formation
process.
2.1.8.2 Mechanism
0008-2455
A rubber cleaning blade is brought into contact with the photosensitive drum to scrape off the toner.

2-9
 Chapter 2

Conceptual Diagram of Cleaning

Cleaning blade

Cleaning roller
Cleaning screw
F-2-19

2.1.9 Drum Cartridge

2.1.9.1 Background of R&D and Product Planning
0008-2458
The concept of a drum cartridge is sometimes praised as "epoch-making." It has allowed all important components of the electrostatographic process to be
integrated into a single mechanism, relieving the service persons from the complicated work of maintenance.
2.1.9.2 Outline of the Drum Cartridge
0008-2459
A typical drum cartridge consists of a photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, devel-oping unit, and cleaning unit in a single case. The cartridge is
manufactured in such a way that we cannot disassemble it.
Cross Section of the FC330
Developing blade
Light-blocking shutter

Primary charging roller

Photosensitive
drum

Cleaning blade

Drum cover shutter Developing cylinder

F-2-20

a. Drum Cover Shutter

If we allowed the photosensitive drum to be exposed to strong light for a long time, it would develop what is known as photo memory, causing black bands
on copies.
To protect against such a problem, the drum cartridge is equipped with a drum cover shutter. You must not open the shutter without good reason. (The
shutter is designed to open when the drum cartridge is inserted into the copier and the copier panel is closed.)

b. Light-Blocking Shutter
Light enters the inside of the copier through the opening for image exposure when the drum cartridge is removed. As in the case of the drum cover shutter,
a shutter is provided to protect the photosensitive drum against light.

2-10
 Chapter 2

2.2 Outline of Digital Technology

2.2.1 Differences from Analog Technology
2.2.1.1 Definitions
0008-2463

T-2-3

Analog Digital
Expresses or measures in terms of continuous Expresses or measures in terms of cyclic amounts.
physical amounts.

2.2.1.2 Sample Applications

0008-2465

T-2-4

Analog Digital
- Clock with hands - Clock with a counter
- Measuring tape - Abacus, palm-held calculator
- Tape recorder - DAT (Digital Audio Tape)
- Photograph - DVD, MDk

2.2.1.3 Digital and Analog Samples as Found in a Copier

0008-2470
Original

F-2-21

Potential in analog

F-2-22

Pixels in digital

F-2-23

Potential in digital

F-2-24

2.2.1.4 Differences in Construction in the Electrostatographic Method

0008-2473
Roughly speaking, the electrostatographic method may be divided into analog and digital methods.

T-2-5

2-11
 Chapter 2

Common Samples

Analog Digital
Path of optical images Illuminates an original placed Illuminates an original placed on the
on the copyboard toobtain an copyboard to obtain an optical image.
optical image.
Optical path Allowing an optical image to Allows an optical image to reach a
pass through an analog optical digital optical unit (CCD); the digital
unit (e.g., lens). image processing block turns the
optical image signal (light/dark) into
numeric values. The image signals are
sent to the laser scanner.
Exposure of the Exposes the photosensitive In the case of reverse development, the
photosensitive drum drum where no image exists on area corresponding to the image of the
the original, thus removing the original is exposed by a laser beam, thus
existing potential. removing the existing potential of the
area.
Method of development In the case of normal In the case of reverse development, the
development, the area with the area exposed by a laser beam is
image of the original is developed using toner charged to the
developed using toner whose same polarity as primary charging.
polarity is opposite that of
primary charging.

Typical Analog Model (NP6050)

Cross Section of the NP6050
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp
Lens

Primary charging unit

Pre-exposure LED Blanking exposure LED

Cleaning unit
Developing
Fixing unit assembly
Roller electrode
Pre-transfer charging unit
Pick-up (multifeeder)
Separation claw
Separation charging unit Pick-up
(re-pick up from cassette)
Transfer charging unit
F-2-25

Typical Digital Model (GP55)

Cross Section of the GP55

Scanning lamp Lens CCD

Image processing
unit
Laser scanning unit
Pre-exposure lamp
Developing
Primary unit
charging unit
Cleaning web
Drum cleaning
unit
Upper fixing roller
Copy paper
Transfer charging
assembly

Lower fixing roller Static eliminator

Copy paper

F-2-26

2-12
 Chapter 2

2.2.1.5 Analog and Digital Images in Copiers

0008-2477
a. Analog Images in a Copier
The entire area of the original as determined by paper size is treated as a single unit of data.
The image may be enlarged or reduced as a whole. Conversely, an analog image does not allow partial processing.
b. Digital Image in a Copier
Unlike an analog image, an image is divided into the smallest units possible, each allowing individual processing for a wide variety of formats.
(The smallest unit is commonly referred to as picture element (pixel).)
2.2.1.6 Basic Construction of a Digital Image
0008-2491
a. Picture Element (pixel)
The smallest unit of an image is called a picture element-also known as pixel or dot.
For instance, if a picture element of a particular copier is expressed as 1 x 1 mm (V x H), a 100 x 100-mm original is assumed to consist of 10,000 dots
(100 x 100).

b. Expressing Pixel-to-Pixel Density

The following focuses on a single pixel.
It is decided, for example, that a pixel will be expressed as '1' if black and as '0' if white.
Then, in the case of reverse development, the laser beam is directed to the photosensitive drum to remove the existing potential so that development occurs
in response to '1' the la-ser beam is held off to maintain the potential in response to '0'.
This way, we can expect each single picture element to be either light or dark.

MEMO:
The use of 0s and 1s is the basis of how we digitally express an image.
The smallest unit of digital data (0s and 1s) is called "bit" (binary digit) , and is expressed in binary notation.
The way of expressing a data unit using only 0s and 1s is also known as the 2-value system.
The term bit is also used to express the volume of information in relation to data processing and image processing (for example, a 16-bit CPU).
A unit of 8 bits is collectively called a "byte."

Without further processing, the picture will be a combination of solid white and solid black without any halftone (gradations).
Halftone is usually expressed by any of the following two methods:
- By using groups of multiple picture elements (matrix).
- By using each picture element to express different shadings.
In the former method, a group of four picture elements of 1 x 1 mm in size may be used as a matrix, ultimately expressing the 4-gradation halftone shown
in Table 2-5.
The latter method relies on how the laser beam is shone on the photosensitive drumor instance, it may be controlled to shine at 1/2 or 1/3 intensity so that
each pixel may express halftone within itself.
Specifically, it may be either the laser intensity (brightness) modulation method, in which the laser output is varied continuously, or the pulse width
modulation method, in which the laser output is turned on and off at different intervals (drive pulse widths) while it is main-tained at a specific intensity.
Canon's digital machines use the pulse width modulation method for halftone reproduc-tion, with each picture element capable of expressing as many as
256 shadings.

A typical method of intensity modulation is the dither method. In this method, halftone is expressed based on 0s and 1s (2-value system).
The dither method is widely used by not only copiers but also printers and fax machines.
In the case of the pulse width modulation, the shadings between those expressed by 0s and 1s must also be expressed numerically, requiring several
different values (multiple-value system).
c. Unit of Pixels
As in the case of resolution, the unit "dpi" (dots per inch) is often used to express how many pixels (dots) are found for every inch (25. 4 mm).
For instance, 600 dpi means that there are 600 pixels in every inch. The size of each dot, therefore, will be
25.4 mm/600 = 0.0423 mm (= 42.3 m).

MEMO:
If a digital black-and-white/color copier is said to have a resolution of 600 dpi and 256 gradations, the size of each pixel is 0.0423 x 0.0423 mm (= 42.3 x
42.3 m), and as many as 256 gradations from dark to light are possible within a single pixel.

2.2.2 Outline of Image Processing Technology

2.2.2.1 Definition
0008-2502
The term image processing means editing a given original (drawn on paper or stored in computer memory) on a computer for various effects.
Typical examples of image processing include the following:
- Changing weather maps from a satellite for television to enhance understanding.
- Emphasizing parts of medical diagnostic photos.
- Adding test data to technical reports.
- Preparing multiple samples of designs in different colors.
2.2.2.2 Image Processing in a Copier
0008-2507
We will study several processing technologies as used in a digital black-and-white copier.
The following is a block diagram, showing the image scanner block used to read originals.
[1] The analog original read by a CCD is divided into units, and each unit is converted into a digital signal.
[2] The signals are sent to the image processing unit.
[3] The digital signals are converted into signals used to operate the laser beam and forwarded to the printer unit.

2-13
 Chapter 2

Block Diagram of the Image Scanner Unit

Light-receiving element
Lens
CCD
A/D Shading Logarithmic
conversion correction correction

Density Sharpness/filter D/A

processing processing conversion

Printer unit
F-2-27

The image processing unit performs the following:

- Converts analog images into digital signals.
- Corrects digital signals and applies various corrections.
- Serves as the center of various editing.
Specifically, as shown in Table "Sample Applications" digital signals are generated ensuring that they faith-fully represent the original for high-quality
reproduction.
Parts of an original may be picked out for copying (framing) or parts of an original may be left out of copying (blanking); further, images may be slanted
(slanting) or repeated (repeat-ing). A typical digital copier offers us many more editing functions.

T-2-6

Extended function

Key Description
Reduced image 2-on-1 Copies 2, 4, or 8 single-sided or double-sized
composi-tion 4-on-1 originals or books on a single sheet of paper by
8 on-1 reduction while arranging them on one side or
two sides of the sheet.
Originals Copy Originals Cop

A B 2-on-1 A
A B A BC
mode D C

T-2-7

Extended function

Key Description
Enlarged image 1-on-2 Copies a single original on sheets of paper by
composition 1-on-4 division and enlargement.
1-on-2 Original Copies Original Cop
(double-sided to
1-on-2
single-sided) A B A B A B
AB
C D
1-on-4
(double-sided to
single-sided)

T-2-8

Image processing

Key Description
Marking/Area selection It processes the inside or the outside of a
selected area for the following:

2-14
 Chapter 2

Key Description
Framing Copies the outside of the area.
Blanking It processes the inside or the outside of
Partial processing the area for the fol-lowing: color
specification, negative/positive
reversal, color creation, text
processing.

T-2-9

Image processing(Combination)

Key Description
Combination Integrates discrete originals, images, and
characters.
Paste It "pastes" an image to a black-and-white
original.
It "pastes" a color original to a color
original.
Character combination Decolor: A de-colored character is added to
a color original.
Window: A selected area including
characters is added to a color original.
Partial switch: Multiple areas are edited and
combined.
Character shift: Shifts a window and de-
colored character image, and then adds them
to a color original.
Image combination Combines color images.
Plate separation It may be either full separation or area
separation.
It color-separates a color original into
discrete plates.

T-2-10

2-15
 Chapter 2

Image processing

Key Description
Outline The following are available as part of Original
Texture image creation:
Shadow Outline mode*
Slant Shade mode
Mirror Texture (shadow) mode Outline mode

Image repeat
Shadow mode Changes
Slant mode the thickness of
Negative/positive the outline.
reversal
Mirror mode
Texture
Image repeat mode Adds shading.
Negative/positive reversal
*Optional image processing.
Shadow mode

Slant mode

Mirror mode

Image
repeat mode

Negative/
positive reversal

Sharpness Emphasizes or subdues an image.

Color create As part of editing or processing the colors of a color copy, the
following are available: mono color, gradation, color filter, coloring,
base color, 4-/3-full color, blue back, color conver-sion

T-2-11

Extended zoom

Key Description
XY independent Makes a copy at different vertical and horizontal ratios.
zooming
Enlargement page Separates an original into several and enlarges them to make a copy.
separa-tion
Zoom program Computes a copy ratio from the size of the original (length) and the desired
size of the copy (length), all automatically.

MEMO:
In addition to copying functions, a digital copier's image scanner unit is ca-pable of reading images for a computer or for a fax machine and its printer unit
is capable of generating images for a computer or a fax machine. This is why most digital copiers are called integrated copiers.
At present, a digital copier is sometimes known as a printer-integrated or fax-integrated copier.
We also have the choice of an image scanner, printer, or other OA device exclusively designed as an input/output device for office or home use.

2.2.3 Outline of Color Technology

2.2.3.1 Digital Concepts in Color Technology
0008-4227
During the 1970s, Canon's color copiers used analog technology (NP Color/NP Color T), enjoying popularity in the limited color market that existed then.
Since those copiers were based on analog technology, they imposed constraints in terms of "faithful reproduction of originals," "free editing of images,"
and "connection to computers." Analog technology is particularly limiting when it comes to "faithful reproduction of origi-nals" for the following reasons:
- In general, a color original has a wide density range, while the corresponding properties of the photosensitive drum and the developing system tend to
have a narrow range.

2-16
 Chapter 2

- Analog color copiers lack a means to correct the discrepancies between the optical properties of filters and the tonal properties of the developers for
appropriate color separation.
Most copier manufacturers set out to develop digital color technology with a view to overcoming the foregoing issues.
2.2.3.2 Principles of the Digital Color Copier
0008-4237
a. What Is Color
The color perceived by the human eye or by an electronic eye (CCD) is dependent on the presence of light. In other words, the eye cannot perceive color
in the absence of light.
The types of color that can be perceived by the eye are called "visible light," indicating that they are merely types of light.
For instance, bringing a piece of red cellophane under light causes it to turn red. This hap-pens because cellophane lets through only the "red" within the
visible light while absorbing all other colors.

b. Primary Colors of Light and the Additive Color Method

Now, let's study the colors as found in visible light. A rainbow comes to our mind.
We may think of six colors. The whole spectrum of visible light can be more or less precisely divided into three, which are known as the primary colors
of light. By mixing these three colors, we can obtain various colors.
Primary Colors of Light and the Additive Method

400 500 600 700nm

Blue
B

Cyan Magenta
G C M
White
W
400 500 600 700nm
Green Red
G Yellow Y R

400 500 600 700nm B G R W

F-2-28

The entire spectrum of visible light is divided into three sections according to wave length (400 to 700 nm).
The three primary colors of light are blue (400 to 500 nm), green (500 to 600 nm), and red (600 to 700 nm).

To obtain a color by mixing the primary colors is known as the additive method; for example, we can obtain yellow by mixing green and red.

G R

400 500 600 700nm

Wave length of light

G R Y
F-2-29

When we add all three colors, we get white (center in the diagram).
- By shining spot lights each representing one of the three primary colors as shown in the following diagram, we can expect white at the center.

2-17
 Chapter 2

W
G G R R

Spot lights
F-2-30

- The cathode tube of a color television uses light-emitting elements (B, G, R) to produce

B
G R

Cathode ray tube for TV

F-2-31

The foregoing description aims to explain how the colors of light are perceived by the viewer (human eye or a CCD, which is an electronic eye as found
in the image reader of a color copier).
The following description explains how colors are expressed using coloring materials (paints used in painting, inks used on printed matter, and toner of a
color copier or ink of a BJ).

c. Primary Colors of Paint and the Subtractive Color Method

Primary Colors of Paint and the Subtractive Method

Yellow

Red Green

Black

Magenta Cyan
Blue

Y M C Bk
F-2-32

Unlike a spot light or a TV screen, media like printed matter cannot use material that emits ight.
Instead, they use such material as contains dyes or pigments.
As opposed to the three primary colors of light blue (B), green (G), and red (R), the three primary colors of paint are yellow (Y), magenta (M), and C
(cyan), and we can obtain various colors by mixing them.
In the case of paint, a color is produced by absorbing a specific color (from among B, G, and R contained in the natural light) and reflecting the rest.

A coloring material expresses a specific color by removing unwanted colors (i.e., by sub-tracting them) and, is therefore called a subtractive method of
expressing colors.
When the light of the sun hits a surface painted uniformly in yellow, it appears yellow to the human eye because blue (B), which is complementary to
yellow, is absorbed while green (G) and red (R) are reflected as can be learned from the diagram explaining an additive method of expressing colors (three
primary colors of light).
In other words, the combination of green (G) and red (R) results in yellow (Y) in keeping with the principles of an additive method.
In a subtractive method, we know that the combination of yellow and magenta results in red from the diagram.

2-18
 Chapter 2

R R
B G R Reflected Reflected

Absorbed

Y Y

Paper

R R
B G R Reflected Reflected

Absorbed

M
M

Paper

B G R R
Reflected
Absorbed
Absorbed
R
M+Y

Paper
F-2-33

The color copier is based on the principle of the three primary colors of paint.
White is expressed in terms of the background color of copy paper.
The following is a summary of how an image is formed in a digital color copier in relation to its color image scanner unit and color laser printer unit.
2.2.3.3 Forming an Image in the Digital Color Copie
0008-4265
a.Color Separation and Reproduction Process
The color image scanner unit is equipped with a CCD sensor (known as an electronic eye) consisting of red, green, and blue filters used to separate the
image of an original into its re-spective colors in a process known as color separation.
The resulting color data is converted into electric signals and sent to the color laser printer unit, which reproduces the original in yellow, magenta, cyan,
and black with appropriate ton-ers according to the color signals arriving from the scanner unit.
The three primary colors of light and those of paints have a complementary relationship.
B Y
G M
R C
The following provides an outline of color separation.

2-19
 Chapter 2

Principles of Color Separation

Development by yellow toner original
B G R W Bk
[3] Color separation
[2] Exposing an original B filter Yellow toner
ON OFF OFF ON OFF CCD [6] Transfer
OFF ON ON OFF OFF Semiconductor laser Copy paper
[1] Charging
Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum
[4] Laser exposure [5] Developmet
Development by magenta toner original
B G R W Bk

G filter Magenta toner

OFF ON OFF ON OFF CCD
Copy paper
ON OFF ON OFF OFF Semiconductor laser

Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum

Development by cyan toner original

B G R W Bk

M filter Cyan toner

OFF OFF ON ON OFF CCD
Semiconductor Copy paper
ON ON OFF OFF OFF laser

Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum

Development by black toner original

B G R W Bk

Filter
ON ON ON ON OFF CCD Black toner
Copy paper
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Semiconductor laser

Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum

Copy paper
B G R W Bk
[7] Fixing

F-2-34

For the purpose of explanation, one filter is used for each color. In practice, each CCD sensor is equipped with three filters (B, G, R).
Further, the "black" of an original is assumed to be pure black.
During Y development for example, the laser beam is not shone on the photosensitive drum for the black area of the original, implying the use of Y toner
for the black area. In the UCR (under color removal) method, which tries to use only black toner to produce the black of an original, the laser beam is shone
to avoid adhesion of Y (or, M and C, for that matter) toner.
If special black (for example, bluish black) is needed, the CCD may act to cause the use of small amounts of magenta and cyan toners in advance before
using black toner. (See the conceptual diagram for the UCR method in shown later.)
Since all color component processing ends with black development, we may assume that the B, G, and R filters no longer serve their purposes by then-
they are represented as clear filters in the diagram.

b. Color Image Scanner Unit

The color image scanner unit applies various image processing on the image data read by the scanner unit, thereby enhancing basic image properties (color
reproduction, resolution, gradation) associated with color image output.

We will study some of the image processing technologies often employed to improve im-age quality while referring to the following block diagram

2-20
 Chapter 2

Block Diagram of the Color Image Scanner Unit

Original
position
Analog processor PCB detection

CCD
R R C
R
Color
Shading G 3-line CCD G Sensor color space Logarithmic M
G
correction positioning correction correction correction
B B Y
B

Color
correction
for output

G Color RGB
conversion synthesis
B

Memory

Memory

CMYK Texture
synthesis pocess-
ing

UCR

C
Toner Coloring/ Ratio/ Sharpness/ Anti-
M Density To laser
color outline slant filter counterfeit
processing controller
Y correction processing processing processing processing
PCB

F-2-35

The foremost concept of image processing technology is in the reproduction of the text of an original as sharply as possible and its photos as faithfully.
To this end, the following three processes (UCR, masking, edge emphasis) play the most important roles:

b-1 UCR (Under Color Removal)

The image of an original is subjected to color separation by the CCD image sensor fitted with R, G, and R filters, and the image is read as digital signals.
In the logarithmic correction process (g correction), the signals representing the intensities of B, G, and R are converted into density signals for UCR
processing.
In UCR, Bk (representing gray) is determined based on the Y, M, and C density signals-the size (amount) of Bk is decided from the minimum values of
the Y, M, and C density signals for removal of the Y, M, and C components accordingly in view of the following:
[1] As explained in reference to the subtractive color method, mixing Y, M, and C components will theoretically produce black. In reality, however, it is
virtually impossible to obtain pure black in this way.
This is because the Y, M, and C components are each produced to ensure the reproduction of their respective colors as purely as possible, and are not
intended for the reproduction of black.
[2] If we resorted to mixing Y, M, and C components to reproduce dark gray, depositing (transferring) layers of toner one on top of the other would result
in a thick coating of toner, hindering transmission of fixing heat and, ultimately, the reproduction of the desired gray.
[3] Using Bk only to produce a dark gray helps save color toners.
Of Y, M, and C, if the Y component represents the lowest value, the size of Y is converted into the appropriate amount of Bk-further, the amounts of M
and C in excess of the resulting amount of Bk are removed from their respective components.
The foregoing process is what is referred to as UCR.
Conceptual Diagram of UCR

Y M C Y M C Bk
F-2-36

b-2 Masking
In the color correction process stage, the CPU built into the copier makes corrections to enable enhancements not possible with analog technology.
First, the original is color-separated considering the properties of the B, G, and R filters associated with the transmission of light (physical properties),
thereby establishing specific sets of color data before starting digital processing.
Next, the amounts of Y, M, and C components are computed with a view to improving the results of reproduction.
Establishing specific sets of color data and matching them against output forecasts are collectively referred to as "masking."

b-3 Edge Emphasis

Edge emphasis is also known as "sharpness processing," and is a type of processing that produces sharp images.
The graphic portion and the text portion of an original are automatically distinguished (im-age area separation), and the graphics are processed for better
gradation and color reproduction and the text, for edge emphasis.
If the text is identified as being black, it will be reproduced with black toner only to ensure crisp characters.

2-21
 Chapter 2

The foregoing three processes can be said to represent what digital image processing is all about.

c. Color Laser Printer Unit

Block Diagram of the Color Laser Printer Unit
Reader unit

Laser driver

Pre- Primary Laser Develop- Transfer Separation Fixing

exposure charging exposure ment

Repeats for 4 colors.

Registration Pick-up

F-2-37

The color laser printer unit performs faithful reproduction according to the color sepa-ration signals from the color image reader unit.
Since it must reproduce color images, it is required to ensure good, smooth gradation and even density, not to mention a high resolution.

c-1 Outline of a Laser

1. What Is a Laser
The term laser stands for Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation.
A laser beam consists of electromagnetic waves just like rays of the sun. However, al-though light of various waves lengths from infrared to ultrared exists
in the rays of the sun, a laser beam is a ray of a single wave length.

Frequency (Hz)
21 18 15 12 9 6
10 10 10 10 10 10

Laser
ray
UHF VHF HF MF LF
Visible light
Infrared ray Microwave
X ray Radio wave
Ultraviolet ray Wave length (m)

-12 -9 -6 -3 0 3
10 10 10 10 10 10
(1nm) (1 m) (1mm) (1m) (1km)

Yellow
Orange

Ultraviolet Violet Blue Green Red Infrared Spectrum of visible light

400 500 600 700 (um)

F-2-38

2. Characteristics of a Laser
Any laser beam is characterized by its tendency to move in a straight line. When we shine a beam of light against a distant destination, it tends to diffuse
over a wide area. On the other hand, if we were to shine a laser beam against the moon, which is 380,000 km away from the earth, the area of diffusion
will be limited to about 3 km. This is one of the reasons why the laser beam is suited as the source of light for a copier's printer.

MEMO:
A laser may be a gaseous, solid, chromatic, or semiconductor laser. The printer unit uses a semiconductor laser, which provides a long service life and its
oscillation can be turned on and off very easily.

2-22
 Chapter 2

T-2-12

Common light Laser

Consists of multiple waves (continuous waves)
no longer than about 10 cm without specific
order. The waves move on one after the other at
the speed of 3 x 1010 cm/sec.
10 cm
Oscillating atom (approx.)
Consists of a ray of the same wave
length and phase. The light moves
continuously at the rate of about 3 x
1010 cm/sec.

Even waves on the move continuously

Multiple waves on the move

independently of one another

3. Uses of a Laser
Not to mention copiers and printers, applications of lasers range widely from commercial products like CD players to medical equipment used for various
surgery.

4. Preventing Accidents
A decade ago, lasers were often thought of in terms of science fiction (killer beam, for ex-ample). In recent years, however, we have come to benefit from
them a great deal, thanks to the many advances made in the field of laser technology.
We no longer need to feel threatened when we use products that utilize lasers, with possible dangers having been fully identified and appropriate safety
measures taken. Never-theless, it is still important to keep several points in mind.
We could damage the retinas of our eyes if we directly looked at the sun (say, when ob-serving a solar eclipse), weakening if not losing our eyesight. In
the same way, exposure of our eyes to a laser beam could cause damage-in the case of the skin, we may suffer a burn.
Generally speaking, damage by a laser beam to the human body is thought of in terms of "damage to the eye" and "damage to the skin." Damage to the eye
include damage to the retina by an ultraviolet/infrared laser, nebula of the crystalline lens, or damage to the retina by a visible spectrum laser-amage to
the skin includes burns by heat.
All such damage is usually caused by direct exposure to a laser beam. At times, however, damage results from light reflected by a metal object. We must
take adequate care not to stick a metal object (screwdriver, for example) into the laser path without first turning off the printer unit.
Moreover, we should get into the habit of always removing watches and rings before starting servicing work.
The US government prohibits sale of laser products not certified under a specific set of safety standards through the Center of Devices and Radiological
Health (CDRH).
Moreover, all certified products are required by law to bear an appropriate label to show the size of laser output.
The laser scanner system of the printer unit is firmly sealed inside a protective case to prevent emission of a laser beam during use.

2-23
 Chapter 2

CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT

APPAREIL FS5-8834
A RAYONNEMENT
LASER DE CLASSE 1

Laser radiation when open.

AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE.
LASER KLASSE 1

PRODUCTO
LASER DE CLASE 1

APPARECCHIO LASER
DI CLASSE 1 IN
ACCORDO CON LA
NOPMACEI 76-2

Certification label Warning label

F-2-39

c-2 Laser Exposure

In this process, a laser beam produced by appropriately modulating signals is shone on a uniformly charged photosensitive drum to produce a latent static
image.
This process is a very important step in that it determines the resolution and the gradation of the final color image.
The following is a figure, showing a typical scanner system built with a semiconductor laser.
The laser unit turns on and off the laser beam according to the video (image) signals from the scanner unit.
The laser beam emitted by the laser unit is directed to the polygon scanning mirror which rotates at a high speed. The reflected light is shone against the
surface of the photosensitive drum by way of a reflecting mirror, thereby creating dark and light areas.
Some of the light reflected by the polygon scanner mirror is directed to the light-receiving element to generate BD signals.
The BD signal is used to enable horizontal (main scanning direction) synchronization.
Construction of the Laser Unit
Video signal

Light-receiving element Laser unit

Polygon scanning mirror

BD mirror

Reflecting mirror

Photosensitive drum

F-2-40

2-24
 Chapter 2

Cross Section of the Polygon Scanning Unit

Polygon scanning mirror

Laser unit
F-2-41

When the polygon scanning mirror is rotated while the laser beam is on, the changing angle of the mirror guides the laser beam over a specific length.
As a result, a single face (facet) of a polygon scanning mirror becomes capable of drawing a line (scanning line) over the entire axial length of the
photosensitive drum.
Further, if the laser beam is turned on and off according to video signals while it scans the photosensitive drum in axial direction, a dashed line will be
drawn on the drum.
Drawing a Line with a Laser Beam
Laser unit
BD mirror

Photosensitive Horizontal
drum Polygon scanning scanning line
mirror

F-2-42

d. Development
In this process, the latent static image formed on the photosensitive drum is turned into a visible image by means of developer (toner with a specific
pigment).
The toner projection method we have touched upon previously is used in this process.
The properties required of the material used in a color toner include the ability to repro-duce individual colors (Y, M, C, Bk) and produce mixes (Y, M,
C), as well as the durability of the outputs.
Further, its particles must be as small as possible so that the latent static images may be reproduced with sharpness. The particles of toners used in a color
copier are smaller in diam-eter than the particles of toners used in a black-and-white copier.
Thanks to these considerations, more or less ideal reproduction can now be expected for halftones and high-density solids.

e. Transfer
Unlike a regular black-and-white copier, as many as four color toners are deposited on (transferred to) the transfer medium in sequence-nown as overlay
transfer.

2-25
 Chapter 2

Scanning lamp

Lens CCD

Photosensitive drum cleaner

Image processing Laser Pre-exposure lamp
unit scanner
Oil applying roller Primary charging unit
Cleaning web
Separation charging
assembly
Developing assembly

Transfer brush Photosensitive Y

drum
Separation claw Transfer drum C
External static
eliminator M
Internal static eliminator BK
Retention brush Retention rollers
Multifeeder
pick-up tray
Registration roller
Cassette 1

Duplexing unit

Cassette 3

Cassette 4

F-2-43

As shown in the foregoing diagram, four (color) toners are transferred to the transfer me-dium retained on the transfer drum made of plastic film.
Overlay transfer requires:
[1] that the transfer medium and the photosensitive drum be maintained to a specific me-chanical spatial relationship to prevent discrepancies of colors;
[2] that a good transfer efficiency (carrying of toner from the photosensitive drum to the transfer medium) be maintained; and
[3] that the image not suffer blurring.
Of the three, [1] is of special importance and, therefore, is being improved with various ideas.
f. Fixing
In this process, a maximum of four layers of toner deposited on the transfer medium are heated so that they will melt and fuse to become one with the
medium, forming the final im-age.
A full-color toner image takes on its various colors in this process as the layers melt to mix with each other.
The most important aspect of this process is that the multiple layers of toner must be in-stantaneously and sufficiently heated and melted and that the
melting toner must not transfer to the fixing roller (fault known as offset).
Fixing oil is used to ensure the foregoing requirements.

2-26
 Chapter 2

2.3 Outline of Bubble Jet Technology

2.3.1 Principles of Image Formation
2.3.1.1 BJ Head
0008-4114
A BJ multiple nozzle head has a layer construction consisting of a silicon PCB, electrodes, heater elements, adhesive layer, and glass plate, all of which
are built as follows:
A heating assembly and wiring are laid on a silicon plate; a photosensitive resin layer (to serve as walls for the nozzles) is glued to the wired silicon plate;
then, the result is processed into shape by means of photoetching to form the nozzles. The head is finished by gluing a glass plate on top.
Construction of the BJ Head
Ink supply tube

Glass top plate

Ink chamber

ion
ect on Protective layer
Dir jecti
e
of
Nozzle Aluminum PCB
Silicon PCB
Photosensitive resin
(partition wall) Insulating layer
Electrode
Thermal resistor
(heater)
F-2-44

Principles of Ink Ejection

[1] Normal Condition
The surface tension of the ink and the
atmospheric pressure are in balance on the
Orifice face orifice face.

[2] Rapid Heating of the Heater

Bubble The ink in contact with the heater heats, causing
a minuscule bubble.

Heater
[3] Boiling of the Ink
The ink in contact with the heater evaporates
rapidly, causing the bubble to grow.

[4] Expansion of the Bubble

The bubble grows to its maximum size, and the
ink is forced out of the orifice face.

[5] Contraction of the Bubble

The bubble is cooled by the ink and is made to
contract. The tip of the ink column is forced out of
the nozzle.

[6] Disappearance of the Bubble

The ink in contact with the heater is cooled
rapidly.

[7] Supply of Ink

A new supply of ink collects at the orifice face by
a capillary action.
F-2-45

2-27
 Chapter 2

2.3.1.2 Characteristics of the BJ Method

0008-4171
The BJ method has the following characteristics:

a. High Resolution
The BJ head is much simpler in construction than the head built for the piezo jet method this means the BJ head may have highly concentrated nozzles
used for ink ejection, providing a remarkably high output resolution (as high as the resolution of a typical LBP).

b. High Speed
The method takes advantage of air bubbling, enabling blowing and bursting air bubbles at a high speed. Since droplets of ink may be ejected at very short
intervals, the BJ head may be moved fast, increasing the number of dots that may be printed per unit of time.

c. Low Power Consumption

A typical BJ head requires as little as 1/40 of the power required by a thermal head.

d. Low Noise
Since its printing is non-impact, it generates significantly much less noise than a wire-dot or other impact printing method.

e. Printing on Plain Paper

The various improvements on the head construction and ink composition have enabled printing on plain paper at a highly satisfactory level. (The best
results, however, may not be possible on non-recommended paper.)

f. Ease of Color Printing

Since the BJ head consists of multiple nozzles and is capable of traveling over a flat line surface while printing at a high resolution and a high speed, the
method is suited for use in a high-resolution color printer.

g. Compact and Low Price

Not only the overall construction but also its printing mechanism tend to be small, result-ing in a smaller printer unit design and lower cost.
2.3.2 Outline of BJ Color Technology
2.3.2.1 Recording Technology
0008-4152
As in the case of a color copier of the electrostatographic type, a BJ color copier also uses the additive color method-possessing four BJ heads (Y, M, C,
and Bk).
The head travels (scans) in a specific direction while directly ejecting ink to recording pa-per to suit the colors represented by electric signals. This way of
printing is called the direct recording method.
Improving on the way ink is ejected leads to enhanced reproduction of color images.
The recording paper may be special paper, special heavy-stock paper, or transparencies with an absorbent coating.
Most models allow the use of plain paper. Usually, particular types of recording paper are recommended so as to ensure the best results for each model.
The recording paper must be moved over a specific distance at the end of each scan by the BJ head to avoid creating overlapping lines of images-or gaps
between lines of images, re-sulting in blank lines.
2.3.2.2 Characteristics of BJ Recording
0008-4174
a. Wider Range of Color Reproduction
An electrostatographic method uses color toners prepared with specific pigments.
BJ recording, on the other hand, relies on liquid ink, allowing the use of water-soluble pig-ments for color reproduction.
The fact helps increase the range of color reproduction.

b. Variety of Product Designs

The BJ head, which is the heart of BJ recording, may be said to have a high degree of engi-neering perfection as a compact recording element, not imposing
constraints on reproduction size and, as a result, enabling the application in a wide variety of products.
- Built-in black-and-white/color printers for word-processors/computers
- Black-and-white/color printers for general uses
- Color copiers
- Black-and-white/color plotters
- Cloth printing machines (There are systems capable of providing more or less the results expected of professional textile printing.)
2.3.3 Regulations and Laws
2.3.3.1 Outline
0008-4176
We are banned from making copies of certain items by law. Ignoring the fact is punishable, and not only the person who actually made a copy but also
anyone giving instructions to that effect could be subject to prosecution. Be fully sure that no such acts are performed.
2.3.3.2 Items Prohibited for Copying by Law
0008-4178

T-2-13

Items Prohibited for Copying by Law

Domestic monetary currencies (bank notes, coins, certificates), securities issued by government
(national/local bonds)
- The laws equally applies to items bearing a SAMPLE notation.

2-28
 Chapter 2

Foreign monetary currencies, securities

- Without the approval of the government, unused postage stamps and postcards must not be copied.
Unused postage stamps, postcards
Government-certified stamps
Non-governmental securities (stock certificates, promissory notes, checks, gift certificates,
commuter's passes/tickets)
-Administrative guidance warns against copying of non-governmental securities (unless copied in
minimal quantities by the sources of such securities).
- It is generally agreed that copying of passports, licenses, personal IDs, vehicle registrations,
highway tokens, food tokens, and the like is best if avoided.

2.3.3.3 Items Restricted for Copying

0008-4184
We cannot make copies of such copyrighted materials as books, musical works, artistic works, maps, drawings, movies, and photos except for private uses
or uses corresponding to private uses.

2-29
 Chapter 2

2.4 Options
2.4.1 Introduction
2.4.1.1 Introduction
0008-4185
Usually, we are free to choose several additional devices for a particular copier made avail-able as options.
Such devices are designed to provide better ease of operation so that the user can easily take full advantage of what the copier has to offer.
We are most likely to encounter the following options.
2.4.2 Original Handling Devices
2.4.2.1 Original Handling Devices
0008-4192
An original handling device accommodates one or more sheet of originals and feeds them to a specific position on the copyboard glass for automatic
copying operation.
When an original has been copied, the device automatically returns it to the initial posi-tion, while feeding the next original to the copyboard.
Some models are capable of the more complex operation of feeding an original to a specific position on the copyboard, reversing it, and moving it back to
its initial position.
Original Handling Devices

ADF-B1 RF-C1/RF-C1
F-2-46

2.4.3 Pick-Up Handling Devices

2.4.3.1 Pick-Up Handling Devices
0008-4221
A pick-up handling device is designed to provide various ways of supplying transfer media to the copier. For example, a device may be installed to a high-
speed copier so that the user may be able to keep a large volume of transfer me-dia in store (several thousand sheets). Or, the device may accommodate
several cassettes serving as sources of paper of different sizes.
In other words, a pick-up handling device frees the user from having to replace transfer media too often.
Pick-Up Handling Devices

Duplexing tray unit 1-cassette unit 3-cassette unit

F-2-47

2.4.4 Delivery Handling Devices

2.4.4.1 Delivery Handling Devices
0008-4328
A delivery handling device is designed to assist post-copying work.
Specifically, it may be designed to automatically sort multiple sets of copies, staple them, and/or push them out for retrieval.
Such a device proves its worth best when making large volumes of copies using a high-speed copier.
Delivery Handling Devices
Control card
Control Card V

Stapler sorter Stapler sorter Sorter Duplexing 2-cassette unit

F-2-48

2-30
 Chapter 2

2.5 Image Input Options

2.5.1 Introduction
2.5.1.1 Introduction
0008-4346
So far, we have studied copiers in terms of making copies by placing a sheet or book origi-nal on the copyboard. We will now look at how we may make
copies of other types of origi-nals such as 35-mm negative/positive film.
2.5.2 Analog Input Devices
2.5.2.1 Film Projector
0008-4347
A film projector for a copier is a device that projects images on the copyboard of a copier instead of, say, a screen hung on a wall.
Film Projector for an NP/GP/Color Laser Copier
Projector unit

Magazine Slide changer Carrier Rotary changer (accessory)

Mirror unit

Projector
Projecting lens

Mirror Fresnel lens

F-2-49

A 35-mm negative/positive film is fitted into the film projector for projection on the copyboard shown in the above figure. The rest is the same as making
copies of an original placed on the copyboard.
(If you like, you may place a film directly on the copyboard and turn on the projector to make copies of whatever is on the film.)
2.5.3 Digital Input Devices
2.5.3.1 Film Scanner
0008-4350
As in the case of a film projector, we can use a film scanner to make copies of a 35-mm negative/positive film.
Unlike an analog input device, a film scanner handles film images in the form of digital sig-nals, enabling various processing and editing.
Film Scanner
Control panel 35-mm lens cover

Left cover
Large-size
carrier case

Large-size carrier slot

Right cover
Eject key

Lamp cover
Magazine/rotary changer
retrieval lever
Power switch
35-mm carrier case
F-2-50

A film scanner is a type of digital image input device but is designed exclusively to handle negative/positive film.
You may connect it either directly to a digital copier or to a computer by way of a controller-so that you can edit data on the computer for DTP and generate
the outputs on the copier.

2-31
 Chapter 2

2.6 Controller Devices

2.6.1 Introduction
2.6.1.1 ntroduction
0008-4355
In recent years, one peripheral device after another has appeared in response to a call by the fast-growing computer culture.
Particularly, the demand for printers serving as the output equipment for computers has been drawing a great deal of our attention.
A controller device is a device borne out of the idea of using a copier as the printer of a computer.
2.6.2 Black-and-White Digital Controller
2.6.2.1 Black-and-White Digital Controller
0008-4356
MDC (Multi Device Controller)
Sample System Configurations
Centronics
RS-422/AppleTalk
RS-232C

GP55/GP55F MDC PS-GP unit Host computer

F-2-51

Fax
Digital copier Host computer
(GP215/210)

Network computer
F-2-52

2.6.3 Color Digital Controller

2.6.3.1 Color Digital Controller
0008-4359
IPU (Intelligent Processing Unit)

2-32
 Chapter 2

Color System Configuration

35-mm digital film scanner

Digital still camera

Video floppy disk

Film projector
Video camera
SV deck

VTR

VD

TV tuner

Computer IPU CLC

F-2-53

Host computer
Color copier PS-XJ

Network computer
F-2-54

2-33
 Chapter 2

2.7 Basics of Electricity

2.7.1 Introduction
2.7.1.1 Introduction
0008-4361
For a person working on copiers from day to day, a good knowledge of electricity is as indispensable as the servicing tools.
Here, we will review the basics of electricity in terms of how they relate to copiers in the field-we will learn about those sensors used to control copier
operations and parts most frequently found in copiers.
2.7.2 Basics of Electricity
2.7.2.1 Voltage and Current
0008-4365
Think of how water flows.
In the following diagram, the water level of A is higher than that of B so that the water flows from A to B.
The difference in water level is expressed as water pressure-the larger the difference, the higher the pressure (say, inside the water pipe).

A
Water pipe

Flow of water

B
Water level

F-2-55

In the same way, any difference in potential (pressure) starts the flow of electricity, and the difference in potential is what is called "voltage" (expressed
in volts, abbreviated V).
The higher the potential, the stronger the drive that moves the electrons.
The amount that flows between different potentials is current, moving from positive (+) to negative (-) sides (expressed in amperes, abbreviated to A).

Flow of electricity
(current)

Potential

F-2-56

MEMO:
In the case of water, amount in a container is expressed in terms of cubic meters (m3) and the amount flowing per second, cubic meters per second (m3/sec).

1 m3/sec

1 m3

F-2-57

In the case of electricity, the amount is expressed in terms of coulombs (C), and current is the amount of electrons that flow per second.

2-34
 Chapter 2

Cu
rre
nt
Flo
w
of
ele
ctr
on
Coulomb s

F-2-58

In the past, it was thought that electricity flowed from positive to negative sides. Although we now know that "electrons are movement of charges" shifting
in the opposite direction of current, for all practical purposes we normally assume that current flows from positive to negative sides.

2.7.2.2 Direct Current and Alternating Current

0008-4404
a. Direct Current
We did not have access to the use of electricity until Volta invented an electric cell. As in the case of Volta's cell, the type of current in which electricity
flows in one direction only is called direct current (DC).
Voltage

Time

Same flow direction

Time

F-2-59

MEMO:
We use the following symbols when drawing cells in circuit diagrams.

+ side

– side

Symbol
F-2-60

a-1 Flow of Electricity

See Figure 2-49. We call these diagrams circuit diagrams, showing the flow of electricity.
We call the element providing electricity the source of electricity and any element that consumes electricity such as a lamp, load.

2-35
 Chapter 2

1.5V 1.5V

1.5V 1.5V

0V 0V
0V 0V
(A) (B)

3.0V

1.5V

0V
1.5V 1.5V

1.5V 1.5V

0V 0V
0V 0V
(C) (D)
F-2-61

(A) The lamp turns on.

Since there is a difference in voltage of 1.5 V between both ends of the lamp, there is a flow of electricity to the lamp.
(B) The lamp will not turn on.
Both lines of the lamp are connected to 0 V. Since the difference in voltage between both terminals of the lamp is 0 V, there will be no flow of electricity.
(C) The lamp will not turn on.
Both lines of the lamp are connected to 1.5 V. Since the difference in voltage between both terminals of the lamp is 0 V, there will be no flow of electricity.
(D) The lamp will turn on.
Although the wiring is not like the others, the difference in voltage of 1.5 V between both terminals of the lamp will let electricity flow.
The foregoing concepts fully apply to alternating current as well.

b. Alternating Current
What we find in the power outlets of our homes is alternating current (AC). Most electric appliances we use at home operate on alternating current.
In alternating current, the direction and the strength of the electricity vary (hence, the word "lternately" in specific cycles.

Current flows from A

No flow of of the outlet through
current. the lamp to B.

Current flows from B

of the outlet through
the lamp to A.

Time
F-2-62

MEMO:
We use the following symbol to express alternating current in circuit diagrams.

2-36
 Chapter 2

F-2-63

c. Waveforms of Alternating Current

If we measured the alternating current found in a power outlet, we would notice that its voltage and direction continue to vary at specific intervals over time.
Sinusoidal Wave
1 cycle
Voltage

F-2-64

c-1. Sine Wave

Alternating current may be sine waves as in the foregoing diagram or non-sine (distorted) waves as shown in the following diagram.
Non-Sinusoidal Wave

0 0 0

Square waveform Triangular waveform Sawtooth waveform

F-2-65

c-2 Cycles
The term cycle refers to the distance between two adjacent peaks or two adjacent troughs of waves.
c-3 Frequency
The term frequency indicates how many cycles there are per second, and is expressed in Hertz (Hz).

c-4 Effective Value

Since the voltage of alternating current changes constantly, it is a complicated matter to indicate how much work it has done.
As a measure of work, we use how much heat it generates in reference to direct current when it is used to operate a heat-generating device.
Unless specially noted, alternating current is expressed in terms of effective value-this is also true of the alternating current used at home.

Same heat

Heat-generating
appliance
Heat-generating
appliance
100V

100 VAC 100 VDC

F-2-66

c-5. Maximum Value

The term maximum value refers to the peak of the waves of alternating current, and is as-sumed to be "effective x 2." For example, it is about 141 V in
Japan (100V x1.142)

2-37
 Chapter 2

141V Maximum value Peak-to-peak

282Vp-p

141V Maximum value

F-2-67

c-6 Peak-to-Peak (p-p)

The term peak-to-peak refers to the difference in potential between the maximum positive value and the maximum negative value, and is indicated as Vp-
p or Ep-p.

c-7 Average Value

Here, the term average is used to represent the half-cycle of the voltage of an alternating current.
In the case of sine waves, an approximate average value may be obtained by multiplying the maximum value by 0.637.

Same area

Average value

F-2-68

c-8 Electric Power

The amount of work done per second is expressed in terms of power (P) and in units of Watts (W). For example, 1 W of power occurs when 1 A of current
flows at 1 V of voltage, and may be expressed as:
power P (W) = voltage (V) x current (A)
If an electrical iron bears a label indicating "600 W," we know from the above formula that the current flowing in the iron is 6 A (600 W/100 V = 6 A).

600 W

F-2-69

c-9 Power Consumption

The term power consumption indicates the amount of electricity used over a specific pe-riod of time, and is expressed in terms of Watts per hour (Wh)
obtained by multiplying the power by duration.
For example, if we used an electric iron rated 600 W for 3 hours,
600 W x 3 h = 1800 Wh = 1.8 kWh

MEMO:
Power Plugs of the World

2-38
 Chapter 2

Japan, Korea USA, Canada

Japan: 100 V (50 Hz, 60 Hz) 120V(60Hz)

Korea: 100 V (60 Hz)

Germany, France UK Australia

220V(50Hz) 240V(50Hz) 240V(50Hz)

F-2-70

2.7.3 Typical Sensors

2.7.3.1 Outline
0008-4413
Electric circuits must have means to detect spatial relationships and changes in parameters (temperature, intensity, etc.) to control various mechanisms in
a machine.
Sensors are what serve such purposes and may be grouped according to what they detect:
Overcurrent: fuse, breaker
Intensity of light: CdS, photodiode, phototransistor, CCD
Position: microswitch, reed switch, photointerruper, reflecting type photosensor, Hall IC
Temperature: thermal fuse, thermal switch, thermistor, posistor
Humidity: high molecular humidity sensor
2.7.3.2 Detecting Overcurrent
0008-4414
a. Common Fuses
When current larger than the rated value flows into a fuse, the conducting wire inside the fuse heats and, ultimately, melts to protect the circuit by cutting
off the current.
2A
2A

Check the rating.

F-2-71

b. Circuit Breaker
A circuit breaker is designed to trip in response to overcurrent.
It may be reset when its lever or button is pressed.
A circuit breaker may be of a bimental type or an electromagnetic type.

2-39
 Chapter 2

Push button

Bimetal type Electromagnetic type

F-2-72

2.7.3.3 Detecting the Intensity of Light

0008-4415
a. Photodiode
A photodiode is an element designed to convert the intensity of light into current.
It generates little current when the light is weak, and generates a large amount of current in response to a high intensity of light.
Photodiodes are characterized by low sensitivity and high response speed.
Unlike common diodes, photodiodes are used by applying reverse voltage. Contrary to common diodes, which remain unaffected by reverse-direction
voltage, photodiodes generate current proportional to the intensity of light.
The current occurring this way is virtually free of the voltage being applied.
Photodiode

Current
Light
Current
Resistance

Intensity
F-2-73

b. Phototransistor
An element whose transistor turns on when exposed to light is known as a photodiode.
It turns on in response to light and remains off in the absence of light.

MEMO:
We use the following symbol to represent a phototransistor in circuit dia-grams.

F-2-74

c. CCD (charge-coupled device)

A CCD consists of a large number of appropriately arranged photocells several square mi-crons in size, and is used to convert light into electric signals.
A CCD may be either a line-type CCD often found in fax machines and digital copiers or a plane-type CCD found in TV cameras.

Line type Plane type

1 pixel (several thousands)

1 pixel (several tens of thousands)

F-2-75

2-40
 Chapter 2

We will study line-type CCDs.

To read a full page of data using a line-type CCD, the original must be advanced continu-ously.

Lamp
Image
processing
Original unit

Mirrors

CCD
(photoconversion)
Lens

F-2-76

c-1 Operation of the CCD

We will find many photodiodes used to convert light into electricity, orderly arranged in a CCD.
Each cell generates electricity according to the intensity of light, and stores it in a capacitor for retrieval after amplification.
1) As much electricity as corresponds to light is generated and stored in a capacity.

Light Light Light Light

F-2-77

2) The electricity is moved through "containers."

F-2-78

3) The electricity is moved by means of shift pulses and amplified for output.

Amplification

Output

Shift pulse
F-2-79

The output from the CCD is in analog amounts proportional to the intensity of light.
2.7.3.4 Detecting Positions
0008-4422
a. Microswitches
The microswitch is designed so that its contact changes in response to a press on the lever called an actuator.
The microswitch has three contacts to which lines are connected.

2-41
 Chapter 2

Actuator

NC terminal Phenol resin body

COM terminal

NO terminal

F-2-80

COM terminal: common terminal.

NC terminal: normally closed; connects to the COM terminal when the actuator is not pressed.
NO terminal: normally open; is not connected to the COM terminal when the actuator is not pressed.
For example, we can try to turn on two lamps alternately using a microswitch.
a-1 Lever Is Not Pressed
The COM terminal and the NC terminal are connected.

N NC
C N C
O O L1
M
COM
L2

NO

Lamp 1 Lamp 2
F-2-81

a-2 Lever Is Pressed

The connection between COM terminal and NC ter-minal opens, connecting the COM terminal and the NO terminal.

2-42
 Chapter 2

N NC
C N C
O O L1
M
COM
L2

NO

Lamp 1 Lamp 2
F-2-82

b. Reed Switch
A reed switch is constructed by two pieces of metal foil arranged with a gap in between and at a displacement within an airtight glass tube.
The two pieces of metal foil are turned on and off by means of magnetism. In the absence of magnetism, its contact remains open.

F-2-83

When a magnet is brought near, the two pieces of metal foil become magnetized and close.

N S

N
F-2-84

c. Hall IC
A Hall IC is an integrated circuit (IC) that uses a Hall element capable of detecting a mag-netic field like that of a magnet. It is mostly used to detect the
revolution of a motor.
DN
83
4

1 2 3 4
Power supply (5 V)

– output

+ output

Power supply (0 V)
F-2-85

2-43
 Chapter 2

The polarity of a magnet (N, S) is identified, and appropriate outputs are caused between pin 2 and pin 3.
To detect a position, the combination of two outputs is used. The signal is High in the presence of a magnetic field and Low, in its absence.

''H''

Output voltage
1 Output
5V 3 2
4

0V ''L''

Magnet absent Magnet present

F-2-86

d. Photointerrupters
A photointerrupter consists of a light-emitting diode and a phototransistor.

Light-emitting diode Phototransistor

(C)

(E)

F-2-87

When there is no object between the photodiode and the phototransistor, the phototransistor is exposed to light and, as a result, turns on. When there is an
object, on the other hand, the photodiode is blocked out of light and turns off.

Light-emitting Light-emitting
element Window Light-receiving element Light-receiving
element element
Light

ON condition OFF condition

F-2-88

MEMO:
Photointerrupter Circuit
1. Sample 1

Output

C
Tr1
B
E

F-2-89

1) Exposed to Light
(1) The phototransistor turns on.
(2) The base (B) of the transistor (Tr1) goes High.
(3) The transistor (Tr1) turns on, and the output voltage at the collector (C) goes Low.
2) Not Exposed to Light
(1) The phototransistor turns off.
(2) The base (B) of the phototransistor (Tr1) goes Low.
(3) The transistor (Tr1) turns off, and the output voltage at the collector (C) goes High.

2-44
 Chapter 2

2. Sample 2

C
Output
C
Tr1
B
E

F-2-90

1) Exposed to Light
(1) The phototransistor turns on.
(2) The collector (C) of the transistor (Tr1) goes Low.
(3) Since the base (B) of Tr1 is Low, Tr1 turns off.
(4) The output voltage at the collector (C) of Tr1 goes High.
2) Not Exposed to Light
(1) The phototransistor turns off.
(2) The collector (C) of the phototransistor (Tr1) goes High.
(3) Since the base (B) of Tr1 is High, Tr1 turns on.
(4) The output voltage at the collector (C) of Tr1 goes Low.

e. Reflecting Type Photosensor

Like a phototransistor, a reflecting photosensor consists of a light-emitting diode and a phototransistor.
When there is a light-reflecting object above the sensor, it reflects the light from the light-emitting diode to direct it to and, ultimately, turn on the
phototransistor.
Unlike a photointerrupter, however, a reflecting type photosensor can also detect a trans-parent material.

Object

External view OFF condition ON condition

F-2-91

2.7.3.5 Detecting Temperature

0008-4448
a. Thermal Fuse
When the ambient temperature exceeds a specific value, a thermal fuse is designed to cre-ate an open circuit to stop the flow of current, thereby protecting
the circuit.
It is commonly found in heaters and dryers.

Shape of a thermal fuse

F-2-92

b. Thermal Switches
A thermal switch creates an open circuit above a specific temperature.
It is capable of returning to normal to complete a circuit when the temperature drops.

The disc wraps

by heat.

External view Closed circuit Open circuit

F-2-93

c. Thermal Ferrite Switch

2-45
 Chapter 2

A reed switch is built in a cylindrical thermal magnet.

The thermal magnet loses magnetism below a specific temperature.
The reed switch turns on or off above or under a specific temperature, respectively.

F-2-94

d. Thermistor
A number of devices whose resistance change according to temperature are collectively called thermistors.
In practice, they are called "thermistors" or "posistor" according to their respective char-acteristics.

F-2-95

The resistance of a thermistor decreases when the temperature increases.

The resistance of a posistor increases when the temperature increases.
d-1 Thermistors
Since the resistance of a thermistor changes gradually in response to changes in tempera-ture, it is often used to detect temperature in combination with an
operational amplifier.
Resistance

Temperature
F-2-96

d-2 Posistor
Its resistance changes abruptly at a specific level of temperature. Taking advantage of this characteristic, it is often used as part of a protective mechanism
of a circuit.
Although some posistors are such that their resistance changes gradually, they are rarely used.
Resistance

Temperature
F-2-97

2.7.3.6 Detecting Humidity

0008-4453
a. High Molecular Humidity Sensor
As shown in the following diagram, a high molecular humidity sensor is built by applying a humidity-sensitive material made of conducting high molecular
on an electrode PCB.
The humidity-sensitive materials include those whose ion concentration increases in relation to increases in the ambient humidity. A higher ion density
allows more electricity to flow. In other words, changes in resistance is detected as changes in humidity.
At low humidity, the resistance tends to be high.
At high humidity, the resistance tends to be low.

2-46
 Chapter 2

Resistance
55˚C
30˚C
20˚C
5˚C

20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Humidity (%)
F-2-98

2.7.4 Commonly Used Electrical Parts

2.7.4.1 Solenoids
0008-4464
A solenoid uses an electrode to attract an iron rod or plate for controlling mechanical movements.

F-2-99

2.7.4.2 Electromagnetic Clutches

0008-4465
An electromagnetic clutch is used to transmit or cut force of rotation (for example, in cars).

F-2-100

a. Mechanism
When the gear 1 rotates, the shaft connected to it will rotate.
Since the disk A is fitted to the shaft, it will rotate with the shaft.
The coil and the gear 2 (integrated with the disk B) are free.

2-47
 Chapter 2

Gear 2
Disk B Integrated as one
Shaft
Coil Disk A
Gear 1
F-2-101

When current is let to flow through the coil, the disk B is attached. The contact between the disk A and the disk B enables transmission of force to the gear 2.

F-2-102

2.7.4.3 Counter
0008-4467
When the electrical magnet inside a counter is supplied with power, the lever rotates the toothed wheel to advance the number on display.

Counting solenoid coil

Display window

Recovery button Incrementing ratchet

F-2-103

2.7.4.4 Stepping Motor (pulse motor)

0008-4470
A stepping motor is a type of motor that rotates in units of specific angles.
It is used when accurate positioning of an object is required, and is capable of rotating con-tinuously when pulse voltage is applied continuously.
A through D in the following diagram are coils; surrounded by them is a magnet called ro-tor.
When the coil A is supplied with power, N of the rotor stops at position q.
When both coils A and B are supplied with power, it stops at position w.
Likewise, when the coil B is supplied with power, it stops at position e.

2-48
 Chapter 2

q
i w 24V
A
Left CA

N
CCW CB
u D B e CC
Right CD
4
C CW
y r
t
F-2-104

To start continuous rotation, pulses are applied as shown in the following diagram.

Right rotation Left rotation

CA CA

CB CB

CC CC

CD CD

i q w e r t y u i q w e w q i u y t r e w q i u
F-2-105

2.7.4.5 Ultrasonic Motor

0008-4475
An ultrasonic motor is divided into a stator (elastic body) and a rotor (mobile body). The stator is oscillated continuously by ultrasonic waves to vibrate
the rotor, which is in contact with the stator, in a specific direction.

Contact unit Rotor

flange spring

Stator

Metal ring
Piezoelectric ceramic
Stator and rotor
F-2-106

The principles of operation are explained with reference to the following diagrams. When the stator is vibrated by ultrasonic waves while in contact with
the rotor, waves occur when the waves move to the right, the tip P of the boss moves in the opposite direction (from right).
Since the rotor and the stator remain in contact under pressure, the movement of the tip causes the rotor to move to the left.
The ultrasonic motor differs from electromagnetic motors for the following:
- It provides high torque at low speed.
- It enables highly controlled positioning (start/stop movement).
- It provides high retention torque.
- It has a simple construction.
An ultrasonic motor may be found in the mechanism used in a camera to move its lens.

2-49
 Chapter 2

Rotor
Stator P

Conceptual diagram of
rotor rotation by continuing waves
F-2-107

2.7.4.6 Halogen Lamp

0008-4509
A common incandescent lamp consists of a glass bulb in which a metal filament called tungsten is sealed with argon gas-the filament emits light when it
is supplied with power.
The ratio of power turned into visible light is between 10% and 20%, making the lamp not so efficient a source of light.

Filament
(tungsten)

Inactive gas
(argon)

Incandescent lamp

F-2-108

We could increase the efficiency by increasing the temperature of the filament. However, such would accelerate tungsten evaporation or rapidly turn the
filament black.
A halogen lamp is free from such problems.
Halogen (inactive gas, iodine or bromine) is sealed inside a quartz tube.

Halogen lamp
F-2-109

The temperature of evaporating tungsten drops near the surface of the tube, reacting to halogen to become halogen tungsten.
When the new element moves to the filament, the high temperature causes it to separate into halogen and tungsten, returning the tungsten to the filament.
This process is known as recycling of halogen, and its light-emitting efficiency is between 30% and 30%.
We must be careful when handling quarts glass, since touching it by hand will cause it to blacken or become foggy.
Since the halogen lamp tends to heat to a very high temperature, it is also used as a heater.

2-50
 Chapter 2

Quartz glass tube

Halogen

Evaporating
tungsten

Tungsten and filament

F-2-110

2.7.4.7 Fluorescent Lamps

0008-4513
a. Principles of Fluorescent Lamps
A fluorescent lamp generates electrons by causing left and right electrodes to discharge.
The electrons hit against mercury vapor inside the glass tube, and the resulting energy causes ultraviolet light.
This ultraviolet light then hits the fluorescent material applied to the inner surface of the glass tube to generate visible light.
The glass used for a common fluorescent lamp do not transmit ultraviolet light. The light-emitting efficiency of the lamp is between 40% and 60%.

Filament Electron Mercury

Fluorescent
Glass material Argon gas Ultraviolet
ray
Fluorescent
material
Glass tube
Mercury vapor
Visible light
F-2-111

b. Activation Circuit
The mercury vapor inside a fluorescent vapor will not start to discharge simply in re-sponse to alternating current. We must have a glow starter and a
stabilizer for the purpose.
Once started, however, discharge may be applying alternating current. (The stabilizer is used to serve as a resistor to keep the current under control.)

Glow starter

Switch
Stabilizer (coil)

F-2-112

When the glow starter has initiated discharge, heat occurs to close the bimetal contact, in turn stopping the glow discharge-as a result, the heat dissipates,
and the bimetal contact opens.

2-51
 Chapter 2

Bimetal

F-2-113

b-1. Operation

Glow starter

Switch
Stabilizer (coil)

F-2-114

1) When the switch is turned on and alternating current is applied, the glow starter starts discharge (glowing violet).
2) The heat from the glow discharge closes the bimental contact.
3) A large amount of current flows into the stabilizer, heating the filament of the fluorescent lamp and setting off discharge of electrons.
4) The contact of the glow starter closes. As a result, the glow discharge stops, heat dissi-pates, and the contact opens.
Since the stabilizer is made of coiling, the deprivation of current causes an instantaneous high voltage by the work of self induction, subjecting the filament
to the voltage and causing discharge using mercury vapor.
5) Once discharge has started, it continues by the work of alternating current. At this time, the current is flowing through the filament (left and right) not
in the glow starter.
For this reason, the voltage on the glow starter drops, and glow discharge does not occur when the fluorescence lamp is on.
The flicker of a fluorescent lamp is double the frequency of the power supply: in other words, at 50 Hz, the flicker is 100 and at 60 Hz, 120.
2.7.4.8 Relays
0008-4517
a. Construction of Relays
A relay consists of an electric magnet, and is used to operate a contact.

F-2-115

a-1 Without Current through the Electric Magnet

The COM terminal and the NC terminal are connected.

NC terminal
COM terminal
NO terminal

Coil
Contact

Iron core
F-2-116

2-52
 Chapter 2

a-2 With Current Through the Electric Magnet

The COM terminal and the NO terminal are connected.

NC terminal
COM terminal
NO terminal

Coil

Battery
F-2-117

MEMO:
- The term COM terminal stands for a common terminal, indicating that it is used in common.
- The term NC terminal stands for a normally closed terminal. It remains closed, and opens when the electric terminal turns on.
- The term NO terminal stands for a normally open terminal. It remains open, and closes when the electric terminal turns on.

With some types of relays, a single relay may be used to turn on and off multiple con-tacts.
The following diagram shows a relay used to handle four contacts.

COM COM COM COM

NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO

Terminal to supply power to Terminal to connect to parts to be controlled

the electromagnet (may be AC or DC, as long as appropriately
(DC, AC) rated)
F-2-118

b. Controlling AC Parts with Relays

The following diagram shows how AC parts may be controlled by a relay.

5V
K-1
NC NO
K-1 0V
AC

SW1
Relay (K1) control circuit Relay (K-1) electromagnetic circuit
F-2-119

With SW1 closed, the current flows to the relay (K1), causing the contact to close to the side of the NO terminal and applying an AC voltage to the lamp
to turn it on.

MEMO:
As can be seen in the foregoing diagrams, a relay is usually shown in two separate circuit diagrams (one for control circuit and one for electromag-netic
circuit). It is important to note this fact when looking at a circuit dia-gram.

2.7.4.9 SSR (Solid State Relay)

0008-4521
An SSR is a non-contact relay capable of controlling alternating current by using direct current.
The AC switch terminals 1 and 2 remain on as long as a DC voltage is applied to the terminals 3 and 4.

2-53
 Chapter 2

3 1
Terminals 1 and 2 turn AC is turned
on in response to 24 V. SSR on or off.

4 2
F-2-120

a. SSR Operation
The operation of an SSR is explained with reference to the following diagram, which is a simple diagram depicting the heater temperature control circuit
of a copier.

24V

SSR
Thermistor 3 1
AC
Heater 'H' or 'L'
24V [1]
4 2
[2]
Heater
0V
Tr1
Th VR1

Fixing roller

The thermistor resistance Used for 180 C

decreases when the control.
temperature increases.

F-2-121

The fixing assembly of a copier must be maintained at about 180 deg C. The foregoing circuit detects the temperature of the fixing using a thermistor, and
turns on and off the heater according to the measured temperature for control.

At Low Temperature
The resistance of the thermistor increases, and the voltage at [2] is higher than at [1]. The condition causes the output of the operation amplifier to go High,
turning on Tr1.
When Tr1 turns on, 24 V is applied to the terminals 3 and 4 of the SSR-as a result, the terminals 1 and 2 of the SSR turn on, and the AC voltage causes
current to flow to the heater.

At High Temperature
The resistance of the thermistor decreases, and the voltage at [2] is lower than at [1]. The rest will be the opposite of "at low temperature" and, as a result,
the SSR will turn off.

b. b. Internal Operations of an SSR

Heater SSR

T2
R1 R2
Power plug
T1 24V
G
Light-emitting
CdS diode

SSR internal circuit

F-2-122

Without 24 V on the SSR

Since the resistance of CdS is considerably high, current will not flow to R1 and CdS.
Since there is no difference in potential between T1 and G, the triac remains off.

With 24 V on the SSR

The light-emitting diode turns on, and the resistance of CdS will decrease.
An AC voltage flows as follows:
outlet -> heater -> R1 -> CdS -> outlet
outlet -> CdS -> R1 -> heater -> outlet
The condition produces a difference in potential between T1 and G, turning on the triac.

2-54
 Chapter 2

Triac turns on in response

to the difference in potential.

F-2-123

2.7.4.10 Varistors
0008-4564
A varistor is an element whose resistance varies according to the voltage being applied.
When a voltage of a specific degree or higher is applied, current starts to flow abruptly as is shown in the following diagram (i.e., the resistance decreases).
Varistors have no polarity.
Normal direction
current

Reverse direction Normal direction

voltage voltage
Reverse direction
current

F-2-124

The following diagrams shows types of output wave forms occurring when an AC voltage is applied to a varistor.

Varistor absent

141V
Input voltage Output
(100 VAC) voltage
141V

80-V varistor present

Output 80V
voltage
80V

F-2-125

MEMO:
We use the following symbol to represent a varistor in circuit diagrams.

F-2-126

2-55
 Chapter 2

2.7.4.11 CPU (Central Processing Unit)

0008-4566
As its name implies, a CPU is the center of a computer serving computation, control, and memory functions. It is the heart and the brain of any computer.
A computer must have a CPU, and it is found in the form of an IC mounted on the micro-processor PCB of an OA device.
The following diagram shows the composition of a microprocessor circuit used in a PC or office equipment.
The signals from the input unit are sent to the CPU through an I/O unit.
The CPU computes, controls, or stores data according to the input data, RAM data, and programs stored in ROM, and sends the results to RAM for storage
or an I/O device in the form of signals.

Input unit Microprocessor Output

I/O CPU I/O

• Keyboard • Display
• Mouse • Printer
• Switch • External
• Sensor memory device
• Others • Motor
• Lamp
• Others
RAM ROM

Flow of data
F-2-127

MEMO:
The term I/O stands for input/output, and refers to a device or part de-signed to handle input/output operations of a computer.

2.7.4.12 Memory
0008-4568
A memory is classified into an internal storage device used on a PCB and such external storage devices as floppy disks.
An internal storage device is directly controlled by the CPU, and most of them are now IC memories.
An external storage device is intended for large volumes of data, and are capable of retaining data even after the power is removed. (The data is read into
the internal memory before use.)
We will study an IC memory which is under direct control of the CPU. An IC memory may be any of the following:

Mask ROM

ROM EP-ROM

P-ROM

EEP-ROM

IC Memory

Static RAM (S-RAM)

RAM

Dynamic RAM (D-RAM)

F-2-128

a. ROM (Read Only Memory)

ROM is exclusively for reading. You can read the data stored in it, but cannot write data to it. Since the data in it remains intact in the absence of power,
a program may be stored in ROM for instant access after power-on. (Such programs as are used to control copiers or cameras are stored in ROM.)

a-1 Mask ROM

A mask ROM chip is used to store programs during a manufacturing process, and it does not allow changes to such programs.
The term mask refers to the film pattern used to manufacture an IC. Since the production of this type of ROM in large quantities will result in lower cost,
it is most often used for mass-production products which will operate on the same program.

2-56
 Chapter 2

a-2 EP-ROM (Erasable Programmable ROM)

EP-ROM allows changes to the stored data as many times as we want. As such, this type of ROM is frequently used for products whose programs call for
changes from time to time. In general, the term P-ROM refers to an EP-ROM.
To erase the existing data, the ROM is first detached from the PCB and then exposed to strong ultraviolet light through the transparent glass on its top
using a special device. To write data, a device called a P-ROM writer is used.
a-3 EEP-ROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM)
With EEP-ROM, we can erase the stored data electrically without removing it from the PCB. Since we need not detach the IC from the board each time
we want to change its con-tents, it has come to be used widely for storing mode settings of printers.

a-4 F-ROM (Flash Read Only Memory)

The GP30 (digital black-and-white copier) was the first to use an F-ROM. Of the options for digital black-and-white copiers, the MDC was the first.
F-ROM allows writing and erasing data electrically, and is sometimes called flash EEP-PROM.
F-ROM can be made small and cheaply, and therefore is an excellent choice for storing a large volume of data.

b. RAM (Random Access Memory)

You may use RAM to freely write data or read data into them. Data stored in RAM disappear when power is removed-this is where it differs from ROM.
In word-processing applications, newly prepared text may be stored in RAM after read-ing in programs and data from external memory devices.

b-1 Static RAM (S-RAM)

S-RAM has a high memory density, and its per-unit cost tends to be high. On the other hand, since it is capable of operating at high speed and relies on
simple peripheral circuitry, it is commonly found in small-size systems. In the case of copiers, S-RAM is used to store copy counts.

b-2 Dynamic RAM (D-RAM)

D-RAM is a high-density, high-capacity memory. Its per-bit cost is low. Further, its small size requires little mounting space, and it has become
indispensable for personal computers and word processors requiring large memory with space constrains.

MEMO:
1. Units Used to Express Memory Size
We use bits and bytes to express the size of a memory, depending on what we are referring to.
1) Bit
The term bit may be used to express the size of a memory IC. For ex-ample, a D-RAM of 256K means the D-RAM provides as much as 256K bits of
memory.

2) Byte
The term byte may be used to express the size of a memory device. It may be used in reference to the size of the memory of a computer product. For
example, a 256K computer offers 256K bytes of memory.

2.Capacity of a D-RAM
As many as 8 bits of memory are needed to store a single character. From this, we can find out the number of characters that may be stored in a single 1M-
bit D-RAM as follows (1M is 1024 x 1024):
1,048,576/8 = 131,072
In other words, the D-RAM in question is capable of holding as many as 131,072 characters, equivalent of about 180 pages of a paperback.

c. SIMM and DIMM

The following diagrams show the shapes of typical ROMs.
The one on the left was most common in the past, but more and more SIMMs and DIMMs are being used at present, providing improved integration of
circuits and ease of at-tachment/detachment.
- SIMM (Single In-line Memory Module)
It consists of ROMs, ICs, and terminals mounted on a small PCB, and may be snapped on to its motherboard easily. The terminals on both sides (face and
back) are used for the same signals.
- DIMM (In-line Memory Module)
It is more or less the same as a SIMM, but the terminals on both sides (face and back) are used for different signals, possessing twice the number of ports.

SIMM
DIMM

Terminals Terminals

F-2-129

d. d. Replacing a Memory IC (ROM/RAM)

It has become very common to correct a problem in office equipment by replacement of a memory IC.
A memory IC is a high-density semiconductor element which is extremely susceptible to static electricity. Be sure to take note of the following when
replacing it to avoid problems during servicing:
1. Do not carry a new memory IC without protection (as in a jacket pocket).
Be sure it is fitted in a sponge base or in a special case treated against static electricity when carrying it.

2-57
 Chapter 2

Conducting bag

F-2-130

2. Be sure to turn off the power or disconnect the power plug from the outlet before starting the work.
3. Be sure to put on a wrist strap to keep PCBs and memory ICs free of static electricity.

Wrist strap
Be sure to connect
the terminal to GND
or 0 V of the circuit.

F-2-131

4. Detaching and Attaching

[ROMs]
When removing a memory IC from a PCB, try to use a tool designed for the purpose.
If you must make do with a screwdriver, take extra care not to damage the pattern on the PCB.
Orient the memory IC so that its cut-off matches the marking on the PCB, and fit it with care so that its pins will not bend. If you have to replace multiple
memory ICs, be sure to fit them in their correct locations.

Cut-off

F-2-132

[SIMMs, DIMMs]
Snap them into their respective sockets.

F-2-133

e. Protecting Against Static Electricity When Carrying Electric Circuits

Normally, new PCBs come in black, conducting bags. Take them to the user's without tak-ing them out of the bags. (Never carry them without proper
protection.)
If the PCB is equipped with a back-up battery, be sure to use the specified wrapping ma-terial. Try not to place any PCB directly on a metal surface.

Conducting bag

F-2-134

f. Replacing the PCBs

Put on the wrist strap before starting the work. Throughout the work, take care not to touch the elements on the PCB.

2-58
 Chapter 2

1. Turn off the power, or disconnect the power plug from the outlet.
2. Be sure to insert the connector firmly.
3. Check to make sure that the PCB is securely fixed in position, and will not wobble against vibration.
You need not worry about damaging the PCBs during servicing work as long as you observe the above instructions.
2.7.4.13 Table of Symbols
0008-4584
Study the following table until you have become familiar with symbols commonly used in circuit diagrams. (Some of the expressions may be common,
rather than formal, names.)

No. Name Symbol No. Name Symbol No. Name Symbol

A
Power H
1 14 Diode 27 Hall IC G
plug
K

Zener A Photo-
2 GND 15 28
diode interrupter
K
Light- A CdS
3 Battery 16 emitting 29 CdS
diode K

TH
Photo-
4 Switch 17 30 Thermistor
diode

P
Circuit
5 18 Varistor 31 Posistor
breaker

C HU
NPN B Humidity
6 Fuse 19 32
transistor sensor
E
E NC
Thermal PNP B Micro- COM
7 20 33 NO
fuse transistor switch
C
C
Thermal Photo-
8 21 34 Relay K201
switch transistor
E

D D
9 Resistor 22 FET G G 35 Solenoid SL
S S
A Electro-
Variable
10 23 SCR 36 magnetic CL
resistor
G K clutch
T2
11 Capacitor 24 Triac 37 Counter CNT
G T1

Fluo-
12 Coil 25 SSR 38 rescent FL
lamp

Operatio-
Transfor
13 26 nal 39 Heater
mer
amplifier

F-2-135

2-59
Chapter 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
 Contents

Contents

3.1 Outline of the Exposure System.....................................................................................................................................3-1

3.1.1 Functional Construction............................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1.1 Digital Copier..................................................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1.2 Analog Copier .................................................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio................................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.2.1 Digital Copier..................................................................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.2.2 Analog Copier .................................................................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp ............................................................................................................3-4
3.2.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.2 Using a Halogen Lamp ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-4
3.2.2.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.2.2 Turning On/Off the Halogen Lamp.................................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.2.3 Controlling the Intensity .................................................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.2.4 Detecting the Activation .................................................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.2.5 Halogen Lamp Intensity Automatic Correction (ALVC) ...............................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.3 Using a Fluorescent Lamp ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.3.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.3.2 Turning On/Off the Fluorescent Lamp ...........................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.3.3 Pre-Heating the Fluorescent Lamp..................................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.4 Controlling the Intensity of the Fluorescent Lamp ...................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.4.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.4.2 Low Intensity of the Fluorescent Lamp ..........................................................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.4.3 High Intensity of the Fuorescent Lamp...........................................................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.5 Automatic Adjustment of the Intensity of a Fluorescent Lamp (ALVC control)........................................................................ 3-5
3.2.5.1 Automatic Adjustment of the Intensity of a Fluorescent Lamp (ALVC control) ...........................................................................................3-5
3.2.6 Handling the Scanning Lamp....................................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.6.1 Handling the Scanning Lamp..........................................................................................................................................................................3-5
3.3 Scanner Drive/Copyboard Drive System .......................................................................................................................3-6
3.3.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................3-6
3.3.2 Movement of the Copyboard ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.2.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................3-6
3.3.2.2 Controlling the Drive Mechanism of the Copyboard......................................................................................................................................3-7
3.3.2.3 Switching the Direction of the Copyboard Movement ...................................................................................................................................3-8
3.3.3 Moving the Scanner ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.3.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.3.3.2 Scanner Motor ...............................................................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.3.4 Stream Reading .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.4.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.3.4.2 Stream Reading with a DF ............................................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.3.4.3 Stream Reading by a CFF .............................................................................................................................................................................3-13
3.4 Lens Drive System .......................................................................................................................................................3-14
3.4.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-14
3.4.1.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3-14
3.4.2 Moving the Lens ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-15
3.4.2.1 Lens Drive Mechanism .................................................................................................................................................................................3-15
3.4.2.2 Controlling the Position of Originals ............................................................................................................................................................3-15
3.5 Other Functions............................................................................................................................................................3-18
3.5.1 Identifying the Size of an Original............................................................................................................................................. 3-18
3.5.1.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3-18
3.5.1.2 Identifying the Size of an Original in Book Mode........................................................................................................................................3-18
3.5.1.3 Mechanism of Detection ...............................................................................................................................................................................3-18
Contents

3.5.1.4 Identifying the Size of an Original (with feeder in use) ............................................................................................................................... 3-18
3.5.2 Pre-Scanning .............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-20
3.5.2.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.2.2 Purpose of Pre-Scanning............................................................................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.3 ARE Control .............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-20
3.5.3.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.3.2 Principles ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-21
3.5.3.3 Photosensor Type (controlling bias) ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-21
3.5.3.4 Photosensor Type (intensity control/development bias control) .................................................................................................................. 3-21
3.5.3.5 Potential Sensor Type ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-22
 Chapter 3

3.1 Outline of the Exposure System

3.1.1 Functional Construction
3.1.1.1 Digital Copier
0008-4252
A digital copier's exposure system consists of mechanisms and functions involved from exposure of an original to projection of the reflected light to a
CCD. The following figure shows a cross section of the exposure system of a typical digital copier.
Exposure System of a Digital Copier
Original exposure system

Slit
Scanning lamp
No. 2 mirror

(forward)
No. 4 mirror
No. 1 mirror (diffraction grating)
Lens

No. 3 mirror
R
GB

CCD

CCD driver PCB

F-3-1

3.1.1.2 Analog Copier

0008-4257
An analog copier's exposure system uses a scanning lamp to expose an original, and forms an image on the surface of a photosensitive drum using the
reflected light led through lenses. The following figure is a conceptual diagram of the processes involved; the number of mirrors differs from model to
model:
Exposure System of an Analog Copier 1
Standard white plate
Scanner drive system Lens unit
Scanning lamp
Lens drive system
No. 2 mirror

No. 1 mirror No. 4 mirror

No. 3 mirror
Dust-proof glass

Photosensitive drum
F-3-2

In some models, the scanning lamp and the lens array are fixed in position.

3-1
 Chapter 3

Exposure System of an Analog Copier 2

Copyboard glass

Scanning lamp

Short-focus lens
array

Photosensitive
drum

F-3-3

3.1.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio

3.1.2.1 Digital Copier
0008-4272
The reproduction ratio in main scanning direction (drum axial direction) is changed by skipping (for reduction) or repeating (for enlargement) the image
signals when they are writ-ten to or read from a line memory (digital processing).
The reproduction ratio in sub scanning direction is changed by increasing (for reduction) or reducing (for enlargement) the speed at which the No. 1 mirror
is moved in relation to the pe-ripheral speed of the photosensitive drum, thus changing the ratio in the peripheral direction of the photosensitive drum.

Scanner motor

Light-blocking plate
(forward)
Scanner home
position sensor No. 1 mirror
mount

No. 3 mirror
mount
(reverse)
Scanner original leading Light-blocking plate
edge sensor

F-3-4

3.1.2.2 Analog Copier

0008-4276
a. Basic Functions
The reproduction ratio in the axial direction of the photosensitive drum is changed by the lens drive system, while that in the peripheral direction is changed
by the scanner drive sys-tem.
The lens drive system uses a zoom lens, and the position of the lens and the focal point are varied when changing the reproduction ratio in the axial direction
of the photosensitive drum.
The scanner drive system increases the speed of the No. 1 mirror in relation to the periph-eral direction of the photosensitive drum (for reduction) or reduces
it (for enlargement) to change the reproduction ratio in the peripheral direction of the photosensitive drum.

3-2
 Chapter 3

Direct F'
F

Reduce F1'
F1

Enlarge F2'
F2

F-3-5

b. Focusing
The lens unit consists of multiple lenses.
The cam plate mounted inside the lens unit adjusts the distance between lenses to focus on an image.

M Drive motor
Lens mount Rail Lens drive belt

(reduction)

Zoom lens

Cam groove
Cam plate

F-3-6

3-3
 Chapter 3

3.2 Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp

3.2.1 Outline
3.2.1.1 Outline
0008-4281
An analog machine controls the scanning lamp as follows:
1. Turing it on and off.
2. Detecting its activation.
3. Controlling its intensity.
Purpose:
- To maintain its intensity at a specific level against fluctuations in the voltage of the power supply.
- To control its intensity in keeping with the setting of the density key.
- To control its intensity to suit the density of originals (AE control).
3.2.2 Using a Halogen Lamp
3.2.2.1 Outline
0008-4283
A halogen lamp provides light with a stable intensity.
It may be turned on using AC power or DC power, and is controlled as follows:
3.2.2.2 Turning On/Off the Halogen Lamp
0008-4286
The halogen lamp ON signal causes the halogen lamp to be supplied with power, thereby turning it on.
3.2.2.3 Controlling the Intensity
0008-4289
The intensity adjustment signal controls the intensity of the halogen lamp to suit the setting of the Density key or the density of originals, sensitivity of the
drum, and the setting of the intensity control variable resistor.
3.2.2.4 Detecting the Activation
0008-4292
The error detection circuit is used to monitor the halogen lamp.
if the halogen lamp turns on erroneously because of a short in the activation circuit, the error detection circuit will detect the condition and communicate
the fact to the control PCB, thereby turning off the power to stop the AC power to the lamp regulator.
3.2.2.5 Halogen Lamp Intensity Automatic Correction (ALVC)
0008-4293
To compensate for the possible changes in image quality caused by deterioration or wear of the photosensitive drum, a mechanism is used to automatically
correct the voltage used to turn on the scanning lamp. See the descriptions on how the transfer bias voltage level is controlled as in (ATVC).
3.2.3 Using a Fluorescent Lamp
3.2.3.1 Outline
0008-4294
A fluorescent lamp consumes little power and does not generate heat.
However, without intensity control, a fluorescent lamp tends to take time before its intensity increases to a specific lever after it turns on. Particularly, it
takes longer in a low temperature environment.
To ensure that originals are exposed at a specific intensity at all times, the intensity of the fluorescent lamp is monitored (by an intensity adjustment sensor).
To enable the lamp to attain an optimum intensity in a short time, its filament is pre-heated for several seconds after the Start key is pressed.
3.2.3.2 Turning On/Off the Fluorescent Lamp
0008-4295
The lamp ON signal from the control PCB is used to start control by the fluorescent lamp drive circuit, at which time the output of the secondary side of
the transformer is applied across its terminals, thus turning it on at a high frequency.
3.2.3.3 Pre-Heating the Fluorescent Lamp
0008-4298
While the machine is in standby, current is applied to the filament of the fluorescent lamp so that the lamp will attain an optimum intensity fast and remain
stable.

a. Constant Pre-Heating
As long as the intensity adjustment signal remains on, the fluorescent lamp driver circuit applies current to the filament of the fluorescent lamp.
Typical Model: FC310

b. Control Pre-Heating
The CPU on the control PCB varies the duty ratio of the fluorescent pre-heat signal (pulse signal) to suit the condition of the machine, and sends the result
to the fluorescent pre-heat circuit. When the drive signal is sent to the transformer in response to the signal, the secondary side of the transformer turns on,
allowing the fluorescent lamp pre-heat current to flow and sart pre-heating.
For instance, in the case of the NP6016, control consists of four modes: half pre-heating, pre-heating I while the scanning lamp remains on, and pre-heating
II while the fluorescent lamp remains on.

3-4
 Chapter 3

3.2.4 Controlling the Intensity of the Fluorescent Lamp

3.2.4.1 Outline
0008-4301
To make sure that the intensity of the fluorescent lamp remains stable, the following control is performed with the help of an intensity adjustment sensor:
3.2.4.2 Low Intensity of the Fluorescent Lamp
0008-4303
The output of the intensity adjustment sensor decreases while the output voltage of the amplification circuit increases. This condition decreases the duty
ratio of the intensity adjustment signal so that the period in which the fluorescent lamp is turned on will be longer.
The fluorescent lamp turns on when both the intensity high-frequency signal and the intensity adjustment signal are on.

OFF OFF OFF

ON ON
Intensity adjustment signal

Activation high frequency signal

F-3-7

3.2.4.3 High Intensity of the Fuorescent Lamp

0008-4306
The output of the intensity sensor increaseswhile the output voltage of the amplification circuit decreases. This condition increasesthe duty ratio of the
intensity adjustment signal from the microprocessor so that the period in which the fluorescent lamp is turned on will be shorter.

OFF OFF OFF

ON ON
Intensity adjustment signal

Activation high frequency signal

F-3-8

3.2.5 Automatic Adjustment of the Intensity of a Fluorescent Lamp (ALVC control)

3.2.5.1 Automatic Adjustment of the Intensity of a Fluorescent Lamp (ALVC control)
0008-4307
To make up for the reduction in the quality of copy images caused by deterioration of the photosensitive drum, the voltage used to turn on the scanning
lamp is automatically corrected (ALVC control; see the descriptions on how the transfer bias voltage level is corrected).
Typical Model: NP6016
3.2.6 Handling the Scanning Lamp
3.2.6.1 Handling the Scanning Lamp
0008-4309
- Fingerprints on a fluorescent lamp or a halogen lamp can cause uneven intensity. Do not hold them directly by hand.
- A halogen lamp becomes extremely hot. Be sure to wait until it has cooled before starting work (e.g., replacement).

3-5
 Chapter 3

3.3 Scanner Drive/Copyboard Drive System

3.3.1 Outline
3.3.1.1 Outline
0008-4310
The scanner drive system consists of the No. 1 mirror mount (equipped with a scanning lamp and mirrors used to form optical paths), No. 2 mirror mount
(equipped with mirrors to form optical paths), scanner motor, and sensors used to detect the positions of the mirrors.

Scanner motor

No.1 mirror motor

(Reverse)
No.2 mirror motor

Scanner home position

senser

F-3-9

The scanner drive system is broadly divided into a mobile scanner (with a fixed copyboard) and a mobile copyboard type. A fixed copyboard, in turn, may
be a type which allows stream reading using a DF, RDF, or CFF.
3.3.2 Movement of the Copyboard
3.3.2.1 Outline
0008-4312
The following figure shows a cross section of the scanner of a copier equipped with a mobile copyboard (containing a short-focus lens array). A machine
of this type has a fixed scanner, and the copyboard moves to scan originals

Copyboard glass

Scanning lamp

Short-focus lens array

Photosensitive
drum

F-3-10

While the copyboard moves forward, the scanning lamp turns on to expose the original, and the reflected light is projected to the photosensitive drum
through a short-focus lens array.
View from Front
At copyboard To copyboard Scanning original At copyboard To copyboard
home position start position reversal position home position
Copyboard Reverse Forward Reverse Stop

Body
Repeated for continuous copying
F-3-11

3-6
 Chapter 3

3.3.2.2 Controlling the Drive Mechanism of the Copyboard

0008-4314
The following figure shows a typical mechanism used to drive a copyboard.
The copyboard is moved forward, in reverse, and stopped using copyboard drive solenoids and a switch mechanism.
The position of the copyboard is detected by a copyboard position sensor.
As the copyboard moves, the cam mounted at the bottom of the copyboard glass pushes the copyboard position detecting lever, turning on or off
photosensors.
If the copyboard fails to complete a move within a specific period of time, an error will be issued.
Controlling the Movement of the Copyboard
Cam
Start position cam
Rack

Copyboard position detecting lever

(forward)

Copyboard position sensor

Copyboard glass

Reversing cam

Copyboard drive gear

Copyboard drive solenoid

SL

Forward- Forward/reverse Revers-

ing gear switching mechanism ing gear

M Motor

F-3-12

The following table describes the mechanisms involved in the movement of the copyboard.

3-7
 Chapter 3

Copyboard
position sensor Description Copyboard position (cam)
Forward Reverse
Registration cam
- The copyboard is at Revesing cam Start position cam
home position.
- When the Start key is (Reverse)
Copyboard
pressed or paper is position sensor :
inserted, the OFF
copyboard drive
solenoid turns on. Copyboard position
detecting lever (front view)

- The copyboard is at
start position.
- The copyboard drive
solenoid turns off.

ON

- When the intensity of

Continuous copying
the scanning lamp
reaches 100%, the
copyboard drive (forward)
solenoid turns on.
- AE measurement is
started.
- The registration cam OFF
turns on the
registration roller.
- The copyboard is at
reversal position.
- The copyboard drive
solenoid turns off.
- After a specific period
of time, the copyboard
drive solenoid turns on. ON OFF
- The pickup solenoid
turns on (in continuous
copying).
- When making the
last copy, the
copyboard drive
solenoid turns off at
copyboard home
position. ON OFF

F-3-13

3.3.2.3 Switching the Direction of the Copyboard Movement

0008-4318
The following figure shows a typical mechanism used to switch the direction of copyboard movement.
The forwarding gear and the reversing gear rotate in the direction of the arrows at all times as long as the main motor is rotating.
The forward/reverse switching mechanism engages with either the forwarding or the reversing gear (or remains free, during which the original may be
moved by hand) in keeping with the combination of the movement of the copyboard position detecting lever and the state (on/off) of the copyboard drive
solenoid, thus moving the copyboard forward or in reverse or stopping it.

3-8
 Chapter 3

Copyboard (rack)
Forward/reverse switching mechanism (forward)

Reversing gear

Start position cam

Copyboard position detecting lever

Copyboard drive gear (pinion)

Forwarding gear

Main motor gear

(reverse)
Reversing cam
Copyboard drive
solenoid
M Main motor

F-3-14

T-3-1

Copyboard position detecting lever

Pushed down Pushed up
Copyboard drive ON Forward Reverse
solenoid OFF Stop (free)

Note1: The forward/reverse switching takes place when the copyboard drive solenoid remains off.
Note2: The direction of drive is maintained while the copyboard drive solenoid remains on.
- Stopping the Copyboard
When the copyboard drive solenoid turns off, the forwarding/reversing gear becomes free, letting the copyboard to remain still.
In this condition, the copyboard may be moved to the left or to the right.

- Moving the Copyboard in Reverse

When the copyboard drive solenoid turns on while the main motor is rotating, the forward/reverse switching mechanism engages with the forwarding gear
and, as a result, the reversing gear rotates in the direction of the arrow, causing the copyboard to move in reverse.
The speed at which the copyboard moves in reverse is increased to about double the speed at which it moves forward.

Copyboard drive gear

Reversing gear

Forward/reverse
switching mechanism

(reverse)
M

Main motor

Copyboard drive solenoid

F-3-15

- Moving the Copyboard Forward

When the copyboard moves in reverse and comes to the point shown in Figure 2-15, the start position cam pushes down the copyboard position detecting

3-9
 Chapter 3

lever. If the solenoid turns on in this condition, the forward/reverse switching mechanism moves to the point shown in the following figure, causing the
forward/reverse switching mechanism to engage with the forwarding gear and, as a result, causing the forwarding gear to rotate in the direction of the arrow
to move the copyboard forward.

Copyboard drive gear

Forward gear

(forward)

Forward/reverse
switching mechanism
Start position cam

Main motor

Copyboard drive solenoid

F-3-16

3.3.3 Moving the Scanner

3.3.3.1 Outline
0008-4325
The scanner system is driven by the scanner motor. The scanner motor changes its direction of rotation to move the scanner forward or in reverse. The
speed of rotation when the scanner is moving forward varies according to the selected reproduction ratio; the distance traveled by the scanner, on the other
hand, changes according to the length of paper as well as the selected reproduction ratio.
3.3.3.2 Scanner Motor
0008-4326
The scanner motor control circuit of a typical machine is as follows; the circuit performs the following in response to signals from the control PCB:
- Turning on and off the scanner motor.
- Switching the direction of rotation of the scanner motor.
- Controlling the speed of the scanner motor.
Details of control, however, vary from model to model.
3.3.4 Stream Reading
3.3.4.1 Outline
0008-4329
The term "stream reading" refers to a way of scanning an original while moving the original with the help of an RF, DF, or CFF; the scanning lamp is held
in position throughout.
With stream reading, the time needed for scanner reversal (SCRV) must be allowed, and the copying speed is so much higher.
3.3.4.2 Stream Reading with a DF
0008-4330
When a DF is used, the No. 1 through No. 3 mirrors are not used, so that the scanner is moved farther left than normal home position (called "DF position").
The following figure shows the spatial relationship occurring when the scanner has moved to DF position. The dashed lines represent when the scanning
lamp and the No. 1 through No. 3 mirrors are at normal home position, while the solid lines represent when they are at DF position.

3-10
 Chapter 3

DF optical path

(delivery) Copyboard glass

Scanning lamp

No. 2 mirror

No. 1 mirror

No. 3 mirror

F-3-17

- Combination of Stream Reading and Normal Scanning

A copier equipped with an RF combines stream reading (keeping the scanner in position) and normal scanning (moving the scanner) when a specific set
of conditions exists. These conditions differ from model to model, with the following being a typical case:
Conditions
- single-sided on A4, LTR, B5
- making multiple copies of two originals
- reproduction ratio between 70% and 115%
In this mode, the sequence of operations will be as follows:
1. The first original will be scanned in stream reading.
2. At the end of stream reading, the original is stopped on the copyboard glass, and the remaining number of copies are made using normal scanning
(moving the scanner).
Specifically, the following operations take place:

3-11
 Chapter 3

Original
1
2 1
RF

2 2
Scanner
1. Originals are placed. 2. The Copy Start key is pressed. The
2nd original is picked up. The
scanner is moved to the center of
the copyboard, and is fixed to DF
home position.
1
3. When the leading edge of the 2nd
original reaches the front of the
scanner, the RF sends the image
leading edge signal to the copier. In
response, the copier turns on the
registration clutch to match the
registration of the original and that
of the paper. The 1st original is

2 1 2 1 2 1

4. The 2nd original is moved over the 5. The 2nd original stops at the end of 6. The scanner performs normal
scanner and is exposed. stream reading. The scanner scanning to expose the original for
returns to home position. the remaining number of copies.

2
2

2 1 1 1

7. The scanner is moved to the center 8. In response to the image leading 9. The 1st original stops at the end of
of the original, and is fixed to DF edge signal for the 1st original from stream reading. The scanner
home position. the RF, the original is moved over returns to home position.
the scanner and is exposed.

1
2 2

10. The scanner performs normal 11. The 1st original is discharged.
scanning to expose the original for
the remaining number of copies.

F-3-18

- Stream Reading
A copier equipped with an RF makes copies using stream reading if a specific set of conditions exists. These conditions differ from model to model, with
the following being a typical case:

Conditions
- single-sided on A4, LTR, B5
- making one set of copies of two originals
- reproduction ratio between 70% and 115%

3-12
 Chapter 3

Originals
1
2 1
RF

2
Copier
Scanner
1. Originals are set. 2. When the Start key is pressed, the 2nd original is
picked up from the right. The scanner moves to the
center of the original, and is fixed to DF home position.

2 2 1

3. When the leading edge of the 2nd original has 4. The 2nd original is moved over the scanner, and is
reached the front of the scanner, the RF sends the exposed. Then, the image leading edge signal for the
image leading edge signal to the copier. In response, 1st original is sent by the RF.
the copier turns on the registration clutch to match the
registration of the original and that of the paper. The
1st original is picked up, and is moved next to the 1st
original.

2 1
2

5. The 1st original is moved over the scanner, and is 6. The scanner is returned to home position. The 1st
exposed. The 2nd original is discharged from the left. original is discharged from the left.

F-3-19

3.3.4.3 Stream Reading by a CFF

0008-4334
When copies are made using a CFF (accessory), the No. 1 through No. 3 mirrors are not used.
To accommodate the arrangement, the scanner is moved farther left than normal home position (CFF position).

Standard white plate

CFF optical path (opening)
Copyboard glass

CFF shutter

Scanning lamp
No. 2 mirror
No. 1 mirror
To No. 4 mirror

No. 3 mirror

F-3-20

3-13
 Chapter 3

3.4 Lens Drive System

3.4.1 Outline
3.4.1.1 Outline
0008-4336
The lens drive system consists of a lens, lens motor, and sensor used to detect the position of the lens. The following figure is a conceptual diagram of the
system.

Lens home position sensor

Signal plate

(enlargement)
Lens

(reduction)

Lens motor

F-3-21

The drive of the lens is controlled according to how paper is moved; i.e., center reference or front reference.
Center Pickup (original butted to rear; top view)
Copyboard glass
Original Copier

Pickup
reference

Paper
F-3-22

Front Pickup (original butted to rear; top view)

Copyboard glass
Original Copier

Pickup
reference

Paper
F-3-23

Center Pickup (original held in middle; top view)

Copyboard glass
Original Copier

Pickup
reference

Paper
F-3-24

3-14
 Chapter 3

3.4.2 Moving the Lens

3.4.2.1 Lens Drive Mechanism
0008-4344
The lens drive system is driven by a lens motor. The following figure shows a typical lens drive system.
When the motor rotates in the direction of the arrow (CW), the lens cable starts to move in keeping with the operation of the pulley. The lens is integrated
with the lens cable through a lens mount, and the movement of the cable causes the lens to move in the direction for reduction.

A
Lens motor M

Lens home (CW)

Signal plate Lens cable
position sensor

Zoom lens
Rack groove
Rack
(reduction)
Pinion
Lens mount

F-3-25

The relationship between the pinion and the rack of the lens is as shown in the following figure; the pinion rotates as the rack moves along the rack groove,
changing the focal distance of the zoom lens.

B
Zoom
lens Pinion

Rack
F-3-26

When the power switch is turned on, the motor starts to rotate in reverse (CCW) to move the lens until the signal plate shown in Figure A blocks the lens
home position sensor.
When the lens reaches home position, the motor switches to normal rotation (CW), and then stops when a specific number of pulses (time) have been
generated after the signal plate leaves the sensor (thereby setting the lens to Direct position).
The distance traveled by the lens is controlled with reference to the number of pulses (time). The rotation of the lens motor is controlled so that the lens
moves over a distance corresponding to a specific number of pulses (time) determined for each reproduction ratio.
In some machines, the motor is first rotated in reverse direction (CCW) when moving the lens in the direction of enlargement (e.g., from Reduce to Direct);
it is then switched to normal direction (CW) to stop the lens at a specific position. (Stopping the lens by rotating the motor in normal direction ensures
accurate positioning of the lens.)

c
Lens home position sensor

(enlargement) (reduction)
Zoom lens

F-3-27

3.4.2.2 Controlling the Position of Originals

0008-4351
A center-reference machine picks up and moves paper along the middle of its paper path. If a book is placed butted against the rear, the lens must also be
moved in Y direction to suit different paper widths even in Direct mode.

3-15
 Chapter 3

Book Mode (top view)

Lens position for
small-size paper (Direct)

Paper
(large)
Original
(small)
Y direction
Paper
(small)

Original
(large)

Lens position for

large-size paper (Direct)

F-3-28

When an RF or ADF is used, the originals will be placed at the center of the copyboard glass as shown in the figure; in Direct mode, or if the original size
and the copy size are the same, the lens will not be moved in Y direction as shown in the figure. However, for reduction or enlargement, or if the original
size and the copy size are different, the lens must be moved in Y direction (vertical) as in the case of book mode.
Center Pickup (with DF/RDF in use; top view)
DF/RDF
Original Copier

Paper
F-3-29

(with DF/RDF in use; top view)

Lens

Original Paper
(large) (large)
Paper
Y direction Original (small)
(small)

F-3-30

If the machine is designed for placement of a book at the center of the copyboard glass as shown in the figure, the lens is not moved in Y direction, i.e., it
is moved in X direction only.

Copyboard glass
Original Copier

Paper
F-3-31

The lens drive assembly is constructed as shown in the following figure.

3-16
 Chapter 3

A
Lens motor M

Lens home (CW)

Signal plate Lens cable
position sensor

Zoom lens
Rack groove
Rack
(reduction)
Pinion
Lens mount

F-3-32

3-17
 Chapter 3

3.5 Other Functions

3.5.1 Identifying the Size of an Original
3.5.1.1 Outline
0008-4357
The size of an original must be identified for auto paper selection, auto ratio selection, reduced page composition, or enlarged page composition; the
detection mechanism differs between book mode and DF mode.
3.5.1.2 Identifying the Size of an Original in Book Mode
0008-4358
a. Mechanism
A number of original size sensors are mounted to the bottom of the copyboard glass, and the presence/absence as well as the size (if default size) of paper
is detected with reference to the sate of each sensor.
In an original size sensor, a LED is turned on to shine an original and the reflected light is detected by a phototransistor; the output is then sent to the control
PCB.
The sensors are arranged to suit how originals are placed (butted against the rear or at the center) and the configuration (AB , A, or Inch) of each model.
The following figure shows how original size sensors are arranged in an AB-configured machine.
Arrangement of Original Size Sensors (top view)
Phototransistor LED

B5 A4 B5R A4R B4 A3

Original size
detection 1

B5R

A4R
Original size
detection 2
B5
Original size
A4 detection 3
A3

F-3-33

3.5.1.3 Mechanism of Detection

0008-4360
The output level of each sensor is read at specific intervals for a specific period of time or until the Start key is pressed after the copyboard sensor turns
on. The presence of a change in the level (indicating the activation/de-activation of that sensor by reflected light) is used to detect the presence/absence of
an original over the sensor.
This method of detection also enables the identification of the size of a black original. In this method, however, the output level of a sensor will not change
in cases 1 and 2 shown below. In view of this fact, if none of the three output levels changes the instant the copyboard sensor turns on, the levels are
compared against a slice level to find out the size of the original. In the case of 3, further, A3 will be selected with priority; if no appropriate cassette exits,
the standard mode cassette will be selected:
1. A3 black original
2. Book original (prevents sensor levels from changes because of its thickness)
3. Copyboard cover open (keeps the copyboard cover open/closed detecting switch off)

Copyboard cover

Original
15 to 30

Copyboard cover open/

closed detecting switch: ON
Copyboard
ON OFF glass ON ON
Change Change
Original detection 1 absent in present in
level level
Original
detection 2
F-3-34

3.5.1.4 Identifying the Size of an Original (with feeder in use)

0008-4366
a. Outline

3-18
 Chapter 3

To identify the size of an original with a feeder (accessory) in use, the following takes place in response to instructions from the copier:
- If all cassettes are of an A/B configuration, the machine instructs the feeder to detect A/B sizes.
- If all cassettes are of an Inch configuration, the machine instructs the feeder to detect Inch sizes.
- If both A/B and Inch cassettes exist, the machine sends instructions in keeping with the settings made in service mode.
If there is a mismatch of size configuration between originals and copies (A/B and Inch), the copies can suffer from missing images.
If the feeder is designed to set originals over the center of the copyboard glass, the missing image, if any, will be in a different location when a book is
used as the original (butted against the rear).

EX 1: A4 original, LTR copy

Book Mode Feeder Mode

(delivery) (delivery)
Paper (LTR)

Original (A4)
F-3-35

In the case of making a LTR copy of an A4 original, the missing image will appear at the bottom (of the original) in book mode and at the top and the
bottom (of the original) in feeder mode.

EX 2: A4 original, LTR copy, Enlarge (feeder mode)

A4 original LTR size Output image

F-3-36

The original will be identified as LTR and, therefore, will be enlarged in respect of the point of reference ( ) in the foregoing figure, preventing part of its
image from showing.
EX 3: LTR original, A4 copy, Enlarge (feeder mode)

Margin

LTR original A4 Output image

F-3-37

The original will be identified as A4 and, therefore, will be enlarged in respect of the point of reference ( ) in the foregoing figure, causing the top margin
to be wider.

EX 4: A4 original, area specification, LTR copy

3-19
 Chapter 3

Area specification Image position

on A4 original on LTR paper
F-3-38

The original will be identified as LTR and, therefore, a discrepancy will occur in the point of reference ( ), resulting in the displacement of the specified
area.

EX 5: LTR original, A4 copy, area specification

Area specification Image position

on LTR original on A4 paper
F-3-39

The original will be identified as A4 and, therefore, a discrepancy will occur in the point of reference ( ), resulting in the displacement of the specified area.
3.5.2 Pre-Scanning
3.5.2.1 Outline
0008-4425
In addition to moving the scanner forward for copy generation, a digital machine moves the scanner forward in keeping with the selected mode settings to
collect image data of the original, called "pre-scanning." Pre-scanning is executed when any of the following modes is selected:
3.5.2.2 Purpose of Pre-Scanning
0008-4426
a. ARE Mode
Pre-scanning is used to measure the density of the original. It is executed while the scanner is moving.

b. Identifying the Size of Originals

The original is checked to find out its size.

c. Identifying the Color (ACS: auto color select)

The original is checked to find out its color. As when making copies of a black-and-white original on a color machine, pre-scanning enables automatic
identification of a black-and-white original.

d. Bind Mode (right binding), Shift Mode

Pre-scanning is used to find out the initial speed of the scanner.
The initial speed is identified to ensure the accurate placement of the image on paper (by controlling image exposure accordingly).

e. Pattern Processing
The colors of the original are identified.

f. Marker Mode
The level of marker recognition is determined.
3.5.3 ARE Control
3.5.3.1 Outline
0008-4428
The density of an original is read automatically to enable the production of fog-free copies without requiring adjustment by hand at all times (by controlling
the intensity of the scanning lamp and the developing bias).
1. Photosensor type (controlling the developing bias)
2. Photosensor type (controlling the intensity/developing bias)
3. Potential sensor type
4. CCD type

3-20
 Chapter 3

3.5.3.2 Principles
0008-4429
The scanner is moved forward, and the surface potential (or intensity) of the drum is measured by a sensor with reference to the light reflected by the
original; the result is sent to the control PCB. The control PCB, in response, determines the intensity of the scanning lamp or the developing bias, ensuring
the production of fog-free copies.

Potential control circuit

Lamp regulator PCB

Scanning lamp
Control PCB
Sensor

(potential sensor type only)

High-voltage transformer Developing bias

F-3-40

3.5.3.3 Photosensor Type (controlling bias)

0008-4431
At the time the image is exposed, the light reflected by the original is measured by a photosensor.
The control PCB uses the input level to generate a DC bias control signal, and applies a voltage to the developing cylinder through a high-voltage
transformer.
The copy density is controlled by means of a developing bias. In this method, the density of the original is measured while the image is exposed, and the
DC developing bias control signal best suited to the measured density is generated; this method of control is enabled by taking advantage of the difference
in time between exposure and development.
Typical Model: FC330

Copyboard

Intensity Intensity
Scanning lamp detecting detection
assembly circuit

Short-focus lens array

Reflecting plate Control PC
Control PCB
Photosensitive
drum

Developing cylinder

High-voltage
transformer

F-3-41

3.5.3.4 Photosensor Type (intensity control/development bias control)

0008-4433
The light reflected by the original within the area of measurement is detected by an ARE sensor, and the result is sent to the controller PCB. The controller
PCB, in response, determines the optimum DC developing bias or the optimum intensity based on the input level.
Typical Model: NP6016, NP6030, NP-A2SV

3-21
 Chapter 3

Scanning lamp
Zoom lens

AE sensor

High-voltage
Lamp transformer
regulator
PCB
Developing
cylinder
DC
controller
PCB
F-3-42

3.5.3.5 Potential Sensor Type

0008-4434
The scanner is moved forward during ARE rotation, and the surface potential of the drum is measured by exposing the original. The controller PCB
computes the average of input levels to determine the intensity of the scanning lamp.
Typical Model: NP6750, NP6085

3-22
Chapter 4 ORIGINAL HANDLING SYSTEM
 Contents

Contents

4.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................................4-1

4.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 ADF and RDF ................................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2.2 Pickup .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.2.1 Pickup..............................................................................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2.3 Separation .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.3.1 Separation........................................................................................................................................................................................................4-3
4.2.4 Feeding......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.4.1 Feeding ............................................................................................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.5 Reversal........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.2.5.1 Reversal...........................................................................................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.6 Delivery........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-5
4.2.6.1 Delivery...........................................................................................................................................................................................................4-5
4.2.7 Special Functions ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.7.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................4-5
4.2.7.2 Detecting Originals .........................................................................................................................................................................................4-6
4.2.7.3 Edging and Advancing ....................................................................................................................................................................................4-6
4.2.7.4 Counting the Originals ....................................................................................................................................................................................4-7
4.2.7.5 Detecting the Density of an Original (AE) .....................................................................................................................................................4-7
4.2.7.6 Reduced Page Composition ............................................................................................................................................................................4-8
4.2.7.7 Stream Reading ...............................................................................................................................................................................................4-9
4.2.7.8 Continuous Feeding ......................................................................................................................................................................................4-11
4.2.7.9 High-Speed Copying Mode...........................................................................................................................................................................4-11
4.2.7.10 Recycle Mode..............................................................................................................................................................................................4-13
4.2.7.11 Manual Feed (original)................................................................................................................................................................................4-14
4.2.7.12 Leap Guide ..................................................................................................................................................................................................4-15
4.2.7.13 Stamp...........................................................................................................................................................................................................4-16
4.2.7.14 Pre-Reversal ................................................................................................................................................................................................4-16
4.2.8 Others ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-18
4.2.8.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................4-18
4.2.8.2 Types of Originals.........................................................................................................................................................................................4-18
4.2.8.3 EC-Coated Glass ...........................................................................................................................................................................................4-19
4.2.8.4 Sub Feeder.....................................................................................................................................................................................................4-19
4.3 CFF...............................................................................................................................................................................4-21
4.3.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-21
4.3.1.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................4-21
4.3.2 Basic Sequence of Operations ................................................................................................................................................... 4-21
4.3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations.......................................................................................................................................................................4-21
4.3.3 Auto Exposure (AE) Control ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.3.3.1 Auto Exposure (AE) Control ........................................................................................................................................................................4-25
4.3.4 Auto Paper Selection.................................................................................................................................................................. 4-26
4.3.4.1 Auto Paper Selection.....................................................................................................................................................................................4-26
4.3.5 Auto Ratio Selection .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-26
4.3.5.1 Auto Ratio Selection .....................................................................................................................................................................................4-26
4.4 DF.................................................................................................................................................................................4-27
4.4.1 DF .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-27
4.4.1.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................4-27
4.4.2 Basic Sequence of Operations ................................................................................................................................................... 4-27
4.4.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations.......................................................................................................................................................................4-27
 Chapter 4

4.1 Introduction
4.1.1 Outline
4.1.1.1 Outline
0008-4110
A feeder (automatic document feeder) may be either of two types: ADF (DF) and RDF. (Unless distinction is necessary, this manual refers to both ADF
and RDF as a "eeder.")
<RDF>

F-4-1

<ADF>

F-4-2

4-1
 Chapter 4

4.2 ADF and RDF

4.2.1 Outline
4.2.1.1 Outline
0008-4183
Both ADF and RDF are accessories designed to automatically move originals stacked on the original tray to the copyboard tray for copying. While an ADF
discharges originals after copying operation to end its operation, an RDF is capable of carrying the original back to the original tray at the end of copying
operation.

Flow of originals in an RDF (outline) Flow of originals in an ADF (outline)

Originals Originals
RDF ADF
Type 1

(right pickup/ (stream reading)

Originals stream reading) Originals
RDF ADF
Type 2

Originals
ADF
Type 3

F-4-3

MEMO:
The term "ADF" (DF) stands for Automatic Document Feeder (Document Feeder), while "RDF" stands for "Recycle Document Feeder".

A feeder (ADF or RDF) executes the following sequence of operations for moving originals:

T-4-1

Operation Description
1. Pickup Moves originals from the original tray to the separation assembly.
2. Separation Separates an original and moves it to the registration roller.
3. Feeding Moves an original from the registration roller to the copyboard glass
of the copier.
4. Reversal As when double-sided mode is selected on the copier, turns over the
original (not in some ADFs).
5. Delivery Moves an original from the copyboard glass to the delivery tray.

In addition to these operations, various special functions may be used depending on the type of feeder.
4.2.2 Pickup
4.2.2.1 Pickup
0008-4208
In pickup, an original is picked up from the stack on the original tray and sent as far as the separation assembly.
An original is picked up by means of a pickup roller; to ensure correct pickup, some models use a paper retaining plate, which forces the original against
the pickup roller.
In general, feeders designed for an analog copier or a copier without an image memory pick up originals starting with the one at the bottommost of the
stack. (bottom pickup)
In the case of a feeder designed for a digital copier equipped with an image memory (DADF), pickup starts with the topmost original.

4-2
 Chapter 4

Type 1 (bottom pickup)

Paper retaining plate Originals

Pickup roller

F-4-4

Type 2 (top pickup)

F-4-5

4.2.3 Separation
4.2.3.1 Separation
0008-4226
In separation, one of the originals moved by the pickup roller is forwarded to the registration roller, against which the original is butted to ensure that it
will not move askew.
In most machines, separation is performed by a separation belt and feed rollers. The separation belt and feed rollers are located facing each other, and they
rotate in opposite directions. Here, only one original is moved.
If designed for a digital copier equipped with a memory, pickup and separation start with the topmost original (first page).

4-3
 Chapter 4

Separation belt Originals

Feed roller

F-4-6

4.2.4 Feeding
4.2.4.1 Feeding
0008-4229
In feeding, an original is moved from the registration roller to the copyboard glass. Originals are moved by means of a feed belt, and is stopped at a specific
position on the copyboard glass. (Some models use a roller instead of a feed belt to move originals.)
Copying starts as soon as the original is stopped on the copyboard glass.

Feed roller

Registration roller Feed belt

F-4-7

4.2.5 Reversal
4.2.5.1 Reversal
0008-4234
In reversal, an original is automatically reversed (turned over) as in double-sided mode.
To reverse an original, the feed belt is moved in reverse so that the original on the copyboard glass is moved to the reversing roller; it is then moved back
to the copyboard glass by the reversing roller and the paper deflecting plate opened by the work of a solenoid, during which the original is turned over.
(Some models do not use a solenoid.)

4-4
 Chapter 4

Paper deflecting plate

Reversing roller

Feed belt
F-4-8

4.2.6 Delivery
4.2.6.1 Delivery
0008-4241
In delivery, an original is moved from the copyboard glass to the original delivery tray (original tray).
In most machines, delivery is performed by a reversing roller and a delivery roller. The delivery roller slows down immediately before delivery so that the
original is discharged slowly to the original tray (original delivery tray).
Type 1 (RDF)
Delivery roller

Reversing roller

Scanner
F-4-9

Type 2 (DADF)

Delivery motor

Original delivery tray

F-4-10

4.2.7 Special Functions

4.2.7.1 Outline
0008-4248
The following table shows special functions (not all models provide all these functions):

4-5
 Chapter 4

T-4-2

Item Description
Original detection Finds out whether the originals are placed properly on the
original tray.
Edging/Advancing Moves the second (subsequent) original as far as the
registration roller to reduce the time required for the
replacement of multiple originals.
Original count Counts the originals in single-sided to double-sided mode
or for jam recovery.
Original density detection Detects the density of an original using the registration
(AE) assembly of the RDF to enable higher copying speed.
Original size detection Detects the size of originals placed on the original tray.
Reduced page composition Reorders originals when reduced page composition mode
is selected on the copier.
Stream reading Exposes originals while keeping the scanner fixed in
position and causing the feeder to move the originals.
Tandem feeding Moves two originals simultaneously to reduce the time
required for replacing originals.
High-speed copying Moves originals continuously in one direction to increase
the speed of replacing originals.
Recycle Makes copies in sets by repeating a series of operations in
the absence of a sorter.
(original) Manual feed Ensures proper movement of special originals. (e.g., thin
originals)
Leap guide Guides originals. (It is pushed down so that it is out of the
way when the feeder is used.)
Stamp Prints a stamp at a specific position of an original at the
end of read operation for fax transmission.

4.2.7.2 Detecting Originals

0008-4279
Originals are checked to see if they are properly placed. If they are, the Original Set indicator tuns on to indicate the fact to the user. If the Original Set
indicator does not turn on, it is necessary to correct the placement of the originals.
The originals are checked by a sensor mounted to the original tray.

Original Set indicator

Original

Original tray
F-4-11

4.2.7.3 Edging and Advancing

0008-4282
Both edging and advancing are performed to reduce the time required for the replacement of multiple originals.

4-6
 Chapter 4

In edging, the second (following) original is moved as far as the registration roller while the first (preceding) original is being exposed so as to decrease
the feed distance, thereby reducing the time used for replacing originals.
In advancing, on the other hand, the original is moved farther from the registration roller.

Past the registration roller

Scanner
F-4-12

4.2.7.4 Counting the Originals

0008-4288
In single-sided to double-sided mode or for jam recovery, originals are automatically picked up and discharged to obtain a count in reference to the state
(on/off) of the registration sensor.
If, for instance, an odd number of originals are copied in single-sided to double-sided mode, the first side of the topmost copy will be blank.
A digital machine equipped with a memory need not count originals.

1 Original

Feeder

1
Copier
3 2

F-4-13

4.2.7.5 Detecting the Density of an Original (AE)

0008-4296
Copiers also possess an original density detection mechanism (AE), but its use requires pre-scanning, thus slowing down the copying speed.
The registration assembly of an RDF is equipped with an AE sensor, which checks the density of each original and sends the result (density data) to the
copier.
For instance, the RDF-A1 has a reflecting type sensor. The light of the sensor lamp is directed to the original passing over the sensor, and the light reflected
by the original is detected by a photodiode to measure its density.

4-7
 Chapter 4

Lamp

Original

RDF controller
AE sensor
Photodiode
F-4-14

4.2.7.6 Reduced Page Composition

0008-4299
In reduced page composition, multiple originals are copied on a single sheet of paper.
Usually, a feeder picks up originals starting with the last original; when reduced page composition mode (2-on-1) is selected, it reorders the originals.
(Some models are capable of performing reduced page composition without reordering the originals.)
In reduced page composition mode, the size of the original must be A5, B5, A4, STMT, or LTR.

2-on-1
PROJECT A (horizontal arrangement) PROJECT A

PROJECT A
PROJECT A 4-on-1

F-4-15

MEMO:
n the case of a digital copier equipped with an image memory, originals are fed one by one and then the images (image data) are laid out using the memory.

The following figure shows the flow of originals in reduced page composition.

4-8
 Chapter 4

2nd original

1st original

The 1st original is picked up. While the 1st original is being
reversed, the 2nd original is moved,
thereby changing the order.

The original is reversed from

the 1st side to the 2nd side. The original is copied

1st original

2nd original

The 2nd original is picked up. The 1st original is delivered,

and then the 2nd original is
discharged.

F-4-16

4.2.7.7 Stream Reading

0008-4308
In stream reading, the scanner of the copier is fixed in position; the scanning lamp is turned on and the originals are moved over the copyboard glass for
exposure.
Making use of stream reading, originals may be replaced in a short period of time (thus, increasing copying speed) and the operating noise of the feeder
may be reduced.
Figure 2-16 shows diagrams showing the flow of originals in stream reading.

4-9
 Chapter 4

Original Original
RDF ADF

Scanning lamp (fixed) Scanning lamp (fixed)

< RDF > < ADF >

Original
ADF

Scanning lamp (fixed)

< ADF >

F-4-17

For instance, an RDF moves two single-sided originals as follows in stream reading mode:

Originals are placed. The 2nd original is picked up.

The tray is moved down. The 1st original is read (stream reading).

The originals are moved over the tray. The 2nd original is read (stream reading).

The 1st original is picked up. The 1st and 2nd originals are discharged.

F-4-18

A DADF moves an one single-sided original as follows:

4-10
 Chapter 4

Pickup

Original

Copying

Delivery
F-4-19

4.2.7.8 Continuous Feeding

0008-4313
In continuous feeding, the second (following) original is picked up and fed as soon as the first (preceding) original has been copied so that as many as two
originals are being moved at the same time.
Continuous feeding improves the speed at which originals are replaced.

Feed belt

Belt motor M
2nd original 1st original
CCW ON

Belt motor M 1st original

2nd original
CCW ON
F-4-20

4.2.7.9 High-Speed Copying Mode

0008-4315
In high-speed copying mode, originals are continuously moved in one direction as shown in Figures A and B instead of replacing them by switching them
back between the original tray and the copyboard glass (referred to as "witch-back" mode).
Using high-speed copying mode, the speed at which the feeder replaces originals may be improved.

4-11
 Chapter 4

Some feeders allow combination of high-speed copying mode and stream reading, thereby further increasing the speed at which it replaces originals.
To use high-speed copying mode, however, a certain set of conditions must be met, e.g., original size, copying mode.
Switch-Back Mode
Originals
RDF

F-4-21

High-Speed Copying Mode (EX 1: counterclockwise)

A
Originals
RDF

B
Originals
RDF

F-4-22

The following figure shows the flow of originals in high-speed copying mode (including stream reading).

4-12
 Chapter 4

Flow of Originals in High-Speed Copying Mode

Originals are placed. The 2nd original is picked up.

The scanning lamp

is turned on.

The tray moves down. The 1st original is read (stream reading).

Tandem feeding

The originals are moved over the tray. The 2nd original is read (stream reading).

The scanning lamp

is turned on

The 1st original is picked up. The 1st and 2nd originals are discharged.

F-4-23

4.2.7.10 Recycle Mode

0008-4320
In recycle mode, an RDF moves originals as follows as if to sort them, serving as a sorter when its host copier is not equipped with one.
When the set count of copies specified on the copier is higher than "1" while this mode is selected, originals are copied one by one until a single set is
completed; this is repeated for as many sets as needed.
For instance, for the copier to make two copies each of three originals in this mode, the operations will be as shown in the following figure.

4-13
 Chapter 4

1 Originals

2
3

RDF

1
2nd set 2
3
1 Copier
1st set 2
3

F-4-24

4.2.7.11 Manual Feed (original)

0008-4322
To ensure good movement, the following special originals are fed manually:
- Thin original
- Thick original
- Original that must not be bent
The original set on the manual feed tray of the feeder is picked up and moved to the copyboard glass. At the end of copying, the original is switched back,
and is sent back to the manual feed tray.
Usually, only one original may be picked up/fed in this mode, and the original is placed face down.

4-14
 Chapter 4

An original is placed.

Original

The original is picked up.

The original is copied.

The original is discharged.

F-4-25

4.2.7.12 Leap Guide

0008-4324
The leap guide has the following two functions:
a. To stop an original for proper placement (book mode).
b. To enable smooth movement of an original along the feeder.
When the feeder is used, the protrusion on the feeder pushes down the leap guide so that the original may move to the copyboard glass.
When the feeder is lifted as in book mode, the leap guide is pushed up by the work of a built-in spring, serving as a stop against which an original (e.g.,
book) may be butted.

Protrusion

Leap guide
Copyboard
glass

Spring
Fulcrum

F-4-26

MEMO:
Some feeders are equipped with a leap guide not only on their left side but also on the right side.

4-15
 Chapter 4

4.2.7.13 Stamp
0008-4332
When stamp mode is selected while the host copier is in fax mode, a stamp will be pressed at a specific position of each original to indicate that it has been
transmitted.
In the case of the following figure, a stamp is pressed on the face of the original by the work of a solenoid while the original is being moved.
Ink is supplied by replacement of the stamp ink cartridge (stamp unit itself).
The stamp ink is not toxic, but can stain; take care so that your hands or clothes will not come into contact. (Otherwise, you must wash it off immediately.)

Stamp solenoid

Stamp

Fax original

F-4-27

4.2.7.14 Pre-Reversal
0008-4333
The machine is designed to support high-speed copiers by reversing a double-sided original earlier than usual to forward it to the copyboard glass, thereby
reducing the original replacement time and increasing copying speed.

4-16
 Chapter 4

Pickup
Original

Pre-reversal

Feeding

1st side copying

Feeding

To next page
F-4-28

4-17
 Chapter 4

From previous page

Reversal

2nd side copying

Discharge
F-4-29

4.2.8 Others
4.2.8.1 Outline
0008-4335
The following items relate to a feeder:
- Type of original (that may not be used in a feeder; points to note about color originals)
- EC-coated glass
- Sub feeder
- Various feeder adjustments
4.2.8.2 Types of Originals
0008-4340
The following table shows types of originals that may not be used in a feeder and reasons:

T-4-3

Originals Description
With a transparency of 80% or less A penetration type or reflecting type sensor will not
detect them, causing malfunction.
With a carbon back They tend to stick and, as a result, jam.
With pasting or binding. They tend to cause a pickup or feeding fault and, as
a result, jam.
With a cut, hole, or tear They tend to cause a pickup or feeding fault and, as
a result, jam.
With appreciable curling, wrinkling, They tend to cause a pickup or feeding fault and, as
or bending a result, jam.

A color copy is coated with silicone oil from the color copier used to make it. If it is used as an original, it may cause pickup faults by oil-induced slippage.
To prevent slippage or double feeding at time of pickup, the surface of the separation belt and the feed rollers are provided with grooves.

4-18
 Chapter 4

Separation belt Original

Feed roller

F-4-30

4.2.8.3 EC-Coated Glass

0008-4352
If the copier is of a copyboard cover type, its copyboard glass must be replaced with an EC-coated copyboard glass plate when installing a feeder. Copiers
that come with a feeder as standard, on the other hand, come also with EC-coated glass.
EC-coated glass has a conducting coating on its surface so that static electricity or electric noise occurring when originals are picked up or moved are
removed through a grounded copper plate mounted to the rear of the glass, ultimately preventing skew movement and jams. (Some EC-coated glass plates
do not use a copper plate.)
EC-coated glass is distinguished from a regular copyboard glass by the presence of a copper plate. If you measure the resistance of a glass surface by means
of a meter, the index of the meter will point to "infinity" since glass is an insulator; in the case of EC-coated glass, on the other hand, the index will point
to several kilo to several mega ohms (increasing in proportion to the distance).
You may find out the degree of detachment (peeling) of the coating (occurring as a result of using the feeder in excess) by measuring the resistance of the
surface of EC-coated glass.

Copyboard glass
Copper plate

F-4-31

4.2.8.4 Sub Feeder

0008-4354
A sub feeder is an auxiliary original feeder, and its principal pickup, separation, and feeding mechanisms are the same as those of an RDF. A sub feeder,
however, does not move originals to the copyboard glass; its major functions are to form a delivery path to the right feeder cover for an original at the end
of copying and to move an original placed in it to the original tray of the RDF.
By combining a sub feeder with an AF-A1, the following two modes will be made possible (in principle, both modes use the same sequence of operations):

a. Auto Start Mode

A job may be selected while originals set in the RDF are being copied (or while originals exist in the RDF).
If copying mode is selected on the copier when placing originals in the sub feeder, originals will be discharged to the right feeder cover as soon as the
originals in the RDF (original A) have been copied. The sub feeder will then move the original (original B) to the original tray of the RDF, which in turn
picks it up and sends it to the copyboard glass.

b. Double Feeder Mode

When originals are placed in both RDF and sub feeder (up to about 50 sheets in each), as many as about 100 originals may be copied with a single press
on the Copy Start key.

4-19
 Chapter 4

Original A Original B Original B Original A

RF Sub feeder

Original B Original A Original B

F-4-32

4-20
 Chapter 4

4.3 CFF
4.3.1 Outline
4.3.1.1 Outline
0008-4362
A CFF (computer form feeder) is a machine capable of feeding a computer (continuous) sheet as originals; it supports paper of 381 x 305 mm (15" x 12")
maximum.
The host copier exposes the computer sheet (originals) moved by the CFF to make copies instead of moving the scanner.

F-4-33

When the CFF is used, the No. 1 and No. 2 mirror mounts of the copier are moved to CFF position, which is to the left of the normal position of exposure.
Then, the mirror used exclusively for a CFF is shifted up to form the optical path configured for a CFF.

CFF
Computer sheet

Dust-proof CFF lamp

glass sheets
Copyboard glass

No. 4 mirror

Zoom lens

CFF mirror

Mirror mount position when CFF is in use

Photosensitive
drum

F-4-34

4.3.2 Basic Sequence of Operations

4.3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations
0008-4557
When a computer sheet is set in a CFF and the Copy Start key of the copier is pressed, the following operations take plate:
1. The Copy Start key of the copier is pressed.

4-21
 Chapter 4

CFF lamp
Original sensor Index
Computer sheet

Tractor

Delivery roller
Copper
No. 4 mirror

CFF mirror
Photosensitive drum
F-4-35

2. The CFF motor rotates in normal direction (CW) to move the computer sheet in normal direction.

Photosensitive drum
F-4-36

3. When the original sensor detects the computer sheet, the CFF sheet motor rotates in reverse direction (CCW). As a result, the computer sheet is moved
in reverse, and is stopped where it does not block the white plate of the CFF.

Original sensor turns on

Photosensitive drum
F-4-37

4-22
 Chapter 4

Photosensitive drum
F-4-38

4. The white plate of the CFF is exposed by the CFF lamp to measure the potential.

White plate

CFF lamp

Photosensitive drum
F-4-39

5. The CFF motor rotates in normal direction (CW) to move the computer sheet until it is detected by the original sensor; the CFF motor stops upon
detection.

Photosensitive drum
F-4-40

6. The computer sheet is exposed by the CFF lamp to execute AE measurement.

Photosensitive drum
F-4-41

4-23
 Chapter 4

7. The CFF motor rotates in reverse (CCW) to move the computer sheet in reverse until the leading edge of the computer sheet may be read.

Photosensitive drum
F-4-42

8. The CPU of the CFF sends the image leading edge signal to the copier. In response, the copier starts copying operation with reference to the signal.

1st page Perforation

Photosensitive drum
F-4-43

9. After copying the area between perforations (equivalent of a single page) of the computer sheet, the CFF motor is rotated in reverse (CW) to move the
computer sheet in reverse to prevent missing images along the perforation.
Then, the computer sheet is moved in normal direction to copy the second page. (The image near a perforation is copied on two consecutive pages.)

Thereafter, these operations are repeated until all pages are copied.

1st page Perforation 2nd page Perforation

Photosensitive drum
F-4-44

4-24
 Chapter 4

1st page Perforation 3rd page Perforation

Photosensitive drum
F-4-45

1st page Perforation 2nd page Perforation

Photosensitive drum
F-4-46

The potential is measured and AE measurement is executed as part of a series of operations; they are executed for the first page of a computer sheet, and
will not be executed when operation is resumed, for example, after removal of a jam.
4.3.3 Auto Exposure (AE) Control
4.3.3.1 Auto Exposure (AE) Control
0008-4574
When a CCF is used, the intensity of the CFF lamp is automatically adjusted to suit the density of the computer sheet (original) to control exposure.
To execute AE measurement when a CFF is used, the first page of the computer sheet (held stationary) is exposed by the CFF lamp, and the surface potential
of the photosensitive drum is measured during the exposure. The result is sent to the DC controller PCB of the copier so that the intensity of the CFF lamp
during copying operation may be determined.
The CFF lamp is controlled by the lamp regulator of the copier, and the relay circuit inside the lamp regulator switches between the scanning lamp and the
CFF lamp.
The intensity of the CFF lamp is controlled by means of the intensity control signal used to control the scanning lamp of the copier; therefore, the intensity
of the CFF lamp determined by the DC controller PCB is controlled by the LINT signal.

4-25
 Chapter 4

C.F.F.
Computer sheet

CFF lamp

Copier

Scanning
lamp Relay circuit
Activation
circuit

Lamp regulator

activation
switching

Intensity
Zoom lens

control

signal
signal

signal
Lamp
Lamp
Potential DC controller
measurement PCB
PCB

Potential sensor
Photosensitive drum

F-4-47

4.3.4 Auto Paper Selection

4.3.4.1 Auto Paper Selection
0008-4579
The tractor (front) of the CFF is a mobile type so that it may be adjusted to suit the width of the computer sheet used.
The tractor is equipped with a variable resistor, whose resistance changes to indicate a specific width when the tractor is adjusted to the computer sheet.
The length of a single page of a computer sheet is determined in reference to the number of holes entered on the control panel of the copier.
The copier uses the combination of the dimensions (width and length) to find out the size of paper, selecting A4/LTR or A4R/LTRR (see the table in the
secfion 'Auto Ratio Selection' ).
4.3.5 Auto Ratio Selection
4.3.5.1 Auto Ratio Selection
0008-4581
In auto ratio selection, the entire face of a single original is copied using the maximum reproduction ratio possible on the selected paper.
Unlike the auto ratio selection mechanism of a copier, however, the ratio here will be limited to between 64% and 100%.
The ratio in the drum axial direction is changed by moving the lens of the copier; the ratio in the original feed direction, on the other hand, is changed by
varying the speed at which the CFF moves originals.

T-4-4

Width of original Length of original Paper size selected Reproduction ratio

(feeding; number of automatically selected
holes) automatically
381 mm (15 in.) 279 mm (11 inc.; 22 A4/LTR 69%/71%
holes)
373 mm (14.7 in.) 206 mm (8.1 in.; 17 A4/LTR 79%/74%
holes)
203 mm (8 in.) 51 mm (2 in.; 17 A4/LTR 79%/74%
holes)
229 mm (9 in.) 279 mm (11 in.; 22 A4R/LTRR 96%/94%
holes)

4-26
 Chapter 4

4.4 DF
4.4.1 DF
4.4.1.1 Outline
0008-4598
A DF is designed to send a single A1 original to enable reduction to A2 or A3. Instead of moving the scanner, the host copier causes the DF to move the
original while exposing and copying the original.
A DF cannot automatically send or circulate multiple originals, i.e., no more than one original may be copied at a time.

F-4-48

When the DF is in operation, the copier performs stream reading.

When a DF is set to the copier, the No. 1 and No. 2 mirror mounts of the copier are moved to DF position, which is to the left of normal home position.
Then, the DF mirror is shifted up to form the optical path for the DF.

Original

DF-B1
DF lamp

No. 1/No. 2
mirror mount Dust-proof glass
Copier

No. 4 mirror

DF mirror

Photosensitive
drum

F-4-49

4.4.2 Basic Sequence of Operations

4.4.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations
0008-4606
When an original is set in the DF, it is automatically fed and copied.
1. When an original is fed into the DF and its leading edge is detected by the original sensor, the original pickup solenoid turns on and, as a result, the
pickup roller is pushed against the top of the original.

4-27
 Chapter 4

Original pickup solenoid

SL

Pickup roller

Original
F-4-50

2. The DF motor rotates, and the original is moved as far as the registration shutter to remove any skew.

DF motor

Registration shutter
F-4-51

3. The DF motor stops, and the original pickup solenoid will turn off. At this time, the copier picks up copy paper and moves it as far as the registration
roller.

F-4-52

4. The DF motor starts to rotate once again, and the original pickup solenoid turns on. Then, the registration shutter solenoid turns on, and the original is
moved while the lamp exposes it.

DF motor

SL

DF lamp Registration shutter

solenoid

DF mirror

F-4-53

4-28
Chapter 5 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
 Contents

Contents

5.1 Analog Image Processing...............................................................................................................................................5-1

5.1.1 CCD ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1.2 1-Line CCD.....................................................................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1.3 3-Line CCD.....................................................................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1.4 CCD Driver .....................................................................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Odd-Numbered/Even-Numbered Bit Integration ........................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.2.1 Odd-Numbered/Even-Numbered Bit Integration............................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.3 Gain/Offset Processing ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.1.3.1 Gain/Offset Processing....................................................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.4 A/D Conversion ........................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.4.1 A/D Conversion ..............................................................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.2 Digital Image Processing ...............................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.1 Shading Correction ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.1.2 Determining a Shading Correction Target Level ............................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.1.3 Determining the Shading Correction Level ....................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.2.2 RGB Phase Correction (3-line CCD position matching) ............................................................................................................. 5-5
5.2.2.1 RGB Phase Correction (3-line CCD position matching) ................................................................................................................................5-5
5.2.3 Input Masking (sensor chromatic correction) .............................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.2.3.1 Input Masking (sensor chromatic correction) .................................................................................................................................................5-6
5.2.4 Density Processing....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.4.1 Logarithmic Correction ...................................................................................................................................................................................5-6
5.2.4.2 YMC Conversion ............................................................................................................................................................................................5-7
5.2.4.3 Manual Adjustment of Density .......................................................................................................................................................................5-8
5.2.4.4 Density Correctio ............................................................................................................................................................................................5-8
5.2.5 AE Processing .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.2.5.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.2.5.2 AE with Priority on Speed ..............................................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.2.5.3 AE with Priority on Image Quality ...............................................................................................................................................................5-10
5.2.5.4 Background Level Adjustment .....................................................................................................................................................................5-11
5.2.6 Image Processing ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.2.6.1 Ratio Processing............................................................................................................................................................................................5-11
5.2.6.2 Shift Processing.............................................................................................................................................................................................5-12
5.2.6.3 Reduced Page Composition ..........................................................................................................................................................................5-14
5.2.6.4 Enlarged Page Composition ..........................................................................................................................................................................5-16
5.2.6.5 Mirror Image .................................................................................................................................................................................................5-18
5.2.6.6 Repeat Image.................................................................................................................................................................................................5-18
5.2.6.7 Slant Image....................................................................................................................................................................................................5-19
5.2.6.8 Negative/Positive Reversal ...........................................................................................................................................................................5-19
5.2.6.9 Framing/Blanking .........................................................................................................................................................................................5-20
5.2.6.10 Image Integration ........................................................................................................................................................................................5-20
5.2.6.11 Identifying a Marked Area ..........................................................................................................................................................................5-21
5.2.6.12 Outline Processing ......................................................................................................................................................................................5-22
5.2.6.13 Shade Processing.........................................................................................................................................................................................5-22
5.2.6.14 Shadow Processing......................................................................................................................................................................................5-23
5.2.6.15 Pattern Processing .......................................................................................................................................................................................5-24
5.2.6.16 Color Removal ............................................................................................................................................................................................5-25
5.2.6.17 Color Conversion ........................................................................................................................................................................................5-25
5.2.6.18 Color/Image Editing....................................................................................................................................................................................5-25
5.2.7 UCR (Under Color Removal) .................................................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.2.7.1 UCR (under color removal) ..........................................................................................................................................................................5-26
5.2.8 Space Filter ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-27
5.2.8.1 Sharpness/Filter Processing ..........................................................................................................................................................................5-27
Contents

5.2.8.2 Outline Processing ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-28

5.2.9 Area Identification ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.2.9.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.2.9.2 Black Detection/Chromatic Detection .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.9.3 Edge Detection/Line Width Detection.......................................................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.10 Direct Mapping ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-29
5.2.10.1 Direct Mapping ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.11 Chromatic Space Compression ................................................................................................................................................ 5-30
5.2.11.1 Chromatic Space Compression ................................................................................................................................................................... 5-30
5.2.12 Output Masking (toner color correction) ................................................................................................................................. 5-31
5.2.12.1 Output Masking (toner color correction) .................................................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.2.13 Binary Processing .................................................................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.2.13.1 Error Diffusion (ED) Method ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.2.13.2 Mean Density (MD) Retention Method...................................................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.2.13.3 Probability Density (PD) Retention Method .............................................................................................................................................. 5-32
5.2.13.4 Random Error Diffusion (R-ED) Method................................................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.2.13.5 Dither Screen Method ................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-33
5.2.14 Detecting the Orientation of an Original ................................................................................................................................. 5-34
5.2.14.1 Detecting the Orientation of an Original .................................................................................................................................................... 5-34
5.2.15 Identifying the Position of an Original .................................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.2.15.1 Identifying the Position of an Original ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-35
 Chapter 5

5.1 Analog Image Processing

5.1.1 CCD
5.1.1.1 Outline
0008-4435
The CCD used in a black-and-white machine is a 1-line CCD (charge-coupled device) designed to read black-and-white originals.
The CCD for a color machine, on the other hand, is a 3-line CCD for reading color originals.
5.1.1.2 1-Line CCD
0008-4436
A 1-line CCD is a line sensor consisting of a row of about 3,000 or 7,500 photocells.

Light-receiving
segment 6 5 4 3 2 1
Transfer segment,
etc.
F-5-1

The signal generated by photoconversion in the light-receiving segment is sent to the transfer segment representing odd-numbered pixels and even-
numbered pixels.
The transfer segment and the output segment are two-channel segments, and the output of an odd-numbered light-receiving segment and that of an even-
numbered segment are sent out by output segment A and output segment B, respectively.

Clock pulse A

Transfer Output segment A

segment A
Gate
Light-receiving 6 5 4 3 2 1 CCD shift pulse
segment
Gate
Transfer Output section B
segment B
Clock pulse B
F-5-2

5.1.1.3 3-Line CCD

0008-4437
The 3-line CCD consists of three rows of photocells (about 5,000 or 7,500), and each row is covered with a red (R), green (G), or B (blue) filter.
The arrangement of the red, green, and blue rows is different from model to model.

(front) B (rear)

Filter R

Light-receiving
segment 6 5 4 3 2 1
Transfer segment,
etc.
F-5-3

The signal generated through photoconversion by the light-receiving segment is sent to the transfer segment in the form of odd-numbered pixels and even-
numbered pixels.
Each row has two channels (transfer segment and output segment), and the output of the odd-numbered light-receiving segment and that of the even-
numbered segment are sent out by output segment A and output segment B, respectively. In other words, signals from the CCD are sent simultaneously
from a total of six channels.

5-1
 Chapter 5

Clock pulse A

Transfer
segment A Output segment A
Gate
Light-receiving
segment 6 5 4 3 2 1 CCD shift pulse

Gate
Transfer
segment B Output segment B

Clock pulse B
F-5-4

5.1.1.4 CCD Driver

0008-4438
The image signal from the CCD is stabilized in the impedance reduction circuit and is sent to the analog image possessing block.

CCD driver PCB Analog image

processing block
CCD OSAB B-ODD
B OSBB B-EVEN
Impedance
OSAG reduction G-ODD
G OSBG circuit G-EVEN
OSAR R-ODD
R OSBR R-EVEN

Clock pulses, shift pulses

From analog image
processing block
or digital image
processing block
F-5-5

5.1.2 Odd-Numbered/Even-Numbered Bit Integration

5.1.2.1 Odd-Numbered/Even-Numbered Bit Integration
0008-4439
The discrete odd-numbered and even-numbered bits of an image signal are held by the sample hold signal and integrated by the select signal.
3-Line CCD
Odd-/even-number bit integration block

From CCD driver PCB Odd-/even-number

bit integration block

R odd-number signal
R output signal
R even-number signal

G odd-number signal
G output signal
G even-number signal

B odd-number signal
B output signal
B even-number signal

Sample hold signal

Select signal
F-5-6

5-2
 Chapter 5

1-Line CCD
Analog processor PCB

Odd-/even-number
bit integration block
From CCD

Odd-number
signal

Output signal

Even-number
signal

Sample hold signal

Select signal
F-5-7

5.1.3 Gain/Offset Processing

5.1.3.1 Gain/Offset Processing
0008-4443
The analog video signal from the CCD driver is processed so that its coefficient of amplification is equalized (gain correction) to make up for the difference
in the efficiency of photoconversion among cells of the CCD. In addition, the output voltage occurring in the absence of light is also corrected to a specific
level (offset correction).
5.1.4 A/D Conversion
5.1.4.1 A/D Conversion
0008-4444
The A/D conversion circuit converts signals into 8-bit digital signals in keeping with the clock pulses from the image processor PCB.
1-Line CCD
Analog processor PCB
A/D conversion
block

Input Output To image processor PCB

signal signal
(digital)
(analog)

Clock pulse
F-5-8

3-Line CCD
Analog processor PCB
A/D conversion
block
R input Output To image processor PCB
signal signal

G input G output 8
signal
(analog)

(digital)

signal
8
B input B output
signal signal
8

Clock pulse
F-5-9

5-3
 Chapter 5

5.2 Digital Image Processing

5.2.1 Shading Correction
5.2.1.1 Outline
0008-4445
The output of the CCD will not necessarily be uniform even if the light it receives represents an original with even density for the following reasons:
- The sensitivity may differ from cell to cell.
- The level of transmission of the lens differs between center and edge.
- The intensity of light differs between middle and ends of the scanning lamp.
- The scanning lamp is subject to deterioration.
Shading correction is intended to correct these discrepancies. Shading correction may be normal shading correction executed for each copy and auto
shading correction executed to determine a target level in service mode.

Lens CCD
CCD output
Scanning lamp
Intensity
of light
F-5-10

5.2.1.2 Determining a Shading Correction Target Level

0008-4447
a. Using the Standard White Plate
A shading target level is determined by executing service mode. The density of white paper and that of the standard white plate are measured, and the
resulting measurements are stored in memory. The measurement data is arithmetically processed to produce a target level for use when shading is executed.

Standard white plate

Scanning lamp

No. 2 mirror

No. 1 mirror

CCD
Lens

No. 3 mirror
F-5-11

MEMO:
Some models allow correction of the target level in service mode.

b. Using the Bar Code

The CCD reads the bar code found under the standard white plate to determine a correction target level.

MEMO:
Light of a specific intensity is directed to the standard white plate, and the intensity of the reflected light (each of R, G, and B) is measured. The result is
expressed in the form of a bar code and indicated on a label attached to the standard white plate at time of shipment. At the start of a copying run, the bar
code is read to find out the degree of "whiteness" of the standard white plate before shading is executed.

5-4
 Chapter 5

Standard
white plate Bar code
Copyboard glass
Glass

Scanning lamp
CCD
Lens

F-5-12

c. Using a Pre-Determined Target Level

The correction target level best suited to each standard white plate is entered in the machine's memory at the factory.

MEMO:
Light of a specific intensity is directed to the standard white plate, and the intensity of the reflected light (each of R, G, and B) is measured and stored in
the machine's memory. Shading is executed using the measurements from memory and those taken of the standard white plate (degree of whiteness) during
copying operation.

5.2.1.3 Determining the Shading Correction Level

0008-4449
Shading correction is executed for each copying job. The light of the scanning lamp is directed to the standard white plate, and the reflected light is turned
into digital signals in the analog image processing block. These digital signals are sent to the shading correction circuit of the digital image processing
block in the form of shading data.
The shading correction circuit compares the shading data against the target level stored in memory and sets the difference as the shading correction level.
The shading correction level is used to correct the variation among CCD pixels representing a scanned original so that the image density level will be
uniform.

CCD output

Characteristics
after correction

Target value

Measurement data
Characteristics
before correction

Density of original
Standard white plate
F-5-13

5.2.2 RGB Phase Correction (3-line CCD position matching)

5.2.2.1 RGB Phase Correction (3-line CCD position matching)
0008-4450
The CCD consists of three discrete line sensors, each covered with a red (R), green (G), or blue (B) filter. For this reason, the line image generated by each
line sensor at a given point is subject to a discrepancy as shown in the following figure.

5-5
 Chapter 5

Original

R Line memory

BGR (direction of scan)

G Line memory

R B
G
B
CCD

Control circuit

F-5-14

To eliminate the discrepancies, the R and G image signals are temporarily stored in a line memory and then sent out synchronized with the B image signal.
5.2.3 Input Masking (sensor chromatic correction)
5.2.3.1 Input Masking (sensor chromatic correction)
0008-4451
The transmission characteristics of the R, G, and B filters of the CCD are corrected.
Ideally, each filter should let through light of specific wave lengths while blocking the rest. However, unwanted light also makes its way through the filters
in actual applications, requiring correction.
In the case of the G filter, for example, the following takes place:
The ideal G filter should allow 100% of light with wave lengths between 500 and 600 nm (green) to pass while preventing light with wave lengths less
than 500 nm and more than 600 nm from passing.
In reality, there are such areas as represented by a, c, and b in the following figure.

Degree of transmission (G filter)

Ideal characteristic

Actual characteristic
a
c

500 600 Wave length (nm)

F-5-15

To bring these characteristics closer to the ideal characteristics, the extra image components are removed while adding missing image components.
5.2.4 Density Processing
5.2.4.1 Logarithmic Correction
0008-4452
The output from the CCD has linear characteristics in relation to the light reflected by an original, but the density of the same original as perceived by the
eye do not have linear characteristics in relation to the reflected light.
The following figure shows the relationship between the density of an original as perceived by the eye and the output of the CCD.

5-6
 Chapter 5

CCD output

25

0
Black White
Density of
original
F-5-16

To correct the discrepancy, level conversion is performed using a correction curve like the one shown in the following figure.

Output level

255

0
0 255
Input level
F-5-17

5.2.4.2 YMC Conversion

0008-4456
In this block, Y, M, and C signals are generated by taking advantage of the fact that chromatic light (B, G, R) and the light reflected by toner (Y, M, C)
are in a complementary relationship. (Any two colors marked "Absorb" in the following table are said to have a complementary relationship.)

T-5-1

Toner
Y M C
Chromatic light
B Absorb Reflect Reflect
G Reflect Absorb Reflect
R Reflect Reflect Absorb

Degree of
transmission of filer

B G R

400 500 600 700

Wave length (nm)
F-5-18

5-7
 Chapter 5

Degree of reflection
(of toner)

Y M C

400 500 600 700

Wave length (nm)
F-5-19

Since the intensity of light passing through each of the CCD filters and the density of an original has a linear relationship, and the color of each filter (B,
G, R) and the color of each toner (Y, M, C) are in a complementary relationship, level conversion may be used to generate Y, M, and C signals.

Output level
(Y,M,C)

Darker 255

Lighter 0
0 255
Input level
(B,G,R)
F-5-20

5.2.4.3 Manual Adjustment of Density

0008-4480
The image density is varied using the appropriate conversion table selected according to the setting (F1 through F9) of the Density key located on the
control panel.

255 F5
F1(dark)
F6
F2
F3 F7
F4
F8

Output F9 (light)

00
00 Input 255
F-5-21

5.2.4.4 Density Correctio

0008-4489
a. Correction by Image Mode
The gamma table best suited to the image of an original is selected for density correction to ensure the best reproduction of an image.
When text mode is selected, a steep density correction curve will be used for higher contrast. When text/photo or photo mode is selected, on the other hand,
a curve which ensures good gradation and faithful reproduction of the density of the original will be used.

5-8
 Chapter 5

Gamma Table
Copy density

Text mode

• Text/photo mode
• Photo mode
• Hi-Fi mode

Density of original
F-5-22

b. Correction According to the Resistance of the Photosensitive Drum

The surface of the photosensitive drum tends to become worn over use causing its resistance to lower because of the thinning coating.
The resistance is measured, and the result is used to modify the gamma table, thereby ensuring continued stable reproduction of images. The resistance is
measured as follows:
The surface of the photosensitive drum is uniformly charged by a specific voltage (AC + DC).
The level of the application current while the surface is being charged is sampled to compute the resistance of the photosensitive drum.
The resistance may be measured while any of the following takes place:
- Initial rotation after the Start key is turned on.
- Initial rotation after the front door is opened/closed (except for jam removal).
- Initial rotation after the control panel power switch is turned on.
- Last rotation after each time 500 copies/prints have been made.
Gamma Table
Copy density

Coating
thickness: thin

thickness: thick

Density of original
F-5-23

5.2.5 AE Processing
5.2.5.1 Outline
0008-4494
AE processing of a black-and-white image may be any of the following:
- AE with priority on speed
- AE with priority on image quality
AE processing of a color image, on the other hand, may be any of the following:
- Background removal (background level adjustment 1)
- See-through image removal (background level adjustment 2)
The most appropriate AE type is selected for execution to suit the mode selected on the machine's control panel.
5.2.5.2 AE with Priority on Speed
0008-4496
In AE with priority on speed, the image signal resulting from A/D conversion is returned to the priority on speed processing circuit for the following
processing:
- Output level evaluation of the A/D conversion circuit
- Modification of the reference voltage based on the result of evaluation
The resulting reference voltage is sent to the A/D conversion block.
AE with priority on speed may be adjusted in service mode.

5-9
 Chapter 5

Analog image processing block Digital image processing block

Input signal
Output
A/D conversion signal
block

Reference
voltage
AE with priority Control
on speed signa
processing
circuit

F-5-24

MEMO:
Normally, the A/D conversion circuit operates based on a reference voltage, and increasing or decreasing a reference voltage will accordingly increase or
decrease the dynamic range (difference between maximum output level and minimum output level), affecting the signal level after A/D conversion. (This
will prevent faithful digital conversion of an analog input.)
The priority on speed circuit varies the reference voltage in question to suit the signal level of the output from the A/D conversion circuit to vary the
dynamic range to remove the background density of an original. The circuit performs this processing once for each single line running in main scanning
direction.

Outline of A/D Conversion

The
Original with a Original with a reference
White Background Colored Background voltage is
Surface of varied to
original lower the
FFH white
level (thereby
FFH(white) decreasing

FFH (white)
Output level
OOH(black) OOH (black)

: dynamic range of original with white background.

: dynamic range of original with colored background.
F-5-25

5.2.5.3 AE with Priority on Image Quality

0008-4498
When AE with priority on image quality is selected, the scanner is moved forward to scan the original while measuring its overall density.
The measurements are taken of the density of the background and the image, and the original is classified into any of the three types:
Background type. An original with text on a sheet with a white or light background.
Reversed image type. An original with light text or reversed-image text on a colored sheet or a sheet with a light background.
Other type. An original with limited changes in density (e.g., photo).
According to the type of original, one of three AE tables is selected and used to generate a correction table for the original in question for density correction.

Copy density Copy density Copy density

Density of original Density of original Density of original

AE table for background type AE table for others AE table for reversed text type
F-5-26

If an ADF is in use, AE is executed for each original upon pick-up.

In the case of page separation, a single AE scan is made to determine an AE table for all originals.

5-10
 Chapter 5

Points of AE Measurement (example)

2mm

2mm

F-5-27

5.2.5.4 Background Level Adjustment

0008-4502
When the light reflected by an original is read, the color data of the paper (background) will also be read, requiring the identification of the background
and subsequent correction of the image signal, to improve reproduction without fogging the copy.
The detection of background pixels is conducted based on the sample image data collected during a pre-scan; the most frequently occurring pixels and, in
addition, those whose R, G, and B levels are all of a specific level or higher (200, in the case of the following figure) are assumed to represent the
background of any original.

255 255

200 200

B G R B G R

Background pixels
F-5-28

In user mode, the background level may be corrected for background removal or see-through image removal, each with a method of correction of its own.
In background removal mode, only the background pixels are considered; the R, G, and B signal levels of the pixels are corrected to 255 to remove the
color of the background.
In see-through image removal, the R, G, and B signals of the background pixels (as represented by image data) are taken away, thereby eliminating the
image showing through from the back of the original.
5.2.6 Image Processing
5.2.6.1 Ratio Processing
0008-4507
a. Horizontal Ratio (main scanning direction)
When image data is written to or read from memory, data units may be skipped (for reduction) or repeated (for enlargement).

b. Vertical Ratio (sub scanning direction)

The speed at which the scanner is moved is changed to change the width of the scanning line over a single pixel on an original. For detailed descriptions,
see the following table.

T-5-2

Enlarge Direct Reduce

Original
W
(image data) 2W 2

(writing)
Line memory
W
W W
(reading)
Copy

5-11
 Chapter 5

Enlarge Direct Reduce

Varying ratio in main To increase to double All data units are To reduce to half the
scanning direction the size, all data units written into size, every other data
are written into memory as they are unit is written to
memory, and the and read as they are. memory.
same data units are
read twice.
Varying ratio in sub The scanner is moved The scanner is moved
scanning direction slower to decrease the faster to increase the
width of the scanning width of the scanning
line in relation to each line in relation to each
pixel on the original. pixel on the original.

c. Zoom Fine Adjustment

The vertical or horizontal ratio may be fine-adjusted in user mode (in 0.1% increments); for example, in the case of +1% (both X and Y), the following
will hold true:
50%->51% 100%->101% 400%->401%

d. Enlargement Correction Processing

When making an enlarged copy, the image data is corrected so that the difference in density between pixels will not change excessively.
The following figure shows the image data of an original, image data expected upon enlargement, and image data upon enlargement correction.
Image density

Image density

Image density
1 pixel 1 pixel 1 pixel
a. Original b Enlargement by 300% c. After correction
F-5-29

5.2.6.2 Shift Processing

0008-4518
The following figure depicts an outline of the principles used when an image is shifted in main or sub scanning direction.

<Original> Shift in main scanning direction

Main scanning <Copy>
direction
direction
Sub scanning

a b c a b c a b c

Principle:
<Copy> When reading a single scan's worth of
data from the line memory, reading is
Shift in sub scanning direction

started with midway pixels or the timing

of reading the data of the first pixel is
delayed to shift the image position.
Principle:
a b c The start position or start
timing of the scanner is
changed to shift the image.
a b c

F-5-30

Supplementary Explanation on a Shift in Main Scanning Direction

5-12
 Chapter 5

Main scanning

a b c
These are
skipped.

a b c
Reading is started
with this pixel.
<Memory>

a b c
F-5-31

Main scanning

a b c These are
skipped.
Reading is started here.

a b c
a b c
F-5-32

Combining shifts in main and sub scanning directions, the following are possible:

a. Corner shift
The coordinates (X1, Y1) of a corner of an area to move may be shifted to any of the four corners of the sheet.

b. Center Shift
The coordinates (Xm, Ym) of a corner which cause the top/bottom and left/right margins of the copy to be identical are computed based on the size of the
area to shift and the size of the paper to use, and coordinates X1 and Y1 are moved to that point.

MEMO:
Xm = Xmax - (X2 - X1)
2
Ym = Ymax - (Y2 - Y1)
2

c. Selective Shift
The coordinates (X1, Y1) of a corner of an area to shift is moved to any coordinates (Xp, Yp).

5-13
 Chapter 5

(0,0) a. Corner Shift

X1 X2 (Xmax) (0,0)
Y1 Paper

Y2
(Ymax)
Area to shift
Original (may be entire original) b. Center Shift
Xm Xmax
Ym Paper
Ym

Xm Xm

Ym
Ymax
c. Selective Shift
Xp X1 Xmax
Paper
Y1

Yp

Ymax
F-5-33

5.2.6.3 Reduced Page Composition

0008-4520
1. Not Using Page Memory
Reduced page composition may be any of the following two modes:
- 2-on-1 mode, in which two originals are reduced to fit a single sheet of paper.
- 4-on-1 mode, in which four originals are reduced to fit a signal sheet of paper.
The use of these modes requires the combination of ratio processing, shift processing, and overlay processing.
In ratio processing, a specific ratio is computed from the size of the original and the size of paper.

Formula for Computing the Ratio in Lengthwise Direction

a: length of paper/(length of original x 2)
b: length of paper/length of original
Formula for Computing the Ratio in Breadthwise Direction
c: width of paper/(with of original x 2)
d: width of paper/width of original
If the lengthwise ratio and the breadthwise ratio are different, the smaller of the two will be selected. (However, the ratio must be within the range between
25% and 800%.)
Shift processing and overlay processing are controlled as shown in the following figures.
When an ADF is brought into use, combinations shown in the following Table will become possible.

T-5-3

Mode Duplexing unit RDF/ADF Length formula Width formula

2-on-1 (overlay) R O a c
2-on-1 (page
O R a d
separation)
2-on-1 (double-
R R a d
sided)
4-on-1 R R a c
R: required.
O: optional.

5-14
 Chapter 5

2-on-1 Mode (continuous, double-sided)

Original (A4 x 2) Copy (A4R x 1)
2-on-1 mode
(continuous)
(double-sided)
1 2 1 2

Orientation of Arrangement of images

Mode on copies Remarks
original on copyboard ( indicates feeding direction)
Book Originals Copies It is in reduce mode only.
mode It may be used for making double-sided copies.
RF It uses the reversing function of the RDF when
2 1 2 1 feeding originals to change the sequence of
in use the originals.
What is normally 1 2 is switched over to 2 1 .

2 originals are placed

on the copyboard.

ADF Originals Copies It is in reduce mode only.

in use It may be used for making double-sided copies.
An ADF does not have a reversing mechanism and
is not capable of changing the sequence of originals,
1 2 1 2 requiring turning around the orientation of the
originals on its tray.
What is is switched over to .
2 originals are placed
on the copyboard.

F-5-34

2-on-1 Mode (overlay)

2-on-1
Original (A4 x 2) Copy (A4R x 1)
(overlay)
1
1 2
2
Arrangement of images
Orientation of on copies
Mode original on copyboard Remarks
( indicates feeding direction)
Book Original Copies The following are combined to make copies:
mode reduce mode
1st image shift
RF 2 copying overlay
in use
1

2nd 2
1 copying

ADF Original Copies The following are combined to make copies:

in use reduced mode
1st image shift
copying overlay copy
2
2
1
2nd
copying
1

F-5-35

5-15
 Chapter 5

4-on-1 Mode
4 originals (A4) 1 copy (A4)
4-on-1
mode
(continous) 1 2
(double-sided) 1 2 3 4
3 4

Copying Orientation of Arrangement of images

Mode on copies Remarks
original on copyboard ( indicates feeding direction)
Book 1st Originals Copies The following are combined to make copies:
mode copying reduce mode
image shift
overlay
2 1 1 2

2nd Originals Copies

copying
3 4
4 3
1 2

RF 1st Originals Copies The following are combined to make copies:

copying reduce mode
in use 3 4 image shift
overlay
4 3
When feeding originals, the reversing
mechanism of the RDF is used to change
2nd Originals Copies the sequence of the originals.
copying
What is normally 3 4 is turned into 1 2 .
3 4
2 1 43 21
1 2

ADF 1st Originals Copies The following are combined to make copies:
in use copying reduce mode
image shift
3 4 overlay
3 4 An ADF does not have a reversing
mechanism and is not capable of changing
2nd Originals Copies the sequence of originals, requiring turning
copying around the originals on its tray.
What is normally is
1 2 1 2 switched over to .

3 4

F-5-36

2) Using Page Memory

Reduced page composition may be any of the following types when page memory is used:

T-5-4

- 2-on-1 - 2-on-1 screen

- 4-on-1 - 4-on-1 screen
- 8-on-1 - 8-on-1 screen

The entire face of the original is scanned by the scanner, and the image is reduced at the ratio best suited to the selected mode; the resulting data is then
stored in page memory. Next, the image data is sent out in keeping with the selected type of reduced page composition so that the image of the original is
formed on the photosensitive drum.
5.2.6.4 Enlarged Page Composition
0008-4543
In enlarged page composition, a reduced image (for image composition) is returned to its initial size, and it may be any of the four types:
- 1-on-2, generating the image on 2 sheets
- double-sided, 1-on-2, generating the image on 4 sheets
- 1-on-4, generating the image on four sheets
- double-sided, 1-on-4, generating the image on 8 sheets

5-16
 Chapter 5

a. 1-on-2, Generating the Image on 2 Sheets

Original Output
A

1 2 1 + 2
1. 1-on-2
B original Output

1
1 + 2
2 2. 1-on-2

• A continuous image (1-on-2, longer at top/bottom) is divided vertically for output.

• A continuous image (1-on-2, longer on left/right) is divided horizontally for output.

Place the original on the copyboard glass, or use the RDF (not an ADF).
F-5-37

b. Double-Side, 1-on-2, Generating the Image on 4 Sheets

Original Output

1 2 3 4 4+3 + 2+ 1
Face Black 1. Double-Sided 2-on-2 Single-Sided

Original Output

1 3
X 4+3 + 2+ 1
2 4
2. Double-Sided 1-on-2 Single-Sided
Y
Face Back

• A continuous 2-on-1 image (longer at top/bottom) is divided vertically for output.

• A continuous 2-on-1 image (longer on left/right) is divided horizontally for output.
F-5-38

c. 1-on-4, Generating the Image on 4 Sheets

Original Output

1 2 4+3 + 2+ 1
3 4
• The last original will not be subjected to
detection of the number of effective areas;
in other words, if area 4 of the original is blank,
output 4 will be blank.
F-5-39

5-17
 Chapter 5

d. Double-Sided, 1-on-4, Generating the Image on 8 Sheets

Original Output

1 2 5 6 8+7 + 6+ 5
3 4 7 8
Face Back + 4+ 3+2 + 1
• The last original will not be subjected to detection of the number of effective areas.
• The output will be as in the case of 1-on-4 4 output plates.
F-5-40

5.2.6.5 Mirror Image

0008-4545

Original Copy
Main scanning direction
Sub scanning direction

a b c c b a

F-5-41

Principles
When a single scan's worth of data is read from RAM, reading is started at the end and continued in reverse to generate a mirror image in relation to main
scanning direction.

Address nnn
12345678 -2-1
Image signal

1 pixel (1 byte)
Writing Reading
F-5-42

5.2.6.6 Repeat Image

0008-4546

Original Copy
Main scanning

a a a a
direction
Sub scanning

Address S
Address E
F-5-43

Principle
When reading a single scan's worth of data from RAM, a read start address (address S) and a read end address (address E) are specified. Then, reading is

5-18
 Chapter 5

started at address S; once address E is reached, a jump is made back to address S, and reading is continued. A repeat image is generated by repeating this
sequence of operations.

Address
12345678 nnn
-1-2

Image signal
1 pixel (1 byte)

Reading

F-5-44

5.2.6.7 Slant Image

0008-4547

<Copy>

<Original>
Main scanning
a b c
direction
Sub scanning

a b c

a b c
F-5-45

Principles
When reading a single scan's worth of data from RAM, read start addresses (address S) are incrementally selected for an appropriate number of lines,
resulting in a slanted image.

Address
12345678 nnn
-1-2
Image signal

1 pixel (1 byte)
Reading
1st line
2nd line
3rd line
4th line
F-5-46

5.2.6.8 Negative/Positive Reversal

0008-4548
Level conversion is performed so that the white areas of an original are generated as black, while black areas are turned into white.

5-19
 Chapter 5

Conceptual Graph Representing Level Conversion

25

20

Output level 12

0
0 5 12 20 25
Input level
F-5-47

(Original) (Copy)

a b c a b c
F-5-48

5.2.6.9 Framing/Blanking
0008-4549
a. Framing
The signals representing an area outside the selected area is forced to represent white regardless of the image signals of the original.
Framing
Area

F-5-49

b. Blanking
As opposed to framing, the signals representing the selected area are forced to represent white regardless of the image signals of the original.
Blanking
Area

F-5-50

5.2.6.10 Image Integration

0008-4551
An image read by the scanner may be integrated with an image in memory. Integration may take any of the following forms:
- Segment integration
- Full-page integration
- Area integration
In the case of full-page integration, image A, which is read by the scanner first, is temporarily stored in the image memory and integrated with image B to
be read next.

5-20
 Chapter 5

Image from scanner

Image B Image A

Image integration Image memory

Images A + B

Image integration block

F-5-51

For both segment integration and area integration, the flow of processing will be as shown in the following figure. When image B is to be used as the
background and image A is to represent the area to be selected, image A is read and temporarily stored in the image memory and then processed using the
area data from the control panel/editor before it is integrated with image B.

Control panel/editor

Area data
Image from scanner

Image B Image A

R,G,B

Ratio/reduction
processing
Image integration

Image memory

Images A + B

Image integration block

F-5-52

5.2.6.11 Identifying a Marked Area

0008-4554
The user may mark an area with a yellow, red, blue, or green marker. Marking, however, must be on a black-and-white original, since the machine will
not be able to distinguish the color of the marker from the colors of the original on a color original. In addition, the machine may wrongly detect an area
where a marking runs over any area of color.

5-21
 Chapter 5

Marking area Marking area

In the case of a color

original, a colored area
will also be identified
as a marking area.

Black-and-white original Color original

F-5-53

5.2.6.12 Outline Processing

0008-4555
In outline processing, the outline of an image is generated in black while the rest is generated in white.

Original After outline processing

F-5-54

The image level is processed to represent either black (if high) or white (if low), and the resulting binary black signals are used to generate output image
data.
For instance, image signals are compared assuming a slice level of '1'. The result is sent as black or white data, generating the outline signal.

Comparator
Binarization Outline
Image signal signal signal Output
(10) generation
block
Slice level
(1)
F-5-55

The following figure shows the relationship between image signal and slice level together with the result of comparison.
Output level

+
Slice level

0
Main scanning direction

Binarization signal Output

Internal outline signal Output

External outline signal

F-5-56

5.2.6.13 Shade Processing

0008-4556
Shade processing may be any of the two types shown in the following figure, and shading is applied on original images.
Shading data is contained in the RAM on the digital image processing PCB in the form of the patterns shown in the following figure.
The appropriate data is read form the RAM as needed to generate shading data suited to the selected pattern.

5-22
 Chapter 5

T-5-5

Foreground shading

Original

Shading pattern
Background shading

Original

Inside selected area/shading pattern

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

F-5-57

5.2.6.14 Shadow Processing

0008-4558
In shadow processing, image data is generated for a second time with a delay in relation to the original image to provide a shadow to the original image.
Shadow processing may be any of the following four types:
(The angle of a shadow cannot be changed.)

<Original>
Main scanning direction

On an actual copy,
the inside is black.
direction
Sub scanning

<Copy>

< 3-D shadow > < 3-D shadow only > < Plane shadow > < Plane shadow only>

F-5-58

Principle
When a single scan's worth of data is read from RAM, incremental switch-overs are made in read start addresses (address S) to create a shadow.

5-23
 Chapter 5

Address
12345678 nnn
-1-2

Image signal
1 pixel (1 byte)
Reading
1st line
2st line
3st line
4st line
F-5-59

5.2.6.15 Pattern Processing

0008-4560
In pattern processing, colors on a color original are turned into specific patterns on copies.
Pattern processing takes any of the following two forms:
- Colors on an original are turned into specific patterns.
- Colors on an original are turned into specific densities.
Original

F-5-60

Colors Expressed in Different Patterns

F-5-61

Colors Expressed in Different Densities

F-5-62

The foregoing figure are conceptual diagrams and are different from the patterns and densities used by actual machines.
When executing pattern processing, the following two methods may be selected in user mode ('pattern'):
Stored color. The scanner is not operated for pre-scanning, but the colors stored in memory are used for pattern processing.
Original color. The scanner is operated for pre-scanning, and the colors of the original are used for pattern processing.

a. Using Stored Colors

In this method, the colors of the original are ignored, and the colors stored in memory (red, orange, yellow, green, cyan, blue, violet) are used.
If any of the stored colors is found on the original, a specific pattern/density is used on its copies.
The stored colors cannot be replaced with different colors.
Wrong identification of a color in processing in this method may be corrected using 'fine adjust' in pattern processing mode.

b. Using Original Color

In this method, processing is performed according to the colors used on the original.
The scanner is operated before making copies (pre-scanning) to identify the colors of the original and the ratio of colors in terms of area.

5-24
 Chapter 5

Specifically, the scanner is moved forward along the length of the original, sampling colors every 2 mm of movement.
Points of Measurement (sample)
2 mm

2 mm

F-5-63

Colors are identified starting with the one with the largest area. Each time a specific color (listed for conversion) is encountered, pattern/density processing
is executed.
None of the colors on the original can be selected for conversion into a specific pattern.
5.2.6.16 Color Removal
0008-4562
In color removal, a specific color of an original may be removed from its copies.
The color may be red, green, blue, or yellow, or combinations of them.
The level of color identification may be changed by means of fine adjustment.
5.2.6.17 Color Conversion
0008-4563
In color conversion, the following may take place in response to the command from the control panel or the editor.
- Color conversion
- Posterization
- Solarization
When an area is selected on the editor, bitmap data will be generated according to the area data in question, and the pixels falling within the area are
identified. If a stored color (as by using the color palette) is selected, the applicable color data is read from the bitmap memory to replace the pixels
identified in the image.

Based on the area data,

the area to change on the
original and the selected
color are identified. Image from scanner

R,G,B

Editor Image A

Area data Digital image processing block

Bitmap data generation

Color conversion
Bitmap memory

R,G,B

From color data (stored colors,

color palette selection) in bitmap Output
memory

F-5-64

5.2.6.18 Color/Image Editing

0008-4565
The following chromatic editing takes place:
- Gradation
- Color filter
- Base color
- Coloring

5-25
 Chapter 5

- Special effects
- User's color
- Painting
- Character integration
Except character integration, bitmap data is generated based on the mode data selected on the control panel (pattern or color of gradation, or area) for
integration with image A read by the scanner.

Control panel/editor Image from scanner

Mode data

Color/image editing block

Bitmap data generation

Image A

Bitmap memory Y,M,C,Bk

Color data

Color data (e.g., color Color editing

palette) is stored.

F-5-65

In the case of character integration, the characters in image A (read by the scanner) are processed into binary signals in the color/image editing block and
are turned into bitmap data for storage in the bitmap memory before being integrated with image B.

Control panel/editor Image from scanner

Image A Image B
Area data
Color/image editing block

Color conversion

Bitmap data generation

Text data Text data is generated

by binary processing.

Bitmap memory

Color editing

F-5-66

5.2.7 UCR (Under Color Removal)

5.2.7.1 UCR (under color removal)
0008-4567
When Y, M, and C toners are mixed in equal parts, black should theoretically result on account of the absence of reflected light.
None of the toners, however, possesses perfect characteristics of light absorption and will not produce pure black even mixed in optimally measured parts.
To make up for the fact, a Bk signal is generated from Y, M, C, and black detection signals for addition to the Y, M, and C signals, thus enhancing the
reproduction of black.

The Bk signal is generated as follows, and the common components of Y, M, and C signals are as shown:

5-26
 Chapter 5

255

Y M C

Common
component

F-5-67

The common components are removed and replaced with the Bk signal. These replaced components are referred to as the UCR amounts; in the case of the
foregoing figure, the UCR amount is 100%. The Bk toner will be added to the entire image, possibly soiling the light areas.

255

M
C
Y

UCR

F-5-68

To prevent soiling, the UCR amount is decreased to a level below 100%. This processing is executed for each pixel.
5.2.8 Space Filter
5.2.8.1 Sharpness/Filter Processing
0008-4569
Computations are performed so that crisp or soft images may be obtained according to the setting of copying or sharpness mode selected on the control
panel.
If the input of image data is as shown in Figure A, the output level when 'sharpness weak' is selected (filter processing) will be as in Figure B.
In 'sharpness weak', the differences in density of an image are evened to produce a soft image.
In 'sharpens strong', the differences in density of an image are emphasized to produce a crisp image.

5-27
 Chapter 5

A
Black 255

200 1 pixel

100

Main scanning direction

White 0
After output

B C

Black 255 Black 255

200 200

100 100

Main scanning Main scanning

direction direction
White 0 White 0
After output After output

F-5-69

5.2.8.2 Outline Processing

0008-4570
AI outline processing serves to emphasize the edge of a character.
The input of image data as shown in Figure A will be identified to represent a character, initiating outline processing.

A B
Black 255 Black 255

20 200

10 100

Main scanning Main scanning

direction direction
White 0 White 0
F-5-70

The input of image data as shown in the following figure is identified to represent a photo, and outline processing will not take place.
Likewise, outline processing will not be used for printed images (e.g., illustrations) consisting of dots.
Image Data of a Photo
Black 255

20

10

Main scanning direction

White 0
F-5-71

5.2.9 Area Identification

5.2.9.1 Outline
0008-4572
The area identification circuit performs the following image processing according to the R, G, and B signals it receives:

5-28
 Chapter 5

- Black detection/chromatic color identification/chromatic identification

- Edge detection
- Line width detection

Digital image processing PCB

Area identification circuit
B Black
G Black detection/
R hue identification detection signal
Line width
Lien width detection signal
Edge detection Edge signal

F-5-72

The black detection signal generated by the area identification circuit is used to generate the Bk component by the UCR processing block. The digital image
processing PCB, on the other hand, uses the black detection signal, edge signal, and line width signal to execute black character identification, sharpness
processing level identification, laser beam count switching, and black original detection (ACS).
5.2.9.2 Black Detection/Chromatic Detection
0008-4573
The R, G, and B signals are used to find out whether the pixel input represents a black or a color, and the result is sent as a color code.
RGB Input Value for Identification of Black

Same ratio

R G B
F-5-73

RGB Input Value for Identification of a Color

R G B
F-5-74

5.2.9.3 Edge Detection/Line Width Detection

0008-4575
The R, G, and B input signals are used to generate the intensity signal for each pixel, and it is compared against the intensity signals of the multiple pixels
adjacent to the pixel in question. The number of adjacent pixels used for comparison is varied to find out whether the pixel in question falls along the edge
of the input image as well as the width of the line running over a segment of the edge. If the pixel in question is identified as an edge, the edge signal and
the line width signal are generated in response.

MEMO:
Black original detection (ACS) is initiated by the black detection signal generated during pre-scanning.

5.2.10 Direct Mapping

5.2.10.1 Direct Mapping
0008-4576
The R, G, and B input signals are converted into C, M, Y, an Bk output signals. By "re-mapping" the chromatic space expressed by RGB signals into a
chromatic space expressed by toners, individual colors may be reproduced faithfully.

5-29
 Chapter 5

RGB image signal

(from analog image processing block)

Logarithm conversion
(RGB-YMC conversion)
YMC
Direct mapping

Image data conversion table

YMCBk
F-5-75

5.2.11 Chromatic Space Compression

5.2.11.1 Chromatic Space Compression
0008-4578
The range of chromatic reproduction associated with a photo original or a computer-generated image is wider than that of a printer.
In conventional methods as shown in the following figure, the colors of an original falling within the range of chromatic reproduction of a printer (points
a and b) are produced faithfully while the data representing points (e.g., point c) outside the range will not be reproduced faithfully, resulting in a
discrepancy between the color of the original and the output.
The chromatic space (hues, brightness, saturation) of the printer is stored in memory. Then, the RGB data collected during pre-scanning is used to identify
the chromatic space (hues, brightness, saturation) of the original and converted to match the chromatic space of the printer, thereby enabling better
reproduction of the gradation of the original than with the existing methods.

5-30
 Chapter 5

Range of chromatic
reproduction of photo original

Rage of chromatic
Without Chromatic reproduction of printer
Space Compression
c Chromatic space on copy
(hues, brightness, saturation)
b b,c c
Ideal
a a
bc
b
Output
Rang of chromatic
reproduction of printer a
Chromatic space of original
Range of chromatic (hues, brightness, saturation)
reproduction of photo original
With Chromatic
Space Compression Chromatic space on copy
c
(hues, brightness, saturation)
b c Ideal c
b

a a c
b

b Output

Range of chromatic
a
reproduction of printer Chromatic space of original
Range of chromatic (hues, brightness, saturation)
reproduction of photo original
F-5-76

5.2.12 Output Masking (toner color correction)

5.2.12.1 Output Masking (toner color correction)
0008-4580
The characteristics of reflection of toner are corrected. In the case of M toner, the following holds true:
The most ideal M toner should absorb 100% of light with wave lengths between 500 and 600 nm (green) and reflect all light with wave lengths less than
500 nm and more than 600 nm. In reality, however, such areas as represented by a, b, and c in the following figure exist.

Intensity of reflected light (M toner)

a c

500 600 Wave length (nm)

F-5-77

Color correction is performed to correct the discrepancy.

5.2.13 Binary Processing
5.2.13.1 Error Diffusion (ED) Method
0008-4582
The error diffusion method uses a pre-determined matrix of values to distribute errors occurring as the result of binary processing to surrounding pixels.

5-31
 Chapter 5

<Error Diffusion Matrix (fixed pattern)>

An error is distributed to the surrounding
0.05 pixels according to a specific ratio of the matrix.
0.01 0.1
0.05 0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1 0.1
0.03 0.05
0.01
Pixel in question (e.g., density of 135)

If the slice level is 128 for binary processing,

the pixel will be black (55); in this case, the
error will be 125 (255 - 135).

Black(255) Error

Slice leve Pixel in question

(128) (density of 135)

White(0)
F-5-78

5.2.13.2 Mean Density (MD) Retention Method

0008-4586
The mean density retention method is a type of error diffusion method.
The mean density of binary-processed adjacent pixels is computed and then used as the slice level by which the pixel in question is evaluated for binary
processing.
Moreover, the difference between mean density and density of the original image is distributed to the surrounding pixels.

Pixel in question Pixel in question Pixel in question

(inclined to white) (inclined to black)
F-5-79

5.2.13.3 Probability Density (PD) Retention Method

0008-4587
The probability density retention method is a type of mean density retention method, and the pixel in question is binary-processed based on the data of
surrounding pixels.
To suppress the occurrence of a moire image, inherent to the MD method, random numbers are added to the slice level in the PD method.
5.2.13.4 Random Error Diffusion (R-ED) Method
0008-4590
In a conventional error diffusion method, a pre-determined matrix is used to distribute errors occurring as the result of binary processing to surrounding
pixels. In such a method, a specific moire image can occur in the image. In the random error distribution method, on the other hand, a random number is
added to the image signal of each pixel.

5-32
 Chapter 5

Conceptual Diagram of the Random Error Diffusion Method

Step 1

A random number is added to the image signal of each pixel.

At this time, a number which makes the sum

0 is added to the adjacent pixel to decrease
the error.

Step 2

<Error Diffusion Matrix (fixed pattern)>

The error is distributed to the
0.05
surrounding pixels according to
0.01 0.1
a specific ratio of the matrix.
0.05 0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1 0.1
0.03 0.05
0.01
Pixel in question (e.g., density of 135)
If the slice level used for binary processing is
128, this pixel will be black (255); in this case
the error is 120 (255 - 135).

Black(255) Error

Slice level Pixel in question

(density of 135)
(128)

White(0)

F-5-80

5.2.13.5 Dither Screen Method

0008-4594
In this method, screen processing is performed on image data to enable 256 gradations using binary image data.

5-33
 Chapter 5

Conceptual Diagram of the Dither Screen Method

4 pixels

8 pixels

In this area, as many as

The black pixels are
16 density patterns may
thickened according to
be formed. As such, as
the density reading.
many as 256 density
patterns are possible in an
area consisting of 8 4
pixels (16 16).

A screen of 106 lines (45 )

is formed.
F-5-81

5.2.14 Detecting the Orientation of an Original

5.2.14.1 Detecting the Orientation of an Original
0008-4595
The orientation of an original is identified in reference to text data. The result of identification ensures that images in reduced page composition mode will
be laid in the correct direction even if originals are placed out of order in the feeder.

5-34
 Chapter 5

Conceptual Diagram of Identification

0

270

90
180

The result of identification is

sent to the digital image
processing block.
Digital image [1] 0
processing block [2] 90
[3] 180
[4] 270
[5] Not known (sent while
8 Image data maintaining the direction)
All image data
is taken in and
the text area is Text area Text orientation
identified. detection block identification
block

2 The stored text data

and the fonts in the
Text data Dictionary dictionary are
storage block storage matched to find out
block the orientation of the
Flash ROM characters.

The image data is

subjected to binary It contains language
processing to help dictionaries.
increase processing
speed; the result is
stored here.
F-5-82

5.2.15 Identifying the Position of an Original

5.2.15.1 Identifying the Position of an Original
0008-4600
The position and the size of an original are identified in reference to the copyboard glass.

A B
X axis (sub scanning)
(0,0) (0,0) Xmin Xmax
Xmin Xmax

Ymin P1
Ymin
Original
Ori
gin
Ymax al
P2
Ymax
Y axis
(main scanning)
Copyboard Copyboard
F-5-83

Figure A shows a rectangular original placed parallel to both X axis (sub scanning direction) and Y axis (main scanning direction), while Figure B shows
the original placed at an angle.
If the underside of the copyboard cover is mirror-finished (preventing diffusion of light) instead of the normal finish, the light of the scanning lamp will
not reach the CCD for areas not covered by the original.

5-35
 Chapter 5

- In the Presence of an Original - In the Absence of an Original

Copyboard cover

Original
Mirror
Copyboard glass

F-5-84

In general, most paper used for originals is white, allowing the white area to represent the original during scanning.
The rectangle (or square) whose diagonal lines run between coordinates Xmin/Ymin and Xmax/Ymax is assumed to be the original.
If the original is placed at an angle as in Figure B, it will be identified as an original whose diagonal lines run between P1 and P2.

MEMO:
Xmin: coordinates in relation to the change from the first black to white.
Xmax: coordinates in relation to the change from the first white to black.
Ymin: coordinates closest to the reference in main scanning direction in relation to a change from black to white.
Ymax: coordinates farthest from the reference in main scanning direction in relation to a change from white to black.

The result of automatic identification of the position and the size of an original enables such functions as auto ratio selection, auto paper selection, and
image shifts.

If a feeder is installed and copies are made of an original placed on the copyboard glass, automatic identification of an original will not take place.

5-36
Chapter 6 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
 Contents

Contents

6.1 Laser Exposure System ..................................................................................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.2 2-Beam Method ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2.1 2-Beam Method...............................................................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.3 4-Beam Type................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.1.3.1 4-Beam Type ...................................................................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Generating the Beam Detection (BD) Signal.................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.2 Controlling the Point of Exposure ............................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2.1 Controlling the Point of Exposure...................................................................................................................................................................6-4
6.3 Laser Driver Circuitry ....................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.2 Stabilizing the Laser Intensity ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.2.1 Stabilizing the Laser Intensity.........................................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.3 Switching the Laser Activation Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.3.1 Switching the Laser Activation Mode.............................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.4 Switching the Laser Output ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.4.1 Switching the Laser Output.............................................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.5 Adjusting the Laser Power........................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.5.1 Adjusting the Laser Power ..............................................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.4 Laser Scanner Motor ......................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.4.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.4.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.4.2 Silent Mode .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-8
6.4.2.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.4.2.2 Setting 'shift to silent mode' to '1' through '9'..................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.4.2.3 Setting 'shift to silent mode' to '0'....................................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.5 Controlling the Temperature of the Laser Unit..............................................................................................................6-9
6.5.1 Controlling the Temperature of the Laser Unit............................................................................................................................ 6-9
 Chapter 6

6.1 Laser Exposure System

6.1.1 Outline
6.1.1.1 Outline
0008-5006
The laser exposure system consists of a laser unit serving as the source of laser light and an optical scanner generating a laser beam (main scanning
direction) with the help of a polygon mirror.
An image (video) signal is converted into a laser intensity signal by a laser unit control circuit, and a laser beam of a strength equivalent to the intensity
indicated by the laser intensity signal is emitted by the laser unit.
The laser beam first moves through a collimating lens and comes to possess an oval cross section; it then moves through a cylindrical lens, after which it
turns into a flat beam.
When the resulting beam is directed to and reflected by the polygon mirror, it will start scanning motions in a specific direction. It is then led to an imaging
lens and onto the surface of the photosensitive drum. As it scans the surface of the photosensitive drum, it removes electric charges, thus forming static
patterns (images) on the surface.

Collimating lens

Cylindrical lens Laser unit

Polygon mirror No. 2 laser mirror

Laser scanner motor

Imaging lens

Beam detection (BD) PCB No. 1 laser mirror

Image area
Photosensitive drum (area of laser exposure)
F-6-1

In general, one laser beam is used to scan one photosensitive drum. Some machines, however, use two laser beams to scan one photosensitive drum (2-
beam method) for a higher speed. (Some high-speed color machines use four beams, each scanning one of four photosensitive drums, i.e., 4-beam method.)
6.1.2 2-Beam Method
6.1.2.1 2-Beam Method
0008-5010
In this method, two beams (laser A, laser B) are used to scan two lines simultaneously to enable high-speed operation.

6-1
 Chapter 6

Laser A

Laser B Laser driver PCB

Polygon mirror

Laser unit
Imaging lens

Laser scanner motor

Laser mirror

BD PCB

BD mirror
Photosensitive drum

Laser A

A
Laser B B

F-6-2

There is a gap between beam A and beam B at the point of emission. To prevent interference, the image signals are given a delay so as to increase the gap
occurring on the surface of the photosensitive drum.

Type 1
In the case of the GP605, the delay increases the gap as follows:

80 m 760 m (18 pixels)

Points of laser emission On photosensitive drum

F-6-3

6.1.3 4-Beam Type

6.1.3.1 4-Beam Type
0008-5015
In this method, images are formed on each of the four drums (Y, M, C, Bk) using Y, M, C, and Bk laser beams. Each drum is equipped with its own laser
unit; using a two-layer polygon mirror, four discrete laser beams are generated.

Type 1
The CLC1000 uses the following construction:

6-2
 Chapter 6

Laser unit for C

Reflecting mirror for Bk Polygon mirror Laser unit for M

Reflecting mirror for Y

Laser unit for Bk

Laser unit for Y

F-6-4

The position of the laser unit and the direction in which the polygon mirror rotates differ for each color (M, Y, C, Bk); therefore, the direction of scanning
in relation to the surface of the photosensitive drum will be as follows, i.e., the direction for M and Y is opposite the direction for C and Bk.

on)
irecti
ing d
(feed

(rear)

Drum for Bk

Drum for C

Drum for M
(front)

Drum for Y

F-6-5

6-3
 Chapter 6

6.2 Generating the Beam Detection (BD) Signal

6.2.1 Outline
6.2.1.1 Outline
0008-5019
The BD signal is used to synchronize the video signal in relation to the direction in which the laser beam is scanned.
When directing the laser beam once across the photosensitive drum, there must be a start (horizontal sync) signal. The BD signal is used to generate such
a start signal.
The BD signal may be generated by directing the laser beam against a BD sensor outside the optical path using a BD mirror mounted within the path; or,
it may be generated by directly guiding the laser beam to a BD sensor mounted within the optical path.
If the generation of the BD signal fails while an image is exposed, an error code to that effect will be indicated on the control panel.

Polygon mirror

Laser unit

Bending mirror
BD signal
BD mirror

(front) (rear)
Photosensitive
drum
ON
Laser
OFF
Non-image Image area
area (297mm)
BD signal
F-6-6

6.2.2 Controlling the Point of Exposure

6.2.2.1 Controlling the Point of Exposure
0008-5022
In double-sided or overlay mode, displacement toward the rear/front of paper after re-pickup, if any, is measured by monitoring the edge of paper in
movement by means of a horizontal registration sensor.
The result of measurement is used to vary the timing at which the laser beam is emitted with reference to the BD signal, thereby ensuring that images will
always be positioned on paper free from displacement.

6-4
 Chapter 6

Polygon mirror

Imaging lens

Laser

BD mirror BD detection PCB

Photosensitive drum

(front) (rear)

Image area
Laser ON
Laser OFF
Image area after shift to rear
Laser ON
Laser OFF
Paper

Horizontal
registration sensor
Image area
Paper shifted to rear

Horizontal registration
Image area sensor detecting shift
to rear

F-6-7

6-5
 Chapter 6

6.3 Laser Driver Circuitry

6.3.1 Outline
6.3.1.1 Outline
0008-5026
The laser driver circuit converts video signals into laser intensity control signals to drive the laser semiconductor. The laser driver circuit has the following
functions:
1. Driving the laser semiconductor
2. Stabilizing the laser beam intensity (APC control)
3. Switching the laser activation mode
4. Switching the laser output
5. Adjusting the laser power

5V
Laser element

Laser intensity
setting circuit

Sample hold signal

Bias control ON Bias control
signal circuit

Laser drive signal Current

switch

Constant
Laser drive circuit current circuit

F-6-8

6.3.2 Stabilizing the Laser Intensity

6.3.2.1 Stabilizing the Laser Intensity
0008-5032
The output characteristics of the laser semiconductor tends to change significantly in response to changes in its ambient temperature. To ensure a stable
output, the following is executed:
1. Emiting laser light;
2. Detecting the laser light by a pin photodiode (PD);
3. Returning the output voltage of the PD to the laser control circuit; and
4. Comparing the output voltage against the reference voltage to determine the laser bias current.
This way, the laser bias current may be controlled to suit the changes in temperature, thus enabling a stable output at all times. This series of remedial
operations is performed for each scanning line.
6.3.3 Switching the Laser Activation Mode
6.3.3.1 Switching the Laser Activation Mode
0008-5038
In addition to control activation used for image signals, the laser is activated for the BD signal (full activation). These two modes of activation are initiated
by the laser activation mode switch signal from the control PCB.
6.3.4 Switching the Laser Output
6.3.4.1 Switching the Laser Output
0008-5039
The laser output may be any of several types, each used to ensure the image most appropriate to the selected mode. The outputs are switched over in
response to the laser output switch signal from the control PCB, and is accomplished by changing the reference voltage used for APC control.

Type 1
In the case of the GP215, the outputs are switched as follows to suit each mode:
High: text mode, text/photo mode
Middle: photo mode, fax output*
Low: printer output*
*In some sites of installation.
6.3.5 Adjusting the Laser Power
6.3.5.1 Adjusting the Laser Power
0008-5040
As shown in Figure 5-9, the laser light emitted by the laser unit is apt to increase its intensity abruptly when the level of application voltage exceeds the
point of operation. The level of current at this point of operation (I) is subject to the ambient temperature; by taking advantage of the fact, the intensity at
the point of operation is monitored and controlled at all times to ensure a specific intensity.

6-6
 Chapter 6

Intensity

Intensity

Intensity
Upper
limit

Point of Point of lower

operation operation limit Point of
operation

I Current Current Current

Current at Activation Current at Activation
point current point current
of operation of operation
F-6-9

The laser power adjustment executed in service mode varies the level of current at the point of operation, thereby setting the upper limit and the lower limit
of the intensity. If an appropriate intensity cannot be obtained because of a fault in the semiconductor, the level of current at the point of operation will
abnormally increase, generating the point of operation current error signal to indicate an error.

6-7
 Chapter 6

6.4 Laser Scanner Motor

6.4.1 Outline
6.4.1.1 Outline
0008-5041
When the motor drive signal enters the laser scanner motor driver circuit, power will be supplied to the laser scanner motor to rotate the motor. The rotation
speed control circuit controls the power so that the rotation speed detection signal and the reference frequency match, thereby maintaining the rotation to
a specific speed.
The motor ready signal is used to indicate whether the speed of the motor is a specific speed; if the rotation of the motor deviates for some reason, the status
of the motor ready signal will indicate the presence of an error, issuing an error code on the control panel.

Laser scanner motor driver circuit Laser

scanner
motor
Motor ready signal

Motor drive signal

Rotation speed
control circuit
Motor
driver M
Rotation
speed
Reference detection
frequency
generation

F-6-10

Machines with a two-speed motor are designed to use two reference frequencies switched over by a speed switch signal. Such machines rotate the motor
at the higher speed during copying operation, and rotates it at a low speed during standby, enabling a shorter warm-up while ensuring a longer life for the
motor.
6.4.2 Silent Mode
6.4.2.1 Outline
0008-5042
In silent mode, the laser scanner motor is held at rest at the end of copying operation or a specific period of time after the last key operation to eliminate
the motor sound in standby.
The mechanism involved in silent mode is controlled according to the settings made under 'shift to silent mode' in user mode.
6.4.2.2 Setting 'shift to silent mode' to '1' through '9'
0008-5044
1. The motor starts to rotate if any of the following is performed in standby:
- Any key is operated on the control panel.
- The copyboard cover or the feeder is opened.
- An original is placed in the feeder.
2. The motor is stopped after the length of time selected in 'shift to silent mode'.
'1' to '9': from 1 min to 9 min
6.4.2.3 Setting 'shift to silent mode' to '0'
0008-5048
1. The motor is started in response to a press on the Start key.
2. The motor is stopped a the end of LSTR.

Main power Control panel

switch power Start key
ON switch ON ON

SLEEP STBY INTR SCFW LSTR STBY

SCRV

Scanner motor
(set to '1' to '9')

Scanner motor
(set to '0')

F-6-11

6-8
 Chapter 6

6.5 Controlling the Temperature of the Laser Unit

6.5.1 Controlling the Temperature of the Laser Unit
0008-5049
To ensure the intensity of laser light, a heater and a thermistor are mounted inside the laser unit to control the temperature of the unit.
The area around the laser unit is cooled at all times by means of a cooling fan; the heater is turned on when the temperature falls below a specific level.
Unlike the temperature control mechanism used for the drum, it is used only while the power is on.
If the temperature fails to reach a specific level within a specific period of time after power-on, or a specific level is exceeded, an error code will be indicated
on the control panel.

+24VU
Heater

Laser heater
drive signal
Thermistor
Laser thermistor
signal

+24VU

Cooling fan Semiconductor

drive signal laser
Laser/power supply cooling fan Laser unit
F-6-12

6-9
Chapter 7 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
 Contents

Contents

7.1 Outline of the Image Formation System ........................................................................................................................7-1

7.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 Potential Detection Circuit........................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2.1 Potential Detection Circuit ..............................................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.2 Drum Surface Potential Control.....................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.2 Scanning Lamp Method ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2.1 Primary Current Control .................................................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.2.2 Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp .............................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.2.3 Controlling the Developing Bias.....................................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.2.4 Controlling the Potential .................................................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.3 Laser Control Method .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.3.1 Controlling the Grid Bias ................................................................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.3.2 Correcting the Grid Bias .................................................................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.3.3 Controlling the Laser Output ..........................................................................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.3.4 Correcting the Laser Output............................................................................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.3.5 Controlling the Developing Bias.....................................................................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.3.6 Controlling the Potential .................................................................................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.3.7 Controlling the Potential in Transparency Mode ............................................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.3.8 Controlling the Potential for Environment Mode ...........................................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.4 Correcting the Surface Potential of the Drum.............................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.2.4.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-5
7.2.4.2 Temperature Correction ..................................................................................................................................................................................7-5
7.2.4.3 Resistance Correction (of the photosensitive drum) .......................................................................................................................................7-5
7.3 Ensuring the Production of Stable Images.....................................................................................................................7-6
7.3.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-6
7.3.2 Contrast Potential Control............................................................................................................................................................ 7-6
7.3.2.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-6
7.3.2.2 Initial Contrast Potential Control ....................................................................................................................................................................7-6
7.3.2.3 Run-to-Run Contrast Potential Correction Control.........................................................................................................................................7-7
7.3.3 Potential Control for Non-Initial RotationCorrection.................................................................................................................. 7-7
7.3.3.1 Potential Control for Non-Initial RotationCorrection .....................................................................................................................................7-7
7.3.4 Dark-Area Potential Attenuation Measurement Control ............................................................................................................. 7-8
7.3.4.1 Dark-Area Potential Attenuation Measurement Control.................................................................................................................................7-8
7.3.5 Stabilizing the Development Characteristics (SALT) ................................................................................................................. 7-8
7.3.5.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-8
7.3.5.2 Correcting the Contrast Potential ....................................................................................................................................................................7-8
7.3.5.3 Correcting the Gradation.................................................................................................................................................................................7-9
7.3.5.4 Correcting the Maximum Density...................................................................................................................................................................7-9
7.3.5.5 Correcting the Toner Density..........................................................................................................................................................................7-9
7.3.6 Stabilizing the Gradation (PASCAL) ........................................................................................................................................ 7-10
7.3.6.1 Stabilizing the Gradation (PASCAL)............................................................................................................................................................7-10
7.3.7 Stabilizing Image ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.7.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-11
7.3.7.2 Correcting the Changes in the Environment .................................................................................................................................................7-11
7.3.7.3 Correcting the Image density (maximum density control) ...........................................................................................................................7-11
7.3.7.4 Correcting the Image Gradations ..................................................................................................................................................................7-11
7.4 Primary Charging .........................................................................................................................................................7-12
7.4.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-12
7.4.1.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-12
 Contents

7.4.2 Controlling the Primary Corona Charging................................................................................................................................. 7-12

7.4.2.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4.2.2 Turning the Primary Corona Current On/Off ............................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4.2.3 Controlling the Primary Corona Current to a Specific Current Level .......................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4.2.4 Controlling the Primary Current Level ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4.3 Controlling the Grid Bias........................................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4.3.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4.3.2 Controlling the Grid Bias Level.................................................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4.3.3 Controlling the Grid Bias to a Specific Voltage Level ................................................................................................................................. 7-12
7.4.3.4 Detecting a Fault in the Grid Bias ................................................................................................................................................................ 7-13
7.4.4 Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias .......................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.4.4.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.4.4.2 Turning On/Off the Primary Charging Roller Bias ...................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.4.4.3 Controlling the Primary Charging Roller DC Bias to a Specific Voltage Level .......................................................................................... 7-13
7.4.4.4 Controlling the Primary Charging Roller AC Bias to a Specific Current Level .......................................................................................... 7-13
7.4.4.5 Switching the Voltage Level of the Primary Roller Bias (cleaning mode control) ...................................................................................... 7-13
7.4.4.6 Switching the Voltage Level of the Primary Charging Roller (APVC control) ........................................................................................... 7-13
7.4.4.7 Controlling the AC Bias and DC Bias of the Primary Charging Roller ....................................................................................................... 7-13
7.4.4.8 Temperature Correction for the DC Bias...................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.4.4.9 Humidity Correction for the AC Bias........................................................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.5 Blank Exposure ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.5.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-15
7.5.1.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.5.2 Using the Blank Exposure Lamp ............................................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.5.2.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.5.2.2 Controlling the Activation in Reduce Mode................................................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.5.2.3 Controlling the Activation in Direct Mode................................................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.5.2.4 Controlling the Activation in Sheet/Original Frame Erase Mode ................................................................................................................ 7-15
7.5.2.5 Controlling the Activation in Book Frame Erase Mode ............................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.5.2.6 Controlling the Activation in Hole Image Erase Mode ................................................................................................................................ 7-15
7.5.2.7 Controlling the Activation in AE (potential measurement type) .................................................................................................................. 7-16
7.5.3 Using the Pre-Exposure Lamp .................................................................................................................................................. 7-16
7.5.3.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.5.3.2 Leading Edge/Trailing Edge/Margin/Sheet-to-Sheet ................................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.5.3.3 Preventing Adhesion of Toner in Non-Image Areas in Reduce Mode......................................................................................................... 7-16
7.6 Development ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.6.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-18
7.6.1.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.6.2 Developing Assembly................................................................................................................................................................ 7-18
7.6.2.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.6.2.2 Type 1 (all-in-one type) ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-18
7.6.2.3 Type 2 (double-unit separation type)............................................................................................................................................................ 7-19
7.6.2.4 Type 3 (3-unit separation type)..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-19
7.6.2.5 Type 4 (4-unit separation type)..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.6.2.6 Type 5 (5-unit Sseparation type) .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-20
7.6.3 Arrangement of the Developing Assembly Inside a Color Copier ............................................................................................ 7-20
7.6.3.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.6.3.2 Type 1 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.6.3.3 Type 2 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.6.3.4 Type 3 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.6.3.5 Type 4 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.6.4 Mechanisms Around the Developing Assemblies and methods of Engagement ...................................................................... 7-22
7.6.4.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-22
7.6.4.2 Type 1 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-22
7.6.4.3 Type 2 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-24
7.6.4.4 Type 3 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-26
7.6.4.5 Type 4 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-26
7.6.5 Developing Bias......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-27
7.6.5.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-27
7.6.5.2 AC Bias......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-27
 Contents

7.6.5.3 DC Bias .........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-27

7.6.5.4 Double Blank Pulse.......................................................................................................................................................................................7-27
7.6.5.5 Developing Bias Control Circuit...................................................................................................................................................................7-27
7.6.5.6 Controlling the DC Bias (preventing stray toner) .........................................................................................................................................7-28
7.6.6 Detecting the Level of Toner ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-28
7.6.6.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-28
7.6.6.2 Antenna Sensor .............................................................................................................................................................................................7-28
7.6.6.3 Piezoelectric Sensor ......................................................................................................................................................................................7-29
7.6.6.4 Photo Sensor..................................................................................................................................................................................................7-29
7.6.7 Detecting the Concentration of Toner........................................................................................................................................ 7-30
7.6.7.1 Detecting the Concentration of Toner in a Color Copier ..............................................................................................................................7-30
7.6.7.2 Detecting the Concentration of Color Toner.................................................................................................................................................7-30
7.6.7.3 Detecting the Concentration of Bk Toner .....................................................................................................................................................7-31
7.6.7.4 Detecting the Concentration of Mono Color Toner ......................................................................................................................................7-32
7.7 Transfer Unit ................................................................................................................................................................7-33
7.7.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-33
7.7.1.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-33
7.7.2 Transfer Guide Type .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-33
7.7.2.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-33
7.7.2.2 Controlling the Transfer Guide Bias .............................................................................................................................................................7-33
7.7.3 Transfer Drum Type .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-33
7.7.3.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-33
7.7.3.2 Point of Paper Attraction...............................................................................................................................................................................7-34
7.7.3.3 Controlling the Locking Cam Inside the Transfer Drum ..............................................................................................................................7-36
7.7.3.4 Cleaning the Transfer Drum Sheet................................................................................................................................................................7-38
7.7.4 Transfer Belt Type ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-39
7.7.4.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-39
7.7.4.2 Moving the Transfer Blade to and Away from the Point of Attraction ........................................................................................................7-40
7.7.4.3 Detecting the Transfer Belt at Home Position ..............................................................................................................................................7-41
7.7.4.4 Point of Attraction.........................................................................................................................................................................................7-41
7.7.4.5 Correcting Displacement of the Transfer Belt ..............................................................................................................................................7-43
7.7.4.6 Movement of the Transfer Belt Lifter ...........................................................................................................................................................7-44
7.7.4.7 Cleaning the Transfer Belt ............................................................................................................................................................................7-44
7.7.5 Intermediate Transfer DrumType .............................................................................................................................................. 7-47
7.7.5.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-47
7.7.5.2 Controlling the Secondary Transfer Belt Locking Mechanism ....................................................................................................................7-48
7.7.5.3 Controlling the ITD Cleaning Roller ............................................................................................................................................................7-48
7.7.6 Charging for Static Attraction.................................................................................................................................................... 7-49
7.7.6.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-49
7.7.6.2 Turning On and Off the Attraction Current ..................................................................................................................................................7-49
7.7.6.3 Switching the Levels of Attraction Current ..................................................................................................................................................7-49
7.7.6.4 Controlling the Attraction Current to a Specific Level.................................................................................................................................7-49
7.7.7 Pre-Transfer Charging ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-49
7.7.7.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-49
7.7.7.2 Turning On and Off the Pre-Transfer Corona Current..................................................................................................................................7-49
7.7.7.3 Controlling the Level of the Pre-Transfer Corona Current ...........................................................................................................................7-49
7.7.7.4 Controlling the Pre-Transfer Corona Current to a Specific Level (DC component) ....................................................................................7-49
7.7.7.5 Preventing DC Component Overcurrent for the Pre-Transfer Corona Current ............................................................................................7-50
7.7.8 Transfer Charging ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7-50
7.7.8.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-50
7.7.8.2 Controlling the Transfer Corona Charging ...................................................................................................................................................7-50
7.7.8.3 Controlling the Transfer Roller Charging .....................................................................................................................................................7-50
7.7.8.4 Controlling the Transfer Blade Charging......................................................................................................................................................7-52
7.7.9 Controlling the Static Eliminating Mechanism.......................................................................................................................... 7-52
7.7.9.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-52
7.7.9.2 Controlling the Static Eliminating Current ...................................................................................................................................................7-52
7.8 Separation.....................................................................................................................................................................7-54
7.8.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-54
7.8.1.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-54
7.8.2 Static Separation Method ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-54
 Contents

7.8.2.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-54

7.8.3 Static Eliminator Separation Method (curvature separation)..................................................................................................... 7-55
7.8.3.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-55
7.8.3.2 Turning On and Off the Static Eliminator Bias and Switching Its Levels ................................................................................................... 7-55
7.8.3.3 Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias to a Specific Level of Current ......................................................................................................... 7-55
7.8.3.4 Switching the Level of Current for the Static Eliminator Bias..................................................................................................................... 7-55
7.8.3.5 Preventing Faulty Separation of Thin Paper................................................................................................................................................. 7-55
7.8.4 Separation Claw/Static Separation Method ............................................................................................................................... 7-55
7.8.4.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-55
7.8.4.2 Separation Claw/Push-Up Roll Separation Method ..................................................................................................................................... 7-55
7.8.5 Curvature Separation/Static Separation Method........................................................................................................................ 7-56
7.8.5.1 Curvature Separation/Static Separation Method........................................................................................................................................... 7-56
7.9 Drum Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-57
7.9.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-57
7.9.1.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-57
7.9.2 Monitoring the Level of Waste Toner ....................................................................................................................................... 7-57
7.9.2.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-57
7.9.2.2 Type 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-57
7.9.2.3 Type 2 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-57
7.9.2.4 Type 3 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-58
7.9.3 Moving Waste Toner ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-59
7.9.3.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-59
7.9.3.2 Type 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-59
7.9.3.3 Type 2 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-60
7.9.3.4 Type 3 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-60
7.10 Others ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-62
7.10.1 Cleaning the Charging Wire/Charging Roller ......................................................................................................................... 7-62
7.10.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-62
7.10.1.2 Cleaning the Charging Wire ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-62
7.10.1.3 Controlling the Charging Wire Cleaning Motor......................................................................................................................................... 7-62
7.10.1.4 Detecting an Error in Cleaning the Charging Wire .................................................................................................................................... 7-62
7.10.1.5 Cleaning the Primary Charging Roller ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-62
7.10.2 Post-Cleaning Charging ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-63
7.10.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-63
7.10.2.2 Turning On and Off the Post-Cleaning Corona Current............................................................................................................................. 7-63
7.10.2.3 Controlling the Post-Cleaning Corona Current to a Specific Level ........................................................................................................... 7-63
7.10.3 Drum Heater............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-63
7.10.3.1 Drum Heater ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-63
7.10.4 Drum Cartridge Memory ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-64
7.10.4.1 Drum Cartridge Memory ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-64
 Chapter 7

7.1 Outline of the Image Formation System

7.1.1 Outline
7.1.1.1 Outline
0008-5050
The image formation system serves to form a static image on the photosensitive drum using charges from the primary charging assembly, and then turn
the latent image into a visible image on paper using toner. The image formation system involves various control mechanisms as described below. For an
outline of its various processes, see "Image Formation".
The following mechanisms are used in the formation of a latent image:
- Drum Surface Potential Control
It is usually used in a black-and-white machine and involved in actually forming a static image.
- Image Stabilization
It is usually used in a color machine and is involved in processing data for the formation of a latent image.

MEMO:
The following abbreviations are often used in reference to drum surface potential control and image stabilization:

T-7-1

VD: target dark-area potential of the photosensitive drum (i.e., potential of the area
not exposed to light).
VD1: measurement of the dark-area potential of the photosensitive drum.
VL: target light-area potential of the photosensitive drum (i.e., potential of the area
exposed to light).
VL1: measurement of the light-area potential of the photosensitive drum.
VL2: measurement of the light-area potential for a developing bias in the case of drum
surface potential control (i.e., light-area potential measured to determine a
developing bias).
VG: primary charging assembly grid bias (i.e., voltage applied to the grid).
VDC: developing bias.
Vback: fog-eliminating voltage (i.e., voltage applied to determine a developing bias).

7.1.2 Potential Detection Circuit

7.1.2.1 Potential Detection Circuit
0008-5051
Type 1
The potential detection circuit is used for drum surface potential control and image stabilization, and is configured as shown in the following figure (block
diagram).
An electric charge appropriate to the drum surface potential is induced by an electric line of force across the terminals of the sensor and is turned into an
AC voltage as the chopper opens and closes. It is then amplified by the amplification circuit inside the sensor and sent to the potential measurement PCB,
which converts the measurement of the drum surface potential into a signal and sends it to the control PCB. Using the signal, the control PCB controls the
drum surface potential.

Sensor cover

Potential Control PCB

Electrode measurement
Photosensitive PCB
drum

2.5 mm (approx.) Chopper

Cross Section of the Sensor Unit

F-7-1

7-1
 Chapter 7

7.2 Drum Surface Potential Control

7.2.1 Outline
7.2.1.1 Outline
0008-5052
A change in a static image is one of the major factors which significantly affect copy quality, and a static image tends to go through a change on account
of the following:
- Change in the sensitivity of the drum.
- Change in the amount of charge from the primary charging assembly (during corona charging).
- Change in the intensity of light from the scanning lamp (if used).
- Change in the characteristic of toner.
These changes are brought about by the site environment (e.g., temperature, humidity) or deterioration or soiling of related parts.
The drum surface potential control mechanism is designed to ensure stable static images in the presence of these factors.
The drum surface potential mechanism uses any of the following methods:

1. Scanning Lamp Method

It is used in an analog copier, and mainly controls primary charging, scanning lamp, and developing bias.
2. Laser Method
It is used in a digital copier and mainly controls primary charging/grid, laser, and developing bias.

The term "drum surface control" may be defined as follows:

It is a means of control in which a potential sensor (inside a copier) is used to measure the dark-area potential (VD) and the light-area primary potential
(VL1) of the drum surface; the result of measurement is then used to attain a specific target potential.
Changes in development are mostly caused by changes in toner characteristics brought about by the site environment (temperature, humidity) or
deterioration or soiling of related parts.
To ensure that images remain as stable as possible in the presence of these factors, the light-area potential (VL2) is measured, and an appropriate DC
component of the developing bias is determined based on the measurement.
7.2.2 Scanning Lamp Method
7.2.2.1 Primary Current Control
0008-5053
To measure the dark-area potential (VD) for the first time after the power switch is turned on, a reference current (as determined by the setting stored in
ROM) is fed to the primary charging assembly, and the drum surface potential is measured using the potential sensor..
The control PCB compares the measurement taken of the drum surface potential against the target potential; if the drum surface potential has deviated from
the target potential, the primary charging level control signal generated by the control PCB is corrected.
As a result, the corrected current is applied by the high-voltage transformer to the primary charging assembly. In subsequent measurements, the previously
corrected reading is stored in memory and is used as the reference current, thereby reducing the first copy time.
A series of measurement and correction is repeated as many times as specified so that the dark-area potential (VD) is as close to the target potential as
possible.
7.2.2.2 Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp
0008-5054
To measure the light-area potential (VL1) for the first time after the power switch is turned on, the reference activation voltage (stored in ROM) is applied
to the scanning lamp.
The light of the scanning lamp hits the standard white plate, and the light reflected by the plate is projected to the drum. The surface potential of the area
of the drum to which the light is projected is measured by the potential sensor, and the result is sent to the control PCB.
In response, the control PCB compares the measurement against the target value, and if it finds a deviation, it corrects the intensity adjustment signal it
generates.
The second and subsequent measurements are executed using the value most recently corrected as the reference voltage, thereby reducing the first copy
time.

Copy Start key ON to SCFW or AER

INTR CNTR1 CNTR2

Measurement by VD VD VD VD VD VD VD VD VL1 VL1 VL1 VL1 VL1 VL1 VL1 VL2

potential sensor
Reference Correction Final
voltage voltage voltage
Scanning lamp
Reference Correction Final
current current current
Primary charging

F-7-2

7.2.2.3 Controlling the Developing Bias

0008-5055
The surface potential of the drum occurring when the scanning lamp is turned on based on the last intensity adjustment signal of VL1 control is measured
to decide on a light-area potential (VL2) for the developing bias.
Based on the measurement, the control PCB varies the developing bias DC level control signal to ultimately control the DC bias applied to the developing
cylinder by the high-voltage transformer.
7.2.2.4 Controlling the Potential
0008-5056
The operation called "potential control rotation" (CNTR) is not executed for each copying operation; it is initiated when a specific condition exists as shown

7-2
 Chapter 7

in the following Tables:

EX: Timing of Potential Control (NP6750)

T-7-2

Mode Timing of potential control

Text mode - Once at power-on.
- Once for the first copy made between 10 and 60 min after power-on.
- Once for the first copy made 60 min or later.
Photo mode Once for the first copy in photo mode after power-on.

EX: Timing of Potential Control (NP6085)

T-7-3

Setting Power-on to less than 10 10 min or later to less than 60 60 min and later
min min
Copying ratio Once at power-on Once for the first copy Once for the first copy
64% to 200%
Copying ratio Once for the first copy Once for the first copy Once for the first copy
50% to 63%
CFF in use Once for the first copy Once for the first copy Once for the first copy

7.2.3 Laser Control Method

7.2.3.1 Controlling the Grid Bias
0008-5060
As part of the operation executed to control the grid bias, the dark-area potential (VD) of the drum occurring when the grid bias (VG) of the primary
charging assembly is set to a specific level of voltage is measured. The dark-area potential (VD) is measured, on the other hand, in terms of the surface
potential measured by the potential sensor when the laser remains off.
EX:

T-7-4

VG1 VG2 VG3

-300V -500V -700V

To measure the surface potential, the following is initiated: the grid bias is set to VG1, and VD1 occurring at that time is measured; likewise, the grid bias
is set to VG2 and VG3, and VD2 and VD3 are measured. Based on the measurements of VD1, VD2, and VD3, a charging characteristic curve is prepared.

VD3
VD2

VD1

500V 600V 700V

Grid bias
F-7-3

This way, the grid bias used to attain the target dark-area potential (VD) is obtained.
7.2.3.2 Correcting the Grid Bias
0008-5061
If the target dark-area potential (VD) cannot be attained after the execution of grid bias control, grid bias correction will be executed.
To measure the dark-area potential (VD) for the first time, a control voltage (obtained as the result of grid bias control) is applied to the grid of the primary
charging assembly, and the surface potential of the drum is measured by the potential sensor.
The control PCB compares the measurement of the surface potential against the target potential; if it finds a deviation, it corrects the grid bias control signal
it generates, causing the high-voltage transformer to apply the corrected voltage to the grid of the primary charging assembly.
For the second and subsequent measurements, the most recently corrected value is used for the reference voltage, thereby reducing the first copy time.
This series of measurement and correction is repeated as many times as specified to bring the dark-area potential (VD) closer to the target value.

7-3
 Chapter 7

VD1 VD3
Target VD
VD2
VD-NG
F-7-4

7.2.3.3 Controlling the Laser Output

0008-5063
As part of the operation executed to control the laser output, the light-area potential of the drum occurring when the laser output is set to a specific level is
measured. The light-area potential (VL) is measured by the potential sensor.
The measurement is started by causing the laser to generate the reference output (stored in ROM), and VL1 occurring at this time is measured. Likewise,
VL2 and VL3 are measured by varying the laser output.
The values of VL1, VL2, and VL3 are used to prepare a charging characteristic curve.

VL3
VL2

VL1

Reference-10% -20%
output
Laser output
F-7-5

This way, the laser output that enables the target light-area potential (VL1) is identified.
7.2.3.4 Correcting the Laser Output
0008-5066
If the target light-area potential (VL) cannot be attained after the execution of laser output control, laser output correction will be executed.
To measure the light-area potential (VL) for the first time, the laser is caused to generate a specific output (obtained by laser output control), and the surface
potential of the drum is measured by the potential sensor.
The control PCB compares the measurement of the surface potential against the target value; if it finds a deviation, it corrects the laser control signal it
generates, thereby causing the laser to generate the corrected output.
The second and subsequent measurements are executed using the most recently corrected value as the reference voltage.
This series of measurement and correction is repeated so as to bring the light-area potential (VL) closer to the target value.

VD1 VD3
Target VL
VD2
VD-NG
F-7-6

7.2.3.5 Controlling the Developing Bias

0008-5071
The developing bias (VDC) is computed based on the dark-area potential (VD) determined by grid bias control.
developing bias (VDC) = VD - Vback
Based on the result of the computation, the control PCB controls the developing bias DC level control signal, thereby controlling the DC bias applied to
the developing cylinder by the high-voltage transformer.
7.2.3.6 Controlling the Potential
0008-5073
Potential control rotation (CNTR) is executed only when appropriate conditions exist, not for each copying run.
7.2.3.7 Controlling the Potential in Transparency Mode
0008-5074
To prevent excess deposits of toner in high density areas on a transparency, the laser output is controlled to reduce the contrast, thereby preventing
detachment of toner after transfer.
In addition to the normal mechanism used to control the laser output, the potential is controlled to determine the laser output for transparency mode.
In practice, the laser output is controlled so that a specific target light-area potential for transparency (kVL) may be attained to determine the laser output
for transparency mode.
7.2.3.8 Controlling the Potential for Environment Mode
0008-5075
If charging remains the same while humidity fluctuates, the following effects can be considered:
Low humidity: The resistance of paper increases, which in turn will lower the transfer efficiency, ultimately reducing the density.
High humidity: Paper becomes moist and, as a result, the transfer efficiency will rise to increase the density.
To prevent these effects, the laser output and the developing bias are corrected based on the humidity readings of the environment sensor.

7-4
 Chapter 7

7.2.4 Correcting the Surface Potential of the Drum

7.2.4.1 Outline
0008-5076
The following are executed to ensure that the surface potential of the drum remains at an optimum level against changes occurring over time:
1. Temperature correction
2. Resistance correction (of the photosensitive drum)
7.2.4.2 Temperature Correction
0008-5079
The primary charging bias voltage is varied to correct the surface potential of the drum, which tends to fluctuate in response to the changes in temperature
inside the copier. The thermistor mounted inside the copier is used to monitor the temperature, and the data from the thermistor is sent to the control PCB.
Using the data, the control PCB computes and determines the primary charging bias (DC).
7.2.4.3 Resistance Correction (of the photosensitive drum)
0008-5080
The photosensitive drum may be considered as a single resistor, and its resistance tends to lower over time, requiring the following corrective measures:
The surface of the photosensitive drum is changed to a uniform potential using a specific voltage (DC + AC). While the surface is being charged, the
application current is sampled to find out the resistance of the drum. Based on the result, the density corrective curve is varied to enable the production of
stable images. This mechanism is referred to as the "selection of an auto density correction curve" (AGC).
The timing at which detection is made, in passing, is as follows:
- During initial rotation after the main power switch is turned on
- During initial rotation after the front door is opened and closed (except for removal of a jam)
- During initial rotation after the control panel power switch is turned on
- During last rotation after making 500 copies/prints

7-5
 Chapter 7

7.3 Ensuring the Production of Stable Images

7.3.1 Outline
7.3.1.1 Outline
0008-5081
Changes in static images or development characteristics may be cited as major causes of changes in copy images. In turn, changes in static images are most
often caused by the following factors.
- Changes in the sensitivity of the drum (VL)
- Changes in the degree of charging by the primary charging assembly
The development characteristics are affected most by changes in the characteristics of toner, caused by changes in the environment (site of installation) or
deterioration or soiling of related parts.
To ensure the stable reproduction of images in the presence of these factors, the following is performed as needed:
1. Contrast potential control
2. Run-to-run contrast potential control
3. Non-nitial rotationpotential control
4. Dark-area potential attenuation measurement control
5. Development characteristic stabilization (SALT)
6. Gradation characteristic stabilization (PASCAL)
7. Image stabilization correction
7.3.2 Contrast Potential Control
7.3.2.1 Outline
0008-5085
In contrast potential control, the potential sensor mounted inside the copier is used to measure the dark-area potential (VD) and the light-area potential
(VL1) of the drum; and level control is executed for the primary charging assembly and the grid and developing biases using the measurements.
7.3.2.2 Initial Contrast Potential Control
0008-5086
a. Outline
Contrast potential control is executed at power-on to control the developing bias and the grid bias of the primary charging assembly.

b. Drum Surface Potential Measurement

The dark-area potential (VD) and the light-area potential (VL) occurring when the grid bias (VG) of the primary charging assembly is set to a specific level
of voltage are measured; the dark-area potential (VD) is measured when the laser is off, while the light-area potential (VL) is measured when the laser is
on (in terms of the surface potential of the drum using a potential sensor).
The measurements taken of the surface potential may be checked in service mode (indicated in the display).
EX:

T-7-5

VG1 VG2 VG3

-300V -500V -700V

To measure the surface potential, the grid bias is first set to VG1, and VD1/VL1 occurring as a result is measured. The grid bias is then set to VG2, and
VD2/VL2 is measured; likewise, the grid bias is set to VG3, and VD3/VL3 is measured.
Using the measurements VD1 through VD3/VL1 through VL3, a VD/VL graph is prepared.

Drum surface
potential VD

VD3

VD2

VD1 VL

VL3
VL2
VL1

VG1 VG2 VG3 Grid bias

F-7-7

c. Setting the Grid Bias and the Developing Bias

The DC component of the grid bias and the developing bias is determined using the VD/VL obtained from drum surface potential control and the target
contrast potential obtained as a result of auto gradation correction control in user mode or from the environment sensor.
VL: potential of the image area (exposed to the light of the laser)
VD: potential of the non-image area (not exposed to the light of the laser)
To use for the removal of fogging, a line is drawn in a graph indicating points obtained by computations on VD and Vback so that a specific developing
bias DC component (VDC) may be identified.

7-6
 Chapter 7

The contrast potential is found between VDC and VL lines of the completed graph.

(V) VD
Deduction of specific
Vback value
VDC

Surface potential
Contrast potential

VL

F-7-8

A point is identified in the graph, and it is used as a reference in finding the target values for the grid bias and the developing bias.
In the case of the following figure, VDC and VG will be the target values.
Target developing bias

VDC
VDC

VL

VG
Target grid bias
F-7-9

7.3.2.3 Run-to-Run Contrast Potential Correction Control

0008-5089
The following corrective mechanisms are executed to enable correction against fluctuation in settings over time after optimum grid and developing biases
have been set:

a. Target Contrast Potential Correction by Auto Gradation Correction (PASCAL)

In this method, a target contrast potential is first obtained while auto gradation correction is being executed in user mode. Then, the environment sensor
mounted inside the copier is used to measure the temperature and humidity of the area around the developing assembly to make up for the changes in the
environment (affecting the characteristics of the developer and, consequently, the density of images).
The resulting measurement is used to correct the target contrast potential each time the Start key is pressed.

b. Dark-Area Potential (VD) Correction

In this method, the dark-area potential (VD) is first measured using the grid bias (VG) set as a result of initial potential control. The difference between
the measurement and the VD from initial potential control is computed and used to correct the target grid bias (VG) and the target developing bias (VDC).

c. Target Contrast Potential Correction Using the Environment Sensor

In this method, the environment (temperature/humidity) around the developing assembly is measured to correct the target contrast potential.
Changes in the environment around the developing assembly change the characteristics of the developer, affecting the density of images. The environment
(temperature/humidity) around the developing assembly is measured by the environment sensor to correct the target contrast potential.
7.3.3 Potential Control for Non-Initial RotationCorrection
7.3.3.1 Potential Control for Non-Initial RotationCorrection
0008-5090
In most past machines, initial rotation is executed in response to a press on the Start key to remove the residual charges from the drum surface, and the
surface potential is evened out before starting printing operation. To reduce the first print time in cassette pickup mode, some new machines start printing
operation without initial rotation.
To compensate for the omission, potential control for non-initial rotation correction is always executed at time of power-on, and the data collected from
this control mechanism is used when making the first print (pickup from the cassette).

MEMO:
When printing operation is started without initial rotation, the surface potential for the first rotation of the drum and that of the second rotation will be
different, possibly causing the first color of the second print to differ from the first color of the first print in terms of image density in continuous mode.

7-7
 Chapter 7

7.3.4 Dark-Area Potential Attenuation Measurement Control

7.3.4.1 Dark-Area Potential Attenuation Measurement Control
0008-5091
The potential created by primary charging on the photosensitive drum tends to become subject to attenuation in dark areas, possibly causing "ogging" or
"arrier adhesion." In practice, the degree of attenuation occurring in the voltage applied during primary charging is obtained at a point of development, and
the result is used as feedback for controlling of the developing bias.
For instance, the grid bias (VG) of the primary charging assembly is set to +500 and +700 V for the first rotation, and then measurements are taken as
follows:
Dark-area potential (VD3, VD4) for first rotation: when the laser is off.
Light-area potential (VL3, VL4) for first rotation: when the laser is on.
The potential of the same location as for the first rotation is then measured for the second rotation by turning off the pre-exposure lamp, primary charging
assembly, and laser:
Dark-area potential (VD5, VD6) for second rotation: when the laser is off.
Light-area potential (VL5, VL6) for second rotation: when the laser is on.
Thereafter, the measurements taken for the first rotation and the second rotation are compared, and the degree of dark-area attenuation is obtained from
the difference (= VD3 - VD5; = VL3 - VL5; = VD4 - VD6; = VL4 - VL6), and is used to correct the developing bias.
7.3.5 Stabilizing the Development Characteristics (SALT)
7.3.5.1 Outline
0008-5097
The density of images changes because of deterioration of the developer, deterioration of the photosensitive drum, or changes in the environment.
The density of a density pattern formed on the photosensitive drum is measured by a sensor (SALT), and the result is used for the following:
1. Contrast potential correction
2. Gradation correction
3. Toner density correction
The SALT sensor is mounted at the location indicated in the following figure.

Density pattern
Photosensitive drum

Fulcrum

Photodiode for
measuring
reflected light
LED

Photodiode for SALT sensor

measuring Shutter solenoid
direct light Shutter
F-7-10

7.3.5.2 Correcting the Contrast Potential

0008-5103
The light reflected by the toner image is read by the SALT sensor, and the measurement is used to compute the density.
If the computed density is higher than the initial setting, the contrast potential is reduced; if it is lower, the potential is increased by way of correction.

7-8
 Chapter 7

Toner density Toner density

Measured
Initial density Initial
setting setting

Vcont Vcont
Contrast potential Contrast potential
F-7-11

7.3.5.3 Correcting the Gradation

0008-5104
A halftone image consisting of multiple gradations is actually developed for each color, and the density correction is performed so that the laser output
will mach the density of toner on the drum.
1. Using the target contrast potential obtained after correction, the grid bias and developing bias DC components are computed once again.
2. An M toner image is developed using different halftone densities, and these densities are measured by the SALT sensor.
3. The density processing circuit of the control PCB is controlled based on the identified gradation characteristics.
4. Steps 2 and 3 above are repeated for each toner (C, Y, Bk).
7.3.5.4 Correcting the Maximum Density
0008-5105
A solid black image created at the maximum density is actually developed, and density correction is performed so that the laser output will match the
density of toner on the drum.
For the flow of correction, see "Correcting the Gradation."
7.3.5.5 Correcting the Toner Density
0008-5107
Toner is supplied from the hopper based on the measurements taken of toner images. (The density of Y, M, and C toners is measured by the color toner
density sensor with reference to the toner on the developing cylinder.) At the end of copying operation, the SALT sensor is used to measure the toner image
on the photosensitive drum to ultimately determine the "density of toner."

Control PCB

Color toner
density sensor
Image density Hopper
detection
Developing
cylinder

Photosensitive
drum

SALT sensor
F-7-12

The following figure shows the flow of measurement. The supply operation is performed each time the density measurement falls below a specific level.

7-9
 Chapter 7

Copy Start key ON

Detects the density of the toner on

1st copy the developing cylinder (color toner
density sensor)

Detects the density of the toner on

2nd copy the developing cylinder (color toner
density sensor)
Detects the density of the
toner on the drum (SALT
sensor)
END

F-7-13

7.3.6 Stabilizing the Gradation (PASCAL)

7.3.6.1 Stabilizing the Gradation (PASCAL)
0008-5108
A test print of a predetermined pattern is generated and is used as an original for reading to find out the density and gradation characteristics for control of
image processing.
In practice, a test print is generated in user mode, and the density of the test print is read by the CCD of the reader unit. A contrast potential is obtained
based on the density data of the test print, and the characteristics of the actual gradations are checked against the gradation density data of the test print.
Ultimately, the following correction is imposed to realize ideal gradation characteristics:
1. Correction of laser output
2. Correction of gradations in the image processing block

Image density

1.7
Actual gradation
characteristics

Ideal gradation
characteristics

0 255
Laser output
F-7-14

The following is a simple example of the flow of correction:

1. In user mode, auto gradation correction test print 1 (halftone or solid patch; Figure 5-17) is generated.
2. The output (i.e., test print 1) is set in the reader unit, and the solid image is read.
Using the resulting data, a contrast potential is determined.
3. In user mode, auto gradation correction test print 2 (64 gradations for each color) is generated. At this time, the contrast potential determined in step 2
above is used.
4. The output (i.e., test print 2) is read by the reader.
AT this time, graph indicating the output value and the read value is prepared (Figure 5-14), and a correction value is determined so as to enable ideal
gradation characteristics.
EX. Test Print 1
Halftone output
by YMCK

Bk solid
Y solid
C solid
M solid

F-7-15

7-10
 Chapter 7

EX. Test Print 2

00
M C Y Bk

M C Y Bk
FF

F-7-16

7.3.7 Stabilizing Image

7.3.7.1 Outline
0008-5110
In general, changes in copy images are caused by changes in the environment, photosensitive drum, or toner occurring over time.
To ensure the stable reproduction of images in the presence of these factors, the following is performed:
1. Correcting changes in the environment
2. Correcting the image density
3. Correcting the image gradation
7.3.7.2 Correcting the Changes in the Environment
0008-5111
The control PCB identifies the environment of the site of installation based on the copier inside temperature/humidity detection signal from the temperature
sensor/humidity sensor, and it performs the following to ensure that the images are of optimum quality:
- Controlling the secondary transfer bias and the ITD cleaning bias
- Turning on/off the separation static eliminating bias
- Controlling the density target level during image density correction
For instance, the change in the environment is corrected as follows:
- Before starting image density correction
- Every 30 min after the end of image density correction
7.3.7.3 Correcting the Image density (maximum density control)
0008-5112
The control PCB uses the environment data obtained from the correction of changes in the environment to form a density detection pattern for each color
suited to the environment on the intermediate transfer drum. Then, the control PCB checks the density detection pattern using the density sensor to
determine the optimum developing bias and the optimum primary charging bias used to ensure a specific density for each color.
For instance, image density correction is performed as follows:
- After the end of environment correction control at power-on
- After making a specific number of copies
- After the end of power save mode
- When the toner cartridge has been taken out and then set back
- When the drum cartridge has been replaced
- When an appreciable change has been identified in the environment in relation to environment correction
7.3.7.4 Correcting the Image Gradations
0008-5113
The control PCB forms a density detection pattern on the intermediate transfer drum using the optimum developing bias and the optimum primary charging
bias determined as a result of image density correction and based on the image data from the image processing block or the printer board.
Then, the control PCB checks the density detection pattern using the density sensor, and sends the data to the image processing block or the printer board,
which in turn executes gradation correction to ensure that ideal halftone images are obtained.
Image gradation correction is executed after image density correction in response to commands from the control PCB or the printer board.

7-11
 Chapter 7

7.4 Primary Charging

7.4.1 Outline
7.4.1.1 Outline
0008-5114
Primary charging may be any of two types: primary corona charging or primary roller charging. The control mechanisms associated with primary charging
include corona current control, grid bias control, and charging roller bias control.
7.4.2 Controlling the Primary Corona Charging
7.4.2.1 Outline
0008-5116
The circuit used to control primary corona charging has the following functions:
- Turning on/off the primary corona current
- Controlling the primary corona current to a specific current level
- Controlling the level of the primary current
7.4.2.2 Turning the Primary Corona Current On/Off
0008-5117
The output from the high-voltage transformer is turned on/off using the drive signal from the control PCB.
7.4.2.3 Controlling the Primary Corona Current to a Specific Current Level
0008-5120
To eliminate the effects of changes in the environment on the corona charging mechanism, the DC component of the primary charging assembly is
controlled using a sample signal from the secondary side of the DC transformer.
7.4.2.4 Controlling the Primary Current Level
0008-5121
In the case of a machine equipped with a drum surface potential control mechanism, the signal generated by the control PCB to control the primary corona
current is corrected if the drum surface dark-area potential VD obtained by the potential detection PCB differs from the target value. The corrected signal
is converted by the D/A converter circuit into a primary charging level signal, and is sent to the high-voltage transformer, thereby controlling the primary
corona current.
7.4.3 Controlling the Grid Bias
7.4.3.1 Outline
0008-5124
The circuit used to control the grid bias of the primary charging assembly has the following functions:
- Controlling the level of the grid bias
- Controlling the grid bias to a specific voltage
- Detecting a fault in the grid bias
To reduce the soiling on the primary charging wire, some copiers apply a bias (identical to the bias applied to the grid wire) to the shield plate of the primary
charging assembly.
7.4.3.2 Controlling the Grid Bias Level
0008-5126
The grid bias is generated by the high-voltage transformer in response to the grid bias signal from the control PCB.
The grid bias level signal is an analog sig-nal from the control PCB, and a grid voltage suited to the level of the signal is applied to the grid wire of the
primary charging assembly.

Grid bias level signal

8V

16V

0V -900V
Grid bias potential
F-7-17

7.4.3.3 Controlling the Grid Bias to a Specific Voltage Level

0008-5127
The grid bias is controlled to a specific voltage level using a sample signal from the second-ary side of the high-voltage transformer.

7-12
 Chapter 7

7.4.3.4 Detecting a Fault in the Grid Bias

0008-5128
A sample signal is obtained from the secondary side of the high-voltage transformer to de-tect overcurrent.
When the overcurrent detection circuit detects overcurrent occurring as a result of a short circuit in the grid wire, control will be performed to stop the grid
bias.
7.4.4 Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias
7.4.4.1 Outline
0008-5129
The circuit used to control the primary charging roller bias has the following functions:
- Turning on/off the primary charging roller bias
- Controlling the primary charging roller DC bias to a specific voltage level
- Controlling the primary charging roller AC bias to a specific current level
- Switching the voltage level of the primary charging roller (cleaning mode control)
- Controlling the voltage level of the primary charging roller bias
- Controlling the AC bias and the DC bias of the primary charging roller
7.4.4.2 Turning On/Off the Primary Charging Roller Bias
0008-5130
The output of the high-voltage transformer is turned on/off in response to the drive signal from the control PCB.
7.4.4.3 Controlling the Primary Charging Roller DC Bias to a Specific Voltage Level
0008-5131
A sample signal is obtained from the secondary side of the DC transformer to control the primary charging roller DC bias to a specific voltage level.
7.4.4.4 Controlling the Primary Charging Roller AC Bias to a Specific Current Level
0008-5133
A sample signal is obtained from the secondary side of the high-voltage transformer to control the primary charging roller AC bias to a specific current
level.
7.4.4.5 Switching the Voltage Level of the Primary Roller Bias (cleaning mode control)
0008-5139
A bias is applied to the transfer roller to clean the transfer charging roller during initial rotation, while the scanner is moving in reverse, during last rotation,
and when the power is turned on after jam removal. (See "ransfer Charging and Cleaning Bias.")
To increase the efficiency of cleaning by this bias, and also to prevent drum memory caused by it, a bias is also applied to the primary charging roller during
initial rotation and when the scanner is moving in reverse.
7.4.4.6 Switching the Voltage Level of the Primary Charging Roller (APVC control)
0008-5143
In some machines, the light-area potential (VL) ad the dark-area potential (VD) can change owing to the site of installation (temperature, humidity) or the
deterioration, wear, or soiling of associated parts.
To correct such changes, a sample signal is obtained from the secondary side of the DC transformer for automatic control of the application voltage level
of the primary charging roller bias. At the same time, the scanning lamp activation voltage is also corrected (ALVC control) to enable a specific light-area
potential (VL) and dark-area potential (VD).
7.4.4.7 Controlling the AC Bias and DC Bias of the Primary Charging Roller
0008-5148
Some machines apply a DC bias and an AC bias to the primary charging roller to maintain the potential created on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
The DC bias is switched between when an original is being exposed and when the image is processed on paper, thereby preventing adhesion of toner to
the photosensitive drum (com-pared with when an image is being processed on paper, the bias voltage is made higher when an original is being exposed).
7.4.4.8 Temperature Correction for the DC Bias
0008-5151
As the temperature inside the copier increases, the resistance of the photosensitive drum lowers and, ultimately, the charging characteristics will lower. In
the light of this, the DC bias level is corrected in keeping with the changes in temperature, thereby ensuring stable poten-tial.
The temperature inside the copier is monitored by a thermistor, and the DC bias level is raised when the thermistor registers a specific increase in
temperature.

7-13
 Chapter 7

Primary DC bias (V)

High

Reference

Low

15˚C 23˚C 40˚C

Low Machine internal High
temperature
F-7-18

7.4.4.9 Humidity Correction for the AC Bias

0008-5153
The output characteristics of the AC bias change according to the humidity around the photosensitive drum. In a low humidity environment, the charging
efficiency lowers, causing uneven charging and, thereby, requiring a higher current level.
The AC bias level is corrected as shown in Figure the following figure according to the readings of the hu-midity sensor. When the resistance of the drum
surface lowers over time, current tends to flow more easily, requiring lowering of the current level.

Counter reading: 0 to N000 prints Counter reading: N000 up

High
Primary AC bias

Low

Low High Low High

Humidity Humidity
F-7-19

7-14
 Chapter 7

7.5 Blank Exposure

7.5.1 Outline
7.5.1.1 Outline
0008-5196
An analog copier uses one of two types of blank exposure: one which relies on the pre-exposure lamp, and the other which is equipped with a blank
exposure lamp.
In the case of a laser copier, laser light may be used to perform blank exposure.
7.5.2 Using the Blank Exposure Lamp
7.5.2.1 Outline
0008-5197
The lamp may be either a LED array or a tube.
The blank exposure lamp turns on in response to the blank exposure lamp activation signal from the control PCB to prevent excess adhesion of toner to
the photosensitive drum; it is turned on during drum rotation while neither potential control or AE measurement (if the copier uses potential measurement
for AE) is taking place.
In the case of the LED array type, several LEDs at the front and the rear are kept on at all times to prevent the adhesion of toner on the edges of the
photosensitive drum.
7.5.2.2 Controlling the Activation in Reduce Mode
0008-5198
In reduce mode, several LEDs (rear) are turned on to suit the size of paper while the origi-nal is being exposed to black (white) out the non-image area.
At this time, several LEDs at the front are also turned on according to the size of paper.
7.5.2.3 Controlling the Activation in Direct Mode
0008-5199
In direct mode, LEDs at the front and the rear are turned on to suit the size of paper while the original is being exposed to prevent the adhesion of toner in
the non-image areas (blanking).
7.5.2.4 Controlling the Activation in Sheet/Original Frame Erase Mode
0008-5200
In sheet/frame erase mode, LEDs are turned on to prevent the adhesion of toner in widths along the sides of paper (several millimeters wide). The widths,
however, remain the same regardless of the selected reproduction ratio.
In original frame erase mode, LEDs are turned on to prevent the adhesion of toner in widths along the sides of paper (several millimeters wide).
7.5.2.5 Controlling the Activation in Book Frame Erase Mode
0008-5201
In book frame erase mode, LEDs are turned on to prevent the adhesion of toner in widths along the sides of paper (several millimeters wide).
LEDs are also turned on to prevent the adhesion of toner in a width running in the middle of paper.
EX: In the case of 20 mm/2 mm,
20 mm 2 mm (approx.)

2 mm (approx.)

F-7-20

7.5.2.6 Controlling the Activation in Hole Image Erase Mode

0008-5202
This mode is provided to prevent images of holes in originals from appearing on copies. LEDs are turned on so as to prevent the adhesion of toner in a
width running along the side of paper.

7-15
 Chapter 7

EX: In the case of 1 to 30 mm,

Feeding
direction

1-20 mm

F-7-21

7.5.2.7 Controlling the Activation in AE (potential measurement type)

0008-5203
The surface potential of the drum is measured in AE, requiring the blank exposure lamp to remain off. The area of measurement, however, is limited,
allowing blank exposure LEDs outside the area of measurement to remain on.

Blank exposure lamp (LED)

Potential sensor

Photosensitive drum
F-7-22

7.5.3 Using the Pre-Exposure Lamp

7.5.3.1 Outline
0008-5205
A machine not equipped with special LEDs or lamp for blank exposure uses its pre-expo-sure lamp. The light from the pre-exposure lamp is directed to
the photosensitive drum by way of a reflecting plate to black (white) out, i.e., to prevent adhesion of toner, between sheets or in non-image areas on paper.
7.5.3.2 Leading Edge/Trailing Edge/Margin/Sheet-to-Sheet
0008-5206
The CPU on the control PCB turns on and off the blank shutter solenoid drive signal, causing the shutter to open and close, thereby preventing toner from
adhering to the leading edge, trailing edge, margin, or the gap between sheets.
7.5.3.3 Preventing Adhesion of Toner in Non-Image Areas in Reduce Mode
0008-5207
a. Double Slide Shutter Method
The change solenoid is turned off to relay the drive of the lens motor to gears A and B to shift the slide shutters (rear, front) over a distance in keeping with
the ratio of reduction, thereby opening the slit. The light from the pre-exposure lamp is directed to the photosensi-tive drum by way of the reflecting plate
for size blanking.

7-16
 Chapter 7

- Typical Model (NP6016)

Lens motor
Change solenoid
M

Gear A Slide shutter (rear)

Reflecting plate for size blanking

Gear B Reflecting plate for full blanking

Blanking shutter Slide shutter (front)

solenoid
Pre-exposure
lamp

Blanking home position sensor

Open/close shutter
F-7-23

b. Triple Slide Shutter Method

As many as three slide shutters are mounted in the optical path used for size blanking, and these shutters are positioned by the work of two stepping motors.
As the slide shutters are shifted, an appropriate configuration is formed for creating a left/right margin or blanking out the non-image areas in reduced
copies.
- Typical Model (NP6030)
Reflecting plate for size blanking

Slide shutter (middle)

Slide shutter (rear)
Reflecting plate for
Slide shutter full face blanking
motor (rear)

Slide shutter home

position sensor (rear)
Open/close Slide shutter home
shutter position sensor (front)
solenoid

Slide shutter (front)

Slide shutter
motor (front)

Open/close shutter M

Slide shutter motor (front)

F-7-24

7-17
 Chapter 7

7.6 Development
7.6.1 Outline
7.6.1.1 Outline
0008-5208
Development is performed in various ways depending on the type of copier, i.e., analog, digital, black-and-white, and color. Likewise, a developing
assembly comes in various con-figurations.
The following shows typical specifications of a developing assembly, each group of speci-fications being used for a particular model (the drum type
determines toner polarity and voltage ratings, thus making multiple combinations of these groups of specifications):

T-7-6

Method of development: 1-component toner projection, 2-component toner projection

Developing blade: magnetic metal, non-magnetic metal, non-magnetic rubber
Method of charging developing cylinder, rubber blade, carrier
(toner):
Type of toner: 1-component black toner, 1-component color toner, 2-component color
toner
Polarity of toner: positive (e.g., OPC drum), negative (e.g., Asi drum)
AC bias: Vp-p 1.2 to 1.7 kV/1.8 to 2.7 kHZ (selected in consideration of model)
DC bias (during -50 to -600 V (e.g., OPC drum)/+80 to +100 V (e.g., Asi drum)
development):
DC bias (except during -400 V (approx.; e.g., OPC drum)/+800 to +100 V (e.g., Asi drum)
development):
DC bias (except during -400 V (approx.; e.g., OPC drum)/+600 V (e.g., Asi drum); however, about
development): 100 V during multiple initial rotation
Detection of toner level: by an antenna sensor, piezoelectric sensor, or color toner concentration
detection; however, a detecting mechanism may be missing as in the case
of a PC/FC
Supply of toner: - by replacement of the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller,
developing assembly, or cleaner unit as a whole (cartridge configuration).
- by replacement of the toner cartridge fitted to the developing assembly.
- by transfer of toner from a toner cartridge or toner bottle to the hopper.
- by transfer of toner from a toner cartridge to the developing assembly.

7.6.2 Developing Assembly

7.6.2.1 Outline
0008-5210
In general, a developing assembly consists of a developing cylinder, developing blade, toner container, and stirring rod for the developer. It comes in
various types to suit the con-figuration of the area around it. Pages that follow show typical developing assemblies and configurations of the areas around
them.
7.6.2.2 Type 1 (all-in-one type)
0008-5211
As shown in the following figure, the hopper unit (toner container), developing unit, and drum unit are all integrated to make up a single assembly.

7-18
 Chapter 7

Developing
Drum unit unit Hopper unit

Developing assembly

Primary charging Light-blocking

roller shutter Toner container

Photosensitive
drum

Cleaning blade Developing

cylinder
Drum cover shutter

F-7-25

7.6.2.3 Type 2 (double-unit separation type)

0008-5212
As shown in the following figure, the hopper unit (toner container)/developing unit and the drum unit are two separate entities.

Drum unit Hopper unit

Primary charging
roller Toner sensor Toner container
Cleaning blade Photosensitive
drum
No. 1 stirring rod

Waste toner
feed blade

Waste toner
container

Developing cylinder
No. 2 stirring blade
F-7-26

7.6.2.4 Type 3 (3-unit separation type)

0008-5213
As shown in the follwing figure, the hopper unit, developing unit, and drum unit are three sepa-rate entities.

Hopper motor
Hopper M

Drum unit Developing assembly

Cleaning blade
Feed screw
Drum cleaner assembly TS

Developing
cylinder Toner sensor
Photosensitive drum
Stirring rods
F-7-27

7-19
 Chapter 7

7.6.2.5 Type 4 (4-unit separation type)

0008-5214
As shown in the following figure, the hopper unit, developing unit, drum unit, and cleaner unit are four separate units.
Typical Model: NP4080
Hopper Q Hopper motor
M

Cleaning
blade
Drum
cleaner Photosensitive
drum
Q17
Feed screw

Developing
assembly Toner sensor
F-7-28

7.6.2.6 Type 5 (5-unit Sseparation type)

0008-5215
As shown in the following figure, the hopper unit, developing unit, drum unit, cleaner unit, and waste toner container are five separate entities.

Hopper assembly

Hopper motor
M
Toner sensor

TS M
Waste toner feed Cleaning blade
Developing Toner stirring motor
screw detection
Drum cleaner assembly
assembly
Waste toner
feed screw TS
Photosensitive
drum
Waste toner
feed pipe MS Toner sensor

Waste toner container

F-7-29

7.6.3 Arrangement of the Developing Assembly Inside a Color Copier

7.6.3.1 Outline
0008-5216
A color copier must produce a color image made of four different colors (normally, Y, M, C, and Bk), and the arrangement of the developing assembly
and the mechanisms used differ from model to model.
The following four types are commonly found, classified according to the arrangement of the developing assembly:
Type 1: The developing assemblies are located horizontally under the drum.
Type 2: The developing assemblies are located around the drum.
Type 3: The developing assemblies are located above the photosensitive belt (or, the transfer belt).
Type 4: The developing assemblies are located inside a developing assembly rotary unit.
These four types are explained below, one by one with diagrams of their configurations.
7.6.3.2 Type 1 Configuration
0008-5217
The four developing assemblies are arranged horizontally on the developing assembly base under the drum. Each developing assembly is engaged directly
under the drum in sequence to develop four different colors.

7-20
 Chapter 7

Developing Photosensitive drum

assembly Developing assembly
base

Bk Y C M

Moves to the left/right

F-7-30

7.6.3.3 Type 2 Configuration

0008-5218
The four developing assemblies are arranged around the photosensitive drum, and each one is engaged in sequence for the development of each color.

Developing
assembly
Photosensitive Y
drum

C
M
Bk
F-7-31

7.6.3.4 Type 3 Configuration

0008-5219
The four developing assemblies are arranged above the transfer belt (photosensitive belt) for the development of four colors.

Bk C M Y
developing developing developing developing
assembly assembly assembly assembly
Photosensitive
drum
Transfer belt
(photosensitive belt)

F-7-32

7.6.3.5 Type 4 Configuration

0008-5220
As many as three toner cartridges are arranged in a developing assembly rotary unit, and a separately located black toner cartridge form this type of
configuration.

7-21
 Chapter 7

Black developing
assembly

Primary charging
roller

Bk

Drum cartridge
Color developing
assembly

C
M

Color toner
cartridge

Y
Intermediate
Developing rotary transfer drum
assembly

Photosensitive
drum
F-7-33

7.6.4 Mechanisms Around the Developing Assemblies and methods of Engagement

7.6.4.1 Outline
0008-5221
Depending on how the developing assemblies are arranged, different adjacent mechanisms and methods of engagement are used. The discussions that
follow are organized according to the previously cited four types.
7.6.4.2 Type 1 Configuration
0008-5223
The type 1 configuration and its adjacent mechanisms are as follows:

a. Outline
The developing assembly base is moved by the developing assembly drive motor, and is designed to shift the developing assemblies horizontally. The base
also operates to position and engage the selected developing assembly directly opposite the photosensitive drum.
When the selected developing assembly has been positioned against the photosensitive drum, the developing cylinder clutch of the selected developing
assembly turns on, and the drive of the developing cylinder motor is transmitted to the developing cylinder.
The concentration of the toner inside the developing assembly is detected by the toner concentration detection circuit. When the concentration falls below
a specific level, the toner supply clutch is turned on to supply toner from the hopper unit.

7-22
 Chapter 7

Main motor
Hopper
Toner
supply M
clutch
Toner sensor

Black toner
density
sensor
Color toner density
sensors
Photosensitive ATR
drum

ATR
ATR

ATR
Developing
Developing Developing assembly base
Bk Y C M
cylinder cylinder
clutch motor
CL CL CL CL M Moves to the left/right

Development
PS position sensor
PS
PS

M CL PS
Developing assembly
Developing base home position sensor
assembly
shift motor Developing Developing Developing
assembly assembly assembly
push-up locking cam locking cam
clutch OFF sensor TOP sensor
F-7-34

b. Shifting the Developing Assemblies

All developing assemblies of the type 1 configuration are mounted on the developing assembly base; when a 4-color print is made, the base is moved as
shown in the following figure so that the appropriate developing assembly may be selected. (The movement is always in the order of M, C, Y, and Bk when
making 4-color prints.)

M developing assembly
Home position search locked/development
Photosensitive
[1] drum [2] [3] [4]
Developing
assembly
base
Bk Y C M Bk Y C M Bk Y C M Bk Y C M

PS PS PS PS
Developing assembly
base home position sensor

[5] [6] [7] [8]

Bk Y C M Bk Y C M Bk Y C M Bk Y C M

PS PS PS PS

C developing assembly Y developing assembly Bk developing assembly Home position search

locked/development locked/development locked/development

F-7-35

A machine using the type 1 configuration may at times places two sheets of paper on the transfer drum (side A, side B). If these sheets were placed too
close to each other, the shift to a distant developing assembly (for example, from M to Y, or from Bk to M) would take too long to deal with the second
sheet. If this is the case, the machine imposes a delay (by one side) before placing the second sheet.

c. Moving the Assemblies

In a type 1 model, the distance between the developing assembly base home position and the point of development for each color are stored in memory by
the CPU on the developing assembly shift motor driver PCB so that the developing assembly shift motor is rotated for the distance in question.
When the developing assembly shift motor rotates, its drive is sent to the rack on which the developing assembly base is mounted; the movement of the
rack results in the movement of the developing assembly base to the point of development.
As many as four light-blocking plates are used in combination with the development posi-tion sensor, which turns on when a developing assembly is at
the point of development.
If the development position sensor does not turn on after rotating the developing assem-bly shift motor for the distance to the point of development, an
error will be issued to indi-cate the condition.

7-23
 Chapter 7

Developing assembly
base shift motor

(rear)
Rack (for shifting
the developing assembly) M
de (right)
ve
C lop
de ing
Yd ve as
ev lop se Development position sensor
Bk elo ing mb
de pin as ly
ve ga se
lop ss mb
ing em ly
as bly
se
mb
ly
Rack (for pushing up
the developing assembly) Developing assembly
base home position
(left) sensor

Developing assembly
base
(front)
Light-blocking
plate
F-7-36

d. Engaging the Developing Assembly

When the developing assembly base has been moved by the developing assembly shift motor, the rack on which the developing assembly base is mounted
in turn transmits the drive to the developing assembly push-up clutch mounted to the copier's base plate.
The clutch turns on when the developing assembly base is 20 mm in front* of the point at which it ends its move to the point of development, thereby
causing the developing assembly locking cam to rotate and lock the developing assembly in question against the photosen-sitive drum.
*The timing ensures that the developing assembly locking cam will stop at the point of engagement when the developing assembly base stops at the point
of development.
- Developing Assembly Released
Rack
(for pushing up
the developing Developing Developing assembly
assembly) assembly
locking cam
TOP sensor

Developing assembly
push-up clutch Developing assembly
locking cam
(front)
F-7-37

- Developing Assembly Locked

F-7-38

7.6.4.3 Type 2 Configuration

0008-5229
a. Outline
In type 2 configuration, the developing assemblies and adjacent mechanisms operate as follows:
The four developing assemblies are arranged in a circle, and they are engaged by the drive from the main motor transmitted by a developing assembly
locking solenoid. When the de-veloping cylinder clutch turns on, the drive of the main motor is transmitted to the develop-ing cylinder.
The concentration of the toner inside the developing assemblies is checked by the color toner concentration sensor and the black toner concentration sensor.
When the concentration of toner drops below a specific level, the toner supply clutch turns on so that the drive of the hopper motor reaches the hopper to
start toner supply operation.
The toner level sensor is used to find out whether the level of toner inside the hopper has dropped below a specific level.
The waste toner collected in the photosensitive drum cleaner assembly is sent to the waste toner container using the drive of the main motor. The waste
toner pipe is equipped with a waste toner feedscrew lock detecting switch, and the waste toner container is equipped with a waste toner container full sensor.

7-24
 Chapter 7

Hopper motor M

Toner supply clutch CL CL CL CL

Bk M C Y
toner toner toner toner
hopper hopper hopper hopper

Color toner
density sensor
Photosensitive
drum
AT
R Toner level sensors
Y
AT
R
C
AT AT
R R
M
Bk
Black toner Toner level sensor
density sensor

CL CL CL CL Developing cylinder clutch

SL SL SL SL Developing assembly push-up solenoid

Main motor
F-7-39

b. Engaging the Developing Assembly

When the developing assembly locking solenoid turns on, the developing assembly locking cam starts to rotate, thereby engaging the developing assembly
against the photosensitive drum using the drive from the main motor.
The following figure shows the C developing assembly engaged with the photosensitive drum.
In the case of a color print, the developing assemblies are usually engaged in the sequence M, C, Y, and Bk; however, some models use a different sequence.
C Developing Assembly in Engagement

Photosensitive drum

Pressure spring

Y
PS

PM
C

M PS

Bk
PS

PS PM

PM

Developing assembly
locking cam PM

F-7-40

7-25
 Chapter 7

7.6.4.4 Type 3 Configuration

0008-5230
In type 3 configuration, as many as four photosensitive drums are found, each positioned in place for each developing assembly operating to develop Y,
M, C, or Bk images. The de-veloping cylinder is driven using a developing assembly motor installed for each developing assembly.
The developing assemblies are supplied with toner in different ways depending on whether they are for Y/M/C or for Bk. In the case of a Y/M/C developing
assembly, the in-frared light reflected by the layer of toner retained on the developing cylinder is monitored for supply operation; in the case of the black
developing assembly, on the other hand, an es-timate is made of its consumption from a video signal communicating the Bk component and the reading
from the SALT sensor.

Pick-up motor

CL

CL

CL
Bk sub hopper
CL C hopper M hopper Y hopper

CL

Bk main hopper
Developing cylinder ATR sensor

Bk C M Y

SALT sensor
Photosensitive drum M-Bk M-C M-M M-Y

Bk developing C developing M developing Y developing

motor motor motor motor
F-7-41

7.6.4.5 Type 4 Configuration

0008-5231
- Construction of Type 4 Developing Assembly (developing assembly rotary mechanism)
The developing assembly configuration consists of three color toner cartridges, developing assembly rotary to which the color cartridges are mounted, and
black toner cartridge.
The developing assembly rotary rotates clockwise in response to the drive from the devel-oping assembly rotary motor, and it houses color toner cartridges
(in the order of yellow, magenta, and cyan). The black toner cartridge remains positioned against the photosensitive drum at all times; when black is
developed, the developing assembly rotary is rotated so that none of the color toner cartridge is positioned against the photosensitive drum.
The color developing cylinder and the black developing cylinder are rotated by the cartridge motor.

7-26
 Chapter 7

Developing rotary motor

Cylinder
M M motor
SL

Black toner cartridge

Bk Black developing
cylinder

Stopper arm
C
Photosensitive
drum
M

Y
Intermediate
transfer drum
Developing assembly
rotary assembly

Color developing
assemblies

Color developing
cylinder

F-7-42

7.6.5 Developing Bias

7.6.5.1 Outline
0008-5232
An AC voltage and a DC voltage are applied to the developing cylinder for development; these are called "C bias" and "DC bias," and are collectively
referred to as "developing bias." Each model uses its specific AC bias level to suit its design, and the level normally remains fixed. In the case of a color
copier (e.g., CLC700, CC1000), the AC bias is a combination of voltages, and is used to improve the efficiency of development and the reproduction of
high-light areas. This type of AC bias is said to be in the form of a "double blank pulse."
7.6.5.2 AC Bias
0008-5233
In addition to its use for development by toner projection, an AC bias has the function of preventing fogging and adhesion of carrier to the photosensitive
drum.
The wave form, absolute level (Vp-p), and frequency of an AC bias determine the funda-mental quality of images and degree of fogging. A specific level
is determined and maintained for each specific model.
7.6.5.3 DC Bias
0008-5234
A DC bias is mainly used to control the density of print images and also to prevent fog-ging in white areas.
It is sometimes used to prevent adhesion of toner to the photosensitive drum, which tends to occur while development is not taking place (initial rotation,
last rotation, blank exposure).
7.6.5.4 Double Blank Pulse
0008-5235
A double blank pulse consists of AC bias and DC bias of two different voltage levels, and is generated by the developing bias PCB.

Double blank pulse

0V

DC bias
F-7-43

7.6.5.5 Developing Bias Control Circuit

0008-5236
The developing bias control circuit has the following functions:

7-27
 Chapter 7

a. Turning On and Off the AC Bias

The CPU on the power supply PCB generates pulse signals in response to instructions from the CPU on the control PCB. These signals cause the developing
bias transformer to turn on, adding the AC component of the developing bias to the DC component for applica-tion.

b. Turning On and Off the DC Bias and Controlling the Voltage to a Specific Level
b-1 Type 1
The CPU on the control PCB causes the CPU on the power supply PCB to generate the developing bias drive signal, which in turn turns on the secondary
side of the main trans-former to apply the DC component of the developing bias.
The application voltage level is read in the form of the developing DC bias voltage monitor signal (analog) from the developing DC bias voltage detection
circuit while the DC compo-nent of the developing bias is being applied so that the output voltage remains a specific level.
The main transformer is driven by the main pulse signal from the CPU.

b-2 Type 2
The voltage level of the DC bias is determined by the level of the devel-oping DC control signal from the control PCB.
When the high-voltage DC remote signal (=1), roller bias remote signal (=1), and the developing DC control signal is within a specific range of readings
(e.g., 3 V or more and less than 12 V), the AC bias switch circuit turns on. Further, the output of the bias will increase when the developing DC control
signal from the control PC increases.

c. Controlling the DC Bias Voltage Level

The DC bias voltage level control mechanism has the following functions:
- In normal mode (except AE mode), it controls the DC bias according to the setting made by the density adjustment key on the control panel.
- In AE mode, it controls the DC bias voltage according to the output of the AE sensor.
- It controls the DC bias voltage according to the settings of the density correction level set in user or service mode.
7.6.5.6 Controlling the DC Bias (preventing stray toner)
0008-5237
The following figure shows the circuit used to control the DC bias applied to prevent stray toner, and the circuit has the following functions:
- Turing on and off DC bias to prevent stray toner
- Controlling the current to a specific level
The DC bias used to prevent stray toner is turned on and off by the anti-stray toner DC bias drive signal as follows:
When the DC bias drive signal is '1', the variable width pulse generator circuit turns on to send the pulse output to the transformer, thereby driving the
transformer and ultimately sending the DC bias to the anti-stray toner electrode.
The output of the anti-stray toner DC bias is fed back to the variable width pulse genera-tion circuit.
The anti-stray toner DC bias is maintained at a specific level by control based on this feedback signal.

Control PCB
24V
DC bias drive signal

HVT
DC bias
24V

Variable width
pulse oscillation Transformer
circuit
Current
detection
circuit
To anti-stray toner
electrode

F-7-44

7.6.6 Detecting the Level of Toner

7.6.6.1 Outline
0008-5238
The level of toner is detected by various types of sensors so that decreases may be identi-fied before it completely runs out.
A personal machine or the like with a non-refill cartridge (primary charging roller, photo-sensitive roller, developing assembly constructed as a single
entity) is not equipped with a toner level detecting mechanism.
Other types of machines, on the other hand, may be roughly classified into the following three:
1. Antenna sensor type
2. Piezoelectric oscillator sensor type
3. Photo sensor type
7.6.6.2 Antenna Sensor
0008-5239
The level of toner inside a toner cartridge or a developing assembly may be monitored by an antenna sensor circuit.
The toner cartridge or the developing assembly is equipped with a toner level sensor in-side it, and an AC bias is applied to the developing cylinder.
The developing cylinder and the toner level sensor are statically connected, and the amount of static electricity between the two varies in keeping with the
amount of toner. An AC bias in levels corresponding to amounts of toner occurs on the toner level sensor, and is communicated to the antenna sensor
circuit.
The antenna sensor circuit, on the other hand, is fed with a specific level of AC bias di-rectly from the power supply circuit in the form of a reference signal.

7-28
 Chapter 7

The antenna sensor circuit compares the signal from the toner level sensor against the ref-erence signal to find out the level of toner.

Blade base Toner level sensor

Toner

Developing assembly frame

Blade

Antenna sensor circuit Control PCB

Comparator Toner
circuit absent
Developing cylinder signal CPU

F-7-45

a. If Toner Is Above a Specific Level

Since toner exists around the toner level sensor, the level of the AC bias generated by the sensor is higher than that of the reference signal.
This condition causes the output from the comparison circuit to go '1' and the toner absent signal to go '0',
The "Replace the Cartridge" message will remain off.

b. If the Level of Toner Is Above a Specific Level

The amount of toner around the toner level sensor decreases, and the level of the AC bias generated by the sensor is low. On the other hand, the level of
the reference signal remains the same, causing the output voltage to remain high.
The difference in potential causes the output of the comparator circuit to go '0', and the toner absent signal goes '1'.
The CPU on the control PCB makes a check during copying operation (AC bias ON); if the toner absent signal is found to be '0' continuously for a specific
number of prints, the machine will flash the message "Replace the Cartridge" on its control panel at the end of printing operation.
7.6.6.3 Piezoelectric Sensor
0008-5269
A piezoelectric sensor is found inside the developing assembly or inside both the develop-ing assembly and the hopper, as determined by the type of
machine. In the absence of toner, the oscillator of the piezoelectric sensor oscillates at several kilo hertz, and the output of the sensor will go '0' In the
presence of toner, on the other hand, the weight of toner prevents the oscillation of the oscillator, causing the output of the sensor to go '1'.
The level of toner inside the developing assembly is monitored by the toner level detection circuit, and the following operation takes place when the level
drops below a specific value:

AMP
Integration Output
circuit

Piezoelectric
oscillator
F-7-46

7.6.6.4 Photo Sensor

0008-5270
A photo sensor is used to detect the level of color toner. The sensor consists of a light-emitting segment and a light receiving segment. The light from the
light-emitting segment mounted on the outside moves along the optical guide, and is directed to the detection window found inside the cartridge. When
the stirring plate inside the cartridge sweeps the toner away from the window, the light will move through the cartridge, along the optical guide, and to the
light-receiving segment of the sensor. A measurement is then taken of the length of time that passes until the area near the window is once again covered
with toner, blocking off the light.
If the measured time during which light is let through happens to be longer than a specific length of time, the control PCB will assume the absence of color
toner, and communicates the fact to the reader control PCB.

7-29
 Chapter 7

Control PCB Light guide

Light-receiving
segment
Color toner
cartridge

Color toner Light emitting

level sensor segment
F-7-47

7.6.7 Detecting the Concentration of Toner

7.6.7.1 Detecting the Concentration of Toner in a Color Copier
0008-5271
The concentration of toner is monitored to ensure reproduction of stable images at all times.
The method used to detect the concentration of 2-component toner monitors the intensity of light reflected by the near infrared light emitted by a LED, and
may be any of several types depending on the color of toner.

Type 1
The concentration of color toner is monitored as follows:
In Type 1, the density of a density detection pattern formed on the intermediate transfer drum is monitored by a density sensor. The density sensor is
mounted on the machine's den-sity detection PCB.
A LED emits light against the density detection pattern on the intermediate transfer drum, and the reflected light is received by photodiode 1.
The control PCB generates the LED emission signal at such times as needed. The LED emits light in response, which is directly received by photodiode
2. The intensity of the light is sent to the density detection circuit as the received light feedback signal, enabling the con-trol of the intensity of light from
the LED to a specific level.
The light emitted from the LED is also directed to the density detection pattern on the in-termediate drum, and the light reflected by the pattern is received
by photodiode 1. The den-sity detection PCB sends the resulting density signal to the control PCB as the toner density detection signal; the control PCB
in turn converts the density detection signal (analog) into a density level (digital) for storage in memory.

Density detection pattern Intermediate

transfer drum
Photodiode 2

LED
Photodiode 1
Density
F-7-48

Type 2
The concentration of color toner is monitored using any of the following two:
- ATR sensor for color toner
- SALT sensor for Bk toner
a. Color Toner (Y, M, C; other than Bk)
The carrier absorbs near infrared light and hardly reflects it; on the other hand, the dye re-flects near infrared light well. The concentration of color toner
is monitored by taking advan-tage of this fact, i.e., by directing near infrared light and measuring its reflection. This type of detection uses an ATR sensor.
When the amount of dye decreases in developer, the area taken up by carrier will increase, causing the reflected light to decrease. The decreases in the
reflected light is detected and as-sumed to indicate decreases in the concentration of color toner.

b. Bk Toner
The photosensitive drum reflects near infrared well, while the Bk toner absorbs it and hardly reflects it. The concentration of Bk toner can be detected by
taking advantage of the fact, i.e., near infrared light is directed to the Bk toner on the photosen-sitive drum, and its reflection is measured. This way of
monitoring the concentration of Bk toner uses a SALT sensor.
When the amount of dye in developer decreases, the amount of Bk toner on the photosensitive drum and the density of images will also decrease, baring
the photosensitive drum un-derneath and, thereby, increasing the amount of reflected near infrared light. The increases in the amount of reflected light may
be assumed to indicate decreases in the amount of Bk toner.
7.6.7.2 Detecting the Concentration of Color Toner
0008-5272
A color toner concentration sensor (ATR sensor) is used for each color developing assem-bly (Y, M, C), and is used to monitor the concentration of its
respective color toner on the developing cylinder.
Of the developer on the developing cylinder, carrier absorbs near infrared and hardly re-flects it, while on the other hand color dye reflects infrared light
well. The concentration of color toner (dye-to-carrier ratio) is detected by directing near infrared light against the devel-oper and measuring its reflection.
The concentration of color toner is stored in memory (RAM) in service mode upon instal-lation or when the developer or the color toner sensor has been
replaced (initial setting).
Thereafter, it is measured when the developing assembly is locked in position (however, it remains engaged at all times in the case of the CLC1000) and

7-30
 Chapter 7

the developing cylinder is rotat-ing, or when prompted in service mode; the measurement is compared against the initial set-ting, and toner is supplied in
an amount that makes up for the difference (only when the con-centration is found to be lower than the initial setting).
The light coming directly from the LED is also checked for each detection, and the result is used as a reference value when making up for the deterioration
of the LED over time and for changes occurring in temperature.

Toner supply signal

Control PCB
Reflection
signal
LED drive
Detection of signal
reflected light
Q RAM
CPU
Direct light
LED signal

Detection of
Developing cylinder direct light

F-7-49

7.6.7.3 Detecting the Concentration of Bk Toner

0008-5274
a. Detecting the Concentration of the Bk Toner by a SLAT Sensor
Unlike the method used to detect the concentration of color toner by means of an ATR sensor, the concentration of Bk toner is detected by forming a Bk
density pattern on the photosensitive drum. Near infrared light is directed against the pattern, and the light reflected by the pattern is measured to detect
the concentration of the Bk toner using a SALT sensor mounted next to the photosensitive drum.
The photosensitive drum tends to reflect near infrared light well, while Bk toner hardly reflects it. For this reason, when the amount of dye in developer
decreases, the density of images (i.e., amount of Bk toner) on the photosensitive drum will also decrease, baring the photosensitive drum underneath and,
consequently, increasing the reflected light. The in-creases in the reflected light are detected and assumed to indicate decreases in the concentration of Bk
toner.
The concentration of Bk toner is stored in memory (in RAM) in service mode upon instal-lation or when the developing or the color toner concentration
sensor has been replaced.
Thereafter, the concentration is detected as follows using the SALT sensor:
Type 1: after the warm-up period of the fixing roller and the laser (typical product: CLC300)
Type 2: when the developing assembly is engaged or when service mode is started (typi-cal product: CLC700/800)
Type 3: when copying operation ends (typical product: CLC1000)
At these times, the measurement is compared against the initial setting and, if the concen-tration is found to be lower than the initial setting by a specific
degree, toner will be supplied to make up for the difference.
The light coming directly from the LED is also measured, and is used as a reference when correcting the deterioration of LED occurring over time and for
changes in temperature.
The sensor window tends to become soiled with stray toner, and correction is also ex-ecuted to make up for the dirt.

With the case of type 3, in addition to these considerations, the levels of the Bk video sig-nals representing print images are cumulatively added when
estimating the decrease in Bk toner in developer, and toner is supplied to make up for any decrease. In this method, the concentration of Bk toner is at times
higher than the initial setting in relation to the con-centration detected by the ALT sensor. If this is the case, a level which is an equivalent of the difference
from the setting is deducted from the copy image Bk video signal cumulative count when generating a video signal for the next time.

Control PCB

Direct light signal Detection of

Toner density direct light
signal
Photosensitive
drum

RAM CPU
LED
LED drive signal

Bk reflection signal
Detection of
reflected light

Toner supply signal

Video signal Count correction signal

F-7-50

b. Detecting the Dirt on the SALT Sensor Window

When control rotation (CNTR) is executed after the power switch is turned on (in the case of the CLC300, during first SALT control) or when the Start
key is pressed, a LED is turned on to measure the light reflected from the photosensitive drum free of toner. The level of the resulting Bk reflection light
signal will be low if the sensor window is soiled. The difference between the level of the Bk reflection signal and the initial setting is stored in memory,

7-31
 Chapter 7

and will be used to correct the sensor output as part of controlling the concentration of toner in-side the developing assembly.

Dirt on sensor window

Photosensitive drum

Photodiode LED
F-7-51

7.6.7.4 Detecting the Concentration of Mono Color Toner

0008-5276
The toner level detected of a 2-component color developing assembly (CD unit) can be converted to represent the concentration of toner in it.
The toner concentration detection circuit used in the CD unit exposes the developer on the developing cylinder with a lamp, and measures the reflected
light to find the concentration of the developer.
- Typical Model (NP4080)

Detection circuit Output

Lamp Photodiode

Developing cylinder

F-7-52

When the concentration falls below a specific level, the color toner supply solenoid turns on, supplying toner from the hopper inside the CD unit to the
cylinder assembly. If the con-centration fails to increase after keeping the color toner supply solenoid on for a specific pe-riod of time, the copier will stop
its operation immediately and indicate the message "Add Color Toner." If the RDF is used at this time, it will discharge any original existing on the
copyboard glass.
To make up for the deterioration of the lamp or to correct changes or fluctuations in the intensity of light caused by dirt in the optical path, an additional
photodiode is used to sample light directly from the lamp. The measurement is compared against the level of the toner concentration detection signal to
increase the accuracy of detecting the concentration of toner.

7-32
 Chapter 7

7.7 Transfer Unit

7.7.1 Outline
7.7.1.1 Outline
0008-5277
The term "ransfer" trefers to the process in which toner images formed on the surface of the photosensitive drum are transferred to a transfer medium (i.e.,
paper, transparency).
The transfer unit may be any of the following types:
1. Transfer guide type
2. Transfer drum type
3. Transfer belt type
4. Intermediate transfer drum type
7.7.2 Transfer Guide Type
7.7.2.1 Outline
0008-5278
The transfer guide assembly consists of a registration roller and a transfer guide plate, and it serves to move paper to the photosensitive drum and transfers
images to it from the pho-tosensitive drum.

Photosensitive
drum

Paper

Transfer guide
Transfer/separation plate
charging assembly
F-7-53

Transfer guide plates

Transfer roller
F-7-54

7.7.2.2 Controlling the Transfer Guide Bias

0008-5279
To prevent adhesion of toner to the transfer guide and, consequently, soiling print paper, a DC voltage (of the same polarity as the toner) is applied to the
transfer guide (e.g., -550 to 600 V).
The circuit used to control the transfer guide bias operates to turn on and off the output from the high-voltage transformer in response to the drive signal
from the control PCB.
Some machines use the same circuit to prevent offset of toner to the fixing roller by ap-plying a DC voltage to the metal core of the fixing roller, while
some other machines switch over transfer guide biases according to the readings from an environment sensor.
7.7.3 Transfer Drum Type
7.7.3.1 Outline
0008-5280
The following figure shows the construction of a typical transfer drum.
The transfer drum functions to retain paper on the transfer drum sheet by the work of static attraction; it also operates to forward the paper to the fixing
assembly after making a maximum of four rotations.

7-33
 Chapter 7

Drum motor M
Separation claw
solenoid
Separation charging
assembly
Separation
Separation push-up solenoid
claw Separation
External static SL push-up roll
eliminator
Photosensitive drum

PS SL
PS PS
Internal M
Push-on brush static
eliminator
Transfer drum
cleaner brush M
motor Transfer blade

Transfer drum cleaner

PS PS
Attraction roller
Transfer drum
cleaner locking M PS
motor M
Polishing roller motor Attraction
blade Attraction/transfer motor
M
Registration rollers
Transfer drum
locking motor Polishing roller
F-7-55

T-7-7

Transfer drum locking motor:
Drum motor:
Main motor:
Transfer drum cleaner locking motor:
Attraction/transfer locking cam motor:
Transfer drum cleaner brush motor:
Polishing roller motor:
Separation push-up solenoid:
Separation solenoid:
Pre-transfer paper sensor:
Post-transfer paper sensor:
Separation sensor:
Attraction/transfer locking cam HP
sensor:
Transfer drum HP sensor:
Transfer drum cleaner HP sensor:
drives cams to lock or release the transfer drum unit to and from the
photosensitive drum (always in engagement condition as long as the
transfer drum is rotating).
drives the transfer drum by way of the photosensitive drum.
drives the registration roller and the attraction roller.
locks/releases the transfer drum cleaner.
drives the cams for the attraction brush, transfer blade, and push-on brush.
drives the transfer drum cleaner brush.
drives the polishing roller.
drives the separation push-up roller.
Drives the separation claw.
detects jams before transfer.
detects jams after transfer.
detects jams in the separation assembly.
detects the home position (point of release) of the attraction/transfer
assembly locking cam.
detects the home position (point of release) of the transfer drum unit.
detects the home position of the transfer drum cleaner unit.

7.7.3.2 Point of Paper Attraction

0008-5297
a. Outline
A color machine must lay a maximum of four colors (toners) over a given point, requiring the control of sequences of operations (e.g., original exposure,
image processing, laser exposure, high-voltage application, feeding) with reference to the leading edge (image leading edge signal) of paper on the transfer
drum.
The image leading edge signal is generated where distance a (between the position of laser exposure and the point of transfer) and distance b (between the
leading edge of paper and the point of transfer) are identical.

7-34
 Chapter 7

Laser exposure

Paper

Photosensitive drum

Leading edge
of paper
Transfer drum
a

Image leading edge signal ON

F-7-56

b. Controlling the Attraction Mechanism

Paper is retained on the transfer drum sheet by means of static electricity.
During copying operation, the attraction roller solenoid remains on for the length of paper to keep the attraction roller in contact with the transfer drum
sheet. At this time, the attraction brush turns on, and the paper is held to the transfer drum sheet by the work of static bonding.

Transfer drum sheet

Transfer drum

Attraction roller

Attraction brush

Cam

Arm

Spring clutch
Arm

SL
ON
F-7-57

c. Controlling Side A and Side B

As many as two sheets of paper are retained on the transfer drum for printing, each identified by its own image leading edge signal generated by sensors
(side A sensor, side B sensor) mounted inside the transfer drum unit and two signal plates that operate in keeping with the transfer drum.

7-35
 Chapter 7

Transfer Drum When Copying on Side A

Signal plate for side B sensor
Side A paper

Transfer drum
Side A image leading
edge signal

Connecting plate

Side A sensor Signal plate for side A sensor

F-7-58

Transfer Drum When Copying on Side B

Side B paper Signal plate for side A sensor

Side B image leading Connecting plate

edge signal

Signal plate for side B sensor Side B sensor

F-7-59

Table 5-5 shows how sheets of paper are retained on the transfer drum in each mode:
Small size: 216 mm or less in feeding direction (A4/LTR or less)
Large size: 217 mm or more in feeding direction
- In the case of small-size paper, copying starts with side B.

T-7-8

Rotation of transfer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
drum
Leading edge of paper BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA

7.7.3.3 Controlling the Locking Cam Inside the Transfer Drum

0008-5315
The inside of the transfer drum is equipped with an attraction brush, transfer blade, and internal cleaning brush.
The brushes and the blade remain away from the transfer drum sheet in standby status; as needed, they are operated by their own locking cams driven by
the cam motor to engage with the transfer drum sheet.
The attraction/transfer locking cam motor and the attraction/transfer locking cam HP sensor are used to control the rotation of the three locking cams,
thereby controlling the operation of each brush and the blade.
The following figure shows the condition of each brush and the blade, changing in relation to the rotational position of the locking cams.

7-36
 Chapter 7

Attraction/transfer
locking cam HP sensor
Transfer blade

(rear)

Transfer blade
Internal brush locking cam
Attraction brush locking cam
Internal brushes Attraction brush
locking cam
F-7-60

T-7-9

Position of locking cam Description

Home position The attraction brush, transfer blade, and
inter-nal brush are all OFF.

Attraction or transfer of 1st color The attraction brush and transfer brush
are ON, and the internal brush is OFF.

7-37
 Chapter 7

Transfer of 2nd to 4th colors The transfer blade is ON, and the
attraction brush and internal brush are
OFF.

Transfer drum cleaning The internal brush is ON, and the

attraction brush and transfer blade are
OFF.

7.7.3.4 Cleaning the Transfer Drum Sheet

0008-5329
a. Outline
The transfer drum sheet used to retain and move paper by means of static bonding tends to attract foreign matter. When coated with foreign matter, the
sheet can soil the back of paper and cause faults in attraction or transfer.
To prevent soling, the transfer sheet is equipped with the following cleaning mechanisms:

External/internal brush: removes toner and paper lint.

Polishing roller: polishes the surface of the transfer drum sheet to recover its attraction ability.

Transfer drum cleaner

brush motor

M
External brush
Transfer drum

Internal brushes

Attraction/transfer
locking cam motor

PS
Transfer drum
cleaner HP sensor Polishing roller

M M

Transfer drum cleaner Polishing roller

locking motor motor
F-7-61

7-38
 Chapter 7

b. External Brush
As many as two external brushes are used, driven by the transfer drum cleaner motor.

Upper brush: turns in the direction in which the transfer drum rotates.
Lower brush: turns in the direction opposite the direction in which the transfer drum rotates.
The toner and paper lint removed by the brushes are collected inside the cleaner unit.
If the transfer drum cleaner unit has an external brush, the drive of the transfer drum cleaner locking motor (when it turns on) is transmitted to a cam, which
causes the brush to come into contact with the transfer drum sheet. The brush leaves the transfer drum sheet as soon as the transfer drum cleaner locking
motor turns off.
At the same time, the drive from the attraction/transfer locking cam motor causes the internal brush to come into contact with the inner side of the transfer
drum by the work of its own cam found inside, positioning itself against the external brush from inside.

c. Polishing Roller
Over use, the surface of the transfer drum sheet tends to accumulate paper lint and the like, leading to reduction in its ability to retain paper. To prevent
such reduction, the surface of the transfer sheet is polished by means of a polishing roller once every so many prints.
When the polishing roller motor turns on, the polishing roller is rotated and is forced against the outside of the transfer drum sheet; at this time, the internal
brush is also forced against the transfer drum sheet, and the surface of the transfer drum sheet is polished by way of cleaning.
When the polishing motor is rotated in reverse, the polishing roller becomes disengaged and moves away from the transfer sheet.
Typical Model (CLC700/800)
Transfer drum sheet

Polishing roller

Polishing roller
Spring clutch locking spring (front)
Polishing roller
locking spring (rear)
Polishing roller return
Polishing roller motor
F-7-62

7.7.4 Transfer Belt Type

7.7.4.1 Outline
0008-5339
A transfer belt unit is constructed as shown in the following figure.
A transfer belt unit serves to retain paper from the registration roller on the transfer belt by means of a transfer blade (static electricity); the unit transfers
the toner images from Y, M, C, and Bk photosensitive drums while it retains paper on its belt, and then sends the paper to the fixing assembly.
The following are the major control mechanisms and operations of the transfer belt unit:
- Moving the transfer blade to and from the point of attraction
- Detecting the transfer belt at home position
- Correcting displacement of the transfer belt
- Moving the lifter of the transfer belt
- Cleaning the transfer belt

7-39
 Chapter 7

Transfer Transfer belt

Transfer belt motor simultaneous swing motor
Photosensitive Photosensitive Photosensitive attraction
M drum 1 drum 2 drum 3 M
Separation Photosensitive
charging drum 4
assembly Copy paper
Slave
roller

Transfer Transfer
blade blade
solenoid 2 solenoid 3
Swing
SL SL SL SL roller
Transfer blade Transfer blade
Drive roller solenoid 1 Transfer cleaning blade solenoid 4

Polishing Signal blade

roller
Grounding roller Transfer belt

Cam
Transfer belt
Transfer cleaning cleaning web
SL

blade solenoid Transfer Oil removing

lifter arm roller

M
M
SL
Transfer belt cleaning
web motor Polishing roller Polishing/oil
solenoid removing motor

Pickup roller

M CL
Transfer belt lifter clutch
Table

F-7-63

T-7-10

Transfer belt swing Transfer belt rotates the transfer belt.

motor:
Transfer belt swing motor:
Transfer belt cleaning web motor:
Polishing/oil removing motor:
Transfer blade solenoid:
Transfer cleaning blade solenoid:
Polishing roller solenoid:
Transfer belt lifter clutch:
corrects displacement of the transfer belt.
takes up the cleaning web.
drives the polishing roller and the oil removing roller.
sets/moves away the transfer blade.
sets/moves away the transfer cleaning blade.
Sets/ moves away the polishing roller.
Sets/moves away the transfer belt unit.

7.7.4.2 Moving the Transfer Blade to and Away from the Point of Attraction
0008-5346
The transfer belt is kept away from the transfer belt (unless it is called upon to start charging) to limit the load it may impose on the transfer belt (it is moved
away from the transfer belt at such times as when the last sheet has moved past the transfer belt).
When the registration roller clutch turns on, the transfer belt is set to the point of transfer for transfer or for attraction of paper.
The transfer blade is set to position or is moved away from the point of attraction by the drive of the transfer blade solenoid.
The transfer blade solenoid is a latching type, whose metal core may be kept protruding or retracted by switching between two drive signals (it does not
require attraction current).

7-40
 Chapter 7

Transfer blade

Transfer belt

(belt feed direction)

Transfer blade solenoid

(front of body)
F-7-64

7.7.4.3 Detecting the Transfer Belt at Home Position

0008-5350
The transfer belt is capable of retaining multiple sheets (e.g., A4/LTR) at the same time. If the belt has a seam as in some models, attraction of a sheet at
the same timing for all selected sizes of paper or copying modes would cause a sheet to fall over the seam, adversely affecting the images during transfer
because of the different transfer efficiency over the seam.
To prevent such a problem, the transfer belt is equipped with a seam detecting seal which is checked by the transfer belt home position sensor in response
to a press on the Start key. The result is used to control the activation of the registration roller so as not to attract paper over the seam.
If the transfer belt home position sensor cannot detect the home position of the transfer belt for some reason, an error will be indicated on the control panel.
The seam detecting seal is attached over the seam on the back of the transfer belt.

Transfer belt motor

Transfer belt Seam detecting seal

PS16
PS

Transfer belt home

position sensor
Drive roller

F-7-65

7.7.4.4 Point of Attraction

0008-5352
In continuous copying mode, the point of attraction of paper to the transfer belt differs according to the selected copying mode and the type of paper. The
tables that follow give a list of attraction modes and how paper is attracted in each mode:

7-41
 Chapter 7

CLC1000

Feed direction

Copy 1st 2nd 3rd

Seam Seam Seam
speed rotation rotation rotation
1320
543 264 264 249 264
Mode A
A4

15
132
645 660 645

Mode B
A3

15

352 425 440 440 440

Mode C
A4R
B4
15
264 513 528 528 528
Mode D
A4

15
1320 1320

Mode E A4R
A4 A3

777 880 880

Mode F A4R
A4 B4
15

132 645 1320

Mode G
A3

15

F-7-66

Feed direction

Transfer belt 1st 2nd 3rd

rotation Seam Seam Seam
rotation rotation rotation
1320
543 132
645 675 645 675
Mode H
A3

15

132 330 315 345 330 330 315 345 330

Mode I A4

15

F-7-67

7-42
 Chapter 7

7.7.4.5 Correcting Displacement of the Transfer Belt

0008-5358
As the transfer belt continues to rotate, it can at times become displaced to the front or to the rear.
A transfer belt end sensor 1 (front) and a transfer belt end sensor 2 (rear) are used to monitor the position of the transfer belt, and the transfer belt shift
motor and the transfer belt shift roller are used to correct any displacement.
To prevent damage to the end of the transfer belt, as can be expected when the belt fully becomes displaced, a transfer belt end sensor 3 (front) and a transfer
belt end sensor 4 (rear) are mounted at the front and the rear of the belt.
Figures A and B show outlines of transfer belt displacement correction (i.e., detection of the transfer belt displacement and the movement of the drive
roller).

Transfer belt
M swing motor
A

Slave roller

Transfer belt Transfer belt

M
motor

Sensor lever
PS

PS Swing roller
PS
Rotation of
transfer belt PS

(front of body)
Drive roller Sensor lever

B Drive arm Swing roller

Transfer belt
swing motor (fulcrum)
Slave roller

M Transfer belt
motor

Transfer belt

(rotation of
transfer belt)

(front of body)

F-7-68

a. Displacement of the Transfer Belt to the Rear

The transfer belt shift motor moves the shift roller to the right by means of a drive arm, thereby returning the transfer belt to the front.

Transfer belt Drive arm Swing roller

swing motor
(fulcrum)
Slave roller

M Transfer belt
motor

Transfer belt

(rotation of
transfer belt)

(front of body)

F-7-69

7-43
 Chapter 7

b. Displacement of the Transfer Belt to the Front

The transfer belt drive motor moves the shift roller to the left by means of a shift arm, thereby returning the transfer belt to the rear.

Transfer belt
swing motor
Drive arm (fulcrum)

Swing roller

Transfer belt

(front of body)

F-7-70

7.7.4.6 Movement of the Transfer Belt Lifter

0008-5364
The adhesion of toner from the photosensitive drum to the transfer belt must be prevented when measuring the density of Bk toner.
The drive of the pickup motor is transmitted to the cam by way of the transfer belt lifter clutch so that the transfer lifter arm moves down the transfer belt
(escape movement). At this time, the position of the cam (transfer belt) used to move up/down the transfer belt is detected with reference to the light-
blocking plate mounted to the cam shaft and by means of the transfer belt lifter sensor 1 and the transfer belt lifter sensor 2.
When a measurement has been taken of the density of the Bk toner, the transfer belt is moved up back to the point of transfer.
If the transfer belt lifter does not reach a specific position after a specific time following the activation of the transfer belt lifter clutch, an error will be
indicated on the control panel.

Photosensitive Photosensitive Photosensitive Photosensitive

drum 1 drum 2 drum 3 drum 4

Fulcrum of lifter

Drive roller
PS1

Transfer belt PS2

Transfer lifter arm

(fulcrum of arm)

Transfer belt Transfer belt

CL

lifter sensor lifter clutch

Light- (PS)
blocking
plate
Transfer belt M
lifter sensor 2
(PS) Pickup motor

Cam Cam shaft

F-7-71

7.7.4.7 Cleaning the Transfer Belt

0008-5366
a. Outline

7-44
 Chapter 7

The transfer belt unit is equipped with a cleaning mechanism designed to protect the transfer belt from becoming soiled by toner or fixing oil.
The cleaning mechanism of the transfer belt is constructed as shown in the following figure.

Photosensitive Photosensitive Photosensitive Photosensitive

drum 1 drum 2 drum 3 drum 4

Transfer belt cleaning blade

Drive roller Polishing roller

PS PS
Transfer belt

Transfer belt
Transfer belt cleaning cleaning web
SL

blade solenoid Oil removing

roller
M
M
SL
Transfer belt cleaning
web motor Polishing roller Polishing/oil
solenoid removing motor
F-7-72

b. Transfer Cleaning Blade

The transfer cleaning blade is used to remove toner from the transfer belt.
The cleaning blade is set to the cleaning position by the drive of the transfer cleaning blade solenoid. The cleaning blade is moved away from the transfer
belt when the seam of the belt draws near it (release).
The transfer cleaning blade is of a latching type, which is capable of keeping its metal core protruding or retracted by switching between two drive signals
(not requiring attraction current).

Transfer belt

Transfer cleaning blade Transfer cleaning

blade solenoid

F-7-73

c. Transfer Belt Cleaning web

The transfer belt cleaning web is designed to remove dirt (e.g., toner) from the transfer belt at all times.
As the transfer belt rotates, the cleaning web is taken up by the work of the drive of the transfer belt cleaning web motor. The rotation of the transfer belt
cleaning web motor is monitored by the transfer belt cleaning web rotation sensor with reference to the clock plate of the external static eliminating roller
shaft.
The length of the cleaning web is monitored by the transfer belt cleaning web length sensor located in the cleaning web feed roller assembly; when the belt
starts to run out, a message to that effect will be indicated on the control panel.

7-45
 Chapter 7

Transfer belt

Transfer belt cleaning

web length sensor

Transfer belt cleaning web

Transfer belt cleaning

web rotation sensor

Transfer belt cleaning web motor

F-7-74

d. Polishing Roller
The polishing roller is used to polish the surface of the transfer belt, thereby preventing adhesion of fixing oil to the photosensitive drum (particularly in
double-sided mode) and, ultimately, preventing foggy copies.
When the polishing/oil removing motor rotates in normal direction and the polishing roller turns on, the control ring rotates the cam and operates the push-
on spring to force the polishing roller against the transfer belt.
The polishing roller moves away from the transfer belt by the cam when the seam of the belt draws near (i.e., when the solenoid turns off).
When the one-way clutch lever is pushed by the lifter of the transfer belt, the polishing roller rotates slightly so that its area of contact on the transfer belt
changes.
If the speed of the polishing/oil removing motor suffers a deviation for some reason, an error will be indicated on the control panel.

Polishing roller
Transfer belt

Polishing roller solenoid

(feeding direction of
transfer belt)

Cam

Control ring

Push-on spring
One-way clutch lever

Polishing/oil removing motor

(front of body)

F-7-75

e. Oil Removing Roller

When making a double-sided copy, the first side will be put into contact with the transfer belt after fixing, letting fixing oil move to the transfer belt. If the
transfer belt was allowed to rotate in this condition, the upcoming copy image could suffer adverse effects (e.g., fogging).
To prevent such a problem, the fixing oil is removed from the transfer belt. The oil removing roller is rotated and forced against the transfer belt when the
polishing/oil removing motor rotates in reverse. It is pushed down and released as the transfer belt is moved down by the lifter of the belt.

7-46
 Chapter 7

Oil removing roller

(feed direction of transfer belt)

Transfer belt

(front of body) Polishing/oil removing motor

F-7-76

7.7.5 Intermediate Transfer DrumType

7.7.5.1 Outline
0008-5369
The transfer assembly consists of an intermediate transfer drum, secondary pre-transfer charging assembly, secondary transfer belt, separation static
eliminating assembly, and intermediate transfer drum (ITD) cleaning roller; it is designed to transfer toner from the photosensitive drum to paper and clean
residual toner.

Photosensitive
drum cartridge
Photosensitive
drum

Secondary pre-transfer
charging assembly
ITD cleaning roller

Intermediate
M
transfer drum

Drum motor

ITD cleaning roller solenoid

SL
Secondary transfer belt

Separation
static eliminator CL

M
Secondary transfer belt clutch
Main motor
F-7-77

T-7-11

Drum motor: rotates the intermediate transfer drum.

7-47
 Chapter 7

Main motor: rotates the secondary transfer belt.

Secondary transfer belt clutch: sets/moves away the secondary transfer belt.
ITD cleaning roller solenoid: sets/moves away the ITD cleaning roller.

7.7.5.2 Controlling the Secondary Transfer Belt Locking Mechanism

0008-5374
The secondary transfer belt assembly is locked to the intermediate transfer drum before starting secondary transfer.
Normally, the secondary transfer belt assembly remains away from the intermediate transfer drum, and is locked to the intermediate transfer drum as
needed.
The secondary transfer belt clutch turns on as soon as paper reaches the secondary transfer belt assembly, turning on the secondary belt cam to move up
the secondary transfer belt assembly.
As a result, the paper is forced against the intermediate transfer drum, and toner is transferred from the intermediate transfer drum to the paper.
When the paper has moved away and secondary transfer ends, the secondary transfer belt clutch is turned off to move the transfer belt away from the
intermediate transfer drum.

Intermediate transfer drum Paper

Secondary transfer belt

cam

Secondary transfer belt

assembly

CL Secondary transfer belt clutch

F-7-78

7.7.5.3 Controlling the ITD Cleaning Roller

0008-5376
The ITD cleaning roller is forced against the intermediate transfer drum immediately before secondary transfer.
Normally, the ITD cleaning roller is kept away from the intermediate transfer drum, and is forced against the intermediate transfer drum as needed.
When cleaning is needed, the ITD cleaning roller solenoid is turned on to turn on the ITD cleaning roller cam, thereby forcing the ITD cleaning roller
against the intermediate transfer drum.
When secondary transfer ends and ITD cleaning is over, the ITD cleaning roller solenoid is turned off to move the ITD cleaning roller away from the
intermediate transfer drum.

ITD cleaning roller cam

Intermediate
transfer drum

ITD cleaning roller solenoid

SL

ITD cleaning roller

F-7-79

7-48
 Chapter 7

7.7.6 Charging for Static Attraction

7.7.6.1 Outline
0008-5419
The circuit used to control charging for static attraction has the following functions:
- Turning on and off the attraction current
- Controlling the level of attraction current
- Controlling the level of attraction current
7.7.6.2 Turning On and Off the Attraction Current
0008-5420
The drive signal from the control PCB is used to turn on and off the output of the high-voltage transformer.
The attraction current can also be turned on and off using level signals.
7.7.6.3 Switching the Levels of Attraction Current
0008-5421
The level signal from the control PCB is used to control the output of the high-voltage transformer.
A circuit provided with a function to switch the positive and negative terminals of the high-voltage output is used at times.
7.7.6.4 Controlling the Attraction Current to a Specific Level
0008-5422
The attraction current is controlled to a specific level using sample signals from the secondary side of the high-voltage transformer.
7.7.7 Pre-Transfer Charging
7.7.7.1 Outline
0008-5423
The circuit used to control the pre-transfer charging has the following functions:
- Turning on and off the pre-transfer corona current
- Controlling the pre-transfer corona current to a specific level
- Switching the levels of the pre-transfer current (DC component)
- Preventing DC component overcurrent for the pre-transfer corona current
7.7.7.2 Turning On and Off the Pre-Transfer Corona Current
0008-5424
The drive signal from the control PCB is used to turn on and off the output of the highvoltage transformer.
7.7.7.3 Controlling the Level of the Pre-Transfer Corona Current
0008-5425
To eliminate the effects of changes in the environment on corona charging, the DC component of the pre-transfer charging assembly is controlled to a
specific level of current by obtaining sample signals from the secondary side of the DC transformer. (The AC transformer is controlled to a specific level
of voltage.)
7.7.7.4 Controlling the Pre-Transfer Corona Current to a Specific Level (DC component)
0008-5426
The control level for the pre-transfer corona current (DC component) varies according to the pre-transfer charging level signal.
To reduce the effects of changes in the environment, some machines vary the level of the pre-transfer corona current based on the temperature and humidity
readings from an environment sensor.

( A)
Pre-transfer corona current

Large

0
8 16 (V)

Pre-transfer charging
level signal
F-7-80

7-49
 Chapter 7

Humidity (%)

Pre-transfer current
( A)

F-7-81

7.7.7.5 Preventing DC Component Overcurrent for the Pre-Transfer Corona Current

0008-5429
In the event that an overcurrent flows into the pre-transfer charging assembly, the highvoltage transformer stop signal will be generated to temporarily cut
the corona current (DC/AC component) applied to the pre-transfer charging assembly.
The copier continues to operate even when the high-voltage transformer stop signal is generated, and the application of corona current will be resumed as
soon as the application current returns to a normal level.
In the event that the high-voltage transformer stop signal continues to be generated because of leakage, as by a broken charging wire, the application of
corona current will not be resumed unless the cause is removed.
7.7.8 Transfer Charging
7.7.8.1 Outline
0008-5431
The transfer charging may be any of the following:
1. Transfer corona charging
2. Transfer roller charging
3. Transfer blade charging
7.7.8.2 Controlling the Transfer Corona Charging
0008-5433
a. Outline
The circuit used to control the transfer corona charging has the following functions:
- Turning on and off the transfer corona current
- Controlling the transfer corona current to a specific level
- Controlling the level of the transfer corona current (DC component)
b. Turning On and Off the Transfer Corona Current
The drive signal from the control PCB is used to turn on and off the high-voltage transformer.

c. Controlling the Transfer Corona Current to a Specific Level

To eliminate the effects of changes in the environment to the corona charging, the DC component of the transfer charging is controlled to a specific level
by obtaining sample signals from the secondary side of the DC transformer.

d. Controlling the Level of the Transfer Corona Current

The efficiency of transferring toner from the photosensitive drum to paper is affected mostly by changes in the environment (temperature, humidity) and
the type of paper used.
If the charging current from the transfer charging assembly is maintained at a specific level by constant current control, the copy density will remain stable
even when changes occur in the environment.
Transfer current

(+)

Absolute humidity (%AH)

F-7-82

Some machines change the transfer corona current according to the type of paper (plain, thick, transparency) or in double-sided and overlay copying mode.
7.7.8.3 Controlling the Transfer Roller Charging
0008-5437
a. Outline

7-50
 Chapter 7

The circuit used to control the transfer roller bias has the following functions:
- Turning on and off the transfer roller bias.
- Controlling the transfer roller bias to a specific level
- Correcting the level of the transfer roller bias
- Detecting errors in the transfer roller bias
- Switching the polarity of the transfer roller bias (cleaning mode control)
- Controlling the current to a specific level in measurement mode
b. Turning On and Off the Transfer Roller Bias
The CPU on the control PCB causes multiple signals to be sent to the transfer bias control circuit.
The combination of these signals determines the application bias.
EX: Combinations of Signals

T-7-12

Transfer output mode Transfer output mode Types of bias

0 1
0 0 Cleaning bias
1 0 Bias for transfer
0 1 Bias for reference
1 1 Sheet-to-sheet bias

The following four types of transfer roller biases may be used:

b-1 Bias for Transfer

This is equivalent to the transfer bias of the corona charging method, and a DC voltage (constant voltage) is applied.

b-2 Cleaning Bias

The use of a direct transfer method at times allows toner on the photosensitive drum to adhere to the transfer roller (as when a jam occurs).
To return such toner to the photosensitive drum, a DC voltage (constant voltage) is applied to the transfer roller.
b-3 Reference Bias
Changes in the environment or deterioration of the transfer roller causes the resistance of the transfer roller to change, possibly affecting the efficiency of
transfer. The application level of the transfer bias is corrected to limit the effects of the changes in the efficiency of transfer to image quality.
The reference DC bias (constant voltage) is the bias applied each time the Start key is pressed.

b-4 Sheet-to-Sheet Bias

The level of the bias is reduced so as to prevent adhesion of toner to the transfer charging roller between sheets in continuous copying mode.
Sample Sequence of Operations
Main power Control panel Start
switch ON power switch key ON
ON

SLEEP STBY INTR SCFW SCFW LSTR STBY

SCRV

SCRV

Main motor (M1)

Cleaning bias

Reference bias

Sheet-to-sheet bias

Transfer bias

F-7-83

c. Controlling the Voltage of the Transfer Roller Bias to a Specific Level

The bias used for transfer is controlled to a specific voltage by obtaining sample signals from the secondary side of the DC transformer.

d. Correcting the Level of the Transfer Roller Bias (ATVC control)

To correct the changes in transfer efficiency caused by changes in the environment or deterioration of the transfer roller, a reference bias is applied and the
resistance of the transfer roller is measured, thereby automatically controlling the level at which the bias for transfer is applied.
This control mechanism is executed during initial rotation each time the Start key is pressed (the application voltage cannot change during continuous
copying mode.)

e. Detecting an Error in the Transfer Roller Bias

Overcurrent is detected by obtaining sample signals from the secondary side of the highvoltage transformer.
When the overcurrent detection circuit detects overcurrent, it prevents the generation of the transfer roller bias.

f. Switching the Polarity of the Transfer Roller Bias (cleaning mode control)
A cleaning mechanism (cleaning mode) is provided to prevent adhesion of toner to the fixing charging roller.
In cleaning mode, the polarity of the DC bias is switched while the drum is rotating (but not during transfer), and the resulting bias is applied to the transfer
charging roller to return the toner to the photosensitive drum.

g. Controlling the Current to a Specific Level in Measurement Mode

The internal resistance of the transfer charging roller varies from roller to roller and depending on the environment of the site. A current of a specific level

7-51
 Chapter 7

is applied to the transfer charging roller, and the CPU detects any change in the internal resistance as a change in voltage (measurement mode).
The CPU uses the detected voltage for correction of the transfer roller bias.
If overcurrent flows to the output side of the transformer (e.g., because of changes in the environment), the current limiter circuit turns on to prevent current
larger than a specific level.
7.7.8.4 Controlling the Transfer Blade Charging
0008-5442
a. Outline
The circuit used to control the transfer blade charging has the following functions:
- Turning on and off the transfer blade bias
- Controlling the transfer blade bias to a specific level of current
- Controlling the level of the transfer bias

b. Turning On and Off the Transfer Blade Bias

The drive signal from the control PCB is used to turn on and off the output of the highvoltage transformer.
Some copiers are equipped with a special sensor to accommodate high copying speeds for control; such a sensor is mounted inside the transfer drum, and
is used to control the timing at which high voltage is generated according to the position of the transfer medium.
The following shows the relationship between the sensor and the signal plate:
Signal plate C: transfer high-voltage output ON for side A
Signal plate D: transfer high-voltage output ON for side B

Signal plate C

Side A paper
Transfer blade

Control PCB

Side B paper
C sensor Signal plate D
F-7-84

c. Controlling the Transfer Blade Bias to a Specific Level of Current

To eliminate the changes in the environment, the DC component of the transfer blade bias is controlled to a specific level of current by obtaining sample
signals from the secondary side of the DC transformer.

d. Controlling the Level of the Transfer Blade Bias

A color machine switches the bias to an appropriate level in keeping with the number of transfers made on a single print. This is because a single sheet will
carry multiple colors (toners); the bias is increased as the number of transfers increases, thereby ensuring continued good transfer.
The levels of the bias is also switched to suit the type of paper (plain, thick, transparency).
If a machine is equipped with an environment sensor, it uses the readings (temperature, humidity) from the sensor to correct the level of the bias.
7.7.9 Controlling the Static Eliminating Mechanism
7.7.9.1 Outline
0008-5444
A charging assembly used to eliminate static charge may be an internal static eliminating assembly or an external static eliminating assembly, and the
method used may be a corona method or a roller method.
7.7.9.2 Controlling the Static Eliminating Current
0008-6815
a. Outline
The circuit used to control static removing current has the following functions:
- Turning on and off the AC component of the static eliminating current
- Turning on and off the DC component of the static eliminating current
- Controlling the level of the DC component of the static eliminating current
- Controlling the static eliminating current to a specific level
- Controlling the static eliminating current to a specific level of voltage
- Detecting an error in the static eliminating current
b. Turning On and Off the AC Component of the Static Eliminating Current
The drive signal from the control PCB is used to turn on and off the AC output of the highvoltage transformer.
A level signal may also be used to turn on and off the AC output.

c. Turning On and Off the DC Component of the Static Eliminating Current

The drive signal from the control PCB is used to turn on and off the DC output of the high-voltage transformer.

7-52
 Chapter 7

A level signal may also be used to turn on and off the DC output.

d. Controlling the Level of the DC Component of the Static Eliminating Current

The level signal from the control PCB is used to control the DC output from the high-voltage transformer.

e. Controlling the Static Eliminating Current to a Specific Level

The static eliminating current is controlled to a specific level by obtaining sample signals from the secondary side of the high-voltage transformer.

f. Controlling the Static Eliminating Current to a Specific Level of Voltage

The static eliminating current is controlled to a specific level of voltage by obtaining sample signals from the secondary side of the high-voltage
transformer.

g. Detecting an Error in the Static Eliminating Current

A sample signal is obtained from the secondary side of the high-voltage transformer to detect an overcurrent.
If the overcurrent detection circuit detects an overcurrent caused by a short-circuit in the charging wire or the like, it will cut off the static eliminating
current.

h. Other Control Mechanism

Some machines are equipped with a special sensor to accommodate high printing speeds. Such a sensor is mounted inside the transfer drum, and is used
to control the timing at which high voltage is generated in keeping with the position of a transfer medium.
The following shows the relationship between the sensor and the signal plates:
Signal plate C: internal/external static eliminating high-voltage output ON for side B
Signal plate D: internal/external static eliminating high-voltage output ON for side A

Signal plate D
Side B paper

Control PCB

Internal/external
static eliminator Side A paper

C sensor
Signal plate C
F-7-85

7-53
 Chapter 7

7.8 Separation
7.8.1 Outline
7.8.1.1 Outline
0008-5447
Any of the following methods of separation may be used:
1. Static separation method
2. Static eliminator separation method (curvature separation)
3. Separation claw/static separation method
4. Curvature/static separation method
7.8.2 Static Separation Method
7.8.2.1 Outline
0008-5449
The circuit used to control separation corona charging has the following functions:
- Turning on and off the separation corona current
- Controlling the separation corona current to a specific level
- Controlling the separation corona current (DC component) to a specific level
- Preventing DC component overcurrent for the separation corona current
- Detecting AC component overcurrent for the separation corona current

a. Turning On and Off the Separation Corona Current

The drive signal from the control PCB is used to turn on and off the output of the highvoltage transformer.

b. Controlling the Separation Corona Current to a Specific Level

To eliminate the effects of changes in the environment to corona charging, the DC component of the separation charging assembly is controlled to a specific
level of current by obtaining sample signals from the secondary side of the DC transformer. (The AC transformer is controlled to a specific level of voltage.)

c. Controlling the Separation Corona Current (DC component) to a Specific Level

The control level of the separation corona current (DC component) is varied according to the level of voltage of the separation charge level signal.
To limit the effects of the environment, some copiers are designed to vary the level of the separation corona current based on the temperature and humidity
readings from the environment sensor.

( A)
-
current
Separation corona

8 16 (V)
0
+
Separation charging
level signal
F-7-86

Temperature( c)

Drum surface potential

"high"
Separation current

Drum surface potential

"low"
( A)

F-7-87

Some other copiers use the type of transfer medium (plain, thick, transparency) in addition to the temperature and humidity readings from the environment
sensor to control the output to an appropriate level.

d. Preventing the DC Component Overcurrent for the Separation Corona Current

The separation charging assembly is equipped with a function to temporarily cut off the corona current (DC/AC component) applied to the separation
charging assembly by generating the high-voltage transformer stop signal upon detection of an overcurrent to the separation charging assembly.
The copier continues to operate in the presence of the high-voltage transformer, and will resume the application of the corona current as soon as the
application current returns to a normal level.
If the high-voltage transformer stop signal remains because of overcurrent caused by leakage (e.g., as a result of a broken charging wire), the application
of the corona current will not be resumed unless the cause is removed.

7-54
 Chapter 7

7.8.3 Static Eliminator Separation Method (curvature separation)

7.8.3.1 Outline
0008-5450
The circuit used to control the static eliminator bias has the following functions:
- Turning on and off the static eliminator bias and controlling it to a specific level of voltage
- Switching the level of voltage for the static eliminator bias
- Controlling the static eliminator bias to a specific level of current
- Switching the level of current to suit the internal humidity
7.8.3.2 Turning On and Off the Static Eliminator Bias and Switching Its Levels
0008-5451
The CPU on the control PCB turns on the secondary side of the high-voltage transformer, thereby applying the static eliminator bias.
The voltage of the signal is changed to switch the levels of the voltage applied to the static eliminator.
7.8.3.3 Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias to a Specific Level of Current
0008-5452
The static eliminator bias is controlled to a specific level of current by obtaining sample signals from the secondary side of the high-voltage transformer.
7.8.3.4 Switching the Level of Current for the Static Eliminator Bias
0008-5453
The level signals are switched to change the levels of current according to the internal humidity of the machine.
The conditions for separation physically differ when making double-sided prints or when printing on the first side and the second side of an overlay print.
For this reason, a level signal is used to switch the levels of the bias voltage, thereby enabling stable separation.
7.8.3.5 Preventing Faulty Separation of Thin Paper
0008-5454
Separation of thin paper tends to fail in certain environmental conditions.
To ensure separation from the drum, the voltage applied to the static eliminator may be raised in service mode.
7.8.4 Separation Claw/Static Separation Method
7.8.4.1 Outline
0008-5455
Paper is separated from the transfer drum by means of separation claws and push-up rolls. Paper is retained on the transfer drum by the work of static
bonding; the separation charging assembly is used to apply AC corona and DC bias to facilitate separation of paper from the transfer drum.
(For the static separation method, see "Static Separation Method.")
7.8.4.2 Separation Claw/Push-Up Roll Separation Method
0008-5456
Paper is separated by means of separation claws and push-up rolls as follows:
1) The follwing figure shows paper immediately after the end of transfer. The separation claw solenoid and the separation claw push-up solenoid are off.

Separation push-up solenoid

Separation
claw roll Paper
OFF
Separation claw

Separation claw

Edge roll

Separation solenoid
F-7-88

2) The separation claw solenoid and the separation claw push-up solenoid turn on, causing the separation claw rolls to come into contact with the transfer
drum sheet. The separation claws are away from the transfer drum sheet for the thickness of the separation claw rolls.
The push-up rolls force the transfer drum sheet upward from inside using the drive of the separation push-up solenoid, deforming part of the transfer
drum sheet and, thereby, increasing the curvature. Thereafter, the rigidity of paper causes its leading edge to move away from the transfer drum sheet
to allow the separation claws to slide under for full separation.

7-55
 Chapter 7

Separation push-up solenoid

Separation
claw roll ON

Edge Separation push-up roll

Rim

Separation claw solenoid

F-7-89

7.8.5 Curvature Separation/Static Separation Method

7.8.5.1 Curvature Separation/Static Separation Method
0008-5457
The curvature separation method takes advantage of the rigidity of paper to separate it from the transfer belt.
Because of its low rigidity, thin paper tends to wrap around the transfer belt instead of separating from the transfer belt. The separation charging assembly
applies AC corona and DC bias to ensure separation of thin paper from the transfer belt. (For static separation method, see "Static Separation Method.")

Separation charging assembly

Paper

Transfer belt

F-7-90

7-56
 Chapter 7

7.9 Drum Cleaning

7.9.1 Outline
7.9.1.1 Outline
0008-5458
The drum cleaning mechanism is used to remove residual toner from the surface of the drum by means of a cleaning blade so as to prepare for the next
copy. The waste toner collected by the cleaning blade is moved to a storage case by a feed blade. Some copies are equipped with a waste toner sensor, and
are capable of indicating a message when the storage case becomes full with waste toner.

Cleaning blade

Photosensitive
drum

Feeding blade Scoop-up sheet

F-7-91

7.9.2 Monitoring the Level of Waste Toner

7.9.2.1 Outline
0008-5459
The waste toner storage case may be monitored by any of the following ways.
- Type 1: Detection is made with reference to the concentration of waste toner.
- Type 2: Detection is made with reference to the weight of waste toner.
- Type 3: Detection is made with reference to transmission of light.
Detection is carried out as follows:
7.9.2.2 Type 1
0008-5332
The waste toner collected by the cleaning blade is sent to the rear of the waste toner container by the feed blade mounted inside the drum cleaner.
The following figure shows a coupling used to transmit the drive of the motor to rotate the feed blade; it is designed to come into contact with the drive
segment of the feed blade by the force of a spring.
When the waste toner container becomes full, the rotation of the feed blade starts to drag, causing the coupling to move to and fro in the axial direction,
pressing the waste toner sensor lever and, as a result, repeatedly turning on and off the waste toner sensor. The control PCB monitors the output of the
waste toner sensor for a specific period of time (e.g., 8 sec) after the motor turns on; it will assume that the waste toner container is full if it has detected
the output of the waste toner sensor a specific number of times (e.g., 10 times), indicating a message to that effect on the control panel during standby.

Waste toner sensor

Waste toner feed blade

Main motor
Cleaner container
Coupling M

Photosensitive drum

F-7-92

7.9.2.3 Type 2
0008-5333
As the waste toner bottle collects waste toner, it grows heavier, causing the waste toner sensor to detect the sensor flag. In response, the control PCB will
assume that the waste toner bottle has become full and indicate a message to that effect on the control panel during standby.

7-57
 Chapter 7

M Main motor

Waste toner
lock sensor

(front of body)

Cleaner unit

Waste toner bottle

Sensor flag

Waste toner container sensor

F-7-93

7.9.2.4 Type 3
0008-5334
The waste toner detection device mounted to the drum cartridge is used to monitor waste toner.
The detection device consists of a light-emitting segment and a light-receiving segment, and the light from the light-emitting segment hits the detection
window of the drum cartridge. If the waste toner around the detection window has been swept away by the stirring plate inside, the light will move through
the waste toner container and for detection by the light-receiving segment. Thereafter, the control PCB checks the time it takes waste toner to cover the
detection window and starts to prevent the light from moving through.
The control PCB will assume that the waste toner container is full when the time it has measured is less than a specific length, and will communicate the
fact to the rear control PCB and write the data to the drum cartridge memory.

7-58
 Chapter 7

Waste toner detection block

Light-receiving
segment

Stirring
plate
Detection
window

Light-
emitting
segment
Photosensitive
drum
Toner feed roller
Waste toner

F-7-94

7.9.3 Moving Waste Toner

7.9.3.1 Outline
0008-5335
Waste toner is moved and stored by any of the following ways:
Type 1: waste toner scraped by a cleaning blade from the surface of the photosensitive drum is stored inside a waste toner container.
Type 2: waste toner is moved to and collected inside the photosensitive drum.
Type 3: aste toner is moved to and collected in a waste toner container.
7.9.3.2 Type 1
0008-5338
In the case of the following two types, the capacity of the waste toner container is determined in view of the life of the cartridge and drum unit in question
to enable storage of all waste toner occurring during the service life:
1) cartridge type, in which the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing assembly, and cleaner are constructed as a single entity
2) drum unit type, in which the photosensitive drum, primary charging assembly, and cleaner are constructed as a single entity
In a non-personal model, the toner scraped off the surface of the photosensitive drum by a cleaning blade is moved to the rear of the waste toner container
by means of a feed blade. When the case becomes full, the increase in the drive torque of the blade will turn on the torque limiter to shut off the drive from
the drive motor.
Some copiers are equipped with a mechanism to both detect the condition of the waste toner container and indicate the fact in a display.

Detecting and Indicating the Condition of the Waste Toner Container

The coupling (toque limiter) shown in the following figure is forced against the blade drive segment by the work of a spring to transmit the drive of the
main motor, causing the waste toner feed blade to rotate.
When the waste toner container becomes full of waste toner, the rotation of the waste toner feed blade starts to drag, causing the coupling to move to and
fro in the axial direction. In this condition, the coupling presses the waste toner sensor lever so that the waste toner sensor repeatedly turns on and off.
If the control PCB detects the activation of the waste toner sensor for a specific period of time or more within a specific length of time, it will assume that
the waste toner container has become full.
The message "Waste Toner Container Full" will appear in the display during standby; advise the user to make a service person call if this message has
appeared.
The copier is capable of making about 200 copies after this message has appeared. It is important, however, to replace the drum unit as soon as possible.

7-59
 Chapter 7

Waste toner sensor

PS

Waste toner sensor lever

Cleaner container Blade drive (light-blocking plate)
Waste toner feed blade
(fulcrum)

Cleaning blade Coupling M

Main motor
Photosensitive drum

F-7-95

7.9.3.3 Type 2
0008-5343
When the photosensitive drum rotates, its drive is carried to the drum gear, cleaning roller gear, screw gear, coupling, and feed screw in sequence, and the
feed screw starts to move the waste toner collected by the cleaning blade and the cleaning roller to the photosensitive drum.
The coupling is designed to transmit drive when it is forced against the screw gear by a spring.
When the inside of the photosensitive drum or the pipe becomes full of toner, the rotation of the screw will start to drag, consequently pushing up the
coupling to cut the drive to the screw and causing the lever to press a microswitch.
The message "Waste Toner Container Full" will appear during copying operation; advise the user to make a service person call if this message has appeared.
The copier is capable of making about 200 copies after this message has appeared, but it is important to replace the drum unit as soon as possible.
The message cannot be turned off by mere replacement of the drum, requiring the use of service mode to clear it.

Waste toner detection

MS
Coupling
Pipe Screw
Gear

Cleaning roller

Gear

(front) (rear)

Photosensitive drum Drum gear

F-7-96

7.9.3.4 Type 3
0008-5344
a. Monitoring the Waste Toner Feed Screw
At times, the inside of the waste toner pipe can become clogged, hindering the rotation of the waste toner feed screw. The feed screw lock detection
mechanism is used to prevent such a problem.
The gear A used to drive the waste toner feed screw is subjected to a force in the axial direction when the feed screw becomes locked, and will move up
along the axis as a result. The movement of the gear A is monitored by the waste toner feed screw lock detecting switch.
When the waste toner feed screw detect-ing switch is pressed by the gear A, the main motor will stop and an error code (e.g., E013) will be indicated on
the control panel.

7-60
 Chapter 7

DC controller PCB

Waste toner feed screw

lock detection signal
Cleaner assembly
Waste toner feed
screw lock detecting
switch

Cleaner assembly
waste toner feed screw Gear A

Waste toner feed screw

M
Waste toner pipe
NP6750
Main motor
(drum motor for NP6085)
If the waste toner feed screw
becomes locked,
the gear A moves in the
direction of the arrow.

Waste toner container

F-7-97

7-61
 Chapter 7

7.10 Others
7.10.1 Cleaning the Charging Wire/Charging Roller
7.10.1.1 Outline
0008-5348
The auto cleaning mechanism for the charging assemblies include the following two types:
1) Charging wire auto cleaning mechanism
2) Primary charging roller auto cleaning mechanism
In most cases, the auto cleaning mechanism for a specific charging wire is turned on for the following conditions:
[1] The temperature of the fixing assembly is below a specific level when the power switch is turned on.
[2] The charging wire cleaning mechanism is turned on in user mode.
[3] The cleaner is not at the home position when the power switch is turned on.
[4] The last rotation period executed after making every so many copies (e.g., 2,000) has ended
The following figure shows a typical cleaning mechanism used to clean the primary charging wire.

Control PCB
Cleaning motor CCW rotation signal
Cleaning motor CW rotation signal

(clockwise)

(counter-
clockwise)

Primary charging wire

Cleaning pad
Primary charging wire
cleaning motor
F-7-98

7.10.1.2 Cleaning the Charging Wire

0008-5353
Each cleaning wire is cleaned by moving back and forth a cleaning pad.
The charge wire cleaner is driven by the cleaning motor, and is moved forward starting at the cleaning home position detecting switch at the front.
The charging wire cleaner is moved in reverse to the home position when it reaches the cleaner rear switch.
7.10.1.3 Controlling the Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
0008-5355
The charging wire cleaning motor is controlled by means of the charging wire cleaner forward signal and the charging wire cleaner reverse signal.
7.10.1.4 Detecting an Error in Cleaning the Charging Wire
0008-5356
The CPU on the control PCB will assume the presence of an error if the movement of the charging wire cleaner is as follows when cleaning the wire:
- The charging wire cleaner has been moved forward from the home position; however, the detecting switch at the opposite end does not detect it within a
specific period of time.
- The charging wire cleaner has been moved in reverse from the opposite end; however, the home position detecting switch does not detect it within a
specific period of time.
7.10.1.5 Cleaning the Primary Charging Roller
0008-5357
Some primary charging assemblies (mostly of low- to medium-speed models) use a charging roller, which generates little ozone.
The primary charging roller is cleaned by turning on the primary charging roller cleaning solenoid while the primary charging roller is rotating, thereby
forcing the cleaning pad against the primary charging roller and, at the same time, moving it back and forth in the axial direction of the primary charging
roller.
In most models, this cleaning mechanism is used at the following timing:
- In the case of continuous mode making a specific number of prints or more (e.g., 50) , during last rotation following the end of printing operation.
- In the case of making a specific number of prints or less (e.g., 50), when the cumulative number of prints has reached a specific number (e.g., 500).
- When roller cleaning is executed in user mode ('adjustment/cleaning'.
The following figure shows the construction for a typical primary charging roller cleaning mechanism.

7-62
 Chapter 7

Solenoid
(ON)

Back-
and-forth
movement

Cleaning pad Primary charging roller

Photosensitive drum

F-7-99

7.10.2 Post-Cleaning Charging

7.10.2.1 Outline
0008-5359
The circuit used to control post-cleaning charging has the following functions:
- Turning on and off the post-cleaning current
- Controlling the post-cleaning current to a specific level of current
7.10.2.2 Turning On and Off the Post-Cleaning Corona Current
0008-5360
The output of the high-voltage transformer is turned on and off using the drive signal from the control PCB .
7.10.2.3 Controlling the Post-Cleaning Corona Current to a Specific Level
0008-5361
To eliminate the effects of changes in the environment to the corona charging, the DC component for the post-cleaning charging assembly is controlled to
a specific level by obtaining sample signals from the secondary side of the DC transformer.
7.10.3 Drum Heater
7.10.3.1 Drum Heater
0008-5362
The sensitivity of the photosensitive drum fluctuates according to the site environment (temperature, humidity).
To maintain the temperature of the surface of the photosensitive drum, a heater is mounted to the inside or the outside of the drum.
The AC power supplied to the drum heater is normally sent by way of a power switch, door switch, drum heater switch, and then AC driver.
The temperature of the drum is monitored at all times by a thermistor built into the drum heater.
If the temperature of the drum drops below a specific level, the output from the comparator circuit goes '1' turning on the trigger circuit. This condition in
turn turns on the SSR and, consequently, the drum heater.
If the surface temperature of the drum is higher than a specific level, the output from the comparator circuit goes '0' turning off the drum heater.
The temperature of the drum surface is maintained to a specific level by turning on and off the drum heater.
The follwing figure is a diagram depicting a typical configuration of the area around the drum heater.

7-63
 Chapter 7

+5VL +5VL

Drum thermistor
Drum thermistor signal

CPU
Drum heater Power switch
+24VL

SSR To other load

Drum heater
drive signal

+5VL
Supplied when power switch is ON or OFF.
+24VL

Driver PCB
F-7-100

7.10.4 Drum Cartridge Memory

7.10.4.1 Drum Cartridge Memory
0008-5363
The drum cartridge memory (e.g., EEPROM) consists of two areas; i.e., ROM area and RAM area. The ROM area holds the ID code unique to each drum
cartridge, and it is for reading only.
When the power switch is turned on or the cover is closed, the control PCB reads from the ROM area of the drum cartridge to find out whether an
appropriate cartridge is inserted.
The RAM area allows both reading and writing, and the control PCB writes to and reads from the drum cartridge memory at such times as programmed
to check the presence/absence of a drum cartridge and its life.
The data stored in the RAM area of the drum cartridge memory is read or written as follows:
<Reading>
- When the power switch is turned on.
- When the cover is closed.
<Writing>
- When the power switch is turned off.
- When the cover is opened.
- Each time copying operation ends (in continuous copying mode, at the end of continuous copying or at the end of jam removal).

Drum cartridge memory

1
2
3 Control PCB
Drum cartridge 4
5

1: drum cartridge memory data output signal

2: drum cartridge memory data input signal
3: drum cartridge memory serial clock signal
4: drum cartridge memory selection signal
5: drum cartridge present/absent signal
F-7-101

7-64
Chapter 8 PICKUP/FEED SYSTEM
 Contents

Contents

8.1 Outline............................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Outline of the Pickup/Feed System.............................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1.1 Pickup/Feed Point of Reference......................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1.2 Separation Mechanism ....................................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.2 Pickup System................................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.1 Cassette Pickup ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.1.1 Method of Pickup ............................................................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.1.2 Dentifying the Size of Paper ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-4
8.2.1.3 Movement of the Lifter .................................................................................................................................................................................8-12
8.2.1.4 Detecting the Stack Level .............................................................................................................................................................................8-15
8.2.1.5 Detecting the Absence of Paper ....................................................................................................................................................................8-17
8.2.1.6 Detecting the Last Sheet in the Cassette .......................................................................................................................................................8-18
8.2.1.7 Movement of the Tray...................................................................................................................................................................................8-19
8.2.2 Manual Pickup Assembly .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.2.2.1 Pickup............................................................................................................................................................................................................8-19
8.2.2.2 Identifying the Size of Paper.........................................................................................................................................................................8-22
8.2.2.3 Movement of the Lifter .................................................................................................................................................................................8-23
8.2.2.4 Identifying the Thickness of Paper ...............................................................................................................................................................8-24
8.2.2.5 Detecting a Transparency..............................................................................................................................................................................8-24
8.2.3 Paper Deck Pickup Assembly .................................................................................................................................................... 8-25
8.2.3.1 Pickup............................................................................................................................................................................................................8-25
8.2.3.2 Identifying the Size of Paper.........................................................................................................................................................................8-25
8.2.3.3 Movement of the Lifter .................................................................................................................................................................................8-25
8.2.3.4 Detecting the Level of Paper.........................................................................................................................................................................8-27
8.3 Feeding System ............................................................................................................................................................8-29
8.3.1 Controlling the Registration Roller............................................................................................................................................ 8-29
8.3.1.1 Controlling Registration................................................................................................................................................................................8-29
8.3.1.2 Adjusting Horizontal Registration ................................................................................................................................................................8-31
8.3.2 Attraction Roller ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-32
8.3.2.1 Attraction Roller............................................................................................................................................................................................8-32
8.4 Postcard Feed Unit .......................................................................................................................................................8-34
8.4.1 Duplexing/Overlay Mechanism ................................................................................................................................................. 8-34
8.4.1.1 Postcard Feed Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................................8-34
8.4.1.2 Duplexing/Overlay Mechanism Outline ......................................................................................................................................................8-34
8.4.1.3 Path for Double-Sided/Overlay Copying (up to holding tray assembly) ......................................................................................................8-35
8.4.1.4 Paper Path for the Double-Sided/Overlay Paths (up to the stacking assembly) ...........................................................................................8-37
8.4.1.5 Paper Path for Double-Sided Copying (up to stacking assembly) ................................................................................................................8-38
8.4.1.6 Jogging Mechanism ......................................................................................................................................................................................8-39
8.5 Duplexing Unit.............................................................................................................................................................8-41
8.5.1 Stacking Sheets .......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-41
8.5.1.1 Stacking Sheets .............................................................................................................................................................................................8-41
8.5.2 Switching the Feed Path............................................................................................................................................................. 8-41
8.5.2.1 Switching the Feed Path................................................................................................................................................................................8-41
8.5.3 Non-Stacking Operation ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-42
8.5.3.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................8-42
8.5.3.2 Outline of Operations....................................................................................................................................................................................8-42
8.5.4 Set-Back Operation .................................................................................................................................................................... 8-46
8.5.4.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................8-46
8.5.4.2 Set-Back Operations......................................................................................................................................................................................8-46
8.5.5 Preventing Stacking Faults ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-47
8.5.5.1 Operation of the De-Curling Sheet ...............................................................................................................................................................8-47
8.5.5.2 Operation of the De-Curling Roller ..............................................................................................................................................................8-48
8.5.6 Re-Pickup Path for Duplexing/Overlay Copying ...................................................................................................................... 8-48
 Contents

8.5.6.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-48

8.5.6.2 Type 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-48
8.5.6.3 Type 2 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-48
8.5.6.4 Type 3 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-50
8.5.6.5 Type 4 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-51
8.5.7 Re-Pickup from the Duplexing Unit .......................................................................................................................................... 8-51
8.5.7.1 Operation ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-51
8.5.8 Skip Operation ........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-52
8.5.8.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-52
8.5.8.2 Operation ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-52
8.5.8.3 Skip Operation for an Even Number of Originals ........................................................................................................................................ 8-53
8.5.8.4 Skip Operation for an Odd Number of Originals ......................................................................................................................................... 8-55
8.5.9 Reversal Delivery....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-56
8.5.9.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-56
8.5.9.2 Operations ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-57
8.5.10 Face-Down Delivery................................................................................................................................................................ 8-58
8.5.10.1 Face-Up Delivery........................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-58
8.5.10.2 Face-Down Delivery................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-58
8.5.10.3 Operations ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-58
8.5.11 Pre-Fixing Feeding Assembly.................................................................................................................................................. 8-60
8.5.11.1 Pre-Fixing Feeding Assembly .................................................................................................................................................................... 8-60
8.6 Controlling the Cassette Heater................................................................................................................................... 8-62
8.6.1 Controlling the Cassette Heater ................................................................................................................................................. 8-62
 Chapter 8

8.1 Outline
8.1.1 Outline of the Pickup/Feed System
8.1.1.1 Pickup/Feed Point of Reference
0008-5515
A machine may use either center reference or front reference when picking up and feeding paper.
In the case of center reference, paper is stacked in the pickup assembly in reference to the center (between front and rear) for pickup.
On the other hand, in front reference, paper is stacked in the pickup assembly against the front of the machine for pickup.

Paper

Paper
(direction of pickup)

(direction of pickup)

Stacking position inside the cassette Stacking position inside the cassette
(center reference) (front reference)
F-8-1

8.1.1.2 Separation Mechanism

0008-5517
The pickup assembly is equipped with a mechanism that prevents picking up multiple sheets of paper (double feeding); it is called a separation mechanism,
and is any of the following three types:
- Cassette claw type
- Separation roller type
- Cassette claw/separation roller combination type
- Separation pad type
a. Cassette Claw Type
The front and rear ends of the cassette are quipped with a claw, each holding down the edge of the second and subsequent sheets when the first sheet is
picked up.

Claws

F-8-2

b. Separation Roller Type

The cassettes of a separation roller type machine are not equipped with claws; instead, a separation roller is driven in the opposite direction of pickup, so
that any sheets which may have been picked in addition to the first sheet will be prevented from moving ahead owing to the friction against the separation
roller.

8-1
 Chapter 8

Pickup roller

Separation roller

Cassette

F-8-3

c. Cassette Claw/Separation Roller Combination Type

Some machines use both claws on cassettes and a separation roller.

d. Separation Pad Method

In the place of the separation roller, a separation pad is mounted in the separation mechanism.

Pickup roller

Registration Separation pad

roller

F-8-4

The manual feed pickup mechanism may be either of two types: a multifeeder type, in which multiple sheets may be placed on the tray, or a single feeder
type, in which one sheet is placed at a time.
In the case of a multifeeder type, the pickup assembly is equipped with a separation mechanism; in the case of a single feeder type, on the other hand, such
a mechanism is absent.

8-2
 Chapter 8

8.2 Pickup System

8.2.1 Cassette Pickup
8.2.1.1 Method of Pickup
0008-5526
a. Type 1
When the pickup clutch turns on while the main motor is rotating, the pickup roller starts to rotate to move paper as far as the registration roller.
The paper path is equipped with photointerrupers, and a jam will be identified if paper fails to reach a specific sensor within a specific period of time,
displaying the Jam message on the control panel.
The presence/absence of paper inside the cassette is detected by means of a photointerrupter, and the absence is indicated by displaying the Add Paper
message on the control panel.

CL CL CL

Registration Pickup Multifeed-

clutch clutch er pickup
clutch
Photosensi-
tive drum

Registra-
tion roller
Multifeeder
PS pickup roller

PS
PS

Pickup roller
Cassette size detection

Cassette

F-8-5

b. Type 2
The paper inside the cassette is held up by a lifter, and is kept in contact with the pickup roller.
When the pickup clutch turns on, the pickup roller starts to rotate to move the paper ahead. Then, the pickup roller releasing solenoid turns on, thereby
moving the pickup roller away from the surface of paper.
The paper is moved to the feed path, and then onto the registration roller by the vertical path roller. (The feed roller and the separation roller make sure
that only one sheet of paper is moved to the feed path.)

8-3
 Chapter 8

Photosensitive drum
Registration roller
M

PS

Vertical
path
roller
Feed roller
Pickup clutch PS
CL
SL
Pickup roller
releasing solenoid Pickup roller

Separation Vertical
roller path
roller
Lifter
Pickup clutch PS
CL

SL
Pickup roller
releasing solenoid

Lifter

F-8-6

8.2.1.2 Dentifying the Size of Paper

0008-5528
a. Type 1
When a cassette is slid into the cassette holder, the photointerrupers (4 pc.) arranged at the rear of the cassette holder turn on or remain off.
Each combination of the states of the photointerrupers indicates to the CPU on the control PCB the presence of a cassette and the size of paper inside it.

T-8-1

Arrangement of photo interrupters

PS PS PS PS
Paper size (left) (right)
No cassete 0 0 0 0
B5R (182x257) 0 0 0 1
A4 (297x210) 0 0 1 0
A3 (297x420) 0 0 1 1
Mini (STNTR) (148x216) 0 1 0 0
LGL (336x216) 0 1 0 1
LTR (279x216) 0 1 1 0
A4R (210x297) 0 1 1 1
LTRR (216x279) 1 0 0 0
A5R (149x218) 1 0 0 1
A5 (218x149) 1 0 0 1
MiniR (STMT) (216x148) 1 0 1 1
B5 (257x182) 1 1 0 0
B4 (364x257) 1 1 0 1
279.4x431.8 (11"x17") 1 1 1 0
U (182 to 283x198 to 354) 1 1 1 1
(unit: mm)

8-4
 Chapter 8

Arrangement of photo interrupters

PS PS PS PS
Paper size (left) (right)
1: light blocked by the photointerrupter.
0: light not blocked by the photointerrupter.

b. Type 2
b-1 Outline
The size of paper inside the cassette is identified by the paper size sensors mounted to the rear of the cassette holder.
When a cassette is slid inside the cassette holder, the paper width sensor and the paper length sensor are pushed by the protrusions on the cassette, enabling
the detection of the width and the length of paper. The copier identifies the size of paper with reference to combinations of paper width and length.
The protrusion used to push each size sensor operates in conjunction with the width guide and the length guide inside the cassette; and these guides may
be moved to adapt to a specific paper size.
b-2 Identifying the Size of Paper
The paper length sensor consists of two photointerrupers, and the CPU on the control PCB identifies the length of paper based on combinations of the
outputs of these two photointerrupters.
The paper width sensor, on the other hand, is a variable resistor, and the CPU identifies the width of paper with reference to the reading of resistance from
the resistor.
THe following figure shows the relationship between paper width and the output of the variable resistor. It is important to enter the basic numerical values
in service mode whenever the sensor or the control PCB has been replaced.

A4/A3
Variable resistor output

A4R

STMTR

STMTR A4R A4
(139.7mm) (210mm) (297mm)
Paper width
F-8-7

Width guide (rear)

Paper width sensor
Width guide (front)

Paper length sensor unit

Protrusion

Protrusion

Cassette

Length guide

F-8-8

b-3 Marking on the Width Guide Rail

8-5
 Chapter 8

The width guide rail found inside the cassette is provided with paper size positioning holes. Each of these openings is marked by an alphabet character (A
through M). Use the markings to find out whether the paper width is correctly set if the user reports a fault in paper movement (e.g., skew movement).
(These markings are not made known to the users.)

T-8-2

Marking Paper type Remarks

A STMTR
B A5R
C B5R
D KLGLR G3*
E GLTRR
F G-LGL G2*
G A4R
H LGL/LTRR G1*
I FLSC G4*
J B4/B5
K G-4T
L 279.4x431.8 mm (11"x17") /LTR
M A3/A4

T-8-3

Group Size
G1 * G-LTR
K-LGL
G2 * FOOLSCAP
OFFICIO
E-OFFI
A-LGL
A-OFFI
G3 * G-LGL
FOLIO
AUS-FLS
G4 * LTR
A-LTR
*Factory settings.

b-4. Paper Size

The CPU on the control PCB identifies the size of paper based on the inputs of paper width and paper length.
A group of paper sizes may be set from the table for identification in service mode.

T-8-4

Paper SZ2 SZ1 SZ2 SZ1 SZ2 SZ1 SZ2 SZ1

Width sensor ON/OFF 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
(slice level)
unit: mm
288.5 A4 - A3
273.7 (G4) - 279.4x431.8 mm -
(11"x17")
261.8 (G1) - - -
238 B5 - B4 -
212.9 STMT LTRR LGL (G2)
206.6 A5 A4R - (G3)
196.6 G-LGLR - -
186 K-LGLR - - -
165.2 B5R - - -
144.1 A5R - - -
STMTR - - -

8-6
 Chapter 8

c. Type 3
When a cassette is slid into the cassette holder, the four push switches arranged at the rear of the cassette holder are pushed.
The CPU uses the combination of those switches that are pushed to detect the presence/absence of a cassette and the size of paper as shown in the following
table.

T-8-5

Arrangement of push switch

Paper size (left) (right)

No cassette 0 0 0 0
B5 (257x182) 0 0 0 1
U-L2 (203 to 220x317 to 354) 0 0 1 0
A4 (210x297) 0 0 1 1
B5R (257x182) 0 1 0 0
B4 (364x257) 0 1 0 1
A4R (297x210) 0 1 1 0
A3 (420x297) 0 1 1 1
U-S1 (190 to 279x190 to 279) 1 0 0 0
U-S2 (190 to 279x3190 to 279) 1 0 0 1
U-L1 (203 to 220x317 to 354) 1 0 0 1
LTR (216x140) 1 0 1 1
STMT (216x279) 1 1 0 0
LGL (356x216) 1 1 0 1
LTR (279x216) 1 1 1 0
279.4x431.8 mm (11"x17") 1 1 1 1
(unit: mm)
0: SW is off.
1: SW is on.
*Note: Sizes may be registered within the indicated dimensions. (unit: mm)

To change the paper size, relocate the tab found at the rear of the cassette as shown in the following figure.
In addition, move the guide plate (screws to the bottom plate) to suit the new paper size.
If the tab is not located correctly, the resulting wrong operation sequence will cause jams.

8-7
 Chapter 8

Cassette

Tab No
Paper size
[4] [3] [2] [1]
B5
U-L2

Tab A4
Guide plates
B5R
B4
A4R
A3
U-S1
U-S2
U-L1
LTR
STMT
LGL
LTRR
279.4 431.8mm
(11" 17")
....... Tab position
[4] [3] [2] [1]

F-8-9

d. Type 4
When the front tray is inserted to the copier, specific microswitches will be pressed.
The CPU uses combinations of switches that are pushed to identify the size of paper.
The protrusions used to press these switches are arranged automatically when the paper guide plates on the tray are moved to suit a specific paper size.

To change the tray size, move the guide plates (screwed to the tray) to suit the paper size; then, be sure to register the new paper size in service mode.

T-8-6

Size detecting switch

Switch type Width detecting Length detecting
Paper type SW SW SW SW
LGL OFF OFF OFF OFF
279.4x431.8mm (11"x17") ON OFF OFF OFF
B4 OFF ON OFF OFF
A3 ON ON OFF OFF
A4R OFF OFF ON ON
LTRR OFF OFF OFF ON
B5R OFF OFF ON ON
LTR ON OF ON ON
B5 OFF ON ON ON
A4 ON ON ON ON

8-8
 Chapter 8

Side guide plate (rear)

Width detecting switch

Side guide plate (front)

Length detecting switch

Rear guide plate

F-8-10

e. Type 5
e-1. Outline
The size of paper is identified by the controller PCB when the user sets the dial on the cassette. (For the A/B-to-Inch switch, see the following figure.)
The result of identification is used by the copier to determine the distance over which the scanner will be moved and the area of laser exposure.
Location of the Dial

F-8-11

8-9
 Chapter 8

A/B-to-Inch Switch

Inch

AB

Switch
F-8-12

The upper cassette and the lower cassette differ in size, the upper being capable of dealing with B4 paper.
The side guide plates (side/rear) are found inside the cassette, designed for adjustment by hand. These guide plates are not equipped with a sensor, requiring
correct setting of the rotary switch.
Sizes of Cassettes
Upper cassette
(middle size cassette; A5 to B4)

Lower cassette
F-8-13

Side Guide Plate

Side guide plates

F-8-14

e-2. Paper Size

The width and the length of paper are detected by the copier's CPU when the user sets the dial. The following figure shows the rotary label attached to the
dial, while the following table shows a list of paper sizes.

T-8-7

8-10
 Chapter 8

A/B

Cassette type Main scanning direction Sub scanning direction

(mm) (mm)
A5 210 148
A5R 148 210
A4 297 210
A4R 210 297
A3 297 420
B5 257 182
B5R 182 257
B4 257 364
U1 Note 1 FLSO 216 330
OFICIO 216 317
A-OFI 220 340
E-OFI 220 320
B-OFI 216 355
A-LGL 220 340
U2Å@Note FOLIO 210 330
2
U3Å@Note A-FLS 206 337
1
SP-1Å@Note2 Set by user Set by user
SP-2Å@Note2 Set by user Set by user
ENVIÅ@Note3 Set by user Set by user

T-8-8

Inch

Cassette type Main scanningdirection Sub scanning direction (mm)

(mm)
STMT 216 140
STMTR 140 216
LTR 279 216
A-LTR 280 220
LTRR 216 279
A-LTRR 220 280
LGL 216 356
11x17 279 432
U4Å@Note1 267 203
U5Å@Note1 203 267
U6Å@Note1 203 330
U7Å@Note1 268 190
U8Å@Note1 190 269
SP-3Å@Note2 Set by user Set by user
SP-4Å@Note2 Set by user Set by user
ENV2Å@Note3 Set by user Set by user

8-11
 Chapter 8

Rotary Labels

STMT-R
A5R

ST M 2
A5

LT
A4

EN

EN
R
A4 LT

T
V-

V-
R SP R-

1
SP-
-2 R 4
A3 SP-1 LGL
SP-3
17
B5 11

U3
R

U8
U2
B5

U4
U1
B4

U7
U5
U6
A/b-configuration rotary label Inch-configuration rotary label
F-8-15

AU cassette
May be used for the following special paper types:

T-8-9

U1.... FOOLSCAP U2.... FOLIO U8.... K-LGL (R)

OFFICIO U3.... A-FLS
A-OFFICIO U4.... G-LTR
E-OFFICIO U5.... G-LTR (R)
B-OFFICIO U6.... G-LGL
A-LGL U7.... K-LGL

SP-1, -2, -3, -4 (special 1, 2, 3, 4)

The user may use user mode to register a default size of his/her preference. He/she may select a special cassette icon for display on the control panel.

8.2.1.3 Movement of the Lifter

0008-5770
a. Moving Up the Holding Plate
a-1 Type 1
When the cassette is slid into the copier, the lock becomes disengaged, and the tension of the spring pushes up the lifter plate mounted on the bottom of
the cassette, thereby forcing the top of the stack of sheets against the pickup roller.
When paper runs out, the paper detecting lever leaves the paper sensor, and the Add Paper message will be displayed on the control panel.

a-2 Type 2
When the size lever is operated, the spring lever corresponding to the selected size becomes engaged with the shaft, and the force of the spring of the lever
pushes up the holding plate. The locking lever is used to lock or unlock the holding plate.
The member indicated as [A] serves to operate the microswitch, thereby enabling the detection of the state of the cassette.
When the size lever is operated, one of the spring levers becomes engaged with the shaft, and the force of the spring is applied to the holding plate.

Holding plate

Spring lever
Size lever
Locking lever
[A]

[A]
Microswitch
Control
PCB

F-8-16

8-12
 Chapter 8

The cassette lifter is operated each time the cassette is set; it is also operated during copying operation so as to maintain the top of the stack of sheets at a
specific level.
The height of the stack is maintained at a specific level at all times by operating the lifter as needed and as follows:
The lifter is moved when the pickup roller shaft pushes the lifter trigger lever to re-ease the cam.
The lifter is stopped when the cassette runs out of paper.
1) When paper starts to run out, the swing of the pickup roller starts to increase.

Pickup roller
Feed roller Pickup roll shaft

Pickup movement range

Lifter
Paper

Lifter trigger lever

F-8-17

2) The top of the stack of sheets lowers, and the pickup roller shaft also lowers, causing the pickup roller shaft to push the lifter trigger lever; as a result,
the cam becomes free and starts to rotate.

Feed roller Pickup roller Pickup roller shaft

Lifter trigger lever Cam

F-8-18

3) The rotation of the cam moves the lever, thereby moving up the lifter.

Lifter gear

F-8-19

4) When the lifter moves up, the top of the stack of sheets also moves up, raising the pickup roller shaft; this condition causes the force of the spring to
draw back the lever, locking the cam in place.

Feed roller Lever Lever

Pickup roller shaft
Pickup roller

Spring Spring
Lifter

Paper

<Moving Up the Lifter> <Stopping the Lifter>

F-8-20

If the copier's main power is turned off while the lifter is moving up, the claws used to move it can remain in contact with the lifter gear, holding the lifter
still. In this condition, the lifter may not have been fully released, and sliding out the cassette can lead to damage. To avoid damage, be sure to turn off and

8-13
 Chapter 8

then on the main power so that the machine will be in standby state.

b. Lifter Type
b-1 Type 1
When the cassette is slid into the copier, the pickup roller starts to move down and the light-blocking plate leaves the lifter position sensor. As a result, the
lifter motor turns on, and then the lifter starts to move up. The lifter motor stops when the lifter position sensor detects the top of the stack of sheets placed
on the lifter.

Feed rollers

Pickup roller
Separation roller

Lifter detecting
lever

Lifter position
sensor Paper sensor

Pickup roller alarm Paper detecting lever

Paper detecting roll

Pickup roller Lifter

Paper

M Lifter motor

F-8-21

b-2 Type 2
When the cassette is slid into the copier, and the tray open/close detecting switch is pushed as a result, the lifter starts to move up; it stops when the lifter
position sensor detects the top of the stack of sheets placed on the lifter.
When paper runs out, and the paper sensor detects the sensor arm of the pickup roller assembly, the Add Paper message will be indicated. The lifter
continues to move up until the cam pushes the lifter upper limit detecting switch.

Releasing solenoid
Tray open/closed
Lifter detecting switch
Paper level sensor
Tray case
Lifter upper limit
detecting switch

Sensor arm

Pickup roller

Lifter lower limit

detecting switch
)
en
op
to
n
io
ct
ire

Paper absent sensor

(d

Open switch

Lifter position sensor

F-8-22

8-14
 Chapter 8

Paper absent sensor

Pickup/feed roller
Lifter position sensor
Sensor arm

Pickup roller

Separation roller

Lifter
Tray case

F-8-23

The lifter of the tray is suspended by a cable, and the cable is connected to a reel.
The reel rotates by the drive of the lifter motor, and the direction of its rotation takes up or feeds the cable, thereby moving up or down the lifter.

Tray case M
Reel Lifter motor

Cable

Cable
Cable

Lifter

F-8-24

8.2.1.4 Detecting the Stack Level

0008-5778
a. Type 1
The amount of paper is checked by a sensor on the tray, and is indicated in three levels in addition to absence; the mechanism of detection is as follows:
1. The level is assumed to be 1/2 or more of the maximum stack height until the sensor arm pressure plate reaches the light-blocking plate of the level
sensor.
2. As the lifter moves up, the light-blocking plate becomes subjected to pressure by the sensor arm pressure plate, causing the light-blocking plate to block
the level sensor and turning it on. At this time, the level is assumed to be between 1/2 and 1/4 of the maximum stack height.
3. When the sensor arm pressure plate moves up together with the lifter and, as a result, the light-blocking plate leaves the level sensor, the sensor turns
on. At this point, the level of the stack in the cassette is assumed to be 1/4 of the maximum stack height.
To identify the present position at time of power-on, the lifter first moves down to the lifter lower limit detecting switch so as to provide a point of reference
for detecting the level of paper.

8-15
 Chapter 8

No. [1] [2] [3]

Indication 1/2 or more 1/2-1/4 1/4 or less

on
control panel

Light-
Sensor arm blocking Sensor arm Sensor arm
pressure plate plate pressure plate Light- pressure plate Light-
blocking blocking
Level plate Lifter plate
sensor
Lifter
condition PS Lifter PS PS

Lifter
MS

Lifter lower limit detecting switch

Sensor state OFF ON OFF

F-8-25

b. Type 2
b-1 Outline
The level of paper inside the cassette is detected, and the result is indicated on the control panel in 4 levels; detection is made in reference to the distance
over which the lifter moves up, checked in relation to the light-blocking plate of the lifter gear blocking the sensor.
When paper starts to run out, the lifter starts to move up gradually; when paper fully runs out, the cassette paper sensor will turn on in response to its
absence.

Lifter
Cassette paper absent
sensor

Light-blocking plate
F-8-26

Detecting the Level of Paper Inside the Cassette (upper)

Full with paper Empty

Pickup roller Pickup roll

Paper Paper

Lifter
condition

Lifter Lifter

Gear and
level Light-blocking
sensor plate
Paper level sensor 2
Paper level sensor 1
(upper cassette)

Note: The diagrams are views from the rear of the copier.
F-8-27

The following table shows the relationship between the level of paper and the sensor and how each level is indicated on the control panel.

8-16
 Chapter 8

T-8-10

Level Paper level sensor 1 Paper level sensor 2 Indication on control

panel
500 0 0

1 0

1 1
0
0 1

c. Type 3
The level of paper is detected in reference to the reading on resistance from variable resistor operating in conjunction with the movement of the lifter drive
shaft.
Construction of the Mechanism

Variable
resistor
Paper level (high)

Variable
Paper level (low) resistor

F-8-28

8.2.1.5 Detecting the Absence of Paper

0008-5925
a. Type 1
When paper runs out, the paper detecting roll mounted to the pickup roller shaft drops. When the paper detecting lever leaves the paper sensor, the control
panel will indicate the Add Paper message.

Paper detecting lever Feed roller

Paper detecting roll Paper sensor

PS
PS

Pickup roller shaft

Pickup roller
arm

Paper
Separation roller
Lifter push-up plate

F-8-29

The presence/absence of paper inside the deck or the cassette is identified by means of a cassette paper sensor.

8-17
 Chapter 8

Paper sensor Paper detecting lever

Paper

Lifter
F-8-30

Paper sensor
Paper detecting lever

Lifter
F-8-31

8.2.1.6 Detecting the Last Sheet in the Cassette

0008-5933
A specific sheet in the cassette is identified as being the last sheet or otherwise. The paper path between the cassette paper sensor and the registration roller
is short; if the last sheet was picked up without identifying it as such, for instance in continuous copying, the writing of the next image would start before
the control PCB detects the absence of paper. By identifying the last sheet and, thereby, enabling the control PCB to make adjustments, soiling of the
photosensitive drum and the intermediate transfer drum may be prevented.
The cassette last sheet sensor is a reflection type, and consists of a light-emitting segment and a light-receiving segment. If there is paper, the light from
the light-emitting segment is reflected by the paper to reach the light-receiving segment. When the last sheet has moved, on the other hand, the light from
the light-emitting segment moves ahead without reaching the light-receiving segment; the control PCB will identify this condition as indicating the passage
of the last sheet, and will communicate the absence of paper to the control PCB so as to hold the writing of the next image.

One sheet of paper exists inside the cassette

Last sheet Pickup roller

Cassette last sheet sensor

No sheet of paper exists inside the cassette

F-8-32

8-18
 Chapter 8

8.2.1.7 Movement of the Tray

0008-5937
When the tray open switch is pushed, the lifter motor starts to rotate, and it will continue to rotate until the lifter lower limit switch detects the lifter.
Thereafter, when the tray releasing solenoid turns on to unlock the tray, the force of a spring will push the tray forward.
When the tray is pushed in, the tray open/close switch turns on, thereby causing the lifter motor to rotate in reverse and, consequently, moving up the lifter.

Tray open switch

Lifter upper limit switch

SW

Tray open/closed switch

SW
Lifter

SL

Upper/lower tray Lifter lower limit

SW
M
(direction of open)
Lifter motor
F-8-33

8.2.2 Manual Pickup Assembly

8.2.2.1 Pickup
0008-5939
a. Single Feeding
a-1 Type 1
When the pickup sensor detects paper, the main motor turns on, and its drive rotates the pickup roller.
The paper is first butted against the registration roller before it is moved forward.

(direction of pickup)
Paper

Pickup rollers

M Main motor

Sensor lever

Pickup sensor
F-8-34

a-2 Type 2
The manual feed pickup roller rotates when the clutch solenoid is on. The manual feed pickup roller starts to rotate as soon as the manual feed paper sensor
detects paper.
When the manual feed paper sensor detects the trailing edge of paper, the manual feed shutter moves up to prevent entry of the next sheet. The shutter
remains shut so as to prevent insertion of paper by hand while pickup is from the cassette.

8-19
 Chapter 8

SL M

Clutch solenoid

PS
Manual feed Manual Paper
pickup roller feed
paper SL
detection
Manual feed shutter
solenoid

F-8-35

a-3 Type 3
When the manual feed lever is set to the bottom, the upper pickup roller and the manual feed stopper are lifted.
At the same time, the manual feed mode sensor detects the lever, and the manual feed pickup mode select signal arrives at the control PCB to switch the
machine to manual feed mode.
When paper is inserted into the manual pickup assembly, the manual sensor turns on in response.
When paper is inserted and all the following conditions exist, advance pickup will be made and the paper will be sent as far as the upper paper sensor:
- The machine is in standby state.
- The manual feed mode sensor has detected the lever.
- The manual paper sensor has detected copy paper.
- If the previous copy was made in manual mode, it has been discharged.
When the Copy Start key has been pressed and the machine is ready for exposure, paper is moved to the registration roller as in the case of pickup from
the cassette.

M Main motor Manual feed lever

Registration roller Manual feed
clutch paper sensor
CL

PS
CL Upper cassette
pickup clutch Manual feed
stopper
Transparency sensor
(pre-registration sensor) PS
Upper
PS cassette
sensor Manual feed
Upper cassette
feed roller paper sensor

Manual feed pickup roller

Upper pickup roller

Registration roller Upper cassette separation roller

F-8-36

b. Multiple Feeding
b-1 Type 1
The multifeeder is capable of continuously picking up multiple sheets of paper stacked on the tray.
The paper on the tray is detected by the multifeeder paper sensor.
The paper stacked on the tray is forced against the pickup roller by the work of the guide plate. The drive of the main motor is transmitted through a clutch
to rotate the pickup roller.
The pickup roller and the separation pad serve to make sure that only one sheet of paper is sent to the registration roller.
The above series of operations is repeated for each pickup.

8-20
 Chapter 8

Main motor

M Multifeeder
pickup clutch

CL Multifeeder paper sensor

Paper sensor lever
Paper guide
plate
PS

Multifeeder tray

Photosensitive
drum
Registra- PS Separation pad
tion roller
Registration roller
paper sensor
Paper guide plate cam
Multifeeder
SL pickup solenoid
Spring
clutch

F-8-37

b-2 Type 2
When paper is stacked on the multifeeder tray, the multifeeder paper sensor turns on, enabling the use of the multifeeder on the control panel.
When the Start key is pressed after selecting the multifeeder, the pickup clutch turns on, and the pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller start to
rotate. Then, the roller locking solenoid turns on to move down the rotating pickup roller onto the stack of paper. The sheets on the tray will be picked up
and sent one by one into the machine.
When the multifeeder pickup sensor detects the movement of paper, the multifeeder solenoid turns off and, as a result, the pickup roller leaves the stack
of sheets. The intermediate roller rotates while the feed clutch is on, moving the paper to the registration roller.

Pickup motor
M

CL Pickup clutch

Multifeeder PS
pickup sensor Feed roller Pickup roller

Pickup roller locking solenoid

SL
CL
Feeding clutch Intermediate
roller Separation PS
roller Multifeeder
paper sensor
F-8-38

b-3 Type 3
The stack of sheets placed on the tray is forced against the pickup roller by the work of the guide plate. The drive of the pickup motor is transmitted to the
pickup roller through a clutch, causing the pickup roller to rotate.
The pickup roller and the separation pad make sure that only one sheet is fed to the preregistration roller and the registration roller.

8-21
 Chapter 8

Pickup motor

CL Multifeeder pickup clutch

Multifeeder pickup roller
Multifeeder paper sensor
Paper sensor lever
Transparency
sensor Multifeeder pickup sensor PS

PS Multifeeder tray

Paper guide plate

Separation pad

Pre-registration
roller 2 Multifeeder pickup solenoid
SL Paper guide plate cam
Spring
clutch

F-8-39

b-4 Type 4
The pickup roller rotates by the drive of the pickup motor to pick up paper. The pickup roller leaves the stack of paper when the multifeeder pickup roller
releasing solenoid turns on.
When paper is picked up from the multifeeder, it is checked by the paper thickness sensor to find out whether it is plain paper or thick paper.
The front slide guide and the rear slide guide are each equipped with a multifeeder paper sensor to detect the presence/absence of paper; if neither of them
detects paper, the Add Paper message will be indicated on the control panel.

Pickup motor

Registration roller Paper thickness Multifeeder

clutch CL detecting CL CL pickup clutch
roller clutch
Multifeeder pickup
roller releasing solenoid

SL
Multifeeder
feed roller Multifeeder pickup roller
Registration releasing Paper thickness
solenoid roller
SL Transparency sensor

PS

PS
Multifeeder sensor
Sensor lever Multifeeder (front, rear)
separation roller
Registration roller Registration paper
sensor

M Multifeeder lifter motor

F-8-40

8.2.2.2 Identifying the Size of Paper

0008-5951
a. Type 1
The width of paper is identified using a variable resistor operating in conjunction with the movement of the slide guide as the user adjusts the slide guides
in the manual feed pickup assembly to suit a particular paper size.
The identified width is used for controlling the lens and the black exposure area.
The length of paper while the multifeeder is selected is identified with reference to the length of time during which the registration sensor or the pre-
registration paper sensor remains on.

8-22
 Chapter 8

Slide guide (rear)

Variable resistor

Multifeeder tray

Slide guide (front)

F-8-41

b. Type 2
The width of paper is identified by means of a variable resistor operating in conjunction with the movement of the slide guide as the user adjusts the slide
guides of the multifeeder.
The identified width is used for controlling the lens.
The length of paper while the multifeeder is in use is identified as to large-size or smallsize in reference to the signal from the multifeeder large-size sensor.

Large-size paper sensor

Slide guide (rear)
Variable resistor

Sensor flag

Slide guide (front) Multifeeder tray

F-8-42

8.2.2.3 Movement of the Lifter

0008-5954
When the Start key is pressed, the multifeeder lifter motor starts to rotate in normal direction (CW), causing the lifter plate to push up the multifeeder lifter
until the multifeeder lifter sensor turns on.
As the lifter is pushed up, the paper on the multifeeder tray comes into contact with the multifeeder pickup motor, ready for pickup.
If any of the following conditions exits, the multifeeder motor rotates in reverse (CCW) to move down the multifeeder lifter until the multifeeder lifter
sensor (lower) turns on:
- Paper has run out (for supply of paper).
- A jam has occurred (for removal of the jam).
- Copying has ended (for supply of paper or for making changes).
If the multifeeder lifter sensor does not turn on within a specific period of time after the multifeeder lifter motor has turned on, the control panel will indicate
an error code.

8-23
 Chapter 8

Multifeeder Sensor lever Paper

lifter sensor (upper) Multifeeder
pickup rollers
Slide guide

Multifeeder
lifter motor Multifeeder
lifter sensor
(lower)
Lifter plate Sensor lever
(front)
Multifeeder lifter
F-8-43

8.2.2.4 Identifying the Thickness of Paper

0008-5961
The multifeeder pickup assembly is equipped with a paper thickness detecting roller and reflecting type paper thickness sensor to identify the thickness of
paper, and the result is used to control the fixing speed when thick paper is used.
The paper thickness detecting roller rotates using the drive of the pickup motor transmitted through the paper thickness detecting roller clutch.
The control PCB directs the light of the LED of the paper thickness sensor to the paper thickness detecting roller (upper) when paper is or is not moving
under the paper thickness detecting roller. The position of the light of the LED reflected by the paper thickness detecting roller (upper) is used to find out
the length of movement of the paper thickness detecting roller (upper).
The length is computed (position of roller with paper - position of roller without paper = thickness of paper) to identify the thickness of paper.

Pickup M
motor

Paper thickness sensor

Photodiode array
Paper thickness Paper thickness
detecting CL detecting roller LED
roller clutch (upper) Pressure spring

(front)
Paper thickness
detecting roller (lower)
F-8-44

8.2.2.5 Detecting a Transparency

0008-5971
a. Type 1
The transparency sensor located in front of the registration roller is used to find out if a medium is a transparency or paper, thereby changing the feed and
fixing speeds.
A recommended transparency has a light-blocking segment printed along the leading edge (about 1 cm wide), and the transparency sensor turns off, on,
and then on in response to the segment, enabling the identification of a transparency.

b. Type b2
As in the case of plain paper, transparencies may be placed in the multifeeder, cassette 1, cassette 2, cassette 3, or cassette 4. If they are placed in the cassette
1, however, the registration paper sensor is used to make a distinction between plain paper and transparency.
If a transparency is identified, the fixing speed will be switched accordingly.

Multifeeder
pickup sensor

Registration paper sensor

Multifeeder

Pickup from Transparency sensor

Pickup from
cassette 1
cassette 2/3/4
F-8-45

8-24
 Chapter 8

MEMO:
1. Advise the user to place one sheet of thick paper under a stack of transparencies if a cassette is used.
2. Advise the user to fan out and separate the transparencies when placing them in a cassette or the multifeeder.

c. Type 3
As in the case of plain paper, transparencies may be placed in the multifeeder, cassette 1, or cassette 2.
The transparencies stacked in the multifeeder, cassette 1, cassette 2, or paper deck are checked by the registration paper sensor and the transparency sensor
mounted immediately in front of the registration roller for distinction from pain paper.
If the medium is identified as a transparency, the fixing speed will be reduced to ensure good fixing.

Multifeeder feed roller Multifeeder pickup roller

Paper thickness detecting roller

Transparency sensor Transparency film

Registration roller Multifeeder separation roller

Sensor lever Registration
paper
sensor
Transparency from cassette

F-8-46

8.2.3 Paper Deck Pickup Assembly

8.2.3.1 Pickup
0008-5972
The paper inside the deck is held up by means of a lifter, and is kept in contact with the pickup roller.
When the pickup clutch turns on, the pickup roller starts to rotate to forward paper. Then, the deck pickup roller releasing solenoid turns on so that the
pickup roller leaves the stack of paper.
The feed roller and the separation roller serve to make sure only one sheet is moved to the feed path; paper is moved as far as the registration roller by the
work of the vertical path roller or the paper deck feed roller.

Feed roller

Separation roller
Paper Pickup roller
Lifter
F-8-47

8.2.3.2 Identifying the Size of Paper

0008-5974
The paper deck is not equipped with a mechanism to identify the size of paper. Each model has its own way of identifying the size.
In type 1, the paper size guide plate inside the deck is adjusted to a specific size, and the appropriate paper size is registered using the DIP switch on the
deck controller PCB.
In type 2, on the other hand, the paper size guide plate inside the deck is adjusted, and the machine's service mode is used to register the paper size.
The registered paper size is used to control the lens, position of scanner reversal, and area of blank exposure.
8.2.3.3 Movement of the Lifter
0008-5976
a. Type 1

8-25
 Chapter 8

When the deck is slid into the copier, a deck open/closed sensor or a switch will turn on and, at the same time, the lifter drive clutch turns on to allow the
drive of the deck motor or the pickup motor to be transmitted to the cable take-up shaft, causing the lifter to move up.
The lifter stops when the lifter position sensor detects the top of the stack of sheets on the lifter.
A lifter limit detection mechanism is used against cases in which the lifter fails to stop moving up after the sensor arm has blocked the lifter position sensor.
The lifter moves up all the way to a specific level, and then is held in position.
When the deck is slid out of the machine, the cable take-up gear disengages from the gear, letting the lifter to move down on its own weight.

Deck motor/ Lifter limit detecting lever

pickup motor M
Pickup roller

Lifter drive clutch

CL Feed rollers

Separation roller

Lifter limit
sensor Pickup roller

Lifter position sensor

Lifter
Paper
detecting
Paper sensor Deck open/closed
lever
sensor

Paper

Oil damper
F-8-48

b. Type 2
The lifter of the paper deck receives the drive of the paper deck motor through gears and chains, and is moved up or down by changing the direction of
motor rotation.
The paper deck motor is turned on or off or its direction of rotation is changed by changing the combination of signals from the sensors and switches in
addition to the control signals from the CPU.
The lifter keeps moving up until the lifter position sensor detects the top of the stack of sheets placed on the lifter.
When paper runs out and, as a result, the sensor arm blocks the paper sensor, the Add Paper message will be indicated on the control panel.

8-26
 Chapter 8

Paper deck lifter position sensor

Paper absent sensor

Sensor arm

Paper

Lifter upper limit switch

Cam Opening Lifter

Paper deck
paper level upper
sensor

Paper deck
paper level lower
sensor
Lift roller Paper deck
limit switch Door switch door

M Paper deck motor

Paper deck
F-8-49

8.2.3.4 Detecting the Level of Paper

0008-5979
a. Type 1
A total of two sensors are used to check the position of the base plate of the deck, and the level of paper is checked with reference to combinations of the
states (on or off) of the sensors.
The absence of paper is detected by means of an exclusive sensor.
Construction of the Mechanism

[1] [1] [1]

[2] [2] [2]

Paper level Paper level Paper level

(100% to (about 50% to (about 10%
about 50%) about 10%) or less)

F-8-50

T-8-11

Indication on Level lower Level lower Paper absent

control panel sensor 2 sensor 1 sensor
1/2
OFF OFF OFF

1/2 to 1/4
ON OFF OFF

8-27
 Chapter 8

Indication on Level lower Level lower Paper absent

control panel sensor 2 sensor 1 sensor
1/4
ON ON OFF

Paper absent
ON ON ON

8-28
 Chapter 8

8.3 Feeding System

8.3.1 Controlling the Registration Roller
8.3.1.1 Controlling Registration
0008-5978
a. Solenoid + Spring Clutch Type
The paper picked up from the cassette or the multifeeder is made to arch against the registration roller. Then, the solenoid and the spring clutch turn on to
control it so that its leading edge will match the image on the photosensitive drum; the paper is then moved to the photosensitive drum.

Motor

Solenoid
Photosensitive Spring clutch
drum Paper

Registration roller
Paper detection

<Solenoid + Spring Clutch>

F-8-51

b. Electromagnetic Clutch Type

The registration roller clutch operates so that the paper and the image on the drum will match at a specific point.
The timing at which the registration roller turns on may be adjusted in service mode.

DC controller PCB
Motor drive signal

Electromagnetic clutch drive signal

Paper detection signal

Motor

Electro-
magnetic
clutch
Photosensitive
drum
Paper

Registration roller

Paper detection

<Electromagnetic clutch>
F-8-52

c. Electromagnetic Clutch + Solenoid Type

After pickup, the paper is made to arch against the registration roller so that it is free of skew; it is then moved to the attraction roller by the work of the
registration roller, and then is attracted to the transfer drum sheet by the work of the attraction roller.

8-29
 Chapter 8

The rotation of the registration roller is controlled by means of a registration drive clutch, while its engagement and disengagement are controlled by means
of a solenoid.
When the paper from the registration roller reaches the transfer drum sheet and is attracted to it, the registration locking/releasing solenoid turns on. In
response, the registration locking cam starts to rotate, and the drive of the main motor will release the registration slave roller from the registration roller.

Photosensitive
drum

Transfer drum

Attraction guide drive solenoid

Spring clutch
SL
Registration locking/
Attraction brush releasing solenoid
Attraction SL
push-on roller Spring clutch
Registration roller
CL M
Registration drive clutch
F-8-53

Attraction
push-on roller

Registration
slave roller

Registration Cam
roller Arm

SL

Spring clutch Arm

SL
ON
F-8-54

d. Electromagnetic Clutch + Solenoid

The registration roller rotates using the drive of the pickup motor coming through the registration roller clutch.
When the registration roller rotates and the paper is attracted to the transfer belt, the registration roller releasing solenoid turns on.
This condition allows the drive of the pickup motor to be transmitted to the registration releasing solenoid through the spring clutch and the registration
releasing cam, causing the registration roller (upper) to move up and, ultimately, releasing the registration roller (the spring clutch causes the registration
releasing cam to make a 1/2 rotation when the registration releasing solenoid turns on).
The registration roller is released so that the minute discrepancy is corrected between the speed at which paper is mode by the registration roller and the
speed at which paper is moved by the transfer belt, ultimately preventing displacement of images during transfer.

8-30
 Chapter 8

M Pickup motor

Registration
releasing
Registration CL Registration roller arm
roller clutch (upper) Fulcrum

Registration
releasing
Registration roller solenoid
(lower)
SL

Spring clutch
Registration releasing cam
F-8-55

8.3.1.2 Adjusting Horizontal Registration

0008-6125
a. Type 1
The registration roller is moved horizontally to adjust horizontal registration.
The registration roller is driven by a motor in horizontal direction (drum axial direction). The drive of the motor is transmitted to the gear C through gears
A and B. The rotation of the gear C moves the registration roller in horizontal direction.
The home position of the registration roller in horizontal direction is determined by moving the registration roller in the direction of the arrow at the start
of copying operation, thereby butting the gear C against the butting member.
When paper reaches the registration roller, the motor turns on, and the registration roller is moved to the front.

(rear) (front)
Registration rollers
(front) Registration rollers

Paper
Butting
member
Gear B Gear C

Registration roller clutch

Butting member
Gear C

(rear)

Gear A
Gear B

Motor
F-8-56

b. Type 2
To adjust horizontal registration, the position of paper is checked, and the write start position is adjusted to correct for any discrepancy. (digital machines)

8-31
 Chapter 8

Horizontal registration motor

Horizontal registration sensor

Paper

Moves through
the sensor

F-8-57

8.3.2 Attraction Roller

8.3.2.1 Attraction Roller
0008-6127
a. Type 1
The transfer drum holds paper against the surface of the transfer sheet by means of static electricity.
During copying operation, the attraction solenoid turns on for the length of paper to bring the attraction roller in contact with the transfer drum sheet. At
this time, the attraction charging assembly tuns on so that the paper is attracted to the transfer drum sheet.
Control Cam (rear view)

Arm
F-8-58

Gear Arm

Spring clutch SL SL SL
OFF ON OFF

Transfer drum sheet

Attraction charging
assembly Cam

Attraction roller
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
F-8-59

8-32
 Chapter 8

Transfer drum sheet

Smoothing roller

Attraction brush
Attraction push-on roller

Cam

Arm

Spring clutch
Arm

SL
ON
F-8-60

8-33
 Chapter 8

8.4 Postcard Feed Unit

8.4.1 Duplexing/Overlay Mechanism
8.4.1.1 Postcard Feed Unit
0008-6138
The postcard feed unit is designed to forward postcards separated from the transfer drum to the fixing assembly.
When postcard mode is selected on the control panel and the Start key is pressed, the postcard feeding clutch turns on, and the drive of the fixing motor
rotates the postcard feed roller. At the same time, the swing arm shifts up around the feed roller shaft (fulcrum) to set the roll on the postcard feed roller.
The roll rotates in conjunction with the postcard feed roller, and postcards separated from the transfer drum is moved between the postcard feed roller and
the roll to reach the fixing assembly.
When the clutch turns off, the swing arm spring causes the swing arm to return to the bottom of the paper guide.

Postcard feeding clutch

M CL

Roll

Postcard feed unit

Postcard

Postcard feed roller

F-8-61

8.4.1.2 Duplexing/Overlay Mechanism Outline

0008-6143
The duplexing/overlay mechanism comes as standard with or as an accessory to a specific machine.
In the case of double-sided/overlay copying, after fixing on the first side, the paper is moved to the delivery vertical path assembly by the No. 1 deflecting
plate. The paper is then stacked on the holding tray by the work of the No. 2 paper deflecting plate and the switch-back roller.
When copying on the 2nd side, the paper is moved through the holding tray feeding assembly, and then is made to take the same path as in single-sided
copying to reach the delivery tray.

a. Type 1
In the case of double-sided copying, after fixing on the first side, paper is moved to the delivery vertical path by the delivery paper deflecting plate. The
paper is then stacked on the holding tray by the reversing roller.
For copying on the second side, the paper is moved through the holding tray feeding assembly and then is made to take the same path as in single-sided
copying to reach the delivery tray.

8-34
 Chapter 8

Delivery paper deflecting plate

Delivery tray

Delivery vertical path assembly

Holding tray feeding assembly

Reversing roller
F-8-62

8.4.1.3 Path for Double-Sided/Overlay Copying (up to holding tray assembly)

0008-6144
The paper path for double-sided/overlay copying differs from model to model. Further, paper is stacked differently on the holding tray. The path may be
any of the following:

a. Type 1
After fixing on the first side, the No. 1 paper deflecting plate shifts up by the work of a solenoid, and the paper is moved to the delivery vertical path
assembly.
In the case of double-sided copying, the paper is moved to the reversal assembly. As soon as the switch-back roller starts to rotate in reverse, the No. 2
paper deflecting plate controlled by the No. 2 paper deflecting plate is driven to stack the paper on the holding tray, turning over the paper.
a-1 Double-Sided Copying
Sole-
noid

Switch-back No. 1 paper

motor deflecting plate Switch-back motor
M M

No. 2 paper
deflecting plate
Sole-
noid

Holding tray Holding tray

Paper reversing assembly
Switch-back roller Switch-back roller
F-8-63

In the case of overlay copying, the No. 2 paper deflecting plate is driven to stack paper from the delivery vertical path assembly directly to the holding tray.

8-35
 Chapter 8

a-2 Overlay Copying Operation

Sole-
noid

No. 1 paper
Switch-back motor detecting plate
M

No. 2 paper
detecting plate
Sole-
noid

Holding tray
Paper reversal assembly
F-8-64

b. Type 2
In the case of double-sided copying, after fixing on the first side, the paper is moved to the delivery assembly. Then, the delivery roller starts to move in
reverse, and the No. 1 paper deflecting plate controlled by the switch-back motor shifts up, thereby turning over the paper and sending it to the holding tray.
b-1 Double-Sided Copying
No. 1 paper
deflecting plate
Delivery roller Fixing roller

M Holding tray M
Switch-back motor Switch-back motor

F-8-65

In the case of overlay copying, after fixing on the first side, the paper is sent to the holding tray by the work of the No. 1 paper deflecting plate controlled
by the switch-back motor.
b-2 Overlay Copying
Switch-back motor
M7 No. 1 paper
detecting plate
Fixing roller

(reversal)
Holding tray

F-8-66

c. Type 3
After fixing on the first side, the No. 1 paper deflecting plate controlled by a solenoid shifts up to send the paper to the holding tray (true of both double-
sided and overly copying).

8-36
 Chapter 8

Sole- No. 1 paper

deflecting plate Fixing roller
noid
Delivery roller

Holding tray

F-8-67

8.4.1.4 Paper Path for the Double-Sided/Overlay Paths (up to the stacking assembly)
0008-6148
The double-sided/overlay paper path differs from model to model, and paper is stacked on the holding tray and the lower feeding assembly differently. The
paper path may be any of the following:

a. Type 1
In the case of double-sided copying, after copying on the first side, the paper is moved to the delivery assembly. Then, the delivery roller starts to rotate in
reverse, and the No. 1 paper deflecting plate shifts up by the work of the No. 1 paper deflecting plate solenoid, turning over the paper and sending it to the
lower feeding assembly.
a-1 Double-Sided Copying
No. 1 paper deflecting plate
Delivery roller

M M
Delivery Delivery
roller motor roller motor
SL SL
Paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid Paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid
F-8-68

In the case of overlay copying, after fixing on the first side, the paper is moved to the lower feeding assembly by the work of the No. 1 paper deflecting
plate operated by the No. 1 paper deflecting plate solenoid.
a-2 Overlay Copying
Delivery roller motor

M7
No. 1 paper deflecting plate

Paper deflecting plate 1

SL
solenoid (reverse)

F-8-69

8-37
 Chapter 8

8.4.1.5 Paper Path for Double-Sided Copying (up to stacking assembly)

0008-6149
a. Type 1
After fixing on the 1st side, the delivery paper deflecting solenoid turns on so that the delivery paper deflecting plate sends the paper through the delivery
vertical path assembly to the duplexing reversing assembly.
Then, a specific period of time after the trailing edge of paper moves past the delivery vertical path sensor, the duplexing reversal transfer inlet roller starts
to rotate in reverse. When the deflected sheet, which has been pushed down by the paper, returns to its initial position, the paper is moved through the feed
path to reach the pre-holding tray feeding assembly. (By this time, the paper has been reversed.)
The pre-holding tray feeding assembly transmits the drive of the motor to the reversing drive clutch and the feed roller to move paper to the holding plate.
The pickup roller on the holding tray (duplexing unit) moves up by the drive of the duplexing unit pickup solenoid, and the stopper plate shifts up by the
work of the duplexing unit stopper plate solenoid, waiting for the paper to arrive.
When the paper arrives inside the duplexing unit stacking assembly, the feed roller moves down to butt the paper against the upper plate.
When the last sheet has been stacked, the stopper plate shifts down; then, the pickup roller starts pickup operation for the 2nd side.
Type 1
SL

PS

Delivery paper deflecting

drive solenoid

M Fixing motor

PS Delivery vertical path roller 2

drive clutch
Main motor Feed roller solenoid
CL CL M
SL
PS
Duplexing drive clutch
Pickup roller solenoid

SL
PS De-curling retainer

Deflecting
sheet
Reversal assembly

Duplexing reversal assembly SL

M switch-back motor
Reversing roller Stopper plate drive solenoid

F-8-70

Feed roller solenoid

Duplexing drive clutch
SL
CL M
Deflecting sheet Main motor Pickup solenoid
SL
PS PS

PS

PS

SL27
SL
Duplexing
M reversal assembly De-curling
switch-back motor sheet solenoid

F-8-71

8-38
 Chapter 8

Type 2
SL Delivery paper
deflecting plate solenoid

PS Reversal drive clutch

PS Duplexing pickup roller
releasing solenoid
CL M Motor SL
Feed roller
solenoid SL
PS
PS
PS PS
PS PS

Deflecting sheet

PS PS
M Duplexing reversal assembly motor SL
Stopper plate solenoid
F-8-72

Reversal drive Duplexing feed motor

Duplexing pickup roller
clutch M releasing solenoid
CL M Waste toner feed motor
SL
Feed roller
solenoid SL
PS
PS
PS PS PS
PS

Deflecting sheet

PS PS
M Duplexing reversal motor SL
SL SL SL Stopper plate solenoid

Duplexing paper
deflecting plate solenoid
F-8-73

8.4.1.6 Jogging Mechanism

0008-6152
The edges of the sheets stacked on the holding tray are made flush to prevent skew movement or jamming at time of pickup by means of a paper jogging
guide plate. The paper jogging guide plate turns on to come into contact with the edge of a sheet for each delivery.

8-39
 Chapter 8

DC controller PCB

signal
Motor drive

signal
Motor drive
Home position sensor (X direction)

Home position sensor (Y direction)

Switch-back X motor Switch-back
M Y motor M
Normal direction
of rotation Paper jogging
guide plate

Reverse direction
of rotation

Y direction

Light-blocking plate

X direction

Paper Rear guide plate (NP6750 only)

F-8-74

8-40
 Chapter 8

8.5 Duplexing Unit

8.5.1 Stacking Sheets
8.5.1.1 Stacking Sheets
0008-6153
At the end of copying on the 1st side, the delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid turns on to move the paper to the delivery vertical path assembly. Then,
the papre is moved through the duplexing path, is turned over by the duplexing reversing roller, and then is sent to the duplexing tray assembly.
Inside the duplexing tray assembly at this time, the duplexing feed roller, stacking guide plate solenoid, and stopper plate solenoid turn on to move up the
duplexing feed roller and the stacking guide plate, causing the stopper plate to shift up to wait for the arrival of paper.
The duplexing feed roller solenoid turns off each time paper arrives in the duplexing tray assembly, causing the duplexing feed roller to move down on the
paper. At the same time, the stacking guide plate solenoid turns off to move down the stacking guide plate on the paper so that the paper will not curl.
Thereafter, the duplexing feed roller starts to rotate in response to the activation of the duplexing feeding clutch, butting the paper against the stopper plate.

Delivery paper deflecting plate

solenoid
SL

Duplexing motor

M
Delivery vertical
path clutch
CL

Duplexing feed SL
roller solenoid

CL
SL
SL
Stopper plate solenoid

Stacking guide plate solenoid

F-8-75

8.5.2 Switching the Feed Path

8.5.2.1 Switching the Feed Path
0008-6157
In duplexing/overlay copying, the feed path of the holding tray is switched to suit the size of paper. As many as five paths exist, formed by four paper
deflecting plates.
Each paper deflecting plate is driven by its own solenoid.

T-8-12

Ref. Paper length Typical paper size Paper deflecting plate drive solenoid
Solenoid 1 Solenoid 2 Solenoid 3 Solenoid 4
[1] 443.8 mm 279.4x431.8 mm ON OFF OFF OFF
390.57 mm (11"x17")
A3
[2] 368.92 mm B4 OFF ON OFF OFF
315.66 mm LGL
[3] 299.58 mm A4R OFF OFF ON OFF
246.32 mm LTRR
B5R
[4] 231.54 mm LTR OFF OFF OFF ON
178.28 mm A4
B5
[5] 163.50 mm A5 OFF OFF OFF OFF
128.15 mm STMT

8-41
 Chapter 8

Solenoid 1 Solenoid 2 Solenoid 3 Solenoid 4

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

F-8-76

8.5.3 Non-Stacking Operation

8.5.3.1 Outline
0008-6180
A digital copier arranges the order of images in memory for printing, eliminating the need for printing the images in the order of originals and, as a result,
reducing the time during which paper is held in wait and increasing speed of double-sided copying.
Each model has a different way of handling sheets that may exist between the registration sensor and the lower feed outlet sensor.
8.5.3.2 Outline of Operations
0008-6181
The following explains non-stacking operations occurring when one set of copies is made of 10 originals.
1) The 1st sheet is picked up from the deck right.

F-8-77

2) The 1st side is printed on the 1st sheet.

Å@ The 2nd sheet is picked up.

F-8-78

3) The 3rd side is printed on the 2nd sheet.

The 1st sheet is moved to the holding tray assembly.
The 3rd sheet is picked up.

8-42
 Chapter 8

1
F-8-79

4) The 1st sheet is moved to the reversing assembly.

F-8-80

5) The 1st sheet is moved to the lower feeding assembly.

The 5th side is printed on the 3rd sheet.

3 5

F-8-81

6) The 1st sheet is re-picked up from the lower feeding assembly.

3
1

F-8-82

7) The 2nd side is printed on the 1st sheet.

The 2nd sheet is put on wait, and the 4th sheet is picked up.

8-43
 Chapter 8

2
1
5
3

F-8-83

8) The 7th side is printed on the 4th sheet, and the 1st sheet is discharged.

2
1 7

5 3

F-8-84

9) The 4th side is printed on the 2nd sheet, and the 3rd sheet is put on wait in the lower feeding assembly.
The 5th sheet is picked up.

4
7

2 1

F-8-85

10) The 2nd sheet is discharged.

The 9th side is printed on the 5th sheet.

4
3 9

7
5
2 1

F-8-86

11) The 6th side is printed on the 3rd sheet.

8-44
 Chapter 8

6
5
9
7
4 3
2 1

F-8-87

12) The 3rd sheet is discharged.

6
5

9 7
4 3
2 1

F-8-88

13) The 8th side is printed on the 4th sheet.

8
7

9
6 5
4 3
2 1

F-8-89

14) The 4th sheet is discharged, and the 10th side is printed on the 5th sheet.

8
7 10
9

6 5
4 3
2 1

F-8-90

15) The 5th sheet is discharged.

10
9

8 7
6 5
4 3
2 1

F-8-91

8-45
 Chapter 8

8.5.4 Set-Back Operation

8.5.4.1 Outline
0008-6183
In set-back operation, sheets are stacked in a staggered pattern in the holding unit for double-sided/overlay copying so as to prevent double feeding within
a limited space.
Restrictions exist for set-back operation in terms of paper sizes and copy counts.

Set-back rollers (upper)

Holding unit

Set-back rollers (lower)

Paper

F-8-92

8.5.4.2 Set-Back Operations

0008-6184
The following set-back operations take place when two A4 double-sided/overlay copies are made:
1) After copying on the 1st side, the 1st sheet is sent to the holding tray, and is made to arch against the set-back roller 1.

1st sheet Set-back roller 1

Arch

F-8-93

2) The 1st sheet is moved ahead, and is pulled out of the sensor 1.

Sensor 1

F-8-94

3) The set-back rollers 1 and 2 are rotated, and the 1st sheet is stopped at a specific point (a) from the set-back roller 1.

Set-back roller 1 Set-back roller 2

a

F-8-95

4) After copying on the 1st side, the 2nd sheet is made to arch against the set-back roller 1.

8-46
 Chapter 8

2nd sheet Set-back roller 1

Arch

F-8-96

5) The 1st and 2nd sheets are moved ahead, and the 2nd sheet is pulled from the sensor 1.

Sensor 1
2nd sheet a

1st sheet
F-8-97

6) The set-back rollers 1 and 2 are rotated in reverse, and the 2nd sheet is stopped at a spe-cific point (a) from the set-back roller 1.

a a

F-8-98

7) After sheets are laid in a staggered pattern, the set-back roller is rotated in normal direc-tion (CW), and 1st sheet is moved until the sensor 2 detects its
leading edge.

Sensor 2
F-8-99

8.5.5 Preventing Stacking Faults

8.5.5.1 Operation of the De-Curling Sheet
0008-4199
To prevent a stacking fault caused by curling along the trailing edge of paper when it is stacked inside the duplexing unit, the de-curling sheet is used to
push down the trailing edge of paper so as to ensure that the following sheet may be stacked properly.

De-curling retaining sheet

solenoid

SL 1st sheet 1st sheet

De-curling sheet

2nd sheet

F-8-100

8-47
 Chapter 8

8.5.5.2 Operation of the De-Curling Roller

0008-4212
The teeth of the de-curling roller are used to hold the trailing edge of curled paper in position.

1st sheet 2nd sheet

De-curling retaining
roller
F-8-101

8.5.6 Re-Pickup Path for Duplexing/Overlay Copying

8.5.6.1 Outline
0008-4216
The re-pickup path for duplexing/overlay copying and whether sheets are picked up starting with the topmost or the bottommost of the stack on the holding
tray vary from machine to machine. The re-pickup path may be any of the following:
8.5.6.2 Type 1
0008-4220
When copying on the 2nd side in double-sided/overlay copying, the sheets are picked up from the holding tray.
When the Copy Start key is pressed and, in response, the clutch turns on, the drive of the motor is transmitted to the pickup motor. The stopper plate, on
the other hand, is released by a solenoid, and one sheet of paper is moved. At this time, the separation roller rotates in the direction opposite that in which
paper is fed so as to prevent double feeding. The sheet is then moved to the photosensitive drum by the feed roller.
a-1 Pickup from the Top

Motor M

Clutch
Solenoid
CL

Feed
roller

Pickup roller

Separation roller
Solenoid
Stopper plate
F-8-102

a-2 Pickup from the Bottom

Stopper plate Sole-
noid Separation
roller Feed rollers

Pickup roller

CL M

M Clutch Motor
Motor

F-8-103

8.5.6.3 Type 2
0008-4224
a. 1 Double-Sided/Overlay Copy
The paper is made to arch against the set-back roller 1, and is moved past the set-back roller 2 to reach the feed roller. The paper is then stopped a specific
distance from the feed roller, and will then be picked up.

8-48
 Chapter 8

Set-back roller 1 Set-back roller 2 Feed roller

M Motor Motor M

F-8-104

b. 2 or More Double-Sided/Overlay Copies

The following operations take place after set-back operation:
1) The set-back rollers 1 and 2 are rotated in reverse, and the leading edge of the first sheet after set-back is moved back to a point a specific distance from
the sensor 2.

Set-back roller 1 Set-back roller 2 Feed roller

2nd copy 1st copy

Sensor 2
F-8-105

2) The set-back rollers 1 and 2 and the feed roller are used to move the 1st sheet past the set-back roller 2 in the direction of the arrow in the following
figure. (The distance of travel dif-fers according to paper size.)

Set-back roller 1 Set-back roller 2 Feed roller

F-8-106

3) In the case of duplexing copying, the set-back rollers 1 and 2 are rotated in reverse with the feed roller held still to pull off the 2nd sheet from the feed
roller.

Set-back roller 1 Set-back roller 2

Feed roller
F-8-107

4) In the case of overlay copying, the feed roller is rotated in the direction of the arrow in the following figure; at the same time, the set-back rollers 1 and
2 are rotated in reverse to separate the first sheet and the 2nd sheet.

Set-back roller 1 Set-back roller 2 Feed roller

Stops

F-8-108

5) The 2nd sheet is stopped when its leading edge has returned to a point a specific distance from the sensor 2. The 1st sheet is moved to the registration
roller.

To registration roller

Stops

Sensor 2
F-8-109

8-49
 Chapter 8

8.5.6.4 Type 3
0008-4243
a. Double-Sided Copying
The stack of sheets on the holding tray are picked up starting with the bottommost. When the Start key is pressed and, in response, the clutch 1 and the
solenoid turn on, the paper is moved to the holding tray registration roller 1 and then on to the registration roller through the feeding assembly.

Solenoid
Holding tray
registration roller Clutch 1 M

Clutch 2 Motor

F-8-110

b. Overlay Copying
1) After pickup, the sheet is moved upward by the work of the paper deflecting plate of the holding tray.

Solenoid

Holding tray paper deflecting plate

F-8-111

2) When the trailing edge of the sheet moves past the paper deflecting plate, the clutch 1 turns so that the sheet stops.

Clutch 1 M Motor

F-8-112

3) Then, the clutch 2 turns on, and the sheet is turned over and moved in the direction of the holding tray registration roller; thereafter, the sheet moves
through the feeding assembly to reach the registration roller.

Clutch 2

To registration roller
Motor M

F-8-113

8-50
 Chapter 8

8.5.6.5 Type 4
0008-4268
After copying on the 1st side, the sheet is deposited in the lower feeding assembly; it is then picked up for copying on the 2nd side by the re-pickup roller.
1) The set-back roller is rotated in normal direction (CW) as soon as stacking in a staggered pattern ends; the 1st sheet is moved until the re-pickup sensor
detects its leading edge.

Lower feeding assembly

inlet sensor Re-pickup sensor
2nd sheet

1st sheet
Set-back rollers Re-pickup roller

F-8-114

2) The sheet is continues to be moved; a specific period of time after the re-pickup sensor turns on, the re-pickup flapper solenoid turns on so that the 1st
sheet moves through the re-pickup roller, moving the 2nd and subsequent sheets over the flapper plate.

Re-pickup sensor
Lower feeding assembly Flapper plate
inlet sensor SL Re-pickup flapper
solenoid
2nd
sheet

1st
Set-back rollers sheet Re-pickup roller

Lower feeding assembly Re-pickup

inlet sensor sensor Re-pickup flapper
SL solenoid
2nd
sheet

1st
sheet Re-pickup roller
Set-back rollers
F-8-115

3) When the trailing edge of the 1st sheet moves past the set-back roller, the set-back roller rotates in reverse, moving the sheet so that the leading edge of
the next sheet will not block the re-pickup sensor.
8.5.7 Re-Pickup from the Duplexing Unit
8.5.7.1 Operation
0008-4280
For copying on the 2nd sides of double-sided copies, sheets are picked up from the stack deposited on the duplexing tray, one by one.
When the Start key is pressed or copying on the 1st side is done, the duplexing feed roller is moved down and the paper jogging guide plate is moved to a
specific point from the paper to prevent skew movement otherwise occurring during pickup.
Then, the stopper plate solenoid turns off, and the stopper plate shifts down. Thereafter, the duplexing feeding clutch and the re-pickup clutch turn on to
rotate the duplexing feed roller and the duplexing separation/feed roller by the work of the duplexing motor and the re-pickup motor, respectively, to
forward the sheet to the pickup vertical path assembly for a second time. After repickup, the duplexing feed roller solenoid turns on so that the duplexing
feed roller moves away from the paper.

8-51
 Chapter 8

Re-pickup motor

PM

Duplexing motor
Re-pickup clutch

M CL

Duplexing feed SL
roller solenoid

CL
Duplexing feed clutch

SL
Stopper plate solenoid
F-8-116

8.5.8 Skip Operation

8.5.8.1 Outline
0008-4302
In skipping, every other original is copied (or skipped) when making double-sided copies of single-sided originals so as to make the best use of the gap
between sheets in the holding tray feeding assembly (i.e., where paper does not exist; Figure 6-103).

Original to be skipped
Originals

Photosensitive drum
Space
Registration roller

Holding tray feeding assembly

Paper
F-8-117

Skip operation takes place under the following conditions:

- When the RDF is used to make double-sided copies of single-sided originals.
- When the copy size and the original size are A4, B5, or LTR, and they are fed horizontally.
- When bind mode and cover mode are not selected.
- When the copy count is 1 or 2 (varies depending on the model).
8.5.8.2 Operation
0008-4316
Skip operation consists of the following two movements:
1) Of the originals set in the RDF, every other original is copied (skipped). The copied original is stacked inside the duplexing unit. When the last original
has been fed, the RDF identifies the number of originals, and remembers whether the number was odd or even so that it may decide how sheets may
be delivered.
2) Of the originals set in the RDF, those that were not copied in 1. are copied. The pickup is from the duplexing unit.
Skip operation may be disabled in user mode.

8-52
 Chapter 8

8.5.8.3 Skip Operation for an Even Number of Originals

0008-4319

1
2 Originals
3
4 1
2 1
2
RF
Drum 4 3 4 3
Scanner
Registra- 4
Fixing
Holding tray tion
roller rollers

1. The Start key is pressed (the flow 2. The 4th original is picked up. 3. The 4th original is copied. The 3rd
of the originals is as in right pickup original is not copied (skipped), but
of the RDF). is returned to the original tray.

3
4 3
4 1
2
2 1 2 1 4 3
2
4 2
4 4

4. The 2nd original is picked up.
5. The 2nd original is copied. The 1st 6. The 4th original is picked up.
original is not copied (skipped), but
is returned to the original tray of
the RDF. At this time, it is
recognized that there is an even
number of originals. (if one set of

1
2 4
1 4
1
4 3 3 2 3 2
4 3 4

4
2 2 2 4
4
4

7. The 4th original is copied. (2nd 8. The 3rd original is copied. 9. The 3rd original is copied on the
set) back of the 4th sheet picked up
from the holding tray.

3
4 3
4 2
3
2 1 2 1 1 4

3 4 3 4 2 4
3
2
2 4 4 4
2
2

10. The 2nd original is picked up. 11. The 2nd original is copied. (2nd 12. The 1st original is picked up.
set)

F-8-118

8-53
 Chapter 8

2
3 4
1
1 4 3 2
1 2
3 4 1 2
3 4
2
4
4 2

13. The 1st original is copied on the back of the 2nd sheet picked up from the 14. The 3rd original is picked up.
holding tray. The 4th original is not copied (skipped), but is returned to the
original tray of the RDF. (if two sets or more, steps 6 through 13 are
repeated as many times as n - 1; n being the number of sets)

4 2
3 2
3
1 4 4
3 2 1 1
3 4 1 2
1 2 3 4 3 4
3 4 1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4
2
2

15. The 3rd original is copied on the
4th sheet picked up from the
holding tray. (2nd set) The 2nd
original is not copied (skipped), but
is returned to the original tray of
16. The 1st original is picked up. 17. The 1st original is copied on the
back of the 2nd sheet picked up
from the holding tray. (2nd set)

1
2
3
4

1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4

18. End.

F-8-119

8-54
 Chapter 8

8.5.8.4 Skip Operation for an Odd Number of Originals

0008-4321

1
2
3
4 Originals 1
2 1
2
5 3 3
RF
Drum 5 4 5 4
Scanner
Registra- 5
Fixing
rollers Holding tray tion
rollers

1. The Start key is pressed (the flow 2. The 5th original is picked up. 3. The 5th original is copied. The 4th
of the originals is as in right pickup original is not copied (skipped), but
of the RDF). is returned to the original tray of
the RDF.

4
5 4
5 2
3
1 1 4
3 2 3 2 1 5
3
5 3
5 3
5

4. The 3rd original is picked up. 5. The 3rd original is copied. The 2nd 6. The 1st original is picked up.
original is not copied (skipped), but
is returned to the original tray of
the RDF.

2
3 1
2 1
2
4 3 3
1 5 5 4 5 4
1 5 W 5
5 W
3 3 1 3 1
5

7. The 1st original is copied.
8. The 5th original picked up from the 9. The 5th original is picked up.
holding tray is moved through the
delivery assembly and reverse
delivered. (if one set, goes to step
20)

1
2 5
1 5
1
3 2 2
5 4 4 3 4 3
5 4 3
5 W 5 W 3 4
5 5 W
1 1 5
3
3 1

10. The 5th original is copied. (2nd
set; for two or more sets, steps 9
through 19 are repeated as many
times as n- 1; n being the number
of sets)
11. The 4th original is picked up.
12. The 4th original is copied on the
back of the 3rd sheet picked up
from the holding tray, and the sheet
is moved through the delivery
assembly and reverse delivered.

F-8-120

8-55
 Chapter 8

4
5 4
5 3
4
1 1 5
3 2 3 2 2 1
3
3 4 3 4 3 4
5 W 5 W 5 W 3
5 5
1
1 1

13. The 3rd original is picked up. 14. The 3rd original is copied. (2nd 15. The 2nd original is picked up.
set)

3
4 2
3 2
3
5 4 4
2 1 1 5 1 5
2 1 1
1 2 1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4 3 4
5 W 5 W 5 W
5 3 3 3
5
5

16. The 2nd original is copied on the
back of the 1st sheet picked up
from the holding tray, and the
sheet is moved through the
delivery assembly and reverse
delivered.
17. The 1t original is picked up. 18. The 1st original is copied. (2nd
set). The 5th original is not copied
(skipped), but is returned to the
original tray of the RDF.

2
3 5
1 5
1
4 2 2
1 5 4 3 4 3
5 4 3
5 W 5 W 3 4
1 2 1 2 5 W
3 4 3 4 1 2
5 W 1 5 W 1 3 4
3 5 W
3 1
19. The 5th sheet picked up from the 20. The 4th original is picked up. 21. The 4th original is copied on the
holding tray is moved through the back of the 3rd sheet picked up
delivery assembly and reverse from the holding tray (2nd set), and
delivered. (2nd set) the sheet is moved through the
delivery assembly and reverse
delivered. The 3rd original is not
copied (skipped), but is returned to
the original tray of the RDF.
1
2
3
4 3
4 3
4
5 5 5
2 1 2 1
2 1
3 4 1 2 1 2
5 W 3 4 3 4
1 2 5 W 5 W
3 4 1 2 1 2
5 W 1 3 4 3 4
5 W 5 W

22. The 2nd original is picked up.
23. The 2nd original is copied on the 24. End.
back of the 1st sheet picked up
from the holding tray (2nd set), and
the sheet is moved through the
holding tray and is reverse
delivered.

F-8-121

8.5.9 Reversal Delivery

8.5.9.1 Outline
0008-4323
Reversal delivery takes place at all times for the following two modes; it is to turn over the sheets at time of delivery so that they will be in sequence.
- skip operation for an odd number of originals
- use of CFF (computer form feeder)
1) The originals will be stacked as follows as a result of skip operation for an odd number of originals without reversal delivery:

8-56
 Chapter 8

1 2
3

F-8-122

2) The originals will be stacked as follows as a result of skip operation for an odd number of originals with reversal delivery:

1
3 2

F-8-123

3) The originals will be stacked as follows as a result of using a CFF without reversal deliv-ery:

1st page Computer form

C.F.F.

3
2
1

F-8-124

4) The originals will be stacked as follows as a result of using a CFF with reversal delivery:

1st page Computer form

C.F.F.

3
2
1

F-8-125

8.5.9.2 Operations
0008-4327
1) The sheet is moved to the path shown in the following figure by the work of the paper deflecting plate.

8-57
 Chapter 8

Solenoid
SL Paper
Fixing roller
deflecting
plate

Clutch 1 ON
Sensor
CL1
M
CL2
Motor
OFF
Clutch 2
F-8-126

2) The sensor turns off (i.e., the trailing edge of paper moves past the sensor), and then the clutch 1 turns off.

Solenoid
SL

OFF
Sensor
CL1
M
CL2
OFF
F-8-127

3) The clutch 1 turns off: immediately thereafter, the clutch 2 turns on to discharge the sheet.

OFF
Sensor
CL1
M
CL2
ON
F-8-128

8.5.10 Face-Down Delivery

8.5.10.1 Face-Up Delivery
0008-4348
In face-up delivery, the copy is delivered with its copied side (if single-sided) or its 2nd side (if double-sided) facing upward.
In default settings, all copies will be delivered face-up regardless of the selected copying mode.
8.5.10.2 Face-Down Delivery
0008-4873
In face-down delivery, the copy is delivered with the copied side (if single-sided) or its copied side (if double-sided) facing down.
The sheet is moved through the fixing assembly and is moved forward to the lower feeding assembly (face-down delivery unit) by the work of the paper
deflecting plate 1. A specific period of time after the leading edge of the sheet has moved past the lower feeding assembly inlet paper sensor, the lower
feeding assembly inlet roller rotates in reverse for face-down delivery.
8.5.10.3 Operations
0008-4875
a. Type 1
After fixing, the paper is moved to the face-down delivery unit by the work of the No. 1 paper deflecting plate; it is then stopped where a specific portion
of its trailing edge remains behind the face-down delivery sensor; thereafter, the face-down delivery motor rotates in reverse to discharge the sheet.
1) After fixing, the sheet is moved to the face-down delivery unit by the No. 1 paper deflecting plate.

8-58
 Chapter 8

ON Paper deflecting plate

No. 1 paper
deflecting plate SL drive solenoid

Feeding assembly

Reverse Paper
delivery sensor
Fixing rollers

PS

M Reverse delivery unit

drive motor

F-8-129

2) The sheet is stopped where a specific portion of its trailing edge is left behind the facedown delivery sensor.

ON
No. 1 paper Paper detecting plate
SL drive solenoid
detecting plate

Feeding assembly

Reverse
delivery sensor
Specific distance

PS

Reverse delivery unit

M drive motor

F-8-130

3) The face-down delivery unit drive motor rotates in reverse to discharge the sheet.

ON
No. 1 paper Paper deflecting panel
SL drive solenoid
deflecting plate

Feed assembly

Reverse
delivery sensor

PS

M Reverse delivery unit

drive motor

F-8-131

b. Type 2
1) When the leading edge of the last copy reaches the fixing paper sensor, the paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid turns on; as a result, the paper is moved to
the lower feeding assembly.

8-59
 Chapter 8

Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid ON

Paper deflecting plate 1
solenoid
SL

Delivery sensor Fixing paper sensor

Lower feeding assembly

M inlet paper sensor

Delivery roller
motor
Paper
F-8-132

2) A specific period of time after the last copy reaches the lower feeding assembly inlet paper sensor, the lower feeding assembly inlet motor rotates in
reverse. Yet another specific period of time thereafter, the delivery roller motor turns on to enable face-down delivery. (The paper deflecting plate
solenoid turns off a specific period of time after the delivery roller motor turns on.)
Paper Deflecting Plate 1 Solenoid OFF
Paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid
SL OFF

Delivery sensor Fixing paper sensor

Lower feeding assembly

inlet paper sensor
M
Delivery roller
motor
M
Lower feeding assembly
inlet motor
F-8-133

MEMO:
Normally, the paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid remains off. It turns on only when moving paper from the fixing as-sembly to the lower feeding assembly.

Movment of the Paper Deflecting Plate 1

Paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid Paper delivery plate 1 solenoid
SL ON SL OFF

When moving paper

from the fixing assembly
to the lower feeding assembly
F-8-134

8.5.11 Pre-Fixing Feeding Assembly

8.5.11.1 Pre-Fixing Feeding Assembly
0008-4893
The pre-fixing assembly is used to move a sheet separated from the transfer belt by the work of the separation charging assembly as far as the fixing
assembly.

8-60
 Chapter 8

The drive roller of the pre-fixing assembly moves the two feed belts using the drive of the pre-fixing feed motor; to improve feeding, a pre-fixing feed fan
is used to draw paper from under the belt.
To ensure fixing in duplexing copying or transparency mode, the fixing speed is varied in six steps, and the feed speed is also varied in six steps in keeping
with the fixing speed.

M Pre-fixing feed motor

Feed belt
Slave roller

Drive roller

Pre-fixing feed fan

(air draw)

F-8-135

8-61
 Chapter 8

8.6 Controlling the Cassette Heater

8.6.1 Controlling the Cassette Heater
0008-4895
The cassette heater is used to protect against humidity inside the cassette (i.e., to keep paper from absorbing moisture). The cassette heater is controlled
differently from model to model; the following is one example:
The drive of the cassette heater is synchronized with the power outlet or the control panel power switch; and its selection is by a heater switch.
As long as the copier is in operation (both power switch and control panel power switch are on) the cassette heater is controlled by means of the cassette
heater ON signal at all times.

T-8-13

Main power switch OFF Main power switch ON Main power switch ON
Control panel power Control panel power
Outlet power supply Cassette heater in op-eration switch OFF switch ON
sync (ON) Cassette heater in op-eration Cassette heater driven in
Control panel power Cassette heater at rest Cassette heater at rest response to cassette heater
supply switch sync ON signal
(OFF)

Cassette Heater Control (block diagram)

Heater switch
OFF ON

Power supply Switches outlet power supply sync or control

from outlet panel power switch sync

Main paper
supply
switch Relay Heater switch

Control panel
power switch 24V

Rely PCB

Cassette heater
Control PCB

Heater driver PCB

Cassette Heater ON Signal
When '1', the cassette heater turns on.
In double-sided copying mode of a low-
humidity environment, it goes '0'; for the
rest, it goes '1'.

F-8-136

8-62
Chapter 9 FIXING/DELIVERY SYSTEM
 Contents

Contents

9.1 Outline of the Fixing System .........................................................................................................................................9-1

9.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.2 Methods of Fixing........................................................................................................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.2.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.2.2 Roller Method .................................................................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.2.3 SURF Method .................................................................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 Cleaning .........................................................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.2 Using a Cleaning Roller............................................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.2.1 Using a Cleaning Roller ..................................................................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.3 Belt Method ................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.2.3.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.3.2 Using One Side of the Belt..............................................................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.3.3 Using Both Sides of the Belt ...........................................................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.3.4 Monitoring the Length of the Cleaning Belt ...................................................................................................................................................9-4
9.2.4 Auxiliary Cleaning....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2.4.1 Fixing Bias ......................................................................................................................................................................................................9-4
9.2.4.2 Applying Oil....................................................................................................................................................................................................9-5
9.3 Control ...........................................................................................................................................................................9-7
9.3.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.3.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................9-7
9.3.2 SURF Temperature Control ......................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.3.2.1 SURF Temperature Control ............................................................................................................................................................................9-7
9.3.3 New Item...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.3.3.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................9-7
9.3.3.2 Target Temperature and the Print Count.........................................................................................................................................................9-7
9.3.3.3 Target Temperature and a Low-Temperature Environment ...........................................................................................................................9-7
9.3.3.4 Target Temperature and Paper Types .............................................................................................................................................................9-7
9.3.3.5 Target Temperature, the Ambient Temperature, and Standby Period ............................................................................................................9-8
9.3.3.6 Printing Speed Reduction Sequence ...............................................................................................................................................................9-9
9.3.3.7 Power Save......................................................................................................................................................................................................9-9
9.4 Protection Mechanisms ................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.4.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-11
9.4.1.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.4.2 Detecting Abnormal Temperatures............................................................................................................................................ 9-11
9.4.2.1 Detecting Abnormal Temperatures ...............................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.4.3 Cutting the Power Supply .......................................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.3.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.4.3.2 Thermal fuse..................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.4.3.3 Thermal Switch .............................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.4.4 Detecting Faulty Activation ofthe Fixing Heater....................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.4.1 Detecting Faulty Activation of the Fixing Heater.........................................................................................................................................9-11
9.4.5 New Item.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.5.1 Detecting a Fault in the Fixing Assembly.....................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.4.6 Preventing a Rush Current to the Heater ................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.6.1 Preventing a Rush Current to the Heater.......................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.5 Other Functions............................................................................................................................................................9-12
9.5.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-12
9.5.1.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-12
9.5.2 Fixing Film Displacement Correction Control .......................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.5.2.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-12
Contents

9.5.2.2 Film Position Correcting Lever .................................................................................................................................................................... 9-12

9.5.2.3 Fixing Film Motor ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-13
9.5.3 Thermistor Reciprocating Mechanism....................................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.5.3.1 Thermistor Reciprocating Mechanism.......................................................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.5.4 Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.5.4.1 Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism...................................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.5.5 Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide Height Switching Mechanism .................................................................................................... 9-15
9.5.5.1 Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide Height Switching Mechanism ....................................................................................................................... 9-15
9.5.6 Cleaning Belt Guide Plate.......................................................................................................................................................... 9-15
9.5.6.1 Cleaning Belt Guide Plate............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-15
9.5.7 Controlling the Fixing Speed ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.5.7.1 Changing the Gear Drive Speed ................................................................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.5.8 Changing the Motor Speed ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-16
9.5.8.1 Changing the Motor Speed ........................................................................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.5.9 De-Curling Roller ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.5.9.1 De-Curling Roller ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.5.10 Movement of the Separation Claw (escape) ............................................................................................................................ 9-17
9.5.10.1 Movement of the Separation Claw (escape) ............................................................................................................................................... 9-17
 Chapter 9

9.1 Outline of the Fixing System

9.1.1 Outline
9.1.1.1 Outline
0008-4912
The fixing assembly includes upper and lower rollers or drive and delivery rollers, which are driven by the main motor (if there is no main motor, by the
fixing motor).
9.1.2 Methods of Fixing
9.1.2.1 Outline
0008-4916
Either of the following two fixing methods is used, each with the workings described below:
- Roller method
- SURF method
9.1.2.2 Roller Method
0008-4917
The fixing upper roller is heated by one or two fixing heaters. The surface temperature of the upper roller is monitored using a thermistor.
The lower roller may be equipped with a fixing heater of its own.
Using the thermistor signal from the thermistor, fixing temperature signal, or fixing roller surface temperature detection signal (analog), the control PCB
operates to make sure that the surface temperature of the upper roller is as specified.
a. Type 1 (upper roller with two heaters)

One-way clutch SL
Cleaning belt drive solenoid

Web
Cleaning belt
guide plate

Delivery flapper
solenoid
SL
Thermal switch

Fixing heater Thermistor

Fixing upper roller
Delivery roller

Fixing lower roller

F-9-1

9-1
 Chapter 9

b. Type 2 (upper and lower rollers with one heater each)

M
Fixing upper cleaning belt Fixing motor
Oil applying roller
Fixing upper cleaning belt One-way
take-up solenoid clutch
SL
Oil level sensor
PS
Cleaning belt length
sensor
PS
SL Fixing upper
Fixing upper cleaning belt heater
releasing solenoid Upper oil pan

Fixing upper roller

Fixing lower roller

Fixing lower
heater

Oil removing blade

M Fixing lower cleaning belt
Fixing lower cleaning Lower oil pan
belt motor
F-9-2

c. Type 3 (upper roller with one heater)

SL
One-way clutch
Cleaning belt drive
solenoid

Fixing heater H
Thermistor
TH

Thermal switch
Delivery roller

F-9-3

9.1.2.3 SURF Method

0008-4925
The fixing film is driven by the rotation of the drive roller. The pressure roller rotates in keeping with the rotation of the fixing film.
Part of the inner side of the fixing film is heated by the fixing heater.
The temperature of the fixing heater is detected by a thermistor, and is communicated to the CPU of the control circuit in the form of the fixing heater
temperature detection signal.
Based on the signal, the CPU (mounted on the control PCB) varies the fixing heater drive signal to control the temperature of the fixing heater.
The rear end of the fixing heater is equipped with another thermistor to detect abnormal rises in temperature.
a. Type 1
Drive roller
M Main motor
Thermistor
Tension roller

Fixing film
Fixing heater
Delivery roller
Pressure roller

Fixing cleaning roller

F-9-4

9-2
 Chapter 9

9.2 Cleaning
9.2.1 Outline
9.2.1.1 Outline
0008-4933
The fixing assembly is cleaned in either of the following two ways, each with its own characteristics; additionally, an auxiliary cleaning mechanism is used
at times:
- Belt method
- Roller method
- Auxiliary cleaning mechanism (fixing bias/oil application)
9.2.2 Using a Cleaning Roller
9.2.2.1 Using a Cleaning Roller
0008-4934
The SURF method of fixing uses a fixing film instead of a fixing upper roller and, therefore, does not have a belt-based cleaning mechanism.
Although the SURF-type fixing assembly does not require a special cleaning mechanism, a high-speed model is usually equipped with a cleaning roller to
remove toner from the pressure roller, thereby preventing soiling of the back of paper.
a. Type 1
Main thermistor
Sub thermistor
Fixing film

Fixing heater

Toner

Paper
Fixing cleaning roller Pressure roller
F-9-5

9.2.3 Belt Method

9.2.3.1 Outline
0008-5007
Most machines using a roller fixing method are medium- to high-speed models, and their fixing assemblies are cleaned by means of a belt.
The belt used to clean the fixing upper roller is taken up incrementally by a fixing belt drive solenoid.
The length of the fixing belt is monitored with reference to the number of times the fixing belt drive solenoid has turned on, the diameter of the web, or
the cut in the belt (through which the sensor lever drops). When the belt starts to run out, the display will indicate a message or error code.
9.2.3.2 Using One Side of the Belt
0008-5009
A belt impregnated with silicone oil is kept in contact with the fixing roller. The area of contact is moved by the take-up mechanism, thereby simultaneously
cleaning and applying silicone oil to the roller.
a. Type 1

Cleaning belt

Fixing upper
roller

F-9-6

9.2.3.3 Using Both Sides of the Belt

0008-5012
Both face and back sides of the belt are kept in contact with the upper roller, thereby separating oil application and cleaning operations. (The mechanism
is the same as when using one side of the belt).

9-3
 Chapter 9

a. Type 1

Face of cleaning belt

Cleaning belt

Back of cleaning belt

Removes dirt
from the roller Applies silicone oil
surface.
Fixing upper roller

F-9-7

9.2.3.4 Monitoring the Length of the Cleaning Belt

0008-5013
The cleaning belt cleans the fixing roller as it is taken up on one side (changing the area of contact), requiring the monitoring of its length. A cut is made
in the end portion of the belt, and the belt length sensor assumes that the belt is running out when the sensor arm drops through the cut.
a. Type 1
(front of machine)
Fixing upper belt

Cleaning belt length sensor

Sensor arm
F-9-8

9.2.4 Auxiliary Cleaning

9.2.4.1 Fixing Bias
0008-5016
Some models* apply a positive DC bias (e.g., 700 V) to the metal core of the fixing upper roller during printing operation to reduce offset of toner to the
fixing roller.
*NP4080, NP6030, GP55, GP30F, GP605.

9-4
 Chapter 9

a. Type 1

High-voltage Fixing upper roller

Fixing roller bias
power
supply PCB

F-9-9

9.2.4.2 Applying Oil

0008-5036
Silicone oil is applied to the fixing roller to prevent paper from wrapping around the fixing roller while it moves under the roller.

a. Methods of Applying Oil

Normally, silicone oil is held by an oil pan, and it is applied to the fixing upper roller by means of an oil applying roller or felt.
In the following figure, the solenoid is shown as it moves the oil applying felt into contact with the fixing upper roller for the length of the paper movement,
applying oil to the roller.
Type 1

Gear Arm

SL SL SL
Spring clutch OFF Oil applying ON OFF
solenoid

Oil applying belt

Fixing
Cam upper roller

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

F-9-10

b. Circulating Oil
Fixing oil is circulated as shown in the following figure.
The oil applying roller or felt remains in contact with the fixing upper roller at all times to supply oil to the roller, thereby preventing offset.
The oil inside the oil tank is drawn by an oil pump, and it is supplied to the fixing upper roller by the oil applying roller or felt.
The level of fixing oil is detected using an oil level sensor monitoring the position of the arm of a float in the upper oil pan or using an oil level sensor
monitoring light reflected by the oil.
If the oil level sensor detects the absence of oil at power-on, the display will indicate a message (Add Oil).

9-5
 Chapter 9

Type 1 EX: CLC700/800 Series

<Oil Present>
Oil level sensor
Upper oil pan Fixing upper roller Arm
Oil applying roller
Float
Silicone oil

Oil level sensor

Upper oil pan (inside)

Oil pump <Oil Absent>
solenoid
Lower oil pan

Fixing lower roller

Oil tank
(front of machine)

F-9-11

Type 2 EX: CLC1100 Series

Oil applying felt
Oil pipe

Fixing upper roller

Fixing lower roller

Oil pump

Oil tank

Fixing blade

Oil pan
(front)

Oil level sensor

F-9-12

9-6
 Chapter 9

9.3 Control
9.3.1 Outline
9.3.1.1 Outline
0008-5046
Temperature is controlled so that the toner is melted and fused to paper in optimum condition after transfer. Although the method of control varies to suit
varying factors (e.g., fixing method, copying speed, thickness of the coating of the fixing upper roller), it is usually either of the following two:
- SURF temperature control
- Roller temperature control
9.3.2 SURF Temperature Control
9.3.2.1 SURF Temperature Control
0008-5047
The SURF fixing method uses a plane-shaped, seamless fixing film, and only the area of contact is heated. Since there is no warm-up period, the heater
remains off during standby.
a. Type 1
Power switch Start key Printing finished Start key Printing finished
ON ON ON

STBY COPY STBY COPY STBY

Main motor

Fixing heater

225˚C

200˚C

180˚C

140˚C

120˚C

Start key Printing finished Start key

ON ON
The reading of the thermistor The reading of the
at the start is less than 120 C. thermistor at the start is 140 C or more.

F-9-13

9.3.3 New Item

9.3.3.1 Outline
0008-5057
In the roller fixing method, a heater is located in the roller, and it takes a while before the roller becomes heated.
9.3.3.2 Target Temperature and the Print Count
0008-5058
In the case of a model equipped with an upper fixing roller having a thin coating, the ends of the fixing roller tend to be hotter than its middle when narrow
paper is fed continuously. In view of this, the target temperature is changed to suit the print count and paper width.
9.3.3.3 Target Temperature and a Low-Temperature Environment
0008-5059
To prevent inadequate fixing in a low-temperature environment, low-temperature mode will automatically turn on if the ambient temperature sensor detects
a specific temperature (e.g., 10 deg C; the fixing temperature for the first print will be set to 200 deg C).
9.3.3.4 Target Temperature and Paper Types
0008-5067
For paper with poor fixing properties (e.g., thick paper), the target temperature may be changed to that used in low-temperature mode in service mode.

9-7
 Chapter 9

a. Type 1
Power switch Start key
ON ON
1st 20th 40th 60th 90th 100th 150th 200th
WMUP WMUPR STBY SCFW SCRV SCFW SCFW SCFW SCFW SCFW SCFW SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

2 sec

Main motor

Main heater Target temperature

Sub heater

190
185
180
175
170

160 flashing

Control temperature for A3, A4

Control temperature for B4, B5
(˚C)
Control temperature for A4R
Control temperature for B5R

F-9-14

b. Type 2
Power switch Start key
ON ON
1st 20th 40th 60th 90th 100th 150th 200th
WMUP WMUPR STBY SCFW SCRV SCFW SCFW SCFW SCFW SCFW SCFW SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

Main motor

Main heater

Sub heater

200
195
190
185
180
175
170
flashing
Control temperature for A3, A4
(˚C) Control temperature for B4, B5
Control temperature for A4R
Control temperature for B5R

F-9-15

9.3.3.5 Target Temperature, the Ambient Temperature, and Standby Period

0008-5087
Some models use several methods of control to suit the ambient temperature and the period from power-on.

T-9-1

Control temperature Temperat Description

Standby Copying ure
condition
200 deg C 205 deg C Medium/ 60 min or more from when the power switch is turned on
low
temperature
High The temperature of the fixing roller is 75 deg C or less
temperature within 60 min from when the power on
switch is
turned
210 deg C 212 deg C The temperature of the fixing roller is 75 deg C or less
within 60 min from when the power switch is turned on

9-8
 Chapter 9

9.3.3.6 Printing Speed Reduction Sequence

0008-5096
A typical printing speed is usually 50 cpm. The fixing temperature is controlled by varying the sheet-to-sheet distance (i.e., by reducing the printing speed)
when the thermistor detects a specific surface temperature for the fixing roller to ensure proper fixing.

T-9-2

Condition 60 min from power-on 60 min from power-on

Down sequence
50 cpm return mode 170 deg C 175 deg C
40 cpm mode 165 deg C 170 deg C
30 cpm mode 160 deg C 165 deg C
Printing end 155 deg C 160 deg C
Stream read cpm 180 deg C
60 cpm stream read return 185 deg C
mode

In printing deduction sequence, 40- or 30-cpm mode will be used according to the detected surface temperature of the fixing upper roller. The machine
returns to normal printing speed when the fixing upper roller reaches any of the appropriate surface temperatures shown in the foregoing table. If printing
operation stops, however, WMUP sequence will be used until the surface temperature of the fixing upper roller rises to 195 deg C (as in auto start mode).
If, for instance, any of the surface temperatures of the fixing upper rollers is detected in the middle of printing operation, WMUP sequence is started while
the display indicates the remaining number of prints to make. The remaining number of prints will then be made as soon as the machine becomes ready (if
auto start mode is selected) or when the Start key is pressed (in STBY).
a. Type 1
Power switch Start key * : once for every 8 S sheets twice for every 8 L sheets
ON 110˚C 170˚C ON *** : controlled to 185 ˚C for 1-color printing
*** : controlled to 183 ˚C for 1-color printing

Photosensitive drum WMUP INTR STBY CNTR COPY LSTR STBY

revolution 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Transfer drum 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
revolution
Side A sensor

Side B sensor

Laser M M C C Y Y K K

Fixing heater (upper) Controlled to 170˚C Controlled to 173˚C **

Fixing heater (lower) Controlled to 170˚C Controlled to 171˚C ***

Cleaning belt take-up *

solenoid
Cleaning belt releasing
solenoid
Main motor

Drum motor 133mm/sec 133mm/sec

Fixing motor 133mm/sec 32mm/sec 133mm/sec 32mm/sec

Upper: 170˚C
Lower: 170˚C

Upper: 110˚C
Lower: 110˚C

F-9-16

9.3.3.7 Power Save

0008-5109
The control temperature for STBY may be lowered as shown in the following figure to reduce power consumption (by selecting power save mode on the
control panel).

9-9
 Chapter 9

a. Type 1
60 min Start key ON Pre-Heat key ON Auto shut-off ON

STBY INTR CNTR1 CNTR2 AER SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRVLSTR STBY

Main heater

Sub heater

Main motor
Pre-Heat key ON Flash
indicator

210˚C
205˚C
200˚C

195˚C

High temperature (17˚C or more)

Medium/low temperature (17˚C or less)
Power save at 10%
180˚C

Power save at 25%

155˚C
Power save at 50%
110˚C

F-9-17

9-10
 Chapter 9

9.4 Protection Mechanisms

9.4.1 Outline
9.4.1.1 Outline
0008-5132
Machines are equipped with mechanisms used to prevent malfunction of their fixing heaters.
9.4.2 Detecting Abnormal Temperatures
9.4.2.1 Detecting Abnormal Temperatures
0008-5134
The CPU mounted on the control PCB monitors the temperature of the heater by means of a thermistor. If the control PCB detects an abnormal temperature
(high or low), it will indicate an error code and, at the same time, turn off the relay to cut the AC supply.
9.4.3 Cutting the Power Supply
9.4.3.1 Outline
0008-5137
The mechanism used to cut the power supply in response to an abnormal rise in temperature may be any of the following two types:
9.4.3.2 Thermal fuse
0008-5141
The thermal fuse will melt when a specific period of time passes after the surface of the fixing heater has reached a specific temperature, thereby cutting
the AC power to the fixing heater.
9.4.3.3 Thermal Switch
0008-5142
The thermal switch is designed so that its contact opens when the surface of the fixing roller reaches a specific temperature, thereby cutting the AC power
to the fixing heater.
9.4.4 Detecting Faulty Activation ofthe Fixing Heater
9.4.4.1 Detecting Faulty Activation of the Fixing Heater
0008-5144
The CPU of the control PCB generates the fixing heater activation signal to drive the fixing heater. It also has the function of monitoring the activation of
the fixing heater.
The control PCB compares the fixing heater activation detection signal against the fixing heater activation signal; if it finds that the heater is on in the
absence of the fixing heater activation signal, it will turn off the relay to cut off the AC power.
9.4.5 New Item
9.4.5.1 Detecting a Fault in the Fixing Assembly
0008-5150
The error detection circuit checks to find out whether the rated voltage of the AC power supply and that of the fixing assembly match; it will stop the
machine if it finds a mismatch.
9.4.6 Preventing a Rush Current to the Heater
9.4.6.1 Preventing a Rush Current to the Heater
0008-5283
In a machine using both upper and lower heaters (one each), an excess amount of current would be likely to flow to the heaters if both heaters are turned
on at the same time.
To reduce the current to the heaters, the control PCB exerts control as soon as the power is turned on.

9-11
 Chapter 9

9.5 Other Functions

9.5.1 Outline
9.5.1.1 Outline
0008-5285
The fixing assembly of some models is equipped with the following additional functions:
- Fixing film displacement correction control
- Thermistor reciprocating mechanism
- Upper separation claw reciprocating mechanism
- Fixing assembly inlet guide height switching mechanism
- Cleaning belt guide
- Fixing speed control
- De-curling roller
- Separation claw escape movement
9.5.2 Fixing Film Displacement Correction Control
9.5.2.1 Outline
0008-5287
The fixing film can become displaced to the front or rear as it continues to rotate, and the fixing film displacement correction mechanism is used to correct
such physical displacement.
9.5.2.2 Film Position Correcting Lever
0008-5288
The following figure shows a rib provided on the fixing film and a correcting lever mounted as if to surround the rib. When the fixing film becomes
displaced, the correcting lever will move the drive roller to correct the displacement.

M Main motor

Fixing film

Rib

Drive roller Fixing film

Sensor lever
(direction of rotation)

(direction of delivery)

Pressure roller
Fixing film displacement detection

Correcting lever
F-9-18

9-12
 Chapter 9

9.5.2.3 Fixing Film Motor

0008-5291
a. Type 1
Fixing film motor Tension roller
Main motor M

Fixing film

Fixing film sensor

(direction of delivery) (front)

Drive roller
Fixing heater
Pressure roller
F-9-19

A fixing film sensor is mounted at the end of the fixing film to detect the position of the film.
The rear (sensor side) of the fixing film is cut to an angle as shown in Figure the following figure so that the fixing film sensor repeats turning on and off.
Normally, the periods of on and off are identical as long as the fixing film is centered.
As the film starts to move toward the rear, the sensor remains on longer than it remains off; when the film starts to move to the front, on the other hand,
the sensor remains off longer than it remains on.
The control PCB checks the ratio between on and off periods and corrects the position of the fixing film as necessary.
b. Type 1
Unit: mm 5

Cut to angle

Fixing film 2
14 Sensor
(rear) ON
Normal
OFF
ON
Displaced to rear
(front) OFF
Tension roller ON
Displaced to front
OFF
OFF

Drive roller

ON

F-9-20

The fixing film motor is used to correct the position of the fixing film.
When displacement is detected, the control PCB rotates the fixing film motor to move the rear of the tension roller up or down, thereby centering the fixing
film to correct the displacement.
- If the fixing film moves to the rear, the tension roller is moved down to slide the film to the front.
- If the fixing film moves to the front, the tension roller is moved up to slide the film to the rear.
The position of the fixing film is controlled by executing these operations as necessary.
Should the fixing film become displaced to a degree that prevents correction by this mechanism, the machine will indicate an error code.

9-13
 Chapter 9

c. Type 1
Fixing film motor

displaced to front
displaced to rear
F-9-21

9.5.3 Thermistor Reciprocating Mechanism

9.5.3.1 Thermistor Reciprocating Mechanism
0008-5307
The thermistor used to monitor the temperature of the fixing upper roller remains in light contact with the roller, possibly damaging the roller later when
it becomes worn. To prevent damage to the fixing upper roller, the thermistor is equipped with a mechanism to move it in the axial direction of the roller,
and this mechanism is called a "reciprocating mechanism." The drive for the reciprocating cam is obtained from the cleaning belt drive solenoid through
a one-way cam.
a. Type 1
Cleaning belt drive solenoid

SL

One-way arm

Thermistor
Reciprocating cam
Fixing upper roller Specified value

Thermistor

F-9-22

9.5.4 Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism

9.5.4.1 Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism
0008-5310
The separation claw serves to separate paper from the fixing upper roller by remaining in light contact with the roller, possibly damaging the roller when
it becomes worn. To prevent damage to the fixing upper roller, the upper separation claw is equipped with a mechanism in the axial direction of the fixing
upper roller, and this mechanism is called a "reciprocating mechanism."

9-14
 Chapter 9

a. Type 1

Fixing upper roller

Separation claw

Specified value M

Separation claw

Reciprocating cam

F-9-23

9.5.5 Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide Height Switching Mechanism

9.5.5.1 Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide Height Switching Mechanism
0008-5312
The height of the fixing assembly inlet guide is changed by turning on and off the fixing assembly inlet guide drive solenoid, ensuring the proper movement
of paper.
The guide moves up or down as follows depending on its position at the time when printing operation starts or when the registration roller has rotated:
- If the paper is longer than specified (e.g., B5R or longer), the fixing assembly inlet guide will move up.
- If the paper is shorter than specified (e.g., shorter than B5R), the fixing assembly inlet guide will move down.
In the case of free-size paper in the multifeeder, the following will take place:
- The fixing assembly inlet guide will move up when printing operation starts.
-Any of the preceding changes is made by measuring the length of paper when the first sheet moves past the registration paper sensor.
9.5.6 Cleaning Belt Guide Plate
9.5.6.1 Cleaning Belt Guide Plate
0008-5314
The cleaning belt guide plate increases the area of contact between the belt and the fixing roller to improve cleaning efficiency.

9-15
 Chapter 9

a. Type 1
Cleaning belt take-up arm
Cleaning belt
SL drive solenoid

Cleaning belt guide plate

Web

Upper roller

Fixing assembly
inlet guide

Fixing drive
solenoid
Lower roller SL

F-9-24

9.5.7 Controlling the Fixing Speed

9.5.7.1 Changing the Gear Drive Speed
0008-5318
After being separated from the transfer drum, paper is moved from the feeding assembly to the fixing assembly.
In the case of a transparency, the speed of its movement is changed when its leading edge reaches the inlet of the fixing assembly from the feeding assembly.
Figure A shows the flow of drive when paper is moved at normal speed.
Figure B, on the other hand, shows the flow of drive when paper is moved at a lower speed.
a. Type 1
A. Top View (normal speed) B. Top View (low speed)

Fixing Fixing
assembly assembly

For driving For delivery

One-way transfer transfer
clutch gear cleaner cleaning
locking cam locking cam

Fixing speed
solenoid
SL M SL M
OFF ON
Spring clutch
F-9-25

9.5.8 Changing the Motor Speed

9.5.8.1 Changing the Motor Speed
0008-5325
To ensure proper fixing for double-sided copies and transparencies, or to make up for the short path from the transfer drum to the fixing assembly in certain
models, fixing is controlled to several speeds by changing the speed of the fixing motor.
9.5.9 De-Curling Roller
9.5.9.1 De-Curling Roller
0008-5328
Normally, four different toners are fused to paper when making a color print, causing the paper to curl upward and possibly causing a jam when it is picked
up or moved for printing on its second side.
The de-curling roller is provided between the fixing roller and the delivery roller to prevent pickup and feeding faults of curled paper.

9-16
 Chapter 9

a. Type 1
Delivery roller
De-curling roller
Fixing upper roller

Paper

Fixing lower roller

F-9-26

9.5.10 Movement of the Separation Claw (escape)

9.5.10.1 Movement of the Separation Claw (escape)
0008-5331
To prevent scratching the fixing lower roller during initial or last rotation, the separation claw is moved away from the roller.
a. Type 1

Separation claw Fixing upper roller

Fixing lower roller

Separation claw
solenoid

F-9-27

9-17
Chapter 10 DELIVERY SYSTEM
 Contents

Contents

10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................10-1

10.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.2.2 Sort ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2.3 Staple Sort ...................................................................................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2.4 Offset...........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-3
10.1.2.5 Punch...........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-3
10.1.2.6 Saddle Stitch................................................................................................................................................................................................10-3
10.2 Sorter and Stapler Sorter ............................................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.2 Outline of Operations............................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.2.1 Outline of Operations ..................................................................................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.3 Sort Bin and Non-Sort Bin....................................................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.3.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-5
10.2.3.2 Moving Up and Down the Sort Bins...........................................................................................................................................................10-5
10.2.3.3 Detecting Paper Inside Sort Bins ................................................................................................................................................................10-6
10.2.3.4 Guide Bar ....................................................................................................................................................................................................10-7
10.2.3.5 Paper Retaining Arm...................................................................................................................................................................................10-7
10.2.3.6 Reference Wall............................................................................................................................................................................................10-8
10.2.4 New Item.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-8
10.2.4.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-8
10.2.4.2 Process Speed..............................................................................................................................................................................................10-8
10.2.4.3 Lead-In Speed .............................................................................................................................................................................................10-9
10.2.4.4 Delivery Speed ............................................................................................................................................................................................10-9
10.2.5 Stapling .................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.2.5.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-10
10.2.5.2 Stapling Position .......................................................................................................................................................................................10-10
10.2.5.3 Detecting Staples.......................................................................................................................................................................................10-11
10.2.5.4 Detecting the Edge of a Staple Belt ..........................................................................................................................................................10-11
10.2.6 Special Functions ................................................................................................................................................................... 10-11
10.2.6.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-11
10.2.6.2 Limitless Sort ............................................................................................................................................................................................10-11
10.2.6.3 Cascade Sort..............................................................................................................................................................................................10-12
10.2.6.4 Tandem Feeding........................................................................................................................................................................................10-12
10.2.6.5 Front Access..............................................................................................................................................................................................10-13
10.2.6.6 Multiple Stacking ......................................................................................................................................................................................10-14
10.2.6.7 Bin Close Sequence...................................................................................................................................................................................10-15
10.2.7 Others ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-16
10.2.7.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-16
10.2.7.2 Height of a Stack .......................................................................................................................................................................................10-16
10.2.7.3 Number of Sheets for Stapling ..................................................................................................................................................................10-16
10.3 Multioutput Tray and Shift Tray ..............................................................................................................................10-17
10.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-17
10.3.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-17
10.3.2 Shifting the Shift Tray ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-18
10.3.2.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-18
10.3.2.2 Operations .................................................................................................................................................................................................10-18
10.3.3 Others ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-19
10.3.3.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-19
10.3.3.2 Detecting Paper on a Special Tray ............................................................................................................................................................10-19
10.3.3.3 Releasing the Inlet Roller Roll..................................................................................................................................................................10-20
 Contents

10.4 Finisher.................................................................................................................................................................... 10-22

10.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.4.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.4.2 Job Offset ............................................................................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.4.2.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.4.2.2 Job Offset (sheet offset) ............................................................................................................................................................................ 10-23
10.4.2.3 Job Offset (stack offset) ............................................................................................................................................................................ 10-24
10.4.3 Stapling .................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-27
10.4.3.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-27
10.4.3.2 Stapling Mechanism ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-28
10.4.3.3 Stapling ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-29
10.4.3.4 Stapler Unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.4.3.5 Safety Switch ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-31
10.4.4 Processing Tray Lead-In Mechanism and Delivery Mechanism........................................................................................... 10-32
10.4.4.1 Outlline ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-32
10.4.4.2 Paddle Type .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-32
10.4.4.3 Return Roller Type ................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-34
10.4.4.4 Return Roller Type ................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-35
10.4.4.5 Swing Guide Drive Mechanism (paddle type) ......................................................................................................................................... 10-36
10.4.4.6 Paddle Drive Mechanism (paddle type).................................................................................................................................................... 10-37
10.4.4.7 Feed Belt Releasing Mechanism (paddle type) ........................................................................................................................................ 10-38
10.4.5 Buffer Roller Operation ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-40
10.4.5.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-40
10.4.6 Shutter Mechanisms............................................................................................................................................................... 10-43
10.4.6.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-43
10.4.6.2 Shutter Operation ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-44
10.4.7 Tray Drive.............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-46
10.4.7.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-46
10.4.7.2 Operating the Tray .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-46
10.4.8 Detecting the Height of the Tray ........................................................................................................................................... 10-48
10.4.8.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-48
10.4.8.2 Penetration Type Sensor ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-48
10.4.8.3 Reflection Sensor Type............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-48
10.4.8.4 Photointerrupter Type ............................................................................................................................................................................... 10-49
10.5 Punch Unit ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-50
10.5.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-50
10.5.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-50
10.5.2 Punching Operation ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-51
10.5.2.1 Punching Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-51
10.5.3 Outline of Punching Operations............................................................................................................................................. 10-52
10.5.3.1 Outline of Punching Operations ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-52
10.5.4 Horizontal Registration (type 1) ............................................................................................................................................ 10-55
10.5.4.1 Horizontal Registration (type 1) ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-55
10.5.5 Waste Feed Operation............................................................................................................................................................ 10-57
10.5.5.1 Waste Feed Operation............................................................................................................................................................................... 10-57
10.5.6 Waste Case Full Detection..................................................................................................................................................... 10-57
10.5.6.1 Waste Case Full Detection........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-57
10.5.7 Evening Out the Waste .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-58
10.5.7.1 Evening Out the Waste ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-58
10.6 Saddle Stitcher......................................................................................................................................................... 10-59
10.6.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-59
10.6.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-59
10.6.2 Accepting Sheets.................................................................................................................................................................... 10-60
10.6.2.1 Accepting Sheets....................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-60
10.6.3 Arranging the Sheets.............................................................................................................................................................. 10-61
10.6.3.1 Arranging the Sheets................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-61
10.6.4 Stitching ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-62
10.6.4.1 Stitching .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-62
10.6.5 Moving the Stack ................................................................................................................................................................... 10-63
 Contents

10.6.5.1 Moving the Stack ......................................................................................................................................................................................10-63

10.6.6 Folding the Stack ................................................................................................................................................................... 10-63
10.6.6.1 Folding the Stack.......................................................................................................................................................................................10-63
10.6.7 Controlling the DeliveryTray................................................................................................................................................. 10-64
10.6.7.1 Controlling the Delivery Tray ...................................................................................................................................................................10-64
10.7 Paper Folding Unit ...................................................................................................................................................10-66
10.7.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-66
10.7.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-66
10.7.2 Outline of Operations............................................................................................................................................................. 10-66
10.7.2.1 Outline of Operations ................................................................................................................................................................................10-66
10.7.3 Removing the Skew ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-67
10.7.3.1 Removing the Skew ..................................................................................................................................................................................10-67
10.7.4 Folding Operation .................................................................................................................................................................. 10-69
10.7.4.1 Folding Operation .....................................................................................................................................................................................10-69
10.7.5 Operation of the Sub Tray...................................................................................................................................................... 10-71
10.7.5.1 Operation of the Sub Tray.........................................................................................................................................................................10-71
10.7.6 Summary of Folding Operations............................................................................................................................................ 10-72
10.7.6.1 Z-Fold (face-up delivery) ..........................................................................................................................................................................10-72
10.7.6.2 Z-Fold (face-down delivery) .....................................................................................................................................................................10-72
10.8 Inserter .....................................................................................................................................................................10-73
10.8.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-73
10.8.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-73
10.8.2 Pickup by an Inserter ............................................................................................................................................................. 10-73
10.8.2.1 Pickup by an Inserter.................................................................................................................................................................................10-73
10.8.3 Feeding Operation.................................................................................................................................................................. 10-74
10.8.3.1 Feeding Operation .....................................................................................................................................................................................10-74
 Chapter 10

10.1 Introduction
10.1.1 Outline
10.1.1.1 Outline
0008-5461
A delivery handling system consists of machines which add finishing touches to copies discharged by the host copier (e.g., sorting).
A delivery handling machine may be any of the following five:
- Sorter
- Stapler sorter
- Multioutput tray
- Finisher
- Shift tray

Sorter/Stapler sorter Multioutput tray

Inserter

Finisher
F-10-1

10.1.2 Functions
10.1.2.1 Outline
0008-5462
The following table shows the major functions of each delivery handling machine:

10-1
 Chapter 10

T-10-1

Machine Function Remarks

Sorter Sorts sheets.
Stapler sorter Sorts, sorts and staples,
and
punches sheets.
Multioutput tray Groups sheets. Some models sort/sort and staple sheets.
Shift tray Groups sheets.
Finisher

10.1.2.2 Sort
0008-5488
Copies may be sorted either in "sort mode" or "group mode." In sort mode, copies of multiple originals are automatically arranged in sequence of their
original pages.

Copies
Originals
A B
C
A B
C
A B
C

F-10-2

In group mode, copies of multiple originals are grouped into bins, each bin containing copies of a single original.

Copies
Originals
A A
A
A B
C
B B
B

F-10-3

10.1.2.3 Staple Sort

0008-5490
In staple sort, copies discharged in sort mode are automatically stapled.
Stapling takes place in either of the three ways shown in the following table. (Not all machines are capable of stapling in all these three ways.)

T-10-2

Mode Corner Double Single

Position

Delivery
Delivery Delivery direction
direction direction
or

Delivery
direction

10-2
 Chapter 10

10.1.2.4 Offset
0008-5491
In offset, a set of copies of different jobs, a set of printouts of different jobs, or each fax message is offset from one another on the same tray. To do so,
either the tray is shifted back and forth or sheets are shifted inside a finisher.

2nd job
1st job

F-10-4

MEMO:
The series of operations taking place between the start of delivery of the first sheet to the end of delivery of the last sheet is called a "job".

Offset may be "stack offset," in which all sheets are shifted, or "sheet offset," in which the first sheet of each job is shifted.

Stack sorting (4 sets)

Sheet sorting (4 sets)

4th set
3rd set 2nd set Sorted
1st set sheets
Delivery direction
Delivery direction
F-10-5

10.1.2.5 Punch
0008-5492
In punch, two or three holes are punched in a sheet of paper.

2 holes 3 holes

Feed Delivery
direction direction

F-10-6

10.1.2.6 Saddle Stitch

0008-5493
In bind mode (book binding), sheets are stitched (in the middle) and folded for delivery.

Originals Stitch Folded by rollers and delivered

1 5 1
8
2 6 3
6
2
7

3 7
8 1
4 8
4
5

6 3

F-10-7

10-3
 Chapter 10

10.2 Sorter and Stapler Sorter

10.2.1 Outline
10.2.1.1 Outline
0008-5495
A sorter and a sorter stapler are accessories used to sort delivered copies. The volume of sorting depends on the number of bins.
10 bins: enables sorting into 10 sets.
20 bins: enables sorting into 20 sets.
A sorter is designed to simply sort delivered copies, while a stapler sorter is capable of automatically stapling sorted copies.
(Hereafter, both sorter and stapler sorter are referred to as a "sorter" unless otherwise noted.)

Bin

Sorter/Stapler sorter
F-10-8

10.2.2 Outline of Operations

10.2.2.1 Outline of Operations
0008-5496
The sheets delivered by a copier are forwarded to a sort bin or the non-sort bin, depending on the mode selected on the host copier.
If sorting is not selected, the copies are delivered to the non-sort bin; otherwise, they are delivered to sort bins. Sorting may be in sort mode or group mode.
In sort mode, copies of multiple originals are arranged in order of page for delivery; in group mode, on the hand, copies of multiple copies are grouped
according to page, each bin containing copies of the same original.

Sort mode Group mode

4
1 4
2 4
3
4
3
1 3
3
2
3
4 2
2
1 2
2
3 1
4 1
1

F-10-9

In addition, sorting may be in ascending or descending order.

In ascending order, bins are moved up one by one. In descending order, bins are moved down one by one.

10-4
 Chapter 10

Ascending sort Descending sort

F-10-10

10.2.3 Sort Bin and Non-Sort Bin

10.2.3.1 Outline
0008-5497
A sorter is equipped with sort bins and a non-sort bin.
The sort bins are used when sorting takes place (sort mode, group mode, staple sort mode). The non-sort bin, on the other hand, is used when copies are
made without sorting.
When the sort bins are used, the multiple sort bins are moved up or down in keeping with the timing of delivery.
The following mechanisms are used to keep the sheets inside sort bins in place (not all models are equipped with all of them):
- Bin inside paper sensor
- Paper retaining arm
- Reference wall

Non-sort bin

Sort bin

F-10-11

10.2.3.2 Moving Up and Down the Sort Bins

0008-5498
The sort bins are moved up or down by rotating a lead cam. Rolls remain engaged with the groove in the lead cam, so that sort bins are made to move up
and down as the lead cam rotates.

10-5
 Chapter 10

Rolls

Bin

Lead cam
(rear; also found
Lead at front)
cam

Rolls

F-10-12

The groove of the lead cam is either level or sloped. When the rolls are at level segments, the sort bins remain stationary; when they are at sloped segments,
the sort bins move.

Sloped
Level

Sloped
Lead cam

Level

F-10-13

10.2.3.3 Detecting Paper Inside Sort Bins

0008-5500
A sensor is used to detect the presence/absence of paper inside sort bins, thereby preventing overstacking, possibly occurring as a result of delivering
additional sheets in the presence of paper inside a sort bin.
The sensor consists of two segments, each located at the top and the bottom of the bin unit.
When paper exists in a sort bin, the light from the top segment of the sensor is blocked, and the signal from the bottom segment changes, causing the sorter
controller to identify the condition as indicating the presence of paper. Some machines are equipped with two sensors instead of one.

Sorter controller PCB

Bin unit LED
+24VL

+5V

BPD*
(paper detection signal)
Phototransistor

F-10-14

10-6
 Chapter 10

Bin unit LED

LED

Phototransistor

Phototransistor
F-10-15

10.2.3.4 Guide Bar

0008-5501
The guide bar is used to push the stack of sheets toward the front each time a sheet is delivered to a sort bin, thereby keeping the stack in order. In addition,
it serves to keep the stack in place while stacking takes place.

Guide bar

Delivered sheet

F-10-16

In a copier with a front access mechanism, the guide bar also operates to push the stack forward to facilitate removal. It requires greater force to push a
stack toward the front than to keep a stack in order; for this reason, the gear ratio is switched to increase the force.

Guide bar Guide bar

F-10-17

10.2.3.5 Paper Retaining Arm

0008-5503
The paper retaining arm is used to hold down the stack inside a sort bin each time a sheet is delivered so as to facilitate the settlement of the delivered sheet
inside the sort bin.
The paper retaining arm also operates when stapling takes place, preventing displacement of the sheets when the stapler moves to the stack.

10-7
 Chapter 10

Paper retaining arm Paper retaining arm

Sheet
Sheet

Paper retaining Paper retaining

solenoid solenoid

Bin Bin

Paper Paper
retaining sensor retaining sensor

F-10-18

10.2.3.6 Reference Wall

0008-5510
The reference wall serves as a reference against which sheets delivered to a bin are arranged. The sheets pushed by the guide bar is positioned when they
butt against the reference wall.

Guide bar

Delivered sheet

Reference wall
F-10-19

In some machines, the position of the reference wall changes to match the middle of delivered sheets and the middle of the sort bin. In double stapling, the
front and rear positions will be symmetrical; in single stapling, stapling occurs at a specific position.
10.2.4 New Item
10.2.4.1 Outline
0008-5511
The term "feed speed" refers to the speed at which paper is moved inside a sorter. It may be any of the following three:
- Process speed
- Lead-in speed
- Delivery speed
10.2.4.2 Process Speed
0008-5513
The term "process speed" refers to the speed used to pull paper from the host copier fully into the sorter. It makes sure that paper is moved smoothly into
the sorter, and is made more or less identical to the delivery speed of the host copier.

10-8
 Chapter 10

Sheet

(sorter) (copier)

F-10-20

10.2.4.3 Lead-In Speed

0008-5514
When the trailing edge of paper leaves the last roller, the feed speed is switched from process speed to lead-in speed.
Lead-in speed is used to move paper inside the sorter as fast as possible, thereby increasing the distance between sheets and, ultimately, providing extra
time for sorter operation (e.g., bin movement).

Sheet

(sorter) (copier)

F-10-21

10.2.4.4 Delivery Speed

0008-5518
Delivery speed is used when delivering paper to a bin. If it is too high, the paper could slide off the bin; if too low, on the other hand, the paper could fail
to reach a specific position in the bin.

10-9
 Chapter 10

Sheet

(sorter) (copier)

F-10-22

10.2.5 Stapling
10.2.5.1 Outline
0008-5520
A stapler sorter is equipped with a stapling function:
Stapling may be any of the following three types:
- Auto stapling
- Manual stapling
- Manual feed stapling
In auto stapling, copies are stapled automatically at the end of sorting. It is selected on the copier.

Stop

4 5
Start

7 8
Clear

C 0

F-10-23

In manual stapling, copies are stapled in response to a press on the Staple Sorter key on the stapler sorter.

Stop
Manual Staple
4 5 A4 A3 A4 R
LTR 11x17 LGL
Staple Position
Start
LTR R B5 B4
A4 A3 A4
7 8 LTR 11x17
Stapling
B5 B4
Clear A4 R Start/Stop
LGL
C 0 LTR R

F-10-24

In manual feed stapling, a stack of sheets is placed in the stapler sorter, and the Staple Start key is pressed (operation is independent of the host copier).

Manual Staple
A4 A3 A4 R Staple Position
LTR 11x17 LGL
LTR R B5 B4
A4 A3 A4
LTR 11x17
B5 B4 Stapling
A4 R Start/Stop
LGL
LTR R

F-10-25

10.2.5.2 Stapling Position

0008-5550
Stapling position may be any of the following three types (not all machines provide all these types):
- Corner stapling
- Double stapling

10-10
 Chapter 10

- Single stapling

Corner stapling Double stapling Single stapling

Delivery
direction
Delivery Delivery
direction direction

F-10-26

10.2.5.3 Detecting Staples

0008-5552
Most stapler sorters are equipped with a mechanism to detect the presence/absence of staples inside the stapler unit. In most cases, the mechanism consists
of a microswitch; normally, as many staples as there are bins remain when the absence is detected so that stapling will not be interrupted because of the
detection.

Holding plate
Spring
Staple cartridge

Staple
SW1 SW1

Staple detecting switch

Staple feed roller

Staple Present Staple Absent

F-10-27

10.2.5.4 Detecting the Edge of a Staple Belt

0008-5554
Some stapler sorters are equipped with a mechanism that detects the edge of a staple belt called "staple belt leading edge switch." Unless this switch has
turned on, the stapler sorter is made to perform idle stapling (until the leading edge of the staple belt reaches the sensor).
In stapler sorters not equipped with this switch, stapling may not take place after removal of a jam; some allow execution of manual stapling to move the
staple belt (in user mode).
10.2.6 Special Functions
10.2.6.1 Outline
0008-5555
A sorter may have the following special functions:
- Limitless sort
- Tandem feeding
- Front access
- Multiple stacking
- Bin close sequence
10.2.6.2 Limitless Sort
0008-5556
Limitless sort takes place when a copy count higher than the number of existing bins is set. When copies have been delivered to all bins, the sorter stops
operation. Then, it will resume operation when all copies are removed from the bins.

10-11
 Chapter 10

Ends making as many copies as Resumes operation

there are bins; then, stops operation

All sheets are removed

from the bins

F-10-28

10.2.6.3 Cascade Sort

0008-5557
Cascade sort takes place when the number of originals is higher than the maximum number of sheets assigned to bins but when the number of copies is 1/
2 or lower than the number of bins. When as many copies as a specific bin is set to hold have been delivered, the next and subsequent copies will be
delivered to the next bin.

EX: If 2 sets of copies of 25 originals are to be delivered to a 10-bin sorter, each bin holding 20 sheets,

1st bin 2nd bin 3rd bin 4th bin

1 20 1 20 21 25 21 25

F-10-29

10.2.6.4 Tandem Feeding

0008-5559
In a tandem configuration, two sorters are connected to double the number of bins. The connection must be by means of a special Tandem Kit. (Not all
machines are designed for a tandem configuration.)

Tandem Kit

2nd sorter 1st sorter

F-10-30

In tandem feeding, sheets flow as follows:

When as many copies as can be accommodated by the first sorter have been made, the bin unit of the first sorter moves to the uppermost position so that
the subsequent copies will be moved through the tandem feeding unit to the second sorter.

10-12
 Chapter 10

Bin unit

Tandem feed unit

< 2nd sorter > < 1st sorter >

F-10-31

10.2.6.5 Front Access

0008-5561
In front access, the stack of sheets is turned and pushed to the front to make removal from the front easy. Some machines are equipped with this mechanism.
Not all paper sizes allow front access.

10-13
 Chapter 10

1.The same operation as in sort 2.By way of preparing for pushing

mode is performed to discharge the sheets to the front, the push
all sheets to the bin bar is moved to escape position.

Push bar

3.The guide bar moves the sheets 4.The push bar changes the
to the front. direction of the sheets in the bin.

Guide bar

5.The guide bar pushes all sheets

in the bin to the front; at the
same time, the push bar moves
to escape position.

F-10-32

10.2.6.6 Multiple Stacking

0008-5565
In multiple stacking, two sets (stacks) of copies are deposited by making use of the front access mechanism. Using this mode, copies may be sorted into
twice as many stacks as the number of bins without the help of tandem feeding.

1.The same operation as in front 2.The same operation as in sort

access mode is perfomed to mode is perfomed to discharge
push all stacks of sheets to the the stack of sheets to the bin.
front.

1st set 2nd set

F-10-33

10-14
 Chapter 10

Number of Sets in a Single Bin

- If stapling is selected, as many as 2 sets.
- If stapling is not selected, as many as 2 sets.

10.2.6.7 Bin Close Sequence

0008-5568
Normally, a sorter waits for delivery of a sheet keeping a bin open. Some types of sheets, however, can start to curl over time, later being pushed out of
the bin by the next sheet delivered.
To prevent curling, the bin is closed until immediately before the delivery of the next sheet.
1.

F-10-34

2.
Closes this bin and
remains in wait

F-10-35

3.

F-10-36

10-15
 Chapter 10

10.2.7 Others
10.2.7.1 Outline
0008-5576
The following items relate to a sorter:
- Limits to the height of a stack
- Limits to the number of sheets for stapling
10.2.7.2 Height of a Stack
0008-5578
The height of a stack refers to the number of sheets that may be stacked in a sort bin or the non-sort bin, and it differs according to paper size.
Each sheet is counted and communicated by signals (paper size, number) from the copier. When the sorter identifies an excess, the copier will stop
operation and indicate a message to that effect.
10.2.7.3 Number of Sheets for Stapling
0008-5580
A stapler is capable of stapling no more than a specific number of sheets, which varies depending on the type (weight) of paper.
If the host copier is a color copier, the amount of toner deposited on the paper will be an additional consideration. The following example cites the Stapler
Sorter-F1:

a. Outline
The amount of toner on paper is considered only for staple sort mode and sort mode (in other words, it is not considered for non-sort mode or group mode).
Stapling is subjected to restrictions under the following two conditions:
- In double-sided mode, the amount of toner deposit differs between face and back more than indicated.
- When using A4R, LTRR, or LGL, the amount of toner deposit is more than indicated.
(This is limited to plain paper, and does not apply to thick paper, special paper 1, special paper 2, or transparency.)
b. Operations
The following tables show operations that take place under each of the preceding conditions.
In double-sided mode (all paper sizes), the amount of toner deposit between face and back differs more than indicated.

T-10-3

Operation Description
Staple sort Stops operation; thereafter, prohibits auto/manual stapling.
Sort Stops operation; thereafter, prohibits manual stapling.
Message on copier "topped because of a stacking fault. Remove the sheet from the
sorter."

When using A4R, LTRR, or LGL, the amount of toner deposit is more than indicated.

T-10-4

Operation Description
Staple sort Stops operation; thereafter, prohibits auto/manual stapling.
Sort Stops operation; thereafter, prohibits manual stapling.
Message on copier "Stapling failed because of a stacking fault."

10-16
 Chapter 10

10.3 Multioutput Tray and Shift Tray

10.3.1 Outline
10.3.1.1 Outline
0008-5582
A multioutput tray is installed to a copier (system) equipped with copier, printer, and fax functions, and it is capable of switching trays (special trays) to
suit each output type (copy, printout, fax).
Each tray (special tray) is designed to shift to sort outputs. Some are equipped with sort bins, and yet some are capable of both sorting and stapling. (For
details, see II. "Sorter and Stapler."
The following are major types of multioutput tray:
Type 1 (w/ 10 sort bins and 2 special trays)

Sort bins

Special trays

F-10-37

Type 2 (w/ 1 delivery tray and 2 special trays)

Delivery tray

Special trays

F-10-38

A shift tray shifts itself to sort the output of its host copier. (This mechanism is found in multioutput trays shown as type 2 in the previous page.)

10-17
 Chapter 10

Type 1

F-10-39

10.3.2 Shifting the Shift Tray

10.3.2.1 Outline
0008-5585
The shift tray shifts its tray to the front and the rear to sort sheets on the same tray.
The sheets are stacked as shown in the following figure as the result of a shift.
The special trays of a multioutput tray operate in the same way.
Sheets Sorted on a Special Tray (top view)
Special tray 2

Delivered sheet for 2nd job

Shift distance

Tray shift movement Delivered sheet for 3rd job

Delivered sheet for 1st job

F-10-40

MEMO:
A series of operations from the start of delivery of the first page to the end of delivery of the last page is referred to as a "job."

10.3.2.2 Operations
0008-5595
The shift tray moves its tray to the front and the rear using the drive of a tray shift motor transmitted through gears and cams.

10-18
 Chapter 10

a. Type 1

Tray shift motor

Crescent pulley (makes a

1/2 rotation for each single shift)
F-10-41

b. Type 2

Tray shift plate

Crescent pulley

Shift motor

Tray position sensor

F-10-42

10.3.3 Others
10.3.3.1 Outline
0008-5596
A multioutput tray may be equipped with the following two special functions:
- Detecting paper on a special tray.
- Releasing the inlet roller roll
10.3.3.2 Detecting Paper on a Special Tray
0008-5598
The presence/absence of paper is detected by a sensor mounted to the center of a special tray.
When paper exists on the special tray, the Paper Present indicator lamp is turned on to inform the user.
The Paper Present indicator lamp flashes immediately before the first sheet is delivered to the special tray; it remains on when delivery ends.

10-19
 Chapter 10

Paper on Tray
indicator lamp

Sensors

F-10-43

10.3.3.3 Releasing the Inlet Roller Roll

0008-5600
The inlet roller roll is released when the host copier makes double-sided copies, enabling smooth return of copies from the multioutput tray to the copier.
The inlet roller roll is released by means of an inlet roller roll releasing solenoid.

Sheet Inlet roller roll

Copier

F-10-44

10-20
 Chapter 10

Inlet roller roll

Inlet roller roll releasing

Tray feeding assembly solenoid
inlet roller
F-10-45

10-21
 Chapter 10

10.4 Finisher
10.4.1 Outline
10.4.1.1 Outline
0008-6951
A finisher designed for a digital copier provides the following functions:
- Job offset
- Stapling
- Book binding
- Punching
- Folding

F-10-46

F-10-47

10.4.2 Job Offset

10.4.2.1 Outline
0008-6952
Multiple sheets are delivered to a single tray, and job offset takes place to sort the output.
Job offset may be sheet offset or stack offset.

10-22
 Chapter 10

Sheet Offset (4 sets) Stack Offset (4 sets)

4th set

Sorted 3rd set 2nd set

sheets 1st set
Delivery direction
Delivery direction
F-10-48

10.4.2.2 Job Offset (sheet offset)

0008-6953
The first sheet of each set is pulled onto the stapling tray immediately before delivery. It is then moved toward the front by the jogging plate, and is
delivered. The subsequent sheets are delivered without being moved to the front, offsetting them from the first sheet.
The following is an outline of the sheet offset mechanism.

Jogging plate

Guide plate

Jogging plate home

position sensor

Jogging motor
First
Sheet
Escape solenoid

F-10-49

a. Offset Operations (sheet offset)

1. The swing guide moves up, and the feed belts pull in the first sheet to the stapling tray.

Swing guide

1st sheet

Feed roller 2

Feed belts
Tray Delivery
roller

Stapling tray
Stopper
F-10-50

2. The jogging plate moves the sheet to the front.

10-23
 Chapter 10

Jogging plate

1st sheet

F-10-51

3. The swing guide moves down, and at the same time the delivery roller discharges the sheet.

Swing guide

Feed roller 2

Feed belts
Delivery
Tray roller

Stapling tray
Stopper
F-10-52

4. The following sheet is discharged without being shifted.

Jogging plate
Existing sheet

Following sheet

F-10-53

5. The preceding operations are repeated for as many sets as specified.

10.4.2.3 Job Offset (stack offset)
0008-6956
A sheet is pulled onto the processing tray immediately before discharge. The processing tray is equipped with two jogging plates (front, rear). Each time
a sheet is pulled in, the jogging plate (front or rear) shifts it, offsetting it from its preceding stack.
The following is an outline of the stack offset mechanism.
The front and rear jogging plates are driven by a stepping motor, and the home position of the jogging plates is detected by a photointerrupter.

10-24
 Chapter 10

Jogging plate (rear)

home position sensor

Jogging plate (rear)

Rear jogging plate Light-blocking

motor plate
M

Jogging plate (front)

Sheet
(front) Light-blocking M
plate
Front jogging plate
Jogging plate (front) motor
home position sensor
F-10-54

Details of how a sheet is pulled onto the processing tray are explained separately.

a. Offset Operations (stack offset)

1. The swing guide moves up, and the feed belts pull in the sheet onto the processing tray.

Swing guide
Paddle

Sort delivery roller

Feed belts

Offset sheet

Stack delivery
Tray sub plate roller Stopper
Jogging plate
F-10-55

2. The jogging plate moves the sheet to one side.

10-25
 Chapter 10

Rear jogging plate

Sheet to offset

Front jogging plate

Tray

Offsetting to the Front

F-10-56

3. The subsequent sheets are pulled onto the processing tray, and are shifted to the same direction as the preceding sheets.

Rear jogging plate

Following sheet

Preceding sheet

Front jogging plate

Tray
Offsetting to the Front
F-10-57

4. When as many sheets as are specified* have been deposited, they are discharged as a stack.

F-10-58

*The number of sheets varies according to paper size.

5. If a single stack has been completed, the coming sheet will be moved in the opposite direction; if a single stack has not been completed, the coming sheet
will be moved to the same direction as the preceding sheet.

10-26
 Chapter 10

Rear jogging plate Rear jogging plate

Following sheet Following sheet

Front jogging plate Front jogging plate

Tray Preceding stack Tray Preceding stack

Continuing for the Same Stack Offsetting to the Rear

F-10-59

10.4.3 Stapling
10.4.3.1 Outline
0008-6960
Stapling may be corner stapling or double stapling. (Some machines are capable of corner stapling only.)
To deal with face-down delivery, stapling is executed from the bottom.

Right upper
binding

Left upper
binding

Right lower
binding

Left lower
binding

F-10-60

10-27
 Chapter 10

Right
binding

Left
binding

F-10-61

10.4.3.2 Stapling Mechanism

0008-6962
The stapling mechanism consists of a stapler shift motor, stapler shift home position sensor, and stapler mounted on a rail.
The stapler shift motor is a stepping motor, and the stapler shift home position sensor is a photointerrupter.

Sheets are moved into the stapler so that there is no need for a stapler swing mechanism.
The stapler is oriented as it is shifted along the rail to which it is mounted.
This mechanism is not found in machines capable of corner stapling only.
Type 1

Stapler shift motor

Sheets

Stapler

Stapler shift
home position sensor
F-10-62

10-28
 Chapter 10

Type 2

Sheets

(front)
Stapler shift motor

Stapler

Stapler shift home position sensor

F-10-63

10.4.3.3 Stapling
0008-6963
A sheet is pulled into the processing tray immediately before discharge. The processing tray is equipped with two jogging plates (front and rear; or only
one at the rear in some machines). As a sheet is pulled in, it is moved to the front or rear by the jogging plate so that the edges of the stack are in order.
When all sheets of a single set have been deposited on the processing tray, the stapler starts stapling operation; then, the sheets are discharged as a stack.
The details of how sheets are pulled onto the processing tray are given separately.

a. Stapling
1. The stapler moves from home position (held in wait) to the center. At this time, the copier has not indicated the selected mode; in other words, this
movement is executed regardless of whether stapling has been selected or not or of stapling position.

Stapler

F-10-64

2. In keeping with the registration signal for the first sheet, instructions for stapling position are issued, causing the stapler to move to the appropriate
stapling position. If double stapling has been selected, the stapler is held in wait at the center and is not moved.

10-29
 Chapter 10

Stapler

F-10-65

3. As soon as the swing guide moves up, the feed belts pull the sheet onto the processing tray.

Swing guide

Sort deflecting roller

Feed belts

Sheet to staple

Stack roller

Jogging plate
Stapler
F-10-66

4. The jogging plate moves the sheet to one side.

Rear jogging plate

Sheet to staple

Front jogging plate

Tray

Moving to the Front

F-10-67

5. The following sheet is also moved to the processing tray in the same way, and is moved to the same side as the preceding sheet.
6. When a single stack is completed, the swing guide moves down to keep the stack in position.
7. The stapler staples the stack. In the case of double stapling, the stapler staples the stack and then moves to the second position to staple the stack once
again.
8. The stack delivery roller discharges the stack.

10-30
 Chapter 10

Swing guide

Sort delivery roller

Feed belts
Tray

Stapled stack

Stack delivery roller

F-10-68

10.4.3.4 Stapler Unit

0008-6967
The stapler unit consists of a stapler motor and various sensors. Normally, complete units are purchased from a stapler manufacturer; therefore, they are
not serviced in the field. The following diagrams provide an idea of how the unit operates:

F-10-69

F-10-70

10.4.3.5 Safety Switch

0008-6970
The power line to the stapler motor is sometimes equipped with a safety switch, so that the power may be removed when a finger or the like enters the
stapler. In the following example, the swing guide is linked to a safety switch. In some models, a safety switch cuts power not only to the stapler motor
but also to the stapler shift motor.

10-31
 Chapter 10

Swing guide

Swing guide open

detecting switch
(stapler safety
detection)

F-10-71

10.4.4 Processing Tray Lead-In Mechanism and Delivery Mechanism

10.4.4.1 Outlline
0008-6971
The processing tray lead-in mechanism and delivery mechanism may broadly be classified into two types:
a. In which a paddle and a feed belt are used to pull in paper and deliver it by a stack discharge roller (paddle type)
b. In which a return roller is used to pull in paper and deliver it by a stack belt (return roller type)
Each type operates as follows:
10.4.4.2 Paddle Type
0008-6973
1. The trailing edge of a sheet leaves the delivery sensor.

Delivery sensor
Tray

Stapler

F-10-72

2. The swing guide moves up.

10-32
 Chapter 10

Swing guide

Delivery roller

Tray

Stapler

F-10-73

3. The feed belts move the sheet in the direction of the processing tray. The presence/absence of paper on the processing tray is checked by the processing
tray paper sensor. The feed belts receive drive from the delivery roller.

Sheet

Feed belts

Tray

Stapler

F-10-74

4. The following sheet leaves the delivery sensor.

Following sheet

Delivery sensor

Tray

Stapler

F-10-75

5. The feed belts and the paddles move the following sheet in the direction of the processing tray.

10-33
 Chapter 10

Paddle

Feed belt

Tray

Stapler

F-10-76

6. When as many sheets as specified have been deposited, the swing guide moves down, and operations needed for stapling are executed.

Swing guide

Tray

Stapler

F-10-77

7. The stack delivery roller discharges the sheets. The end of delivery is detected by the stack delivery sensor.

Tray

Stack delivery roller

Stapler

Stack delivery sensor

F-10-78

10.4.4.3 Return Roller Type

0008-6980
The drive of the return roller type comes from the stack processing motor, which changes its direction of rotation (CW or CCW) to drive the return roller
or both the return roller and the stack delivery roller.

10-34
 Chapter 10

Return roller position sensor

Return roller
Stack processing Stack tray side
motor
M

One-way clutch
Stack delivery belts
Stack delivery levers
F-10-79

10.4.4.4 Return Roller Type

0008-6988
1. The copier discharges a sheet.

F-10-80

2. The return roller rotates in normal direction (CW) to butt the sheet on the processing tray against the stopper plate of the stack delivery belt.

Return roller

Stopper plate

F-10-81

3. The return roller continues to rotate, and waits at home position.

F-10-82

4. Each time a sheet is delivered, steps 1 through 3 are repeated to complete a stack.

10-35
 Chapter 10

F-10-83

5. When a stack is completed, the stack delivery belt discharges the stack.

F-10-84

10.4.4.5 Swing Guide Drive Mechanism (paddle type)

0008-7094
The swing guide drive mechanism may be equipped with a dedicated stepping motor (type 1) or may be driven by the delivery motor (type 2).
The following shows a type 1 drive mechanism:

Swing guide closed sensor

Swing guide
open sensor
Swing guide

Swing guide
open detecting switch

Swing motor Swing motor clock sensor

F-10-85

In type 2, the direction of rotation of the motor determines which to drive, i.e., the swing guide or another load. The motor rotates in reverse (CCW) and
stops when the swing guide open sensor turns on. The motor rotates in reverse once again when a specified number of sheets have been deposited, and the
swing guide moves down in response.

10-36
 Chapter 10

Swing guide
Swing guide
open sensor
Swing guide closed
detecting switch Stack delivery roller

Motor clock sensor

Swing Guide Open Motor

F-10-86

Swing guide

Stack delivery roller

Swing Guide Closed Motor

F-10-87

In both types, the safety switch built to the line used to supply power to the stapler motor will turn off when the swing guide has opened, thereby preventing
operation in the presence of a finger or the like in the stapler.
10.4.4.6 Paddle Drive Mechanism (paddle type)
0008-7101
The paddle drive mechanism may be equipped with a dedicated stepping motor (type 1) or may be driven by the feed motor (type 2).
In a type 1 paddle drive mechanism, the paddles are capable of multiple rotations for a single sheet of paper; the drive of the motor enables fast operation
and is suitable for high-speed machines. It also requires a home position sensor.

Sheet
Paddles

Paddle home
position sensor

M
(front) Paddle motor
F-10-88

In type 2, a paddle solenoid is used. The paddle is designed to rotate as soon as the solenoid turns on.

10-37
 Chapter 10

Paddles

Paddles

Paddle solenoid 2nd or subsequent

sheet

1st sheet

Stapler
M
M
Stopper
Motor
F-10-89

10.4.4.7 Feed Belt Releasing Mechanism (paddle type)

0008-7102
a. Outline
The feed belt is equipped with a mechanism to release it; the mechanism uses a solenoid, and has the following functions:
1. Reducing Feed Force
When 3-sheet delivery takes place, the force applied to the top sheet tends to be greater, causing the sheet to bend against the stopper. The mechanism is
used to reduce the force, thereby preventing the bending.
2. Preventing Displacement
When a large number of sheets exist on the processing tray, the force of the feed belt can displace them. The mechanism is used to prevent such
displacement.
The operation differs according to the following:
- 3-sheet delivery (using a buffer roller)
- 40 or more sheets exist on the processing tray

Feed belts

Solenoid

Released
(front)
F-10-90

b. 3-Sheet Delivery
1. A stack of sheets moves past the sort delivery sensor. At the same time, the solenoid turns on to release the feed belt.

10-38
 Chapter 10

Paddle
Stack

Feed belts
ON
SL
Solenoi

Stack delivery roller Stopper

F-10-91

2. The paddle rotates as soon as the stack delivery roller starts to rotate in reverse, moving the stack in the direction of the processing tray.

ON
SL

F-10-92

3. The solenoid turns off when the stack hits the stopper.

OFF
SL

F-10-93

c. Sheets on the Tray

1. The trailing edge of a sheet moves past the delivery sensor, and is butted against the stopper by the work of the paddles and the feed belts.

Newly deposited stack

Paddles

Feed belts
OFF
SL
Solenoid
Existing stack
Stopper
F-10-94

2. While the sheet is being put into order, the solenoid turns on to release the belts.

10-39
 Chapter 10

ON
SL

Jogging plate
(top view)

Jogging plate
Tray
F-10-95

3. When the sheet has been put into order, the solenoid turns off, and the belt moves the sheet into the direction of the stopper.

OFF
SL

F-10-96

4. The solenoid turns on in keeping with the delivery of the stack, moving the belt away from the stack. The solenoid remains on if the next operation is
3-sheet delivery.

ON
SL

F-10-97

10.4.5 Buffer Roller Operation

10.4.5.1 Outline
0008-7114
To enable uninterrupted delivery from the host copier while stapling or offset operation is taking place, the buffer path inside the finisher is used to move
sheets. As many as two or three sheets are wrapped around the buffer roller while stapling or offset operation is executed. The number of sheets differs
from machine to machine, but the paper must be A4, B5, or LTR.
The buffer roller is driven by the feed motor. In the case of wrapping two sheets of paper, the mechanism operates as follows:
1. When the 1st sheet arrives, the buffer inlet flapper solenoid turns on to switch the path to the buffer path. The switch-over occurs when the sheet of the
previous job has moved past the buffer inlet flapper or when the sheet has reached the pre-registration sensor of the copier.

10-40
 Chapter 10

ON
SL
Buffer inlet
solenoid

F-10-98

2. The 1st sheet enters the buffer path.

Buffer inlet
paper sensor

F-10-99

3. When the leading edge of the sheet moves past the buffer inlet paper sensor, the buffer outlet solenoid turns on to wrap the sheet around the buffer roller.

ON Buffer inlet
SL paper sensor

F-10-100

4. As soon as the leading edge of the sheet reaches a specific point after passing the buffer path paper sensor, the buffer roller stops to wait for the 2nd sheet.

10-41
 Chapter 10

1st sheet
2nd sheet

Buffer path
paper sensor

F-10-101

5. When the 2nd sheet arrives and its leading edge reaches the buffer inlet sensor, the buffer roller starts once again. At the same time, the buffer outlet
solenoid turns off, and the path switches to point to the direction of delivery. (The trailing edge of the 1st sheet is still over the flapper area, so that the
actual switch-over takes place after the trailing edge of the sheet has moved away.)

OFF Buffer inlet

SL paper sensor

F-10-102

6. The 1st and 2nd sheets move past over the buffer roller at the same time.

1st sheet
2nd sheet

Buffer inlet
paper sensor

F-10-103

7. When the trailing edge of the sheet moves past the buffer inlet paper sensor, the buffer inlet flapper turns off.

10-42
 Chapter 10

Buffer inlet
paper sensor

OFF
SL
Buffer inlet
solenoid

F-10-104

10.4.6 Shutter Mechanisms

10.4.6.1 Outline
0008-7126
A shutter is used to cover the delivery assembly when the delivery tray moves past the delivery assembly (for tray replacement).
The shutter prevents sheets exiting on the tray from entering the delivery assembly. It also protects the user by preventing his/her hands from reaching
inside the delivery assembly.
The shutter may be driven either by a paddle motor or by a feed motor; in both types, the shutter is driven when the motor rotates in reverse, and are
constructed as follows:

Paddle Motor Drive

M
Paddle motor

Shutter home position sensor

F-10-105

10-43
 Chapter 10

Feed Motor Drive

Feed motor
M

Claw
Shutter

Claw

Shutter closed
detecting switch

Shutter open
sensor

One-way cam

F-10-106

10.4.6.2 Shutter Operation

0008-7139
In the case of a shutter operated by a feed motor, the following operations take place:
1. The feed motor rotates in reverse, and the shutter moves up.

M
Feed motor

F-10-107

2. The tray shift motor rotates, and the new tray moves to the stack lower limit. The distance over which the tray moves is checked by the tray shift motor
clock sensors 1 and 2.

10-44
 Chapter 10

M
Tray shift motor

F-10-108

3. The feed motor rotates in reverse, and the shutter moves down.

M Feed motor

F-10-109

4. The tray shift motor rotates, and the tray moves to suit the height of the existing stack. The appropriate height of the tray in relation to the existing stack
is determined by a height sensor.

Height
sensor

M
Tray ascent/
descent motor

F-10-110

10-45
 Chapter 10

10.4.7 Tray Drive

10.4.7.1 Outline
0008-7148
The tray of the finisher moves down as more and more sheets are stacked on it. The tray is moved up or down by a DC motor or a stepping motor.
10.4.7.2 Operating the Tray
0008-7149
The tray drive mechanism varies appreciably from machine to machine; here, it is classified according to the number of drive motors and the type of drive
transmission mechanism.
The drive transmission mechanism is of a rack/pinion type or a belt type.

a. Type 1
The two trays (tray A/B) are equipped with independent drive motors, each capable of operating independently of each other. A lock sensor is used to
monitor the operation of the tray motor; a tray approach switch, on the other hand, is used to cut power to the tray B ascent/descent motor when the two
trays approach each other.

Tray approach switch

Tray A ascent/
descent motor
Torque limiter

Tray A lock sensor

One-way gear
Gear damper
Rack

Tray B ascent/
descent motor
Torque limiter

Tray B lock sensor

One-way gear
Gear damper

F-10-111

b. Type 2
As many as three trays are driven simultaneously by a single DC motor. Some motors are equipped with a thermistor to watch for overheating of the motor.

10-46
 Chapter 10

Tray 1 Rack

Tray upper limit detecting

switch

Tray 2

Encoder

Tray 3 Tray ascent/descent motor

clock sensor

Tray ascent/descent
motor thermistor Tray ascent/descent motor
clock sensor

Safety range switch

Tray home position sensor

Tray ascent/decent motor

F-10-112

c. Type 3
The tray is driven by a DC motor using a belt. The drive in a specific direction stops when the tray reaches the upper limit sensor or a lower limit sensor.

Tray upper limit sensor

Tray

Paper retaining lever

M
Tray ascent/
decent motor Tray lower limit sensor

F-10-113

10-47
 Chapter 10

10.4.8 Detecting the Height of the Tray

10.4.8.1 Outline
0008-7151
The sensor used to detect the height of the tray may be any of the following three types:
a. Penetration type
b. Reflection type
c. Photointerrupter type
The sensor is used to check the top face of the paper on the tray to enable adjustment of the height of the tray.
10.4.8.2 Penetration Type Sensor
0008-7152
A light-receiving segment is mounted on one side of a rack and a light-emitting segment is mounted on the other side; when paper blocks the light, the
condition is identified as indicating the tray is at the correct height.

Penetration Non-sort delivery roller

type sensor
(light-emitting)

Transmission
type sensor
(light-receiving)
Sheets

Tray A
(front)
Stack delivery roller

Sheets

(front)
Tray B
F-10-114

10.4.8.3 Reflection Sensor Type

0008-7153
When the intensity of the light reflected by the top face of paper is a specific value, the condition is identified as indicating that the tray is at the correct
height.

10-48
 Chapter 10

Reflecting type sensor

Sheets

F-10-115

10.4.8.4 Photointerrupter Type

0008-7156
When the top face of paper comes into contact with the sensor flag and the tray height sensor (photointerrupter) turns on, the condition is identified as
indicating that the tray is at the correct height. Figure 3-111 shows a machine equipped with two sensor flags.

Tray height sensor flag 2

Tray Tray height sensor flag 1
Tray height sensor
(photointerrupter)

F-10-116

10-49
 Chapter 10

10.5 Punch Unit

10.5.1 Outline
10.5.1.1 Outline
0008-5652
The punch unit is used to make two or three holes in paper.

2 holes 3 holes

Feed Feed
direction direction

F-10-117

Punch unit

Type 1
F-10-118

Punch
unit

Type 2
F-10-119

Here a punch unit is explained in the following sequence:

1. Punching operation
2. Horizontal registration operation
3. Waste feed operation
4. Waste full detection
5. Waste pounding operation

10-50
 Chapter 10

10.5.2 Punching Operation

10.5.2.1 Punching Operation
0008-5655
The punching roller is rotated by a punch rotation motor. The position of the punching roller is monitored by a punch rotation home position sensor. The
start of rotation of the punching roller is detected by a paper trailing edge sensor.
Type 1 (w/ horizontal registration operation)
Punch registration motor
Punch sensor
Punch rotation motor shift motor

n
tio
irec
nd
tio
istra
reg
n tal
rizo
h ho
nc
Pu

or l
ns ta
Se rizon ation
ho gistr on
re recti
di
Punch paper edge
sensor
Punch horizontal registration
home position sensor
Feed direction
Punch rotation home
position sensor
Punch end sensor
Punch horizontal registration sensor
home position sensor
F-10-120

A machine designed to execute punch horizontal registration is equipped with a punch end sensor. If horizontal registration operation was carried out while
the die and the punch are engaged, paper would be torn; as such, horizontal registration will not be initiated before the punch end sensor has turned on.

10-51
 Chapter 10

Type 2 (without horizontal registration)

Punch roller home position sensor
Prism

Rear edge detection PCB

Punch motor

Prism

Punch waste case full detection PCB

Punch waste case

F-10-121

MEMO:
The paper trailing edge sensor cannot detect paper with a high transparency (e.g., transparency film), disabling punching operation even when punch mode
has been selected.

10.5.3 Outline of Punching Operations

10.5.3.1 Outline of Punching Operations
0008-5659
The following is a sequence of punching operations:
1. A sheet arrives from the host copier or an inserter. At this time, the punching roller remains in wait at home position.

Type-1
Delivery detection
Punch unit

Paper trailing edge

detection PCB
F-10-122

10-52
 Chapter 10

Type-2 Paper trailing edge

detection PCB

Punch unit

Delivery
direction
F-10-123

2. The leading edge of the sheet moves under the punch roller, which still remains still. (Paper is moved by the roller located in front /at the back of the
punch unit.)

Type-1

F-10-124

Type-2

F-10-125

3. A specific period of time after the trailing edge of a sheet has moved past the paper trailing edge sensor, the punching roller starts to rotate. The feed
roller continues to move the sheet at a specific speed.

10-53
 Chapter 10

Type-1

Paper trailing
edge sensor

F-10-126

Type-2

F-10-127

4. The punch and the die on the punching roller engage at a specific position of the trailing edge of the sheet, thereby opening punch holes.

Type-1

F-10-128

10-54
 Chapter 10

Type-2

F-10-129

5. The punching roller rotates further, and stops at home position, remaining in wait for the next operation. The punched sheet is moved in the direction of
delivery.

Type-1

F-10-130

Type-2

F-10-131

10.5.4 Horizontal Registration (type 1)

10.5.4.1 Horizontal Registration (type 1)
0008-5661
The punch unit is driven for horizontal registration by a punch registration motor. The horizontal registration home position of the punch unit is detected
by the punch home position sensor. The punch unit is moved to a point selected for the detected trailing edge of a sheet based on the output of the punch
horizontal registration sensor home position sensor.
1. The paper size signal arrives from the copier. The punch paper edge sensor moves to suit the paper size.

10-55
 Chapter 10

Punch paper edge sensor

Punch horizontal registration sensor
home position sensor

M Punch sensor shift motor

F-10-132

2. A sheet arrives in the punch unit. When the length of the trailing edge of the sheet turns identical to an equivalent of B5 (182 mm) from the punch unit,
the punch registration motor starts to rotate in normal direction (CW).

Punch registration motor

M

Punch horizontal registration

home position sensor
F-10-133

3. When the punch paper edge sensor turns on, the punch registration motor stops, thereby matching the center of the punch unit and the center of the sheet
(horizontal registration).

F-10-134

4. The sheet is punched by the drive of the punch motor.

F-10-135

5. When the punch end sensor turns off, the punch registration motor rotates in reverse (CCW) to return the punch unit to the home position.

F-10-136

6. If the next sheet is also to be punched, steps from 2 to 5 are repeated; in either case, the paper edge sensor remains where it is.

10-56
 Chapter 10

MEMO:
If the host copier discharges sheets face down, horizontal registration operation is needed to ensure correct horizontal registration; this does not apply if
the host copier discharges sheets without turning them over.
If a sheet is moving askew, the skew will show in the arrangement of the holes, as the punch unit does not have a means to compensate for any skew.

10.5.5 Waste Feed Operation

10.5.5.1 Waste Feed Operation
0008-5662
Waste occurring as a result of punching holes is moved by a punch screw rotated by the punch waste feed motor. The screw is rotated from when the
registration signal for the first sheet turns on to when the last sheet is delivered.
The waste feed sensor monitors the rotation of the punch screw as long as punching operation is taking place.
If punch mode is selected while the waste case is not set in position, the copier will display a warning to that effect on its control panel.

Punch feed sensor

Punch waste feed motor

Case full detection LED

Punch waste sensor PCB

Punch waste case set sensor

Pre-detection LED

Punch waste case

F-10-137

In a machine not quipped with a waste feed mechanism, waste is let to fall onto the waste case under the punch unit for collection.
10.5.6 Waste Case Full Detection
10.5.6.1 Waste Case Full Detection
0008-5663
The waste case is monitored by a waste case detection PCB. The PCB has a light-emitting segment (LED) and a light-receiving segment; the waste case,
on the other hand, is equipped with a prism used to reflect the light from the light-emitting segment to the light-receiving segment.
When waste builds up and the waste case becomes full, the light to the LED becomes blocked, causing the detection PCB to identify the condition as
indicating that the waste case is full.
In a machine of type 1, two pairs of sensors and prisms are used (top and bottom); the bottom sensor is used for advance detection, while the top sensor is
for actual detection.
If the advance detection sensor turns on, no further punching is allowed; however, if it turns on in the middle of punching operation, the operation will be
continued until its end or until the waste case is actually identified as being full. If the waste case full detection sensor turns on, on the other hand, the
ongoing operation will be stopped immediately, and no further punching will be allowed.
In a machine of type 2, one sensor is used to monitor the waste inside the case and to check the presence/absence of the case itself.

10-57
 Chapter 10

10.5.7 Evening Out the Waste

10.5.7.1 Evening Out the Waste
0008-5664
So that the waste case may hold more waste, a pounding mechanism is used (type 2).
The waste inside the waste case is evened out by a hammer mounted to a one-way clutch hitting the bottom of the case. The one-way clutch is driven by
the feed motor, and the waste is evened out when the motor rotates in reverse as follows:
- for 3 sec during initialization at the start of copying operation
- for 1 sec after the last copy has moved the delivery sensor

Feed motor

Punch waste case

One-way clutch

F-10-138

10-58
 Chapter 10

10.6 Saddle Stitcher

10.6.1 Outline
10.6.1.1 Outline
0008-5665
The saddle stitcher is mounted to the bottom of the finisher assembly, and is used to bind sheets arriving from the host copier through a finisher.
The sheets arriving at the saddle stitcher are copies made by the host copier in bind mode. The saddle stitcher puts stitches to them and folds them for
delivery. The size of the sheets must be A3, B4, A4R, 279 x 342mm (11 x 17), or LTRR.

Saddle stitcher
F-10-139

Originals Stitch Folded by roller and delivered

1 5 1
8
2 6 3
6
2
7

3 7
8 1
4 8
4
5

6 3

F-10-140

The following figure shows the names of parts of the saddle stitcher.

10-59
 Chapter 10

[11]

[10]

[9] [12]

[13]
[8]
[7]
[6] [14]
[5] [15]
[16]
[4]
[17]
[3]
[2]
[1] [18]

F-10-141

T-10-5

[1] Saddle delivery tray
[2] Delivery guide roller
[3] Guide plate
[4] Delivery guide
[5] Delivery roller
[6] Folding roller (upper, lower)
[7] Intermediate roller 2
[8] Stitcher (front, rear)
[9] Intermediate roller 1
[10] Saddle inlet paper deflecting plate
[11] Saddle inlet roller
[12] No. 1 paper deflecting plate
[13] No. 2 paper deflecting plate
[14] Stitch mount
[15] Jogging plate (front, rear)
[16] Paper push-on plate
[17] Crescent roller
[18] Paper positioning plate

The saddle stitcher performs the following sequence of operations:

1. Accepting sheets
2. Arranging the sheets
3. Stitching the sheets
4. Moving the stack
5. Folding the stack
6. Controlling the delivery tray
10.6.2 Accepting Sheets
10.6.2.1 Accepting Sheets
0008-5668
Sheets arrive at the saddle stitcher in sequence from the finisher. The saddle stitcher waits until all sheets of a job arrive.
The feed path is switched by the flapper at the inlet of the saddle assembly to suit the size of paper coming in, preventing sheets from rushing against the
existing sheets.

10-60
 Chapter 10

No. 1 paper sensor

PI Paper passing
No. 1 paper deflecting OFF
plate solenoid SL Paper not passing
No. 2 paper sensor Upper edge
PI OFF
SL
No. 2 paper deflecting
Paper not passing
solenoid PI
No. 3 paper sensor
PI
PI

PI
PI

PI

PI

1st sheet fed

2nd sheet fed

3rd sheet fed

F-10-142

10.6.3 Arranging the Sheets

10.6.3.1 Arranging the Sheets
0008-5669
Each time a sheet is delivered, the jogging plate arranges it, thereby butting both edges of the sheets into order in preparation for stitching operation.
The jogging plate is driven by a motor, and is operated to put sheets into order at the point best suited to the size of paper in question.
The edge in feeding direction is corrected when the leading edge of a sheet hits the paper positioning plate.

10-61
 Chapter 10

Jogging plate

Jogging motor

Jogging plate

Stack

Jogging plate
home position sensor
(photointerrupter)
Paper positioning plate

F-10-143

10.6.4 Stitching
10.6.4.1 Stitching
0008-5670
As many as two stitchers are used to put stitches in the middle of a stack. When stitching takes place, the jogging plates keep against the edges of the sheets
to prevent displacement, ultimately preventing wrinkling and reducing power consumption.
The stitcher consists of a stitcher unit and a stitch base, constructed as separate entities.

Stitcher (rear)

Stitcher (front)

Stack

F-10-144

10-62
 Chapter 10

10.6.5 Moving the Stack

10.6.5.1 Moving the Stack
0008-5671
The middle of a stack is determined by a paper positioning plate. When stitching is taking place, the paper positioning plate is located so that the middle
of the stack matches the stitcher; in preparation for the upcoming folding operation, the stack is moved so that its middle will suit the position of the paper
folding roll and the paper position plate. The stack is moved in conjunction with the downward movement of the paper positioning plate.
The guide plate used to cover the paper folding roller also starts to move, enabling the upcoming folding operation.

Folding roller

Paper push-on plate

Paper positioning plate

Guide plate

F-10-145

MEMO:
Any discrepancy between stitching position and folding position may be corrected using the DIP switch on the saddle stitcher controller PCB (i.e., by
adjusting the distance over which the paper positioning plate is moved from stitching position to the folding position.
The position for stitching and folding may also be corrected using copier service mode in relation to the initial position adjustment for the paper positioning
plate.

10.6.6 Folding the Stack

10.6.6.1 Folding the Stack
0008-5673
A stack is folded by a paper folding roller and a paper push-on plate. The paper push-on plate forces the middle of a stack against the folding rollers. In
turn, the folding rollers take in the stack between them to create a crease.
The paper push-on plate returns to home position when the stack is pushed between the paper folding rollers. The paper folding rollers continue to rotate
to deliver the stack to the delivery tray.

10-63
 Chapter 10

Paper push-on plate leading

edge position sensor Paper push-on plate home position sensor

Folding roller
(upper)
Folding roller
(lower)
Paper push-on plate

M
Paper push-on
M plate motor
Stack Folding motor
F-10-146

F-10-147

10.6.7 Controlling the DeliveryTray

10.6.7.1 Controlling the Delivery Tray
0008-5674
Some saddle stitchers are equipped with a mobile wall (saddle tray) on their delivery tray to assist deposit of stacks. A mobile wall increases the number
of stacks that may be deposited on the delivery tray.
The mobile wall is designed to move to a position suited to the size and the height (number of sheets) of the stack in question at the start of delivery. During
continuous operation, it moves back for each stack. Its position is not based on the state of the paper sensor on it, and the paper sensor is used only for
resetting the counter keeping track of the number of stacks delivered.
If the sensor has detected a stack at the start of delivery, the mobile wall will be fixed in position.

10-64
 Chapter 10

Saddle tray home Saddle tray motor Saddle tray paper sensor 1
position sensor

Saddle tray paper sensor 3

Saddle tray paper sensor 2
F-10-148

10-65
 Chapter 10

10.7 Paper Folding Unit

10.7.1 Outline
10.7.1.1 Outline
0008-5675
A paper folding unit folds a sheet delivered from its host copier in the shape of the letter Z.
Folding is selected on the control panel of the copier, and is possible for specific paper sizes. (For details, see the Service Manual of the host copier.)

On DF On copyboard glass
B5 A4 B5 A4 B4 A3

B5

A4

B5
B4

A4
A3

F-10-149

10.7.2 Outline of Operations

10.7.2.1 Outline of Operations
0008-5676
When a sheet arrives from the host copier, any of its skew is removed, and the three folding rollers (A, B, C) and a stopper are used to fold it.
The folding rollers are specially designed for folding sheets, while the stopper is used to position sheets according to paper size.

10-66
 Chapter 10

Face-Up Delivery

B4 No. 2 stopper

A3 No. 2 stopper
(fixed)
Pressure roller

Skew correcting roller

Folding roller B
No. 2 folding roller
Folding roller C
A3 No. 1 stopper (fixed)
Folding roller A

B4 No. 1 stopper
F-10-150

Face-Down Delivery

Inlet flapper

Pressure roller
Skew correcting roller No. 2 folding roller
A3 No. 2 stopper (fixed)
B4 No. 2 stopper
Folding roller C
Folding roller B
Folding roller A
B4 No. 1 stopper A3 No. 1 stopper (fixed)

F-10-151

10.7.3 Removing the Skew

10.7.3.1 Removing the Skew
0008-5681
a. Outline
Sheets may arrive askew from the copier; if they were folded without removing the skew, the crease would be at an angle.
To prevent such a problem, a skew correction roller and a pressure roller are operated to remove the skew.

10-67
 Chapter 10

Face-Up Delivery

Releasing
solenoid

Skew correcting
roller

Pressure
roller

F-10-152

Face-Down Delivery

Skew removing roller Releasing

solenoid

Skew removing roller

Stopper

Stopper

F-10-153

b. Operations
1. A sheet hits the stopper of its size.
2. Then, the sheet is moved and made to arch by the work of the skew correction roller.
3. The skew correction (releasing) solenoid turns on so that the pressure roller moves away from the sheet, thereby removing the skew.
Face-Up Delivery
Skew correcting solenoid
Pressure roller
Skew correcting
Linked in roller
operation

Stopper

F-10-154

10-68
 Chapter 10

Face-Down Delivery
Skew correcting roller Pressure roller Skew correcting roller Pressure roller

Releasing
solenoid
Linked in operation
(solenoid OFF)

No. 1 stopper No. 1 stopper

F-10-155

10.7.4 Folding Operation

10.7.4.1 Folding Operation
0008-5685
a. Outline
A sheet is folded by three folding rollers and along two lines.
1st: using folding rollers A and B
2nd: using folding rollers A and C
Face-Up Delivery

Folding
roller C

Folding
Folding roller B
roller A

F-10-156

10-69
 Chapter 10

Face-Down Delivery

Folding roller C Folding roller B

Folding roller A

F-10-157

b. Operations
b-1 Using Folding Rollers A and B
1. When the skew has been removed, the locking solenoid tuns on once again so that the sheet is moved once again and is made to arch.
2. The skew correcting roller continues to rotate and, as a result, the arch increases to push in the sheet between the folding rollers A and B.
Surface Delivery
Between folding
rollers A and B
Pressure roller
Skew correcting
roller

Locking solenoid

F-10-158

Face-Down Delivery
Pressure roller
Skew correcting roller

Skew correcting roller Pressure roller

Folding roller B
Releasing
solenoid
Folding roller A

Between folding
rollers A and B
1st fold

No. 1 stopper No. 1 stopper

F-10-159

b-2 Using Folding Rollers B and C

1. When the sheet has been folded by the folding rollers A and B, it is sent to the No. 2 stopper.
2. The sheet is brought into contact with the Z-fold stopper, is moved ahead by the folding rollers A and B, and then is made to arch.
3. As the arch increases, the sheet is forced between the folding rollers A and C and is folded.

10-70
 Chapter 10

Face-Up Delivery
To Z-fold stopper

Butted against stopper

Between folding
Folding roller A rollers A and C
Folding roller B
F-10-160

Face-Down Delivery
No. 2 stopper No. 2 stopper

To No. 2 stopper

Folding roller B

Between folding
rollers A and C

Folding roller B

Folding roller A Folding roller A Folding roller C

F-10-161

10.7.5 Operation of the Sub Tray

10.7.5.1 Operation of the Sub Tray
0008-5689
Some machines are equipped with a sub tray on their delivery tray, thereby increasing the number of stacks for accommodation.
A folded sheet differs in thickness between leading edge and trailing edge, with the leading edge thicker. If a folded sheet was deposited on the tray as it
is, the following sheet would hit against it; to prevent such a problem, the sub tray is moved up when stacking a folded sheet, thereby raising the trailing
edge of the sheet (where it is thicker).
This mechanism does not operate under some conditions where folded sheets are mixed with non-folded sheets.

The solenoid used for the drive of the tray is a latch solenoid.

Tray

F-10-162

10-71
 Chapter 10

10.7.6 Summary of Folding Operations

10.7.6.1 Z-Fold (face-up delivery)
0008-5690

F-10-163

10.7.6.2 Z-Fold (face-down delivery)

0008-5691

F-10-164

10-72
 Chapter 10

10.8 Inserter
10.8.1 Outline
10.8.1.1 Outline
0008-5693
An inserter is used to introduce a front cover, back cover, or interleaf into a finisher. It enables insertion of paper (e.g., color copy) which cannot be fed
from a copier.
A sheet picked up from the inserter is moved to the buffer roller of the finisher assembly or the saddle stitcher assembly.
An inserter is equipped with a pickup mechanism, and is designed for installation to a finisher assembly.

F-10-165

10.8.2 Pickup by an Inserter

10.8.2.1 Pickup by an Inserter
0008-5695
a. Outline
A sheet is picked up by an inserter by butting a pickup roller unit against the paper and rotating the roller. The pickup roller is moved up and down by an
inserter pickup solenoid; it is rotated by the inserter motor using an inserter separation clutch. Sheets are separated by means of a separation roller,
separation belt, and separation clutch.
The stopper plate is moved down by an inserter stopper plate solenoid.

b. Operations
1. In response to the inserter pickup signal, the inserter stopper plate moves down and, at the same time, the pickup roller unit moves down to the surface
of the sheet.

ON
SL
Pickup roller unit

SL
ON (drawing)
F-10-166

2. When the separation clutch turns on, the pickup roller rotates to pull the top sheet.

CL
ON
F-10-167

3. When the leading edge of the sheet has been moved a specific distance, the separation clutch turns off, causing the pickup roller unit to move up. The

10-73
 Chapter 10

stopper plate waits at the lower position until the inserter paper set sensor turns off.

OFF
SL

F-10-168

10.8.3 Feeding Operation

10.8.3.1 Feeding Operation
0008-5696
The inserter adds a cover or interleaf into a stack of sheets arriving from its host copier according to the mode selected on the host copier.

a. Finisher Mode
1. The delivery signal arrives from the copier.
2. A sheet is picked up from the inserter tray.

F-10-169

3. The sheet is moved in the direction of the buffer roller of the finisher assembly.

F-10-170

10-74
 Chapter 10

b. Saddle Stitcher Mode

1. The delivery signal arrives from the copier.
2. A sheet is picked up from the inserter tray.

F-10-171

3. The sheet is moved in the direction of the buffer roller of the finisher assembly.

F-10-172

4. The operation stops temporarily before the trailing edge of the sheet leaves the finisher inlet roller.

10-75
 Chapter 10

F-10-173

5. The roller rotates in reverse to move the sheet in the direction of the saddle stitcher.

F-10-174

10-76
Chapter 11 INPUT SYSTEM
 Contents

Contents

11.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................11-1

11.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-1
11.1.2 Film .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.2.1 Type of Film................................................................................................................................................................................................11-1
11.1.2.2 Silver Halide Film .......................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.2.3 Standards on Commercially Available Mounts (for positive films) ...........................................................................................................11-2
11.1.3 Film Fixing Tool ...................................................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.3.1 Film Fixing Tool .........................................................................................................................................................................................11-3
11.2 Film Projector ............................................................................................................................................................11-5
11.2.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.2.1.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-5
11.2.2 Basic Operations ...................................................................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.2.2.1 Outline of Basic Operations ........................................................................................................................................................................11-5
11.2.2.2 Diffusing Plate ............................................................................................................................................................................................11-6
11.2.2.3 Cyan Filter...................................................................................................................................................................................................11-6
11.2.2.4 ND (neural density) Filter ...........................................................................................................................................................................11-6
11.2.2.5 Fresnel Lens ...............................................................................................................................................................................................11-6
11.2.3 Shading Correction .................................................................................................................................................................. 11-7
11.2.3.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-7
11.2.3.2 Basic Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................................11-7
11.2.4 Auto Focusing Mechanism ...................................................................................................................................................... 11-8
11.2.4.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-8
11.2.4.2 Outline of Operations ..................................................................................................................................................................................11-8
11.2.4.3 Types of Films That Make Auto Focusing Difficult...................................................................................................................................11-8
11.2.5 Auto Chromatic Correction...................................................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.2.5.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-9
11.2.5.2 Auto Chromatic Correction and a Negative Film .......................................................................................................................................11-9
11.2.5.3 Auto Chromatic Correction and a Positive Film.........................................................................................................................................11-9
11.3 Film Scanner ............................................................................................................................................................11-10
11.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.3.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-10
11.3.2 Basic Operations .................................................................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.3.2.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-10
11.3.2.2 Filter ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-10
11.3.3 Image Processing ................................................................................................................................................................... 11-11
11.3.3.1 Image Processing ......................................................................................................................................................................................11-11
11.3.4 Auto Focusing (AF) Mechanism ........................................................................................................................................... 11-11
11.3.4.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-11
11.3.4.2 AF Operation.............................................................................................................................................................................................11-12
11.3.5 Auto Density Adjustment (AE) ............................................................................................................................................. 11-13
11.3.5.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-13
11.3.5.2 Basic Sequence of AE Operations ............................................................................................................................................................11-13
11.4 Auto Carrier .............................................................................................................................................................11-16
11.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-16
11.4.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................11-16
11.4.2 Basic Sequence of Operations ............................................................................................................................................... 11-16
11.4.2.1 Outline of Operations ................................................................................................................................................................................11-16
11.4.2.2 Moving the Slide Tray ..............................................................................................................................................................................11-17
11.4.2.3 Release Lever ............................................................................................................................................................................................11-17
 Chapter 11

11.1 Introduction
11.1.1 Outline
11.1.1.1 Outline
0008-5720
A document input system is designed to send film images to a copier, and is usually any of two types.
One is used to directly project the image of a positive or negative film onto the copier (e.g., film projector).
The other is used to read the image of a positive or negative film for conversion into digital signals for output.
Film Projector

F-11-1

Film Scanner

F-11-2

11.1.2 Film
11.1.2.1 Type of Film
0008-5721
The type of film that may be used with a document input system may be either of the following two:
- Positive film
- Negative film
In addition to these two types, a transparency or a silver halide film may also be used.
The term "transparency" refers to a transparent sheet on which images are drawn with dyes which let through light, including a printed transparency.
A positive silver halide film may be fitted on a mount so that its edges are retained by the mount.

Copy area (standard)

23mm 23mm 24mm

34mm
34mm
36mm

Film on a mount Film Strip

(positive) (negative)
F-11-3

As a rule, a film that may be used with a document input system must be the following sizes; for details, see the User's Manual of the respective unit:
- For a film projector, from 1 x 1 mm to 203.2 x 254 mm (8" x 10").
- For the Film Scanner III, from a 35-mm film to an L-size film.

MEMO:
Here, the term "L-size" refers to a 6 x 4.5-to 6 x 9-cm film and 4 x 5-in. film.

11-1
 Chapter 11

11.1.2.2 Silver Halide Film

0008-5723
a. Silver Halide Film
A silver halide film is produced to a specific set of standards of dimension; however, each manufacturer uses its own method and material for production.
Films from different manufacturers may appear identical, but films taken using them may show subtly different hues. This is also true of the same
manufacturer; the material composition may be changed from year to year, resulting in different hues in images of the same subject.
Therefore, it is important to check the hues and the density of a film and to make appropriate adjustments before making copies using a color copier.
Some film projectors and film scanners are not equipped with such a mechanism; instead, they rely on what is called a base film to correct the sensitivity
of the film.

MEMO:
Points to Note When Copying Silver Halide Film
Advise the user to take note of the following when making copies of a silver halide film:
- If the film is important, use a duplicate.
- If it is 35 mm, do not use a protective sheet to avoid problems in the film.
- If it is a 4 x 5 or 6 x 4.5 to 6 x 9 cm (L-size) sheet film, put it in a protective sheet and set it in a carrier to avoid damage to the film.
- Make sure the room is not 30 deg C or more.
- In most cases, films (especially negative films) are not manufactured considering discoloration caused by light; since discoloration advances in proportion
to the length of exposure, it is important to limit the length of exposure to a minimum (30 min max.).

b. Print Paper
Print paper used for a silver halide film is of any of the following sizes:

T-11-1

Vertical Horizontal
10 in. (254 mm) 12 in. (305 mm)
8 in. (203 mm) 10 in. (254 mm)
6.5 in. (165 mm) 8.5 in. (216 mm)
4.75 in. (120 mm) 6.5 in. (165 mm)
3.25 in. (81 mm) 4.25 in. (106 mm)

11.1.2.3 Standards on Commercially Available Mounts (for positive films)

0008-5725
A commercially available mount is manufactured to a set of standards imposed on its frame external dimensions and window dimensions. However, there
are no standards on dimensions from the center of the window, resulting in various positions of windows.
Even when a mount is correctly set in a slide changer or an auto carrier, the shade of the mount may show on copies because of the window position.
The variation is not appreciable among mounts from the same manufacturer, making it a good idea to adjust the image area using a mount from the
manufacturer most frequently used by the user.
Likewise, there are no standards for the thickness of mounts. For this reason, a slide changer is designed to accommodate thicknesses between 1.0 and 2.5
mm or between 1.0 and 3.2 mm. If the mount is thicker than that, it may become trapped when slid into or out of a slide changer, resulting in damage to
the film. Advise the user to take extra care.

T-11-2

Item Description
Mount of projection type hickness Varies depending on carrier specifications.
(silver halide film mount) (1.0 to 2.5 mm or 1.0 o 3.2 mm)
Material Paper, plastic
Illumination type mount Thickness 1.0 mm (however, varies depending on the
(film mount, transparency distance between copyboard glass and film
frame) face)
Material Paper, plastic; however, no metal.

11-2
 Chapter 11

50.8 mm

34.3 0.5mm

0.5mm
Window

mm
50.8

22.5
Mount

F-11-4

11.1.3 Film Fixing Tool

11.1.3.1 Film Fixing Tool
0008-5728
The following tools may be used to hold a film in place:
- Film Carrier (for negative and positive)
It is used to hold a film in place. The carrier comes in different shapes to suit different sizes and types of film.
For Negative Film

F-11-5

- Magazine
It is designed for a film projector or a film scanner so that the film carrier may be positioned either vertically or horizontally.

F-11-6

- Slide Changer
It sets mounted 35-mm films to a film projector one by one.

F-11-7

- Auto Carrier
It sets mounted 35-mm films fitted to a slide tray to a film projector or a film scanner one by one.

11-3
 Chapter 11

F-11-8

- Slide Tray
It is capable of holding a large number of mounted 35-mm films. A commercially available slide tray may be purchased to suit the number of films that
need to be set.

MEMO:
A film carrier or a slide changer bears the letter "R" to indicate film orientation. When setting a film, be sure that it is oriented in reference to the letter
(top/bottom and face/back).

Film original

F-11-9

F-11-10

11-4
 Chapter 11

11.2 Film Projector

11.2.1 Outline
11.2.1.1 Outline
0008-5734
A film projector is equipped with its own source of light, and is used to directly project the image of a film on the copier. The projected image is read by
the CCD (photo conversion element) of the copier for making copies.

A film projector may be any of the following two types:

- A type which operates in conjunction with its host copier as when executing auto focusing (AF).
- A type which does not operate in conjunction with its host copier, and focusing is manual.
Auto Focus (AF) Type

F-11-11

Manual Focus Type

F-11-12

11.2.2 Basic Operations

11.2.2.1 Outline of Basic Operations
0008-5735
An illuminating lamp is used to project the image of a film set in the film scanner to the copyboard glass of the copier.
The image (optical) projected on the copyboard glass is directed to the CCD through various mirrors of the copier.

Film A
Projection lens Scanning lamp
Mirror unit

Lens CCD Film B

F-11-13

A film may be set in either of two positions (film A and film B of the foregoing figure).
Use the position where film A is found mainly for a silver halide film (projection type).
Use the position where film B is found mainly for an L-size film or a transparency (illumination type).

11-5
 Chapter 11

11.2.2.2 Diffusing Plate

0008-5736
A diffusing plate is found in a magazine or a slide changer.
The halogen lamp used in a projector is a "point type source"; and with its filament being the brightest point, it is not capable of evenly illuminating a film.
A diffusing plate is mounted between illuminating lamp and film to make up for the discrepancies in light, thereby enabling evenly illuminating a film.

Diffusing plate
Film Filter Halogen lamp

F-11-14

11.2.2.3 Cyan Filter

0008-5737
A cyan filter is used for a magazine.
The base color of a negative film tends to be strong in red, causing the host copier to fail in adjustment and produce reddish copy images.
To make up for the discrepancy, a cyan filter is used, thereby reducing reddish hues.
11.2.2.4 ND (neural density) Filter
0008-5738
An ND filter is used with a slide changer.
When a positive film is used, the intensity of light from the illuminating lamp to the CCD is high, not allowing the host copier to make correction. The ND
is designed to reduce the intensity, which otherwise would be too strong.
11.2.2.5 Fresnel Lens
0008-5739
The image of a film projected on the copyboard glass is enlarged by the work of the projection lens and, as a result, the light passing through the copyboard
glass spreads apart, with its intensity growing weaker toward the edges as it reaches the CCD.
A Fresnel lens is mounted to the mirror unit, and is set above the copyboard glass. The lens corrects the spreading rays of the light to parallel rays so that
they hit the copyboard glass at right angles.

Rays of light

Fresnel lens Copyboard

glass

F-11-15

a. Cleaning the Fresnel Lens

Fingerprints or scratches on a Fresnel lens affect images, requiring extra care when handling it.
When holding a Fresnel lens, it is important to support it by its edges, avoiding contact with other areas.
To clean the lens, use ethanol and wipe it in one direction only along the grooves; otherwise, you will not be able to remove dirt (dust).

F-11-16

11-6
 Chapter 11

11.2.3 Shading Correction

11.2.3.1 Outline
0008-5741
A film projector is designed simply to project the image of a film onto the copyboard glass. To ensure good copy quality, the shading correction mechanism
of its host copier is made use of for the projector.
Shading correction is performed because the outputs of the cells of the CCD used by a copier are not necessarily identical, owing to the fact that
- the sensitivities of the pixels of the CCD are not identical.
- the intensity of light passing through a lens is not even
- the intensity of an illuminating lamp is different between center and ends
- the illuminating lamp deteriorates
When a copier performs shading correction, it measures the white density of the standard white plate, and compares the result against a reference value;
in the case of shading correction for a projector, on the other hand, the following is executed in addition:

- Positive Film/Transparency
Without a film set in the film projector, the light of the illuminating lamp is directly shone to the copyboard glass.

- Negative Film
With a base film set in the film projector, the light of the illuminating lamp is shone to the copyboard glass.

MEMO:
A base film is a film used as a reference, and is produced by developing an unexposed film. (The density of the unexposed segment of the film is called
its "white density," serving the same functions as the standard white plate of a copier.)
Commercially available films possess different colorings and white densities depending on their manufacturers and ISO sensitivity ratings. When making
copies of films with faithful color reproduction in mind, therefore, it is important to execute shading correction using a base film made of the same film.
If a base film cannot be obtained for a specific film, use the one that comes with the film projector. It is a white density representative of ISO100.

11.2.3.2 Basic Operation

0008-5744
To execute shading correction for the film projector, the scanning lamp is turned on to measure the intensity by the CCD.
Then the result of measurement is compared against the target value stored in the shading correction circuit, and the difference is stored in memory as the
shading correction value.
The shading correction value will be used to correct data from the CCD read when copying a film.

Intensity adjustment
Film projector
Mirror unit

CCD

RGB gain data CPU

RGB level Shading

matching correction

Image processing system

F-11-17

Shading correction that takes place when the film projector is used is divided into the following three:

a. Adjusting the Black Level of the CCD

The black level of the CCD is adjusted to even out the black densities generated by the CCD.
In practice, the illuminating lamp of the film projector is turned off, and the densities occurring at the time is measured by the CCD to obtain an average.
Using the data, a target value is prepared for correction at the time of making copies.

b. Adjusting the Intensity and the Gain

The intensity is adjusted to make up for the deterioration of the illuminating lamp and the variation in intensity that exists among the types of base films
and the presence/absence of a base film.

11-7
 Chapter 11

The gain is adjusted to even out the BGR density data generated by the photocells of the CCD.

c. Measuring the Shading Correction Value

The shading correction value is measured to ensure that the white densities generated by the CCD are even.
11.2.4 Auto Focusing Mechanism
11.2.4.1 Outline
0008-5747
The film projector projects the images of a film on the copyboard glass. If done manually, however, the focusing may not always be correct. The focal
distance, further, also differs among different types of films; for instance,
- the face of a positive film shifts depending on the thickness of its mount; and
- the face of a negative film shifts, although very slightly, because of warp when it is set in a carrier.
To compensate for any discrepancy, the projection lens of the film projector is moved for auto focusing; since the film projector itself is not capable of
reading an image, it makes use of its host copier.

Film face
Mirror unit
internal reflecting mirror A B
Focal
point

The film which should have bee set at point B is set to

(projection lens) point A because of the above-mentioned discrepancy,
causing the image on the copyboard glass to be out of
focus.
Copyboard glass

The projection lens is moved by the auto focusing (AF)

mechanism, putting the film face at point A in focus and
ultimately, enabling the projection of a sharp image on
the copyboard glass.
F-11-18

11.2.4.2 Outline of Operations

0008-5749
The film projector and its host copier are operated in conjunction to enable the auto focusing mechanism:
1. The film projector moves the projection lens to the home position.
2. The film projector turns on the illuminating lamp to project the image of the film to the copyboard glass.
3. The copier reads the projected image using its CCD.
4. While the copier reads the image, the film projector moves the projection lens.
5. The copier samples several points to obtain a degree of sharpness that falls within the area of projection.

Z (degree of sharpness)

G
0
Projection lens Projection lens
reverse direction position
Projection lens
home position
F-11-19

6. The copier further samples points having high degrees of intensity to find the point with the highest degree of sharpness. It assumes the point to be the
best point of focus, thereby determining the best position for the projection lens.
11.2.4.3 Types of Films That Make Auto Focusing Difficult
0008-5752
The auto focusing mechanism operates with reference to the image on a film, and an image with low contrast can impede the mechanism.

11-8
 Chapter 11

EX1 Winter scene EX2 Seaside EX3 Night scene (dark film)

Point of focus Point of focus Point of focus

F-11-20

The copier may be able to obtain degrees of sharpness by sampling but not the point with the highest degree of sharpness, which is indispensable for auto
focusing.
If such is the case, disable the auto focusing mechanism, and try manual focusing.
11.2.5 Auto Chromatic Correction
11.2.5.1 Outline
0008-5753
All colors in nature may be expressed using an equilateral triangle with the three primary colors of red, green, and blue at its apexes.
Different sources of light (e.g., sun and room lighting) shining on a specific subject, however, cause the subject to take on different hues because of the
difference in RGB balance between the sources.
We retain perceptions of colors in our memory, and tend to make up for the differences in hues of a subject caused by different sources of light. However,
strict reproduction of hues when making copies of a film will cause the resulting hues to be quite different from the hues we remember. The mechanism
of auto chromatic correction is used to correct the RGB balance to 1:1:1 when making copies of a film.

Green 1.0G

0.5G+0.5B Cyan Yellow 0.5G+0.5R

(0R) (0B)
White

1.0B Blue Magenta Red 1.0R

0.5B+0.5R
(0G)
F-11-21

MEMO:
The auto chromatic correction mechanism helps enhance the reproduction of the achromatic colors (white) of a subject. In the case of an image taken up
by a single color (e.g., sea, sky), however, the auto chromatic correction mechanism can produce copies with extremely different hues. For instance, the
mechanism will assumes an image of a sunset sky to be too strong in red, and tries to suppress reds, producing a copy image showing a gray sky.
The auto chromatic correction mechanism may be disabled to avoid this kind of problem.

11.2.5.2 Auto Chromatic Correction and a Negative Film

0008-5754
In the case of a negative film, the auto chromatic correction mechanism checks R, G, and B of the film, and executes the following:
- corrects once again the density and the color balance, which differ among film types.
- corrects possible under- or over-exposure of the film.
- corrects the variations in color balance caused by different sources of light.
11.2.5.3 Auto Chromatic Correction and a Positive Film
0008-5756
In the case of a positive film, the auto chromatic correction mechanism executes the following:
- corrects the intensity.
A positive film allows checking its hues by the eye, and does not require auto correction of RGB color balance.

11-9
 Chapter 11

11.3 Film Scanner

11.3.1 Outline
11.3.1.1 Outline
0008-5757
A film scanner is used to read the image of a film using its CCD and generate the result as image (digital) data.
The generated image data is sent to the copier or an IPU for copying or storage (or, it may be sent to a computer for processing).
The discussions in this chapter will be on the Film Scanner III.
11.3.2 Basic Operations
11.3.2.1 Outline
0008-5760
The following figure shows the optical path used when reading a 35-mm film.
The film set in the film scanner is projected to a CCD by means of an illuminating lamp.
The images read by the CCD are processed by the image processing block in sequence for output to the host copier or an IPU.
Film Scanner III

No. 2 mirror

CCD

35-mm lens

No. 1 mirror

35-mm film
Illumination lamp

(front) Filter unit

F-11-22

11.3.2.2 Filter
0008-5762
A film scanner comes with three types of filters: cyan filter, ND filter, and diffusing plate, each having the following functions:

a. Cyan Filter
The cyan filter is used when reading a negative film.
The base of a negative film tends to be strong in red, preventing the host copier from making appropriate corrections and, ultimately, producing reddish
copy images.
The cyan filter servers to remove reds of the film to prevent such a problem.

b. ND Filter (neutral density filter)

The ND filter is used when reading a positive film.
In the case of a positive film, the intensity of the light from the illuminating lamp to the CCD is rather strong, not allowing the image processing block to
make appropriate corrections.
The ND filter serves to reduce the intensity, thereby ensuring that the light hitting the CCD of the film scanner will be of an appropriate intensity.

c. Diffusing Plate
The diffusing plate is used when reading either a negative film or a positive film.
The halogen lamp used as the illuminating lamp is a "point-type source," in which its filament is the brightest, not illuminating the film by uniform rays
and, as a result, making the edges of the optical image to be dark.
The diffusing plate is used to diffuse the discrepancies in the light of the illuminating lamp, making sure that the rays illuminate the film evenly. In addition,
it also serves to suppress the presence of dust or scratches on the film or the lens.

11-10
 Chapter 11

Film Scanner III

Motor

M
Motor

M
Illuminating lamp

Cyan filter

ND filter

Diffusing plate
(for 35-mm film)

35-mm film
(front)
F-11-23

11.3.3 Image Processing

11.3.3.1 Image Processing
0008-5765
The CCD unit is moved in sub scanning direction to read the optical image of the film occurring as a result of exposing the film by the illuminating lamp;
the results are then converted into electric signals in sequence (photoconversion).
At time of photoconversion, the optical image is separated into R, G, and B by the CCD, and is converted into an electric signal (analog image signal)
suited to the density of each pixel.
The analog signal is sent to the analog image processing block, for conversion into a digital signal.
Then, the digital image signal is subjected to shading correction by the digital image processing block. After executing negative/positive reversal and
enlargement/reduction as needed, the signals are sent to the host copier or the IPU through an interface cable as RGB image signals.

Sub scanning direction

CCD unit

Analog Digital
CCD driver PCB image image
processing processing
block block

CCD
B G R Connecting
cable

Copier or
IPU

Optical image
through film

Film

Illuminating lamp

F-11-24

MEMO:
A film scanner possesses image processing functions: framing, default enlargement/reduction, zoom, color balance adjustment, gamma adjustment, density
adjustment, sharpness adjustment, and shift. In principle, these functions are executed in the same way as those of a color copier.

11.3.4 Auto Focusing (AF) Mechanism

11.3.4.1 Outline
0008-5766
The focal point of an image formed on the CCD can vary according to the thickness of the mount or the warp of the film.

11-11
 Chapter 11

The auto focus mechanism is used to ensure that the image of a film is correctly focused on the CCD.
The following discussions on the auto focusing mechanism are based on a 35-mm film and the Film Scanner III:
11.3.4.2 AF Operation
0008-5768
The CCD monitors the image while the lens is moved to vary the focal distance between the film face and the CCD to find the point at which the output
of the CCD is the highest.
The 35-mm lens is moved by the work of an eccentric cam driven by a 35-mm-AF drive motor (stepping motor); a single rotation of the eccentric cam
causes the lens to make one round trip.
The home position of the lens is checked by the 35-mm lens home position sensor.
At time of AF operation, the filter most appropriate to the film type and the diffusing plate are used.
Film Scanner III

Center of motor spindle

Top View

35-mm lens

(front) 35-mm lens Eccentric cam

35-mm-AF drive motor home position sensor
F-11-25

AF Operations
1. The CCD unit moves to a point of intensity measurement, and the illuminating lamp turns on.
2. The motor rotates; the lens home position is detected, and the motor is kept rotating.
3. As the lens moves away from the home position, the CCD output changes according to the distance (the CCD output will be largest when the focus is
on the film image).
4. The controller block of the film scanner computes the number of motor pulses occurring between the lens home position and the point at which the CCD
output is the largest.
5. The motor (eccentric cam) makes a single rotation; then, the home position is detected once again. The motor is rotated for the number of motor pulses
obtained previously.
CCD Output at Lens Home Position
Projected image

Image read
position

CCD output
F-11-26

CCD Output When the Focus Is on the Film Image

Projected image

Image read
position

CCD output
F-11-27

11-12
 Chapter 11

AF Operation for a 35-mm Film

Copy Start Focus on
key ON film image
ST AF1
BY

Illuminating lamp

CCD drive motor

A B
35-mm AF drive motor

35-mm lens home position

sensor

CCD output
High

Low

A: interval in which motor pulses are computed

B: interval in which drive is sent for computed number of pulses
F-11-28

11.3.5 Auto Density Adjustment (AE)

11.3.5.1 Outline
0008-5773
All colors in nature may be expressed using an equilateral triangle with the three primary colors of red, green, and blue at the apexes.
Different sources of light (e.g., sun and room lighting) shining on a specific subject, however, cause the subject to take on different hues because of the
difference in RGB balance between the sources.
We retain perceptions of colors in our memory, and tend to make up for the differences in hues of a subject caused by different sources of light. However,
strict reproduction of hues when making copies of a film will cause the resulting hues to be quite different from the hues we remember. The mechanism
of auto chromatic correction is used to correct the RGB balance to 1:1:1 when making copies of a film.

Green 1.0G

0.5G+0.5B Cyan Yellow 0.5G+0.5R

(0R) (0B)
White

1.0B Blue Magenta Red 1.0R

0.5B+0.5R
(0G)

F-11-29

11.3.5.2 Basic Sequence of AE Operations

0008-5775
a. AE Operations
1. The scanning lamp is turned on to illuminate the film.
2. The density of the area specified by the CCD is measured.
3. Using the measurement data, the average density data of R, G, and B each is obtained.
4. An intensity is set for the illumining lamp with reference to the average density data and the highlight density.

11-13
 Chapter 11

5. Gain data is set for R, G, and B each. (negative film only)

ND or cyan filter
Diffusing plate

Film Illuminating lamp

DC power
supply PCB Control block

Lamp intensity
control
CCD
Image
CCD driver
processing
PCB
Gain control

Gain

F-11-30

b. Measuring the Area Density

The CCD unit moves in sub scanning direction to collect R, G, and B density data within the AE area.
Using the density data, a density distribution is obtained for each color so as to adjust the average density level within the distribution pattern.

12 mm (approx.)

12 mm
AE measurement area
(approx.)

Projection area

F-11-31

R density G density B density

histogram histogram histogram
Frequency

Frequency

Frequency

Rp: average level of R densities

Gp: average level of G densities
Bp: average level of B densities

0 Rp 255 0 Gp 255 0 Bp 255

(darker) (lighter) (darker) (lighter) (darker) (lighter)
Density level Density level Density level
F-11-32

c. Setting an Intensity for the Illuminating Lamp

In the case of a negative film, the intensity of the lamp is determined based on the average density and the highlight density of R, G, and B each.

Rp
Rp
Density Intensity
level Gp adjust- Gp
ment
Bp Bp

Density level before Density level after

intensity adjustment intensity adjustment
F-11-33

In the case of a positive film, the intensity of the lamp is set so that the original densities may be reproduced as closely as possible.

d. Setting a Gain for R, G, and B (negative film only)

To match the density level of each color according to the lamp activation voltage determined as the result of setting a density for the illuminating lamp, a

11-14
 Chapter 11

gain is set for R, G, and B each.

The R, G, and B gains are communicated to the analog image processing block as R, G, and B gain signals.

Rp r
Rp Gp g
Density
level Gp Bp b
Bp rRp gGp bBp

r : R gain
g: G gain
b: B gain
Density level after Density level after
intensity adjustment correction by gain
F-11-34

e. AE Correction for a Negative Film

If a film image is taken up by a single color (e.g., sky, sea), the previously discussed AE processing mechanism can produce hues extremely different from
the hues of the original films. For instance, the film scanner will assume that an image of a sunset sky to be too strong in red and, as a result, will try to
suppress reds, producing copy images showing a gray sky.
The AE correction mechanism is used to prevent such a discrepancy.
In the case of a 35-film, the AE correction mechanism reads the density of the base (unexposed segment) of a film, and sets an illuminating lamp intensity
correction value, R, G and B gains, and logarithmic correction curve so as to enable the removal of the differences from the density measurements (average
density level of the density distribution) taken of the AE area.
Reading the Base Density of a Film
Negative film carrier

Illuminating lamp

Film image

Base color of film

F-11-35

R G

B
Image R
density Meas- B
component ured AE
density correction
Base
density
component

Guide to Graph Measured RGB density level Density level after AE correction

F-11-36

11-15
 Chapter 11

11.4 Auto Carrier

11.4.1 Outline
11.4.1.1 Outline
0008-5777
An auto carrier is used in combination with a commercially available slide tray so that mounted positive films may be set in a film projector or a film
scanner.
A slide tray comes in different types and from different manufacturers, each with a different number of films it can hold. As a rule, any type may be used
with the auto carrier; however, the 80-film slide tray from Kodak is recommended.

Slide tray
(80 slides)

Slide inlet

Film position index

Release lever

Auto carrier

F-11-37

11.4.2 Basic Sequence of Operations

11.4.2.1 Outline of Operations
0008-5779
Fit the auto carrier to the film projector or a film scanner. Then, set a positive film to the slide tray, and fit it to the auto carrier.
When an appropriate copying mode is selected on the host copier or the film scanner, a positive film on the slide tray will be pulled into the auto carrier
and set in the optical path. Thereafter, focusing and image adjustments are executed to make copies of the film.

11-16
 Chapter 11

Slide films

Slide tray rotation

Exposure

Note that the illustrations do not show

the slide tray to facilitate viewing.

F-11-38

11.4.2.2 Moving the Slide Tray

0008-5781
The slide tray is moved either in normal direction or in reverse direction. In the case of an 8-film tray, frame No. 0 is used as the start position, and its
normal direction is counterclockwise direction. When setting a positive film on the slide tray, for this reason, it is important to start with frame No. 1 and
end with frame No. 80.

Normal direction Reverse direction

No.2

No.1

Frame No. 3

No.80
No.70

F-11-39

MEMO:
The User's Manual reads: "When fitting the slide tray to the auto carrier, be sure to match frame No. 0 against the indicated in the auto carrier."
This is to enable smooth operation when shading is executed for positive films before starting copying operation. (Shading for positive films is performed
in the absence of a film.)

11.4.2.3 Release Lever

0008-5782
If a film has become trapped inside a film projector or a film scanner, push down the release lever to return the film to the tray.

11-17
 Chapter 11

The release lever may also be used when manually rotating the slide tray.

Release lever

F-11-40

11-18
Chapter 12 EDITOR
 Contents

Contents

12.1 Editor..........................................................................................................................................................................12-1
12.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.1.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................12-1
12.1.2 Identifying Points..................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2.1 Identifying Points ........................................................................................................................................................................................12-1
12.1.2.2 Pressure Method (type 1) ............................................................................................................................................................................12-1
12.1.2.3 Static Method (type 2).................................................................................................................................................................................12-4
12.1.3 Zero-Point Adjustment for Pen Input Coordinates .................................................................................................................. 12-5
12.1.3.1 Zero-Point Adjustment for Pen Input Coordinates .....................................................................................................................................12-5
 Chapter 12

12.1 Editor
12.1.1 Outline
12.1.1.1 Outline
0008-2227
The electrical mechanisms of an editor are controlled by an editor controller PCB. A CPU is found on the editor controller PCB, and it is used to identify
points pressed by an editor pen with the help of a flat resistor or electrode wires, sending signals to the host copier as needed (in serial).
An editor consists of a tablet and an editor pen, and it is supplied with power by its host copier.

Editor pen

Tablet

F-12-1

12.1.2 Identifying Points

12.1.2.1 Identifying Points
0008-2230
The editor identifies points by either of the following two ways:
Type 1: pressure method, in which a point is identified in response to pressure exerted by a pressing editor pen.
Type 2: static method, in which a point is identified with reference to the static bond occurring between the editor pen and the electrode wires inside the
tablet.

MEMO:
A pressure type editor and a static type editor can easily be distinguished by the presence/e/absence of a cord: whereas the pen for the former has no cord,
that for the latter has a coiled cord.

12.1.2.2 Pressure Method (type 1)

0008-2242
a. Basic Construction
A pressure type tablet is constructed as shown in the following figure, and consists of several layers: from top to bottom, protective sheet, X flat resistor,
Y flat resistor, and fixed plate.
The Y flat resistor is provided with bosses called "dot spacers." These dot spacers are arranged throughout the face of the Y flat resistor, and are used to
prevent contact between the X flat resistor and the Y flat resistor in the absence of pressure on the tablet.
The editor controller circuit reads points pressed by the editor pen as indicating an area or function key inputs.

12-1
 Chapter 12

Protective sheet Dot spacers

X flat resistor

Y flat resistor

Fixed plate

Y direction

X direction

Y flat resistance

Dot spacers

3 mm

3 mm

F-12-2

b. Reading Pen Inputs

A pressure type editor using an editor pen recognizes a press made by the pen as follows:
The following figure shows the equalizing circuit of the comparator of the editor controller circuit (SW1 is ON; SW2 through 4 are OFF).
On the negative side of the comparator are the voltage resulting from division among resistors Ra, Rb, and Rc (Rc being contact resistance).
On the other hand, the reference value of the comparator is determined by division between resistors R1 and R2, and is sent to the positive side.
When the tablet is pressed under a specific force or greater, the contact resistance Rc will lower, increasing the voltage entering the negative side of the
comparator.
This condition changes the output of the comparator V0 from High to Low, causing the microprocessor of the editor controller circuit to recognize a press
made by the editor pen.
Equalizing Circuit of the Comparator
V V

SW1 SW3

X resistor Ra Y resistor

Rc
(contact resistance)
Rb R1

COMP
V0

SW2 SW4 Rd R2

F-12-3

c. Reading X Coordinates
The following figure shows the equalizing circuit of the tablet (SW1 and SW2 are ON; SW3 and SW4 are OFF).

12-2
 Chapter 12

The switches are set as shown in the following figure, and the result of voltage divided by Ra and Rb is directed to the A/d converter so that the CPU may
read the X coordinates.
The input impedance of the A/D converter is appreciably large and, therefore, the effect of change in the contact resistance Rc to X coordinates may be
ignored.
Equalizing Circuit When Reading X Coordinates
V V

SW1 SW3

X resistor Ra Y resistor

Vx
Rc

A/D
Rb con-
verter

SW2 SW4

F-12-4

d. Reading Y Coordinates
The switches are set as shown in the following figure (SW1 and SW2 are ON; SW3 and SW4 are OFF), and the Y coordinates are read as when reading
X coordinates.
Equalizing Circuit When Reading Y Coordinates
V V

SW1 SW3

X resistor Y resistor

Ra
A/D
con- Rc
verter

Vy

Rb

SW2 SW4

F-12-5

12-3
 Chapter 12

Block Diagram of the Tablet and the Editor Controller Circuit

3.5V
XH YH
SW1

SW3 XH
XL DSIN DSOUT
YH
YL DSOUT DSIN

Rc
TOUCH
COMP
IPC
CPU
BUZZER

START

AI A/D END
converter
SW4 LED
SW2

YL
XL Voltage
3.5V regulator 5V
X flat resistor Y flat resistor

F-12-6

12.1.2.3 Static Method (type 2)

0008-2248
a. Basic Construction
A static type editor consists of an editor pen and a tablet used to read a position in horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) directions.
The editor controller PCB reads pen inputs as indicating an area in response to the static bond between the editor pen and the electrode wires arranged in
the tablet at intervals of 6 mm.

b. Operations
When the editor pen presses the tablet, the CPU of the editor controller PCB sends pulses 1, 2, ..., n-1, n, n+1 in sequence to each electrode wire through
the decoder of the tablet.
The point of input indicated by the editor pen is communicated to the editor controller PCB in terms of a high or low level of voltage occurring as a result
of static bond between the editor pen and these pulses.
The input voltage is converted into a digital signal by the A/D conversion circuit of the editor controller PCB, and is computed by the CPU into an area
(in mm); the resulting data is then sent to the copier.

MEMO:
A static type editor detects the point of a pen input by means of static bonding, allowing the use of a thick original (4 mm max.). Note, however, that
conducting material or pressure-sensitive paper or carbon-backed paper may not be used.

A/D
Am- conversion
plification Peak hold Vn-1
Vn
Vn+1

Decoder: X Decoder: Y

CPU

Editor controller PCB

Output (to copier)

F-12-7

12-4
 Chapter 12

MEMO:
Detecting an Area
Applies pulses to electrode wires
(in sequence, 1 ..., n-1, n, n+1)
«
maximum Vn at nth electrode wire
L: (n-1)
: line interval
«
Obtains Vn - (Vn - 1) = S
Vn - (Vn +1) = S' From data table, X is computed
«
Obtains L -/+ Xmm
+, if between n and n+1
-, if between n and n-1

L= (n-1)

: Correction value

1 n-1 n n+1

Vn
Vn-1
Vn+1

F-12-8

12.1.3 Zero-Point Adjustment for Pen Input Coordinates

12.1.3.1 Zero-Point Adjustment for Pen Input Coordinates
0008-7491
With some editor types, you need to set the DIP switch on the editor controller PCB according to the label attached to the cable of the tablet (Figure A)
whenever you have replaced the editor controller PCB or the tablet. (See Figure B.)
If there still is a discrepancy in input coordinates after making new settings, make adjustments in service mode (EDADJ-X,Y).

Tablet

Label

F-12-9

12-5
 Chapter 12

Correction
value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(SW) ON
OFF

Sample Settings
Note: A solid circuit indicates a selected bit.
F-12-10

12-6
Chapter 13 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
 Contents

Contents

13.1 Digital Black-and-White Copier Controller...............................................................................................................13-1

13.1.1 GP160 Series............................................................................................................................................................................ 13-1
13.1.1.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1.1.2 Connecting to an External Device...............................................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1.2 GP215/225 Series..................................................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.1.2.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................13-2
13.1.2.2 Connecting to an External Device...............................................................................................................................................................13-3
13.1.3 GP300/400 Series..................................................................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.1.3.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................13-5
13.1.3.2 Connecting to an External Device...............................................................................................................................................................13-6
13.1.4 GP555/605 Series..................................................................................................................................................................... 13-7
13.1.4.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................13-7
13.1.4.2 Connecting to an External Device...............................................................................................................................................................13-7
13.2 Color Copier Controller .............................................................................................................................................13-9
13.2.1 Network Color PS/PCL Board-A1........................................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.2.1.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................13-9
13.2.1.2 Connecting to an External Device...............................................................................................................................................................13-9
13.2.2 ColorPASS/PS-XJ Series......................................................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.2.2.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................13-9
13.2.2.2 Connecting to an External Device.............................................................................................................................................................13-10
13.2.3 PS Board Unit-A1 .................................................................................................................................................................. 13-11
13.2.3.1 PS Board Unit-A1 .....................................................................................................................................................................................13-11
13.2.4 ColorPASS-M/PS-MX Series ................................................................................................................................................ 13-12
13.2.4.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................13-12
13.2.4.2 Connecting to an External Device.............................................................................................................................................................13-12
13.2.5 ColorPASS-M20e/PS-MX20e ............................................................................................................................................... 13-13
13.2.5.1 ColorPASS-M20e/PS-MX20e ..................................................................................................................................................................13-13
13.2.6 ColorPASS-V/PS-ZX Series.................................................................................................................................................. 13-13
13.2.6.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................13-13
13.2.6.2 Connecting to an External Device.............................................................................................................................................................13-14
 Chapter 13

13.1 Digital Black-and-White Copier Controller

13.1.1 GP160 Series
13.1.1.1 Outline
0008-4668
A GP160 Series copier is designed to accommodate a functions controller inside it for expanded functions, and it allows the installation of the following
at the same time:
- Fax controller
- Printer controller
A GP160 Series copier possesses a built-in image memory (semiconductor memory; RAM). Its image processor PCB is provided with such functions as
compressing and expanding images as part of image processing; it is also used to compress/expand and code/decode images as part of fax functions. The
built-in image memory on the image processor PCB is intended for fax functions, and image data generated by the printer board must be sent to the copier
in sync with signals from the copier.

CCD PCB
Fax controller
Public
Image processor PCB telephone
line
Modem controller NCU Modular
PCB PCB PCB
Image
memory
(for fax) Computer
Printer board

Network
Network interface
DC controller PCB PCB

Laser driver PCB Printer controller

F-13-1

13.1.1.2 Connecting to an External Device

0008-4687
The Super G3 FAX Board-G1 is a fax controller whose maximum transmission speed is rated at 33,600 bps.
The Network Printer Board-J1 is designed for PCL5e and PCL6, and it is equipped with an interface compatible with 10Base-T Ethernet.

13-1
 Chapter 13

Network Printer Board-J1

Protocols Supported
TCP/IP (LPD)
IPX/SPX (Pserver/Nprinter)

10Base-T(RJ-45)

Modular jack
(for connection to handset)

Handset
Modular jack
(for connection to
external telephone)

Modular jack Telephone

Subscriber line
Super G3 Fax Board-G1 or
Fax communication network

Fax machine
F-13-2

13.1.2 GP215/225 Series

13.1.2.1 Outline
0008-4694
A GP215/225 Series copier is capable of accommodating functions controllers inside it; the following built-in type controllers may be installed all at the
same time:
- Fax controller
- Printer controller
- Scanner controller
To install a controller, the copier must be equipped with a GP Expansion Board Base Unit-A1. The mounting kit includes a CORE/IP board for image
processing and a special box for actual installation of a controller.
A GP215/225 Series copier may be any of various types, some already equipped with a mounting kit and a controller.
A GP215/225 Series copier, on the other hand, does not possess a page memory, relying on a controller for page and image memories. (This means that
the controller may not send image data to the copier while the copier is printing.) To print from the controller, it sends image data to the copier in sync
with signals from the copier.

13-2
 Chapter 13

Scanner controller
Computer
Analog processor PCB SCSI board
Fax controller
Public
telephone
Image processor PCB line
Fax board NCU
PCB
CORE/IP Fax
PCB motherboard

Extension PCB

Laser driver PCB

Computer
Printer board

Printer controller

F-13-3

13.1.2.2 Connecting to an External Device

0008-4700
As fax controllers, the G3 FAX Board-C1 and the Super G3 FAX Board-D1 are made available (maximum data transmission speed rated at 14,400 and
33,600 bps, respectively).
As printer controllers, on the other hand, the following are made available: Printer Board-P3 and Network Printer Board-E1, compatible with PCL; Multi-
PDL Printer Board-B1 and Network Multi-PDL Printer Board-D1, compatible with PCL and PostScript.
As a scanner controller, on the other hand, the SCSI Interface Board-C1 is available.

13-3
 Chapter 13

Network Multi-PDL Printer Board-D1/Network Printer Board-E1

Protocols supported
TCP/IP (LPD,SMB over Centronics
TCP/IP) (parallel I/F)
IPX/SPX (Pserver)
AppleTalk (PAP)
10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ-45)

10Base5,10Base2 (AUI)

GP215/225

Printer Board-P3 Multi PDL Printer Board-B1

SCSI
(parallel I/F)

LocalTalk External hard disk

(serial I/F)

Centronics Centronics
(parallel I/F) (parallel I/F)

RS232C RS232C
(serial I/F) (serial I/F)

F-13-4

13-4
 Chapter 13

G3 FAX Board-C1/Super G3 FAX Board-D1

Modular jack
Subscriber line
or
Fax communication network

Fax machine
Modular jack (for connection
to external telephone)

Modular jack Telephone

GP215/225 (for connection to handset)

Handset
SCSI Interface Board-C1

Computer or
other SCSI device

SCSI connector

Other SCSI device

(If no SCSI device is
connected, attach a
terminator.)

F-13-5

13.1.3 GP300/400 Series

13.1.3.1 Outline
0008-4704
A GP300/400 Series copier can accommodate a functions controller inside it; the following built-in type controllers may be installed all at the same time:
- Fax controller
- Printer controller
- Scanner controller
To install a controller, the copier must be equipped with a GP Basic Expansion Kit-C1, which includes among other things a special box for actual
installation.
The GP300/400 Series copier comes in various types, with some already equipped with a Basic Expansion Kit-C1 and controllers.
A GP300/400 Series copier possesses an image memory (semiconductor memory; RAM), and its image processor PCB performs compressing/expanding
and coding/decoding of image data as part of image processing.
The built-in memory of the copier enables the controller to send image data to the copier while the copier is printing; this, however, is at times subject to
some functional constrains, as it relies on the available area of the image memory.

13-5
 Chapter 13

Analog processor PCB

Fax controller
Public
telephone
Image processor PCB line
Fax board NCU PCB

Image Computer
memory System SCSI board
motherboard

Printer interface PCB

Printer Printer Computer

Laser driver PCB mother- board
board

Scanner controller
Network

Network interface

Printer controller
F-13-6

13.1.3.2 Connecting to an External Device

0008-4707
The Super G3 FAX Board-F1 is designed as a fax controller, and its maximum data transmission speed is rated at 33,600 bps. Installing the Multi Port Kit-
A1 to the board enables connection to two public telephone lines.
As a printer controller, the Network Printer Board-K1 (compatible with PCL) and the Network Multi-PDL Printer Board-H1 (compatible with PCL and
PostScript) are made available; these printer boards come equipped with a network interface that supports Ethernet.
The SCSI Interface Board-D1 is designed as a scanner controller.

Network Multi-PDL Printer Board-H1/Network Printer Board-K1

Protocols Supported Centronics

(parallel I/F)
TCP/IP (LPD,SMB over TCP/IP)
IPX/SPX (Pserver)
AppleTalk (PAP)
10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ-45)

10Base5,10Base2 (AUI)

GP300/400

F-13-7

13-6
 Chapter 13

Super G3 FAX Board-F1/Super G3 Multi-Line FAX Board-A1

Fax machine

Modular jack
Subscriber line
or
Fax communication network
GP300/400 Fax machine
SCSI Interface Board-D1

SCSI connector

Computer or
other SCSI device

Other SCSI device

(If no SCSI device is connected,
attach a terminator.)

F-13-8

13.1.4 GP555/605 Series

13.1.4.1 Outline
0008-4711
A GP555/600 Series copier allows installation of a built-in type printer controller. (No fax controller or scanner controller is designed for the series.)
The controller may be installed without the help of a kit.
A GP550/600 Series copier possesses a large-capacity image memory in the form of a hard disk, and its image processor PCB is capable of compressing
and expanding images for image processing. (The PCB is also used to convert resolutions or to smooth images.)
The presence of an image memory inside the copier enables the controller to send image data to the copier while the latter is printing.

CCD PCB

Image processor PCB

Hard disk driver
(image memory)

Image memory MFC PCB

(page memory)
Computer

System Printer board

motherboard
Network

Network interface
Laser driver PCB
Printer controller
F-13-9

13.1.4.2 Connecting to an External Device

0008-4714
The Network Printer Board-F1 is a printer controller designed to support PCL and PostScript. It also comes equipped with an interface which is compatible
with Ethernet.

13-7
 Chapter 13

Network Printer Board-F1

Parallel port
Protocols Supported connector
TCP/IP (LPD,SMB over TCP/IP) (Centronics)
IPX/SPX (Pserver)
AppleTalk (PAP) RJ-45 connector
10Base-T/100Base-TX
AUI connector
10Base5

GP605

F-13-10

13-8
 Chapter 13

13.2 Color Copier Controller

13.2.1 Network Color PS/PCL Board-A1
13.2.1.1 Outline
0008-4736
The Network Color PS/PCL Board-A1 is a built-in type printer controller designed for the CP660. It supports PostScript 3, and its CPU is an MIPS RISC-
type CPU.
Its image memory is 64 MB, and it comes equipped with a hard disk for storage of system software and temporary storage of print jobs.
The controller is exclusively for printer functions, and does not provide the CP660 with scanner functions.

Protocols Supported
TCP/IP (LPD,SMB over TCP/IP)
IPX/SPX (Pserver)
AppleTalk(PAP)

F-13-11

13.2.1.2 Connecting to an External Device

0008-4745
The Network Color PS/PCL Board-A1 is equipped with a parallel port and a network interface for connection to external devices. The parallel port is
IEEE1284 standard (bi-Centronics), and the network interface supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX and 10Base5 Ethernet. The protocols it supports include
AppleTalk, TCP/IP, and IPX/SPX.

Network Color PS/PCL Board-A1

Protocols Supported
TCP/IP (LPD,SMB over TCP/IP)
IPX/SPX (Pserver) Parallel port connector
AppleTalk (PAP) (Centronics)

AUI connector
10Base5
RJ-45 connector
10Base-T/100Base-TX

CP660

F-13-12

13.2.2 ColorPASS/PS-XJ Series

13.2.2.1 Outline
0008-4746
The PS-XJ is an external printer/scanner controller designed for the CLC300, CLC500, CLC700/800, and CLC900 Series and for the CLC1000/2400.
It supports PostScript, and it can process print jobs in PostScript and files in EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) for printing on a color copier.
The PS-XJ comes equipped with a parallel port for connection to an external device and a network interface for connection to an Ethernet network. Its CPU
is a MIPS RISC type CPU, and comes in various types grouped according to operating frequency and memory size.
It also possesses a hard disk for storage of system software and temporary storage of print jobs. The size of an area that may be scanned depends on the
size of its image memory and the selected read resolution.

13-9
 Chapter 13

T-13-1

ColorPASS ColorPASS ColorPASS ColorPASS ColorPASS ColorPASS

550/ 3000+/ 4000+/ 5000/ 5000/ 8000/
PS-XJ500 3500/ 4500/ PS-XJ5000 PS-XJ5000 PS-XJ8000
PS-XJ3500 PS-XJ4500
CPU R4700 R4700 R4700 R5000 R5000 R5000
Operating 133MHz 133MHz 133MHz 200MHz 200MHz 200MHz
frequency
Memory 64MB 80MB 128MB 144MB 256MB 512MB
capacity
Host copier 700/800/900 300/500/700/ 300/500/700/ 300/500/700/ 300/500/700/ 1000/2400
Series 800/900 Series 800/900 Series 800/900 Series 800/900 Series

Color copier ColorPASS/PS-XJ Host computer

Network computer
F-13-13

13.2.2.2 Connecting to an External Device

0008-4880
The ColorPASS/PS-XJ comes equipped with a parallel port and a network interface for connection to an external device. The parallel port complies with
IEEE1284 (bi-Centronics), and the network interface supports 10Base-T and 10Base5 (AUI) Ethernet. (For 10Base2, an AUI-10Base2 transceiver comes
with the controller.) The protocols it supports include AppleTalk, TCP/IP, and IPX/SPX.
To use scanner functions, the computer and the ColorPASS/PS-XJ must be connected over a network.
It possesses a SCSI interface for connection to an external device, but it is exclusively intended for a CD-ROM drive used when installing system software.
It must never be connected to an external hard disk or a computer. Its RS-232C port, on the other hand, is intended for connection of a density meter used
as for calibration.

13-10
 Chapter 13

Network computer Host computer

Protocols Supported
Parallel port connector
TCP/IP (Centronics)
(LPD,SMB over TCP/IP)
IPX/SPX (Pserver)
AppleTalk (PAP)

AUI connector:
10Base5, 10Base2

RJ-45 connector:
10Base-T

Copier interface connector

SCSI (parallel I/F)

Color copier

ColorPASS/PS-XJ

CD-ROM drive
F-13-14

13.2.3 PS Board Unit-A1

13.2.3.1 PS Board Unit-A1
0008-4891
The PS Board Unit-A1 is a Color PASS-550/PS-XJ500 housed in a special case for installation to the bottom of a CLC900.
The functional components inside it and the functions are more or less identical to those of the ColorPASS-550/PS-XJ500.

13-11
 Chapter 13

F-13-15

13.2.4 ColorPASS-M/PS-MX Series

13.2.4.1 Outline
0008-4896
The ColorPASS-M20/PS-MX20 and the ColorPASS-M25/PS-MX25 are external printer/scanner controllers for the CLC900 Series and the CLC1100
Series, respectively.
Like the ColorPASS/PS-XJ Series, the CPU is a MIPS RISC type CPU, and the page description language it supports is PostScript3.
It comes standard with a 160-MB image memory and also a hard disk for storage of system software and for temporary storage of print jobs.

F-13-16

13.2.4.2 Connecting to an External Device

0008-4898
The ColorPASS-M/PS-MX Series is equipped with a network interface for connection to an external device. The network interface supports 10Base-T/
100Base-TX and 10-Base5 (AUI) Ethernet; the protocols it supports include AppleTalk, TCP/IP, and IPX/SPX. Although it comes standard with an
IEEE1284 (bi-Centronics) parallel port, its operation is not guaranteed.

13-12
 Chapter 13

Protocols Supported
TCP/IP (LPD,SMB over TCP/IP)
IPX/SPX (Pserver)
AppleTalk (PAP) Color PASS-M/PS-MX Series

Copier interface
connector

AUI connector: 10Base5, 10Base2

RJ-45 connector: 10Base-T/100Base-TX

Color copier

F-13-17

13.2.5 ColorPASS-M20e/PS-MX20e
13.2.5.1 ColorPASS-M20e/PS-MX20e
0008-4900
The ColorPASS-M20e/PS-MX20e is a ColorPASS-M20/PS-MX20 housed in a special case for installation to the bottom of a CLC900. Its external view
is similar to that of the PS Board-Unit-A1, but its functional components and functions are more or less identical to those of the ColorPASS-M20/PS-
MX20.

F-13-18

13.2.6 ColorPASS-V/PS-ZX Series

13.2.6.1 Outline
0008-4903
The ColorPASS-V/PS-ZX Series is an external controller for color copiers developed as a successor to the ColorPASS/PX-XJ Series. It comes with a CPU
(Alpha 21164) which provides a higher level of performance. It is classified according to the operating frequency of its CPU and the type of CLC it
supports:

13-13
 Chapter 13

T-13-2

ColorPASS- ColorPASS- ColorPASS-50/ ColorPASS- ColorPASS-

V80/PS-ZX80 V55/PA-ZX55 PA-ZX50 V35/PS-ZX35 V30/PS-ZX30
ColorPASS 533MHz 533MHz 533MHz 400MHz 400MHz
operating frequency
Memory capacity 512MB 288MB 288MB 288MB 288MB
Host CLC 1000/2400 1100 Series 700/800/900 1100 Series 700/800/900
Series Series

F-13-19

13.2.6.2 Connecting to an External Device

0008-4905
The ColorPASS-V/PS-ZX Series comes with a parallel port and a network interface for connecting to an external device. The parallel port complies with
IEEE1284 standards (bi-Centronics), while the network interface supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX and 10Base5 (AUI) Ethernet. The protocols it supports
include AppleTalk, TCP/IP, and IPX/SPX.

Protocols Supported
TCP/IP (LPD,SMB over TCP/IP) Parallel connector
IPX/SPX (Pserver) (Centronics)
AppleTalk (PAP)

RJ-45 connector:
10Base-T/100Base-TX
AUI connector: 10Base5/10Base2

Copier interface
connector

Color PASS-V/PS-ZX

Color copier
F-13-20

13-14
Chapter 14 HARDWARE CONSTRUCTION
 Contents

Contents

14.1 Built-In Printer Controller..........................................................................................................................................14-1

14.1.1 PS Network Printer Board ....................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.1.1 Network Printer Board ................................................................................................................................................................................14-1
14.2 External Printer Controller.........................................................................................................................................14-2
14.2.1 ColorPASS-M/PS-MX Series .................................................................................................................................................. 14-2
14.2.1.1 ColorPASS-M/PS-MX Series .....................................................................................................................................................................14-2
14.2.2 ColorPASS-M20e/PS-MX20e ................................................................................................................................................. 14-3
14.2.2.1 ColorPASS-M20e/PS-MX20e ....................................................................................................................................................................14-3
14.2.3 ColorPASS-V/PS-ZX Series.................................................................................................................................................... 14-4
14.2.3.1 ColorPASS-V/PS-ZX Series.......................................................................................................................................................................14-4
14.3 Scanner Controller .....................................................................................................................................................14-7
14.3.1 Scanner Controller ................................................................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.4 Fax Controller ............................................................................................................................................................14-8
14.4.1 G3 FAX Board-C1 ................................................................................................................................................................... 14-8
14.4.1.1 G3 FAX Board-C1 ......................................................................................................................................................................................14-8
14.4.2 Super G3 FAX Board-F1/Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board-A1 .............................................................................................. 14-8
14.4.2.1 Super G3 FAX Board-F1/Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board-A1 .................................................................................................................14-8
 Chapter 14

14.1 Built-In Printer Controller

14.1.1 PS Network Printer Board
14.1.1.1 Network Printer Board
0008-4918
The following figure shows the construction of the Network Color PS/PCL Board-A1, cited as an example:

DIMM slot for expansion Flash ROM Hard disk drive

Printer DIMM Battery
interface Parallel
interface
J26

J27

Network
interface

CPU Network controller PCI connector

RIP chips EEPROM
F-14-1

CPU:
It is a high-performance RISC-type CPU (MIPS R4700), and processes data according to the programs stored in memory.
DIMM:
The memory area of a DIMM is roughly divided into a system area and an image data area. The system area contains the program used to control the overall
operations of the board and a program called an "interpreter," which interprets PDL commands to generate image data. The image data area, on the other
hand, contains image data generated from PDL files.
Flash ROM:
It contains a self-diagnosis program, boot program for the system program, and programs for formatting the hard disk and writing the system program.
RIP chip:
It controls the transfer of data between CPU and memory, and serves to ensure that the CPU efficiently processes data.
Network controller:
It controls communications with the network.
Network interface:
It serves as an interface for connection to a network. It supports 10Base and 100Base-TX Ethernet.
Parallel interface:
It is an interface complying with the IEEE1284 standards for computer connection.
Hard disk drive:
It contains system software. The hard disk drive contains a queue for temporary retention of print data, record of print jobs, and additionally installed fonts.
The internal hard disk drive is connected with an E-IDE (Enhanced Integrated Drive Electronics) interface. The board is designed for connection of one
internal hard disk drive, and does not allow connection of an expansion hard disk drive.
Battery:
It is mounted on the board so that the real-time clock on the board will continue to operate when the machine's main power is turned off or the board is
removed from the machine.
PCI slot:
It is a 32-bit PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnector) bus connector for connection of a TokenRing Board (option).
EEPROM:
It stands for "Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory," and contains such data as on the number of prints made using the board.

14-1
 Chapter 14

14.2 External Printer Controller

14.2.1 ColorPASS-M/PS-MX Series
14.2.1.1 ColorPASS-M/PS-MX Series
0008-4921
The following figures show example external printer controllers: ColorPASS-M/PS-MX Series:
- Arrangement of Components

[3] [4]

[2]
[14]

[13]
[1]

[10]
[17]
[16]
[18]
[15]
[11]
[9]
9
[7]
[19]
[5]
[6] [21]

[8]
[12] [20]
[22]

[1] External cover [12] Bottom EMI shield

[2] HDD carrier [13] Fan/power supply switch
[3] HDD [14] Fan cable
[4] HDD cable [15] AC power supply
[5] Personal card [16] Grounding wire
[6] Video interface board [17] Power supply unit
[7] Motherboard [18] Power supply cable
[8] DIMM [19] UIB fixing plate
[9] Center frame [20] UIB cable
[10] Upper EMI shield [21] UIB (user interface board)
[11] Main EMI shield [22] Front cover unit
F-14-2

The motherboard comes equipped with a CPU whose operating frequency is rated at 200 MHz and a 160MB memory; it processes image data, controls
the hard disk functions, controls the image data to and from the video interface, and controls communication with external devices.

14-2
 Chapter 14

[16][17]
[1] SCSI interface connector [15]
[2] Not used
[3] Parallel port [1] [13]
[4] Not used [14]
[5] AUI connector
[6] RJ-45 connector
[7] Not used [2]
[8] DIMM socket
[9] Video interface board connector [12]
[10] Power supply cable connector [3] [11]
[11] Option cable connector
[12] 200-MHz CPU, CPU fan
[13] Battery
[14] UIB cable connector
[15] HDD cable connector [4]
[16] Fan cable connector
[17] CPU fan cable connector

[10]
[5]

[9]
[6]

[7] [8]

F-14-3

14.2.2 ColorPASS-M20e/PS-MX20e
14.2.2.1 ColorPASS-M20e/PS-MX20e
0008-4924
The following figures show example external printer controllers: ColorPass-M20e/PS-MX20e:
The ColorPASS M20e/PS-MX20e is a ColorPASS-M20/PS-MX20 housed in a special case for installation inside a CLC900 Series copier.
Its internal motherboard, video interface board, HDD, and other principal electric parts are the same as those of the ColorPASS-M20/PS-MX20.

14-3
 Chapter 14

- Arrangement of Components

Video interface board

DIMMs

Motherboard

HDD Power supply unit

Fans

UIB

F-14-4

14.2.3 ColorPASS-V/PS-ZX Series

14.2.3.1 ColorPASS-V/PS-ZX Series
0008-4930
The following figures show example external printer controllers: ColorPass-V/PS-ZX Series:

14-4
 Chapter 14

- Arrangement of Components
[1] Front cover
[2] Drive door
[3] UIB (user interface board)
[4] UIB fixing plate
[20] [5] External cover
[6] MO driver
[7] CD-ROM drive
[8] Drive bracket
[9] Tray
[17] [19] [10] Side panel
[11] Power supply unit
[12] Rear panel fan
[13] SCSI cable (CD-ROM drive)
[18] [14] HDD relay PCB
[15] UIB cable
[16] Motherboard
[16] [17] Video interface board
[18] DIMM
[19] HDD bracket
[15] [20] HDD
[13]

[14]
[11] [12]
[10]

[9]

[8]

[7]
[5]
[6] [4]

[3]

[1]
[2]

F-14-5

14-5
 Chapter 14

- Arrangement of Components
Shield HDD

Serial port
COM 1
COM 2
Not used Motherboard
Parallel port (LPT)
For future
use (LPT0)
10/100BaseT
AUI Ethernet
connector
Slot 1 J19
HDD relay
Slot 2 J20 PCB
Slot 3 J26
Copier interface Slot 4 J29
connector
Slot 5 J35
Slot 6 J36

Power switch Power

supply unit
Power supply CD-ROM drive
socket

(rear view) (side view)

Motherboard connector
J19 Not used
J20 Not used
J26 Not used
J29 Video interface board
J35 Not used
J36 Not used
F-14-6

The motherboard controls the image data to and from the video interface board; it also controls the hard disk and the communication with external devices.
Its DIMM sockets allow installation of DIMM for as much as 512 MB of memory.
The motherboard also possesses the following connectors:
- 32-bit PCI connector (5V; 2pcs.)
- 64-bit PCI connector (3.3V; 2pc.)
- Video DIN connector (2pc.)

[17]

[1]
[1] Serial port connector
[2] Not used
[2]
[3] Parallel port connector
[4] 10/100Base-T connector [6]
[5] AUI connector [3]
[6] DIMM socket
[7] CPU/fan
[8] CPU fan connector [4] [7]
[9] Not used (32-bit PCI connector)
[10] Not used (32-bit PCI connector) [5]
[11] Not used (64-bit PCI connector)
[8]
[12] Video interface board
[13] Not used (video DIN connector)
[14] Not used (video DIN connector) [9]
[15] Battery [10]
[16] 20-pin power supply connector
[17] Fan connector [11]

[12]

[13]

[15] [14] [16]

F-14-7

14-6
 Chapter 14

14.3 Scanner Controller

14.3.1 Scanner Controller
0008-5290
The following figure shows the construction of the SCSI Interface Board-D1, cited as an example:

J8501
PROM To system motherboard ASIC

CPU

LED101 Fu101 J8503 J8502 SCSI controller

(SCSI) (SCSI-2) (SCSI-2)

Image memory
(DRAM, 10 MB)
F-14-8

T-14-1

Name Description
CPU Controls each part of the SCSI board.
Converts scanner commands from the computer into copier
commands.
ASIC Performs image processing on the SCSI board and controls
image memory.
SCSI controller Controls communication using a SCSI interface.
PROM Stores operating programs of the CPU.
Image memory Stores image data read by the copier.

14-7
 Chapter 14

14.4 Fax Controller

14.4.1 G3 FAX Board-C1
14.4.1.1 G3 FAX Board-C1
0008-5298
The GP215/225 Series copier to which the G3 FAX Board-C1 is installed is not equipped with a page memory, image memory, or coding/decoding circuit.
The fax board, therefore, comes quipped with these circuits in addition to a modem and NCU.
The fax board does not have a CPU, and it is controlled by the CPU on the copier's image processor PCB.

DIMM (accessory)
for expansion of
page memory NCU board

DIMM (accessory)
for expansion of
image memory

Battery for back-up

of image memory
Fax functions
control circuit
Slot for image Slot for page memory
memory expansion expansion DIMM
DIMM

Modem
Fax input/output
Standard image Standard page control circuit
memory (1 MB) Coding/decoding memory (1 MB)
circuit
F-14-9

14.4.2 Super G3 FAX Board-F1/Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board-A1

14.4.2.1 Super G3 FAX Board-F1/Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board-A1
0008-5326
The GP300/400 Series copier to which the Super G3 FAX Board-F1/Super G3 Multi-Line FAX Board-A1 is installed comes equipped with a page memory,
coding/decoding circuit, and image memory. The fax board, therefore, consists of a modem, fax input/output control circuit, and NCU. The fax board does
not possess a CPU, and it is controlled by the IP-CPU on the copier's image processor PCB.
The Super G3 Multi-Line FAX Board-A1 is based on the Super G3 FAX board-F1 with the addition of a modem board and an NCU board; it may be
connected to two public telephone lines.

14-8
 Chapter 14

Super G3 Muiti-Line Fax Board-Ai

NCU board

Modem board

NCU board

Fax input/output
control circuit

Modem
F-14-10

14-9
Chapter 15 OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS
 Contents

Contents

15.1 Fax Controller ............................................................................................................................................................15-1

15.1.1 Type 1 (copier without an image memory).............................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.1.1 Transmission ...............................................................................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1.1.2 Reception.....................................................................................................................................................................................................15-2
15.1.2 Type 2 (copier with an image memory)................................................................................................................................... 15-4
15.1.2.1 Transmission ...............................................................................................................................................................................................15-4
15.1.2.2 Reception.....................................................................................................................................................................................................15-6
15.2 Printer Controller .......................................................................................................................................................15-9
15.2.1 Printer....................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.2.1.1 Processing by the Computer........................................................................................................................................................................15-9
15.2.1.2 Processing by the Controller .......................................................................................................................................................................15-9
15.2.2 Fax Transmission (print image fax/raster fax)....................................................................................................................... 15-19
15.2.2.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................15-19
15.2.2.2 Processing on the Computer......................................................................................................................................................................15-19
15.2.2.3 Processing by the Copier...........................................................................................................................................................................15-20
15.3 Scanner Controller ...................................................................................................................................................15-22
15.3.1 Processing by the Computer .................................................................................................................................................. 15-22
15.3.1.1 Processing by the Computer......................................................................................................................................................................15-22
15.3.2 Reading Images...................................................................................................................................................................... 15-22
15.3.2.1 Reading Images.........................................................................................................................................................................................15-22
15.3.3 Transmitting Image Data ....................................................................................................................................................... 15-24
15.3.3.1 Transmitting Image Data...........................................................................................................................................................................15-24
 Chapter 15

15.1 Fax Controller

15.1.1 Type 1 (copier without an image memory)
15.1.1.1 Transmission
0008-5330
A fax message may be transmitted in several ways. The discussions that follow are in reference to memory transmission.
When the appropriate settings needed for transmission have been made on the copier's control panel, the copier starts to read the original according to the
resolution selected on the control panel.
The image data is turned into binary data by the CORE/IP PCB, and is stored in the page memory of the fax board. The image data in the page memory is
coded using MMR, and is stored in the image memory of the fax board.
If the original consists of multiple pages, all pages are read and stored in the image memory.

Original

Control panel Analog processor

PCB
Fax transmission CCD
settings

CPU Image processing

Image processor PCB

Binary processing

CORE/IP PCB

Page memory
(bit-map)

Coding
(bit-map to MMR)

Image memory
Page 1
Page 2
•
• Multiple-page
• original
Fax board

F-15-1

When the original has been read, the selected destination is called to find out the functions common to the sending and receiving devices. As a result, an
appropriate data transmission speed and coding method are selected; thereafter, the coded image data is read from the image memory, and are decoded.
The decoded image data is then coded once again to suit the method selected for the receiving device, and is converted into analog signals for transmission
over a telephone line by a modem.
The analog signals are sent through an NCU and the public telephone line to reach the receiving device.

15-1
 Chapter 15

Copier

Image processor PCB

Settings information CPU

CORE/IP PCB

Fax board

Image memory
Page 1
Page 2
•
•
•

Coding/decoding
MMR MH/
MR/MMR

Modem

NCU

Public telephone line

Functions Image data

information restoration
Fax machine at destination

Printing

F-15-2

15.1.1.2 Reception
0008-5337
When a fax message is received, information is exchanged to find out the functions common to both receiving and sending devices, thereby selecting an
appropriate data transmission speed and method used to code image data.
The image data arrives in the form of analog signals, and these analog signals are converted into digital signals by a modem. The image data is decoded,
and then coded using MMR once again for storage into the image memory. This is also true of multiple pages.

15-2
 Chapter 15

Original

Fax machine at source

Image data
Settings information generation

Public telephone line

NCU

Modem

Coding/decoding
MH/MR/
MMR MMR

Image memory
Page 1
Page 2
•
•
•

Fax board

CORE/IP PCB

Functions
information CPU

Image processor PCB

Copier

F-15-3

The image data stored in the image memory is decoded as a bitmap image for printing. When data for a single page has been decoded, paper is picked up
from the cassette, and the image data is read from the page memory in keeping with a sync signal.
At this point, the resolution of the image data is intended for fax transmission; to suit the resolution of the copier's printer unit, it is processed by the CORE/
IP PCB, and is sent to the image processor PCB.
The image processor PCB generates laser modulation signals from the image signals. These signals are used to modulate the laser light by way of the laser
driver PCB to form an image on the photosensitive drum.

15-3
 Chapter 15

Fax board
Image memory
Page 1
Page 2
•
•
•

Decoding
(MMR to bit-map)

Page memory
(bit-map)

CORE/IP PCB

Resolution conversion

Image processor PCB

CPU Image processing

Laser drive signal

generation

Laser driver PCB

F-15-4

15.1.2 Type 2 (copier with an image memory)

15.1.2.1 Transmission
0008-5341
A fax message may be transmitted in several ways. The discussions that follow are in reference to memory transmission.
When the appropriate settings needed for transmission have been made on the copier's control panel, the copier starts to read the original according to the
resolution selected on the control panel.
The image data is turned into binary data by the image processor PCB, and is stored in the page memory of the image memory using MMR or JBIG.
If the original consists of multiple pages, all pages are read and stored in the image memory.

15-4
 Chapter 15

Multiple-page original

Original

Control panel CCD PCB

Fax transmission
settings CCD

CPU Image processing

Binary processing

Input page
memory area
(bit-map)
Coding
Fax image area
Bit-map Page 1
MMR/JBIG Page 2

Image memory

Image processor PCB

F-15-5

When the original has been read, the selected destination is called to find out the functions common to the sending and receiving devices. As a result, an
appropriate data transmission speed and coding method are selected; thereafter, the coded image data is read from the image memory, and is decoded.
The decoded image data is then coded once again to suit the method selected for the receiving device, and is converted into analog signals for transmission
over a telephone line by a modem.
The analog signals are sent through an NCU and the public telephone line to reach the receiving device.

15-5
 Chapter 15

Copier

Image processor PCB

CPU

Settings
information
Fax image area
Page 1
Page 2
•
•
•

Decoding/coding

MMR/JBIG
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG

Fax board

Modem

NCU

Public telephone line

Functions Image data

information decoding

Fax machine at destination

Printing

F-15-6

15.1.2.2 Reception
0008-5342
When a fax file is received, information is exchanged to find out the functions common to both receiving and sending devices, thereby selecting an
appropriate data transmission speed and method used to code image data.
The image data arrives in the form of analog signals, and these analog signals are converted into digital signals by a modem. The image data is decoded,
and then coded once again using MMR or JBIG for storage into the image memory. This is also true of multiple pages.

15-6
 Chapter 15

Original

Fax machine at source

Settings Image data
information generation

Public telephone line

NCU

Modem

Fax board

Decoding/coding

MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
MMR/JBIG

Fax image area

Page 1
Page 2
•
•
•
Functions
information
Image memory

CPU

Image processor PCB

Copier

F-15-7

The image data stored in the image memory is decoded as a bitmap image for printing. When data for a single page has been decoded, paper is picked up
from the cassette, and the image data is read from the page memory in keeping with a sync signal.
At this point, the resolution of the image data is intended for fax transmission; to suit the resolution of the copier's printer unit, it is processed and sent to
the laser driver PCB, which drives the laser diode to modulate the laser light, thus forming an image on the photosensitive drum.

15-7
 Chapter 15

Image processor PCB

Image memory

Fax image memory

Page 1
Page 2
•
Signal •
decoding •

MMR/JBIG

Bit-map

Page memory area for

printing (bit-map)

CPU Resolution conversion

Image processing

Laser driver PCB

Laser driver
signal generation

F-15-8

15-8
 Chapter 15

15.2 Printer Controller

15.2.1 Printer
15.2.1.1 Processing by the Computer
0008-5351
When the user sends a print command to an application program, the application program in response sends image data to the printer driver using the
operating system.
In response, the printer driver translates the image data and the printer settings into commands in a page description language (PDL). The resulting print
data is then sent to the printer board in the form of a print job, using a parallel port or a network interface depending on how the computer is connected to
the printer controller.
A specific printer driver is needed for each type of page description language, a PCL printer board requiring a PCL printer driver and a PS printer board
requiring a PostScript printer driver. For further details of printer drivers, see the descriptions of user software in Chapter 5.

Application Operating system

program PostScript printer driver
PostScript Parallel port To the
Image data data Print job parallel
generation driver
port

Settings
information Network To the
driver network
Printer
properties

PCL printer driver

PCL
data Print job
generation

Settings
information
Printer
properties

Image data

Print job
(print data in PDL)

Settings information
F-15-9

15.2.1.2 Processing by the Controller

0008-5354
a. Type 1
a-1 Internal Construction
A printer board usually consists of the following blocks:
- Print data input block
- Data connection block
- Print data processing block
- Image data output block
The print data input block receives a print job from the computer. The data connection block serves to forward a print job to the print data processing block
using a selected method of connection. In the print data processing block, image data is generated for printing on a copier by processing the print data
described in a page description language.
When data is ready for transmission, the image data output block sends it to the copier in the form of print image data.

15-9
 Chapter 15

Printer board Copier

Print data input Data Print data processing block Image data
block connection output block
block
Parallel
Print job interface
Print job Image
(PDL data) data
Network
Print job interface

Print job
(print data in PDL).

Image data.

F-15-10

When data arrives, the copier drives its laser unit so that the image will be printed as the result of several processes: exposure, development, transfer, and
fixing.
The operation control program (called "system software") for the printer controller is stored on a hard disk. A RAM is also used, divided into a system area
and an image data processing area. When the controller is started up, the operation control program is read into the system area of the main memory for
execution.
The system software is upgraded not by replacement of the hard disk, but by replacing the system software stored on it with a new version. The system
software takes up a large amount of memory, and is supplied in the form of a CD-ROM.

RAM HDD
System area System software
CPU (old version)
Image data area

Controller (before upgrading)

RAM HDD
System area System software
CPU (old version)
Image data area System CD-ROM
(new version)
Controller (during upgrading)

RAM HDD
System area System software
CPU (new version)
Image data area

Controller (after upgrading)

F-15-11

The hard disk will not accommodate multiple pieces of system software.
a-2 Start-Up Sequence
When the copier's main power switch is turned on, the system power supply receives power, supplying power to the printer board.
When the printer controller receives power, its CPU executes the self-diagnostic program stored in the flash ROM.
The self-diagnostic program checks the functions used for communication between CPUs of the printer board and the copier in addition to the various
mechanisms of the printer controller. An error message will be indicated in the display if a fault is encountered during a check.

15-10
 Chapter 15

Main memory

System area Image data

area

CPU Interface

Self-diagnostic
program Boot program
Hard disk drive
Flash ROM

Printer board

Access to program being executed

F-15-12

When the self-diagnostic program ends without encountering a fault, the boot program stored also in the flash ROM is started. The program is used to read
the system program from the hard disk and to write it to the main memory.
When the boot program finishes writing, the system program of the main memory starts up to initialize various functions, at the end of which a message
will appear in the display, indicating that all is ready to receive a print job.
The system program of the board consists of multiple modules, and appropriate modules as required at a specific point in time are called into the system
area of the main memory (RAM).

Main memory

Image data
System area area

CPU Interface

Self-diagnostic Boot System

program program program

Flash ROM Hard disk drive

Printer board

access to program being executed.

flow of system program.

F-15-13

a-3 Tranferring Print Data

The printer controller comes with a parallel interface and a network interface for connection to a computer. (These interfaces may be used simultaneously.)
The following cites the Network Color PS/PCL Board-A1 to explain how print data is transferred.

a-3-1 Connecting to a Parallel Port

The parallel port complies with the IEEE1284 standards (bi-Centronics), and it supports multiple operating modes: compatibility mode (designed to
provide compatibility with existing Centronics interfaces), nibble mode (designed to send data in 4-bit units), and ECP mode (Enhanced Capability Port;
designed to enable high-speed bi-directional communication).

15-11
 Chapter 15

Reference:
Enabling the Parallel Port Connection
I/O Port Setup
PARALLEL PORT: ON*
I/O TIMEOUT
IGNORE EOF:
*Must be set as indicated.

Printer board
Computer

Parallel port Centronics cable Parallel port

(IEEE1284-compliant cable) (printer port)
F-15-14

a-3-2 Connecting to a Network

i. Outline
The printer board comes standard with an interface for an Ethernet network: for 10Base5, it provides an AUI connector; for 10/100Base-T, it provides an
RJ-45 connector.
In the case of 10Base5, connect an AUI cable to the AUI connector. The AUI connector and the RJ-45 connector are connected as a single network port
inside, and cannot be used simultaneously.
The 100Base standards supported by the board are 100Base-TX standards. The board is capable of automatically switching between 10Base-T and
100Base-TX. (Select 'AUTO DETECT' for 'ETHERNET SPEED'.)

Reference:
Enabling Network Connection
I/O Port Setup
ETHERNET: ON*
*Must be set as indicated
ETHERNET SPEED:
RJ-45 connector After selecting the port, you need to select the appropriate
protocol and service settings.

100Base-TX
Printer
Category 5 UTP cable
board

10Base-T
Category 3 UTP cable
Category 5 UTP cable

10Base5
AUI connector AUI transceiver cable

F-15-15

ii. TCP/IP
Normally, the Internet, intranet, and UNIX networks use TCP/IP as their network protocol. Further, most Windows NT networks usually use TCP/IP. The
board supports LPD (Line Printer Daemon), which is a standard print service of TCP/IP.
Since the board also supports SMB over TCP/IP (Server Message Block), usually used for sharing printers and files on a Windows network, print data may
be sent directly to the board from a PC running Windows 95/98.

15-12
 Chapter 15

Windows 95/98 Print by LPD

LPD utilites
already installed Windows NT
UNIX

Print service: LPD

Network protocol: TCP/IP

Print service: SMB

Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT

Printing by SMB

F-15-16

- Using TCP/IP
To use TCP/IP, the subnet mask for the network to which the printer board is connected and the IP address of the board must be set.
An IP address may be set either automatically or manually. So that the board may automatically obtain an IP address, it supports three types of protocols:
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol), BOOTP (BOOT Protocol), and RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol).
To make use of this function, there must be a DHCP server, BOOTP sever, or RARP sever on the network with all required settings made. With this
function, the IP addresses of the devices connected to the network may be controlled from a central location.
When auto is selected, the board requests the server to send its IP address when it turns on; in response, it will receive its IP address assigned to it.
In the case of DHCP and BOOTP, the subnet mask will also be obtained automatically in addition to the IP address; in the case of RARP, only the IP
address will be obtained, and the subnet mask must be set manually.
If an IP address is to be set manually, it must be set together with subnet mask from the printer unit control panel.
If an external user not belonging to the network to which the board is connected tries to use the board, a gateway address must be set. A gateway address
may be set either automatically or manually; if a DHCP server or BOOTP server is used, automatic setting may be selected.
If an RARP server is used or an IP address must be set manually, the gateway address must also be set manually.

15-13
 Chapter 15

Reference:
Setting a Protocol When Using TCP/IP
NETWORK PROTOCOL SETUP
TCP/IP - ETHERNET ENABLE AUTO IP: NO
DHCP server ENABLE AUTO IP: YES ETH. IP ADDRESS
ENABLE DHCP ETH. SUBNET MASK
AUTO GATEWAY GATEWAY ADDRESS
GATEWAY ADDRESS
ENABLE BOOTP
AUTO GATEWAY
GATEWAY ADDRESS
BOOTP server

ENABLE RARP
ETH. SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY ADDRESS

RARP server

To other network
Gateway
(router)

Requests IP address

IP address information

Windows 95/98 Windows NT UNIX

F-15-17

- Using an LPD Service

When an IP address is set for TCP/IP, the LPD service of the printer board will automatically be enabled.
UNIX and Windows NT provide for an LPR port for an LPD service so that print data may be sent to the board directly from a work station without going
through a server.
A Windows NT system possesses an LPR port function; however, if Windows NT is installed using a standard installation method, the function will not
be installed. To use the LPR port, select the network on the control panel, and select 'TCP/IP' as the protocol to use; then, select 'TCP/IP' print' for a service
to use to add the function.
Windows 95/98 does not come with an LPR port. To print using an LPD service, you must resort to a server equipped with an LPR port or make use of an
LPR utility (not part of the board).

15-14
 Chapter 15

Windows NT UNIX

Ethernet
Protocol: TCP/IP
Service: LPD

Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98 Windows NT

LPR utility
installed
F-15-18

- Using SMB over TCP/IP

SMB has been developed for a network based on NetBIOS (in which a destination is selected with reference to a computer name). SMB over TCP/IP is a
protocol designed to enable the use of SMB in conjunction with the TCP/IP protocol.
On a TCP/IP network, a destination must be selected by means of an IP address not a computer name.
If a WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) server, which converts between computer names and IP addresses, exists on the network, the function may
be used by connecting to the WINS server. (The auto function must be enabled so that a search will be made automatically to find the WINS server for
connection. The use of a WINS server, further, can reduce the volume of communication handled on the network carried out for IP address inquiries.)
The IP address of the WINS sever may be set manually. If there is no WINS server or if you do not want to use a WINS server, the board will make inquiries
of the entire network as necessary to find out the IP address of the destination in question.
The name of the board for an SMB service is set under 'SERVER NAME', and the notation used will be indicated on Windows network neighborhoods.

15-15
 Chapter 15

Reference:
Enabling SMB Service
NETWORK SERVICES SETUP
ENABLE SMB:
AUTO NETBIOS:
USE NAME SERVER:
NAME SERVER IP:
SERVER NAME:
DHCP/BOOTP server WINS server SERVER COMMENT:
DOMAIN NAME:

Ethernet
Protocol: TCP/IP
Service: SMB

Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98

F-15-19

iii. AppleTalk
A Macintosh network uses AppleTalk as its standard protocol. Depending on the type of network used, the protocol may be either LocalTalk, EtherTalk,
or TokenTalk. (The printer board supports EtherTalk.)
The print service of the board for AppleTalk is based on PAP (Printer Access Protocol). When AppleTalk is enabled for the board, its PAP service will
automatically be enabled. The board also supports EtherTalk Phase II, so that the zone to which the board belongs may be selected for a network on which
AppleTalk zones are set.
Normally, printing in an AppleTalk environment will be direct from each computer to the printer.

Reference:
Enabling AppleTalk
NETWORK PROTOCOL SETUP
ENABLE APPLETALK: YES*
APPLETALK ZONE:
*Must be set as indicated.

Ethernet
Protocol: AppleTalk (EtherTalk Phase II)
Print service: PAP

F-15-20

15-16
 Chapter 15

iv. IPX
A network based on NetWare (from Novell) uses IPX as its protocol for print data, and the printer board supports two types of network configurations:
bindery mode (including bindery emulation mode of NetWare 4.X) and NDS (NetWare Directory Service, used in NetWare 4.X).
In IPX, all print jobs are sent to the print queue built in a Novell file server; the printer board checks the presence of a job in the print queue at pre-specified
intervals. If there is a print job, a request is issued to ask that the print job be sent to the board, which in response prints it upon its arrival.
For IPX settings, see the Getting Started Guide that comes with the board. The NDS settings will overwrite bindery mode settings; if two network
configurations exist on a network to which the board is connected, be sure to instruct the user's administrator to make NDS settings first.

Network Built in Bindery Mode

NetWare
NetWare NetWare file server
client client (print server)

Ethernet
Protocol: IPX
Service: PServer

NetWare NetWare NetWare

client client file server
(print server)

Network Built in NDS Mode

F-15-21

a-4 Processing Print Data

The printer board processes print data as follows:
The following cites the Network Color PS/PCL Board-A1 to explain how print data is processed.
a-4-1 Print Data Connection Block
i. Connecting a Print Job
A print job received through the print data input block is handed to the print data processing block using the method of connection selected on a computer;
the connection may be either of three: direct, through print queue, or through hold queue.
1. Direct Connection
A directly sent print job has the highest degree of priority, and is processed even when a job exists in a print queue. If a job is being processed in the print
data processing block, a directly sent print job will be processed immediately after that job is processed.
2. Print Queue
Print jobs sent to a print queue are once stored in memory. They are then sent to the print data processing block in sequence as soon as each job has been
processed in the print data processing block. The jobs are deleted from the print queue when they have been processed.
3. Hold Queue
A print job sent to the hold queue are stored in memory as it is. To print it, you must move it to the print queue using WebSpooler.
Both print queue and hold queue are built on the hard disk.

15-17
 Chapter 15

Print data Data connection block Print data

input block Direct connection processing block

Through print queue

Through hold
queue
Hold Print
queue queue

Job C Job 3
Job B Job 2
Job A Job 1

To print a job on the hold queue,

move the job to the print queue
using WebSpooler.

F-15-22

ii. Printed Queue

If the printed queue is enabled, jobs are stored in printed queue after they have been printed. When you move a stored job to the print queue, you will be
able to print the job without starting the application program used to create the job.
The printed queue retains as many jobs as have been set (part of server settings), and jobs in excess of the number are deleted starting with the oldest one.
(Print jobs printed directly or by the downloader are not retained in the printed queue.)
To print a job in a printed queue, you must move it to the print queue using WebSpooler. Like other queues, the printed queue is also built on the hard disk.

Print data input block Data connection block Print data processing
block
Jobs through the print queue

Print
queue

Job 3
Job 2
Job 1
Each printed job is moved from the
print queue to the printed queue.
Reference:
Enabling the Printed Queue
SYSTEM SETUP
To print a job on the printed queue, Printed PUBLISH PRINTED Q: YES*
move it to the print queue using queue *Must be set as indicated.
WebSpooler.
Job Z
Reference:
Job Y Setting the Number of Jobs to Save
Any excess jobs are removed SYSTEM SETUP
job X
starting with the oldest job. JOBS TO SAVE:

F-15-23

a-4-2 Print Data Processing Block

The print data processing block develops print data expressed using commands of a page description language into a type of image data which may be
printed on a printer unit (raster image or bitmap data; this process is known as RIP or raster image processing).
The program used to process data by interpreting commands is called an "interpreter," and the printer board comes equipped with a PCL5 interpreter and
a PostScript3 interpreter.
As many as 46 PCL fonts for the PCL5 interpreter and 117 AdobeType 1 fonts and 19 TrueType fonts (136 PS fonts in all) are stored on the hard disk.
The board is equipped with an automatic identification mechanism to identify a page description language, and starts the appropriate interpreter after
checking the print job in question, so that it can process both PCL5 jobs and PostScript3 jobs without intervention by the user.

15-18
 Chapter 15

PostScript Interpreter

Print data Print data Image data

(PostScript data) processing (raster image)
(RIP)

Adobe Type-1 fonts: 117

True Type fonts: 19
PDL Hard disk Image
Print job identifica- drive Standard Built-In Fonts data
tion
PCL fonts: 46

Print data Print data Image data

(PCL data) processing (raster image)
(RIP)

Print data PCL Interpreter

connection Print data
block Print data processing block output block

F-15-24

a-4-3 Image Data Output Block

When print data has been processed on the printer board and preparations for printing are done, the CPU on the board sends to the CPU of the CP660 such
control information as on print paper size, pickup cassettes, and delivery tray by way of starting printing operation.
When the printer unit is ready and a sync signal arrives, the image data is sent to the printer unit through the video interface of the image data output block.

Printer board CP660

Image data
Serial interface CPU
Main memory

Video interface Video signal

CPU
processing circuit

Video signal

Serial communication

Sync signal
F-15-25

15.2.2 Fax Transmission (print image fax/raster fax)

15.2.2.1 Outline
0008-5427
If the copier is equipped with both printer board and fax board, it may be able to send a fax message directly without printing (i.e., by sending image data
prepared on a computer to the printer board). Such a function is called "print image faxing" or "raster faxing."
15.2.2.2 Processing on the Computer
0008-5428
a. Type 1 (if printer driver and fax driver are a single entity)
As in the case of printing, the user executes a print command using an application program. The application program, in response, sends the image data to
the printer driver using the operating system.
The printer driver translates the image data into commands expressed in a page description language. The printer driver possesses a built-in fax
transmission settings function, allowing making the various settings needed for fax transmission on a screen.
The print data is sent to the printer board in the form of a print job together with control information needed for fax transmission.

15-19
 Chapter 15

Application Operating system

program
Printer driver
Print job Parallel
Image data PDL data gernation (for fax To parallel port
port driver
transmission)

Settings Settings
information information
Network driver To network
Printer Fax
properties properties

Image data

Print job
(printing data in PDL)

Settings information

F-15-26

b. Type 2 (w/ dedicated fax driver)

Some come with a driver designed especially for fax transmission. (As many as two icons will be created for one copier, one for the printer driver and one
for the fax driver.)
To send a fax message, the user selects the fax driver, and sends a print command to an application program. In response, the application program sends
the image data to the fax driver using the operation system.
The fax driver serves to translate the image data into commands expressed in a page description language. The destination and other particulars are
specified on the Settings screen of the fax driver.
The print data is sent to the printer board as a print job together with control information needed for fax transmission.

Application Operating system

program FAX driver
PDL data Parallel port To the
Image data generation Print job parallel port
driver

Settings
information Network To the
driver network
FAX
property

Image data

Print job
(print data in PDL)

Settings information
F-15-27

15.2.2.3 Processing by the Copier

0008-5432
The print data reception block of the printer board sends print data coming from the computer to the print data processing block using a selected method
of connection.
The print data processing block generates image data for fax transmission by processing the print data expressed in a page description language just as it
would when printing on a copier.
When the image data is ready, the image data output block first sends control information needed for fax transmission to the copier, to be followed by the
image data.

15-20
 Chapter 15

Printer board Copier

Print data Data Print data processing Image data

input block connection block output block
block Public
telephone line
Print job Parallel
interface
Image Fax
PDL data board
data
Print job Network
interface

Print job (print data in PDL)

Image data

F-15-28

The fax transmission image data is converted by the copier's image processing circuit so that it will assume a resolution for fax transmission; then, it is
coded by the fax board for transmission to the selected destination.

15-21
 Chapter 15

15.3 Scanner Controller

15.3.1 Processing by the Computer
15.3.1.1 Processing by the Computer
0008-5434
When the user tries to execute reading of an image while using an application program, the operation system starts up the scanner driver. The user then
specifies an area of the original to read, resolution, and gradation.
The scanner driver serves to convert the settings made by the user into commands for the scanner controller. The scanner controller is connected to the
computer by means of a SCSI interface, and these commands are sent to the scanner controller through a SCSI driver.

Computer

Application program

Image read command

Scanner driver start-up

Operating system
Scanner driver

Image Read Settings screen

Scanner command
generation
Settings information
(read area, resolution) Scanner command

SCSI driver

SCSI I/F

SCSI cable

SCSI I/F

SCSI board

Copier

F-15-29

15.3.2 Reading Images

15.3.2.1 Reading Images
0008-5439
The scanner controller converts the commands it receives into commands for the CPU of the image processor, which controls the copier. The CPU on the
image processor PCB sets the appropriate functions according to these commands, thereby starting to read originals.

15-22
 Chapter 15

SCSI board
Command conversion
Scanner command Copier control
command

Image processor PCB

CPU

DC controller PCB

Scanner motor Scanning lamp

F-15-30

The image of an original is converted into electric signals by the CCD of the CCD PCB, and then into the digital signals by the A/D conversion circuit.
The image data from the CCD PCB are processed by the image processor circuit and the SCSI board for storage in the image memory of the SCSI board.

15-23
 Chapter 15

Original

CCD PCB

CCD

Image processor PCB

Image processing

SCSI board

Image processing

Image data

Image memory

F-15-31

15.3.3 Transmitting Image Data

15.3.3.1 Transmitting Image Data
0008-5440
When an original has been read, the resulting image data is sent to the computer using the SCSI interface. The scanner driver converts the image data from
the SCSI driver into a format used by the application program in question and sends it to the application program.

15-24
 Chapter 15

Copier

SCSI board

Image memory

Image data

SCSI I/F

SCSI cable

SCSI I/F

SCSI driver

Scanner driver
Format
conversion

Image data

Operating system

Image data

Application program
Computer

F-15-32

15-25
Chapter 16 USER SOFTWARE
 Contents

Contents

16.1 Printer Driver .............................................................................................................................................................16-1

16.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.1.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.1.2 PostScript (PS) Printer Driver.................................................................................................................................................. 16-2
16.1.2.1 PostScript (PS) Printer Driver .....................................................................................................................................................................16-2
16.1.3 PCL Printer Driver ................................................................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.1.3.1 PCL Printer Driver ......................................................................................................................................................................................16-6
16.2 Fax Driver ..................................................................................................................................................................16-9
16.2.1 Fax Driver ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-9
16.3 Scanner Driver .........................................................................................................................................................16-13
16.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-13
16.3.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................16-13
16.3.2 TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interest Name) Driver................................................................................................... 16-13
16.3.2.1 TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interest Name) Driver......................................................................................................................16-13
16.3.3 Photoshop Plug-In Module .................................................................................................................................................... 16-14
16.3.3.1 Photoshop Plug-In Module .......................................................................................................................................................................16-14
16.4 Utilities.....................................................................................................................................................................16-15
16.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-15
16.4.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................16-15
16.4.2 Fiery Downloader .................................................................................................................................................................. 16-15
16.4.2.1 Fiery Downloader......................................................................................................................................................................................16-15
16.4.3 Fiery Spooler.......................................................................................................................................................................... 16-17
16.4.3.1 Fiery Spooler .............................................................................................................................................................................................16-17
16.4.4 Fiery Print Calibrator ............................................................................................................................................................. 16-17
16.4.4.1 Fiery Print Calibrator ................................................................................................................................................................................16-17
16.4.5 Fiery WebTools ..................................................................................................................................................................... 16-17
16.4.5.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................16-17
16.4.5.2 Status .........................................................................................................................................................................................................16-18
16.4.5.3 WebSpooler...............................................................................................................................................................................................16-19
16.4.5.4 WebLink....................................................................................................................................................................................................16-20
16.4.5.5 WebDownloader .......................................................................................................................................................................................16-21
16.4.6 Net Spot ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-21
16.4.6.1 NetSpot......................................................................................................................................................................................................16-21
 Chapter 16

16.1 Printer Driver

16.1.1 Outline
16.1.1.1 Outline
0008-5441
A printer driver is a program that processes images prepared by an application program for printing on a printer, and it is used as part of an operating system.
A printer driver runs on an operating system to convert image data for printing it has received from an application program into commands expressed in
the page description language (PDL) used by the printer in question. In addition, it converts settings information selected on the Properties screen of the
printer into commands, and sends them to the printer board.

Application Operating system

program
PostScript printer driver
PostScript Parallel port
Image data data Print job To the parallel port
driver
generation

Settings
information Network To the network
driver
Printer
property

PCL printer driver

PCL
data Print job
generation

Settings
information
Printer
property

Image data

Print job
(print data in PDL)

Settings information
F-16-1

A printer driver must be one that supports the type of page description language used. In addition, it must be updated (as for additional functions) in keeping
with the updating of the page description language used. Further, since different operating systems use different protocols for exchange of image data, there
must be as many types of printer drivers as there are operating systems used.

OS-X OS-Y OS-Z

PDL-A
OS

Printer driver
PDL-B

PDL-C Page description

language

F-16-2

In the past, a specific printer driver was developed for each machine type. Recently, however, standardization has been promoted so the same printer driver
may be used in common for machines that use the same page description language.
In spite of the various efforts on standardization, however, not all functions can be used on a particular printer, requiring the identification of the functions
unique to the printer in question. A file which is a compilation of such information is called a "printer information file."
The printer information file for PostScript from Adobe is called a "PPD" (PostScript Printer Definition) file, while that for PCL (Printer Control Language)
from HP is called a "PDD" (Printer Device Description) file.

16-1
 Chapter 16

PostScript PCL

Core driver PostScript driver PCL driver

Printer PPD file PDD file

information file (model A) (model X)

F-16-3

The drivers that use these methods include PostScript drivers from Adobe and PCL drivers from Canon.
A printer information file contains information unique to each particular printer, as on the resident fonts, sizes of paper used, number of paper cassettes,
presence/absence of a double-sided printing function, and the like. These pieces of information are sometimes accessed by application programs as well
as by the printer driver.
When a printer driver is installed, the core driver and the selected printer information files will be installed to the operating system. When multiple printer
drivers are installed, a core driver and printer information files that correspond to the printer in question will be installed.

Printer driver body Operating system

PDL-X core driver PDL-X core driver

Installs the printer driver

for model A and model F
Printer information file Model A

Model A
Model F
Model B

Model C

Model D

Model E

Model F

Set-up file set

F-16-4

16.1.2 PostScript (PS) Printer Driver

16.1.2.1 PostScript (PS) Printer Driver
0008-5445
A PS printer driver is a printer driver designed for PostScript.
A PS printer driver consists of a PS printer driver common to each PS printer (called "core driver") and printer information files that describe the features
unique to specific printers (called "PPD" files).
The printer information file contains information on the resident fonts, number of paper cassettes, presence/absence of a double-sided printing function,
and size of printing areas; as necessary, application programs and printer drivers access the file for reference.

16-2
 Chapter 16

F-16-5

16-3
 Chapter 16

F-16-6

16-4
 Chapter 16

F-16-7

16-5
 Chapter 16

F-16-8

16.1.3 PCL Printer Driver

16.1.3.1 PCL Printer Driver
0008-5446
A PCL printer driver is a printer driver that supports a page description language developed by HP (PCL, or Printer Control Language).
As in the case of a PS printer driver, a PCL printer driver consists of a printer driver used in common by various machine models and printer information
files containing information unique to specific printers (called "PDD" files).
A PDD file indicates the resident fonts, number of paper cassettes, presence/absence of a double-side printing function, and size of printing areas; as
necessary, application programs and printer drivers access the file for reference.

16-6
 Chapter 16

F-16-9

F-16-10

16-7
 Chapter 16

F-16-11

F-16-12

16-8
 Chapter 16

16.2 Fax Driver

16.2.1 Fax Driver
0008-5448
A fax driver is used to directly send image data generated by a printer board, without generating a hard copy. Direct fax transmission requires that the
copier be equipped with both printer board and fax board.
As in normal printing, the fax driver sends images to the printer board by converting them into PDL commands. The destination is selected on the
Transmission Settings screen of the fax driver. The information as on the selected destination is sent to the printer board in the form of a command.
The fax driver possesses a fax telephone directory for selection of destinations; it also allows addition and deletion of destinations. Unlike the fax telephone
directory stored in the copier's memory, this directory is stored on a computer.
The fax driver also allows the addition of a cover called a "cover page" when sending images. The cover page will indicate the destination, source, and
memo, and all these pieces of information may be edited to suit individual needs. The image data of a cover page is generated by the fax driver itself.

Operation system
Application Fax driver
program
Converts image data to PDL Print job Parallel port
Image data To parallel port
commands for fax driver
Generates PDL commands for transmission
cover page
Generates control commands from
settings information

Fax Transmission Settings screen

Fax telephone
directory control function Network
driver To network

Fax telephone directory

Cover page edit function

F-16-13

Images for fax transmission are expressed in PDL commands so that they may be checked by printing them on paper before actual transmission.
A fax driver is designed to add fax devices as destinations of a printer driver and, therefore, is packaged with a printer board in the form of user software.
A fax driver may come as a driver exclusively for fax transmission or as part of a printer driver. When a dedicated fax driver is installed, an icon will be
registered independently of the icon representing the printer icon.

Application Operating system

program Fax driver
Print job Parallel port
Image data PDL data gernation (for fax driver To parallel port
communication)

Settings
information Network driver To network
Fax
properties

Image data
Print job
(print data in PDL)
Settings information
F-16-14

16-9
 Chapter 16

Application Operating system

program Printer driver
Print job Parallel port
Image data PDL data generation (for fax driver To parallel port
communication)

Settings Settings
information information Network driver To network
Printer Fax
properties properties

Image data
Print job
(print data in PDL)
Settings information
F-16-15

The following are sample screens designed for a fax driver.

F-16-16

16-10
 Chapter 16

F-16-17

F-16-18

16-11
 Chapter 16

F-16-19

16-12
 Chapter 16

16.3 Scanner Driver

16.3.1 Outline
16.3.1.1 Outline
0008-5522
To read an original from a copier equipped with a scanner controller, a program that controls the scanner controller and receives image data from the
scanner controller must be installed on the host computer. Such a program may be of a driver type, which is built into an operating system, or a plug-in
type, which is built into an application program.
16.3.2 TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interest Name) Driver
16.3.2.1 TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interest Name) Driver
0008-5530
An image is read by an image scanner to an application program by way of a scanner driver. TWAIN is a set of standards that prescribes how data should
be exchanged between scanner driver and application program.
Before standards were compiled, a dedicated driver was needed for each combination of scanner and application program; however, it is now possible to
combine scanners and application programs without heeding manufacturers and models.

Application program Scanner driver Scanner

Application Scanner driver for

application A/Scanner X Scanner X
program A

Application Scanner driver for

application B/Scanner X Scanner X
program B

Application Scanner driver for

application C/Scanner Y Scanner Y
program C

TWAIN-comapatible TWAIN standards

application program

Application program A'

TWAIN-compatible
Scanner
scanner driver

TWAIN driver
Scanner X
for scanner

Application program B'

TWAIN driver
Scanner Y
for scanner

Application program C'

F-16-20

A TWAIN driver converts such information as the read area specified by the user on the Settings screen, read mode, resolution, and gradation into control
commands, and sends them to the scanner. When the scanner returns image data after reading the original in response to these commands, the driver then
converts it into a form that complies with TWAIN standards.
A TWAIN driver communicates with a scanner using the driver of the interface connecting to the scanner. The interface may be SCSI, bi-Centronics, or
USB; the SCSI Interface Board-C1 and the SCSI Interface Board-D1 use SCSI interfaces.
The following figure shows the ScanGear screen shown by a TWAIN driver:

16-13
 Chapter 16

F-16-21

16.3.3 Photoshop Plug-In Module

16.3.3.1 Photoshop Plug-In Module
0008-5534
Photoshop is image editing software from Adobe, and is designed to correct or change images expressed in various types of image data or to convert them
into different formats. It is an application program widely used in the design and other fields.
A Photoshop plug-in module is an extra program developed to add functions to Photoshop.
A plug-in module is an extension of an application program so that it must be built to a location determined by the application program in question. A
printer driver and other drivers of peripheral devices are under the control of an operating system so that they are installed to the operating system being
used.

Application program

Photoshop

Photoshop plug-in

Fiery XJ Scan

Operating system

PostScript printer driver

F-16-22

The ColorPASS, PS-XJ, or the PS-ZX is capable of using a color laser copier as a color scanner. To that end, a Photoshop plug-in module comes as part
of user software.
To read an image from a color laser copier using Photoshop, the Photoshop plug-in module (e.g., Fiery XJ Scan) is first started up. When a read area, scan
mode (full color, gray scale, etc.), and resolution have been specified on the Settings screen, the appropriate instructions are sent to the controller through
the network. In response, the controller starts to read the image using the color laser copier, and sends the resulting image data to the computer through the
network. The plug-in module converts the arriving image data into a Photoshop format, and forwards it to Photoshop. The Photoshop plug-in module and
the controller are designed to communicate through a network and, for this reason, the plug-in module cannot be used if the connection is through a parallel
port.

16-14
 Chapter 16

16.4 Utilities
16.4.1 Outline
16.4.1.1 Outline
0008-5535
A printer controller comes with programs that provide functions which are useful when using the controller (with the exception of some models). These
programs are known as "utilities"; the controller and the computer must communicate with each other when using a utility, and they must be connected
over a network.
16.4.2 Fiery Downloader
16.4.2.1 Fiery Downloader
0008-5536
Fiery Downloader is capable of downloading and printing PostScript files, EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) files, or PDF (Portable Document Format) files
without the help of an application program. It also allows checking the fonts stored on the hard disk of the controller or adding and removing fonts. It can
also indicate the status of print jobs being executed by the controller.

F-16-23

16-15
 Chapter 16

F-16-24

F-16-25

16-16
 Chapter 16

16.4.3 Fiery Spooler

16.4.3.1 Fiery Spooler
0008-5537
Fiery Spooler is a utility designed to control print jobs sent to the controller, and it has the following major functions:
- Checking the status of a print job
- Changing the order of print jobs
- Moving print jobs between queues
- Copying print jobs between queues
- Removing print jobs
The controller stores log information on jobs that have been processed on the hard disk, capable of generating a file of the log information for reference.

F-16-26

16.4.4 Fiery Print Calibrator

16.4.4.1 Fiery Print Calibrator
0008-5538
Color copies and color prints generated by an electrostatic method are subject to various factors (e.g., ambient temperature/humidity, deterioration of the
photosensitive drum or starter). To make up for the effects of these factors, color laser copiers are equipped with auto correction mechanisms to ensure a
specific level of image quality (e.g., potential control, PASCAL).
The level of image quality, however, can fluctuate despite these considerations because of changes in the environment.
A color laser copier is designed to provide the best performance with reference to the combined characteristics of its scanner and printer units and, as such,
the use of its printer unit alone as a color printer may not provide ideal characteristics.
The same image data sent by a computer will be best if it is printed to the same level of quality at all times. When an image is sent from a computer through
a printer controller (e.g., ColorPASS/PS-XJ) to a color laser copier, its density is corrected so that the output will have the same density at all times, called
"calibration."
To enable correct calibration, the density characteristic of the color laser copier in question must be measured. To do so, the color controller sends test print
data designed for measurement, including multiple densities of various colors, to the color laser copier, and the density of the printed image is measured
either by means of a density meter or by using the scanner unit of the color laser copier.
Comparison between the density data sent by the color controller and the measurement of the density of the printed image points to the density
characteristics of the color laser copier. Using the difference of the measured density from the target density, a correction value is obtained for each specific
density.
The user software called a "calibrator" (e.g., Fiery XJ Print Calibrator that comes with the printer controller) is a utility designed to support calibration
work. A calibrator also provides a graph of density measurements and density characteristics. Moreover, the target density characteristics may be edited
to adjust the correction value, thereby adjusting the hues of the color prints.
16.4.5 Fiery WebTools
16.4.5.1 Outline
0008-5540
Some controllers come with a WWW server function, and the user may remotely control the controller in a TCP/IP network environment. The control tool
used is called a "WebTools," and may be used to find out the status of job execution and control of jobs.
To access WebTools, start up a browser (e.g., Netscape Navigator, Internet Explorer), and select the controller as the target of access. (Java must be turned
on.)

16-17
 Chapter 16

F-16-27

WebTools provides the following functions:

- Status
- WebSpooler
- WebLink
- WebDownloader
Spooler and Downloader are usually made available as utility programs, or at times as part of WebTools in the form of identical functions. In the case of
the latter, the following advantages may be expected:
- No specific utility program need to be installed (as long as a browser has been installed to support Netscape Navigator, Internet Explorer, or Java).
- The utility functions may be upgraded without the need for work on each computer (i.e., they are automatically upgraded when the system program of
the controller is upgraded).
16.4.5.2 Status
0008-5542
Use it to check the RIP status of the printer board and printing.The information is updated automatically.

16-18
 Chapter 16

Status Screen

F-16-28

16.4.5.3 WebSpooler
0008-5543
WebSpooler provides the following functions to enable management of print jobs sent to the printer board. In default settings, the information it indicates
is updated every 20 sec.
- Checking the status of print jobs.
- Changing the order of printing.
- Moving print jobs between queues.
- Printing jobs held in the hold queue.
- Printing jobs held in the printed queue.
- Canceling a job.

16-19
 Chapter 16

Main Screen

F-16-29

The Job Log screen provides the following functions for information used to manage print jobs:
- Checking management information.
- Printing management information.
- Generating files of management information for use by another program.
The information contained in the job log is limited to management, and it cannot be used to print a job (say, for a second time).
Job Log Screen

F-16-30

16.4.5.4 WebLink
0008-5545
If the network to which a printer board is connected is connected to the Internet, a jump may be made to an external home page selected in advance. In
default settings, Canon Home Page is selected, but a different destination may be selected.

16-20
 Chapter 16

Link Change Screen

F-16-31

16.4.5.5 WebDownloader
0008-5547
WebDownloader provides the following functions:
- It downloads PostScript files, EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) files, and PDF (Portable Document Format) files to the printer board for printing.
File Selection Screen

F-16-32

16.4.6 Net Spot

16.4.6.1 NetSpot
0008-5548
NetSpot is a printer management utility program which may be used on a TCP/IP, IPX, or AppleTalk network. A printer supporting NetSpot possesses a
database for management information called "MIB," or Management Information Base, and NetSpot installed to the administrator's PC accesses this
database to obtain control information and to make settings, using a protocol called "SNMP," or simple network management protocol.
Since a computer to which NetSpot has been installed can access all printers supporting NetSpot on the network, the administrator can keep all printers on
the network under his/her control.

16-21
 Chapter 16

F-16-33

16-22
Chapter 17 EXTERNAL INTERFACE
 Contents

Contents

17.1 Parallel Interface and Serial Interface ........................................................................................................................17-1

17.1.1 Parallel Interface and Serial Interface...................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.2 Parallel Interface ........................................................................................................................................................17-2
17.2.1 Centronics ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-2
17.2.1.1 Centronics ...................................................................................................................................................................................................17-2
17.2.2 IEEE1284 (bi-Centronics) ....................................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17.2.2.1 IEEE1284 (bi-Centronics)...........................................................................................................................................................................17-3
17.2.3 SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) ............................................................................................................................... 17-5
17.2.3.1 SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) ..................................................................................................................................................17-5
17.3 Serial Interface ...........................................................................................................................................................17-8
17.3.1 RS-232C................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-8
17.3.1.1 RS-232C......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-8
17.3.2 USB (Universal Serial Bus) ..................................................................................................................................................... 17-8
17.3.2.1 USB (Universal Serial Bus) ........................................................................................................................................................................17-8
17.3.3 IEEE 1394 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 17-10
17.3.3.1 IEEE1394 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................17-10
 Chapter 17

17.1 Parallel Interface and Serial Interface

17.1.1 Parallel Interface and Serial Interface
0008-5553
An interface may be parallel or serial.
A parallel interface is designed so that data of multiple bits may be sent or received at the same time.

D7 D7
1 1 1
1 1 1
F F
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
0 0 0
A A
1 1 1
0 0 0
D0 D0

Computer Peripheral device

Sending FA Data in Hexadecimal Notation Using a Parallel Interface

F-17-1

It requires multiple signal lines for transmission of data and, therefore, is not suited to long-distance transmission; however, it can send data at a high speed.
A Centronics interface used to connect printers and a SCSI interface used to connect hard disks or scanners are typical parallel interfaces.

Unlike a parallel interface, which sends and receives multiple bits at the same time, a serial interface sends or receives data bit-by-bit.

D7 D7
1 1
1 1
F F
1 1
1 1
1 11111010 1
0 0
A A
1 1
0 0
D0 D0

Computer Peripheral device

Sending FA Data in Hexadecimal Notation Using a Serial Interface

F-17-2

An RS-232C or USB (Universal Serial Bus) interface is a typical serial interface built into a computer.
A serial interface is usually used to connect a modem or mouse.

17-1
 Chapter 17

17.2 Parallel Interface

17.2.1 Centronics
17.2.1.1 Centronics
0008-5558
A Centronics interface is an 8-bit parallel interface developed by the American printer manufacturer Centronics Corporation for use in printers.
Most computer or printer manufacturers have adopted this type of interface, and it has come to be regarded as a de-facto industry standard. Nevertheless,
it is not an official standard, and comes in various types, at times causing faults because of timing mis-matches.
Some printer boards are designed to allow selection of a specific timing of handshake signals used to control data exchanges.
The interface possesses eight data lines, and a handshake is made using three signals (Strobe, Busy, Ack). Data and the Strobe signal are generated by a
computer, and the Busy and Ack signals are generated by a peripheral device.
The following diagram shows a typical timing at which data and control signals are transmitted:

Data Data

Strobe*

Busy

Ack*

Computer Printer
Handshake Timing Chart
F-17-3

The following diagram shows variations in the timing at which the handshake signals are transmitted:

Strobe*

Busy

Ack*

F-17-4

In addition to these signal lines, there are signal lines used to communicate the absence of paper in the printer or to reset the printer, among others.

The connector on the printer side is a 36-pin Amphenol connector, while the connector on the computer side is a 25-pin D-Sub connector. This is the most
typical combination (which resulted from IBM's decision to adopt a 25-pin D-Sub connector for its PCs); however, care is necessary because connectors
from different manufacturers may have different shapes.
Under IEEE1284, a 36-pin Amphenol connector is referred to as an "IEEE1284-B connector," while a 25-pin D-Sub connector is referred to as an
"IEEE1284-A connector."

17-2
 Chapter 17

Cable Computer
Connector on computer side
25-pin D-Sub connector
(IEEE1284-A connector)

Cable Printer
Connector on printer side
36-pin Amphenol connector
(IEEE1284-B connector)
F-17-5

17.2.2 IEEE1284 (bi-Centronics)

17.2.2.1 IEEE1284 (bi-Centronics)
0008-5562
An IEEE1284 interface is based on a Centronics interface with expanded functions; it is officially recognized by IEEE.
As opposed to the older versions of Centronics interface, in which data flows only from the computer to the printer, the IEEE1284 interface allows data to
flow also from the printer to the computer; this is why it is often called a "bi-" Centronics interface from the word "bi-directional."
IEEE1284 provides for the following five operating modes:
- Compatible mode
- Nibble mode
- Byte mode
- ECP (Extended Capabilities Port) mode
- EPP (Enhanced Parallel Port) mode
In compatibility mode, the operation will be compatible with that of the older versions, and data is sent from the computer to the printer in units of bytes.

Data line D0-D7

Handshake
signal line

Computer Printer
F-17-6

In nibble mode, four signal lines (other than the data lines) are used, and one byte of data is divided into two 4-bit units (nibbles), and is transmitted in two
sessions from the printer to the computer.

17-3
 Chapter 17

Data line Not used

Status signal line D0-D3 D4-D7

(4 lines)

Handshake
signal line
Computer Printer
F-17-7

In byte mode, the eight lines are used, and data is sent from the printer to the computer in units of bytes.

Data line D0-D7

Handshake
signal line

Computer Printer
F-17-8

Combination of compatible mode with nibble or byte mode will enable bi-directional communication between computer and printer.
ECP mode allows bi-directional communication at a high speed. The operation will also be at a high speed, resulting in a reduction in the time required
for data transmission.
EPP mode is also designed for high-speed bi-directoinal transmission, but it has additional functions.

Data line D0-D7

Handshake
signal line

Computer Printer
F-17-9

Few products support all these modes, and most generally support compatible mode, nibble mode, and ECP mode.
A printer complying with IEEE1284 is capable of obtaining such information as on manufacturer and model name from the printer, enabling automatic
installation of the appropriate printer driver using Plug&Play of Windows 95/98.

Decisions have also been made regarding connectors: the 25-pin connector on the computer side has been approved as an IEEE1284-A connector, while
the 36-pin connector on the printer side has been approved as an IEEE1284-B connector. In addition, a small-size 36-pin connector has been newly
introduced as an IEEE1284-C connector.

17-4
 Chapter 17

Cable side Device side

IEEE 1284-C connector

F-17-10

The cable used under IEEE1284 is basically the same as the Centronics cable. IEEE1284, however, makes use of the signal lines not used by a Centronics
cable; for this reason, a simplified Centronics cable, which does away with these signal lines cannot support normal functions.
IEEE1284 sets forth specifics on connecting cables; e.g., wiring between connectors, construction of cables, and electrical characteristics. Cables satisfying
these specifics are allowed to bear a notation to this effect: "IEEE Std 1284-1994 compliant."
When connecting devices under IEEE1284, it is important to make sure that the cable has the "IEEE Std 184-1994 compliant" notation and to use the
shortest possible one to prevent malfunction.
17.2.3 SCSI (Small Computer System Interface)
17.2.3.1 SCSI (Small Computer System Interface)
0008-5573
A SCSI interface is based on an interface developed for a small-size hard disk with the aim of increasing fields of application.
The first SCSI standard (SCSI-1) was established by ANSI in 1986. The standard was intended for the use of a 50-pin cable for simultaneous transmission
of 8-bit data, connecting as many as eight devices.
Its succeeding standard was officially approved as SCSI-2 by ANSI in 1994, equipped with a mode called "Fast," in which 8-bit data may be transmitted
as fast as 10 MBps with shorter intervals of response time.
SCSI has continued to develop, each with more functions and a higher speed, resulting in diverse standards. Some of these standards have been approved,
while some are still being studied; and all these standards are collectively referred to as "SCSI-3."
In SCSI-3, data may be transmitted at 20 MBps (Ultra mode), at 40 MBps (Ultra2 mode), or at 80 MBps (Ultra3 mode).
The use of a 68-pin connector, on the other hand, has increased the data width to 16 bits, further increasing the speed of transmission (Wide method).
At present, the various SCSI variations may be characterized as follows:

T-17-1

Maximum data Data bus width Number of devices Maximum cable

transmission speed (M connected (max.) length
byte/sec)
SCSI 5MBps 8 bits 8 units 6m
Fast SCSI 10MBps 8 bits 8 units 3m
Fast Wide SCSI 20MBps 16 bits 16 units 3m
Ultra SCSI 20MBps 8 bits 8 units 1.5m
Ultra Wide SCSI 40MBps 16 bits 16 units 1.5m
Ultra2 SCSI 40MBps 8 bits 8 units 12m
Ultra2 Wide SCSI 80MBps 16 bits 16 units 12m
Ultra3 SCSI 80MBps 8 bits 8 units 12m
Ultra3 Wide SCSI 160MBps 16 bits 16 units 12m
(Ultra160/m)

The presence of a variety of standards points to the importance of finding out which operating modes are supported before connecting a device by referring
to the documentation that comes with the device.

Any SCSI device must be assigned an ID number for identification. Each ID number indicates the level of priority given to a specific device, with a device
bearing a higher number given a higher level of priority. Normally, the SCSI board of a computer is given the number 7, while the internal hard disk is
given the number 0.
If the setting is wrong or the same number is assigned to multiple devices, the devices will not operate normally. The way an ID number is assigned differs
from device to device; often, numbers are assigned using switches or control panels. Be sure to check with the appropriate documentation.
Recently, we find devices equipped with a mechanism that enables automatic assignment of ID numbers (SCAM, or SCSI Configuration Automatically).
The connector on a SCSI device may be any of various types. It may have either 50 or 68 pins, and the intervals between pins may be 2.54 mm (full pitch)
or 1.27 mm (half pitch). The connector configuration may be one called "Amphenol" or "D-Sub25."
A Macintosh machine may have D-sub 25-pin connectors or 30-pin HDI connectors.

17-5
 Chapter 17

Cable side Computer side

D-Sub 25-pin connector

Cable side Computer side

HDI 30-pin connector
F-17-11

A SCSI cable may be a shielded or non-shielded type; be sure to use a shielded type for high-speed data transmission.
The total length of cable must be determined according to expected operating modes.
The total length of cable must not be exceedd, regardless of how many devices are connected. A long cable tends to adversely affect signals, leading to
malfunction. It is important to keep the length of cable to a minimum.
If various devices are to be connected in SCSI, be sure to check the connectors and to prepare appropriate cables in advance.
Different signals move back and forth on a SCSI cable, sometimes causing the signals to be reflected at the end of the cable and, ultimately, leading to
confusion and malfunction of the connected devices. A connector called a "terminator" is attached to the very end of a SCSI connection to prevent reflection
of signals and, thus, malfunction of the devices.

Terminator
F-17-12

Some devices come with a built-in terminator: they may be equipped with a switch to turn on and off the terminator function or have the switch used to
assign SCSI ID numbers to serve the on/off function.
The act of connecting to a terminator or turning on the terminator function is called "termination."
SCSI devices are connected as follows:
1. Connect the SCSI cable to the SCSI connector of the SCSI board of the computer.
2. Connect the other end of the SCSI cable to one of the two SCSI connectors found on a SCSI device. Then, connect another SCSI cable to the remaining

17-6
 Chapter 17

connector of the SCSI device. The order of SCSI devices need not be in keeping with the order of ID numbers.
3. For the last SCSI device, connect the SCSI cable to one of its connectors. If the device has a built-in terminator, turn it on; otherwise, attach a terminator
to the connector.

17-7
 Chapter 17

17.3 Serial Interface

17.3.1 RS-232C
17.3.1.1 RS-232C
0008-5581
Initially, it is a standard established by EIA for connection of data terminals and modems. It is the most commonly used serial interface for PCs.
As a rule, 25-pin D-Sub connectors must be used, but 9-pin connectors are sometimes used (with the omission of signal lines).

25-pin D-Sub connector 9-pin D-Sub connector

RS-232C connectors
F-17-13

Under RS-232C, data is transmitted using a start-stop synchronous method, in which synchronization occurs for each character sent. For synchronization,
a start bit '0' is added to the head of the character data to be transmitted, and a stop bit '1' is added to the tail of it. To detect a data transfer error, a parity
bit may also be added.
To transmit data using a start-stop synchronous method, the sending device and the receiving device must agree in advance for the following: data
transmission speed, length of a single character (7 or 8 bits), presence/absence of a parity bit (if present, even or odd), and length of the stop bit.
When no exchange is taking place, the data line is '1'. When an exchange starts, the start bit '0' is sent first, causing a change in the signal level. Based on
the change in the level, the receiving device reads the signal with reference to the middle of each bit. The stop bit '1' at the end of data for a single character
ensures the detection of the next start bit when data arrives continuously.

1 frame

"1" "0" D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 "0"

/"1" "1"

Data

Start bit Parity bit

Stop bit

If data length is 8 bits, parity is used, and stop bit length is 1 bit.
F-17-14

An RS-232C cable may be one of two types: cross cable and straight cable, depending on how both ends are connected. A cross cable is used when
connecting computers, while a straight cable is used to connect a computer and a modem. Care must be taken, as the wrong choice of a cable will prevent
communication.
17.3.2 USB (Universal Serial Bus)
17.3.2.1 USB (Universal Serial Bus)
0008-5587
At present, various types of interfaces are used to connect computers and peripheral devices. USB is an interface developed to standardize these interfaces
so that connection will be easy.
Like 10Base-T, USB allows branching by means of hubs. Hubs may be laid in as many as five levels, and as many as 127 devices may be connected to a
single host (computer).
All data transfer is between computer and peripheral device, and devices cannot directly exchange data with one another. The configuration centers on a
computer with peripheral devices connected on branches by means of hubs. The computer is located "upstream," while peripheral devices are found
"downstream" of the configuration.

17-8
 Chapter 17

Computer
Router/hub

Hub 1

Hub 2 Peripheral Peripheral

device device

Hub 3 Peripheral Peripheral

device device

Peripheral Peripheral Peripheral

device device device
F-17-15

In USB, "hot plugging," in which cables are connected without turning off the computers and the peripheral devices, is possible; further, it allows
"Plug&Play," in which connection of a new device automatically enables its use. All these make USB far easier to adopt than the past interfaces.
USB provides the following four modes of transmission, used according to specific needs:
Isochronous transmission: Used when specific data amounts must be sent continuously at all times as in the case of animation or voice data.
Interrupt transmission: Used when relatively small amounts of data must be sent at intervals, as from a keyboard or a mouse.
Bulk transmission: Used when a large amount of data must be sent at once, as for a print job.
Control transmission: Used when information needed for control must be sent between connected devices.
In USB, data is transmitted based on time division. A unit of time assigned in each of the above transmission modes is called a "frame," adjusted in units
of 1 msec, and is given to peripheral devices in question. If multiple requests for data transmission occur at the same time, data will be sent in combinations
of the appropriate transmission modes, causing the operation to appear as if multiple devices are sending data all at the same time.

Speaker Keyboard Printer

USB hub
Frame Frame Frame Frame

Computer

SOF
Speaker data Printer data
(isochornous transmission) (bulk transmission)
Keyboard data
SOF: Start Of Frame. (interrupt transmission)
F-17-16

Speaker data is sent using isochronous transmission so that the sound will not be interrupted; this is why the time division for speaker data occurs first in
each frame.
When a key on a keyboard is pressed, the data is sent in interrupt transmission. Interrupt transmission does not occur in the absence of a press, and its time
division is assigned instead to bulk transmission.
Printer data is sent in bulk transmission, whose time division within a single frame comes from one otherwise used for isochronous or interrupt
transmission.
The standard speed of data transmission is 12 Mbps (full speed mode). A keyboard or mouse does not require transmission of a large amount of data so
that a low speed mode is also made available (1.5 Mbps); the latter is good for low-cost peripheral devices, and is limited to interrupt and control modes.

17-9
 Chapter 17

A cable consists of a pair of signal lines and a pair of power supply lines. For a full-speed mode cable, whose data transmission speed is 12 Mbps, the
signal lines must be twisted-pair lines and must be shielded against noise; it must not be longer than 5 m. For a low-speed mode cable, whose data
transmission speed is 1.5 Mbps, on the other hand, the signal lines are not twisted-pair lines, and it need not be shielded; it must not be longer than 3 m.
To prevent wrong connection, two different connectors are used: Series A connectors are for upstream connections, while Series B connectors are for
downstream connections. One end of a USB cable must always be a Series A connector and its other end, a Series B connector.

Series A connector

A B

Printer
A

Computer USB hub B Series B connector

A A

B B

Keyboard Mouse
F-17-17

Device side Cable side Device side Cable side

Series A connector Series B connector

(upstream) (downstream)
F-17-18

USB was officially adopted for Windows starting with Windows 98 and for Macintosh starting with i-Mac.
17.3.3 IEEE 1394
17.3.3.1 IEEE1394
0008-5593
It is capable of high-speed data transmission (100 Mbps or more) and, therefore, is suited to transmission of large amounts of data (e.g., image data).
At present, three data transmission speeds are established: 100, 200, and 400 Mbps. Transmission at even higher speeds is being considered.
Transfer mode may be one of two: isochronous and asynchronous. In isochronous transfer, data is sent continuously, and is used for transmission of video
or animation data. Asynchronous mode, on the other hand, is used for the transmission of image data (e.g., read by an image scanner).
It supports "hot plug-in," in which cables may be connected or disconnected without turning off the devices.
It also supports "Plug&Play" so that connection of a cable will automatically enable the use of the device in question.
In addition to a daisy chain, used for SCSI connection, it also allows branching. In the case of a daisy chain connection, as many as 16 devices may be
connected; in a tree connection, on the other hand, a total of 63 devices may be connected. The distance between devices is 4.5 m maximum.

17-10
 Chapter 17

Workstation PC HDD

CD-ROM Camera Printer Scanner

F-17-19

A USB configuration centers on a computer; for an IEEE1394 configuration, on the other hand, the center of data transmission need not be a specific point
of the configuration. As in the case of an Ethernet network, data may be exchanged between connected devices.
IEEE1394 provides for two types of cable. A standard cable may consist of two pairs of signal lines and one pair of power supply lines (8 to 40 VDC; 1.5
A max.); the signal lines are twisted-pair lines. The other type of cable is called a "DV cable," and is based on a standard cable with the omission of power
supply lines.

T-17-2

Cable Diameter Signal line Power Number of Maximum Data transmission

supply line pins length speed
Standard cable 5.5 mm 2 pairs 1 pair 6 4.5 m 400 MBps
DV cable 4.0 mm 2 pairs None 4 4.0 m 100 MBps

Cable side Device side

Standard connector

Cable side Device side

DV connector
F-17-20

The operating systems that support IEEE1394 include Windows 98.

It is high-performance and is characterized by ease of use; its uses, for this reason, are not limited to interfacing computers but range from household
products (e.g., digital video cameras) to multimedia devices of the future.

17-11
Chapter 18 NETWORKS
 Contents

Contents

18.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-1
18.2 Ethernet ......................................................................................................................................................................18-6
18.2.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-6
18.2.1.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................................18-6
18.2.2 Method of Access .................................................................................................................................................................... 18-6
18.2.2.1 Method of Access........................................................................................................................................................................................18-6
18.2.3 10Base-T/100Base-TX ............................................................................................................................................................ 18-6
18.2.3.1 10Base-T/100Base-TX................................................................................................................................................................................18-6
18.2.4 MAC (Media Access Control) Address ................................................................................................................................... 18-7
18.2.4.1 MAC (Media Access Control) Address ......................................................................................................................................................18-7
18.3 Construction of a LAN...............................................................................................................................................18-8
18.3.1 Network Interface .................................................................................................................................................................... 18-8
18.3.1.1 Network Interface........................................................................................................................................................................................18-8
18.3.2 Hub........................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-9
18.3.2.1 Hub ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................18-9
18.3.3 Router..................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-10
18.3.3.1 Router ........................................................................................................................................................................................................18-10
18.3.4 Cable ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-11
18.3.4.1 Cable .........................................................................................................................................................................................................18-11
18.4 TCP/IP......................................................................................................................................................................18-13
18.4.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-13
18.4.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................18-13
18.4.2 IP Address .............................................................................................................................................................................. 18-13
18.4.2.1 IP Address .................................................................................................................................................................................................18-13
18.4.3 Data Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................. 18-15
18.4.3.1 Data Transmission.....................................................................................................................................................................................18-15
18.4.4 Data Transmission Between ................................................................................................................................................. 18-16
18.4.4.1 Data Transmission Between Networks .....................................................................................................................................................18-16
18.4.5 Setting an IP Address............................................................................................................................................................. 18-17
18.4.5.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................18-17
18.4.5.2 RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol).........................................................................................................................................18-18
18.4.5.3 BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) ....................................................................................................................................................................18-18
18.4.5.4 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) .......................................................................................................................................18-18
18.4.6 Name Resolution.................................................................................................................................................................... 18-18
18.4.6.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................18-18
18.4.6.2 DNS (Domain Name System or Domain Name Service) .........................................................................................................................18-18
18.4.6.3 WINS (Widows Internet Name Service)...................................................................................................................................................18-19
18.4.7 Print Service........................................................................................................................................................................... 18-20
18.4.7.1 LPD ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................18-20
18.4.7.2 SMB over TCP/IP .....................................................................................................................................................................................18-21
18.4.8 Control Service ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-22
18.4.8.1 ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) .............................................................................................................................................18-22
18.4.8.2 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) .....................................................................................................................................18-23
18.4.9 Mail Service ........................................................................................................................................................................... 18-23
18.4.9.1 SMTP/POP3 (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol/Post Office Protocol 3) ....................................................................................................18-23
18.4.10 File Transfer Service............................................................................................................................................................ 18-24
18.4.10.1 FTP (File Transfer Protocol) ...................................................................................................................................................................18-24
18.4.10.2 TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol).....................................................................................................................................................18-24
18.4.11 Web Service ......................................................................................................................................................................... 18-24
18.4.11.1 HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol)....................................................................................................................................................18-24
18.5 AppleTalk.................................................................................................................................................................18-26
 Contents

18.5.1 AppleTalk .............................................................................................................................................................................. 18-26

18.6 IPX/SPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange/Internetwork Packet Exchange) ........................................................... 18-27
18.6.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-27
18.6.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-27
18.6.2 Processing a Print Job ............................................................................................................................................................ 18-27
18.6.2.1 Processing a Print Job ............................................................................................................................................................................... 18-27
18.7 Reference................................................................................................................................................................. 18-28
18.7.1 OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) Reference Model........................................................................................................ 18-28
18.7.1.1 OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) Reference Model........................................................................................................................... 18-28
 Chapter 18

18.1 Outline
18.1.1 Outline
0008-5733
At present, a network is more often than not an Ethernet 10Base-T network or, its high-speed version, a 100Base network (LAN, or Local Area Network
running on TCP/IP).
A computer network is a group of computers connected so that data may be exchanged among them; it is often called simply a "network," and has the
following functions:
- Sharing of Resources
A computer may use a printer connected to another computer to print a file. Or, it may access another computer for files stored on the hard disk of that
computer.

Prints on a network printer Accesses a file on a file server

Network

Printer server File server

Disk
Printer
F-18-1

- Exchanging Messages
An electronic mail function may be used to communicate with a specific user on the network. Or, the electronic conference function may be used to
exchange messages on a real-time basis.

Network

Meeting
scheduled for
9:00 am in
room A.

Messages exchanged among users

F-18-2

- Offering Information
A user may access information offered by individuals or organizations on a global scale. Or, the same user may offer information for access by others.

18-1
 Chapter 18

Introduction of products or companies

Network

Searches for, downloads software Provides/sells software

F-18-3

A network comes in various types, classified in many different ways.

According to the range covered, it may be a LAN, Internet, or intranet.
A LAN is a network in which computers located on the same floor of a building or in neighboring buildings are connected.The Internet consists of computer
networks of different organizations on a worldwide scale, while an intranet is a network built as an internal information system connecting between distant
locations of a single organization, taking advantage of hardware and software technologies developed for the Internet.

Hub PC PC PC

Hub Printer Printer server

Hub PC PC

LAN
F-18-4

18-2
 Chapter 18

Internet
F-18-5

LAN

LAN

LAN

LAN

LAN

Intranet
F-18-6

The electric signals used on a network are handled as prescribed by Ethernet, usually used for PCs and workstations, or by TokenRing, commonly found
for mainframe computers.

18-3
 Chapter 18

Ethernet TokenRing
F-18-7

A network may also be classified according to how its cables are routed (topology): categories include bus type, star type, and ring type.
Ethernet 10Base-2 and 10Base-5 networks belong to the bus type, while 10Base-T and 100Base-TX networks belong to the star type. Ring-type
connections are used in TokenRing configurations.

Bus type Star type Ring type

10Base 2/5 10Base-T/100Base-TX TokenRing
F-18-8

The way signals are exchanged on a network is regulated by a set of rules called a "protocol," which also comes in various types. For an Ethernet network,
typical protocols include TCP/IP, used on the Internet; AppleTalk, used by Macintosh machines; and IPX/SPX, used under NetWare from Novell.
A network may be grouped according to how processing is performed: they may be either a peer-to-peer type or a client-server type.
A network that allows its computers to take advantage of the functions existing on the network as a whole (on individual computers) is said to be a peer-
to-peer type network; all computers connected to this type of network are of an equal standing.
On the other hand, some computers on a network may be dedicated to specific services, while some others are used to take advantage of the services. A
computer providing services is called a "server," and one using the services is called a "client," thus the name "client-server type." A server may be a printer
server or a mail server, the latter of which functions as a "post office" for electronic mail.

18-4
 Chapter 18

User User User

Disk Disk Printer

Shared

Peer-to-Peer Type
F-18-9

Server
User User User

Client

Mail server Printer server

Shared by clients
Client-Server Type
F-18-10

18-5
 Chapter 18

18.2 Ethernet
18.2.1 Outline
18.2.1.1 Outline
0008-5745
Ethernet is a type of network specifications whose development was started by Xerox. Later, DEC and Intel joined to decide on various specifications.
IEEE then took part to promote standardization, and the work resulted in IEEE802.3. The advances in technology in the field of networking take place
extremely fast, and Ethernet still continues to be improved and expanded.
18.2.2 Method of Access
18.2.2.1 Method of Access
0008-5748
The method of access used by Ethernet is called CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect), in which a check is made to find out if
anyone is using the network before transmission is begun based on the presence/absence of a carrier.
If the network is not used, transmission is started. The cabling is not intended to connect any specific devices, but multiple devices are collectively
connected, hence the term "multiple access" (MA). Data sent through the network is in units of a specific size, called "packets."
If the network is being used, a check will be made once again after a while. The length of the wait is made different from device to device. Once the network
becomes free and transmission is started, the transmitting device keeps monitoring the signals it is sending.
If another device starts to send signals at the same time, the signals on the network will not represent the data sent. In response to the condition, i.e., collision
of packets, a signal (JAM) will be introduced to the network to indicate the presence of a collision (called "CD," or collision detection).
A signal takes a specific time to move through a network cable or through a hub. On a large network, therefore, it takes longer for devices to find out
whether a device has started to send signals, consequently making a collision more likely and, moreover, detection of a collision difficult.
To prevent these problems, specifications have been established on minimum packet size, cable length, and number of repeater or hub connections.

T-18-1

Cable length Cable length (1 Repeater/hub Packet size

cable) (most distant) connection
stages
10Base-T 100 m max. 500 m 4 stages max. 64 bytes min.
100Base-TX 100 m max. 205 m 4 stages max. 64 bytes min.

18.2.3 10Base-T/100Base-TX
18.2.3.1 10Base-T/100Base-TX
0008-5755
10Base is a set of specifications in which the speed of data transmission is 10 Mbps. It started as 10Base5 and 10Base2, which use coaxial cables for
connection; and, later, 10Base-T was developed to enable easy cabling and connection/disconnection of devices.
In the place of a coaxial cable, 10Base-T uses a twisted-pair cable, which is similar to a telephone line. (The letter "T" stands for "twisted cable.") A twisted-
pair cable does not allow branching, and devices are connected to a network by means of relays equipped with multiple connectors.
This is why 10Base-T cabling is in a star configuration, in which cables radiate to devices from a relay, called a "hub," as of a wheel.
A 10Base-T network is easy to use, and has become the most widely used type of network, thanks partly to the reduction in the price of devices.

Hub

F-18-11

As networking has become more and more common, the number of devices connected to a network has increased, equally increasing the amount of

18-6
 Chapter 18

communication done over the network. The use of image data (e.g., of multimedia), further, has led to increases in large-size data units exchanged over
networks.
All these made the transmission speed of 10 Mbps inadequate, and brought about the development of 100-Mbps standards; the new standards come in
various types, and the most widely used is 100Base-TX, which may be described as a high-speed version of 10Base-T. It is easy to switch from 10Base-
T to 100Base-TX, and some network devices support both sets of standards. The recent reduction in the price of devices is accelerating its use.
18.2.4 MAC (Media Access Control) Address
18.2.4.1 MAC (Media Access Control) Address
0008-5759
A MAC address is a means of identifying individual interfaces used to connect a device to an Ethernet network. A MAC address is 6 bytes long, and the
first three bytes indicate a vendor code, while the last three byes indicate a node number. A vendor code is used to identify the vendor supplying the network
interface, and a node number is the specific number assigned by the vendor to each interface.
Each byte is used to express a MAC address in hexadecimal notation, and a colon is used between bytes.

Vendor code (manufacturer code) Node number (serial)

0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0101 0000 0000 0001 0010 1010 1111

00:00:85:00:12:AF
Canon's vendor code 00:00:85
F-18-12

Like the serial number of a copier, a node number is unique to each specific device (interface). There cannot be multiple interfaces with the same MAC
address and, therefore, it is used as the address to identify the source or the destination of a data packet sent over a network.
A TCP/IP network, in which IP addresses are used to identify devices on the network, also uses a MAC address to deliver communication data.
A network interface compares its own MAC address against the MAC address of a packet, and picks the packet only if both addresses match. (In the case
of a broadcast, in which a packet is sent to all devices connected to the network, all bits of the MAC address of the packet in question are '1' so that the
packed is picked by all devices.)
Unlike IP addresses, MAC addresses cannot be changed; although some devices allow a change, such can lead to confusion in network communication. It
is important not to change any MAC address set at the factory to avoid problems.
A change in the network devices or network interfaces will affect MAC addresses, making it important to inform the system administrator of the user of
the new MAC addresses.

18-7
 Chapter 18

18.3 Construction of a LAN

18.3.1 Network Interface
18.3.1.1 Network Interface
0008-5763
The physical interface of a computer to a network is called a NIC (Network Interface Card). A NIC may be a board type, designed for installation to the
expansion slot of the computer, or a card type, designed for insertion to the card slot of the computer (mostly a notebook PC).
Some card type interfaces may also serve as a modem. Today, it may be found integrated with the motherboard of a computer or built into a notebook PC.

Network board Built onto motherboard

Network card Network-and-modem-in-one card

F-18-13

A network interface for a printer controller may also be a board type or a built-in type (to the printer board). There are also an adapter type, used for the
connection of a printer not originally designed for use on a network.

Network board

Built onto printer board

External adapter type

F-18-14

An interface board may come equipped with multiple types of connectors: 10Base2 BNC connectors and 10Base-T RJ-45 connectors. These connectors
are internally connected, and are treated as the same port; in other words, only one of the two may be used for connection of a cable at a time.

18-8
 Chapter 18

Common MAC address

Treated as one port

F-18-15

18.3.2 Hub
18.3.2.1 Hub
0008-5764
A hub is classified as a shared hub or a switching hub, depending on how it is internally connected. A shared hub is also called a "repeater hub," and all
its ports are connected to a single cable inside it. This means only one port may be used at a time; in the case of the following configuration, for instance,
if a packet of a print job is sent from PC 1 to the printer, the same packet reaches all PCs (PC2 through PC5), preventing these PCs from sending their own
packets until the network is freed.

Shared hub

Packet to
printer

PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PRN

Not allowed to communicate while PC1 sends a packet to PRN.

F-18-16

A switching hub is capable of learning the MAC address of the device connected to each port. Unlike a shared hub, further, it reads the MAC address of a
packet and connects to the port needed for the transfer of that packet, thereby controlling the packets for all devices connected to the ports. This means any
port may communicate with another port while one of the ports is sending or receiving a packet, consequently helping to increase the efficiency of network
communication.

18-9
 Chapter 18

Switching hub

Packet to Packet to
printer PC3

PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PRN

PC4 allowed to send a packet to PC3 while PC1 is sending a packet to PRN.
F-18-17

18.3.3 Router
18.3.3.1 Router
0008-5767
A router is a means used to connect networks. A router reads the address of the destination to which a packet is sent; if the packet is for the internal network,
it will not send it to an external network. The opposite will be true if the packet is addressed to an external network.
In reference to the IP address of a network device, the IP address of a router is referred to as "default gateway address."

Network A

Packet within network A

Packet from network B

to network A

Router

Packet from network A

to network B
Packet within network B

Network B
F-18-18

18-10
 Chapter 18

18.3.4 Cable
18.3.4.1 Cable
0008-5769
10Base-T and 100Base-TX use twisted-pair cables. On both ends of a cable are a modular plug called "RJ-45," which looks like a telephone line plug. A
twisted-pair cable is classified into several categories (e.g., category 3, category 5). 10Base-T may use either a category 3 or category 5 cable, but 100Base-
TX requires the use of a category 5 cable.
A twisted-pair cable, further, is either unshielded (UTP, or Unshielded Twisted-Pair) or shielded (STP, or Shielded Twisted-Pair). In a normal office, a
UTP cable will do; nevertheless, a STP cable provides greater protection against noise, and is a better choice where there is a concentration of machines.
A twisted-pair cable is connected using either a straight or cross connection. In a straight connection, both connectors of a cable are connected to pins of
the same number; it is often used to connect a hub and a network device. An RJ-45 connector is an 8-pin connector, and pins 4, 5, 7, and 8 are not used.

RJ-45 RJ-45
connector connector
TX + 1 1 RX +
Transmit Receive
TX - 2 2 RX -
RX + 3 3 TX +
4 4
Receive Transmit
5 5
RX - 6 6 TX -
7 7
8 8

Computer Hub

Straight connection
F-18-19

In a cross connection, a switch-over occurs between the receiving side and the sending side of connector signals; it is usually used to connect between ports
of hubs or to connect a computer and a network device directly without the use of a hub.

RJ-45 RJ-45
connector connector
TX + 1 1 TX +
Transmit Transmit
TX - 2 2 TX -
RX + 3 3 RX +
4 4
Receive Receive
5 5
RX - 6 6 RX -
7 7
8 8

Computer Network device

Cross Connection
F-18-20

If a hub and a network device are connected using a cross cable, sending sides and receiving sides will be connected, preventing communication. It is
important to exercise care whenever making a connection.

18-11
 Chapter 18

RJ-45 RJ-45
connector connector
TX + 1 1 RX +
Transmit Receive
TX - 2 2 RX -
RX + 3 3 TX +
4 4
Receive Transmit
5 5
RX - 6 6 TX -
7 7
8 8

Computer Hub

Wrong Use of a Cross Cable

F-18-21

18-12
 Chapter 18

18.4 TCP/IP
18.4.1 Outline
18.4.1.1 Outline
0008-5772
TCP/IP has been developed as a standard UNIX protocol. Later, various improvements and extension of functions have been made, and it has been adopted
for both Windows and Macintosh machines (Mac TCP). It is also used by the Internet, and enjoys wide popularity.
TCP stands for "Transmission Control Protocol," while IP stands for "Internet Protocol." These two abbreviations, however, do not merely refer to these
two protocols, but are used generically to refer to more than one hundred protocols: e.g., SMTP for electronic mail, FTP for file transfer, HTTP used in
home pages of the Internet. TCP/IP, nevertheless, serves as the core of all these protocols.
The term "TCP/IP-compatible," however, does not mean support of all protocols, and is subject to functional limitations. For instance, a Windows 95
machine may be used as a client on a network that uses TCP/IP, but it cannot function as an FTP server, which is an Internet file server, as it is not equipped
with FTP for file transfer.
18.4.2 IP Address
18.4.2.1 IP Address
0008-5774
TCP/IP uses a protocol called "IP" for data transfer on a network. This protocol identifies each device on the network (e.g., computer, printer) in reference
to a number called an "IP address," requiring an IP address unique to each device. (The presence of multiple devices bearing the same IP address will cause
a serious problem in the network.)
An IP address is as long as 32 bits, divided into bytes, each expressed in decimal notation; a period is used between bytes.

Bit 31 Bit 0
10101100 00010000 00001010 00000001
Bit indication

Decimal notation 172.16.10.1

F-18-22

An IP address consists of two segments; the head segment is the network ID, serving as the ID number of the network in question, while the tail segment
is the host ID, serving as the ID number of the device in question.
A network ID and a host ID are always 32 bits long in total; the size of each, however, depends on the scale of the network.
An IP address is classified as shown below according to the scale of the network; each class may be identified with reference to the head segment (bytes)
of the IP address in question:

T-18-2

Class Head byte Network ID Host ID Number of Number of hosts

networks that may that may be used
be used on each network
A 1-126 1 byte 3 bytes 126 16,777,214
127 Reserved as a loop-back (addressed itself)
B 128-191 2 bytes 2 bytes 16,384 65,534
C 192-223 3 bytes 1 byte 2,097,151 254
D 224-239 For multi cast
E 240-254 Reserved on a trial basis

18-13
 Chapter 18

Bit 31 Bit 0
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte
ClassA 1-126

ClassB 128-191

ClassC 192-233

Network ID

Host ID
F-18-23

A host ID expressed by 'Os' only points to the host itself and if by '1s' only, all hosts on the network (as used for a broadcast), thus not serving as the IP
address of a device.
A network ID and a host ID are divided in units of bytes; class B, for instance, cover 65,534 hosts. Further classification, however, has proved to be
necessary, as by dividing a network into sub networks of individual groups; to this end, what is called a "sub network mask" has come to be used, in which
the host ID segment of an IP address is used to represent a sub network as well as the host ID in units of bits.
As in the case of an IP address, a sub net mask is 32 bits long; a sub network mask consists of a network ID expressed by '1' and a host ID expressed by
'0'. The network ID, however, must be expressed in a consecutive series of '1s' starting with the first bit, and must not include '0'.

Bit 31 Network ID Host ID Bit 0

IP address
(class B) 10101100 00010000
172.16.12.1

Bit 31 Bit 0
Subnet mask
255.255.255.0 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000

Bit 31 Bit 0

10101100 00010000

Network ID Host ID

Sub net
Subnet mask
1: network ID area
0: host ID area

Division of IP Address by Subnet Mask

F-18-24

The IP address of a router, bridge, or gateway, which serves as the door to an external network is called a "gateway address." There must be a gateway
address for a network device to communicate with an external network.
If the addresses are not appropriate or wrong, the user will not be able to log on to the network or access a resource.

The Internet connects networks on a global scale, and the network IDs used to connect to it are controlled by an international organization.
Although any IP address may be used for communication on networks not connected to the Internet (private networks), the following are recommended
as private addresses; and, unless they are expected to cause inconvenience, it is a good idea to make use of these addressees:

T-18-3

Address range
A 10. 0. 0. 0 - 10. 255. 255. 255 Class A address (1 address)
B 172. 16. 0. 0 - 172. 31. 255. 255 Class B address (16 addresses)
C 192. 168. 0. 0 - 192. 168. 255. 255 Class C address (255 addresses)

18-14
 Chapter 18

18.4.3 Data Transmission

18.4.3.1 Data Transmission
0008-5784
Data is sent over a network in lumps called "packets" while using a combination of various protocols, for instance, STMT designed for electronic mail
makes use of IP and TCP for its task. The protocols are organized in a layer construction, and packets are also arranged in a specific sequence. Each protocol
is preceded by information called a "header" to provide control instructions.

SMTP data

TCP header

IP header

Ether header

Packet to network

Ether header IP header TCP header SMTP data

F-18-25

A header in Ethernet includes the MAC address of the destination and that of the source. The network interface checks the MAC address of the destination,
and picks the packet if it is addressed to it. At this time, the Ethernet header is removed, leaving only the IP packet.
An IP packet includes the IP address of the source and that of the destination. The IP processing program checks the IP address, and picks the packet if it
is addressed to it. Appropriate processing is performed, and the IP header is removed, leaving only the TCP packet.
A TCP header contains information identifying the protocol of the application in use. Appropriate processing is performed, and the TCP header is removed,
forwarding the remainder to the SMTP processing program.

18-15
 Chapter 18

Packet on network
Ether header

Ethernet

Network interface
Destination MAC address

IP header

IP packet

IP processing program
Destination IP address
TCP header

TCP packet

TCP processing program

Destination application information

SMTP

To SMTP processing program

F-18-26

18.4.4 Data Transmission Between

18.4.4.1 Data Transmission Between Networks
0008-5868
An address may be an IP address or a MAC address. A MAC address, further, may be a destination address or a source address.
A destination MAC address is the address of the device to which a packet is directly delivered, while an IP address is the address indicating the computer
to which the packet will finally be delivered. A source MAC address is the address of the device which directly delivers a packet, while the IP address is
the address of the computer which originally sent out the packet.

TCP header

Destination Source Other Destination Source

MAC MAC informa- IP IP Data
address address tion address address

Ether header IP header

F-18-27

For instance, when a packet is sent from a source computer to a router (the MAC address is that of the router), the router replaces the MAC address (its
own) with that of the device to which it forwards the packet; the IP address is left as it is. If multiple routers exist between the sending computer and the
receiving computer, this operation of rewriting the MAC address is repeated each time the packet is moved forward.

18-16
 Chapter 18

Destination MAC address

Destination IP address

A B A D Source computer A

IP header
Ether header

Removes Ether header

A D
A B A D

Router Router B

B C A D

Adds new header, and sends forwards

Router Router C

Destination computer D

F-18-28

18.4.5 Setting an IP Address

18.4.5.1 Outline
0008-5870
An IP address may be set either manually or automatically. To set it manually, an IP address and a sub net mask are entered from the control panel of a
network device. As necessary, a gateway address is also entered. Automatic assignment of an IP address requires a server; since it will enable central
control of the IP addresses of all devices on the network, it is often used for large-scale networks.
TCP/IP offers the following protocols for automatic assignment of IP addresses:
RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol)
BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol)
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
A server used to assign IP addresses are called a "RARP server," "BOOTP server," or "DHCP server," respectively.

18-17
 Chapter 18

IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway address

Input from control panel

DHCP server RARP server

IP address inquiry

Auto setting Manual setting

IP address setting information

BOOTP server
F-18-29

18.4.5.2 RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol)

0008-5871
In RARP, a device sends a broadcast at time of startup to the network to find out the IP address that corresponds to its own MAC address. In response, the
RARP server sends the appropriate IP address to the device.
This protocol allows transmission of IP addresses only, requiring manual setting of a subnet mask and gateway addresses.
18.4.5.3 BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol)
0008-5872
As in the case of RARP, a device sends a broadcast at start-up to the network to find out the IP address that corresponds to its own MAC address. In
response, the BOOTP server returns the appropriate IP address.
This protocol also allows automatic assignment of a subnet mask and gateway addresses.
18.4.5.4 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
0008-5873
DHCP is capable of making various settings in addition to IP addresses, subnet mask, and gateway addresses. Moreover, it allows the setting of lengths of
validity of IP addressees; its ability for finer control has made it a good choice for central control of IP addresses.
18.4.6 Name Resolution
18.4.6.1 Outline
0008-5874
On a TCP/IP network, the network devices are identified by means of IP addresses. An IP address, however, is merely a string of numerals, and is not easy
to handle for human beings. In the light of this, a system of using alphabet names was developed; the names are known as "host names" in the Internet
terminology and "computer names" in terms of Widows computers.
A Windows network uses NetBIOS as the standard protocol, and a computer name may be referred to as a "NetBIOS name." NetBIOS specifies a party
of communication by means of a computer name, and a system that enables the use of NetBIOS on a TCP/IP network is called "NetBIOS over TCP/IP."
A Windows computer on a TCP/IP network will have two names, i.e., a host name and a computer name, and they may be different from each other.
"Computer Neigborhood" of a Windows device uses computer names to indicate connected network devices.
Communication on a TCP/IP network requires that the address of the destination or the source be indicated by means of an IP address. The conversion of
a name into an IP address to this effect is referred to as "name resolution," and the server used for it is called a "name server."
18.4.6.2 DNS (Domain Name System or Domain Name Service)
0008-5875
A name server used to provide the IP address of a host name is called a "DNS server" or "domain name server." A DNS server holds a database for control
of host name/IP address correspondence. A device making an inquiry is called a "DNS client," and the protocol used for making an inquiry and returning
a response is called "DNS."
A DNS client takes the following steps to communicate with a computer of a specific host name over a network:
1. The user of the DNS client selects the host name of the destination, and executes a Send command.
2. The DNS client asks the DNS server for the IP address of the host name.
3. In response, the DNS server looks for the IP address that matches the host name in question, and communicates the result to the DNS client.
4. The DNS client attaches the IP address to the destination address of the IP header, and sends the packet.

18-18
 Chapter 18

DNS server of tgw.canon.co.jp
Database
Host name IP address
www 172.16.37.204
host1 172.16.37.205
host2 172.16.37.206
host3 172.16.37.207

"Provide IP address
of host1.tgw.canon.co.jp."

"It is 172.16.37.205."

The IP address of the destination

host name is identified,
DNS client and communication is enabled. Host 1

F-18-30

If DHCP is used for assignment of IP addresses for network devices, the IP address of the DNS server may also be set automatically.
18.4.6.3 WINS (Widows Internet Name Service)
0008-5876
A name server used to provide IP addresses of computer names on a Windows network is called a "WINS server," which holds a database to control the
correspondence between computer names and IP addresses.
A WINS client takes the following steps to communicate with a computer of a specific computer name over a network:
1. The user of the WINS client selects the computer name of the destination, and executes a Send command.
2. The WINS client asks the WINS server for the IP address of the computer name.
3. The WINS server looks for the IP address corresponding to the computer name in question, and returns the result to the WINS client.

Database
Computer name
IP address
WINS client WINS server OIPQATS1172.16.10.11
OIPQATS2172.16.10.12
Inquiry OIPQATS3172.16.10.13
"What is the IP ad- OIPQATS4172.16.10.14
dress of the computer
name OIPQATS4 "

"The IP address of
OIPQATS4 is
172.16.10.14."
Response
F-18-31

1. The WINS client prepares a NetBIOS packet giving it the selected computer name as its destination.
2. The WINS client attaches the IP address returned by the WINS server to the IP packet, and sends the packet.

18-19
 Chapter 18

Data
Header

NetBIOS packet

Destination computer name

Header

IP packet NetBIOS packet

Destination IP address
F-18-32

If the WINS server is not available or the WINS server cannot find the computer name in its database and, therefore, cannot return an IP address, the source
computer will send a message of inquiry to the entire network.
If DHCP is used for the assignment of IP addresses to network devices, an IP address may also be automatically set for the WINS server.
18.4.7 Print Service
18.4.7.1 LPD
0008-5877
LPD (Line Printer Daemon) is a standard print service of TCP/IP.
LPD is used to receive print jobs by a printer. The function used by a computer to send a print job is called "LPR" (Line Printer Remote).

Computer Printer
(sending device) (receiving device)

Print job

LPR LPD

F-18-33

A UNIX system comes standard with LPR; a Window NT system comes with LPR, but is not part of standard installation, requiring the selection of the
network on the control panel and addition of TCP/IP as a protocol and TCP/IP printing as a service.
A Windows 95/98 system does not include LPR so that a print job must be sent to LPD by way of a UNIX or Windows NT server equipped with LPR. Or,
an LPR utility program may be installed.

18-20
 Chapter 18

Windows NT UNIX

Printer

Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98 Windows NT

LPR utility pre-installed
F-18-34

18.4.7.2 SMB over TCP/IP

0008-5879
SMB (Server Message Block) is a protocol developed to enable sharing of files or printers among Windows machines.
For a network consisting of Windows machines, NetBIOS, which identifies the devices by means of computer names (NetBIOS names), is the standard
protocol. The computer name indicated on a Windows "Computer Neighborhood" field is a NetBIOS name.
SMB was also developed for NetBIOS; the result of modifying it for use on a TCP/IP network is SMB over TCP/IP. If the print controller supports SMB
over TCP/IP, a print job may directly be sent from a Windows 95/98 machine.
Sending data using SMB over TCP/IP uses the IP address of the destination, requiring conversion of a computer name to an IP address. A WINS server
possesses a correspondence table between computer names and IP addresses, and is ready to respond to inquires for IP addresses.

Copier name
IP address
WINS server OIPQATS1172.16.10.11
OIPQATS2172.16.10.12
Inquiry OIPQATS3172.16.10.13
"What is the IP ad- OIPQATS4172.16.10.14
dress of the computer
name OIPQATS4 "

"The IP address of
OIPQATS4 is
172.16.10.14."

F-18-35

If WINS server is not available, a message of inquiry is sent to the network as a whole, increasing the traffic on the network.

If DHCP or BOOTP is used for the assignment of IP addresses, an IP address may also be assigned to the WINS server automatically, depending on devices
used.

18-21
 Chapter 18

DHCP/BOOTP server WINS server

SMB over TCP/IP

Printer

Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98

F-18-36

18.4.8 Control Service

18.4.8.1 ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol)
0008-5881
ICMP is used to communicate the presence of an error in TCP/IP communication. An ICMP message will also be sent if a Ping command is executed to
check a network connection.
When a Ping command is executed, an ICMP message called "Echo Request" is sent to the selected IP address. In response, the network device possessing
the selected IP address must return an ICMP message called "Echo Reply." The presence of a device possessing the IP address in question may be checked
in reference to whether Echo Reply is issued or not issued.

Printer
IP address 172.16.10.5

ICMP message sent to

172.16.10.5
Echo request

Echo reply

F-18-37

If Echo Reply does not arrive within a specific period of time, the message "Request timed out" will appear.

18-22
 Chapter 18

Microsoft(R) Windows 95
(C)Copyright Microsoft Corp 1981-1996.

C:\WINDOWS>ping 172.16.39.54

Pinging 172.16.39.54 with 32 bytes of data:

Request timed out.

Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.

C:\WINDOWS>_

F-18-38

If a DNS server exists on the network, a host name instead of an IP address may be used for the Ping command.

Microsoft(R) Windows 95
(C)Copyright Microsoft Corp 1981-1996.

C:\WINDOWS>ping host1.tgw.canon.co.jp
Pinging host1.tgw.canon.co.jp [172.16.37.205] with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 172.16.37.205: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

Reply from 172.16.37.205: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
Reply from 172.16.37.205: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
Reply from 172.16.37.205: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

C:\WINDOWS>_

F-18-39

18.4.8.2 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)

0008-5884
SNMP is a protocol developed to remotely control network devices over a network. Devices supporting SNMP are equipped with MIB (Management
Information Base), which is a collection of information needed for the control of the devices.
The control program on a computer may access MIB information using SNMP to find out the state of a device or make various settings. In addition to TCP/
IP, SNMP also provides for ways of communication using AppleTalk or NetWare protocols.
NetSpot, which is a remote control utility used in Canon's network printers, also uses SNMP for communication between computers and network printers.
A NetSpot-compatible printer comes with Canon MIB for control of functions unique to Canon products.

F-18-40

18.4.9 Mail Service

18.4.9.1 SMTP/POP3 (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol/Post Office Protocol 3)
0008-5886
SMTP is a protocol developed for the exchange of electronic mail among computers connected to a network.
To send mail using SMTP, both sending and receiving computers must be connected over a network. However, computers cannot remain connected to the
network at all times merely for the reception of mail and, therefore, it is more common to install a mail server on an office or provider basis. This way, the
sending device need not concern itself with whether the receiving device is connected to the network when sending mail.

18-23
 Chapter 18

The protocol used by a device to collect mail addressed to it is POP, which has been upgraded several times since its introduction and is available as POP3
as of 1999.

SMTP SMTP

SMTP POP3

Client Mail server Mail server Client

POP3

Remote

Client
F-18-41

18.4.10 File Transfer Service

18.4.10.1 FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
0008-5890
FTP is a protocol commonly used when transferring files on the Internet.
In FTP, each user is verified by means of a user name and password when logging onto an FTP server. When an error occurs while a file is being transferred,
processing for re-transmission and the like will be executed automatically.

FTP:
File transfer requested

Client File transfer FTP server

F-18-42

18.4.10.2 TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol)

0008-5891
TFTP is a simplified version of FTP. Compared with FTP, it has lower data transfer ability, but requires a simpler procedure for file transfer. It is often
used for sending a start-up file for a computer not equipped with a hard disk or to send settings information to some network devices.
18.4.11 Web Service
18.4.11.1 HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol)
0008-5892
HTTP is a protocol developed to send data prepared in HTML (Hyper Text Markup Language) used to view home pages on the WWW (World Wide Web).
When a connection is made to a Web server using such viewing software as Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer (commonly known as a "browser"),
the contents of a home page will be sent in HTTP to appear on the computer screen.
Recently, a browser is also used to access a printer controller when using utility functions, eliminating the need to install specific utilities to computers;
utilities taking advantage of this function include WebTools and WebNetSpot.

18-24
 Chapter 18

F-18-43

18-25
 Chapter 18

18.5 AppleTalk
18.5.1 AppleTalk
0008-5896
It is a generic term used to refer to network protocols developed by Apple exclusively for Macintosh machines.
It enables exchanges of data between Macintosh machines and sharing of devices (e.g., printers).
AppleTalk allows the use of a network without extra settings by the user. Settings are made automatically, and information is exchanged as necessary.
Further, a network may be expanded by means of routers. (Some extra settings must be made if multiple networks are connected using routers.)
As in the case of TCP/IP, AppleTalk consists of various protocols.
AppleTalk supports three types of networks: LocalTalk, which uses a LocalTalk cable, Ether Talk, which is used in an Ethernet environment, and
TokenTalk, which is used in a TokenRing environment.
AppleTalk allows grouping of devices connected to a network using routers and gateways, and each group may be given a specific name known as an
AppleTalk zone.
The print service in AppleTalk is called PAP (Printer Access Protocol).

18-26
 Chapter 18

18.6 IPX/SPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange/Internetwork Packet Exchange)

18.6.1 Outline
18.6.1.1 Outline
0008-5898
IPX/SPX is a protocol developed by Novell for NetWare, which is a network operating system. Like TCP/IP, it consists of diverse protocols introduced to
realize various functions, and IPX and SPX (core protocols) are used genetically to refer to all these protocols. The term "IPX/SPX-compatible" does not
mean the presence of all protocols and, therefore, not all functions may be used.
For instance, a Windows 95/98 may be used as a client of a NetWare server running on IPX/SPX by using an IPX/SPX-compatible protocol to send a print
job to a printer server; however, it cannot act as a print server.
18.6.2 Processing a Print Job
18.6.2.1 Processing a Print Job
0008-5899
When IPX/SPX is used to process a print job, the following takes place:
1. A client sends a print job to a print queue set up on a file server.
2. The print server checks the file server at specific intervals to look for print jobs on the print queues set up for it (polling).
3. When it finds a job addressed to it, it asks the file server to send it.
4. When the print job arrives, the print server starts to print it on a printer.

Network built on bindery

NetWare NetWare NetWare file sever
client client (print server)

NetWare NetWare NetWare file sever

client client (print server)

Network built on NDS

F-18-44

18-27
 Chapter 18

18.7 Reference
18.7.1 OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) Reference Model
18.7.1.1 OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) Reference Model
0008-5900
For computers to communicate with each other, there must be a set of rules called a "protocol." In the past, individual computer manufacturers developed
their own protocols for this purpose, but they soon found them to be inefficient, failing to provide for wider use.
In the light of this, the ISO (International Standard Organization) came up with a set of standards called an OSI reference model by arranging and defining
networks in layers. The OSI reference model is not a communication protocol on its own right, but is rather a set of guidelines to follow for the development
of communication protocols that may be used in common by different devices. A number of highly efficient communication protocols have so far been
developed based on the OSI reference model. The following are the layers and their functions, while the table that follows shows corresponding protocols:
- Physical Layer
It converts data into electric signals, and actually transmits data.
- Data Link Layer
It ensures reliable transmission of data between nodes; it also ensures correct transmission of data between relays.
- Network Layer
It transfers data between computers belonging to multiple networks or relays data.
- Transport Layer
It controls communication to increase the level of quality of the information exchanged; it also communicates the presence of any missing data segment.
- Session layer
It controls communication relating to control of communication mode or transfer of information as on the flow of information between application
processes.
- Presentation Layer
It controls the method used to express character codes and image data, and verifies the types of data exchanged between processes.
- Application Layer
It controls protocols used between services executed by the user, e.g., file transfer or message exchanges.

Application layer

Presentation layer SMTP, FTP, TELNET

SNMP, DNS
Session layer

Transport layer TCP/IP NetBEUI

Network layer IPX/SPX AppleTalk

Data link layer PPP

Ethernet
Physical specifica- Token-Ring
Physical layer tions of communica-
tion line

F-18-45

18-28
Chapter 19 GLOSSARY
 Contents

Contents

19.1 Row A ........................................................................................................................................................................19-1

19.1.1 A............................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.2 Row B ........................................................................................................................................................................19-2
19.2.1 B ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-2
19.3 Row C ........................................................................................................................................................................19-3
19.3.1 C ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-3
19.4 Row D ........................................................................................................................................................................19-5
19.4.1 D............................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-5
19.5 Row E.........................................................................................................................................................................19-6
19.5.1 E ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-6
19.6 Row F .........................................................................................................................................................................19-7
19.6.1 F ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-7
19.7 Row G ........................................................................................................................................................................19-8
19.7.1 G............................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-8
19.8 Row H ........................................................................................................................................................................19-9
19.8.1 H............................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-9
19.9 Row I........................................................................................................................................................................19-10
19.9.1 I .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-10
19.10 Row J......................................................................................................................................................................19-11
19.10.1 J ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 19-11
19.11 Row L.....................................................................................................................................................................19-12
19.11.1 L ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-12
19.12 Row M....................................................................................................................................................................19-13
19.12.1 M .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-13
19.13 Row N ....................................................................................................................................................................19-14
19.13.1 N........................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-14
19.14 Row O ....................................................................................................................................................................19-15
19.14.1 O........................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-15
19.15 Row P .....................................................................................................................................................................19-16
19.15.1 P ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-16
19.16 Row R ....................................................................................................................................................................19-17
19.16.1 R ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-17
19.17 Row S .....................................................................................................................................................................19-18
19.17.1 S ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-18
19.18 Row T.....................................................................................................................................................................19-19
19.18.1 T ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-19
19.19 Row U ....................................................................................................................................................................19-20
19.19.1 U........................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-20
19.20 Row V ....................................................................................................................................................................19-21
19.20.1 V........................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-21
19.21 Row W ...................................................................................................................................................................19-22
19.21.1 W.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-22
19.22 Row X ....................................................................................................................................................................19-23
19.22.1 X........................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-23
19.23 Row Y ....................................................................................................................................................................19-24
19.23.1 Y........................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-24
19.24 Row Z.....................................................................................................................................................................19-25
19.24.1 Z ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-25
 Chapter 19

19.1 Row A
19.1.1 A
0008-3895
A-Si (Amorphous Silicon)
A type of silicon of which some photosensitive drums are made.

AB-Size
A generic term used to refer to A-sized (A0 through A6) or B-sized (B0 through B6) transfer media; as used for copiers, they are of a default size. (The
AB-sized transfer media are also known as metric-sized transfer media.)

ABC (Auto Background Control)

A function in which an original is read assuming its background is pure white as when preventing fogging (pre-scanning is omitted).

ACC (Accessory)
A contraction for accessory, which is an option designed for use in combination with a copier, as used in signal names, messages, and so forth.

ACS (Auto Color Selection)

A function in which an original is automatically identified as being a color original or a black-and-white original.

ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)

A type of option capable of automatically feeding originals (documents) to its host copier.

AE (Automatic Exposure)
A function in which an original is exposed in such a way that optimum copy density may be obtained.

AF (Auto Focus)
A function in which focusing is executed automatically. The term is usually used in reference to a film scanner/projector.

AMS (Auto Magnification Select)

A function in which the copier automatically selects a reproduction ratio in relation to the size of the original it has identified so that the image will fit the
selected paper.

APS (Auto Paper Selection)

A function in which the copier automatically selects paper of the appropriate size in relation to the size of the original and the selected reproduction ratio.

ATR (Auto Toner Replenishment)

A function in which toner is automatically supplied as in a 2-component developing mechanism.

Auto Clear
A function by which the copier automatically returns to standard copying mode a specific period of time after the end of a copying run.

Auto Overlay
A mode in which overlay copies are automatically made as instructed on the control panel.

Auto Paper Selection

A function in which the copier automatically selects the transfer medium that is best suited to the size of an original it has identified. (The copier must be
capable of identifying the size of originals.)

Auto Power-Off
A function by which the copier automatically turns off its power a specific period of time after the end of a copying run.

Auto Ratio Selection

A function in which the copier automatically selects a reproduction ratio to suit the size of the desired transfer medium. (The copier must be capable of
automatically identifying the size of originals or must allow manual input of sizes.)

Auto Shut-Off
A function by which the copier automatically returns to power-saving mode a specific period of time after the end of a copying run.

Auto Two-Sided
A mode in which two-sided copies are automatically made as instructed on the control panel.

19-1
 Chapter 19

19.2 Row B
19.2.1 B
0008-3896
BD (Beam Detect)
A function in which part of a laser beam is sampled near a write start position so as to ensure correct imaging position in main scanning direction in digital
copiers.

Bind
A mode in which the image of an original is shifted to the right (left) of copies to create a margin for binding.

BJ (Bubble Jet)
A type of Canon's own ink jet imaging technology. Droplets of ink are directly ejected against recording paper to form images.

BJ Cartridge
A cartridge in which a BJ head and an ink case are housed as a single entity.

BJ Head
A mechanism consisting of multiple nozzles used to eject droplets of ink.

BJ Printer
A printer that operates on BJ technology.

Blanking
A type of editing in which only a specific area of an original is copied.

Blanking Exposure
A function in which light is shone against specific areas of the photosensitive drum, thereby creating non-image areas on the copies.

BPF (Back Print Film)

A type of special transfer medium available for color copiers-images are printed on the back.

19-2
 Chapter 19

19.3 Row C
19.3.1 C
0008-3897
CaPSL (Canon Printing System Language)
A set of control commands for processing Western languages used by Canon LBPs.

Carrier
The iron powder charged to a specific electrical potential in a 2-component developer.

Cassette Pedestal
A type of accessory serving as a source of paper and the stand on which a copier is placed (equipped with a cassette(s) and pick-up mechanisms).

CCD (Charge-Coupled Device)

A device designed to produce charges in relation to the amount of light it receives.

CdS (Cadmium Sulfide)

Ametallic element used in a photosensitive drum.

Center Shift
A mode in which the image of an original is shifted so that it is reproduced at the center of the copy.

C.F.F. (Computer Form Feeder)

A type of accessory capable of feeding computer form paper.

Cleaning
The process in which toner remaining on the photosensitive drum is removed after transfer.

CLN (Cleaning)
A contraction for cleaning, as used in signal names, messages, and so forth.

Color Separation
A process in which light is separated into its primary colors: blue, red, and green.

Control Card
A type of option used to control the volume of copying work by group.

Control Panel
The unit of a copier and some options (usually located at their front or top) used to enter settings or to make selections when specifying how copies should
look.

Reset
Energy Saver

1 2 3
Stop Interrupt

4 5 6
Start
Additional Function

7 8 9
Clear Guide

C 0 ID ?

< Example of NP6050 >

F-19-1

Copyboard Type
A term used to distinguish between copiers whose copyboard are designed to move or fixed in position.

Copy Density
A term used to refer to the density of a copy, i.e., how light/dark it is.

Copying Speed
The speed at which a copier generates copies, usually expressed in terms of the number of copies it generates per minute under a set of conditions (e.g.,
A4, Direct, default feeding direction).
In general, the speed is measured by setting the copy count to "11." The time between when the Start key is pressed and when the eleventh copy is delivered
is measured, and the time required to produce ten copies is computed while excluding the first copy time; thereafter, the number of copies made over a
one-minute period is computed to obtain the speed of a given copier.

Copy Paper
A transfer medium to which images are copied.

cpm (copies per minute)

A measure of copying speed, indicating the number of copies a copier is capable of generating per minute.

Corona Charging
A method of charging the photosensitive drum taking advantage of insulating destruction of air.

CRG (Cartridge)

19-3
 Chapter 19

An abbreviation for a cartridge usually used to refer to a container that houses a photosensitive drum, developer, and drum cleaner, as used in signal names,
messages, and so forth.

19-4
 Chapter 19

19.4 Row D
19.4.1 D
0008-3899
Density Adjustment
A function in which the density of an original is measured to determine the best density for copies (may be manual or automatic).

DEV (Development, Developer)

A contraction for development (process) or developer (chemical agent), as used in signal names, messages, and so forth.

Development Method
A term used to indicate the method of development (wet or dry); recently, almost all copiers use dry development.

dpi (dots per inch)

A measure of image density, i.e., the number of dots per inch. (Under SI standards, notation may not be in inches so that the unit is most often found in its
abbreviated form.)

DTP (Desk Top Publishing)

A method of preparing documentation on a computer. Such documentation is usually of professional quality in terms of text (available typefaces) and
graphics.

19-5
 Chapter 19

19.5 Row E
19.5.1 E
0008-3900
EC (Electro Conductive)
A term used to refer to an electrically conductive property, as of EC-coated copyboard glass. (Such a coating is provided to prevent ADF-fed originals
from jamming, triggered by charges otherwise occurring on the copyboard glass because of friction.)

ED (Error Diffusion)
A type of digital image processing in which errors are diffused over adjacent cells. (This type of processing is best suited for reproduction of halftones.)

Editor
A type of option used to select an area of an original by specifying coordinates with a stylus (as for such image editing modes as blanking and framing).

Enlarged Image Composition

A function by which the image of an original processed by the reduced image composition function is processed back to its original size.

Enlarge/Reduce
A function by which a default-size original is enlarged/reduced to a default-size transfer medium (other than Direct): normally, from A4 to A3 (141%),
LTR to 11" x 17" (129%); from A3 to A4 (70%), from 11" x 17" to LTR (64%).

Error Diffusion (ED)

A mode of digital image processing in which an error is corrected by diffusion to adjacent cells (best suited to reproduction of halftones).

19-6
 Chapter 19

19.6 Row F
19.6.1 F
0008-3903
Face-Down
A method of delivering copies with images facing down.

Face-Up
A method of delivering copies with images facing up.

Film Scanner
A type of option for a color copier designed to read 35-mm film in place of an original.

Finisher
A type of option equipped with such functions as stapling delivered copies and automatically folding (in halves or in Z) large-size sheets (A3/11" x 17").

First Copy Time

The time required by a copier to generate the first copy under normal operating conditions (e.g., A4, Direct, standard feeding direction).

FIX (Fix, Fixing)

A term used to refer to "fixing" or "fixing assembly," as used in signal names, messages, and so forth.

Fixed-Focus Lens
A lens whose point of focus is fixed (often, in the form of a lens array).

Fixed-Focus Lens Array

A group of fixed-focus lenses extending over the length of an original.

Fixing Method
A term used to refer to how images are ultimately fused to a transfer medium; it may be heat roller, flash, oven, or pressure type. (None of these methods
applies to a copier using wet reproduction.)

Fogging
Undesirable reproduction of the background of an original, usually appearing as light shading.

Frame Erasing
A function in which widths running four sides of an original are eliminated so that the copies will be free of undesired frame-like images.

Framing
A function in which an original is copied while blanking out portions of it.

Front Loading
A type of design which allows supplying transfer media at the front of the copier.

19-7
 Chapter 19

19.7 Row G
19.7.1 G
0008-6239
Gloss
A term used to refer to the gloss of a color copy, i.e., how shiny it is.

Gradation
The level at which a copier produces an image in terms of the number of shades between "blank" (lowest density) and "solid" (highest density).

Group
A function in which multiple copies of a single page are delivered to the same bin when multiple sets of copies are made of multiple originals.

Original Group copying

ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY

••
••
• •• ••••
••••
••••••• •••
•••
•••
•••••••
••••
••••
••••
F-19-2

19-8
 Chapter 19

19.8 Row H
19.8.1 H
0008-3909
Halogen Lamp
A lamp consisting of a tube in which halogen gas is sealed inside. The lamp tends to provide high intensity light and heat, and is widely used as a scanning
lamp and a fixing heater.

HQ (High Quality)
In the case of "HQ toner," the term indicates that the toner consists of particles with a diameter smaller than that of the particles found in regular toner.

19-9
 Chapter 19

19.9 Row I
19.9.1 I
0008-3916
IC (Integrated Circuit)
A type of circuit in which such electrical elements as resistors, capacitors, and transistors are built (integrated) on a thin, semi-conductor membrane.

ID
A type of mode in which the user must enter a specific number before making copies-the mode is used to limit access to the copier, thereby controlling the
volume of copying work.

Image Repeat
A mode in which images within a selected area are produced repeatedly on a copy.

Inch
A measure of length, equivalent of 25.4 mm.

Inch-Size
A generic term used to refer to inch-sized (e.g., LTR, LGL, 11" x 17") transfer media; as used for copiers, they are of a default size (also known as English-
sized media).

Ink Jet Technology

A method of recording images in which droplets of ink are directly ejected against a recording medium to reproduce images.

Integrated Machine
A machine, in addition to copying mechanisms, equipped with fax, printer, or other mechanisms.

Interface
A "bridge" connecting two elements-by extension in the world of system/network configurations, any means of connection or signal input/output used
between different devices is commonly known as an interface, e.g., between a computer and a digital copier.

Interrupt
A mode in which an ongoing copying run is interrupted to make copies of a different original.

IPU (Intelligent Processing Unit)

The name of a controller used for color digital copiers.

19-10
 Chapter 19

19.10 Row J
19.10.1 J
0008-3917
Jam
A term used to refer to a transfer medium trapped inside a copier during copying operation.

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group; pronounced jay-peg)

An acronym for a study committee for standards. In practice, it is used to refer to a method of compressing/de-compressing still color image data.

19-11
 Chapter 19

19.11 Row L
19.11.1 L
0008-3918
Laser (light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation)
A collection of rays of light of a single wave length. It tends to travel in a straight line and is used as the source of light for a digital copier's image formation
system.

Latch
A joint assembly used to enable simple snap-on/off attachment/detachment of a stapler sorter to its host copier.

LBP (Laser Beam Printer)

A generic term used to refer to a type of printing device. Also known as an electrophotographic printer, signals are turned into images by means of a laser
beam and developed using processes found in electrophotographic copiers.

Leakage
A term used to refer to such symptoms as leakage of charges.

LIPS (LBP Image Processing System)

A term used to refer to a set of control commands for the Japanese language adopted by Canon LBPs.

Louver
A term used to refer to the air vent of a copier.

19-12
 Chapter 19

19.12 Row M
19.12.1 M
0008-3919
Machine Footprint
The depth and width of a machine as measured when fully fitted with cassettes, manual feed tray, copy tray, and the like. (If the copier is of a type with a
moving copyboard, when the copyboard has moved to its extreme.)

Main Scanning Direction

A term used to refer to the direction in which the laser beam travels on the surface of the photosensitive drum.

Manual Feeding (multi-tray pick-up)

A mode of feeding single or multiple transfer media from a special pick-up tray as opposed to cassette pick-up or deck pick-up.

Marking
A type of editing in which an area is marked by a stylus for localized processing.

Maximum Paper Storage Capacity

A term used to refer to the maximum amount of transfer media that may be stored inside a copier.

MD (Mean Density) Correction

A type of digital image processing in which the mean density of cells is stored in memory for use as a point of reference. (This type of processing is best
suited for reproduction of halftones.)

MDC (Multi Device Controller)

A device used to control black-and-white digital copiers.

Mean Density Method

A type of processing digital images. (This type of processing is best suited for reproduction of halftones.)

Message Display
A unit found as part of a control panel for display of messages indicating the state of the copier or groups of available operation keys.

Two-sided One Touch Color

Mode Color Balance
Reset
Standby
Zoom Color
Frame Erase
Functions Creation
Stop 1 2 3
Two-page Image
Separation Shift Creation
4 5 6
Start
Area Interrupt
Marker Editing Designation Composition
7 8 9
Additional Transparency Clear Recall
Functions Cover Mode Interleaving
C 0 ID

123

Message display (CLC700/800)

F-19-3

Moire
Irregular patterns of images often occurring when a photo or printed matter is copied by a digital copier.

MPEG (Motion Picture Experts Group; pronounced em-peg)

A contraction for a study committee for standards. In practice, it is used to refer to a method of compressing/de-compressing animated color image data.

Multi-Tray Pick-Up (manual feeding)

A mode of feeding single or multiple transfer media using a special pick-up tray as opposed to cassette pick-up/deck pick-up.

19-13
 Chapter 19

19.13 Row N
19.13.1 N
0008-3920
NA-3
A standard test chart specified by Canon for use when checking image quality.

Nip
A term used to refer to an effective gap; for example, the fixing effective gap occurring between upper and lower rollers is known as "fixing nip."

Non-Image Width
The width formed along the top/bottom and left/right edges of a copy without images.

19-14
 Chapter 19

19.14 Row O
19.14.1 O
0008-3921
OHP
An abbreviation for an overhead projector.

OHP Film
A sheet of film used for overhead projection (usually known as transparency).

One-Touch Adjustment
A mode in which a simple press on a key selects a group of settings for specific results on copies.

OPC (Organic Photoconductor)

Organic photoconductive material of which some photosensitive drums are made.

Original
A page of a document placed on the copier's copyboard. (Usually, it is in the form of a sheet, book, or 3-D object, and each model of copier tends to impose
its own standards for maximum size/weight and others.)

Original Size Detection

A function by which the size of an original placed on the copyboard is identified.

Overlay Copying
A mode of making copies in which multiple images (data) are laid over a single copy.

Ozone
A chemical gas occurring during corona discharge (O3).

Ozone Filter
A type of filter used inside a copier to trap ozone.

19-15
 Chapter 19

19.15 Row P
19.15.1 P
0008-3922
Page Separation
A mode in which a page spread (left and right pages) of a magazine or a book is copied on separate transfer media.

Paper Deck Pedestal

A type of option made up of a pedestal equipped with a paper deck.

PASCAL (Printer Adjustment System by Calibration for Appropriate Density Level)

A potential control function in which images are automatically corrected to ensure an appropriate density level (developed by Canon and used in Canon's
electrostato-graphic color copiers).

PD (Paper Deck)
A type of option used for storing paper equipped with a pick-up mechanism.

PDL (Page Description Language)

A type of computer language used to write (describe) how text or graphics should look on each page.

PDP (Paper Deck Pedestal)

A type of accessory used for storing paper equipped with a pick-up mechanism while serving as a stand on which a copier is placed.

Pedestal
A type of accessory serving as the stand on which a copier is placed.

PFU (Paper Feeding Unit)

A type of option capable of feeding paper to its host copier.

Photoconductor
A type of material which is characterized by high electrical resistance when the environment is dark, thereby showing properties associated with an
insulator, and by low electrical resistance when the environment is light, thereby showing properties associated with a conductor.

Photo-Electric Conversion
A function in which the intensity (amount) of light is converted into a level of an electric signal.

Photosensitive Drum
A photo-semiconductor medium used for copiers (usually made of OPC, A-Si, CdS, or Se).

Pick-Up Method
A term used to indicate how transfer media are picked up for feeding: it may be cassette, manual, multi-tray, or deck pick-up.

Plate
A function of a color copier in which a color original is processed to obtain Y, M, C, and Bk plates and each is copied in black only.

Polygon Mirror
A polygonal (many-faceted) mirror used to lead a laser beam from a source in the axial direction of the photosensitive drum.

Potential Control
A function in which the contrast on the surface of the photosensitive drum is measured by a potential sensor located between points of image exposure and
development to provide data used to determine the degree of developing bias/transfer corona charging.

Power Consumption
A term used to refer to the size of energy: the product of multiplying current and voltage expressed in watts (W) or kilowatts (kW).

PPC (Plain Paper Copier)

A type of copier capable of reproducing images on plain (regular) paper.

ppm (prints per minute)

A measure of printing speed, indicating the number of printouts a printer is capable of generating per minute.

Pre-Exposure
A process in which electric charges remaining on the photosensitive drum are removed by means of a lamp or the like between the cleaning and primary
charging systems.

Pre-Heat
A function in which power to the fixing heater may be suspended or the control panel display is turned off to save power while the copier remains idle.

Pre-Scanning
A function in which the scanner is moved forward once before starting to read an original so as to identify the size and density of the original.

Primary Charging
A method of charging in which the surface of a photosensitive drum is uniformly charged to a positive or negative potential.

19-16
 Chapter 19

19.16 Row R
19.16.1 R
0008-3924
RAM (Random Access Memory)
A type of semi-conductor memory-data may be both written to and read from it.

RDF (Recirculating Document Feeder)

A type of option capable of feeding originals.

Reduced Image Composition

A mode in which multiple originals are automatically reduced for copying on a single transfer medium.

Reproduction Method
A term used to refer to the type of method used to produce copies-either a direct or indirect electrostatic method. (Recently, almost all copiers use an indirect
electrostatic method.)

Reproduction Ratio
A ratio at which images are reproduced-it is non-Direct and is either for enlargement or reduction. Mot copiers offer both default ratios and zoom.

Reproduction Size
The size (sometimes type, weight) of copies a specific copier is capable of reproducing.

Resetting
A term used to refer to the act of returning the current copying mode to standard mode.

Resolution
The level at which the digital reading or printing unit of a copier processes image density.

Roller Charging
A method of charging the photosensitive drum in which the drum is charged by a roller kept in contact with it.

ROM (Read Only Memory)

A type of semi-conductor memory-data may be read from it but cannot be written to it.

19-17
 Chapter 19

19.17 Row S
19.17.1 S
0008-3925
SALT (Stabilizing Application for Linearity Tone)
A type of Canon's own potential control function used to correct images in Canon's electrostatographic color copiers.

Scanner
A generic term used to refer to units capable of reading text and graphics.

Se (selenium)
A type of nonmetallic element used in some photosensitive drums.

Service Mode
A mode used to select/adjust various functions or to take advantage of status display functions as when servicing the machine.

Silicone Oil
A generic term used to refer to lubricating oil whose main ingredient is silicone (mostly used for fixing in color copiers).

Skip
A function in which every other original is read, thereby increasing productivity when making double-sided copies.

Sort
A function in which different sets of copies are delivered to different bins when making multiple sets of multiple originals.

Original Sort copying

ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY
•••
•••
•••• •
• •• ••
•••
••••••• •••• •
••
•••
•••• •
••
•••
••••
F-19-4

Standby
A state of a copier in which it is ready for making copies.

Staple
A function of a delivery unit (accessory) in which several copies are held together by means of staples.

Staple Sort
A function of a delivery unit (accessory) in which copies are sorted and stapled (held together by means of staples).

Original Staple sort copying

Stapling
position ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY
•••
•••
•••• •
• •• ••
•••
••••••• •••• •
••
•••
•••• •
••
•••
••••
F-19-5

Stock
A unit of measure indicating the weight (g/m2 ) of a transfer medium.

Stream Reading
A function in which the copier's scanner is kept still while originals are moved over it continuously with the help of a feeder (accessory).

STS (Stapler Sorter)

A type of accessory capable of both sorting and stapling copies.

Sub Scanning Direction

The direction in which the photosensitive drum rotates.

19-18
 Chapter 19

19.18 Row T
19.18.1 T
0008-3927
2-on-1
A type of mode in which two originals are copied on one transfer medium by reducing the images.

2-on-1 2-Sided
A type of mode in which four originals are copied on both sides of one transfer medium by reducing the images.

Texture Processing
A process in which an image is combined with a specific pattern as part of editing copy images.

Two-Sided Copying
A mode of making copies in which images are copied on both sides of a transfer medium.

Type
A term used to refer to the type of a specific copier: specifically, desk-top, console, table-top, floor, or portable.

19-19
 Chapter 19

19.19 Row U
19.19.1 U
0008-6240
User Mode
A set of modes that may be used to select/adjust various functions to suit the needs of individual users.

19-20
 Chapter 19

19.20 Row V
19.20.1 V
0008-6241
Visible Light
Light whose wave lengths are between 400 and 700 nm and, therefore, are visible to the eye.

19-21
 Chapter 19

19.21 Row W
19.21.1 W
0008-6242
Warm-Up Time
A period of time between when the main switch is turned on and when the copier becomes ready for copying. (In specifications, the maximum period
covering machine-to-machine variations is shown together with the ambient temperature.)

19-22
 Chapter 19

19.22 Row X
19.22.1 X
0008-3931
X Direction
Refers to sub scanning direction.

F-19-6

19-23
 Chapter 19

19.23 Row Y
19.23.1 Y
0008-3933
Y Direction
Refers to main scanning direction.

F-19-7

19-24
 Chapter 19

19.24 Row Z
19.24.1 Z
0008-6243
Zoom
A function in which the reproduction ratio may be varied between 50% and 200% (with some models, between 25% and 400%) for enlargement and
reduction.

Zoom Lens
A type of lens capable of changing its point of focus.

19-25
Apr 21 2005